Folio Archives

Sri Vedanta-sutra

Preface

All Glories to Guru and Gauräìga. Oà Namo Bhagavate Väsudeväya. Let me

offer my respectful obeisances unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
Väsudeva.
First of all let me offer my respectful obeisances to my spiritual master Oà
Viñëupäda Çrémad Bhaktisiddhänta Sarasvaté Gosvämé Prabhupäda, then my
respectful obeisances to the Supreme Personality of Godhead Lord Caitanya
Mahäprabhu, who is associated with Çré Advaita Prabhu, Nityänanda Prabhu,
Gadädhara Prabhu, Çréväsa Prabhu, as well as whose eternal assistants are the six
gosvämés, headed by Çréla Rüpa Gosvämé, Sanätana Gosvämé Raghunätha Bhaööa
Gosvämé, Gopäla Bhaööa Gosvämé, Çré Jéva Gosvämé, Ragaunätha däsa Gosvämé,
as well as whose private secretary is Çré Svarüpa Dämodara däsa and His eternal
attendant Govinda.
Then let us talk about the Brahma-sütra or Vedänta-sütra. There are many
comments on the Vedanta-sütra. In India especially the system is that anyone who
is the head of a religious institution must be well conversed with the Vedänta-
sütras, and is expected to write comments on the Vedänta-sütra, without which one
is not accepted as an äcärya. Äcärya means one who knows the purpose of Vedic
knowledge. He personally practices them as well as teaches to his disciples the
system of Vedic knowledge.
There are many äcäryas, especially of the vaiñëava-sampradäya, like the four
sampradäyas: rämänuja-sampradäya, madhväcärya-sampradäya, viñëusvämi-
sampradäya, and nimbärka-sampradäya. Our sampradäya is called gauòéya-
sampradäya, or the Vaiñëavas who are in the disciplic succession of Lord Caitanya
Mahäprabhu. The gauòéya-sampradäya actually belongs to the madhva-
sampradäya and the madhva-sampradäya belongs to the brahma-sampradäya.
Besides these four vaiñëava-äcärya-sampradäyas, there are also non-vaiñëava-
sampradäyas, especially the impersonalist school headed by Çaìkaräcärya.
Çaìkaräcärya has written a commentary on the Vedanta-sütras, known as Çäréraka-
bhäañya. generally this Çäréraka-bhäñya made by Çaìkaräcärya is very popular on
account of the present Indians being influenced by materialistic activities. But still
the other different bhäñyas, or commentaries, made by the Vaiñëava äcäryas are
also available in the gauòéya-sampradäya, specifically headed by Rüpa Gosvämé.
In the beginning there was no commentary on the Vedänta-sütra because
according to Çrémad-Bhägavatam it is said that the real commentary on the
Vedänta-sütra is Çrémad-Bhägavatam itself, presented by the author, Çré Vyäsadeva
Himself. In our english commentary on the Çrémad-Bhägavatam First Canto, First

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Chapter, we have explained this fact that Çrémad-Bhägavatam is the right type of
commentary on the Vedänta-sütra. As such the gauòéya-vaiñëava-sampradäya did
not take much care to present their commentary on the Vedänta-sütra.
About 200 years ago there was a conclusion in Golpa district in Jaipur, wherein
the äcäryas or followers of other sampradäyas challenged the gauòéya-vaiñëava-
sampradäya that it has no commentary on the Vedänta-sütra. At that time Çré
Viçvanätha Cakravarté Öhäkura was living in Våndävana, but he was too old, and
when the Gauòéya Vaiñëavas approached him to present a commentary on the
Vedänta-sütra, he asked his disciple, Çré Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa to write a
commentary on the Vedänta-sütra. As Vaiñëavas are generally very humble and
meek, Çré Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa thought himself unfit to write an authorized
commentary on the Vedänta-sütra, so he approached Lord Govinda in the temple
of Jaipur. He placed himself down before Lord Govinda to take his permission and
authority to begin writing a commentary on the Vedänta-sütra, and he was assured
by Govinda that he could do so. With this inspiration he wrote the Vedänta-sütra
commentary known as Govinda-bhäñya. This Govinda-bhäñya is very authorized
and accepted by all the vaiñëava-sampradäyas, This commentary, which may be
known as Bhaktivedanta-bhäñya, follows the footprints of Govinda-bhäñya.
The necessity of presenting the Bhaktivedanta-bhäñya commentary on Vedänta-
sütra should also be explained herein. My spiritual master, Oà Viñëupäda
Paramhaàsa Çré Çrémad Bhaktisiddhänta Sarasvaté Gosvämé Mahäräja, ordered
me to present the Gauòiya Vaiñëava philosophy in English as far as possible, and
in this attempt for the english-knowing persons, since 1965 I have been in the
western countries with my three books of the First Canto of Çrémad-Bhägavatam.
Then I presented my commentary on the Çrémad-Bhagavad-gétä known as The
Bhagavad-gétä As It Is, and similarly I have presented The Teachings of Lord
Caitanya. Also, requested by many of my western disciples, especially my worthy
disciples Çrémän Hansadutta Das Adhikari and Janardana Das Adhikari, who are
in charge of the Montreal Center, and I am trying to present an English
commentary on the Vedänta-sütra as follows.
At the present moment all over the world there are major portions of godless
persons. Generally people are very attached to the void philosphy presented by
Lord Buddha or the impersonal philosophy presented by Çaìkaräcärya. In other
words, to be more plain and simple, people are becoming very atheistic. To say
that there is no God, as the atheists declare, is rather bold and simple, but to say
that there is a supreme cause that is void, or there is God but He has no form, is
more dangerous than the simple declaration that there is no God.
Our society, known as the international Society for Krishna Consciousness, has
now started the movement for Kåñëa Consciousness , and it is very gratifiying that
the younger generation of the western part of the world, in America, Canada, and
Europe, are taking interest in this great movement. We already have branches in
almost every important city of the United States and Canada, and we have started
centers also in London and Hamburg. We hope that our Kåñëa Consciousness
movement will gradually increase, as predicted by Lord Caitanya, who said that
His missionary activities, the same as the Kåñëa Consciousness movement, will be

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

preached all over the world, in every village in every country. Taking into
consideration the present activities of this movement, it is hoped that the
prediction of Lord Caitanya will soon be fulfilled and the people of the world will
be very happy, having Kåñëa Consciousness.
As referred to above, generally the commentary known as Çäréraka-bhäñya is
taken by the people as the purport of Vedänta, or in other words Vedänta means
according to the opinion of the followers of Çaìkaräcärya's purport as explained
by him in Çäréraka-bhäñya. Besides the Çäréraka-bhäñya of Çaìkaräcärya there are
many other atheistic schools preaching Vedänta on the basis of godlessness.
One of the prominent followers of Çaìkaräcärya, namely Sadänanda Yogéndra,
has compiled his book known as Vedänta-sära, in which he writes to prove that the
to understand both the upaniñads and the Vedänta-sütra, Çaìkaräcärya's Çäréraka-
bhäñya is the only means. This is the claim of monopoly by the mäyäväda school.
Actually Vedänta-sütra has many commentaries and all those commentaries are
not on the basic principal of monism or impersonalism.
All the prominent äcäryas of the different vaiñëava-sampradäyas have complied
commentaries on Vedänta-sütra, but they do not follow the principles of the
Çaìkarite school. On the other hand the impersonalist monists stress more on non-
duality. Generally they declare themselves God and there is no existance of God
separately.
The monistic school does not recognize the Vedänta commentaries presented by
the Vaiñëava äcäryas, known as the çuddhädvaita, viçiñtädvaita and dvaitädvaita, as
well as the inconceivably-one-and-different philosophy of Lord Caitanya, known
as acintyäbhedäbheda-tattva. According to them the monistic commentary on
Vedänta-sütra is final, Lord Kåñëa has a material body, and the followers of the
philosophy of Kåñëa Consciousness are not transcendentalists.
Vedänta means the last word in the matter of pursuing knowledge. Everyone is
pursuing some sort of knowledge. There are universities, institutions, and many
educational establisments pursuing knowledge, but Vedänta means the last word in
the pursuit of knowledge. This last word in the pursuit of knowledge is explained
in the Bhagavad-gétä by Lord Kåñëa. The purpose of Vedic knowledge is to
understand Kåñëa. The exact words in the 15th Chapter of Bhagavad-gétä are
sarvasya cähaà hådi sanniviñtaù. "the Lord is situated in everyone's heart. He
gives intelligence and delusion. He is the original source of knowledge. He is the
goal of knowledge. He is the compiler of Vedänta-sütra, and He knows what is
Vedänta.."
These words are a very significant explanation of Vedänta-sütra by Kåñëa
himself. In another place also He has referred to the Vedänta-sütra by saying, “By
the course of Brahma-sütra one can actually understand what is the philosophy of
Bhagavad-gétä." Bhagavad-gétä and Vedänta-sütra are very intimately interrelated.
To understand Vedänta-sütra rightly is to understand Bhagavad-gétä rightly.
The word sütra means "summarized code". In the Skanda and Väyu Puräëas
the word sütra is explained as "when a thesis is presented in few words, but with
great volumes of meaning and, when understood, is very beautiful." Mentioned
herein are the names of different commentaries on Vedänta-sütra by different

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

äcäryas.
This Çäréraka-bhäñya of Çaìkaräcärya is also known as Vedänta-siddhänta. The
summary of non-dualism philosophy expounded by Çaìkaräcärya is as follows.
According to this philosophy there is only the Absolute Truth. To this
philosophy the living entity is Brahman and the cosmic manifestation is false. The
example of reality and falsity is given by them in the comparison of mistaking a
serpent and a rope. In the darkness, in illusion, a rope may be accepted as a
serpent. When one comes to his senses he understands that the rope was not a
serpent. Then the "serpent" becomes false. Similarly, according to Çaìkara's
philosophy this cosmic manifestation actually is not. Mäyä means “What is not."
Ma means "not" and ya means "this". In other words the phenomenal
representation of the material world has no reality. Behind this phenomena the
noumenon is reality.
According to Çaìkara's philosophy the Absolute Truth is impersonal. As such
there is no diversity. In the material world there are different kinds of diversity,
just as diversities of the species of life. The dog species are not like the human
being species. This speciality, dog species or human species, is present in the
material world, but spiritually there is no such differentiation. Even in personal
considerations there are diversities. In a personal form one has legs, hands and
head. But this differentiation, according to the mäyäväda philosophy of
Çaìkaräcärya, is also false. Çaìkaräcärya does not recognize qualifying the
Brahman, just as Vaiñëava philosophy qualifies the Supreme Brahman. Take for
example: God is merciful. This is a qualification of God or the Absolute Truth.
But, Çaìkara's philosophy being impersonal, they do not accept the Absolute
Truth qualified by mercifulness, or beauty, or opulence. They do not accept.
According to them if the Absolute Truth is qualified then it becomes limited by
the qualification. Their conclusion is that if Brahman, or the Absolute Truth, is
unlimited, there should not be any limitation by qualification.
The incarnation of the Absolute Truth, or Godhead, is accepted by them as a
manifestation of material designation. In other words, according to Çaìkara's
philosophy when God or the Absolute Truth incarnates He assumes a material
body. Therefore He is designated. In that designated form only the Absolute Truth
becomes the creator, sustainer, and annihilator of the cosmic manifestation,
although in his commentary on the Bhagavad-gétä, in the beginning, Çaìkaräcärya
has accepted that Näräyaëa is beyond this cosmic manifestation. Everything that is
manifested in the material world is produced from the unmanifested mahat-tattva,
but Näräyaëa is still transcendental to the mahat-tattva. In other words, he has
accepted that the mahat-tattva is also created by the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, Näräyaëa. There are so many contradictions in his philosophy. That is a
different subject matter. We do not wish to enter into the contradicitions of his
philosophy, but as far as possible we are presenting the summary of mäyäväda
philosophy, non-dualism.
According to Çaìkaräcärya, in the highest spiritual conception the Absolute
Truth is without any contamination of material existance, and therefore He has no
connection with the creation, sustenance, or annihilation (of the material world).

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

He is always devoid of all qualities, without any diversity, without any material
condition, and without any responsibility of activities. As such, the cosmic
manifestation is also false. Similarly the Personality of Godhead, who accepts His
designation from this false material manifestation, the conception of the
Personality of Godhead, is also false. The Absolute Truth is only conceived as
eternal, full of knowledge, and full of bliss. The appearance as Näräyaëa, or as an
incarnation, is not eternal, but is temporary. For some purpose He appears like
that. The ultimate end is impersonal.
According to Çaìkara's philosophy, the differentiation between God and the
living entities is an illusion. Actually, that is not the fact. The living entities are not
subordinate energy of the Supreme. Simply being covered by the conception of
mäyä, the living entities appear to be different from the Absolute Truth. This
differentiation between the living entities and the Supreme is manifested in the
material world in ordinary dealings. Spiritually there is no such difference. The
activities of the living entity in the spirit of enjoyment in the material world, his
infinitesimal quality, or his minuteness, or his inumerableness, are only
designations of the false mäyä.
An example in this connection given by the mäyävädé philosophers is that ,
when reflected by a red flower, crystal glass appears to be red, although this has
nothing to do with the redness of the glass. It is completely different from the
color. Similarly, the living entity in the contamination of mäyä becomes active, or
becomes an enjoyer, or becomes infinitesimal, or in other words becomes
individual. All these things are artificial color reflection only. Actually, a living
entity is pure Brahman. This theory of reflection is called pratibimbaväda.
According to this philosophy, transcendentally there is no difference between the
Absolute Truth, the living entities, and material nature.
This non-differentiation between the Absolute Truth, the living entities, and the
cosmic manifestation, is exemplified by the mäyävädé philosopher by the following
example of the entire sky and the pot. The sky in the pot and the entire sky are the
same. But the sky within the pot appears to be limited on account of being
designated by the pot cover. When the pot is broken, or the illusion of mäyä is
dissipated, there is no such difference that this pot is different from that pot, or this
sky is different from that sky. According to Çaìkaräcärya this cosmic manifestation
is also mäyä. When these material elements dissappears, then only existential
Brahman will remain. Therefore, Brahman is truth and this cosmic manifestation is
false.
Çaìkaräcärya does not accept the theory of transformation, as the Vaiñëava
äcäryas, do. The theory of transformation is explained in this way. Just as milk is
transformed into yogurt under certain conditions, but yogurt cannot be
transformed again into milk, nor can it be used as milk, in the same way the living
entities cannot become the Supreme Absolute Truth. This theory of
transformation is not accepted by the mayavädé philosopher.
Actually, this kind of propaganda by Çaìkaräcärya was done under Supreme
order to dissipate the dark Buddhist philosophy and to establish the Vedic
philosophy, the Absolute truth. According to Çré Caitanya Mahäprabhu, Çaìkara's

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

mäyäväda philosophy is another edition of Buddha's philosophy. Buddha's
philosophy of voidness is almost equal to the impersonal philosophy of Çaìkara.
Therefore, according to Çaìkara's philosophy, impersonal non-variegatedness is
the ultimate stage of perfect knowledge.
The greatest opposition was offered by Çré Rämänujäcärya to the Çaìkara
philosophy. Rämänuja's philosophy is known as viçiñtädvaitaväda. This doctrine of
viçiñtädvaitaväda was not newly presented by Çré Rämänujäcärya, but before him
there were other exponents of this doctrine and they are known as Näthamuni and
Yämunäcärya.
The basic principle of the viçiñtädvaitaväda doctrine is that in God's creation
there is the division of sentient and non-sentient, just as in studying our own self
we find that our body is material, or non-sentient, and our mind intelligence and
false ego are the path between my self and my body. My self is sentient. Similarly,
the Supreme Lord is sentient, and this material cosmic manifestation is His body.
Combined together, the Absolute Truth forms a combination of the sentient and
non-sentient features. This is called viçiñtädvaitaväda.
According to Çré Rämänujäcärya there are three truths: namely the sentient, the
non-sentient, and the Supreme Lord. They are generally called tattva-traya. The
inumerable living entities as a group are called the sentient energy of the Supreme
Lord, wheras the cosmic manifestation is called the material energy of the Lord.
The Lord Himself is above them. He has all-auspicious transcendental qualities.
He is omniscient and omnipotent. He is self-effulgent. He is the Lord of the
creation. He is known as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Väsudeva. The
material world and the living entities are sentient and insentient bodily parts of the
Lord.
Çré Rämänujäcärya has elaborately delineated his philosophy in 12 divisions as
follows;
1. The Supreme Absolute Truth is one in the combination of gross, subtle,
sentient, and insentient groups,
2. He has protested against the doctrine of dualism as well as the doctrine of
monism.
3. He has accepted that the Absolute Truth, Brahman, has transcendental
qualities and transcendental potencies, and therefore He is not impersonal.
4. He has vehemently protested the doctrine of an impersonal, non-qualitative
Absolute Truth.
5. He has deliberately established the doctrine of the living entities being
infinitesimal and the in the supreme Lord being infinite, and therefore the
infinitesimal living entities are constitutionally meant for serving the infinite
Supreme Personality of Godhead.
6. He has established that the living entities, who are infinitesimal, are subject to
fall victim under ignorance, but when they are out of that position of ignorance
they become again liberated.
7. He has proved that only transcendental loving service to the Supreme Lord is
the means of liberation from material entanglement.
8. According to his oppinion, devotional service is the supermost prosecss for

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

self-realization.
9. He has stated strongly that even in the state of liberation one cannot be equal
with the Supreme Lord.
10. He has put strong arguments against the impersonal doctrine of monism.
11. He has proved that this material world is abominable, and the spiritual
world is real life for eternal bliss.
12. He has established that the living entities and the cosmic manifestation are
different bodily parts of the Supreme Lord.
Also, Rämänujäcärya has explained that the Supreme Personality of Godhead
descends in five different features, namely arcä, the Deity in the temple, the
incarnations, such as the fish-incarnation, tortise-incarnation, boar-incarnation,
and Nåsiàha-incarnation, which are called vaibhava. Then He has expansions
called vyüha, such as the expansions of Väsudeva, Saìkarñaëa, Pradyumna, and
Aniruddha. His impersonal expansion is the effulgence of His body. He is also
present in everyone's heart as Antaryämé, or the Supersoul. All these different
plenary portions of the Supreme Lord are beyond material contamination, eternal,
without any lamentation, always superior than the living entities, and full of six
opulences.
According to Rämänujäcärya, there are five kinds of methods of worship, which
are called abhigamana, upadäna, ijya, sadhyäya, and yoga. When devotees go to
the temple, clean the temple or the path to the temple, and decorate the temple in
various ways, such activities are called abhigamana. The collection of ingredients
such as flowers and other paraphanalia for worship is called upadäna. Worship of
the Lord in the temple is called ijya. Chanting different mantras and offering
different kinds of prayers is called sadhyäya. Meditation, or remembering the
activities of the Lord in full absorption, is called yoga. Practicing all different kinds
of worship one can attain the planets in the spiritual world known as
Vaikuëthaloka. According to Çré Rämänujäcärya, attainment of Vaikuëtha is the
highest perfectional stage.
The greatness of Rämänujäcärya is that he himself, and later on his disciplic
succession, ever-increasingly protested the impersonalism of Çaìkaräcärya. Still in
southern India these two parties come in conflict and generally the party belonging
to the rämänujäcarya-sampradäya is victorious.
Païcarätra regulative principals were current before the advent of
Çaìkaräcärya, but on account of the influence of Buddha's philosophy such
païcarätra regulative principals were stopped. Çaìkaräcärya, instead of directly re-
establishing the païcarätra method, took shelter of mäyäväda philosophy to defeat
Buddha's philosophy. Çré Rämänujäcärya re-established the païcarätra, or
worship.
After Çré Rämänujäcärya is the appearance of Madhväcärya, whose doctrine is
çuddha-dvaitaväda. He very strongly established the doctrine of duality, that God,
or the Absolute Truth, and the living entities are completely different entities, on
the evidence of Brahma-sütra or Vedänta-sütra, as well as Bhagavad-gétä, the
puräëas, and the Närada-païcarätra.
He proved duality in every stage namely that the Supreme Lord and the living

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

entity are two different entities. Similarly the cosmic manifestation and the
Supreme Lord are also two different entities. One living entity is different form
another living entity. In other words, each and every living entity is individual.
There is a difference between sentient and non-sentient entities, and there is also a
difference between one kind of insentient matter and another kind of insentient
matter. Madhväcärya established that two is not one, but two.
One truth is completely independent and the other truth is dependent. Lord
Viñëu is the supreme independent Personality of Godhead, qualified with
transcendental qualities without any material contamination. Therefore He is fully
independent. Except Lord Viñëu, anything else, either cosmic manifestation or
living entities, are not independent but are dependent on the Supreme Lord.
The living entities are qualitatively representations of the Supreme Lord. The
doctrine that man is made after God is accepted by Madhväcärya. The features of
man are an exact reflection of the feature of the Supreme Lord. He also accepts
that the Supreme Lord expands in multi-pleanary-portions, as well as separated-
portions called jéva-tattva. All the jéva-tattvas, or living entities, are eternally
associates of the Supreme Lord to render transcendental loving service to Him.
The living entities' knowledge is always inferior or incomplete.
The Supreme Lord and the living entities are always in the position of Supreme
and subordinate. The living entities are always subordinate. They have no
independent power. As is confirmed in Bhagavad-gétä, 5th Chapter, 15th Verse,
the Lord says that knowledge and remembrance are always given by the Supreme
Lord, as antaryämé, or Supersoul, to the living entities. Otherwise, the living
entities have no independent power to memorize, think, or act.
In contrast to the living entity, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Viñëu, is
complete in knowledge and complete in bliss. He is always worshipable by the
living entities and He is the original supreme dominator whereas the living entities
are the original predominated. He is, therefore, the original creator of the cosmic
manifestaton, which is also eternal, although temporarily manifested. Therefore
both the living entities and the cosmic manifestation are under the subordination
of the Supreme Lord.
The Supreme Lord is always differently situated, as is also confirmed in the
Bhagavad-gétä, where it is said that everything is resting on the Supreme Lord, but
still He is always different from everything. According to Madhväcärya, even at
the time of cosmic dissolution the living entities and the material energy remain
separate from the Supreme Lord. They are never mixed up as is advocated by the
impersonalists.
Madhväcärya was in very great opposition to the doctrine of Çaìkaräcärya.
Practically the madhväcärya-sampradäya followers are simply fighting against the
doctrine of mäyäväda philosophy propounded by Çaìkaräcärya. He defeated the
doctrine of Çaìkaräcärya and established the doctrine of duality.
Apart from the above mentioned two doctrines of viçiñtädvaitaväda and çuddha-
dvaitaväda, there are other doctrines advocated by the viñëusvämé-sampradäya
and nimbärka-sampradäya. The viñëusvämé-sampradäya later on developed into
the baladeva-sampradäya. Their doctrine is called çuddhädvaitaväda, and the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

doctrine of nimbärka-sampradäya is called dvaitädvaitaväda.
An adjustment of all the doctrines: viçiñtädvaitaväda, çuddha-dvaitaväda,
çuddhädvaitaväda, and dvaitädvaitaväda was very nicely done by Lord Caitanya
Mahäprabhu in his doctrine acibntya-bhedäbheda-tattva. In this doctrine, Lord
Caitanya has discussed very elaborately all kinds of old and new doctrines in the
matter of understanding transcendental subject matter, and in order to minimize
the different views of different philosophers, He has added a very nice conception
which is called acintya.
This word is very applicable to the philosophical doctrines of the conditioned
soul. A conditioned soul actually cannot ascertain the nature of the Absolute
Truth simply by speculation, but only through the authority of Vedic knowledge.
The word acintya applies in all the doctrines.
Çré Caitanya Mahäprabhu was not very concerned about these doctrines to
understand the Absolute Truth. His main business was to distribute to the general
mass of people the principles of Çrémad-Bhägavatam, which is the natural
commentary on Vedänta-sütra.
According to Çrémad-Bhägavatam, all philosophical speculation and religious
priniples combined together culminate in the understanding of love of Godhead.
Man cannot be satisfied simply by religious sentiments or philosophical
speculation but, according to Çrémad-Bhägavatam, when one is elevated to the
platform of rendering loving service to the Supreme Personality of Godhead
without any motive and without being hampered by any material condition, that
stage of transcendental realization is the highest principle of spiritual
understanding, and in that stage only one can be fully satisfied.
Caitanya Mahäprabhu was more concerned to deliver to the people this status
of life without much bothering about philosophical speculations. Lord Çré Caitanya
Mahäprabhu never labored very much to present a thesis of this doctrine in a
seperate book, but later on his diciplic succession, especially, among the six
Gosvämés, Çréla Jéva Gosvämé has presented six theses, which combinedly are
called Ñat-sandharbha. Of the six sandharbhas the one known as Tattva-
sandharbha is a practical presentation of this doctrine and explains Vedänta-sütra
strictly according to the principles of acintya-bhedäbheda-tattva. Later on, Çré
Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa took this doctgrine and explained Vedänta-sütra strictly
according to that principle of acintya-bhedäbheda-tattva.

His Divine Grace A. C. Bhaktivedanta Swami Prabhupäda

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

satyaà jïänam anantaà

brahma-çivädi-stutaà bhajad-rüpam
govindaà tam acintyaà

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 hetum adoñaà namasyämaù

Lord Govinda is the Supreme Brahman, the absolute transcendental reality. He is

transcendental knowledge. He is the original cause of all causes. He is limitless and
faultless. Lord Çiva and all the demigods praise Him. The devotees worship His
transcendental form. We offer our respectful obeisances unto Him.

süträàçubhis tamäàsi
vyudasya vastüni yaù parékñayate
sa jayati satyavataye
harir anuvåtto nata-preñöhaù

All glories to Çréla Vyäsadeva, the son of Satyavaté. Vyäsadeva is the incarnation
of Lord Hari, and He is very dear to the devotees. With the effulgence of His
Vedänta-sütra He has dispelled the darkness of ignorance and revealed the truth.

During the Dväpara-yuga the Vedas were destroyed. The Supreme Personality
of Godhead, responding to the prayers of Lord Brahmä and the other bewildered
demigods, appeared as Kåñëa Dvaipäyana Vyäsa, restored the Vedas, divided
them into parts, and composed the Vedänta-sütra in four chapters to explain them.
This is described in the Skanda Puräëa.
At that time many fools propounded various misinterpretations of the Vedas.
Some said that the highest goal of life was to act piously in order to reap the
benefits of good karma. Some said that Lord Viñëu is Himself bound by the laws
of karma. Some maintained that the fruits of good karma, such as residence in
svarga (the upper material planets) were eternal. Some said the jévas (individual
living entities) and prakåti (material energy) acted independently, without being
subject to any higher power, or God. Some said the jévas (individual living entities)
are actually the Supreme Brahman (God), and that the jévas are simply bewildered
about their identity, or that the jévas are a reflection of God, or separated
fragments of God. Some said that the jéva becomes free from the cycle of repeated
birth and death when He understands his real identity as the perfectly spiritual
Supreme Brahman (God).
The Vedänta-sütra refutes all these misconceptions, and establishes Lord Viñëu
as supremely independent, the original creator and cause of all causes, omniscient,
the ultimate goal of life for all living entities, the supreme religious principle and
the supreme transcendental knowledge.
The Vedänta-sütra describes five tattvas (truths): 1. éçvara (The Supreme
Personality of Godhead); 2. jéva (the individual living entity, or spirit-soul); 3.
prakåti (matter); 4. käla (time); and 5. karma (action).
The éçvara is omniscient, but the jéva has only limited knowledge. Still, both are
eternal beings, are aware of the spiritual reality, and have a variety of spiritual
qualitites. Both are alive, have personality, and are aware of their own identity.
At this point someone may object: "In one place you have said that the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Supreme Godhead is omniscient, and in another place you have said that He is
knowledge itself. This is a contradiction, for the knower and the object of
knowledge must be different. They cannot be the same.
To this objection I reply: Just as a lamp is not different from the light it
emanates and it's light is both the object of knowledge and the method of attaining
it, in the same way the Supreme Personality of Godhead is simultaneously the
supreme knower and the supreme object of knowledge. There is no contradiction.
Éçvara is supremely independent. He is the master of all potencies. He enters
the universe and controls it. He awards both material enjoyment and and ultimate
liberation to to the individual spirit souls (jévas)residing in material bodies.
Although He is one, He manifests in many forms. They who understand the
transcendental science maintain that He is not different from His own
transcendental form and qualities. Although He cannot be perceived by the
material senses, He can be perceived by bhakti (devotional service). He is
changeless. He reveals His own spiritual, blissful form to His devotees.
The many jévas are situated in different conditions of existence. Some are
averse to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and turn their faces from Him.
Such jévas are bound by material illusion. Other jévas are friendly to the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, and turn their faces to Him. These jévas become free from
the two-fold bondage of material illusion, which hides the Supreme Lord's form
and qualities, and in this way they become able to see the Suprerme Personality of
Godhead face-to-face.
Prakåti (material nature) consists of the three modes: goodness, passion, and
ignorance. Prakåti is known by many names, such as tamaù and mäyä. When the
Supreme Personality of Godhead glances at Prakåti, she becomes able to perform
her various duties. Prakåti is the mother of many variegated material universes.
Käla (time) is the origin of past, present, future, simultaneity, slowness,
quickness, and many other similar states. Käla is divided into many different units
from the extremely brief kñaëa to the extermely long parärdha. Turning like a
wheel, time is the cause of repeated creation and annihilation of the universes.
Time is unconscious. It is not a person.
These four tattvas (éçvara, jéva, prakåti, and käla) are eternal. This is confirmed
by the following scriptural quotations:

nityo nityänäà cetanaç cetanänäm

"Of all the eternals one (the Supreme Personality of Godhead) is the supreme
eternal. Of all conscious entities one (the Supreme Personality of Godhead) is the
supreme consicous entity."
——Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad 6.13

gaur anädy anantavaté

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

"Prakåti is like a cow who was never born and never dies."
—Culika Upaniñad mantra 5

sad eva saumyedam agra äsét

"My dear saintly student, please understand that the Supreme Personality of
Godhead is eternal. He is existed before the manifestation of this universe."
—Chändogya Upaniñad 6.2.1

The jévas, prakåti, and käla are subordinate to éçvara, and subject to His control.
This is confirmed by the following statement of Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (6.16):

sa viçva-kåd viçva-vid ätma-yonir

jïaù käla-käro guëi sarva-vid yaù
pradhäna-ksetrajïa-patir guëeçaù
saàsära-mokña-sthiti-bandha-hetuù

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead (éçvara) is the creator of the material

universes. He is the creator of everything that exists within the universes. He is the
father of all living entities. He is the creator of time. He is full of all transcendental
virtues. He is omniscient. He is the master of pradhäna (the unmanifested material
nature). He is the master of the guëas (three modes of material nature). He is the
master of the individual spirit souls residing material bodies (kñetrajïa). He
imprisons the condiditoned souls in the material world, and He also becomes their
liberator from bondage."

Karma (the result of fruitive action) is not a conscious, living person. It is an

inert material force. Although no one can trace out its beginning, it has a definite
end at some point in time. It is known by the name adåñöa (the unseen hand of
fate) and many other names also.
These four (jéva, prakåti, käla, and karma) are all potencies of éçvara, the
supreme master of all potencies. Because everything that exists is the potency of
the Supreme, the Vedic literatures declare: "Only Brahman exists, and nothing is
separate from Him." This fact is nicely explained in the four chapters of this book,
the Vedänta-sütra.
In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam, which is the perfect commentary on Vedänta-sütra,
the Supreme éçvara and His potencies are described in the following words:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

bhakti-yogena manasi
samyak praëihite 'male
apaçyat puruñaà pürëaà
mäyäà ca tad-apäçrayam

"Thus he fixed his mind, perfectly engaging it by linking it in devotional service

[bhakti-yoga] without any tinge of materialism, and thus he saw the Absolute
Personality of Godhead along with His external energy, which was under full
control.*

yayä sammohito jéva

ätmänaà tri-guëätmakam
paro 'pi manute 'narthaà
tat-kåtaà cäbhipadyate

"Due to this external energy, the living entitiy, although transcendental to the
three modes of material nature, thinks of himself as a material product and thus
undergoes the reactions of material miseries.*

anarthopaçamaà säkñäd
bhakti-yogam adhokñaje
lokasyäjänato vidväàç
cakre sätvata-saàhitäà

"The material miseries of the living entity, which are superfluous to him, can be
directly mitigated by the linking process of devotional service. But the mass of
people do not know this, and therefore the learned Vyäsadeva compiled this Vedic
literature, which is in relation to the Supreme Truth."*
—1.7.4-6

dravyaà karma ca kälaç ca

svabhävo jéva eva ca
yad-anugrahataù santi
na santi yad-upekñayä

"One should definitely know that all material ingredients, activities, time and
modes, and the living entities who are meant to enjoy them all, exist by His mercy
only, and as soon as He does not care for them, everything becomes nonexistent."*

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 —2.10.12

That Çrémad-Bhägavatam is the commentary on Vedänta-sütra is confirmed by

the following statement of Garuòa Puräëa—

artho 'yam brahma-sütränäm

"Çrémad-Bhägavatam is the commentary on Vedänta-sütra."*

In this Vedänta-sütra the first chapter explains that Brahman is the real subject
matter discussed in all Vedic literatures. The second chapter explains that all Vedic
literatures present the same conclusion. They do not actually contradict each
other. The third chapter describes how to attain Brahman. The fourth chapter
explains the result of attaining Brahman.
A person whose heart is pure, pious, and free from material desires, who is
eager is associate with saintly devotees, who has faith in the Lord and the
scriptures, and who is peaceful and decorated with saintly qualitities, is qualified to
study the scriptures and strive after Brahman.
The relationship between Brahman and the scriptures is that the scriptures
describe Brahman and Brahman is the object described in the scriptures. The
Vedänta-sütra and other Vedic scriptures describe Brahman as the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, whose form is eternal, full of knowledge and bliss, who is
the master of unlimited inconceivable potencies, and who possesses unlimited
pure, transcendental attributes. The result of properly understanding the Vedänta-
sütra and other Vedic scriptures is that the spiritual aspirant becomes free from all
material imperfections, and able to see the Supreme Brahman, Personality of
Godhead, face to face.
The Vedänta-sütra is written in adhikaraëas, Vedic syllogisms, which consist of
five parts: 1. viñaya (thesis, or statement); 2. saàçaya (the arisal of doubt in the
tenability of the statement); 3. pürvapakña (presentation of a view opposing the
original statement) 4. siddhänta (determination of the actual truth, the final
conclusion, by quotation from Vedic scriptures), and saìgati (confirmation of the
final conclusion by quotation from Vedic scriptures).

Chapter 1

Pada 1

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 1
Inquiry Into Brahman

The first adhikaraëa of the Vedänta-sütra discusses brahma-jijïäsä (inquiry into

Brahman). The adhikaraëa may be shown in its five parts in the following way:
1. Viñaya (statement): One should inquire about Brahman. This statement is
confirmed by the following statements of Vedic scripture:

yo vai bhüma tat sukhaà nänyat sukham asti bhümaiva sukhaà bhümatveva
vijijïäsitavyaù

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead (bhüma) is the source of genuine

happiness. Nothing else can bring one actual happiness. Only the Supreme
Personality of Godhead can bring one happiness. For this reason one should
inquire about the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
—Chändogya Upaniñad 7.25.1

ätmä vä are drañöavyaù çrotavyo mantavyo nididhyäsitavyo maitreyi

"O Maitreyé, one should see, hear, remember, and inquire about the Supreme
Personality of Godhead."
—Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 2.4.5

2. Saàçaya (doubt): If one has studied the Vedas and dharma-çästras, need he
inquire about Brahman or not? The following statements of Vedic scriptures
nourish this doubt:

apäma somam amåtä abhüma

"We have attained immortality by drinking the soma-juice."

—Åg Veda 8.18.3

akñayyaà ha vai cäturmäsyäjinaù sukåtaà bhavati

"They who follow the vow of cäturmäsya attain an eternal reward."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 3. Pürvapakña (presentation of the opposing view): There is no need to inquire
about Brahman. Simply by discharging ordinary pious duties described in the
dharma-çästras one can attain immortality and an eternal reward.
4. Siddhänta (the conclusive truth): In the first sütra Bhagavän Vyäsadeva
replies to his philosophical opponent.

Sütra 1

athäto brahma-jijïäsä

atha—now; atah—therefore; brahma—about Brahman; jijïäsa—there should be

inquiry.

Now, therefore, one should inquire about Brahman.*

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In this sütra the word atha means "now", and the word ataù means "therefore".
The sütra means "Now one should inquire about Brahman."
Atha (now): When a person has properly studied the Vedic literature,
understood its meaning, adhered to the principles of varëäçrama-dharma,
observed the vow of truthfulness, purified his mind and heart, and attained the
association of a self-realized soul, he is qualified to inquire about Brahman.
Ataù (therefore): Because material piety brings results of material sense-
happiness, which is inevitably limited and temporary, and because the
transcendental form of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, which is realized by
the proper attainment of real transcendental knowledge, and which is full of
imperishable, limitless bliss, eternity, transcendental knowldege, and all
transcendental attributes, brings eternal bliss to the devotee-beholder, therefore
one should renounce all material pious duties for attaining material sense-
gratification, and inquire about Brahman by studying the four chapters of Vedänta-
sütra.
At the point someone may object: Is it not true that simply by studying the
Vedas one attains knowledge of Brahman, and as result of this knowledge one
abandons the path of material piety and fruitive work and instead takes to the
worship of the Supreme Personality of Godhead? If this result is obtained simply
by studying the Vedas,, what need is there to study the four chapters of Vedänta-
sütra?

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 To this objection I reply: Even if one carefully studies the Vedas,
misunderstanding and doubt may destroy his intelligence and lead him away from
the real meaning of the Vedas. For this reason it is necessary to study the Vedänta-
sütra, to stregnthen the students's understanding.
Performing the duties of äçrama-dharma are also helpful in purifying the heart
and understanding the transcendental reality. How the äçrama duties of the
brähmaëa help in this regard is described in the following statement of Båhad-
äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.22):

tam etaà vedänuvacanena brähmaëä vividisanti yajïena dänena tapasänaçanena

"By Vedic study, sacrifice, charity, austerity, and fasting, the brähmaëas strive
to understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

The usefulness of the brahminical duties such as truthfulness, austerity, and

mantra chanting is described in the following scriptural statements:

satyena labhayas tapasä hy eña ätmä samyak jïänena brahmacaryeëa nityam

"By constant truthfulness, austerity, transcendental knowledge, and austerity,

one becomes eligible to associate with the Supreme Personality of Godhead."
—Muëòaka Upaniñad 3.1.5

japyenaiva ca saàsiddhyad
brahmaëä nätra saàçayaù
kuryäd anyan na vä kuryän
maitro brähmaëa ucyate

"Whether he performs other rituals and duties or not, one who perfectly chants
mantras glorifying the Supreme Personality of Godhead should be considered a
perfect brähmaëa, eligible to understand the Supreme Lord."
—Manu-saàhitä 2.87

Association with those who understand the truth also brings one transcendental
knowledge. By this association Närada and many other spiritual aspirants attained
interest to ask about spiritual life and were finally eligible to see the Supreme
Personality of Godhead face-to-face. Sanat-kumära and many other great sages
have also helped many devotees by giving their association in this way. The great
value of contact with a self-realized soul is described in the following statement of

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Bhagavad-gétä (4.34):

tad viddhi praëipätena

paripraçnena sevayä
upadekñyanti te jïänaà
jïäninas tattva-darçinaù

"Just try to learn the truth by approaching a spiritual master. Inquire from him
submissively and render service unto him. The self-realized soul can impart
knowledge unto you because he has seen the truth."*

The material benefits obtained by following the pious rituals of the karma-
käëòa section of the Vedas are all temporary in nature. This fact is confirmed by
the following statement of Chändogya Upaniñad (8.1.3):

tad yatheha karma-cito lokäù kñiyante evam evämutra puëya-cito lokaù kñéyate

"By performing good works (karma) one is elevated to the celestial material
world after death. One is not able to stay there forever, however, but one must
lose that position after some time and accept another, less favorable residence. In
the same way, by amassing pious credits (puëya) one may reside in the upper
planets. Still, he cannot stay there, but must eventually relinquish his comfortable
position there, and accept a less favorable residence somewhere else."

The following statement of Muëòaka Upaniñad (1.2.12) affirms that only

transcendental knowledge will help one approach the Supreme Brahman:

parékñya lokän karma-citän brähmaëo

nirvedam ayan nästy akåtaù kåtena
tad-vijïänärtham sa gurum eväbhigacchet
samit-päëiù çrotriyaà brahma-niñöham

"Seeing that the celestial material planets, which one may obtain by pious work,
provide only temporary benefits, a brähmaëa, in order to understand the truth the
of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, should humbly approach a bona-fide
spiritual master learned in the scriptures and full of faith in the Supreme Lord."
In contrast to the temporary material benefits obtained in the celestial material
planets, the Supreme Brahman is the reservoir of eternal, limitless bliss. This is
confirmed by the following statments of Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.1.1):

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

satyaà jïänam anantaà brahma

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is limitless, eternal, and full of

knowledge."

änando brahmeti vyajanät

"He then understood that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is full of

transcendental bliss."

The Supreme Brahman is eternal, full of knowledge and endowed with all
transcendental qualities. This is confirmed by the following statements of
Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad:

na tasya käryaà karaëaà ca vidyate

na tat-samaç cäbhyadhikaç ca dåçyate
paräsya çaktir vividhaiva çrüyate
svä-bhäviké jïäna-bala-kriyä ca

"He does not possess bodily form like that of an ordinary living entity. There is
no difference between His body and His soul. He is absolute. All his senses are
transcendental. Any one of His senses can perform the action of any other sense.
Therefore, no one is greater than Him or equal to Him. His potencies are
multifarious, and thus His deeds are automatically performed as a natural
sequence."*
—6.8

sarvendriya-guëäbhäsaà
sarvendriya-vivarjitam
asaktaà sarva-bhåc caiva
nirguëaà guëa-bhoktå ca

"The Supersoul is the original source of all senses, yet He is without senses. He
is unattached, although He is the maintainer of all living beings. He transcends the
modes of nature, and at the same time He is the master of all modes of material
nature."*

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 —3.17

bhäva-grahyam anidäkhyaà
bhäväbhäva-karaà çivam
käla-särga-karaà devaà
ye vidus te jahus tanum

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is the creator and destroyer of the entire
material cosmic manifestation. He is supremely auspicious, and He does not
posesses a material body, for His body is spiritual in all respects. He may be
reached and understood only by loving devotional service. Those who thus serve
Him and understand Him may become free from having to repeatedly accept
various material bodies for continued residence in the material world. They
become liberated from this world, and obtain eternal spiritual bodies with which to
serve Him."
—5.14

That the Supreme Personality of Godhead grants eternal transcendental bliss to

His devotees is confirmed by the following statement of Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad
(1.5):

taà péöha-sthaà ye tu yajanti dhéräs

teñäà sukhaà çäçvataà netareñäm

"The saintly devotees who worship the Supreme Personality of Godhead in the
spiritual world attain eternal transcendental bliss. Except for them no others can
attain this eternal bliss."

This uselessness of the temporary benefits obtained by following the material

piety of the karma-käëòa section of the Vedas will be described in the third
chapter of this Vedänta-sütra.
This may be summed up by saying: One who has studied the Vedas, Upavedas,
and Upaniñads, understood them, associated with a self-realized soul, and in this
way understood the difference between the temporary and the eternal, who has
lost all attraction for the temporary and chosen the eternal, becomes a student of
the four chapters of Vedänta-sütra.
It cannot be said that simply by completely studying and understanding the
karma-käëòa section of the Vedas one will naturally take up the study of Vedänta-
sütra. They who have studied karma-käëòa but not associated with saintly
devotees do not become eager to understand Brahman. On the other hand, they
who have not studied karma-käëòa, but who have become purified by association
with saintly devotees, naturally become attracted to understand Brahman.
Neither can it be said that simply by understanding the difference between the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

temporary and the eternal, and simply by attaining the four qualities of saintly
persons, one will become attracted to understand Brahman. These things are not
enough. However, if one attains the association of a self-realized soul and follows
his instructions, then these ordinarily difficult-to-attain qualifications are
automatically attained at once.
Three kinds of persons inquire into the nature of Brahman: 1. Sa-niñöha (they
who faithfully perform their duties); 2. Pariniñöha (they who act philantropically
for the benefit of all living entities); and 3. Nirapek\ça (they who are rapt in
meditation and aloof from the activities of this world). According to their own
respective abilities all these persons understand the nature of Brahman. They
become more and more purified, and they eventually attain the association of
Brahman.
At this point someone may raise the following objection: Is it not so that the
words oà and atha are auspicious sounds that sprang from Lord Brahmä's throat
in ancient times? Is it not also so that these words are traditionally used at the
beginning of books to invoke auspiciousness and drive away all obstacles? For this
reason I think the word atha in this sütra does not mean "now". It is simply a word
to invoke auspiciousness, and has no other meaning.
To this objection I reply: This is not true. Çréla Vyäsadeva, the author of
Vedänta-sütra, is the incarnation of the Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself,
and therefore He has no particular need to invoke auspiciousness or drive away
obstacles and dangers. That Vyäsadeva is the Supreme Personality of Godhead is
confirmed by the following statement of the småti-çästra:

kåñëa-dvaipäyana-vyäsaà
viddhi näräyaëaà prabhum

"Please understand that Kåñëa Dvaipayana Vyäsa is actually the Supreme

Personality of Godhead, Näräyaëa."
Still, ordinary people may take it that Lord Vyäsadeva has spoken the word
atha at the beginning of Vedänta-sütra just to invoke auspiciousness, just as one
may sound a conch-shell to invoke auspiciousness. In conclusion, we have
described here how at a certain point in time, after certain understandings (atha), a
person may become eager to inquire about the nature of Brahman.
At this point someone may raise the following objection:Is it not so that the
word bhüma or brahma may also refer to the individual spirit soul and not only to
the Supreme Personality of Godhead? This fact is explained in Chändogya
Upaniñad. Even the dictionary explains: "The word brahma means that which is
big, the brähmaëa caste, the individual spirit soul, and the demigod Brahmä who
sits on a great lotus flower."
To clear away the misunderstanding of this objector, the following scriptural
passages may be quoted:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 bhågur vai varuëir varuëaà pitaram upasasära adhéhi bho bhagavo brahma. . .
yato vä imäni bhütäni jäyante yena jätäni jévanti yat prayänty abhisaàviçanti tad
brahma tad vijijïäsasva

"Bhågu asked his father Varuëa: `My lord, please instruct me about the nature
of Brahman.' Varuëa replied: `All living entities have taken their birth because of
Brahman. They remain alive because they are maintained by Brahman, and at the
time of death they again enter into Brahman. Please try to understand the nature
of Brahman.'"

At this point someone may doubt: "In this Vedänta-sütra does the word
`Brahman' refer to the individual spirit soul or the Supreme Personality of
Godhead?"
Someone may indeed claim that the word "Brahman" here refers to the
individual spirit soul, and to support his view he may quote the following
statement of Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.5):

vijïänaà brahma ced veda

tasmäc cen na pramadyati
çarére päpmäno hitvä
sarvaë kämän samäçnute

"If one understands the true nature of the Brahman who lives in the body and
uses the senses of the body to perceive the material world, then such a knower of
Brahman will never become bewildered by illusion. Such a knower of the Brahman
in the body refrains from performing sinful actions, and at the time of leaving the
body at death, he attains an exalted destination where all his desires become at
once fulfilled."

Our philosophical opponent may claim in this way that the word "Brahman"
should be interpreted to mean the individual spirit soul. In order to refute this false
idea, Çréla Vyäsadeva describes the true nature of Brahman in the next sütra.

Adhikaraëa 2
The Origin of Everything

Sütra 2

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

janmädy asya yataù

janma—birth; ädi—beginning with; asya—of that; yataù—from whom.

Brahman is He from whom everything emanates.*

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word janmädi is a tad-guëa-samvijïäna-bahuvréhi-samäsa, and it should

interpreted to mean "creation, maintenance, and destruction." The word asya
means "of this material universe with fourteen planetary systems, which is
inhabitated by various creatures from the demigod Brahmä down to the lowest
unmoving blade of grass, who all enjoy and suffer the results of their various
fruitive actions (karma), and who cannot understand the astonishing structure of
the universe where they live." The word yataù means "from whom", and it refers
to the Supreme Brahman who manifested the universe from His inconceivable
potency. This is the Brahman about whom one should inquire.
The words bhüma and ätmä both mean "all pervading". These words refer
primarily to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This will be elaborately
explained in the Bhümädhikaraëa (1.3.7) and Väkyänvayädhikaraëa (1.4.19). The
word "Brahman" in particular means "He who possesses boundless exalted
qualitites." Brahman, then, refers to the Supreme Personality of Godhead and this
is clearly confirmed in the following words of çruti-çästra:

atha kasmäd ucyate brahmeti båhanto by asmin guëäù

"From whom has this universe become manifest? From Brahman, who
possesses an abundance of exalted transcendental qualities."

Brahman primarily refers to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and only

secondarily to the individual spirit souls, who manifest in small degree the spiritual
qualitites of the Supreme Lord. In this way the individual spirit souls may be called
Brahman, just as the royal title may be given not only to the king, but also to his
associates and subordinates. Therefore, the individual spirit souls, who are all
suffering the three-fold miseries of material life, should, in order to attain ultimate
liberation, inquire about the Supreme Brahman, who is very merciful towards

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

whose who take shelter of Him. For these reasons it should be understood that the
Supreme Brahman, the Personality of Godhead is the object of inquiry in this
Vedänta-sütra. This is not an imaginary description of Brahman's qualities. This is
the truth about Brahman.
The word jijïäsä means "the desire to know." Knowledge is of two kinds: 1.
Parokña (knowledge gathered from sources other than the senses e.g. logic,
knowledge obtained from authority, etc.) and 2. Aparokña (knowledge gathered by
the senses). An example of these two kinds of knowledge may be seen in the
following quotation from the çruti-çästra:

vijïäya prajïäà kurvéta

"After learning about the Supreme Personality of Godhead one should become
able to directly see Him in the trance of meditation."

Parokña knowledge helps bring us closer to the Supreme Brahman, and

aparokña knowledge manifests the Supreme Lord before us.
If one understands his real identity as spirit soul, that is certainly very helpful in
understanding Brahman, but that does not mean that the individual soul is the
same as Brahman. The individual spirit soul is always different from Brahman, and
even after liberation He remains eternally different from the Supreme Brahman.
The difference between the individual soul and Brahman is described in sütras
1.1.16, 1.1.17, 1.3.5, 1.3.21, and 1.3.41.
The Vedic literature gives the following guidelines for the interpretation of
obscure passages:

upakramopasaàhäräv
abhyäso 'pürvata-phalam
artha-vädopapatté ca
liìgaà tätparya-nirëaye

"The upakrama (beginning), upasaàhära (ending), abhyäsa (what is repeated

again and again), apürvatä (what is unique and novel), phalam (the general
purpose of the book), artha-väda (the author's statement of his own intention),
and upapatti (appropriateness) are the factors to consider in interpretation of
obscure passages."
If we apply these criteria to the çruti-çästra, we will clearly see that the Supreme
Personality of Godhead and the individual spirit soul are described here as two
distinct entities.
Let us analyze the following passage from Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (4.6-7) in the
light of these six criteria.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

dvä suparëä sayujä sakhäyä
samänaà våkñaà pariçañvajäte
tayor anyaù pippalaà svädv atty
anaçnann anyo 'bhicakäçéti

"The individual spirit-soul and the Supersoul, Personality of Godhead, are like
two friendly birds sitting on the same tree. One of the birds (the individual atomic
soul) is eating the fruit of the tree (the sense-gratification afforded to the material
body), and the other bird (the Supersoul) is not trying to eat these fruits, but is
simply watching His friend.

samäne våkñe puruño nimagno

'néçäya çocati muhyamänaù
juñöaà yadä paçyati anyam éçam
asya mahimänam iti véta-çokaù

"Although the two birds are on the same tree, the eating bird is fully engrossed
with anxiety and moroseness as the enjoyer of the fruits of the tree. But if in some
way or other he turns his face to his friend who is the Lord and knows His glories,
at once the suffering bird becomes free from all anxieties."

In this passage the upakrama (beginning) is dvä suparëä (two birds); the
upasaàhära (ending) is anyam éçam (the other person, who is the Supreme
Personality of Godhead); the abhyäsa (repeated feature) is the word anya (the
other person), as in the phrases tayor anyo 'çnan (the other person does not eat)
and anyam éçam ( He sees the other person, who is the Supreme Lord); the
apürvatä (unique feature) is the difference between the Supreme Lord and the
individual spirit soul, which could never have been understood without the
revelation of the Vedic scripture; the phalam (general purpose of the passage) is
véta-çokaù (the individual spirit soul becomes free from suffering by seeing the
Lord); the artha-väda (the author's statement of his own intention) is mahimänam
eti (one who understands the Supeme Lord becomes glorious) and the upapatti
(appropriateness) is anyo 'naçan (the other person, the Supreme Lord, does not
eat the fruits of material happiness and distress).
By analyzing this passage and other passages from Vedic literatures, one may
clearly understand the difference between the Supreme Personality of Godhead
and the individual spirit soul.
At this point someone may raise the following objection:
Is it not true that when a scripture teaches something that had not been known to
its readers, then it is useful, and if when a scripture simply repeats what its readers

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

already know, it simply wastes time uselessly? People in general think they are
different from the Supreme Brahman, and therefore if the scripture were to teach
them something new it would have to be that the Supreme Personality of Godhead
and the indivdual spirit souls are completely identical. For this reason it should be
understood that the individual spirit souls are identical with Brahman.
To this objection I reply: This view is not supported by the words of the Vedic
scriptures. For example the Çvetäçvatara
Upaniñad (1.6) states:

påthag-ätmänaà preritaà ca matvä

juñöas tatas tenämåtatvam eti

"When one understands that the Supreme Personality of Godhead and the
individual spirit souls are eternally distinct entities, then he may become qualified
for liberation, and live eternally in the spiritual world."
The impersonalist conception of the identity of the individual and the Supreme
is a preposterous phantasmagoria, like the horn of a rabbit. It has no reference to
reality, and it is completely rejected by the people in general. They do not accept
it. Those few texts of the Upaniñads that apparently teach the impersonalist
doctrine, are interpreted in a personalist way by the author, Vyäsadeva himself.
This will be described later on in Sutra 1.1.30.

Adhikaraëa 3
The Supreme Personality of Godhead May be Understood by the Revelation of
the Vedic Scriptures

1. Viñaya (Statement): The Supreme Personality of Godhead is the creator,

maintainer and destroyer of the material universes. Because He is inconceivable to
the tiny brains of the conditioned souls He must be understood by the revelation
of Vedänta philosophy. This is confirmed by the following statements of the
Upaniñads:

sac-cid-änanda-rüpäya
kåñëäyäkliñöa-käriëe
namo vedänta-vedyäya
gurave buddhi-säkñiëe

Oà namaù. I offer my respectful obeisances to Çré Kåñëa, whose form is eternal

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

and full of knowledge and bliss, who is the rescuer from distress, who is
understood by Vedänta, who is the supreme spiritual master, and who is the
witness in everyone's heart.
—Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad

taà tv aupaniñadaà puruñaà påcchämi

"I shall now inquire about the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is
revealed in the Upaniñads."
—Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 3.9.26

2. Saàçaya (doubt): What is the best method for understanding supremely

worshipable Lord Hari: the mental speculation of the logicians, or the revelation of
the Vedänta scriptures?
3. Pürvapakña (the argument of the philosophical opposition): The sage
Gautama (Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 4.5) and others maintain that the Supreme
Personality of Godhead can be understood by the speculations of the logicians.
4. Siddhänta (the conclusion): In the Vedänta-sütra, Çréla Vyäsadeva explains
that scriptural revelation is the real way to understand the Supreme Brahman. He
says:

Sütra 3

çästra-yonitvät

çästra—the scriptures; yonitvät—because of being the origin of knowledge.

(The speculations of the logicians are unable to teach us about Supreme

Personality of Godhead) because He may only be known by the revelation of the
Vedic scriptures.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In this sütra the word "not" should be understood, even though it is not
expressed. They who aspire after liberation are not able to understand the
Personality of Godhead simply by logic and speculation. Why? Because He is

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

known only by the revelation of the Vedic scriptures. Among the Vedic scriptures,
the Upaniñads especially describe the Supreme Person. For this reason it is said
aupaniñadaà puruñam (the Supreme Person is undertood through the revelation
of the Upaniñads). The process of logic and speculation as described by the word
mantavya (to be understood by logic) as described in Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad
(4.5) should be employed to understand the revelation of the scriptures and not
independently. This is confirmed by the following statement of çruti-çästra:

pürväpara-virodhena
ko 'rtho 'träbhimato bhavet
ity ädyam uhanaà tarkaù
çuñka-tarkaà vivarjayet

"Logic is properly employed to resove apparent contradictions in the texts of

the Vedas. Dry logic, without reference to scriptural revelation, should be
abandoned."

For this reason the dry logic of Gautama and others should be rejected. This is
also confired in sütra 2.1.11. After understanding the Supreme Person by study of
the Upaniñads, one should become rapt in meditation on Him. This will be
explained later insütra 2.1.27.
The Supreme Lord, Hari, is identical with His own transcendental form. He and
His form are not two separate identities. He is the witness of all living entities, He
is the resting place of a host of transcendental qualitities, He is the creator of the
material universes, and He remains unchanged eternally. By hearing about His
transcendental glories, one may worship Him perfectly.
At this point someone may raise the following objection:
The Vedänta philosophy does not give either positive orders or negative
prohibitions, but simply descriptions, as the sentence "On the earth there are
seven continents." Men need instruction in how to act. Therefore, what is needed
is a series of orders to guide men. Men need orders, such as the ordinary orders.
"A man desiring wealth should approach the king," or "One suffering from
indigestion should restrict his intake of water," or the orders of the Vedas: svarga-
kämo yajeta (One desiring to enter the celestial material planets should worship
the demigods), or süraà na pibet (No one should drink wine). The Upaniñads do
not give us a string of orders and prohibitions, but merely a description of the
eternally perfect Brahman. for example the Upaniñads tell us satyam jïänam (The
Supreme Personality of Godhead is truth and knowledge). This is of small help in
the matter of orders and prohibitions. Sometimes the Upaniñads' descriptions may
be a little useful, as for example when they describe a certain demigod, the
description may be useful when one performs a sacrifice to that demigod, but
otherwise these descriptions afford us little practical beneifit, and are more or less
useless. This is confirmed by the following statements of Jaimini Muni.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

ämnäyasya kriyärthatväd anärthäkhyam atad-arthanam

"The scriptures teach us pious duties. Any scriptural passage that does not
teach us our duty is a senseless waste of our time."
—Pürva-mémäàsä 1.2.1

tad-bhütänäà kriyärthena samämnäyo 'rthasya tan-nimittatvät

"Just as a verb gives meaning to a sentence, in the same way instructions for action
give meaning to the statements of the scriptures."
—Pürva-mémäàsä 1.1.25

To this objection I reply: Do not be bewildered. Even though the Upaniñads do

not give us a series of orders and prohibitions, still they teach us about the
Supreme Brahman, the most important and valuable object to be attained by any
living entitiy. Just as if in your house there were hidden treasure, and a description
of its location were spoken to you, those words would not be useless simply
because they were a description. In the same way the Upaniñads' description of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is the greatest treasure to be attained by
any living being, whose form is eternal, full of knowledge and full of bliss, who is
perfect and beyond any criticism, who is the friend of all living entities, the
Supreme Lord who is so kind that He gives Himself to His devotees, and the
supreme whole of all existance, of whom I am a tiny part, is not useless, but of
great value to the conditioned soul. The descriptions of the Supreme Brahman in
the Upaniñads are valuable, just as the description "your son is now born" is useful
and a source of great joy, and the decription "This is not a snake, but only a rope
partly seen in the darkness," is also useful and a great relief from fear.
The specific benefit attained by understanding the Supreme Brahman are
described in the following statement of Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.1):

satyaà jïänam anantaà brahma yo veda nihitaà guhäyäà so 'çnute sarvän kämän

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is limitless. He is transcendental

knowledge, and He is the eternal transcendental reality. He is present in
everyone's heart. One who properly understands Him becomes blessed and all his
desires are completely fulfilled."

No one can say that the Upaniñads teach about ordinary fruitive action (karma).

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Rather, one may say that the Upaniñads teach one to give up all material, fruitive
work. No one can say that the Upaniñads describe anything other than the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is the original creator, maintainer, and
destroyer of all the universes, whose spiritual form is eternal, who is a great ocean
of unlimited auspicious transcendental qualitities, and who is the resting-place of
the goddess of fortune. Jaimini's description of the importance of karma,
therefore, has no bearing on the Upaniñads.
In fact Jaimini was a faithful devotee of the Lord, and his apparent criticisms (in
the two quotations presented above) of the Vedic texts that do not encourage
fruitive work (karma) with sufficient enthusiasm, are his hint to us that there is
more that pious fruitive work in the instructions of the Vedas. In this way it may be
understood that the Supreme Brahman is the subject-matter described in the
Vedic scriptures.

Adhikaraëa 4
This is Confirmed by the Vedic scriptures

1. Viñaya (statement): That the Supreme Personality of Godhead is described in

all Vedic scriptures is described in the following scriptural quotations:

yo 'su sarvair vedair géyate

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is glorified by all the Vedas."

—Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad

sarve vedä yat-padam ämananti

"All the Vedas describe the lotus feet of the Supreme Personality of Godhead."
—Kaöha Upaniñad 1.2.15

2. Saàçaya (doubt): Lord Viñëu is the subject-matter described in all the Vedas.
Is this statement true or false?
3. Pürvapakña (the argument of our philosophical opponent): It is not true that
the Vedas teach only about the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Actually the
Vedas mainly describe various fruitive karma-käëòa sacrifices, such as the kariri-
yajïa for bringing rain, the putra-kämyeñöi-yajïa for gaining a son, and the
jyotiñöoma-yajïa for traveling to the celestial material planets (Svargaloka). For
this reason it is not possible to say that Lord Viñëu is the only topic discussed in

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

the Vedas.
4. Siddhänta (the proper conclusion): Vyäsadeva replies to the objections in the
following sütra:

Sütra 4

tat tu samanvayät

tat—this fact; tu—but; samanvayät—because of the agreement of all the Vedic

scriptures.

But that (Lord Viñëu is the sole topic of discussion in the Vedas) is confirmed
by all scriptures.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word tu (but) in this sütra is used to rebut the previously stated opposing
argument. It is proper to say that Lord Viñëu is the sole topic of discussion in all
the Vedas. Why? The answer is: samanvayät (because the scriptures themselves
bring us to this conclusion). The word anvaya means "understanding the actual
meaning," and the word samanvaya means "perfect understanding after careful
deliberation". When we apply the above-mentioned rules of interpretation
(beginning with upakrama and upasaàhära) to the texts of the Vedas, we will
come to the conclusion that Lord Viñëu is the sole topic of discussion in all the
Vedas. If it were not so, then why should the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad state that
Lord Viñëu is glorified by all the Vedas? This is also confirmed by the lotus-eyed
Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself, who says:

vedaiç ca sarvair aham eva vedyo vedänta-kåd veda-vid eva cäham

"By all the Vedas I am to be known. Indeed, I am the compiler of the Vedänta,
and I am the knower of the Vedas."*
—Bhagavad-gétä 15.15

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

kià vidhatte kim äcañöe
kim anüdya vikalpayet
ity asyä kådayaà loke
nänyo mad veda kaçcana

mäà vidhatte 'bhidhatte mäà

vikalpyäpohyate hy aham

"What is the direction of all Vedic literatures? On whom do they set focus?
Who is the purpose of all speculation? Outside of Me no one knows these things.
Now you should know that all these activities are aimed at ordaining and setting
forth Me. The purpose of Vedic literature is to know Me by different speculations,
either by indirect understanding or by dictionary understanding. Everyone is
speculating about Me."*
—Çrémad-Bhägavatam (11.21.42-43)

The Vedic literatures also state:

säkñät-paramparäbhyäm veda brahmaëi pravartate

"Either directly or indirectly, the Vedas describe Brahman."

In the jïäna-käëòa section of the Vedas{.fn 1} the transcendental forms and

qualitities of the Supreme Personality of Godhead are directly described, and in the
karma-käëòa section of the Vedas the Lord is indirectly described in the
discussion of fruitive action and various divisions of material knowledge
That the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the sole topic of discussion in the
Vedas is also confirmed by the following scriptural passages:

tam tv aupaniñadaà puruñam påcchämi

"I shall now ask about the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is described
in the Upaniñads."
—Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (9.21)

tam etam vedänuvacanena brähmaëa vividiçanti

"Brähmaëas study the Vedas to understand the Supreme Personality of

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Godhead."
—Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.22)

As for the various fruitive results, such as the attainment of rain, a son, or
residence in the celestial material planets, that are offered to the follwers of the
karma-käëòa rituals in the Vedas, these beneifts are offered to attract the minds of
ordinary men. When ordinary men see that these material benefits are actually
attained by performing Vedic rituals, they become attracted to study the Vedas. By
studying the Vedas they become able to discriminate between what is temporary
and what is eternal. In this way they gradually become averse to the temporary
things of this world and they come to hanker after Brahman. In this way it may be
understood that all the parts of the Vedas describe the Supreme Personality of
Godhead.
Vedic rituals bring material benefits as a result only when the performer of the
ritual is filled with material desire. If the performer is materially desireless, then he
does not gain a material result, but rather the result he obtains is purification of
the heart and the manifestation of spiritual knowledge. Therefore, the meaning of
the previously quoted text from Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.22) is that the
demigods are considered to be the various limbs of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, and by worshiping them, one actually worships the Supreme Lord, and
the result of such worship is that one gradually become pure in heart and awake
with spiritual knowledge.

Adhikaraëa 5
Brahman Is Knowable

1. Viñaya (statement): Now, by the use of logic and scriptural quotation, we

shall refute the misconception that Brahman cannot be described. One may argue,
however, that many scriptural passages support the theory that Brahman cannot
be described by words. For example:

yato väco nivartate

apräpya manasä saha

"The mind cannot understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead and words
cannot describe Him."
—Taittréya Upaniñad 2.4.1

yad vacanäbhyuditaà yena väg abhyudyate tad eva

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

brahma tad viddhi nedaà yad idam upäsate

"No one has the power to describe Brahman with words, even though
everyone's speech occurs by the power granted by Brahman. Know that this
Brahman is not material. Worship this Brahman."
—Kena Upaniñad (1.5)

2. Saàçaya (doubt): Is Brahman expressable by words or not?

3. Pürvapakña (the opponenet argues): The çruti-çästra states that Brahman
cannot be described by words. If this were not so, it would not be said that the
Supreme Brahman is self-manifested. That Brahman cannot be described with
words is also explained in the following statement of {Çrémad-Bhägavatam (3.6.40):

yato 'präpya nyavartanta

vacaç ca manasä saha
ahaà cänya ime deväs
tasmai bhagavate namaù

"Words, mind and ego, with their respective controlling demigods, have failed
to achieve success in knowing the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Therefore, we
simply have to offer our respectful obeisances unto Him as a matter of sanity."*
4. Çréla Vyäsadeva refutes these arguments in the following sütra:

Sütra 5

ékñater näçabdam

ékñateh—because it is seen; na—not; açabdam—indescribable by words.

Because it is seen (that Brahman is vividly described in the Vedic scriptures, it

should be understood that Brahman) is not indescribable by words.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here the word açabdam means "that which cannot be described by words." In

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

this sütra Brahman is described as not (na) indescribable by words (açabdam).
Why is this so? Because ékñateù (because it is seen that Brahman is described in
the passages of the scriptures).
For example, Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad states:

taà tv aupaniñadaà puruñaà påcchämi

"I shall now ask about the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is described
in the Upaniñads."

We may note in this connection that the word aupaniñada means "that glorious
person who is described in the Upaniñads."
We may also note that the word ékñateù is bhava (passive), and it is formed by
adding the affix tip-pratyaya. The unusual usage here is ärña (a certain degree of
grammatical liberty allowed to an exalted author).
That the Supreme Personality of Godhead may be described in words is also
confirmed by the following statement of Kaöha Upaniñad (2.15):

sarve vedä yat-padam ämananti

"All the Vedas describe the feet of the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

When it is said that Brahman cannot be described in words, the intention is that
He cannot be completely described in words. In the same way it is sometimes said
that no one can see Mount Meru because no one can see the entire mountain, but
only small parts of it at any one time. Without accepting this understanding, that
Brahman is not completely expressible by words or understandable by the mind,
we would not properly understand the meaning of the scritpural statements yato
väco nivartate (words cannot describe Brahman), apräpya manasä saha (the mind
cannot understand Brahman), and yad vacanäbhyuditam (No one has the power to
describe Brahman with words). These statements explain that Brahman cannot be
completely described in words.
That Brahman can to some extent be described with words does not contradict
the fact that Brahman reveals Himself by His own wish. The Vedas are actually the
incarnation of Brahman, and therefore Brahman may reveal Himself in the words
of the Vedas.
2. Saàçaya (doubt): This may be so, but still the Suprme Person described in
the words of the Vedas may be saguëa (a manifestation of the Lord according to
the modes of material nature), and not the perfect, complete and pure original
Brahman who remains indescribable by words.
If this doubt were to arise, Çréla Vyäsadeva would answer it in the following

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

sütra.

Sütra 6

gauëaç cen nätma-çabdät

gauëaù—Saguëa Brahman, or the Lord's potencies; cet—if; na—not; ätma—

ätma; çabdät—because of the word.

If (one says that the Brahman described in the Vedas is) Saguëa Brahman (a
manifestation of the modes of material nature, and not the original Supreme Lord
Himself), Then I say this cannot be true, because Brahman is described in the
Vedas as "Atma" (the Supreme Self).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Brahman described in the Vedas is not merely a saguëa manifestation of

the mode of Goodness. Why? Because the Vedas use the word ätmä (the Supreme
Self) to describe Him. For example:

ätmaivedam agra äsét puruña-vidhaù

"The Supreme Self (ätmä), who is a transcendental person, existed before this
material world was manifested in the beginning."
—Väjasaneya-saàhitä

ätmä vä idam eka evägra äsét nänyat kiïcana

miñät sa ékñata lokän nu såja

"Before the material world was manifest, the Supreme Self (ätmä) alone
existed. Nothing else was manifested at that time. The Supreme Self then thought,
`Let me create the material planets.'"
—Aitareya Äraëyaka

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Both these texts clearly refer to the Supreme Self (ätmä) who existed before the
creation of the material world. Also, In the commentary on sütra 1.1.2, I have
already explained that the word ätmä primarily refers to the perfect Supreme
Brahman, and not to anyone or anything else. For this reason the word ätmä used
in the scriptures should be understood to refer to the transcendental Supreme
Personality of Godhead, and not to any material manifestation of the mode of
goodness. The transcendental Supreme Person is described in the following
statements of Vedic literature:

vadanti tat tattva-vidas

tattvaà yaj jïänam advayam
brahmeti päramätmeti
bhagavän iti çabdyate

"Learned transcendentalist who know the Absolute Truth call this non-dual
substance Brahman, Paramätmä or Bhagavän."*
'Çrémad-Bhägavatam 1.2.11

çuddhe mahä-vibhütäkhye
pare brahmaëi çabdyate
maitreya bhagavac-chabdaù
sarva-käraëa-käraëe

"O Maitreya, the word Bhagavän refers to the Supreme Brahman, who is full of
all powers and opulences, the original cause of all causes, and the supreme
transcendence, pure and always untouched by matter."
—Viñëu Puräëa

In this way the supremely perfect and pure Brahman is described by the
statements of the småti-çästras. If it were not possible to describe Him with words,
then the scriptures would not have been able to describe Him in the above
quotations.

Sütra 7

tan niñöhasya mok\çopadeçät

tat—that; niñöhasya—of the faithful devotee; mok\ça—of the liberation;

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

upadeçät—because of the instructions.

(The Brahman described in the scriptures is the transcendental Supreme Lord,

and not a temporary manifestation of the mode of goodness, because the
scriptures) teach us that they who become His devotees attain liberation.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "not" is understood in this sütra and the following three sütras as
well. The liberation of those devoted to Brahman is described in the following
statement of Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.7):

asad vä idam agra äsét tato vai sad ajäyata tad ätmänaà svayam akuruta. . . yadä
hy evaiña etasminn adåçye anätmye anirukte 'nilayane abhayaà pratiñöhaà vindate
'tha so 'bhayaà gato bhavati yadä hy evaiña etasminn udäram antaram kurute atha
tasya bhayaà bhavati

"Before the material cosmos was manifested, it existed in a subtle form. At a

certain time it became manifested in a gross form, and at a certain time the
Supreme Brahman manifested as the Universal Form. When an individual spirit
soul takes shelter of that Supreme Brahman, who is different from the individual
spirit souls, invisible to the gross material senses, indescribable by material words,
and self-effulgent, then the individual spirit soul attains liberation and is no longer
afraid of the cycle of repeated birth and death. If one does not take shelter of this
Supreme Brahman, he must remain afraid of taking birth again and again in this
world."

The Brahman described in this passage of the Vedic literature must be the
Supreme Brahman who is beyond the limitations of the material world, and who is
the creator of the material universes, and yet beyond them. This passage could not
be interpreted to describe a Brahman that is actually a manifestation of the modes
of material nature, for if this were so, then it would not have explained that they
who become devoted to this Brahman attain ultimate liberation. They who are
devoted to the manifestations of the modes of nature do not attain liberation by
that material devotion. Therefore, because the devotees attain liberation, the
Brahman mentioned here must be the transcendental Supreme Person, who is
beyond the modes of nature, and completely non-material in nature.
This non-material, transcendental Supreme Brahman is described in the
following statement of Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.88.5):

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

harir hi nirguëaù säkñät
puruçaù prakåteù paraù
sa sarva-dåg upadrañöä
taà bhajan nirguëo bhavet

"Çré Hari, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, is situated beyond the range of
material nature; therefore He is the supreme transcendental person. He can see
everything inside and outside; therefore He is the supreme overseer of all living
entities. If someone takes shelter at His lotus feet and worships Him, he also
attains a transcendental position."*

Sütra 8

heyatva-vacanäc ca

heyatva—worthy of being abandoned; vacanät—because of the statement; ca—

also.

(The Brahman described in the Vedic scriptures is not a manifestation of the

modes of material nature,) because no scriptural passage advises one to abandon
(Brahman in order to attain something higher).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

If the Brahman described in the scriptures were enmeshed in the modes of

material nature, then why do the scriptures not direct men and women to abandon
the worship of Brahman and worship something higher? If this Brahman were
under the spell of the modes of nature, then why do those aspiring after liberation
worship this Brahman to become free from the grip of the modes of nature?
Clearly, the Brahman described in the scriptures is not entangled in the modes of
material nature, and for this reason the scripture state:

anyä väco vimuïcätha

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "Give up talking about things that have no relation to the Supreme Brahman!"

They who aspire for liberation should meditate with pure faith on this Supreme
Brahman, who is eternal, filled with all transcendental qualities, and the orginal
creator of the material universes. In this way it may be understood that the
Brahman described in the Vedic scriptures is not a product of the modes of
material nature.

Sütra 9

sväpyät

sva—into Himself; apyät—because He merges.

(The Supreme Brahman described in the Vedic literatures is not bound by the
modes of nature,) because He merges into Himself, (unlike the creatures bound by
nature's modes, who all merge into something other than their self).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (5.1.1) explains:

oà pürëam adaù pürëam idaà

pürëät pürëam udacyate
pürëasya pürëam ädäya
pürëam evävaçiñyate

"The Personality of Godhead is perfect and complete, and because He is

completely perfect, all emanations from Him, such as this phenomenal world, are
perfectly equipped as complete wholes. Whatever is produced of the complete
whole is also complete in itself. Because He is the complete whole, even though so
many complete units emanate from Him, He remains the complete balance."*

This verse explains that that which is pürëa (perfect and complete), enters into
itself. This cannot be said of that which is not perfect and complete. If the Supreme

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Brahman described in the scriptures were a product of the modes of material
nature, then it would merge into the Supreme and not into itself. In this way it
could not be described as truly perfect and complete. In this verse the word adaù
(this) refers to the aprakaöa (not manifested in the material world) form of the
Supreme Lord, which is the root from which the various prakaöa forms of the Lord
emanate. Both aprakaöa and prakaöa forms of the Lord are perfect and complete.
The Lord expands from His aprakaöa form and appears in the material world in
His prakaöa form, displaying His räsa-lélä and other transcendental pastimes. When
the prakaöa form of the Lord leaves the material world and enters the aprakaöa
form of the Lord, the Lord remains unchanged, eternally perfect and complete.
That the Lord is untouched by the modes of material nature, and that He expands
into many forms, are confired by the following statement of småti-çästra:

sa devo bahudhä bhütvä

nirguëah puruñottamaù
eké-bhüya punaù çete
nirdoño harir ädi-kåt

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is faultless. Even though He is the

original creator of the material world, He remains always untouched by matter. He
expands in innumerable viñëu-tattva incarnations, and then these incarnations
enter Him and He again becomes one."

At this point someone may raise the following objection: There are actually two
kinds of Brahman: Saguëa Brahman (Brahman enmeshed in the modes of material
nature), and Nirguëa Brahman (Brahman untouched by the modes of material
nature). The first, or Saguëa Brahman, has a form constructed of the mode of
material goodness. This Saguëa Brahman is the omnisicent, all-powerful creator of
the material universes. The second, or Nirguëa Brahman, is pure transcendental
existence only. This Nirguëa Brahman is pure, perfect, and complete. The Saguëa
Brahman is the çakti (potency) described by the Vedas, and the Nirguëa Brahman
is the tätparya (meaning) of the Vedas.
Çréla Vyäsadeva refutes this argument by explaining, in the next sütra:

Sütra 10

gati-samanyät

gati—the conception; samanyät—because of uniformity.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 (This is not so) because the Vedas describe only one kind of Brahman.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In this sütra the word gati means "conception." The Vedic literatures describe
Brahman as full of transcendental knowledge, omniscient, omnipotent, perfect,
complete, pure, the all-pervading Supersoul, the original creator of the material
universes, the object of worship for the saintly devotees, and the bestower of
liberation. The Vedas do not describe two kinds of Brahman: Nirguëa and Saguëa.
Rather, the Vedas describe only one kind of Brahman. This one Brahman is
described by Lord Kåñëa in the following words (Bhagavad-gétä 7.7):

mattaù parataraà nänyat

kiïcid asti dhanaïjaya
mayi sarvam idaà protaà
sütre maëi-gaëä iva

"O conqueror of wealth, there is not truth superior to Me. Everything rests
upon me as pearls strung on a thread."*

Thus the Vedic literatures describe only one kind of Brahman: Nirguëa
Brahman. Çréla Vyäsadeva describes this Nirguëa Brahman in the next sütra:

Sütra 11

çrutatväc ca

çrutavät—because of being described in the Vedas; ca—and.

(There is only one kind of Brahman: Nirguëa Brahman), because Nirguëa

Brahman is described throughout the Vedic literatures.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Nirguëa Brahman is described in the following statement of Çvetäçvatara

Upaniñad (6.11):

eko devaù sarva-bhüteñu güòhaù

sarva-vyäpé sarva-bhütäntarätmä
karmädhyakñaù sarva-bhütädhiväsaù
säkñé cetä kevalo nirguëaç ca

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead manifests Himself as the all-pervading

Supersoul, the witness present in the hearts of all living entities. He witnesses all
activities of the living entity. He is the supreme living force. He is transcendental
to all material qualities."

In this way Nirguëa Brahman is described in the çruti-çästra. The çruti-çästra

does not say that it is impossible to describe Brahman. Some say that Brahman
may be understood not from the direct statements of the Vedic literatures, but
merely indirectly, or from hints found in the Vedic texts. This is not the correct
understanding, for if the Vedic scriptures had no power to directly describe
Brahman, then naturally they would also not have any power to indirectly describe
Him or hint about Him. The Vedic literatures may say that Brahman has no
contact with guëas (either qualities, or the three modes of material nature), and
He cannot be seen by material eyes (adåçya), still it does not say that the words of
the Vedas have no power to describe Him.
At this point someone may raise the following objection: Is it not said in the
Vedas that Brahman has no guëas (qualities)? Your statement that Brahman has
qualities contradicts the description of the scriptures.
To this I reply: This is not true. You can only say this because you do not
understand the confidential meaning of the word nirguëa. Because the Supreme
Brahman is all-knowing and possess many transcendental qualitites, when the
scriptures say that He is nirguëa, it should be understood to mean that He has no
(niù) contact with the three modes of material nature (guëa).
This is confirmed by the following statements of småti-çästra:

sattvädayo na çänöiçe
yatra cäprakåtä guëäù

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead, who possesses numberless

transcendental qualities, is eternally free from the touch of the three modes of

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

material nature: goodness, passion, and ignorance."

samasta-kalyäëa-guëätmako 'sau

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead possesses all auspicious qualities."

For all these reasons it should be accepted that the Vedic literatures have the
power to describe the perfect, pure, complete Supreme Brahman. When it is said
by the scriptures that the Supreme Brahman has no names, forms, or qualities it
should be understood that the Supreme Brahman has no material names, forms, or
qualities, and that His names, forms and qualities are limitless and beyond the
counting of limited spirit souls.
At this point someone may object, saying that the literal interpretation of the
Vedic statements is that Brahman is without qualities (nirguëa), and your
interpretation of the word nirguëa is wrong.
To this objection I reply: Does this description that Brahman has no qualities
help to positively undertand Brahman? If you say yes, then you have to admit that
the Vedas do have the power to describe Brahman; and if you say no, then you
have to admit that your careful studies of the Vedic literature have been a great
waste of time, and as a result you remain wholly ignorant of Brahman's real
nature.

Adhikaraëa 6
The Supreme Brahman is Full of Bliss

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

çabdä väcakatäà yänti

yantränandamayädayaù
vibhum änanda-vijïänaà
taà çuddhaà çraddadhémahi

Let us place our faith in the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is supremely
pure, all-powerful, all-knowing, and full of transcendental bliss. He is perfectly
described in the änandamaya-sütra and the other statements of Vedänta-sütra.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 From the 12th Sütra (änandamaya) to the end of this First Chapter, Çréla
Vyäsadeva will prove that the statements of the Vedic literatures are intended to
describe Brahman. In the First Pada, Çréla Vyäsadeva discusses those words of the
Vedic literatures, which, taken by themselves, whould not necessarily refer to
Brahman, but which, in their Vedic context, certainly do refer to Brahman.
1. Viñaya (Statement): In the passages from Taittiréya Upaniñad beginning
brahma-vid äpnoti param and sa vä eña puruso 'nna-rasamayaù, we find a
description of the annamaya, präëamaya, manomaya, and vijïänamaya stages of
existence, and after that we find the following statement:

tasmäd vä etasmäd vijïänamayäd anyo 'ntarätmänandamayas tenaiña pürëaù. sa

vä eña puruña-vidha eva tasya puruña-vidhatäm anvayaà puruña-vidhaù. tasya
priyam eva çiraù. modo dak\çiëaù pak\çaù. pramoda uttaraù pak\çaù. änanda ätmä.
brahma-pucchaà pratiñöhä.

"Higher than the vijïänamaya stage is the änandamaya stage of existence. The
änandamaya stage is a person whose head is pleasure (priya), whose right side is
joy (moda), whose left side is delight (pramoda), and whose identity is bliss
(änanda). The änandamya is Brahman."

2. Saàçaya (doubt): Is the änandamaya person the individual spirit soul or the
Supreme Brahman?
3. Pürvapakña (the opposition speaks): Because änandamaya is described as a
person it must refer to the conditioned spirit soul residing in a material body.
4. Siddhänta (the proper conclusion): Çréla Vyäsadeva answers this argument by
speaking the following sütra:

Sütra 12

änandamayo 'bhyäsät

änanda—bliss; mayah—full of ; abhyäsät—because of repetition.

The word änandamaya (full of bliss) used in the Vedic literatures must refer to
the Supreme Brahman, for it is repeatedly used to describe Him.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The Supreme Brahman is the änandamaya described in Vedic literature. Why
do we say so? Because the word änandamaya is repeatedly used to describe the
Supreme Brahman. Directly following the description of änandamaya in the
Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.6.1), we find the following statement:

asann eva sambhavati

asad brahmeti veda cet
asti brahmeti ced veda
santam enaà tato viduù

"One who thinks, `The Supreme Brahman does not exist' becomes a demonic
atheist, and one who thinks, `The Supreme Brahman does exist' is known as a
saint."

In this passage the word Brahman was repeated. This repetition is called
abhyäsa. In the previous quotation from Taittiréya Upaniñad, the word Brahman
appeared in the word brahma-puccham, but in that case the word only occurred
once, and therefore there was no abhyäsa.
The four verses of Taittiréya Upaniñad beginning with the verse annäd vai prajäù
prajäyante describe the annamaya, präëamaya, manomaya, and vijïänamaya levels
of existence. Each of these levels is progressively higher than the preceding one,
and after them the änandamaya level, which is different in quality, is the highest of
all. This will be more elaborately explained in the passage following the sütra:
priya-çiras tv ädya-präpter (3.3.13) of this book.
At this point someone may raise the following objection: These stages of
existence describe the conditioned souls who have fallen into the raging river of
material suffering. Why has the stage of blissfulness (änandamaya) been made the
chief of these stages of suffering?"
To this objection I reply: There is no fault in this. The all-blissful Personality of
Godhead is pesent in the hearts of all the suffering conditioned souls, and
therefore it is perfectly appropriate to mention them together.
The Vedic literatures speak in this way to make a difficult subject-matter
intelligible for the unlettered common man. Just as one may point out the small,
difficult-to-see star Arundhati by first pointing to a nearby large easy-to-see star,
and then lead the viewer from that reference-point to the tiny Arundhati, in the
same way the Vedic literatures first describe the suffering-filled life of the
conditioned souls, and then from that reference point teach about the all-blissful
Supreme Personality of Godhead.
At this point someone may raise the following question: Is it, then, that the
Vedic literatures mostly describe topics other than the Supreme Brahman,
(because mostly they describe these "reference-points" to lead the reader to the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Supreme), or do they mostly describe Brahman directly?"
I answer this question: Brahman is directly described in the Vedic literatures.
For example, in the next chapter of Taittiréya Upaniñad, Varuëa, upon being asked
by his son to teach him about Brahman, explained to him that Brahman is the
original creator, maintaner, and destroyer of the material universes. He further
explains that the annamaya, präëamaya, manomaya, and vijïänamaya stages of
existence, one by one, are all Brahman. Then he explained that the änandamaya
stage is the final Brahman. After explaining this, Varuëa concluded his teaching by
confirming that he has spoken a true description of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. He said:

etam änandamayam ätmänam upasaìkramya imän lokän kämäni käma-rüpy

anusaïcarann etat sama gäyann äste

"After leaving his material body, one who understands the supreme
änandamaya person leaves this material world and enters the spiritual world. All
his desires become fulfilled, he attains a spiritual form according to his own wish,
and he dedicates himself to glorifying that supreme änandamaya person."

That the änandamaya person in the Vedic literatures is actually the Supreme
Brahman is also described in the following statement of Çrémad-Bhägavatam
(10.87.17):

puruña-vidho 'nvayo 'tra caramo 'nnamyädiñu yaù

sad asataù paraà tvam atha yad eñv avaçeñämåtam

"O Lord, of these persons beginning with the annamaya-puruña, You are the
Supreme."

We may note in this connection that it is not contradictory or illogical to say

that the Supreme Brahman has a form. The form of the Supreme is described in
the Vedic literatures. For example, the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (3.7.3) explains:

påthivé çaréram

"The material universe is the body of the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

It is because the Supreme Personality of Godhead has a form (çaréra), that this
book, the Vedänta-sütra, is also called Çäréraka-sütra (sütras glorifying the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Supreme Personality of Godhead, who has a form). Some may say that the word
änandamaya does not refer to the Supreme Brahman, and that only the word
brahma-puccham refers to Brahman. This proposal is not very intelligent. Some
others may say that the word änandamaya does not refer to Brahman because the
wordmaya means "transformation". These persons say the word änandamaya
(transformation of bliss) cannot refer to the Supreme Brahman, for Brahman is
naturally full of bliss, and not a transformation of some pre-existing state of
happiness. For this reason the word änandamaya must refer to the individual spirit
soul, and not Brahman. In order to refute this argument, Çréla Vyäsadeva speaks
the following sütra:

Sütra 13

vikära-çabdän neti cen na pracuryät

vikära—transformation; çabdät—from the word; na—not; iti—thus; cet—if; na—

not; pracuryät—because of abundance.

If (someone argues that the Supreme Brahman cannot be the same as the
änandamaya person described in the Vedas) because the affix maya means
"transformation", (and the Supreme Brahman is not a transformation of änanda,
or bliss, then I reply by saying that) because the affix maya used here means
"abundance", this interpretation is not correct, (and therefore the word
änandamaya should be understood to mean "He who is filled with limitless bliss").

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word änandamaya does not mean "he who is a transformation of bliss."
Why? Because the affix maya here means "abundance", and therefore the word
änandamaya means "He who is filled with limitless bliss." The rules of Sanskrit
grammar state that the affix maya may not be used to mean "transformation" in
vaidika words of more than two syllables. The word änanda has three syllables,
and therefore when the word änandamaya appears in the vaidika text of the
Taittiréya Upaniñad, it cannot be interpreted to mean "he who is a transformation
of bliss."
The Supreme Brahman, therefore, is not only free from all suffering, but filled
with limitless bliss. This is confirmed by the following statements of Vedic
scripture:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

eña sarva-bhütäntarätmäpahata-päpmä divyo deva eko näräyaëaù

"There is one Supreme Personality of Godhead: Lord Näräyaëa. He is the

transcendental Supersoul in the hearts of all living entities, and He is completely
free from all sin."
—Subala Upaniñad

paräù paräëäà sakalä na yatra

kleçädayaù sänti parävareçaù

"Suffering is not experienced by the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

When the affix maya means "abundance", it also implies the meaning "essential
nature." Therefore, when we use jyotirmaya (full of light) to mean the sun, the
affix maya can also be understood to mean "essential nature". In this way the word
jyotirmaya means "that of which the essential nature is light." In this way the word
änandamaya may also be interpreted to mean "He whose essential nature is full of
bliss." From all this it may be understood that the word änandamaya clearly refers
to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. It does not refer to the individual spirit
soul.

Sütra 14

tad-hetu-vyapadeçäc ca

tat—of that; hetu—the origin; vypadeçät—because of the statement; ca—also.

Because the Vedic literatures declare that the änandamaya person is the source
of bliss for others, (it should be understood that the änandamaya person is the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, and not the individual spirit soul).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 This is confirmed by the following statement of Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.7):

ko hy evänyat kaù präëyät yady eña äkäça änando na syät. esa evänandayati.

"Who is that person, without whom the living entities cannot feel happiness?
That is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who delights the individual spirit
souls."

This passage explains that the Supreme Brahman is the origin of happiness for
the individual spirit souls. From this we may understand that the cause of
happiness (the Supreme Personality of Godhead), and the receiver of happiness
(the individual spirit soul) must be different persons. They cannot be indentical.
Therefore the word änandamaya refers to the Supreme Personality of Godhead
only. We may also note that the word änanda used in this passage of Taittiréya
Upaniñad (is identical with the word änandamaya..

Sütra 15

mantra-varëikam eva ca géyate

mantra—by the mantra portion of the Vedas; varëikam—described; eva—

certainly; ca—also; géyate—is described.

(The same Supreme Personality of Godhead) described in the mantra-portion

of the Vedas is also described (as the änandamaya-person in the text of the
Taittiréya Upaniñad).

Purport by Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The same Supreme Brahman described in the Vedic mantra, Satyam jïänam
anantam brahma (the Supreme Brahman has no limits. He is eternal and full of
knowledge), is also described in the Taittiréya Upaniñad by the word änandamaya.
In this way the above sütra explains that the word änandamaya does not refer to
the individual living entitiy. Further, the Taittiréya Upaniñad explains:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

brahma-vid äpnoti param

"One who understands the Supreme Brahman attains the Supreme Brahman."

This sentence explains that the individual living entity worships the Supreme
Brahman and then attains the association of that Supreme Brahman. This is the
same Supreme Brahman previously described in the mantra, satyam jïänam
anantam brahma. This is the Supreme Brahman described by the word
änandamaya. This is the Supreme Brahman described in the Taittiréya Upaniñad in
the passage begining with the words tasmäd vä etasmät. Because the Supreme
Brahman is the object of attainment for the individual spirit soul, and because the
object of attainment and the attainer must be two distinct entities, and they cannot
be identical, therefore the Supreme Brahman and the individual living entities
must be distinct persons, and therefore the word änandamaya refers only to the
Supreme Personality of Godhead and not to the individual living entites.
At this point someone may raise the following objection: If the Supreme
Brahman described in the Vedic mantras were different from the individual living
entity, then the individual living enitites could not be the änandamaya person
described in the scriptures. The actual fact is that the Supreme Brahman and the
individual living entities are identical. The Vedic mantras state that when the
individual spirit soul is free from ignorance and liberated from material bondage,
then he become identical with the Supreme Brahman.
To answer this objection, Çréla Vyäsadeva speaks the following sütra.

Sütra 16

netaro 'nupapatteù

na—not; itaraù—the other; upapatteù—because it is illogical.

The other person (individual living entity) is not described (in the mantra
"satyam jïänam anantam brahma"), because such an interpretation of the mantra
is illogical.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The itara (other person) mentioned in this sütra is the individual living entity.
This sütra, therefore, states that the individual spirit soul, even in the liberated
condition, cannot be the Supremem Person described in the mantra, satyam
jïänam anantam brahma. This is confirmed by the following statement of Vedic
literature:

so 'çnute sarvän kämän saha brahmaëä vipaçcitä

"The liberated soul enjoys the fulfillment of all his desires in the company of the
omniscient Supreme Brahman."

In this passage the difference between the liberated spirit-soul and the
Supreme Brahman is described in the words "He enjoys in the company of the
Supreme Brahman." The word vipascit means "He whose consciousness (cit) sees
(paçyati) the great variety of that which exists (vividham). The word paçya is
changed to paç in this word by the grammatical formula påçodarädi-gaëa (Päëini
6.3.109). In this way the liberated individual soul attains the association of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is expert at enjoying many varieties of
transcendental bliss, and with Him, the individual spirit soul enjoys, fulfilling all his
desires.
The word asnute should be understood to mean "enjoys" in this context. The
verb aç means "to enjoy", and although we would expect it to be conjugated in the
parasmaipada, (açnäti), in this passage it is conjugated in the ätmanepada (açnute).
The reason for this is explained by Päëini in the sütra vyatyayo bahulam iti
chandasi tathä småteù (3.1.85).
The Supreme Personality of Godhead is naturally the Supreme Enjoyer, and
the individual spirit soul is His subordinate in the matter of enjoyment also. Still,
the Supreme Personality of Godhead glorifies the liberated souls, when He says:

vaçe kurvanti mäà bhaktäù

sat-striyaù sat-patià yathä

"My pure devotees bring Me under their control, just as faithful wives bring a
kind-hearted husband under their control."

Sütra 17

bheda-vyapadeçäc ca

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 bheda—difference; vyapadeçät—because of the statement; ca—also.

(The Supreme Personality of Godhead and the individual spirit soul are)
different, because the Vedic literature teaches this fact.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Taittiréya Upaniñad (7.1) explains:

raso vai saù rasaà hy eväyaà labdhvänandé bhavati.

"When one understands the Personality of God, the reservoir of pleasure,

Kåñëa, he actually becomes transcendentally blissful."*

This passage clearly shows the difference between the liberated individual spirit
soul and the Supreme Personality of Godhead, whom the Vedic mantras describe
as änandamaya, and who is the transcendental nectar attained by the individual
spirit soul. This difference is also described in the following statement of Båhad-
äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.6):

brahmaiva san brahmäpnoti

"After becoming Brahman, the individual spirit soul attains Brahman."

This statement does not mean that after liberation the individual spirit soul
becomes non-different from the Supreme Brahman, but rather the liberated soul
becomes similar to Brahman and in this condition meets Brahman and attains His
association. This is confirmed by the folllowing statementof Mäëòukya Upaniñad
(3.1.31):

niraïjanaù paramaà sämyam upaiti

"This liberated soul becomes like the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

Also, in the Bhagavad-gita (14.2), the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

declares:

idaà jïänam upäçritya

mama sädharmyam ägatäù

"By becoming fixed in this knowledge, one can attain to the transcendental
nature, which is like My own nature."*

In this way the Vedic literatures teach us that the liberated souls become like
the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
At this point someone may raise the following objection: Is it not so that the
pradhäna feature of the mode of material goodness (sattva-guëa) is the actual
origin of the änandamaya person?
Çréla Vyäsadeva answers this objection in the following sütra.

Sütra 18

kämäc ca nänumänäpekñä

kämät—because of desire; ca—also; na—not; anumäna—to the theory; apekñä—

in relation.

(The änandamaya person) cannot be (a product of the mode of material

goodness), because (the mode of goodness is insentient and desireless, whereas the
änandamaya person) is filled with desires.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Taittiréya Upaniñad explains:

so 'kämayata bahu syäà prajäyeya

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead desired: Let Me become many. Let Me

father many living entities."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 In this way the çruti-çästra explains that the universe was created by the desire
of the änandamaya person. Because the änandamaya person is thus filled with
desires, it is not possible for the pradhäna mode of material goodness, which is
lifeless, insentient, and desireless, to be that änandamaya person.

Sütra 19

asminn asya ca tad-yogam çästi

asmin—in that änandamaya person; asya—of the individual spirit soul; ca—also;
tat—of fearlessness; yogam—contact; sasti—the Vedic scriptures teach.

(The änandamaya person cannot be manifested from the pradhäna mode of

material goodness, because) the Vedic scriptures teach that contact with the
änandamaya person brings fearlessness (to the individual spirit soul).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The çruti-çästra teaches that by taking shelter of the änandamaya person, the
individual spirit soul attains fearlessness, and by declining to take shelter of Him,
the soul becomes plagued with fears. This confirmed by the Taittiréya Upaniñad
(2.7.2) in the passage beginning with the words yadä hy eva.
On the other hand, contact with the material nature brings fear to the individual
spirit souls. The material nature does not bring a condition of fearlessness to the
living entities, and for this reason it is not possible that the pradhäna mode of
material goodness is the änandamaya person. Therefore, the änandamaya person
is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Hari. The änandamaya person is not the
individual spirit soul or the material nature.

Adhikaraëa 7
The Nature of the Person Within

1. Viñaya (Statement): The Chändogya Upaniñad explains:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 atha yä so 'ntar ädityo hiraëmayaù puruço dåçyate hiraëya-çmaçrur hiraëya-keça
apräëakhät sarva eva suvarëas tasya yathä kapyasaà puëòarékam evam ak\çiëi
tasyodeti näma sa eña sarvebhyaù päpmäbhyah udita udeti hä vai sarvebhyaù
päpmäbhyo ya evaà veda tasya åk säma ca gesnau tasmäd udégithas tasmät tv
evodgataitasya hi gäthä sa eña ye cämuñmat paraëco lokas teñäà ceñöe deva-
kämänäà cety adhidaivatam. . . athädhyätmam atha ya eño 'ntar-ak\çiëi puruño
dåçyate saiva åk tat säma tad ukthaà tad yajus tad brahma tasyaitasya tad eva
rüpaà yad amuñya rüpam. yäv amuñya gesnau tau gesnau yan näma tan näma.

"Within the sun-globe is a golden person, with golden hair, a golden beard, and
a body golden from His fingernails to all His limbs. His eyes are like lotus flowers.
He is above all sin. One who understands Him also becomes situated above all sin.
The Åg and Säma Vedas sing His glories. From Him the highest spiritual planets,
where the demigods desire to go, have become manifested. This is the golden
person present among the demigods. . . Now I shall describe the person within the
human mind and heart. Within the eyes a wonderful person may be seen. The Åg,
Säma, and Yajur Vedas glorify Him. He is identical with the golden person who
resides in the sun."
2. Saàçaya (doubt): "Is this an individual spirit soul who by great piety and
spiritual knowledge has attained this exalted position, or is this the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, who appears as the all-pervading Supersoul?"
3. Pürvapakña (the opposing argument): Because this person has a form and
various humanlike features, He must be a pious spirit soul. By his piety and
spiritual knowledge he has become able to become the great controller of
demigods and human beings, who fulfills their desires, and grants them the results
of thier actions.
4. Siddhänta (Conclusion): Çréla Vyäsadeva addresses these views in the
following sütra.

Sütra 20

antas tad-dharmopadeçät

antah—within; tat—of Him; dharma—nature; upadeçät' because of the

instruction.

The person within (the sun and the eye is the Supreme Personality of Godhead),
because the Vedic literatures explain that His nature fits the description of the Lord.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The person within the sun and the eye is the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
who is present everywhere as the Supersoul. This person is not the individual spirit
soul. Why? Because the Vedic literatures describe Him as being sinless and
possessing all the qualities of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. For example,
He is free from all sin and all karma. The slightest fragrance of karma cannot
touch Him. This is not possible for the individual spirit souls, who remain subject
to the laws of karma. In many other ways also the individual spirit soul does not fit
the description of this perosn within the sun and the eye. For example: the
individual spirit soul is not the fulfiller of the desires of the living entities, nor is he
the awarder of the fruits of action, nor is he the object of the worship of the living
entities.
At this point someone may raise the following objection: Because the person
within the sun and the eye is described as having a body, therefore He must be an
individual spirit soul, for the Supreme Brahman has no body.
To this objection I reply: This is not necessarily so. The puruña-sükta prayers
(Åg Veda 10.90) and many other Vedic verses describe the transcendental body of
the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The Svetäçvatara Upaniñad also describes
the Supreme Lord's transcendental body in the following words:

vedhäham etaà puruñaà mahäntam

äditya-varëaà tamasaù parastät

"I know that Supreme Personality of Godhead, whose form is transcendental to

all material conceptions of darkness."*

Sütra 21

bheda-vyapadeçäc cänyaù

bheda—difference; vyapadeçät—because of the statement; ca—also; anyaù—

another.

The Supreme Personality of Godhead is different from the individual spirit soul
because this doctrine is taught in all Vedic literatures.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The golden person within the sun is not the individual spirit soul who is the
solar diety and who thinks the sun-planet is his own body, but rather that golden
person is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the Supersoul who is present in
every atom. This is confirmed by the following statement of the Båhad-äraëyaka
Upaniñad:

ya äditye tiñöhann ädityäd antaro yam ädityo

na veda yasyädityaù çaréraà ya ädityam antaro
yamayaty eña ta ätmäntaryämy amåtaù

"That person situated within the sun, who is not the sun-god, whom the sun-god
does not know, who manifests the sun-planet as His own body, who controls the
sun-planet from within, that person is the immortal Supreme Personality of
Godhead, who is present within the heart of every living entity as the Supersoul."

From this description we may understand that the golden person within the sun
is not the individual spirit soul who is the sun-god, but the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. Both this passage and the previous quoted passage from the Chändogya
Upaniñad agree on this point.

Adhikaraëa 8
The Word "Äkäça" Refers to Brahman

1. Viñaya (Statement): The Chändogya Upaniñad states:

asya lokasya kä gatir iti äkäça iti hoväca

sarväëi hä vä imäni bhütäny äkäçäd eva
samutpadyante. äkäçaà pratyastaà yänty äkäçaù
paräyanam iti.

"He asked: What is the ultimate destination of all living entities? He replied:
Äkäça is the ultimate destination. All living entities and all material elements have

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

emanated from äkäça, and they will again enter into äkäça."
2. Saàçaya (doubt): What is the meaning of the word äkäça here? Does it mean
the element ether, or does it mean the Supreme Brahman?
3. Pürvapakña (the opposing argument): The word äkäça here means "the
element ether", because air and the other elements evolve from it. Indeed, ether is
the origin of all the other elements.
4. Siddhänta (Conclusion): Çréla Vyäsadeva refutes this argument in the
following sütra.

Sütra 22

äkäças tal-liìgät

äkäçah—the word äkäça; tat—of Him; lingat—because of the qualities.

The word "äkäça" in the Vedic literature refers to the Supreme Brahman, for
the description of "äkäça" aptly fits the description of the qualities of Brahman.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word äkäça here refers to Brahman and not the material element ether.
Why? Because the äkäça described here has alll the characteristics of Brahman.
The äkäça described here is the source from which the material elements emanate,
the maintainer who sustains them, and the ultimate refuge into which they enter at
the time of comsic annihilation. That is Brahman. The scriptures explain: sarväëi
hä vä imäni bhütäni (All material elements have emanated from äkäça). Because
ether is one of the material elements, it is included in the word sarväëi (all the
elements). It is not the independent origin of the causal chain, but merely one of
the links. For this reason it cannot be the äkäça that is the source of all the
elements (including ether). The use of the word eva (certainly) in this context
reinforces the interpretation that äkäça refers to Brahman because eva implies
"there is no other cause". For this reason äkäça cannot refer to the material
element ether. For example, clay is the origin from which clay pots are produced,
and other material substances are the origins of other objects, but all these
"origins" are not primal origins, but merely intermediate steps in a great causal
chain. By using the word eva (the sole cause) the text clearly refers to the primal,
uncaused cause, Brahman, and not ether or any other particular intermediate stage
in the causal chain. The Vedic literatures describe Brahman as the master of all

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

potencies and the source of all forms, and therefore, because the äkäça is described
(eva) as the "sole cause", it can refer only to the primal cause Brahman and not the
material element ether. Although the word äkäça generally means "ether" in
ordinary usage, in this context the secondary meaning "Brahman" is far more
appropriate.

Adhikaraëa 9
The Word "Präëa" Refers to Brahman

1. Viñaya (Statement): The Chändogya Upaniñad explains:

katama sa devateti. präëa iti hoväca. sarväëi hä vai imäni bhütäni präëam
eväbhisamviçanti präëam abhyujjéhate.

"They asked: Who is this deity of whom you speak? He replied: It is präëa.
From präëa all the material elements have emanated, and into präëa they enter at
the end."
2. Saàçaya (doubt): Does the word präëahere refer to the breath that travels in
and out of the mouth, or does it refer to the Supreme Personality of Godhead?
3. Pürvapakña (opposing argument): The ordinary meaning of the word präëa is
"the breath that travels in and out the mouth." That meaning is intended here.
4. Siddhänta (Conclusion): Çréla Vyäsadeva refutes this view by speaking the
following sütra.

Sütra 23

ata eva präëaù

ataù eva—therefore; präëah—the word präëa.

The word "präëa" in the Vedic literatures refers to the Supreme Brahman, for
the same reasons expressed in the previous sütra.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The word präëa in this passage from Chändogya Upaniñad refers to the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, and not to the transformations of air. Why?
Because this text describes präëa as the original cause from which the material
elements have emanated, and into which they enter at the end. These are the
characteristics of the Supreme Brahman, and not the material element air.

Adhikaraëa 10
The Word "Jyotis" Refers to Brahman

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Chändogya Upaniñad (3.13.7) states:

atha yad ataù paro divo jyotir dépyate viçvataù påñöheñu sarvataù påñöheñv
anuttameñüttameñu lokeñu idaà väva tad yad idam asminn antaù puruñe jyotiù

"Jyotis shines in the spiritual world, above all the material planets. Jyotis forms
the background on which all material universes and all material planets, from
lowest to highest, rest. This jyotis is present in the heart of every living being."
2. Saàçaya (doubt): What is the jyotis described here? Is it the light of the sun
and other luminous objects, or is it the Supreme Brahman?
3.Pürvapakña (the opposing argument): Because there is no mention of
Brahman in this passage, the word jyotis in this text must refer to the light of the
sun and other luminous objects.
4. Siddhänta (Conclusion): Çréla Vyäsadeva replies in the following sütra.

Sütra 24

jyotiç-caraëäbhidhänät

jyotih—of the jyotih; caraëa—of the feet; abhidhänät' because of the mention.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Because the "jyotis" in this text is described as having feet, (it must refer to the
Supreme Brahman).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word jyotis here should be understood to mean "the Supreme Brahman".
Why? Because this jyotis is described as having feet. The Chändogya Upaniñad
(3.12.6) states:

etävan asya mahimato jyäyäàs" ca puruñaù. pado 'sya sarva-bhütäni tri-pad

asyämåtaà divi

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is full of glory and opulence. His one
foot is all material elements and all living entities, and His three feet are the
eternal spiritual world."

In the previously quoted text of Chändogya Upaniñad (3.13.7), as well as in this

text from Chändogya Upaniñad (3.12.6), (where Brahman is described as having
four feet), the spiritual world is mentioned. Although both texts are separated by a
little distance, they are brought together by joint mention of the spiritual world, as
well as by use of the relative and co-relative pronouns yat and tat. For these
reasons it should be understood that both texts describe the all-powerful Supreme
Personality of Godhead. For these reasons the jyotis described in this text is the
all-powerful Supreme Personality of Godhead, and not the light of the sun and
other luminous objects.

Sütra 25

chando-'bhidhänän neti cen na tathä ceto 'rpaëa-nigädät tathä hi darçanam

chandah—of a meter; abhidhänät—because of being the description; na—not;

tathä—in that way; cetah—the mind; arpaëa—placing; nigädät—because of the
instruction; tathä hi' furthermore; darçanam—logical.

If someone were to claim: “The word {.sy 1682}jyotis" here does not refer
to Brahman, but to the Gäyatré meter," then I would reply: This is not true. The

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Gäyatré meter is taught to assist meditation on Brahman. For this reason it is
logical and appropriate to interpret the word jyotis to mean "Brahman".

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

At this point someone may raise the following objection:Is it not true that the
Vedic literatures state:

gäyatré vä idaà sarvaà bhütaà yad idaà kiïcit

"Gäyatré is everything that exists."

tam eva bhüta-väk-påthivé-çaréra-hådaya-prabhedaiù

"Gäyatré is everything. Gäyatré is speech, earth, body, and mind."

caiña catuñ-padä ñaò-vidhä gäyatré tad etad åcäbhyuktam

"The Gäyatré meter, of which there are four feet and six varieties, is extensively
employed in the mantras of the Vedas."

etävan asya mahimä

"Gäyatré is glorious."

For these reasons it should be understood that the word jyotis in the Vedic
literatures refers to the Gäyatré mantra. Why, without any good reason, do you
insist that the word jyotis refers to Brahman?
To this objection I reply: Gäyatré is a meter, and therefore it is not sensible to
claim that it is everything, and everything has emanated from it. For this reason it
is only reasonable to assume that the word jyotis in this context refers to Brahman
and not Gäyatré. Why? Because in this sütra Çréla Vyäsadeva states: tathä hi
darçanam (that the word jyotis refers to Brahman is only logical and consistent.
Any other interpretation is illogical).

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The truth is that the Supreme Brahman has incarnated in this world in the form
of the Gäyatré mantra to enable the living entities to meditate on Him. This fact is
confirmed by the statements of Vedic literature. If we accept that Gäyatré is an
incarnation of Brahman, then the scriptural statement "Gäyatré is everything" is
perfectly sensible. Otherwise, the interpretation we concoct is illogical and forced.
In this way we have demonstrated that the Gäyatré mantra is an incarnation of
Brahman.

Sütra 26

bhütädi-pada-vyapadeçopapatteç caivam

bhüta—the living entities; ädi—beginning with; pada—feet; vyapadeça—of the

statement; upapatteù—for the reason; ca—also; evam—in this way.

Because the Vedic literatures state that the living entities, (their speech, bodies,
and minds are the four) feet (of Gäyatré), it should be understood (that Gäyatré is
an incarnation of Brahman).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Gäyatré should be considered the same as Brahman. Why? Because Gäyatré is

described in the words:

tam eva bhüta-väk-påthivé-çaréra-hådaya-bhedaiù

"Gäyatré is everything. The four feet of Gäyatré are speech, earth, body, and
mind."

Without Gäyatré being an incarnation of Brahman, it is not possible for these

four things to be Gäyatré's feet. For this reason, as previously explained, it is only
natural to interpret the word "Gäyatré" to mean "Brahman". In the two quotations
from Vedic literature that have formed the basis of our discussion, the word dyu
(the spiritual world) has occurred. This appearance of the word dyu in both
passages further confirms that the ambiguous words in these two passages refer to
Brahman, and not to something else.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 At this point someone may raise the following objection: The word dyu
appearing in these two passages refers to different things.
To answer this objection, Çréla Vyäsadeva speaks the following sütra.

Sütra 27

upadeça-bhedän neti cen nobhayasminn apy avirodhät

upadeça—of instruction; bhedät—because of the difference; na—not; iti—thus;

cet—if; na—not; ubhayasmin—in both places; api—also; avirodhät—because of
non-contradicition.

The objection that because the two scriptural passages employ the word "dyu"
in two different cases (locative and ablative), therefore they describe two different
objects, which cannot both be Brahman, is not a valid objection. The use of the
two different causes does not mean that the two passages must describe two
different things.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

At this point someone may raise the following objection: Is it not so that two
contradictory descriptions of Brahman are found in the scriptures? In one place
the scriptures state:

tri-padasyämåtaà divi

"The eternal Supreme Personality of Godhead resides in the spiritual world,

which constitutes three-quarters of all existence."

In another place the scriptures state:

paro divaù

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead resides on top of the spiritual world."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 In the first quotation the spiritual world was placed in the locative case. Since
this is so, both passages contradict each other, They describe two different objects,
one within the spiritual world, and the other above it.
To this objection I reply: Why do you say this? Both passages refer to the same
object. The uses of the locative and ablative cases in these quotations does not
present a contradiction. for example, in the material world a parrot may be said to
be "in" a tree or "on" it. There is no real difference in the two statements. In the
same way the Supreme Personality of Godhead may be said to be "in" the spiritual
world or "on" it. There is no real difference.

Adhikaraëa 11
The Word "Präëa" Refers to Brahman

1. Viñaya (Statement): In the Kauñétaké Brähmaëa, Pratardana, the son of

Mahäräja Divodasa, was able, by virtue of His chivalry and heroism, to enter the
favorite residence of Mahäräja Indra. When Indra granted Pratardana a
benediction, and Pratardana requested Indra choose the benediction he was to
give, Indra instructed Pratardana in the following words:

präëo 'smi prajïätmä taà mäm äyur-amåtam upasasva

"I am präëa. An intelligent person will worship me as the great immortal

person."

2. Saàçaya (doubt): Who is this person named präëa? Is he an individual spirit

soul, or is He the Supreme Personality of Godhead who resides in everyone's heart
as the Supersoul?
3. Pürvapakña (the opposing argument): The words "indra" and präëa here
refer to a specific individual spirit soul. When pratardana inquired, Indra replied
by saying the worship of Indra was the most beneficial activity for the living
entities.
4. Siddhänta (conclusion): Çréla Vyäsadeva responds to this argument in the
following sütra.

Sütra 28

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

präëas tathänugamät

präëaù—the word präëa; tathä—in the same way; anugamät—because of the

context.

The word "präëa" (should be understood to refer to Brahman) because of the

context of it's use.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The präëa here must refer to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is
present in everyone's heart as the Supersoul. Präëa here cannot refer to the
individual spirit soul. Why? Çréla Vyäsadeva explains: tathänugamät (because of
the context). The präëa described here is intelligence, the self, and transcendental
bliss. He is free from old-age and death. These attributes clearly indicate that the
word präëa here refers to the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
At this point someone may raise the following objection: Is it not true that to
interpret the word präëa here is mean Brahman is very inappropriate? Mahäräja
Indra is speaking, and he says präëo 'smi (I am präëa). The speaker is Mahäräja
Indra, and he clearly refers to himself. He then proceeds to further identify
himself, saying: tri-çirñäëaà tvañöram ahanam aruëmukhän åñén çalavåkebhyaù
prayacchan (I killed Våträsura, the three-headed son of Tvañöä, and I gave the
Aruëmukha sages to the çalavåkas). All this shows that the Indra described here is
an individual spirit soul who advises the living entities to worship him. Even
though at the end of this passage präëa is described as änanda (transcendental
bliss), this also is not inconsistent, because the transcendental glories of the
individual spirit souls are also described in the Vedic literatures. In fact, when
Indra says he is präëa and everyone should worship him, he refers to himself, the
individual spirit soul Indra. Indra's statement may be compared to the advice of
the Vedic literature: väcaà dhenum upäséta (One should worship the goddess of
speech just as one worships the cow). Because Mahäräja Indra is the strongest of
living entities, and because strength is identified with the living-force (präëa), he
identifies himself with that präëa. This is perfectly in accord with the statement of
Vedic literature: präëo vai balam (the living-force is strength). In this way it should
be understood that the words präëa and indra here refer to a specific individual
spirit soul.
Çréla Vyäsadeva refutes this argument in the next sütra.

Sütra 29

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

na vaktur ätmopadeçäd iti ced adhyätma-sambandha-bhüma hy asmin

na—not; vaktuù—of the speaker; ätma—of the self; upadeçät—because of the

instruction; iti—thus; cet—if; adhyätma—to the Supreme Personality of Godhead;
sambandha' references; bhüma—abundance; hi—indeed; asmin—in this Upaniñad.

If it is said that the speaker here refers to himself, I say that is not true. In this
passage there are many references to the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In this sütra the word adhyätma-sambandha means "with reference to the

Supreme Personality of Godhead", and the word bhuma means "abundance". In
this chapter of Kauñétaké Upaniñad the word präëa repeatedly appears in various
contexts where it must unavoidably be interpreted to mean "the Supreme
Personality of Godhead."

For example:

1. When Pratardana asked for the most beneficial gift, or in other words
liberation, Indra replied replied by saying "Worship me as präëa." In this context
präëa must mean "the Supreme Personality of Godhead", for only He can grant
liberation.

2. The Upaniñad explains:

eña eva sädhu karma kärayati

"Präëa bestows upon the living entity the power to act wonderfully."

This must refer to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the supreme

controller, and not to the tiny demigod Indra.

3. The Upaniñad also explains:

tad yathä rathasyäreñu nemir arpitä näbhavara arpita evam evaita bhüta-

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

mätraù. prajïä-mäträsv arpitaù. prajïä-mäträù präëe 'rpitaù.

"Just as in a chariot wheel the rim rests on the spokes, and the spokes on the
hub, in the same way the material elements rest on prajïä (intelligence), and
prajïä rests on präëa."

This quote states that everything sentient and insentient is maintained by präëa.

4. The Upaniñad also explains:

sa eña präëa eva prajïätmänando 'jaro 'måtaù. eña lokädhipatir eña sarveçvaraù

"Präëa is the Supersoul present in all living entites. Präëa is the transcendental
bliss. Präëa remains eternally untouched by old-age and death. Präëa is the master
of all living entities and all planets. Präëa is the Supreme Controller."

Because präëa is transcendental bliss and has the various qualitites described
here, the word präëa in this context can refer only to the Supreme Brahman, the
Personality of Godhead, who is present in the hearts of all living entities as the
Supersoul. The word präëa here cannot possibly refer to anyone else.
At this point someone may raise the following objection: Is it not so that Indra
directly describes himself as präëa. Why does he do this if your interpretation that
präëa means "Supreme Brahman" is correct?
Çréla Vyäsadeva answers this objection in the following sütra.

Sütra 30

çästra-dåñöyä tüpadeço vämadevavat

çästra—of scripture; dåñöyä—from the viewpoint; tu—but; upadeçaù—instruction;

vämadeva—Vämadeva; vat—like.

Indra speaks in this way (identifying himself with Brahman) in accordance with
the teaching of Vedic literature. He does this just as the sage Vämadeva also did.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The word tu (but) is used here to remove doubt. Even though Indra was
perfectly aware that he was an individual spirit soul and not the Supreme
Brahman, he still said, "Worship me, knowing me to be Brahman", and this
statement is actually perfectly correct according to the philosophy of Vedic
literature. It is not untrue. For example, the Chändogya Upaniñad states:

na vai väco na cakñümsi na çroträëi na manäàséty äcakñate präëa ity eväcakñate

präëo hy evaitäni sarväëi bhavanti

"The senses are not properly called `voices', `eyes', `ears', and `minds'. The
proper name for them all is präëa. Everything that is exists is präëa."

Because präëa maintains their activities, the senses are identified as präëa. The
learned, self-realized speaker, Indra, wishing to teach his humble, well-behaved
student, instructed him: "I am that präëa." This means that Indra is dependent on
präëa, or Brahman, not that he is identical with Brahman in all respects.
The example of Vämadeva is found in the following passage of Båhad-äraëyaka
Upaniñad (1.4.10):

tad vaitat paçyan nåñir vämadevaù pratipade ahaà manur abhavaà süryaç ca

"Seeing this, the sage Vämadeva repeated at every moment:`I was Manu. I was
the sun-god.'"

Here Vämadeva identifies himself with Manu and the sun-god because the
Supreme Brahman is the controller who grants powers to Vämadeva, Manu, and
the sun-god. Because they all obtain their powers from the Supreme Brahman, in
one sense, they are all one. The Supreme Brahman is all-pervading. He is, in one
sense, one with everything that is pervaded by Him. This confirmed by the
following statements of småti-çästra:

yo 'yaà tavägato deva-samépaà devatä-gaëaù sa tvam eva jagat-srañöä yataù

sarva-gato bhavän

"Whoever comes before You, be he a demigod, is created by You, O Supreme

Personality of Godhead."*
—Viñëu Puräëa 1.9.69

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

sarvaà samäpnoñi tato 'si sarvam

"You are all-pervading, and thus you are everything."*

—Bhagavad-gétä 11.40

In ordinary usage also, when there is a great assembly in a certain place, people
call that oneness, because there is unity of place, and also when there is agreement
of opinion, that is also called oneness. For example, it is said: "In the evening the
scattered cows assemble in one place and thus attain oneness," and "The disputing
monarchs finally agreed and became one in their opinion."
At this point someone may raise the following objection: Is it not so that
although there are many passages indicating that the word präëa in this passage
refers to Brahman, still there are many other passages that demonstrate that it is
not possible for the word präëa to refer Brahman. Some examples are:

na väcaà vijijïäsitä vaktäraà vidyät

"Do not try to understand the meaning of a statement without first

understanding who has spoken it."
—Kauñétaké Upaniñad (3.8)

tri-çirñäëaà tvañöram ahanam

"I am the Indra who killed Våträsura, the three-headed son of Tvañöä."

These two quotations clearly identify that the speaker of the passage in question
was the demigod Indra, who is an individual spirit soul.

That the word präëa refers to the life-force, or breath within the body, is
confirmed by the following scriptural statements:

yävad asmin çarére präëo vasati tävad äyur atha khalu präëa eva prajïätma idaà
çaréraà parigåhyotthäpayati

"As long as präëa remains within it, the body is alive. Präëa is the conscious
spirit soul. Präëa grasps this material body, and makes it rise up and move about."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 —Kauñétaké Upaniñad (2.2-3)

yo vai präëaù sa prajïä yä prajïä sa präëaù. sa hä hy etäv asmin çarére vasataù.

sahotkramate.

"Präëa is the same as prajïä (consciousness). Prajïä is the same as präëa.

Together they reside in the material body. At the last moment they both leave the
body together."
—Kauñétaké Upaniñad

These quotations clearly show that it is not impossible to interpret the word
präëa in this context to mean "the individual spirit soul" or "living force". The
scriptures teach us that both are actually identical, the living force being the active
expression of the inactive spirit-soul.
In this way it is valid to interpret the word präëa in three ways: 1. the individual
spirit soul; 2. the living-force; and 3. the Supreme Brahman. The word präëa here
refers to all three. All three are worshipable for the living entities.
Çréla Vyäsadeva refutes this argument in the following sütra.

Sütra 31

jéva-mukhya-präëa-liìgän neti cen nopäsya-traividhyäd äçritatväd iha tad-yogät

jéva—of the individual spirit soul; mukhya—the primary; präëa—living force;

liìgät—the signs; na—not; iti—thus; cet' if; na—not; upäsya—worshipable;
taividhyät—because of being there; äçritatvät—because of taking shelter; iha—here;
tat-yogät—because of appropriateness.

If someone says the word "präëa" also refers to the individual spirit soul and
the primary living-force in addition to referring to Brahman, then I reply that such
an interpretation is not correct. If the word "präëa" referred to all three, then all
three would be worshipable. This view is not correct, because neither logic nor the
authority of scripture support it.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Someone may say that the natural features of the individual spirit soul and the
living-force are such that they are proper objects of worship. To this I reply: This is
not true. Why? For then there would be three objects of worship. When Indra says,
"Worship me as präëa," he uses only one sentence. The rules of rhetoric demand
that a sentence have only one correct interpretation, and therefore if we say that
the word präëa here refers to three different objects, we shall break that rule. This
is the true meaning: There are three possible ways to interpret the meaning of
präëa in this context: 1. Take all these passages, including what directly mentions
Brahman, as referring to the individual spirit soul and living-force; 2. Take these
passages as referring some to the individual soul and living-force, and some to
Brahman. and 3. Take these passages as all referring to Brahman. The first
possibility has already been clearly refuted, The second possiblity is not very
acceptable, for it recommends that there are three distinct objects of worship. Çréla
Vyäsadeva says the third possibility is actually logical because äçritatvät (this view
is supported by the statements of Vedic literature).
We may see that many passages in Vedic literature that seem to refer to the
individual spirit soul or the living force, in fact refer to Brahman.
If at this point someone were to object: Is it not true that in this passage the
natural sense of the words supports the interpretations of the individual spirit
soul and the living force?" I would reply by saying: In this passage the worship of
präëa is described as the most beneficial activity for the living entities. For this
reason the interpretation of the Supreme Brahman is logical. For this reason Çréla
Vyäsadeva states in the sütra, tad-yogät (because this is logical).
Someone may then object: Is it not true that the scriptures explain that the
präëa and prajïä both reside within the body of the individual spirit soul, and also
leave that body together at the time of death? How is this possible if you say that
präëa means "Brahman"?
To this objection I reply: Brahman is present in the body of the individual spirit
soul in two ways: as kriyä-çakti (the potency of action), which is also known as
präëa, and as jïäna-sakti (the potency of knowledge), which is also known as
prajïä. Both are manifested from Brahman. These two potencies remain within
the body of the individual spirit soul, and also leave it together at the time of
death.
Another objection may be raised in the following words: Is it not true that
präëa and the other words you claim are names of the Supreme Brahman are all
actually adjectives, and therefore cannot function as names?
To this objection I reply: This not true. These words are simultaneously
adjectives and nouns. When Indra says präëo 'smi prajïätmä (I am präëa, prajïä,
and ätmä), he uses these words as nouns. For these reasons präëa, prajïä, and
other words used by Indra should be understood to refer to Brahman.
At this point a further objection may be raised: Is it not true that in the
beginning you adequately demonstrated that the word präëa refers to Brahman?
Most of your arguments are redundant.
To this objection I reply: This is not true. In the beginning I dispelled the doubts
that may have arisen in regard to the single word präëa taken by itself. After that I

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

discussed the word präëa in relation to a specific quotation, where it was related
with other words, such as änanda, and in this discussion I demonstrated that the
word präëa was used there in such a way that it could only be understood to mean
Brahman, and not the individual spirit soul, or anything else. For this reason I have
discussed this specific passage of Kauñétaké Upaniñad separately.

Pada 2

Adhikaraëa 1
The Word "Manomaya" Refers to Brahman

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

manomayädibhiù çabdaiù
svarüpaà yasya kértyate
hådaye sphuratu çrémän
mamäsau çyämasundaraù

In the First Pada of this chapter it was said that one should inquire about the
Supreme Brahman, the Supreme Personality of Godhead and the creator of all
universes. Certain words used in Vedic literature were also clearly shown to refer
to that Supreme Brahman. In the Second and Third Padas it will be demonstrated
that certain other words, although less clearly related to Brahman, also describe
Him.
In the Chändogya Upaniñad, Çäëòilya-vidyä (3.14.1) the following explanation
is given:

sarvaà khalv idaà brahma taj jalän iti çänta upäséta. atha khalu kratumayaù
puruñaù. yathä kratur asmin loke puruño bhavati tathetaù pretya bhavati. sa kratuà
kurvéta. manomayaù präëa-çaréro bhä-rüpaù satya-saìkalpa äkäçätmä sarva-karmä
sarva-kämäù sarva-gandhaù sarva-rasaù sarvam idaà abhyäto aväkyän ädaraù.

"Everything is Brahman. From Him everything has come. The peaceful sage
should worship Brahman with this idea. The Supreme Personality of Godhead is
the activities of devotional service. When devotional service is performed in this
world the Supreme Personality of Godhead is present. As one performs devotional
service in this life he will attain an appropriate body after death. The Supreme
Personality of Godhead is known by those whose minds are pure. He is the
controller of all life. He is effulgent and glorious. His every desire is automatically

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

fulfilled. He is all-pervading. He is the original creator of everything. He fulfills all
desires. He possesses all pleasant fragrances. He is all sweetness. He is present
everywhere. He cannot be described in words. He cannot be known."

Saàçaya: Do the adjectives (beginning with manomaya) in this passage describe

the jéva or the Paramätmä?
Pürvapakña: The words manaù and präëa here appropriately describe the jéva.
The Muëòaka Upaniñad (2.1.2) explains: apräëo hy amanäù çubhraù (The splendid
Supreme Person has neither breath nor mind). Because this passage from the
Chändogya Upaniñad contradicts the description of the Supreme Lord in this way,
it should be understood to refer to the jéva. The opening words sarvaà khalv idaà
brahma (Everything is Brahman) do not necessarily mean that the entire passage
following them are about Brahman, but are merely spoken so that the worshiper
may become peaceful. The teaching there is that because Brahman is everything
one should become peaceful. The rest of the passage should then be understood to
refer to the jéva and the word brahma at the end of the passage should also be
understood to refer to the jéva.
Siddhänta: The proper conclusion is:

Sütra 1

sarvatra prasiddhopadeçät

sarvatra—everywhere; prasiddha—celebrated; upadeçät—because of the teaching.

(The word "manomaya" here refers to the Paramätmä) because (in this
passage) the famous (attributes of the Paramätmä as are taught) everywhere (in
Vedänta literature are) described.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

This passage describes the Paramätmä and not the jéva. Why? Because the
qualities that belong only to the Paramätmä, beginning with His being the creator
of the material universes, and which are described everywhere (saravatra) in
Vedänta literature, are mentioned in this passage in the phrase taj-jalän and other
phrases and words also.
Although the opening words of this passage (sarvaà khalv idaà brahma) are
not intended to teach about Brahman but to invoke peacefulness, the word

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

manomaya definitely describes the Supreme Brahman. The word kratu means
"devotional service" and manomaya means "He who can by understood by a pure
mind." The Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.19) explains manasaivänudrañöavyam
(He may be seen by a pure mind). The passage yato väcä nivartante apräpyo
manasä saha (The Supreme cannot be described in words or understood by the
mind) means the foolish cannot understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead
and even the wisest sages cannot understand Him completely.
The word präëa-çaréra (life-body) means {.sy 168}He who is the controller of
life." Some also interpret this word to mean "He whose transcendental form is
most dear." The words apräëo hy amanäù (He has neither breath nor mind) may
mean either that He is supremely independent and does not need breath or mind,
or it may mean that he does not possess material breath or material mind. The
çruti-çästra explains manovän (The Supreme has a spiritual mind) and änéda-vätam
(The Supreme has spiritual breath).
Other scriptural passages also state that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is
described by the word manomaya. Some of these passages follow.

manomayaù präëa-çaréra-netä

"He is understood by the pure mind (manomaya). He is the guide of the body
and senses."
—Muëòaka Upaniñad 2.2.7

sa eño 'ntar-hådaya äkäças tasminn ayaà puruño manomayo 'måtamayo

hiraëmayaù

"The golden Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is full of nectar, and who is
known by the pure mind (manomaya), resides in the sky of the heart."
—Taittiréya Upaniñad 1.6.1

hådä manéñä manasäbhiklpto ya etad vidur amåtas te bhavanti

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is known by they who have a pure heart
and a pure mind. They who know Him in this way become free from death."
—Kaöha Upaniñad 7.9

präëasya präëaù

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is the life of all life."

—Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 4.4.18

Sütra 2

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

vivakñita-guëopapatteç ca

vivakñita—wished to be said; guëa—qualities; upapatteù—because of being

appropriate; ca—and.

The word "manomaya" here must refer to Brahman) because the qualities
(given here) most appropriately describe Brahman.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Manomaya (knowable by the pure mind), präëa-çaréra (the controller of life),

bhä-rüpa (effulgent and glorious) and the other qualities mentioned here are
appropriate for the Supreme Personality of Godhead but not at all for the jéva.

Sütra 3

anupapattes tu na çäréraù

anupapatteù—because of inappropriateness; tu—indeed; na—not; çäréraù—the

jéva.

(The word "manomaya" here) cannot refer to the jéva because the qualities
(described in this passage) cannot be attributed to him.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The manomaya her cannot refer to the jéva because it is not possible that the
qualities described here refer to the tiny, glowworm-like jéva.

Sütra 4

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

karma-kartå-vyapadeçäc ca

karma—object; kartå—agent; vyapadeçät—because of the statement; ca—also.

And because the distinction is drawn here between the agent and the object.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

With the words (Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 3.14.4) etam itaù

pretyäbhisambhavitäsmi (After death I will attain Him) at the end the manomaya
is clearly designated as the object of the sentence and the jéva, with the words
abhisambhavitäsmi (I will attain) is clearly identified as the agent. Therefore the
manomaya, being the object, must be different from the jéva, which is the agent.
The manomaya must therefore be the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The word
abhisambhavitäsmi here describes meeting. The jéva meets the Supreme Lord as a
great river meets the ocean.

Sütra 5

çabda-viçeñät

çabda—words; viçeñät—because of the difference.

(The word "manomaya" here cannot refer to the jéva because the words are in
different cases.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The text says (Chändogya Upaniñad 3.14.3) eña ma ätmäntar-hådaye (He is

within my heart). In these words the devotee jéva is placed in the genitive case and
the object of his worship is placed in the nominative case. Because the jéva and the
object of his worship are in different cases they must be two distinct persons.
Therefore the manomaya here must be the worshipable Supreme Personality of
Godhead, who is different from the devotee jéva.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 6

småteç ca

småteù—because of the småti-çästra; ca—also.

And because of the statement of småti-çästra also.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

That the Supreme Personality of Godhead is different from the jéva is also
confirmed by the following statement of Bhagavad-gétä (18.61):

éçvaraù sarva-bhütänäà
håd-deç/e 'rjuna tiñöhati
bhrämayan sarva-bhütäni
yanträrüòhäni mäyayä

"The Supreme Lord is situated in everyone's heart, O Arjuna, and is directing

the wanderings of all living entities, who are seated as on a machine, made of the
material energy."*

Someone may object: The Chändogya Upaniñad (3.14.3) describes the

manomaya in the following words: eña ma ätmäntar-hådaye 'ëéyän vrér heva yaväd
vä (In my heart is the Self, smaller than a grain of rice or barley). This text shows
that because it is very tiny the manomaya must be the jéva and cannot be the
Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Sütra 7

arbhakaukastvät tad-vyapadeçäc ca neti cen na nicäyyatväd evaà vyomavac ca

arbhaka—small; okastvät—because of the residence; tat—of that; vyapadeçät—

because of the teaching; ca—and; na—not; iti—thus; cet—if; na—not; nicäyyatvät—

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

because of meditation; evam—in this way; vyomavat—like the sky; ca—also.

If it be said that the word "manomaya" here cannot refer to Brahman because
here it is said that the residence of "manomaya" is very tiny, then I say no because
Brahman should be meditated on in this way and because in the same passage the
"manomaya" is said to be as great as the sky.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

For these two reasons it cannot be said that the manomaya is not the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. In this passage from Chändogya Upaniñad the manomaya
is said to be greater that the entire Earth planet. The text says jyäyän antarékñät
(He is greater than the sky). Because the Supreme Brahman is all-pervading the
word vyomavat (like the sky) is used in this sütra.

How may these two statements (that Brahman is very small and very great) be
reconciled? To answer this question he says nicäyyatväd evam (Because Brahman
should be meditated on in this way). This means that it is said that Brahman is very
small so He may become the object of meditation. This means that when in the
Vedic literatures it is said that the infinite, all-pervading Supreme Personality of
Godhead is as small as the distance bewteen the thumb and forefinger or some
other very small distance, in some instances it is meant to be taken figuratively and
in other places literally. In the first instance (figuratively) the devotee meditates on
the Lord in his heart and in the second (literally) by His inconceivable potencies,
the Lord personally appears in the heart out of kindness to His devotee. Although
the Supreme Lord has only one original form, He still manifests in many different
forms to His devotees. This is described in the småti-çästra in the words eko 'pi san
bahudhä yo 'vabhäti (Although He is one He manifests in many forms). Because
of His inconceivable potency the Supreme Lord, although He is all-pervading, may
become as small as an atom. This will be described (later in this book) in the
section (Sütra 25) describing Vaiçvänara. In this way when the Supreme
Personality of Godhead is manifested in a very small form, as the size of an atom
or the distance between the thumb and forefinger, that very small size is present
everywhere, so in this way also the Supreme Lord is all-pervading.
Someone may object: If the Paramätmä is then also present within the material
body just as the jéva is, then, because of His contact with the body the Paramätmä
must also feel all the pleasures and sufferings of the body just as the jéva does. To
answer this he says:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 8

sambhoga-präptir iti cen na vaiçeñyät

sambhoga—of enjoyment; präptir—attainment; iti—thus; cet—if; na—not;

vaiçeñyät—because of the difference.

If it is said that (the Paramätmä in the heart also) experiences (the pains and)
pleasures (of the material body), then I say no because there is a great difference
(between Him and the jéva.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the word sambhoga the prefix sam means "with" as it also does in the word
samväda (with+words=conversation). Therefore this sütra states that the Supreme
Personality of Godhead does not enjoy with (the jéva). Why? Because there is a
difference between them. This is the meaning: mere contact with a certain body
does not by itself bring suffering and enjoyment. Being under the dominion of
karma is the real cause of material suffering and enjoyment. The Supreme
Personality of Godhead is not under the power of the law of karma. This is
described in the Muëòaka Upaniñad (3.1.1): anaçnann anyo 'bhicäkaçéti (Two birds
sit in the metaphorical tree of the material body. One bird eats. The other bird
does not eat, but only looks) and in the Bhagavad-gétä (4.14), where Lord Kåñëa
says: na mäà karmäëi limpanti na me karma-phale spåhä (There is no work that
affects me; nor do I aspire for the fruits of action).

Adhikaraëa 2
The Eater is Brahman

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya: The Kaöha Upaniñad (1.2.25) says:

yasya brahma ca kñätraà ca

ubhe bhavataù odanaù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

måtyur yasyopasecanaà
ka itthä veda yatra saù

"There is a person for whom the brähmaëas and kñatriyas are food and death is
the sauce. Who knows where this person is?"

Saàçaya: Here the words odana (food) and upasecana (sauce) indicate an eater.
Who is the eater? Is it fire, the jéva, or the Supreme Personality of Godhead?
Pürvapakña: Because there is nothing specific to show that of these three fire is
not the eater, and because the questions and answers in this passage seem to
indicate fire, and because the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (1.4.6) declares agnir
annädaù (Fire is the eater), therefore fire is the eater in this passage.
Or perhaps the jéva is the eater here because eating is an action and the jéva
performs actions although the Supreme does not perform any actions. This is also
confirmed by the çruti-çästra (Muëòaka Upaniñad 3.1.1 and Kaöha Upaniñad 3.1)
which describes an eater accompanied by a non-eater who simply looks: tayor
anyaù pappalam (Two friendly birds sit on a tree. One eats the pippala fruit and
the other does not eat but only looks). From all this it may be understood that the
eater here is the jéva.
Siddhänta: The proper understanding follows.

Sütra 9

attä caräcara-grahaëät

attä—the eater; cara—the moving; acara—and the non-moving; grahaëät—

because of taking.

The eater (is Brahman) because He takes the moving and non-moving (as His
food).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The eater is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Why? Because of the words
caräcara-grahaëät (Because He takes the moving and non-moving as His food). In
this passage (Kaöha Upaniñad 1.2.25) the words brahma kñätram indicate the entire
universe, which is then sprinkled with the sauce of death and eaten. This passage
must refer to the Supreme Personality of Godhead for no one other than He can

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

eat the entire universe. A sauce is something which, while being eaten itself is the
cause of other things being eaten also. The eating of the entire universe sprinkled
with the sauce of death must refer to the periodic destruction of the material
universes. In this way it is proved that the eater of the universes here is the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. This is not refuted by the statement of
Upaniñads (na caäçnan) that He does not eat. The Supreme Personality of
Godhead does not eat the results of karma, but He has His own transcendental
eating.

Sütra 10

prakaraëät—because of the context; ca—also.

This is also confirmed by the context.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

That this passage refers to the Supreme Personality of Godhead is also

confirmed by the following statement of Kaöha Upaniñad (1.2.20):

aëor aëéyän mahato mahéyän

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is smaller than the smallest and greater
than the greatest."*

This is also confirmed by the following words of småti-çästra:

atäsi lokasya caräcarasya

"You are the eater of this complete cosmic manifestation, of the moving and the
non-moving."

Adhikaraëa 3
The Associate in the Cave is Brahman

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya: The Kaöha Upaniñad (1.3.1) states:

åtaà pibantau sukåtasya loke

guhäà praviñöau parame parärdhe
chäyä-tapau brahma-vido vadanti
païcägnayo ye ca trinäciketäù

"Two persons drink the results of karma in cave of the heart. They who know
Brahman, they who keep the five sacred fires, and they who perform the three
näciketa sacrifices say these two persons are shade and light."

Saàçaya: In this passage a companion to the jéva, who experiences the results of
karma, is described. This companion may be interpreted to be either intelligence,
life-breath, or the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Pürvapakña: The companion here must be either intelligence or life-breath for
they assist the jéva as he experiences the results of karma. The companion cannot
be the Supreme Personality of Godhead for the Supreme Lord never experiences
the results of karma. Therefore the companion must be either intelligence or life-
breath.
Siddhänta: The conclusion follows.

Sütra 11

guhäà praviñöäv ätmänau hi tad darçanät

guhäà—in the cave; praviñöäu—entered; ätmänau—two selves; hi—indeed; tat—

that; darçanät—because of being seen in other passages of Vedic literature.

The two persons that have entered the cave of the heart are the two selves (the
Supreme Personality of Godhead and the jéva because this explanation is seen in
Vedic literature.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The two persons that have entered the cave of the heart are the jéva and the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, not the jéva and intelligence, and not the jéva
and the life-breath. Why? The sütra says tad darçanät (because this explanation is
seen in Vedic literature).
Š The Kaöha Upaniñad (2.1.7) says that the jéva has entered the cave of the heart:

yä präëena sambhavaty
aditir devatämayé
guhäà praviçya tiñöhantéà
yä bhütebhir vyajäyata

"Accompanied by the life-breath and a host of powers, the jéva, who is the king
of the senses, enters the cave of the heart."

Another verse (Kaöha Upaniñad 1.2.12) says that the Supreme Personality of
Godhead has entered the cave of the heart:

taà durdarçaà güòham anupraviñöam

guhähitaà gahvareñöaà puräëam
adhyätma-yogädhigamena devaà
matvä dhéro harña-çokau jahäti

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is the oldest person, and who is
worshiped in the jungle of this world, remains hidden in the cave of the heart. A
wise man, meditating on Him in a trance of spiritual yoga, gives up all material joy
and grief."

The word hi (indeed) in this sütra means "This is indeed corroborated by all the
Puräëas." The word pibantau (they both drink) in the passage of the Upaniñad is
used in the same sense as the phrase "the two parasol-bearers." Although only one
of the pair carries the parasol, they are still known as "the two parasol-bearers." In
the same way only one of the two "drinkers" here actually drinks. The word chäyä-
tapau (shade and light) here means either that the knowledge of the two persons is
different, or it means that one of the persons is bound to the cycle of repeated
birth and death and the other is free from the cycle of repeated birth and death.

Sütra 12

viçeñaëäc ca

viçeñaëät—because of distinctive qualities; ca—also.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Also because of the differences between them.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In this section of Kaöha Upaniñad the jéva and the Supreme Personality of
Godhead are carefully distinguished, the jéva described as the meditater and the
Supreme Personality of Godhead as the object of meditation. Thus is Kaöha
Upaniñad 1.2.12 quoted above they are carefully distinguished: one as the
meditater and the other as the object of meditation. In Kaöha Upaniñad 1.3.1 in the
words chäyä-tapau (shade and light) they are again distinguished: one being all-
knowing and the other having only a small sphere of knowledge.
Kaöha Upaniñad 1.3.9 explains:

vijïäna-särathir yas tu
manaù-pragrahavän naraù
so 'dhvanaù päram äpnoti
tad viñëoù paramaà padam

"A person who has transcendental knowledge as his charioteer and who
carefully holds the reins of the mind reaches the end of the path: the
transcendental realm of Lord Viñëu."

In these words they are again distinguished: one being the goal to be attained
and the other the person who attains the goal.

Adhikaraëa 4
The Person in the Eye is the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya: Chändogya Upaniñad 4.15.1-2 says:

ya eño 'ntar-akñiëi puruño dåçyate sa eña ätmeti hoväca. etad amåtam ayam etad
brahma tad yad yad asmin sarpir vodakaà vä siïcati vartmani eva gacchati. etaà
sampad-dhäma ity äcakñate etaà hi sarväëi kämäny abhisaàyanti

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "He said: He who is seen in the eye is the ätmä. He is immortal, He is nectar.
He is the greatest. Because He is present neither water nor liquid butter will stay
on the eye, but both will slide from it. He is the abode of all opulences. For one
who sees Him all desires are at once fulfilled."

Saàçaya: Is this person a reflection, a demigod, the jéva, or the Supreme

Personality of Godhead?
Pürvapakña: It may be the first, for the observer sees himself reflected in
another's eye. It may be the second because Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (5.5.2) says:
raçmibhir eño 'smin pratiñöhitaù (With the rays of sunlight the sun-god enters the
eye). It may be the third because a person sees with his eyes, so he may also be the
person in the eye. In this way the person in the eye is one of these three.
Siddhänta: The conclusion follows.

Sütra 13

antara upapatteù

antaraù—the person within; upapatteù—because of reason.

The person in (the eye is the Supreme Personality of Godhead) because (that
conclusion is dictated) by reason.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The person in the eye is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Why? The sütra
says upapatteù (because that conclusion is dictated by reason). This is so because
of the proof given (in the quote from the Chändogya Upaniñad) in the description
of the qualities beginning with being the Supreme Self(ätmä), immortality (amåta),
being the greatest (brahma), being untouched by material things, and being the
abode of all opulences (sampad-dhäma). (These qualities can properly be
attributed only to the Supreme Personality of Godhead.)

Sütra 14

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

sthänädi-vyapadeçäc ca

sthäna—the place; ädi—beginning with; vyapadeçät—because of the statement.

ca—also.

And also because of the teaching (in the scriptures that the Supreme
Personality of Godhead is present) in this place and in other places as well.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

That the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the controller who resides with the
eye is described in Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (3.7.18):

yaç cakñuñi tiñöhaàç cakñuño 'ntaro yaà cakñur na veda yasya cakñur çaréraà yaç
cakñur antaro yam ayaty eña ta ätmäntaryämy amåtaù

"He who stays in the eye, who is within, whom the eye does not know, who is
the ultimate proprietor of the eye and the body, and who, residing within, controls
the eye, is the immortal Supersoul, the Supreme Personality of Godhead who
resides in the heart."

Sütra 15

sukha-viçiñöäbhidhänäd eva

sukha—by happiness; viçiñöa—distinguished; abhidhänät—because of the

description; eva—indeed.

Also because He is described as (full of) bliss.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

This sütra refers to Chändogya Upaniñad (4.10.5), which says: präëo brahma

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

kaà brahma khaà brahma (the Supreme Personality of Godhead is life. the
Supreme Personality of Godhead is bliss. the Supreme Personality of Godhead is
sky). The discussion of the Supreme Personality of Godhead that begins with these
words continues through some paragraphs up to the paragraph under discussion
(Chändogya Upaniñad 4.15.1), which describes the person in the eye. For this
reason the person in the eye must be the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The
interpolation of agni-vidyä between 4.10.5 and 4.15.1 does not break the context
because agni-vidyä is a part of the discussion of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. The word viçiñöa (distinguished) in this sütra means that the Supreme
Personality of Godhead has all-knowledge and all other transcendental qualities.

Sütra 16

çrutopaniñatka-gaty-abhidhänäc ca

çruta—heard; upaniñatka—Upaniñad; gati—destination; abhidhänät—because of

the description; ca—also.

And because of the description of the destination of they who hear the
Upaniñads.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

One who hears the Upaniñads and understands the secret knowledge of the
Vedas travels to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Of the person who knows
the person in the eye Upakoçala Muni says arciñam abhisambhavati (He attains the
realm of light). Because these two persons (he who knows the secrets of the Vedas
and he who knows the person in the eye) attain the same destination it must be
understood that the person in the eye is the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Sütra 17

anavasthiter asambhaväc ca netaraù

anavasthiteù—because the abode is not eternal; asambhavät—because of being

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

impossible; ca—and; na—not; itaraù—anyone else.

(The person in the eye) is not anyone else (but the Supreme Personality of
Godhead) because (the others) do not stay always in the eye and because it
casnnot be them (according to the context).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

These other persons cannot be the person in the eye because none of them stay
permanently in the eye and because non of them possess immortality or any of the
other qualities attributed to the person in the eye. The Supreme Personality of
Godhead is therefore the person in the eye referred to in this text.

Adhikaraëa 5
The Internal Ruler is the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya: Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 3.7.18 says:

yaù påthivyäà tiñöhan påthivyä antaro yaà påtivé na veda yasya påthivé çaréraà
yaù påthivém antaro yam ayaty eña ta ätmäntaryämy amåtaù

"He who stays in the earth, who is within, whom the earth does not know, who
is the ultimate proprietor of the earth and the body, and who, residing within, rules
the earth, is the immortal Supersoul, the Supreme Personality of Godhead who
resides in the heart."

Saàçaya: In this verse is the ruler who lives within the earth and other places
pradhäna, the jéva, or the Supreme Personality of Godhead?
Pürvapakña: The ruler within may be pradhäna because pradhäna resides
within. The cause is always woven into the effect. The cause is the controller if the
effect. (Because pradhäna is the cause of the earth, pradhäna must therefore be
the controller within the earth also.) Because it gives happiness the pradhäna may
be figuratively called ätmä (the great self), or because it is all-pervading it may also
be figuratively called ätmä (the great self). Because it is eternal it may also be

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

called amåta (eternal).
Or the ruler within may be a certaim jéva who is a great yogé. With the yogic
powers of entering everywhere and becoming invisible at will a great yogé may
become the ruler (within) and with this ruling power, the ability to become
invisible, and other yogic powers, he may be called ätmä (the great self), and amåta
(eternal) in the direct senses of the words without resorting to figurative language.
In this way the ruler within must be either the pradhäna or a jéva.
Siddhänta: The conclusion follows.

Sütra 18

antaryämy adhidaivädiñu tad-dharma-vyapadeçät

antaryämé—the ruler within; adhidaiva—the elements; ädiñu—beginning with;

tat—of Him; dharma—the nature; vyapadeçät—because of the description.

The ruler who resides within the elements (is the Supreme Personality of
Godhead) because His qualities are described (in this passage).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The ruler within described in these words of Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad is the

Supreme Personality of Godhead. Why? The sütra says tad-dharma-vyapadeçät
(because His qualities are described in this passage). The Supreme Person is
described here because the qualities of the person described here, which include
being situated within the earth and all other material elements, being unknowable,
being the supreme controller, and being all-pervading, all-knowing, all-blissful, and
eternal, are all qualities of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Sütra 19

na ca smärtam atad-dharmäbhiläpät

na—not; ca—and; smärtam—what is taught in the småti; atad—not of it;

dharma—the qualities; abhiläpät—because of description.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The ruler within is not (the pradhäna, which is) described in the småti, because
the qualities (mentioned in this passage) cannot be attributed (to pradhäna).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

For these reasons it may not be said that the pradhäna, which is described in the
småti, is the ruler within. Why? The sütra says atad-dharmäbhiläpät (because the
qualities mentioned in this passage cannot be attributed to it.
The Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (3.7.23) says:

adåñöo drañöä açruto çrotä amato mantä avij{.sy 241}äto vijïätä nänyato 'sti drañöä
nänayto 'sti çrotä nänyato 'sti mantä nänyato 'sti vijïätaiña ta ätmäntaryämy amåta
ito 'nyat smärtam

"Unobserved, He is the observer. Unheard, He is the hearer. Inconceivable, He

is the thinker. Unknown, he is the knower. There is no other observer. There is no
other hearer. there is no other thinker. There is no other knower. he is the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, the eternal ruler within. (The pradhäna)
described in the småti is different from Him."

The list of qualities here, beginning with being the observer, may be attributed
to the Supreme Personality of Godhead only.

Sütra 20

çaréraç cobhaye 'pi hi bhedenainam adhéyate

çaréraù—the jéva; ca—also; ubhaye—in bothe recensions; api—also; hi—indeed;

bhedena—by the difference; enam—this; adhéyate—is read.

The ruler within is not a jéva because in both (recensions of the Upaniñad) the
jéva is described as different from Him.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The word na (not) from the preceding sütra should be understood in this sütra
also. For the reasons already given it cannot be said that a jéva who is a great yogé
is the ruler within. Why? The sütra answers hi, which means "because," ubhaye (in
both), which means "in both the Käëva and Mädhyandina recensions of the
Upaniñad," enam (He), which means "the ruler within," bhedena adhéyate (is
described as different).
(The Käëva recension gives) yo vij{.sy 241}änam antaro yamayati (The
transcendental knowledge that rules within) and (the Mädhyandina recension,
gives) ya ätmänam antaro yamayati (The Supreme Personality of Godhead who
rules within). In both readings is a clear distinction between the ruler and the
ruled. Therefore the ruler within is Lord Hari, the Personality of Godhead.
In the Subala Upaniñad the Kaöhas say: påthivy-ädénäm
avyaktäkñarämåtaäntänäà çré-näräyaëo 'ntaryämé (Lord Näräyaëa is the ruler
within the earth and other elements, within the unmanifested pradhäna, and within
the unchanging, eternal jéva).
The Brähmaëas say: antaù-çarére nihito guhäyäm (The Supreme Personality of
Godhead stays in the heart of the jéva), aja eko nityaù (The Supreme Personality of
Godhead is unborn, eternal, and one without a second), and yasya påthivé çaréraà
yaù påthivém antare saïcaran yaà påthivé na veda (The earth is His body. He stays
within the earth. The earth does not understand Him, the Supreme Personality of
Godhead).

Adhikaraëa 6
"Akñara" is the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya: The Muëòaka Upaniñad (1.1.5-6) says:

atha parä yayä tad akñaram adhigamyate. yat tad adreçyam agrähyam agotram
avarëam acakñuù-çrotraà tad apäëi-pädaà nityaà vibhuà sarva-gataà su-
sükñmaà tad avyayaà yad bhüta-yonià paripaçyanti dhéräù

"Here is the transcendental knowledge by which the Supreme Personality of

Godhead is known. The great sages directly see the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, who cannot be seen, who cannot be grasped, who has no name, who has
no color, who has no eyes or ears, who has no hands or feet, who is eternal, all-
powerful, all-pervading, subtle, and changeless, and who is the creater of all that
is."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Later the Muëòaka Upaniñad (2.1.2) also says:

divyo hy amürtaù puruñah sa-bähyäbhyantaro hy ajaù apräëo hy amanäù çubhro

'kñarät parataù paraù

"The Supreme Person is transcendental, formless, without inside or out,

unborn, unbreathing, without mind, splendid, and higher than the highest of the
eternals."

Saàçaya: Do these two passages describe first the pradhäna and then the
puruña (jéva), or do they describe the Supreme Personality of Godhead?
Pürvapakña: Because in these passages there is no mention of being the
observer or any other qualities of a conscious being, and because there is mention
of the word yoni (source of everything), which refers to the ingredient of which the
creation is made, these passages describe the eternal pradhäna, and above that
eternal pradhäna, the puruña (jéva). Above the eternal, ever-changing pradhäna is
the jéva, who is the knower of the field of activities. Therefore in these passages the
pradhäna and jéva should be known to be the topics of discussion.
Siddhänta: The conclusion follows.

Sütra 21

adåçyatvädi-guëako dharmokteù

adåçyatva—being invisible; ädi—beginning with; guëako—qualities; dharma—

qualities; ukteù—because of the statement.

(These passages describe the Supreme Personality of Godhead,) who possesses

many transcendental qualities, including invisibility, because His qualities are
described here.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In both passages the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who possesses many

transcendental qualities, including invisibility, should be understood (to be the
topic of discussion). Why? the sütra says dharmokteù (because His qualities are
described here).

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The Muëòaka Upaniñad (1.1.9) says:

yaù sarvajïaù sarvavid yasya jïänamayaà tapaù. tasmäd etad brahma näma-
rüpam annaà ca jäyate

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead knows everything. He knows

everything. He is full of knowledge. From Him is born that Brahman that is the
material form of this world."

Because in the pasage of Muëòaka Upaniñad (1.1.6) that begins divyo hy

amürtaù puruñah (The Supreme Person is transcendental and formlesss) the akñara
is described as possessing a host of transcendental qualities, which include
omniscience, and because that akñara is described as the ultimate goal of all
knowledge, the akñara must be the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Sütra 22

viçeñaëa-bheda-vyapadeçäbhyäà ca netarau

viçeñaëa—modifiers; bheda—difference; vyapadeçäbhyäà—because of the

description; ca—and; na—not; itarau—the other two.

Because of the description of the qualities (of the akñara) in these two
(passages, the akñara) cannot be the other two (pradhäna and jéva).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The other two, that is pradhäna and jéva, should not be thought (to be the topic
of discussion here). Why? the sütra says viçeñaëa (because of the description of the
qualities). Because the description in Muëòaka Upaniñad (1.1.9), beginning with
the words yaù sarvajïa (The Supreme Personality of Godhead knows everything),
specifically identifies the akñara as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and
because the description in Muëòaka Upaniñad (1.1.6), beginning with the word
divya (The Supreme Person is transcendental), identifies the akñara as a being
different from the jéva, therefore the akñara mentioned in both passages must be
understood to be the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the original cause of all
causes.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 23
Š

rüpopanyäsäc ca

rüpa—of a form; upanyäsät—because of the mention; ca—also.

And also because there is mention of a form.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Muëòaka Upaniñad (3.1.3) says:

yadä paçyaù paçyate rukma-varëaà

kärtäram éçaà puruñaà brahma-yonim
tadä vidvän puëya-päpe vidhüya
niraïjanaù paramaà samyam upaiti

"One who sees the golden-colored Personality of Godhead, the Supreme Lord,
the supreme actor, who is the source of the Supreme Brahman, becomes free from
the reactions to past pious and sinful deeds, and becomes liberated, attaining the
same transcendental platform as the Lord."*

Because the form of the akñara is described in this way as the original cause of
all causes, the form of the akñara here must be the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. It cannot be either pradhäna or jéva.

Sütra 24

prakaraëät

prakaraëät—because of the context.

(The akñara here must be the Supreme Personality of Godhead) because of the
context.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The meaning of this sütra is clear.

The småti-çästra also confirms that this text refers to Lord Viñëu. The Viñëu
Puräëa (6.5.65-70) says:

dve vidye veditavye

iti cätharvaëé çrutiù
parayä tv akñara-präptiù
rì-vedädi-mayé aparä

yat tad avyaktam ajaram

acintyam ajam avyayam
anirdeçyam arüpaà ca
pänipädädy-asaàyutam

vibhuà sarva-gataà nityaà

bhüta-yonim akäraëam
vyäpya-vyäpyaà yataù sarvaà
tad vai paçyanti sürayaù

tad brahma paramaà dhäma

tad dhyeyaà mokña-käìkñiëäm
çruti-väkypditaà sükñmaà
tad viñëoù paramaà padam

tad eva bhagavad-väcyaà

svarüpaà paramätmanaù
väcako bhagavac-chabdas
tasyädyasyäkñarätmanaù

evaà nigaditärthasya
sa-tattvaà tasya tattvataù
jïäyate yena taj-jïänaà
param anyat trayémayam

"The Ätharva Veda says there are two kinds of knowledge: superior and
inferior. Superior knowledge is that which brings one to the eternal and inferior
knowledge is the teaching of the Åg Veda and the other Vedas. The eternal is
unmanifested, without decay, inconceivable, unborn, unchanging, without material
form, without material hands or feet, all-powerful, all-pervading, eternal, the
source of all living entities, causeless, present within everything, untouched by
anything, and the source from which everything has come. Saintly persons see

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Him. He is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. He is the supreme abode. He is
the object of meditation for they who yearn for liberation. He is described in the
words of the Vedas. He is supremely subtle. He is Lord Viñëu. He is known as
Bhagavän (the Supreme Personality of Godhead). He is the Supreme Lord who
has a transcendental form. He is Bhagavän. He is eternal. One who knows these
truths knows the truth. He knows the real truth. The inferior truth of the three
Vedas is something else."

Adhikaraëa 7
"Vaiçvänara" is the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya: The Chändogya Upaniñad says (5.11.1): ko nu ätmä kià brahmeti (Who
is the ätmä? Who is the Supreme Personality of Godhead?), and (5.11.6) ätmänam
evaà vaiçvänaraà sampraty adhyeñi tam eva no bruhi (You know about
Vaiçvänara. Please describe Him.) and (5.18.1) yas tv enam evaà prädeça-mätram
abhivimänam ätmänaà vaiçvänaraà upäste sa sarveñu lokeñu sarveñu bhüteñu
sarveñu ätmasu annam atti (One who meditates on Vaiçvänara, who is the size of
the distance between the thumb and forefinger, and who is present in all worlds, in
all elements, and in all hearts, eats food and is nourished.) and (5.18.2) etasya ha vä
etasyätmano vaiçvänarasya mürdhaiva su-tejäç cakñur viçvarüpaù präëaù påthag-
vartmä sandeho bahulo vastir eva vayiù påthivy eva pädäv ura eva vedir lomänir
bahir hådayaà gärhapatyo mano 'nvähäryapacana äsyam ähvanéyaù (Heaven is the
head of Vaiçvänara, the sun is His eye, the wind is His breath, the sky is His body,
the oceans are His bladder, the earth is His feet, the sacrificial arena is His chest,
the sacrificial grass is His head, the gärhapatya fire is His heart, the
anvähäryapacana fire is His mind, and the ähavanéya fire is His mouth).
Saàçaya: Is the Vaiçvänara the fire of digestion, the demigod Agni, the fire
element, or Lord Viñëu? Pürvapakña: The word vaiçvänara is commonly used in
all these four meanings, so its meaning in this passage is unclear.
Siddhänta: The conclusion follows.

Sütra 25

vaiçvänaraù sädharaëa-çabda-viçeñät

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 vaiçvänaraù—Vaiçvänara; sädharaëa—common; çabda—word; viçeñät—because
of the distinction.

The ambiguous word "vaiçvänara" (in this passage of Chändogya Upaniñad

refers to the Supreme Personality of Godhead) because the qualities described
here (are appropriate for the Lord).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word vaiçvänara here refers to Lord Viñëu. Why? The sütra says
sädharaëa-çabda-viçeñät (because the qualities described here are appropriate for
the Lord). This is the meaning: Even though the word vaiçvänara has many
meanings, here it means "Lord Viñëu." The description beginning with the phrase
"Heaven is His head" clearly show that vaiçvänara here means Lord Viñëu. Also,
the words ätmä and brahma generally refer to Lord Viñëu. The result one obtains
by knowing vaiçvänara is the same as the result of knowing Lord Viñëu. The
scriptures say yatheñikä tulam (As reeds are burned by fire, so are sins burned into
nothing by Vaiçvänara). This clearly shows that Vaiçvänara here is Lord Viñëu (for
only Lord Viñëu has the power to negate sins). The word vaiçvänara is composed
of the two words viçva (all) and nara (human beings), and thus means "He who is
the resting place of all human beings." For these reasons the word vaiçvänara here
must mean "Lord Viñëu."
Furthermore, he says:

Sütra 26

smaryamäëam anumänaà syäd iti

smaryamäëam—described in the småti-çästra; anumänaà—inference; syäd—is;

iti—thus.

This may also be inferred from the statements of the småti-çästra.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The word iti here means "this is the reason." In Bhagavad-gétä (15.14), Lord
Kåñëa says:

ahaà vaiçvänaro bhütvä

präëinäà deham äçritaù

"I am the vaiçvänara in the bodies of all living entities."*

In these words the småti-çästra affirms that the Vaiçvänara is Lord Viñëu. From
this statement it may also be understood that the vaiçvänara in the Chändogya
Upaniñad is also Lord Viñëu.
Now he refutes the idea that vaiçvänara refers to the fire of digestion.

Sütra 27

çabdädibhyo 'ntaù pratiñöhänäc ca neti cen na tathä dåñöy-upadeçäd asambhavät

puruña-vidham api cainam adhéyate

çabda—the words; ädibhyaù—beginning with; antaù—within; pratiñöhänät—

because of abiding; ca—and; na—not; iti—thus; cet—if; na—not; tathä—thus;
dåñöi—sight; upadeçät—from the teaching; asambhavät—because of being
impossible; puruña—a person; vidham—the nature; api—also; ca—and; enam—
Him; adhéyate—is read.

If (it is said the "vaiçvänara" here) cannot (be Lord Viñëu) because many words
here refute this idea and because (the "vaiçvänara" is said here) to reside in the
heart, (then I say) no because the teaching (of the scriptures is that one should)
meditate (on Lord Viñëu in the heart) in this way, because it is not possible (to
interpret the word here to mean anything else), and because (the text here
describes the {.sy 168}vaiçvänara") as a person with a humanlike form.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The objection may be raised: The vaiçvänara here cannot be Lord Viñëu. The
text says ayam agnir vaiçvänaraù (This is the vaiçvänara fire). Because these words
prove that vaiçvänara here means fire, the passage hådayaà gärhapatyo mano
'nvähäryapacana äsyam ähvanéyaù (the gärhapatya fire is His heart, the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

anvähäryapacana fire is His mind, and the ähavanéya fire is His mouth) presents
the vaiçvänara as a group of three fires. The vaiçvänara is fire, and not Lord Viñëu,
because vaiçvänara is said to be the resting place of präëa (breath) and again
because the Vedas say vaiçvänara stays within the heart of the living entity.
Here the sütra answers this objection by saying cen na, which means "if it is said
that the vaiçvänara is fire, then I say no." Why? The sütra says tathä dåñöy-
upadeçäd asambhavät puruña-vidham api cainam adhéyate (because the teaching of
the scriptures is that one should meditate on Lord Viñëu in the heart in this way,
because it is not possible to interpret the word here to mean anything else, and
because the text here describes the vaizvänara) as a person with a humanlike
form). Tathä here means {.sy 168}by considering to be the fire of digestion," dåñöi,
means "meditation on Lord Viñëu," and asambhavät means "it is not possible to
interpret the word vaiçvänara to mean anything but Lord Viñëu because the text of
the Upaniñad says that heaven is the head of the vaiçvänara and the other parts of
the world are other parts of the body of vaiçvänara." Furthermore, the Çatapatha
Brähmaëa (10.6.1.11) says sa yo hy etam evägnià vaiçvänaraà puruña-vidhaà
puruñe 'ntaù pratiñöitaà veda (He knows the agni vaiçvänara, who has a humanlike
form and who stays in the hearts of the living entities). If the word vaiçvänara is
interpreted to mean {.sy 168}fire," then the explanations here that the vaiçvänara
resides in the hearts of the living entities may be accepted but not the statement
that vaiçvänara has a humanlike form. If vaiçvänara is interpreted to mean Lord
Viñëu, then both statements may be easily accepted.
Next he refutes the idea that vaiçvänara means either the demigod Agni or the
element fire.

Sütra 28

ata eva na devatä bhütaà ca

ataù eva—therefore; na—not; devatä—demigod; bhütam—element; ca—and;

For the same reasons "vaiçvänara" is neither the demigod Agni nor the element
fire.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The objector may say: Because the demigod Agni is very powerful and great it
may indeed be said that heaven is his head and (the other parts of the world are

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

parts of his body), and the same may also be said of the fire element. This is so
because of the following description of /Rg Veda (10.88.3): yo bhänunä påthivé
dyäm utemäm ätatäna rodasé antarékñam (Agni, in his form of the sun, is spread
through the earth, heaven, and everything between).
Even if this be said, still I say no. Why? The sütra says ata eva (therefore), which
means "for the reasons already given vaiçvänara is neither the demigod Agni nor
the element fire." The words of this mantra of the /Rg Veda are flattery only.
Avataraëikä:In the opinion of Jaimini the word agni may also directly mean
"The Supreme Personality of Godhead," just as the word vaiçvänara does.

Sütra 29

säkñäd apy avirodhaà jaiminiù

säkñät—directly; api—also; avirodham—without contradiction; jaiminiù—

Jaimini.

Jaimini is of the opinion that the word "agni" may be interpreted to directly
mean "The Supreme Personality of Godhead," and there is no inconsistency in
this.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Just as the word vaiçvänara, interpreted to mean either "the leader (nara) of the
world (viçva) or "the proprietor of all human beings (nara) in the universe
(viçva)," is name of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the original cause of all
causes, in the same way the word agni, interpreted to mean "the leader of all," is
also a name of Lord Viñëu. Jaimini Muni considers that there is no contradiction in
these interpretations because they are based on the specific meanings of each
word's component parts.
The objector may say: How can the limitless Supreme Personality of Godhead
become the size of the distance between the thumb and forefinger, (as vaiçvänara
is said to be in this passage of the Upaniñad)?
To answer this question he says:

Sütra 30

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

abhivyakter ity äçmarathyaù

abhivyakteù—because of manifestation; iti—thus; äçmarathyaù—Äçmarathya.

Äçmarathya is of the opinion that the Supreme Personality of Godhead appears

in this way (a size the distance between the thumb and forefinger) because He
manifests Himself (in the heart of His devotee).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Lord Viñëu appears in this way in the hearts of His devotees, who have the eyes
to see Him. This is the opinion of Äçmarathya.

Sütra 31

anusmåter iti bädariù

anusmåteù—because of meditation; iti—thus; bädariù—Bädari Muni.

The Supreme Personality of Godhead is thought to be this small size because

that conception is very convenient for meditation. This is the opinion of Bädari.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Because the Supreme Lord is meditated as residing in the heart, and because
the heart itself is the size of the distance between thumb and forefinger, the Lord is
thought to be the size of the distance between thumb and forefinger also.

Sütra 32

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

sampatter iti jaiminis tathä hi darçayati

sampatteù—because of transcendental opulences; iti—thus; jaiminiù—Jaimini;

tathä—in this way; hi—because; darçayati—the çruti-çästra declares.

(The Supreme Personality of Godhead can assume this very small size) because
of His transcendental powers and opulences. This is the opinion of Jaimini. (It is
known that the Supreme Personality of Godhead assumes this very small size)
because çruti-çästra reveals (this information).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Supreme Personality of Godhead can become the size of the distance
between the thumb and forefinger because of His sampatti, His transcendental
opulence in the form of inconceivable potencies. This action does not limit or
restrict the Lord in any way. Jaimini thinks in this way. Why? He says tathä hi
darçayati (It is known that the Supreme Personality of Godhead assumes this very
small size because çruti-çästra reveals this information). The word hi here means
"because."

The çruti-çästra says tam ekaà govindaà sac-cid-änanda-vigraham (The

Supreme Personality of Godhead is Govinda, who transcendental form is eternal
and full of knowledge and bliss) and eko 'pi san bahudhä yo 'vabhäti (Although He
is one, the Supreme Personality of Godhead manifests as many). In this way the
çruti-çästra teaches that by His inconceivable potencies many contradictory
qualities are simultaneously present in the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Some
of these contradictory qualities are that even though His Himself all
transcendental knowledge, he still has a body, and even though He is one, He is
also many. Later in this book this will be explained in detail. The Supreme
Personality of Godhead is simultaneously all-pervading and of a small size. There
is no fault in saying this.

Sütra 33

ämananti cainam asmin

ämananti—they declare; ca—also; enam—this; asmin—in Him.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 (The ätharvaëikas) say this of Him.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The ätharvaëikas declare that this inconceivable potency is present in the

Supreme Lord. In the Kaivalya Upaniñad (21) the Lord says apäëi-pädo 'ham
acintya-çaktiù (Although I have no hands or feet, I still have inconceivable
potencies). Çrémad-Bhägavatam (3.33.3) says ätmeçvaro 'tarkya-sahasra-çaktiù (My
dear Lord, You are self-determined and are the Supreme Personality of Godhead
for all living entities. For them You created this material manifestation, and
although You are one, Your diverse energies can act multifariously. This is
inconceivable to us*).
These different opinions do not contradict each other. The Skanda Puräna
explains:

vyäsa-citta-sthitäkäçäd
avicchinnäni känicit
anye vyavaharanty etad
uré-kåtya gåhädivat

"Other sages take up small portions broken from the vast sky of Vyäsadeva's
opinions just as houses and other enclosures take up a small portion of the vastness
of space."

Pada 3

Adhikaraëa 1
The Supreme Personality of Godhead is the Abode of Heaven

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

viçvaà bibharti niùsvaà yaù
käruëyäd eva deva-räö
mamäsau paramänando
govindas tanutäà ratim

I pray that Lord Govinda, the supremely blissful king of the demigods, who
mercifully maintains this pathetic material world, may give me pure love for Him.

In this Third Päda will be considered some scriptural texts that may seem to
describe the jéva or some other topic but in truth describe the Supreme Personality
of Godhead.

Viñaya: Muëòaka Upaniñad 2.2.5 says:

yasmin dyauù påthivé cäntarikñam

otaà manaù saha präëaiç ca sarvaiù
tam evaikaà jänatha ätmänam
anyä väco vimuïcathämåtasyaiña setuù

"Know that He in whom heaven, earth, sky, mind, breath, and everything else,
are woven, is the ätmä. Give up talking of anything else. He is the shore of the
eternal."

Saàçaya: Is the abode of heaven described here the pradhäna, jéva, or the
Supreme Personality of Godhead?
Pürvapakña: The abode of heaven here is the pradhäna because pradhäna is the
cause of all material transformations and also because the words amåta-setu (the
shore of the eternal) appropriately describe pradhäna, which leads the living
entities to liberation just as milk brings nourishment to a calf. The word ätmä in
this passage may refer to pradhäna either because pradhäna brings happiness to
the living entities or because it is all-pervading. Then again the words in this
passage may refer to the jéva because the jéva is the enjoyer of the the things in this
world and because the j.iva possesses the mind and the breath mentioned in this
passage.
Siddhänat: Now he speaks the conclusion.

Sütra 1

dyu-bhv-ädy-äyatanaà sva-çabdät

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 dyu-of heaven; bhv-and earth; ädi-beginning with; äyatanaà-the abode; sva-
own; çabdät-because of the word.

The description "the abode of heaven, earth, and other things," refers to the
Supreme Personality of Godhead because the words in this passage specifically
describe Him.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "the abode of heaven" here refers to the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. Why? The sütra says sva-çabdät (because the words in this passage
specifically describe Him). The Supreme Personality of Godhead is referred to
here because the word amåtasya setuù (the shore of the eternal) can refer to Him
alone and no one else. Because it comes from the verb sinoti, which means "to
bind," the phrase amåtasya setuù means "He who enables one to attain the
eternal." Or the word setuù here may mean "like a bridge." As a bridge enables on
to cross to the other side of rivers and other bodies of water, in the same way this
bridge enables one to attain the liberation that lies on the other shore of the cycle
of repeated birth and death. That is the meaning of this word. In this matter the
Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (3.8 and 6.15) says tam eva viditväti måtyum eti (One can
overcome the path of birth and death only by understanding the Supreme
Personality of Godhead).
Next he says:

Sütra 2

muktopasåpya vyapadeçät

mukta-liberated; upasåpya-attaining; vyapadeçät-because of the statement.

Because it is said that this abode of heaven is attained by the liberated souls.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

That the Supreme Personality of Giodhead is attained by the liberated souls is

described in the following statement of Muëòaka Upaniñad (3.1.3):

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

yadä paçyaù paçyate rukma-varëaà
kärtäram éçaà puruñaà brahma-yonim
tadä vidvän puëya-päpe vidhüya
niraïjanaù paramaà samyam upaiti

"One who sees that golden-colored Personality of Godhead, the Supreme Lord,
the supreme actor, who is the source of the Supreme Brahman, becomes free from
the reactions to past pious and sinful deeds, and becomes liberated, attaining the
same transcendental platform as the Lord."*

Sütra 3

nänumänam atac-chabdät

na-not; anumänam-that which is inferred; atat-not that; çabdät-because of a

word.

The "pradhäna" is not the "abode of heaven and earth" here because there is
no word appropriate to it in this passage.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The pradhäna described in the småti-çästras is not referred to in this passage.

Why? The sütra says atac-chabdät, which means that none of the words in this
passage are appropriate for the insentient pradhäna.

Sütra 4

präëa-bhåc ca

präëa-bhåt-the jéva ca-and.

For the same reason the "jéva" is not the "abode of heaven and earth."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word na (not) and the phrase giving the reason (tac-chabdät) should be
understood here from the previous sütra. The word ätmä here also cannot be
understood to be the jéva because the word ätmä, because it is derived from the
verb atati (to go), must primarily refer to the all-pervading Supreme Personality of
Godhead. The word sarva-vit (all-knowing) also cannot refer to the jéva. For these
reasons, because the words in this passage of the Upaniñad are not appropriate for
such an interpretation, he says that the jéva cannot be the "abode of heaven and
earth" mentioned here.

Sütra 5

bheda-vyapadeçäc ca

bheda-difference; vyapadeçät-because of the description; ca-and.

And also because the difference between them is specifically described.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The jéva is not the "abode of heaven and earth" because the scriptures affirm
that the jéva and the Supreme Personality of Godhead are different, as explained
in the Muëòaka Upaniñad (2.2.5) in the words tam evaikaà jänathätmänam
(Know Him to be the only Supreme Lord).

Sütra 6

prakaraëät

prakaraëät-because of the context.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 And also because of the context.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The "abode of heaven and earth" here must be the Supreme Personality of
Godhead because of the context. The opening statement of this passage under
discussion (Muëòaka Upaniñad (1.1.3)), asks kasmin nu vijïäte sarvam idaà
vijïätaà bhavati (What is the one thing, knowing which everything becomes
known?). Therefore the passage that follows must describe the Supreme
Personality of Godhead.

Sütra 7

sthity-adanäbhyäà ca

sthiti-staying; adanäbhyäà-eating; ca-and.

And also because one is eating and the other standing.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

After describing the "abode of heaven and earth," the Muëòaka Upaniñad
(3.1.1) says:

dvä suparëä sayujä sakhäyä

samänaà våkñaà pariñasvajäte
tayor anyaù pippalaà svädy atti
anaçnann anyo 'bhicäkaçéti

"Two friendly birds stay on the same tree. One eats the sweet pippala fruits and
the other, not eating, shines with great splendor."

If the "abode of heaven and earth" had not been previously mentioned then

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

(there would be) no (reason to assume) that the splendid bird here is the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. Otherwise (if the "abode of heaven and earth" had not
been mentioned), the sudden, unannounced mention of the Supreme Personality
of Godhead (in this little allegory of the birds) would not be acceptable. The jéva,
who is already well known in the world, did not need to have been previously
mentioned in the same way here. For these reasosn the "abode of heaven and
earth" here refers to the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Adhikaraëa 2
The Fullness is the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya: When, after describing the Lord's holy names and qualities, he was
asked a question by Çré Närada Muni, Çré Sanat-kumära said (Chändogya
Upaniñad 7.23.1-7.24.1):

bhümä tv eva vijijïäsitavya iti bhümänaà bhagavo vijijïäsa iti. yatra nänyat
paçyati nänyac chåëoti nänyad vijänäti sa bhümä. atha yatränyat paçyaty anyac
chåëoty anyad vijänäti tad-alpam

"'One should ask about Bhümä.' 'My lord, I wish to know about Bhümä.'
'When one attains Him one sees nothing else, hears nothing else, and knows
nothing else. That is Bhümä. When one sees something else, hears something else,
and knows something else, he knows that which is very small.'"

Here the word bhümä does not mean “many." Here it means "all-pervading."
The text says yatränyat paçyati. . .tad-alpam (When one sees something else, he
sees that which is very small). The Bhümä is contrasted against alpa (the small.
The opposite of small is "all-pervading," not "many." Therefore Bhümä here
means "all-pervading."

Saàçaya: Does Bhümä here mean präëa (life-breath) or Lord Viñëu?

Pürvapakña: In the passage previous to this the Chändogya Upaniñad (7.15.1)
says präëo vä äçäyä bhüyän (präëa is better than hope). Because präëa is the topic
immediately preceding Bhümä, and because no question and answer intervenes
between them, therefore präëa and Bhümä are the same. here the word präëa
(life-breath) means the jéva soul who has breath for his companion. It does not
mean merely air. Because this passage begins by describing the jéva soul (7.1.3)
tarati çokam ätma-vit (He who knows the soul crosses beyond grief) and ends by

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

again describing the jéva soul (7.26.1) ätmana evedaà sarvam (The soul is
everything), therefore the description of Bhümä situated between these two
statements must be a description of the jéva soul. When the Upaniñad says (7.25.1)
yatra nänyat paçyati (When one attains Him one sees nothing else), it means, in
this interpretation, that when the jéva is rapt in deep sleep and his senses are all in
the grip of präëa, he cannot see anything beyond himself. When the Upaniñad says
(7.23.1) yo vai bhümä tat sukham (the Bhümä is bliss) it does not contradict the
idea that the Bhümä is the jéva here because the çruti-çästra says tasyäà sukham
aham asväpsam (I slept very happily). In this way it is proved that this passage of
the Upaniñad describes the jéva soul. All the other portions of this passage are also
very favorable to this interpretation of the jéva.
Siddhänta: He says:

Sütra 8

bhümä samprasädäd adhyupadeçät

bhümä-the Bhümä; samprasädät-than the jéva, who is the object of the Lord's
mercy; adhi-greater; upadeçät-because of the teaching.

(The Bhümä here is the Supreme Personality of Godhead) because of the

scriptural teaching that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is superior to the jéva
soul.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Bhümä here is Lord Viñëu and not the jéva, who has präëa (life-breath) as
his companion. Why? The sütra says samprasädäd adhy upadeçät (because of the
scriptural teaching that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is superior to the jéva
soul). The Bhümä is the Supreme Personality of Godhead because the passage
here in the words (Chändogya Upaniñad 7.23.1) yo vai bhümä tat sukham (the
Bhümä is bliss) says that the Bhümä is full of great bliss, and because the sütra
here says that the Bhümä is superior to all. Or the Bhümä is the Supreme
Personality of Godhead because the Chändogya Upaniñad (8.3.4) in the words eña
samprasädo 'smäc charérät samutthäya (The jéva who has attained the mercy of the
Lord rises above the gross material body and attains the effulgent spiritual world)
says that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is superior to the jéva, who is
dependent on the Lord's mercy, and who has präëa (life-breath) as his companion.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

The meaning is this: After describing names and a host of other things, the
Chändogya Upaniñad (7.15.2) says sa vä eña evaà paçyan evaà manväna evaà
vijänann ati-vädé bhavati (He who sees präëa, meditates on präëa, and understands
präëa becomes a true knower of things), and then after saying that the knower of
präëa becomes a true knower of things, the Upaniñad then says (7.16.1) eña tu vä
ativadati yaù satyenätivadati (He who knows the Supreme Personality of Godhead
is in reality the true knower of things). The word tu (but) here ends the discussion
of präëa. Then the greatest ativädé (wise man) is described as he who knows the
satya, which here means "Lord Viñëu." In this way the Upanésad explains that the
Bhümä is both different from and superior to präëa. Because in this way the
Bhümä is declared to be superior to präëa, präëa cannot be identical with the
Bhümä.
The Bhümä is here taught to be superior to the series beginning with name and
culminating in präëa and therefore it is clearly seen to be different from speech
and the other items in this series. In this way the Bhümä is taught to be superior to
präëa.
The word satya is famous as a name for the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
Lord Viñëu. The scriptures use the word satya in this way. For example, the
Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.1.2) says satyaà jïänam anantam (the unlimited Supreme
Personality of Godhead is full of transcendental knowledge) and the Çrémad-
Bhägavatam (1.1.1) says satyaà paraà dhémahi (I meditate on the Supreme
Personality of Godhead). The word satyena is in the instrumental case to show in
the sense of "because." The meaning here is that one becomes an ativädé (wise
man) because of the satya, the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The person who
meditates on präëa is called an ativädé (wise man) because he is wise in
comparison to they who meditate on the series of objects mentioned previously,
beginning with präëa and culminating in hope. But he who meditates on Lord
Viñëu is superior to the person who meditates on präëa. Therefore he who
meditates on Lord Viñëu is the real, the best ativädé (wise man).
For this reason the student asks (Chändogya Upaniñad (7.16.1) so 'haà
bhagavaù satyenätivadäni (my lord, I will become a man wise with knowledge of
the Supreme Personality of Godhead). The guru then answers satyaà tv eva
vijijïäsitavyam (one must yearn to understand the Supreme Personality of
Godhead).
The objection that because after the description of the ativädé wise with
knowledge of präëa there are no further questions and answers, therefore the
subject of präëa continues into the next sentence, is not a valid objection.
Moreover, (it may be said,) because there are no questions after the description of
präëa, (therefore präëa is the highest). In describing the series of inanimate
elements, beginning with name and culminating in hope, the guru did not say that
the knower of any of these was an ativädé (wise man). However, when he described
präëa, which here means the jéva, he did say that the knower of präëa is an ativädé.
The student then assumes that präëa is the highest. That is why he asks no further
question. The guru, however, not accepting präëa as the highest, proceeds to
explain that Lord Viñëu is higher than präëa. The student, however, now taught

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

that Lord Viñëu is the highest, becomes eager to know how to meditate on Him,
and asks so 'ham bhagavaù satyenätivadäni (my lord, I will become a man wise
with knowledge of the Supreme Personality of Godhead).
The opponent may say, "What is referred to here is the jéva, who is the
companion of präëa (life-breath), and who is referred to in the beginning of this
passage as ätmä."
The reply is: No. Here the word ätmä primarily means the Supreme Personality
of Godhead because to interpret the word otherwise would contradict the
statement at the beginning of the passage (7.26.1) ätmanaù präëa ù (from the ätmä
präëa is manifested). This view of the opponent contradicts the statement (7.24.1)
yatra nänyat paçyati nänyac chåëoti nänyad vijänäti sa bhümä. (When one attains
Him one sees nothing else, hears nothing else, and knows nothing else. That is
Bhümä). This description of the perception of Bhümä clearly refutes any idea that
the word Bhümä could mean anything other than the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. The scriptures say sauñuptikam sukham alpam (the happiness of deep
sleep is very slight), and therefore to say that the word Bhümä here means "the
jéva who is soundly sleeping" is simply laughable. For all these reasons, therefore,
the Bhümä described here is Lord Viñëu.

Sütra 9

dharmopapatteç ca

dharma-qualities; upapatteù-because of the appropriateness; ca-and.

And also because the qualities described here can be ascribed to the Supreme
Personality of Godhead only.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The qualities ascribed here to the Bhümä are suitable only for the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, Lord Viñëu, and not for anyone else. The Upaniñad says
(7.24.1) yo vai bhümä tad amåtam (The Bhümä is the eternal). This describes the
eternalness that is a natural feature of the Supreme. The Upaniñad also says sa
bhagavaù kasmin pratiñöhita iti sve mahimni (Where does the Supreme Personality
of Godhead stay? He stays in His own glory). This explains that the Supreme
Personality of Godhead does not depend on anyone. The scriptures also say sa
evädhastät (The Supreme Person is above, below, in front, behind, to the left and

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

to the right). This shows that the Lord is the ultimate shelter of everyone and
everything. The scriptures say (Chändogya Upaniñad 7.26.1) ätmanaù präëaù
(From the Supreme Personality of Godhead the life-force is manifested). This
shows that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the original cause of all causes.
These are some of the qualities of the Supreme described in the Vedic literatures.

Adhikaraëa 3
"Akñara" Refers to the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya: The Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (3.8.7-8) says:

kasmin khalu äkäça otaç ca protaç ceti. sa hoväca. etad vai tad akñaraà gärgi
brähmaëä abhivadanti asthülam anaëv ahrasvam adérgham alohitam asneham
acchäyam

"'In what is the sky woven, warp and woof?' He said: 'O Gärgi, the brähmaëas
say it is woven in the eternal. The eternal is not large, not small, not short, not tall,
not red, not liquid, without shade).

Saàçaya: Is the akñara (eternal) here pradhäna, jéva, or the Supreme

Personality of Godhead?
Pürvapakña: The word Çvetäçvatara Upaniñadakñara here may denote any of
the three. The meaning is ambiguous.
Siddhänta: The conclusion follows.

Sütra 10

akñaram ambaränta-dhåteù

akñaram-the eternal; ambara-with sky; anta-at the end; dhåteù-because of being

the support.

The word "akñara" here refers to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, because
the "akñara" is described as the resting place of all the elements, beginning with
the grossest and culminating in sky.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The akñara here is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Why? The sütra says
amabaränta-dhåteù (because the akñara is described as the resting place of all the
elements, beginning with the grossest and culminating in sky). The Upaniñad says
etasmin khalu akñare gärgy äkäça otaç ca protaç ca (O Gärgi, the sky is woven,
warp and woof, in the eternal). the word akñara must refer to the Supreme
Personality of Godhead because it is here described as the resting place of all the
elements, which culminate in sky.
The objection may be raised: "Akñara here may refer to pradhäna because
pradhäna is the origin of all the changes of this world. Akñara may also refer to the
jéva because the jéva is the resting place of all inanimate objects that come within
its perception."
If these objections are raised, he then says:

Sütra 11

sä ca praçäsanät

sä-that; ca-and; praçäsanät-because of the command.

"Akñara" here must refer to the Supreme Personality of Godhead because the
text says that everything is supported by His command.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the previous sütra the Supreme Personality of Godhead is described as the

resting place of all the elements, beginning with the grossest and culminating in
sky. Why is this? The sütra says praçäsanät (because the text says that everything is
supported by His command). The Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (3.8.9) says etasya vä
akñarasya praçäsane gärgi dyävä-påthivé vidhåte tiñöhataù. etasya vä akñarasya
praçäsane gärgi süryä-candramasau vidhåtau tiñöhataù (By the command of the
eternal, O Gärgi, heaven and earth are manifest. By the command of the eternal,
O Gärgi, the sun and moon are manifest). Because these words describe the order

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

of the eternal, the eternal should be understood to be the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. Neither the inanimate, unconscious pradhäna, nor the conditioned or
liberated jéva can create everything simply by their command.

Sütra 12

anya-bhäva-vyävåtteç ca

anya-another; bhäva-nature; vyävåtteù-because of the exclusion; ca-also.

And also because the text describes certain qualities that specifically exclude
any other being.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (3.8.11) says tad vä etad akñaraà gärgy adåñöaà
drañöå açrutaà çrotå (O Gärgi, this eternal sees, but is unseen. He hears, but is
unheard). Because these words describe the akñara in terms that cannot be applied
to anyone but the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the word akñara must refer to
the Supreme Person. The pradhäna is inanimate and unconscious and therefore it
cannot see. Because the text here says that the akñara sees everything but cannot
be seen by anyone, it cannot mean the jéva.

Adhikaraëa 4
The "Puruña" Seen in Brahmaloka is the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Praçna Upaniñad (5.2.2-5) the following passage is read:

etad vai satyakäma paraà cäparaà ca brahma yad oàkäras tasmäd vidvän
etenaiväyatanenaikataram anveti. . . yaù punar etaà tri-mätreëom ity
anenaiväkñareëa paramà puruñam abhidhyäyéta sa tejasi sürye sampanno yathä
pädodaras tvacävinirmucyate evaà haiva sa päpmabhir vinirmuktaù sa sämabhir

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

unnéyate brahmalokaà sa etasmät jéva-ghanät parät paraà puriçayaà puruñaà
vékñatet1)

"O Satyakäma, the syllable oà is both the superior Brahman and the inferior
Brahman. A wise man attains one of these two Brahmans. . .One who, reciting the
eternal oà of three lengths, meditates on the Supreme Person, will attain the sun-
planet. As a snake sheds its skin so does he become free from all sins. By the
hymns of the Vedas he is carried to Brahmaloka. There he directly sees the
Supreme Soul, the Supreme Person residing in the heart."

Saàçaya: Is the person seen and meditated on the four-faced demigod Brahmä
or the Supreme Personality of Godhead?
Pürvapakña: The text here says that the devotee who meditates on oà of one
length attains the world of men, the devotee who meditates on oà of two lengths
attains the world of heaven, and the devotee who meditates on oà of one length
attains the world of Brahma. The planet here is the planet of the four-faced
demigod Brahmä and the person seen by one who goes there is the four-faced
demigod Brahmä.
Siddhänta: The conclusion follows.

Sütra 13

ékñati-karma-vyapadeçät saù

ékñati-of seeing; karma-object; vyapadeçät-because of the description; saù-He.

The person here is the Supreme Personality of Godhead because the

description of the object of vision here fits the Supreme Person.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the ékñati-karma, or object of

vision. Why? the sütra says vyapadeçät (because the description of the object of
vision here fits the Supreme Person). This is so because the Upaniñad (5.2.7)
describes the qualities of the Supreme Personality of Godhead in the following
words: tam oàkäreëaiväyatanenänveti vidvän yat tac chäntam ajaram amåtam
abhayam paraà paräyaëaà ca (By reciting oà the wise man attains the supremely
peaceful, ageless, eternal, fearless Supreme, the ultimate goal of life). The

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

conclusion is that, according to the argument of niñäda-sthapaty-adhikaraëa-nyäya,
the word brahmaloka here means Viñëuloka (the planet of Lord Viñëu).

Adhikaraëa 5
The "Dahara" is the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya: In the Chändogya Upaniñad (8.1.1) is heard the following:

atha yad idam asmin brahma-pure daharaà puëòarékaà veçma daharo ñminn
antar äkäças tasmin yad antas tad anveñöavyaà tad vijijïäsitavyam

"In a great city is a small lotus palace. In that palace is a small sky. That sky
should be sought. That sky should be asked about."

Saàçaya: What is the small sky here in the lotus of the heart? Is it the element
sky, the jéva, or Lord Viñëu?
Pürvapakña: Because the word äkäça generally means the element sky it must
also have that same meaning here. Or, because the jéva is very small and also the
master of the city of the body, it may mean the jéva.
Siddhänta: The conclusion follows.

Sütra 14

dahara uttarebhyaù

daharaù-the small; uttarebhyaù-because of the descriptions that follow.

The small sky here is the Supreme Personality of Godhead because of the
description given in the remainder of the text.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The small sky here is Lord Viñëu. Why? The sütra says uttarebhyaù, which
means "because of the description given in the remainder of the text." The
descriptions used here to describe the small sky, such as "as great as the sky,"
"maintaining everything," and "free from all sin," cannot be used to describe
either the element sky or the jéva soul. The "great city" described in this Upaniñad
is the body of the devotee. The "lotus" is the heart in the body. The "palace" is the
abode of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The word "small sky" is the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, who should be meditated upon and sought after,
and who possesses a host of transcendental qualities, including being always free of
all sin. The passage should be interpreted in this way. Therefore the small sky here
is Lord Viñëu. Then he says-

Sütra 15

gati-çabdäbhyäà tathä hi dåñöaà liìgaà ca

gati-because of going; çabdäbhyäm-and because of a certain word; tathä hi-

furthermore; dåñöam-seen; liìgam-hinted; ca-and.

This is so because of the description of going, because of the use of a certain

word, and because it is both directly seen and also hinted at.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Chändogya Upaniñad (8.3.2) says:

yathä hiraëya-nidhià nihitam akñetrajïä upari saïcaranto 'pi na vidus tathemäù

sarväù prajä ahar ahar gacchantya enaà brahmalokaà na vidanty anåtena hi
pratyüòhäù

"As people, unaware of what the ground actually holds, walk again and again
over buried golden treasure, so do the people of this world day after day go to the
spiritual world of Brahman without knowing it."

"Enam" (this), which points to the "small sky," is the "certain word"
mentioned in the sütra, and the description here of the living entities' "going to the
spiritual world of Brahman" is the "going" mentioned in the sütra. Both enam and
the going mentioned here show that Lord Viñëu is the "small sky."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Furthermore, in another place the scriptures again describe the living entities'
going to the Supreme in these words: satä saumya tadä sampanno bhavati (O
gentle one, the living entities are again and again in contact with the Supreme).
This is the "directly seen" mentioned in the sütra. The use of the word brahmaloka
hints that Lord Viñëu is the topic of discussion here. This is the "hint" mentioned
in the sütra. The word brahmaloka here cannot refer to the Satyaloka planet
because it is not possible for the living entities to go day after day to the Satyaloka
planet.

Sütra 16

dhåteç ca mahimno 'syäsminn upalabdheù

dhåteù-because of maintaining; ca-and; mahimnaù-of the glory; asya-of Him;

asmin-in this; upalabdheù-because of being stated.

This is so because of the description of His glory in maintaining all the worlds.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the passage beginning with the words daharo 'sminn antar äkäçaù (in that
palace is a small sky), the descriptions "as great as the sky," "maintaining
everything," and "free from all sin," and the use of the word ätmä clearly, and
without need to turn to any other passage, show that the "small sky" mentioned
here is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad
(4.4.22) also says: atha ya ätmä sa setur vidhåtir eñäà lokänäm asaàbhedäya (He is
the Supreme Person, the bridge, the controller who prevents the worlds from
becoming broken and destroyed). Because the "small sky" is thus shown to possess
the glory of maintaining all the worlds, the "small sky" here must be Lord Viñëu.

The Chändogya Upaniñad also says: eña setur vidhäraëa eñäà lokänäm
asambhedäya (He is the bridge, the controller who prevents the worlds from
becoming broken and destroyed). In these passages and in others also, this glory of
the Supreme Personality of Godhead may be seen.

Sütra 17

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

prasiddheç ca

prasiddheù-because of being famous in this way; ca-and.

And also because this is a traditional usage of the word.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

This is so because the word "sky" is commonly used to mean "the Supreme
Personality of Godhead," as may be seen in the following statement of Taittiréya
Upaniñad (2.7.1): ko hy evänyat kaù präëyät. yad eña äkäça änando na syät. (Who
could breathe if the sky were not bliss?)
Someone may raise the following objection: The Chändogya Upaniñad (8.3.4)
says: sa eña samprasädo 'smäc charérät samutthäya paraà jyotir upasampadya
svena rüpeëäbhiniñpadyate. eña ätmeti hoväca. etad amåtam etad abhayam etad
brahma ("The liberated jéva rises from the material body. He attains the spiritual
effulgence and manifests his original form. This is the self," he said. "He is
immortal. He is fearless. He is Brahman"). Because this description of the jéva
appears immediately afterward, the description of the “small sky" should be
understood to refer to the jéva.
If this objection is raised, he replies:

Sütra 18

itara-parämarñät sa iti cen näsambhavät

itara-the other; parämarñät-because of reference; saù-he; iti-thus; cet-if; na-not;

asambhavät-because of impossibility.

If it is said that because there is mention of something else (the jéva) in the same
passage (and therefore the "small sky" here is the jéva, then I say) No, because it is
impossible.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Although in the middle of this passage there is a description of the jéva,

nevertheless it is not possible to say that the beginning of this passage describes the
jéva. Why? The sütra says asambhavät (because it is impossible). This is so because
in the beginning of this passage there is a description of eight qualities, beginning
with "being free from sin," that cannot be ascribed to the jéva.
Now our opponent may say: So be it. Still, after the description of the "small
sky," the Chändogya Upaniñad (8.7.1) says ya ätmäpahata-päpmä vijaro vimåtyur
viçoko vijighatso 'pipäsaù satya-kämaù satya-saìkalpaù so 'nveñöavyaù sa
vijijïäsitavyaù (The soul is free from sin, old-age, death, suffering, hunger, and
thirst. It desires only the good. Whatever it desires is attained at once). Because
these words of the Prajäpati describe the jéva the qualities described in 7.7.1 and
the "small sky" described before that may also refer to the jéva.
Considering that this doubt might arise, he says:

Sütra 19

uttaräc ced ävirbhäva-svarüpas tu

uttarät-because of a later passage; cet-if; ävirbhäva-manifestation; svarüpas-

form; tu-indeed.

If it is said that a later passage (proves that the “small sky" is the jéva then I say
no.) The description of the true nature of the jéva is confined to that passage alone.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word tu (but) is used here to dispel doubt. The word na (no) should be
understood from the previous sütra. In this passage spoken by the Prajäpati the
teaching is that the jéva manifests these qualities by engaging in spiritual activities,
but otherwise these qualities are not manifested. In the passage describing the
"small sky" these eight attributes are said to be eternally manifested. The
statement of the Prajäpati is, however, that these qualities are present in the jéva
only if he engages in spiritual activities. The Chändogya Upaniñad (8.3.4) clearly
explains the difference between the Supreme Personality of Godhead (who
possesses these eight qualities in all circumstances) and the jéva (who possesses

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

these qualities only when he becomes liberated) in the following words: sa eña
samprasädo 'smäc charérät samutthäya paraà jyotir upasampadya svena
rüpeëäbhiniñpadyate. eña ätmeti hoväca. etad amåtam etad abhayam etad brahma
("The liberated jéva rises from the material body. He attains the spiritual
effulgence and manifests his original form. This is the self," he said. "He is
immortal. He is fearless. He is Brahman"). Although the jéva may manifest some
of these eight qualities by engaging in spiritual activities, he still cannot manifest
all of them. The qualities of being the "bridge that spans the worlds," and being
the "maintainer of the worlds" are some of the qualities the jéva can never attain.
This proves that the "small sky" is the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Now our opponent says: If this is so, then why is the jéva mentioned at all in this
passage?
To answer this question he says:

Sütra 20

anyärthaç ca parämarñaù

anya-another; arthaç-meaning; ca-and; parämarñaù-reference.

The description of the jéva here has a different object.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The jéva is described here in order to teach about the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. When the jéva becomes liberated and attains his original spiritual form,
he also manifests these eight qualities. In this way it may be understood that the
"small sky" is the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Now our opponent says: Because the "small sky" within is described as very
small it must refer to the jéva, which was previously described as also being very
small.
If this objection is given, then he says:

Sütra 21

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

alpa-çruter iti cet tad-uktam

alpa-small; çruteù-from the çruti; iti-thus; cet-if; tat-that; uktam-said.

If it is said that when the çruti describes the "small" it must refer to the jéva,
then I say no because of what has already been said.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Supreme Personality of Godhead manifests a very small form to facilitate

meditation on Him. This has already been described in sütra 1.2.7, which says
nicäyyatväd evaà vyomavac ca. This sütra explains that although the Supreme
Personality of Godhead is all-pervading, in order to facilitate meditation on Him,
He manifests a small form the size of the distance between the thumb and
forefinger. He appears in this small form so He may be easily meditated upon. Of
course, His glories have no limit and His size also has no limit.
Then he gives another explanation.

Sütra 22

anukåtes tasya ca

anukåteù-because of imitation; tasya-of Him; ca-also.

And also because (the jéva) merely resembles in some respects (the Supreme
Personality of Godhead).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Because, according to the statement of the Prajäpati, the jéva, who only
manifests the eight qualities when engaged in spiritual activities, merely resembles
in some respects the "small sky," who manifests the eight qualities eternally, the
"small sky" must be different from the jéva. Previously the original form of the jéva
is covered by illusion, and then afterwards, by worshiping the Supreme Personality
of Godhead, the illusion becomes broken and the jéva, manifesting these eight

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

qualities, becomes equal, in some respects, to the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. In this way, as explained by the Prajäpati, the jéva resembles, in some
respects, the "small sky." The sentence pavanam anuharate hanümän (Hanuman
resembles the wind) shows the difference between the resembled object and the
thing that resembles it. That the liberated jéva resembles the Supreme Personality
of Godhead may also be seen in the following words from Muëòaka Upaniñad
(3.1.3): niraïjanaù paramaà sämyam upaiti (the liberated jéva resembles the
Supreme Personality of Godhead).

Sütra 23

api smaryate

api-and; smaryate-described in the småti-çästra.

This is also described in the småti-çästra.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Bhagavad-géta (14.2) the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Kåñëa,

also explains:

idaà jïänam upäçritya

mama sädharmyam ägataù
sarge 'pi nopajäyante
pralaye na vyathanti ca

"By becoming fixed in this knowledge, one can attain to the transcendental
nature like My own. Once established, one is not born at the time of creation or
disturbed at the time of dissolution."*

In this way the småti-çästra explains that the liberated jévas attain a nature like
that of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. For these reasons the "small sky" is
Lord Hari and not the jéva.

Adhikaraëa 6

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

The Person the Size of a Thumb is the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya: In the Kaöha Upaniñad (2.1.12) the following words are read:

aìguñöha-mätraù puruño
madhya ätmani tiñöhati
éçäno bhüta-bhavyaysya
tato na vijugupsate

"A person the size of a thumb stands in the heart. He is the master of the past
and future. He does not fear."

Saàçaya: Is this person the size of a thumb the jéva or Lord Viñëu?
Pürvapakña: The person here is the jéva because the Çvetäzvatara Upaniñad
(5.7-8) says präëädhipaù saïcarati sva-karmabhir •aìguñöa-mätro ravi-tulya-rüpaù
(The ruler of breath moves about, impelled by his karma. He is the size of a
thumb. He is splendid as the sun).
Siddhänta: The conclusion follows.

Sütra 24

çabdäd eva pramitaù

çabdät-because of the word; eva-even; pramitaù-limited.

Even though (He is) very small (this person is the Supreme Lord) because of
the words (in the text).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The person here the size of a thumb is Lord Viñëu. Why? The sütra says çabdät
(because of the words in the text). The Upaniñad text referred to here is éçäno
bhüta-bhavyaysa (He is the master of the past and future). It is not possible for the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

jéva, who is controlled by his karma, to possess this power.
Now it may be asked: How is it possible for the all-pervading Supreme
Personality of Godhead to become limited to this very small form?
To answer this question he says:

Sütra 25

hådy upekñayä tu manuñyädhikäratvät

hådi-in the heart; upekñayä-with relation; tu-indeed; manuñya-of human beings;

adhikäratvät-because of the qualification.

This is so because the Supreme Personality of Godhead indeed appears in the

hearts of men.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word tu (indeed) is used here for emphasis. The all-pervading Supreme
Personality of Godhead becomes the size of a thumb because He is meditated on
as being the size of thumb within the heart. Another interpretation is that because
He appears, by His inconceivable potency, in such a small form in the heart He is
meditated on in that way, as has been already described.

"Because the different species have bodies of different sizes and he arts of
different sizes it is not possible that the Lord can appear in all of them in this size."
If this objection is raised, to answer it he says mänuñyädhikäratvät (the Supreme
Personality of Godhead appears in the hearts of men). Although the scriptures do
not specify, he (Vyäsa) singles out human beings. He does this because it is human
beings who are able to meditate and therefore the measurement is given here
according to the human body. For this reason there is no contradiction here. In the
same way in the hearts of elephants, horses, and all other creatures the Supreme
Personality of Godhead appears in a form the size of the thumb of each creature.
In this way there is no contradiction. It is not possible for the jéva, however, to be
present within the heart in a form the size of a thumb because the original form of
the jéva is atomic in size, as explained in the Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (5.9) in the
words bälägra-çata-bhägasya (When the upper point of a hair is divided into one
hundred parts and again each of such parts is further divided into one hundred
parts, each such part is the measurement of the dimension of the jéva soul). For all

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

these reasons, therefore, the person the size of a thumb is Lord Viñëu.

Adhikaraëa 7
The Devas Can Meditate on the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya: In order to prove that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the

person the size of a thumb, the Vedic scriptures were quoted to establish that it is
human beings who have the right to meditate on the Supreme Person. That
evidence may lead to the belief that human beings alone have the right to meditate
on the Supreme Person. Now, by refuting that false belief, the right of others to
meditate on the Supreme Personality of Godhead will be proved.
The Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (1.4.10) says:

tad yo yo devänäà pratyabudhyata sa eva tad abhavat tatharñéëäà tathä

manuñyäëäm

"Whoever among the devas meditated on the Supreme Personality of Godhead,

attained Supreme Personality of Godhead. Whoever among the sages meditated
on Him attained Him. Whoever among the human beings meditated on Him
attained Him."

The Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.16) also says:

tad devä jyotiñäà jyotir äyur hopäsate 'måtam

"The devas meditate on the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is the

splendor of all splendors, and who is eternity and life."

Saàçaya: Is it possible for the devas to meditate on the Supreme Personality of

Godhead, as human beings do, or is it not possible?
Pürvapakña: Because the devas have no senses they are not able to meditate on
the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Indra and the other devas are beings created
by mantras. They have no bodily senses. Because they have no senses they have
neither material desires nor spiritual renunciation.
Siddhänta: The conclusion follows.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 26

tad upary api bädaräyaëaù sambhavät

tad-that; upari-above; api-also; bädaräyaëaù-Vyäsadeva; sambhavät-because of

being possible.

Beings superior to humankind are able to meditate on the Supreme Personality

of Godhead. This is the opinion of Vyäsa.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The devas and other beings superior to humankind are able to meditate on the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. This is the opinion of Lord Vyäsadeva. Why?
Because according to the Upaniñads, Vedic mantras, Itihäsas, Puräëas, and ancient
tradition, they do indeed have bodies and senses. Because they have heavenly
bodies and senses they are able to meditate and they are also able to become
detached from their heavenly opulence and voluntarily renounce it. Because they
are aware of the baseness and impermanence of their celestial opulence they are
able to be detached from it and renounce it. The Viñëu Puräëa (6.5.50) explains:

na kevalaà dvija-çreñöha
narake duùkha-paddhatiù
svarge 'pi yäta-bhétasya
kñayiñëor nästi nirvåtiù

"O best of the brähmaëas, torment does not exist only in hell. The residents of
the heavenly planets, afraid that they may one day fall from heaven, have no
happiness."

For this reason the devas desire spiritual happiness. This is so because they have
heard from the çruti-çästra that spiritual bliss is limitless, eternal, and pure. The
çruti explains that to attain spiritual knowledge the devas and other celestial beings
observe vows of celibacy. This is described in the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (5.2.1)
in these words: tatra yäù präjäpatyäù prajäpatau pitari brahmacaryam üñur devä
manuñyä asuräù (The devas, humans, and asuras, who were all sons of Lord
Brahmä, lived with their father as celibate students of spiritual knowledge). In the
Chändogya Upaniñad (8.11.3) King Indra is described in the following words: eka-
çataà ha vai varñäëi maghavä prajäpatau brahmacaryam uväsa (For a hundred
years King Indra lived as a celibate student of spiritual knowledge in the home of
Lord Brahmä). For these reasons, therefore, the devas and other higher beings are

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

able to meditate on the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
The following objection may be raised: "This idea (that the devas are not beings
created by mantras but are conditioned living entities residing in material bodies)
is not consistent with the activities of the devas and other higher beings because it
is not possible that a single embodied demigod could come to many different
places at once when called to appear at many agnihotra-yajïas in many different
places simultaneously."
If this is said, he (Vyäsa) speaks the following words:

Sütra 27

virodhaù karmaëéti cen näneka-pratipatter darçanät

virodhaù-contradiction; karmaëi-in activities; iti-thus; cet-if; na-not; aneka-

many; pratipatteù-because of the acceptance; darçanät-because of seeing.

If it is objected that this idea is refuted by the very activities of the devas, then I
say no, because it is seen that the devas have the power to manifest many forms
simultaneously.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

There is no contradiction here if it accepted that the devas are embodied souls
with material bodies. Why? The sütra says aneka-pratipatter darçanät (because it
is seen that the devas have the power to manifest many forms simultaneously).
This is so because many powerful beings, such as Saubhari Muni and others, are
able to manifest many forms simultaneously.
The objector may say: It may be that in the description of the devas' activities
there is no contradiction for they who say that the devas have bodies. There
remains, however, a contradiction in the description of the words of the Vedas.
Before the birth and after the death of each demigod a period would exist when
the name of that demigod would not have any meaning. At that time the words of
the Vedas would become meaningles, like the statement "the son of a barren
woman." In this way this idea is refuted. The Mémäàsä-sütra says: autpattikas tu
çabdenärthasya sambandhaù (In the Vedas the relation between name and the
object named is eternal). This idea (that the devas are embodied souls) would then
contradict the eternality of the names in the Vedas.
If this objection is raised, then he (Vyäsa) replies:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 28

çabda iti cen nätaù prabhavät pratyakñänumänäbhyäm

çabdaù-the words of the Vedas; iti-thus; cet-if; na-no; ataù-from this; prabhavät-
because of creation; pratyakña-because of çruti; anumänäbhyäm-and småti.

If someone objects that this idea is inconsistent with the eternal nature of the
words in the Vedas, then I say no because of the description of the creation of the
world and also because of the evidence given in çruti and småti.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The idea stated here (that the devas have bodies) is not inconsistent with the
nature of the words in the Vedas. Why? The sütra says prabhavät
pratyakñänumänäbhyäm (because of the description of the creation of the world
and also because of the evidence given in çruti and småti. The creation of the
material bodies (of the devas and other beings in the universe) is done (by Lord
Brahmä) remembering their eternal, archetypal forms recorded in the statements
of the Vedas. These archetypal forms are eternal, and existed before any of the
bodies of the living entities were manifested. These archetypal forms are described
by Viçvakarmä in his own scripture for drawing forms in the words yamaà daëòa-
päëià likhanti varuëaà tu päça-hastam (They draw the demigod Yama with a
mace in his hand, and the demigod Varuëa with a noose in his hand). The Vedic
words describing the devas and other kinds of living entities are names of certain
classes of living entity, just as the word "cow" is the name of a certain kind of
living entity. The names of the devas are not names of specific persons, as for
example, the name Caitra. Because the words of the Vedas are eternal in this way
the Vedas are genuine sources of knowledge. This explanation is not at all
inconsistent with the previously quoted explanation from the Mémäàsä-sütra.
Why is this? The sütra says pratyakñänumänäbhyäm, which means "because of
the evidence given in çruti and småti." The çruti (Païca-vaiàçati Brähmaëa
(6.9,13,22) discussing the creation of the world, which was preceded by the
(eternal) words (of the Vedas), gives the following description: eta iti ha vai
prajäpatir devän asåjat asågram iti manuñyän indava iti pitåéàs tiraù-pavitram iti
grahän äsuva iti stotraà viçvänéti mantram abhisaubhagety anyäù prajäù (Reciting
the word ete from the Vedas, Lord Brahmä created the devas. Reciting the word

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

asågram, he created the human beings. Reciting the word indava, he created the
pitäs. Reciting the word tiraù-pavitram, he created the planets. Reciting the word
asuva, he created songs. Reciting the word viçväni, he created mantras. Reciting
the word abhisaubhaga, he created the other creatures).
The småti also confirms this in the following words (Viñëu Puräëa 1.5.64):

näma rüpaà ca bhütänäà

kåtyänäà ca prapaïcanam
veda-çabdebhya evädau
devädénäà cakära saù

"By reciting the words of the Vedas in the beginning, Lord Brahmä created the
names and forms of the material elements, the rituals, the devas, and all other
living entities."

Sütra 29

ata eva ca nityatvam

ataù eva-therefore; ca-and; nityatvam-eternity.

And for this very reason the eternity (of the Veda is proved).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The eternity of the Vedas is proved by the fact that the creator (Brahmä)
creates (the world) by (reciting the Vedic) words (describing the) eternal forms
and by remembering (the previous creation). Kaöhaka Muni and the (other sages)
should be understood to be merely the speakers (and not the authors of the
Vedas).
The objection may be raised: So be it. The çruti explains that by remembering
the words of the Vedas Lord Brahmä creates the forms of the devas and other
living entities. This may be in the case after the (naimittika) partial cosmic
devastation, but how can this method of creation be employed after the (präkåta)
complete cosmic devastation, when absolutely everything is destroyed, and how
can the Vedas be eternal under the circumstances of such complete destruction?
If this is said, then he replies:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 30

samäna-näma-rüpatväc cävåttäv apy avirodho darçanät småteç ca

samäna-same; näma-because of the names; rüpatvät-and forms; ca-also; avåttäu-

in the repetition; api-also; avirodhaù-not a contradiction; darçanät #because of the
çruti$ småteç-because of the småti; ca-indeed.

Because the names and forms remain the same even at the beginning of a new
creation, there is no contradiction. This is proved by çruti and småti.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word ca (indeed) is used here to dispel doubt. That after a complete cosmic
devastation there must be a new creation does not at all disprove the eternalness
of the words of the Vedas. Why? The sütra says samäna-näma-rüpatväc cävåttäv
apy avirodho darçanät småteç ca (Because the names and forms remain the same
even at the beginning of a new creation, there is no contradiction. This is proved
by çruti and småti). The meaning here is "because the previously spoken names
and forms remain the same." At the time of the great cosmic devastation the
eternal Vedas and the eternal archetypal forms described by the Vedas enter Lord
Hari, the master of transcendental potencies, and rest within Him, becoming one
with Him. At the time of the next creation they again become manifested from the
Lord. Lord Hari and the four-faced demigod Brahmä both precede their acts of
creation with recitation of Vedic mantras, which recitation leads to meditation on
the archetypal forms. At the time of a new creation the creator remembers what
He created in the previous creation and He again creates as He had created
before. This is like a potter who, by saying the word "pot" remembers the forms of
pots he previously fashioned, and goes on to make another pot. Just as the process
of creation is performed in this way after the partial cosmic devastation, in the
same way the process of creation is also performed after the complete cosmic
devastation.
How is all this known? The sütra says darçanät småteç ca (because this is
proved by çruti and småti. The çruti says:

ätmä vä idam eka evägra äsét sa aikñata lokän utsåjäù

"In the beginning was only the Supreme Personality of Godhead. He thought: I

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

shall create many worlds).
Aitareya Upaniñad 1.1

yo brahmäëaà vidadhäti pürvaà yo vai vedäàç ca prahiëoti tasmi tam

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead created the Vedas and taught them to
the demigod Brahmä).
Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad 6.18

süryä-candramasau dhätä yathä-pürvam akalpat

"Brahmä created the sun and moon as he had done before."

Rg Veda

The småti says

nyagrodhaù su-mahän alpe

yathä béje vyavasthitaù
samyame viçvam akhilam
béja-bhüte yathä tvayi

"O Lord, just as a great banyan tree rests within a tiny seed, in the same way at
the time of cosmic devastation the entire universe rests within You, the seed from
which it originally sprouted."
Viñëu Puräëa

näräyaëaù paro devas

tasmäj jätaç caturmukhaù

"Näräyaëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. From him the demigod

Brahmä was born."
Varäha Puräëa

tene brahma hådä ya ädi-kavaye

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead first imparted the Vedic knowledge

unto the heart of Brahmäjé, the original living being."*
Çrémad-Bhägavatam 1.1.1

A summary of this gist of this explanation follows: The Supreme Personality of

Godhead, at the end of the period of cosmic devastation, meditating on the
material universe at it had been before, desiring in His heart "I shall become
many," differentiating again the jévas and material elements that had become

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

merged within Him, creating again, as it had been before, the material universe
extending from the mahat-tattva to the demigod Brahmä, manifesting the Vedas
exactly as they had been before, teaching the Vedas to the demigod Brahmä within
the heart, engaging the demigod Brahmä in the creation of the forms of the devas
and other living entities as they had been before, and personally entered the
universe and controlling it from within. Omniscient by the mercy of the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, the demigod Brahmä, meditating on the archetypal forms
described in the Vedas, creates the devas and other creatures as they had been
before. In this way the relationship between the names of the devas headed by
Indra and their archetypal forms described in the Vedas is explained. In this way
the opponent's argument of the Vedic words does not at all refute (this
explanation of the nature of the devas). In this way it is proved that the devas and
other superior beings have the ability to meditate on the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. The Supreme Personality of Godhead's form the size of a thumb is not
at all contradicted by this description of the ability of the devas to meditate on
Him. This is so because the form of the Lord is the size of a deva's thumb in this
case.
Now will be considered the question of whether the devas are eligible or not to
engage in those meditations where they themselves are the object of meditation. In
the Chändogya Upaniñad (3.1.1) is the statement asau vä ädityo deva-madhu tasya
dyaur eva tiraçcéna-vaàçaù (The sun is honey for the devas. The heavenly planets
are the crossbeam, the sky is the beehive, and the rays of sunlight are the children).
The sun is here the honey of the devas and the rays of sunlight are the openings
(for drinking the honey). Five classes of devas, the vasus, rudras, ädityas, maruts,
and sädhyas, all headed by their leaders, gaze at the honey of the sun and become
happy. That is said here. The sun is here called honey because it is the abode of a
certain sweetness one becomes eligible for by performing certain religious works
described in the Åg Veda and one attains by entering through the doorway of the
sun's rays. In other places in the scriptures it is said that the devas can perform
these meditations. In this matter he now explains the opinions of others.

Sütra 31

madhv-ädiñv asambhaväd anadhikäraà jaiminiù

madhu-ädiñu-in madhu-vidyä and other Vedic meditations; asambhavät-because

of impossibility; anadhikäram-qualification; jaiminiù-Jaimini.

Jaimini says the devas do not engage in madhu-vidyä and other forms of Vedic
meditation because it is not possible for them to do so.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Jaimini Muni thinks that the devas are not qualified to engage in madhu-vidyä
and other forms of Vedic meditation. Why? The sütra says asambhavät (because it
is not possible for them to do so). The object of worship cannot also be the
worshiper. It is not possible for one person to be both. Furthermore, because the
devas do not aspire to attain the result of madhu-vidyä meditation, namely to
become vasus or exalted devas, because they already are vasus and devas.

Sütra 32

jyotiñi bhäväc ca

jyotiñi-in the splendor; bhävät-because of existence; ca-and.

And because the devas do meditate on the effulgent Supreme Personality of

Godhead.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.16) says tad devä jyotiñäà jyotiù (the devas
meditate on the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the light of all lights). Because
the devas do meditate on the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is described
in this passage from the çruti as the supreme effulgence, they naturally do not
engage in the madhu-vidyä and other inferior meditations. The explanation that
the devas, as well as the human beings, naturally engage in meditation on the
Supreme Personality of Godhead shows that the devas are averse to any other
kind of meditation.
Now that this view has been expressed, he (Vyäsa) gives his opinion.

Sütra 33

bhävaà tu bädaräyaëo 'sti hi

bhävam-existence; tu-but; bädaräyaëaù-Vyäsadeva; asti-is; hi-because.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Vyäsadeva says the devas do engage in these meditations.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word tu (but) is used here to dispel doubt. Lord Vyäsa thinks the devas are
able to engage in madhu-vidyä and other kinds of Vedic meditation. The word hi
(because) here implies "desiring to again become devas and ädityas, they worship
the Supreme Personality of Godhead as the archetypal deva and aditya. Because
of this worship they develop a desire to gain the company of the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. In this way it is possible for them to engage in the madhu-
vidyä and other Vedic meditations." This is so because it is understood that the
worship of the Supreme Personality of Godhead is both the goal and the means of
attaining the goal.
They who are now vasus, ädityas, and other kinds of devas meditate on the
Supreme Personality of Godhead as the archetypal vasu and äditya. At the end of
the kalpa they become vasus and ädityas and engage in the meditation and worship
of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is the Supersoul in their hearts, and
who is the cause of their becoming vasus and ädityas again. As a result of this
worship they will eventually become liberated.
The words äditya, vasu, and the names of the other devas, are all also names of
the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This is confirmed by the words ya etam
evaà brahmopaniñadaà veda (He who understands this Upaniñad describing the
Supreme Personality of Godhead) at the end of the Upaniñad.
It is not that because the devas have already attained their exalted positions
therefore they have no desire to become devas and therefore have no interest in
attaining the results of Vedic meditation. This is so because it is seen in this world
that many people, even though they already have sons in this lifetime, yearn to
again have sons in the next life. Furthermore, because they are actually
meditations on the Supreme Personality of Godhead the madhu-vidyä meditations
of the devas are described in the words of the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.16)
tad devä jyotiñäà jyotir (The devas meditate on the Supreme Personality of
Godhead).
The scriptures say prajäpatir akämayata prajäyeyeti sa etad agnihotraà
mithunam apaçyat. tad udite sürye 'juhot. (The demigod Brahmä desired: "Let me
create children." He then saw two agnihotra sacrifices. When the sun rose he
performed agnihotra sacrifices). The scriptures also say devä vai satram äsata (the
devas then performed a Vedic sacrifice). These and other passages from the
scriptures show that the çruti does not disagree with the idea that the devas are
able to perform Vedic sacrifices. They perform these sacrifices by the order of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead in order to protect the material world.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Now someone may object: They who perform the madhu-vidyä and other Vedic
meditations must wait many kalpas before they attain liberation. How is it possible
for one who yearns for liberation to tolerate such a delay? They who yearn for
liberation do not desire to enjoy any material happiness, even the happiness of
Brahmaloka.
The answer is given: This is true. Still, the scriptures explain that be cause of
certain unknown past actions some persons voluntarily postpone their personal
liberation to take up the duties of administering the affairs of the material world.
This adhikaraëa shows that because even the devas perform the ordinary Vedic
duties, how much more so should human beings perform these duties.

Adhikaraëa 8
Çüdras Not Qualified For Vedic Meditation

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In was said that human beings, devas, and other higher beings are qualified to
meditate on the Supreme Personality of Godhead. It is not possible to meditate on
the Supreme Personality of Godhead without having studied the Vedänta, for the
scriptures say aupaniñadaù puruñaù (The Supreme Personality of Godhead is
revealed in the Upaniñads). From this the next topic follows.
Viñaya: In the Chändogya Upaniñad (4.1.1-5) is a story beginning with the words
jänaçrutir ha pauträyaëaù (There was a man named Janaçruti Pauträyaëa). In that
story, after hearing the words of some swans, Jänaçruti approached Raiìka Muni
and offered him many cows, necklaces, and chariots. Raiìka, however, said ahaha
häre tvä çüdra tavaiva saha gobhir astu (O çüdra, keep your cows, necklaces, and
chariots!). After being addressed as a çüdra in this way, Jänaçruti again came, this
time offering cows, necklaces, chariots, and his daughter in marriage. Raiìka this
time replied tam äjahäremäù çüdränenaiva mukhenäläpayiñyathäù (O çüdra, take
this away! With this face alone you will make me speak). Then the Upaniñad
describes how Raiìka taught him the science of saàvarga-vidyä.
Saàçaya: Is a çüdra qualified to study the Vedic knowledge or not?
Pürvapakña: A çüdra is qualified to study the Vedas for the following reasons: 1.
because it is said that all human beings are qualified, 2. because çüdra have the
ability to study, 3. because the çruti sometimes uses the word çüdra, thus hinting
that çüdras are qualified to read the Vedas, and 4. because in the Puräëas and
other Vedic literatures Vidura and other çüdras are described as knowers of the
Vedas.
Siddhänta: The conclusion follows.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 34

çug asya tad-anädara-çravaëät tadädravaëät sücyate hi

çug-sorrow; asya-of him; tad-that; anädara-disrespect; çravaëät-because of

hearing; tadä-then; adravaëät-because of approaching; sücyate-is indicated; hi-
because.

Because he approached impelled by unhappiness from hearing an insult, the

word çüdra here means "unhappy."

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word na (not), taken from sütra 28, is understood in this sütra also. Here it
means "a çüdra is not qualified to study the Vedas." Why? The sütra says hi, which
here means "because." Because Jänaçruti Pauträyaëa, who was not enlightened
with spiritual knowledge, by hearing the swans' disrespectful words kam u vara
enam etat santaà sayugvänam iva raiìkam ättha (What is he compared to the
great saint Raiìka?) became unhappy (çuk) and thus ran (dru to meet Raiìka. The
word çüdra here means "he who was unhappy" and "he who ran." The sage uses
the word çüdra here to display his omniscience in knowing the previous events.
The word is not used here to indicate the fourth class of men: the çüdras.
If Jänaçruti is not a çüdra, then to what class does he belong? To answer this
question the next sütra says he is a kñatriya.

Sütra 35

kñatriyatvävagateç cottaratra caitrarathena liìgät

kñatriyatva-status of being a kñatriya; avagateç-from the understanding; ca-also;

uttaratra-in a later passage; caitrarathena-with Caitraratha; liìgät-because of the
sign.

That he is a kñatriya is understood from the clue related to the caitraratha.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Jänaçruti is understood to be a kñatriya. He possesses religious faith and a host

of other virtues. He is very charitable. He gives charity generously. He is the ruler
of the people. For these reasons it is said that he is a kñatriya. Because he sent (a
messenger to search for Raiìka) and because he gave cows, necklaces, chariots, his
daughter, and many other things in charity, it is said that he is a kñatriya. It is not
possible for anyone but a kñatriya to possess these qualities. Because he thus
displays the qualities of a king, Jänaçruti should be understood to be a kñatriya. At
the end of the story it is also understood that he is a kñatriya. At the end of the
story, where the description of saàvarga-vidyä is concluded, there is mention of
the kñatriya status of a person named Abhipratäré Caitraratha. In the concluding
passage a brahmacäré begged alms from Çaunaka Käpeya and Abhipratäré
Käkñaseni when these two were serving food to others.
If someone objects: "In this passage the status of Abhipratäré as either a
kñatriya or caitraratha is not proved in any way," then the sütra answers: liìgät
(because of a clue). The clue that Çaunaka Käpeya and Abhipratäré Käkñaseni
were friends proves it. The Täëòya Brähmaëa (20.12.5) says: caitena caitrarathaà
käpeyo ayäjayan (The members of the Käpeya family made Caitraratha perform a
sacrifice). In this way the çruti maintains that because of his relationship with the
Käpeyas, Abhipratäré must have been a Caitraratha.
That the Caitraratha family were kñatriyas is confirmed by the words tasmäc
caitrarathir näma kñatra-patir ajäyata (From him was born another kñatriya of the
Caitraratha family). In this way his kñatriya status is clearly proved.
Therefore Çaunaka Käpeya and Abhipratäré Caitraratha, who were both
learned in saàvarga-vidyä, were a brähmaëa and a kñatriya respectively, and in the
subject of saàvarga-vidyä they were also guru and disciple respectively. Raiìka
and Jänaçruti had the same relationship, and therefore Jänaçruti must have been a
kñatriya. In this way it is proved that a çüdra is not qualified to study the Vedas.
Referring to the çruti, he again establishes this point.

Sütra 36

saàskära-parämarñät tad-abhäväbhiläpäc ca

saàskära-of the purificatory rituals; parämarñät-because of the reference; tad-of

them; abhäva-of the non-existence; abhiläpät-because of the explanation; ca-also.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 This is also so because the scriptures state both the necessity of undergoing the
saàskäras (rituals of purification) and the exclusion of the çüdras from these
rituals.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the çruti-çästra is the passage añöa-varñaà brähmaëam upanéyata tam

adhyäpayed ekädeçe kñatriyaà dvädaçe vaiçyam (One should perform the
saàskära and teach a brähmaëa boy when he is eight years old a kñatriya boy
when he is eleven years old, and a vaiçya boy when he is twelve years old). This
shows that brähmaëas are eligible to study the Vedas because they are also eligible
for the saàskäras. The scriptures also say nägnir na yajïo na kriyä na saàskäro na
vratäni çüdrasya (A çudra is not allowed to light the sacred fire, perform a fire-
sacrifice, perform religious rituals, undergo the saàskäras, or follow vows of
penance). In this way it is established that because a çüdra is not allowed to
undergo the saàskäras he is also not allowed to study the Vedas.
Now he confirms the view that the çüdras are not eligible for the saàskäras.

Sütra 37

tad-abhäva-nirdhäraëe ca pravåtteù

tat-of that; abhäva-of the non-existence; nirdhäraëe-in ascertaining; ca-also;

pravåtteù-because of endeavor.

(This is so) also because care is taken to determine that (a student) is not (a
çüdra).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Chändogya Upaniñad (4.4.4-5) (when asked about his caste, Jäbäli said)
näham etad vede bho yad gotro 'ham asmi (I do not know into what caste I was
born). These truthful words convinced the sage Gautama that Jäbäla was not a
çüdra. Gautama then said naitad abrähmaëo vivaktum arhati samidhaà

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

saumyähara tvopaneñye na satyäd agäù (One who is not a brähmaëa cannot speak
in this way. O gentle one, please bring the sacred fuel and I shall initiate you as a
brähmaëa. You did not deviate from the truth). This endeavor by the guru
Gautama demonstrates that only the brähmaëas, kñatriyas, and vaiçyas are eligible
to receive the saàskäras. The çüdras are not eligible.

Sütra 38

çravaëädhyayanärthaà pratiñedhät småteç ca

çravaëa-hearing; ädhyayana-study; arthaà-for the purpose; pratiñedhät-because

of the prohibition; småteù-from the småti-çästra ca-also.

This is so because the småti-çästra also prohibits the çüdras from hearing and
studying (the Vedas.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The småti-çästra says pady u ha vä etat çmaçänaà yac chüdras tasmäc chüdra-
samépe nädhyetavyam (A çüdra is a beast. He is a crematorium. For this reason he
should not be taught the Vedas). The småti also says tasmäc chüdro bahu-paçur
ayajïéyaù (A çüdra is a big beast. He cannot perform the Vedic sacrifices).
Because of these prohibitions a çüdra is not eligible to hear the Vedas. Because he
is not allowed to hear the Vedas, it is therefore also not possible for him to study
the Vedas, understand their meaning, or follow the rituals and penances described
in them. All these are forbidden for him. The småti-çästra says nägnir na yajïaù
çüdrasya tathaivädhyayanaà kutaù kevalaiva tu çuçruñä tri-varëänäà vidhéyate
(A çüdra is not allowed to light the sacred fire or perform Vedic sacrifices. Neither
is he allowed to study the Vedas. What is he allowed to do? His sole duty is to
faithfully serve the three higher castes). The småti also says vedäkñara-vicäraëe
çüdro patati tat-kñaëät (A çüdra who studies the Vedas at once falls into degraded
life).
Some souls, such as Vidura and others, although born as çüdras, become
elevated by their attainment of perfect transcendental knowledge. By hearing and
understanding the Puräëas and other transcendental literatures, çüdras and others
can become liberated. The only real classes of higher and lower among men are
determined by the final result of their lives.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 9
The Thunderbolt in Kaöha Upaniñad 2.3.2 Is The Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now that this digression is concluded, he again reflects on the original topic.

Viñaya: In the Kaöha Upaniñad is read the following pasage:

yad idaà kiïcit jagat sarvaà

präëa ejati niùsåtam
mahad bhayaà vajram udyataà
ya etad vidur amåtäs te bhavanti

"When it breathes all the manifested world trembles in fear. They who know
this thunderbolt become immortal."

Saàçaya: Does the word vajra here mean "thunderbolt" or the Supreme
Personality of Godhead?
Pürvapakña: Because the vajra here causes trembling, and because the
description of liberation attained by understanding this vajra is merely a collection
of meaningless poetic words, the word vajra here should be understood to mean
"thunderbolt." For these reasons, and because the word präëa here does not mean
"breath" but "protector," in this passage it is not possible to say that the word
vajra means "the Supreme Personality of Godhead." Because the phrase udyataà
vajram (raised thunderbolt) contradicts this second interpretation, the word vajra
must mean "thunderbolt."
Siddhänta: The conclusion follows.

Sütra 39

kampanät

kampanät-because of trembling.

Because (the entire world) trembles (the vajra must be the Supreme Personality
of Godhead).

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Because it makes the entire universe tremble, this vajra must be the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. This is so also because of the following statement of
Brahma-vaivarta Puräëa:

cakraà caìkramaëäd eña

vajanäd vajram ucyate
khaëòanät khaòga evaiña
heti-nämä hariù svayam

"Because He goes (caìkramaëa) everywhere He is called "Cakra" (moving in a

circle). Because He moves about (vajana He is called "Vajra" (thunderbold).
Because He cuts apart (khaëòana) the demons He is called "Khaòga" (sword).
These are names of Lord Hari."

Also, because the word präëa (breath) and the word bhaya (fear) are used, the
passage must refer to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. In these ways it is
established that the word vajra here refers to the Supreme Personality of
Godhead.

Sütra 40

jyotir-darçanät

jyotiù-effulgence; darçanät-because of seeing.

It is so because the vajra is described as jyotiù (splendor).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Before the passage discussed is the following statement (Kaöha Upaniñad

2.2.15): na tatra süryo bhäti na candra-tärake (When He does not shine, then
neither sun, moon, nor stars show their splendor). After the passage discussed is
the statement (Kaöha Upaniñad 2.3.3) bhayäd asyägnis tapati (Out of fear of Him

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

fire glows). In both these passages the Supreme Personality of Godhead is
described as transcendental splendor, and therefore the passage describing the
vajra (thunderbolt) between these two passages, must refer to the efulgent
Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Adhikaraëa 10
The "Äkäça" in Chändogya Upaniñad 8.14.1 is the Supreme Personality of
Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Chändogya Upaniñad (8.14.1) is the following statement: äkäço ha vai

näma-rüpayor nirvahitä te yad antarä tad brahma tad amåtaà sa ätmä (Sky is the
creator of names and forms. That sky within is expanded without limit. That sky is
eternal. That sky is the Self).
Saàçaya: Does the word "sky" here refer to the jéva liberated from bondage of
repeated birth and death, or does "sky" here refer to the Supreme Personality of
Godhead?
Pürvapakña: The scriptures say açva iva romäëi vidhüya päpam (As a horse
shakes its mane, so do I shake off all sins and become liberated). This shows that
the "sky" here refers to the liberated jéva. The words yad antarä (which is within)
clearly points to the liberated jéva who is free from all names and forms. This is
also so because the phrase "the creator of names and forms" may refer to the jéva
before he was liberated. The word äkäça here means "effulgence." Everything
therefore indicates that the "sky" here is the liberated jéva. The words tad brahma
tad amåtam (it is expanded without limit. It is eternal) describe the qualities the
jéva attains when he becomes liberated.
Siddhänta: The conclusion follows.

Sütra 41

äkäço 'rthäntaratvädi-vyapadeçät

äkäçaù-sky; artha-meaning; antaratva-difference; ädi-beginning with;

vyapadeçät-because of the description.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The "sky" here is the Supreme Personality of Godhead because the "sky"
described here is different from the liberated jéva, and for other reasons also.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The "sky" here is the Supreme Personality of Godhead and not the liberated
jéva. Why? The sütra says arthäntaratvädi-vyapadeçät (because the "sky" described
here is different from the liberated jéva, and for other reasons also). The meaning
is this: Because the liberated jéva cannot be the creator of names and forms, the
"sky" here must be something other than him. When the jéva is not liberated but
bound to the material world, he attains various names and forms by the force of his
previous karma. By himself he has no power to create these names and forms.
When the jéva is liberated he takes no part in the affairs of the material world, as
will be described in a later sütra (4.4.17). The Supreme Personality of Godhead,
however, is described in the çruti as the creator of the material world. The
Chändogya Upaniñad therefore says anena •jévenätmanänupraviçya näma-rüpe
vyäkaraväëi (With the jévas I will now enter the material world. Now I will create a
variety of names and forms). For all these reasons the "sky" here should be
understood to be the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
The word ädi (and for other reasons also) in the sütra refers to the phrase
brahma (expanded without limit) in the passage of the Upaniñad. This phrase
cannot describe the liberated jéva, although it may very naturally describe the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. In this way the word "sky" refers to a sky that is
all-pervading. Because this description can properly refer only to the Supreme, the
"sky" here is proved to be the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Adhikaraëa 11
At Both the Time of Dreamless Sleep and the Time of the Jéva's Departure From
the Material World the Jéva and the Supreme Personality of Godhead Are
Different

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Pürvapakña: So be it. Still, it cannot be held that the Supreme Personality of

Godhead is different from the liberated jéva. This is said because of the
overwhelming evidence of scripture. For example, in the Båhad-äraëyaka
Upaniñad it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 katama ätmeti yo 'yaà vijïänamayaù puruñaù präëeñu hådy-antar-jyotiù sa
samänaù sann ubhau lokäv anusaïcarati

"Who is the Self? He is a person full of knowledge who stays in the life-breath.
He is the splendor in the heart. Remaining always the same, he wanders in the two
worlds."

Describing the conditioned jéva in this way, the text continues:

sa vä ayam ätmä brahma vijïänamayaù

"This Self is the omniscient Brahman."

In this way it says that the jéva is Brahman. It further says:

athäkämayamänaù

"He becomes free from all desires."

This described the liberated jéva's condition. Then it says:

brahmaiva san brahmäpyeti

"Being Brahman, he attains Brahman."

In this way it is conclusively stated that he is identical with Brahman. Then, at

the end it says:

abhayaà vai brahma bhavati ya eva veda

"He who knows this becomes the fearless Brahman."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The result of hearing the passage is given here.

The statement, in some passages, that the jéva and Brahman are different are
like the sky within a pot and the great sky beyond it. When he is liberated, the jéva
becomes the Supreme just as when the pot is broken the sky in the pot becomes
the same as the great sky beyond. Because the jéva is thus the Supreme Personality
of Godhead, he is the creator of the universes and everything else that the
Supreme is. In this way there is no difference bewteen the libreated jéva and the
Supreme Brahman.

Siddhänta: To refute this, he says:

Sütra 42

suñupty-utkräntyor bhedena

suñupti-in dreamless sleep; utkräntyor-and in death; bhedena-because of the

difference.

Because the difference is present in both death and dreamless sleep.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word vyapadeçät (because of the description), which was used in the
previous sütra, should be understood in this sütra also. In the previously quoted
passages it is not possible to dreaw the understanding that the liberated jéva is
actually Brahman. Why? Because it is clearly explained that in the states of
dreamless sleep and death the jéva and Brahman are different. The difference in
dreamless sleep is described in these words (Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 4.3.12):

präjïenätmanä sampariñvakto na bähyaà kiïcana veda näntaram

"Embraced by the omniscient Self, he knows nothing else, either without or

within."

The difference in death is described in these words from the same passage:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

präjïenätmanä anvärüòha utsarjan yäti

"Mounted by the omniscient Self, and groaning, he leaves."

The word utsarjan here means groaning. It is not possible that the jéva, who
knows hardly anything, can be the omniscient Self by whom he is mounted.
Because the jéva is not omniscient it is also not possible that the omniscient Slef
here is another jéva.

If it is said "Because in these conditions the jéva is still influenced by material

designations, your point is not proved," then the author replies:

Sütra 43

paty-ädi-çabdebhyaù

pati-Lord; ädi-beginning with; çabdebhyaù-because of the words.

Because of the use of Pati (Lord) and other words.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the same Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad, a little afterwards, the word "pati" and
other similar words are used in these words (Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 4.4.22):

sa vä ayam ätmä sarvasya vaçé sarvasyeñaëaù sarvasyädhipatiù sarvam idam

praçästi yad idaà kiïca sa na sädhunä karmaëä bhüyän nätra väsädhunä kanéyän
eña bhütädhipatir eña lokeçvara eña loka-pälaù sa setur vidharaëa eñäà lokänäm
asambhedäya

"He is the Self, the dominator over all, the controller of all, the king of all. He
rules over all. He is not made greater by pious work, nor lesser by impious work.
He is the king of all that is. He is the master of the worlds. He is the protector of
the worlds. He is the boundary so the worlds will not break apart."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 From this is may be understood that Brahman, or the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, is different from the liberated jéva. Because it cannot be said that the
liberated jéva has dominion over all or control over all, and because sütra 4.4.17
will say jagad-vyäpära-varjyam (The liberated jéva has not the power to create the
universes), the idea the Brahman and the liberated jéva are identical is refuted.
This idea is also refuted by the Taittiréya Upaniñad, where it is said of Brahman:

antaù praviñöaù çastä janänäm

"He is the controller in the living entities hearts."

Neither can it be said that the difference between them is only because of the
jéva's identification with a material body, because the çruti-çästra explains that the
difference between them is present even after the jéva is liberated. In the
aàçädhikaraëa of this book (2.3.41) I will refute the identification of jéva and
Brahman in more detail.
The statement ayam ätmä brahma (the self is Brahman) simply means that the
jéva has a small portion of Brahman's qualities. The phrase brahmaiva san
brahmäpyeti (Becoming Brahman, he attains Brahman) should be understood to
mean that the jéva, by attaining a portion of eight of Brahman's qualities, becomes
like Brahman. Because the çruti-çästra says paramaà sämyam upaiti (He becomes
like Brahman), and because of the previous explanation of brahmaiva san
brahmäpyeti, therefore the nature of Brahman is different from that of the
liberated jéva.
In this proof that Brahman is different form the jéva in either conditioned or
liberated states of existence, that the "sky" from which all names and forms have
come is the Supreme Personality of Godhead and not the liberated jéva, is also
proved. Any doubt that may have remained in spite of the statements of the sütras
netaro 'nupapatteù (1.1.16) and bheda-vyapadeçäc ca (1.1.17) is dispelled by this
proof that even at the time of liberation the jéva remains different from Brahman.
Therefore there is no fault in the explanations given for these two (1.1.16 and
1.1.17) sütras.

Päda 4

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 1
The Word "Avyakta" in Kaöha Upaniñad 1.3.11 Refers to the Subtle Body and
Not to Pradhäna

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Invocation

tamaù saìkhya-ghanodérëa-
vidérëaà yasya go-gaëaiù
taà samvid-bhüñaëaà kåñëa-
püñaëaà samupäsmahe

Let us offer our respectful obeisances to the Kåñëa-sun, which is decorated with
transcendental knowledge, and which with its effulgence dispels the deep darkness
of Saìkhya.

(Viñaya): Previously the sütras affirmed that the Supreme Brahman is He the
knowledge of whom brings liberation, He who is the seed of the birth,
maintenance, and destruction of the material universes, who is different from both
the jévas and dead matter, who possesses innumerable inconceivable potencies,
who is all-knowing, who possesses all auspicious qualities, who is free from all
inauspiciousness, who possesses unlimited opulences, and who is supremely pure.
Now we will consider the theory that the pradhäna (primordial material nature)
and the pum (individual living entities) together comprise all that exists (and there
is no God separate from them), which is propounded in the Kapila-tantra and
perhaps also seen in some branches of the Vedas. They quote the following
passage from Kaöha Upaniñad:

indriyebhyaù parä hy arthä

arthebhyaç ca paraà manaù
manasas tu parä buddhir
buddher ätmä mahän paraù

mahataù param avyaktam

avyaktät puruñaù paraù
puruñän na paraà kiïcit
sä käñöhä sä parä gatiù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "The sense-objects are higher than the senses. The mind is higher than the
sense-objects. Intelligence is higher than the mind. The mahat is higher than the
intelligence. The avyakta (the unmanifested) is higher than the mahat. The puruña
(the person) is higher than the unmanifested. Nothing is higher than the person.
The person is the highest."

Saàçaya: The doubt here is whether the word avyakta (the unmanifested)
refers to the pradhäna (the primordial stage of material nature) or the çaréra (the
body).
Pürvapakña: The opponent may answer this doubt by saying that because both
çruti and småti give the sequence as first mahat, then avyakta, and then puruña,
therefore the word avyakta here must refer to the pradhäna.
Siddhänta: Whether the word avyakta refers to pradhäna or çaréra is explained
in the following sütra.

Sütra 1

anumänikam apy ekeñäm iti cen na çaréra-rüpaka-vinyasta-gåhétair darçayati ca.

anumänikam -the inference; apy -even; ekeñäm -of some; iti -thus; cen -if; na -
not; çaréra-the body; rüpaka-the metaphor; vinyasta-placed; gåhétair -because of
being accepted; darçayati -reveals; ca-and.

If some assume (that the word "avyakta" in this passage of the Kaöha Upaniñad
refers to the pradhäna), then I say "No." The fact that this passage is part of a
metaphor referring to the body clearly shows (that the word “avyakta" here means
çaréra).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Kaöhakas (ekeñäm) consider (anumänikam) that the word avyakta here
refers to the pradhäna. The opponent may object: The etymology of the word
avyakta is "That which is not (a) manifested" (vyakta). If this is so, then the word
avyakta cannot mean anything except the pradhäna (unmanifested material
nature).
What is the answer to this objection? The answer is given in this sütra in the
phrase beginning with the word çaréra. Because it is employed in a passage where
the body is compared to a chariot, the word avyakta here refers to the çaréra
(body). The passage preceding this mention of avyakta, which is a metaphor where

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

the material body is considered to be a chariot, clearly shows this. The preceding
passage is given here.

ätmänaà rathinaà viddhi

çaréraà ratham eva ca
buddhià tu särathià viddhi
manaù pragraham eva ca

indriyäëi hayän ähur

viñayäàs teñu gocarän
ätmendriya-mano-yuktaà
bhoktety ähur manéñiëaù

yas tv avijëänavän bhavaty

ayuktena manasä sadä
tasyendriyäny avaçyäni
duñöäçvä iv säratheù

yas tu vijïänavän bhavati

yuktena manasä sadä
tasyendriyäni vaçyäni
sad-açvä iva säratheù

yas tu vijïänavän bhavaty

amanaskaù sadä-çuciù
na sa tat-padam äpnoti
saàsäraà cädhigacchati

yas tu vijïänavän bhavati

sa-manaskaù sadä çuciù
sa tu tat-padam äpnoti
yasmäd bhüyo na jäyate

vijïäna-särathir yas tu
manaù pragrahavän naraù
so 'dhvanaù päram äpnoti
tad viñëoù paramaà padam

indriyebhyaù parä hy arthä

arthebhyaç ca paraà manaù
manasas tu parä buddhir
buddher ätmä mahän paraù

mahataù param avyaktam

avyaktät puruñaù paraù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

puruñän na paraà kiïcit
sä käñöhä sä parä gatiù

"The individual is the passenger in the car of the material body, and the
intelligence is the driver. Mind is the driving instrument, and the senses are the
horses. The self is thus the enjoyer or sufferer in the association of the mind and
senses. So it is understood by great thinkers.
"For a fool who does not control his mind, the senses are wild horses drawing
the charioteer. For the wise man who controls his mind the senses are good horses
obedient to the charioteer.
"An impious fool who does not control his mind does not attain the spiritual
world. He attains the world of repeated birth and death. A pious wise man who
controls his mind attains the spiritual world. He never again takes birth.
"A person who has transcendental knowledge as a charioteer, and who tightly
holds the reins of the mind, attains the path's final destination: the supreme abode
of Lord Viñëu.
"The sense-objects are higher than the senses. The mind is higher than the
sense-objects. Intelligence is higher than the mind. The mahat (material nature) is
higher than the intelligence. The avyakta (the unmanifested) is higher than the
mahat. The puruña (person) is higher than the unmanifested. Nothing is higher
than the person. The person is the highest."

Here the devotee who desires to attain the abode of Lord Viñëu is described as
the passenger in a chariot. His body and other possessions are described as a
chariot with its various parts. The traveller who keeps the chariot and its parts
under control attains the supreme abode of Lord Viñëu. After this is explained, the
verses beginning indriyebhyaù parä hy arthäù explain how in the control of the
body and its various adjuncts, which are metaphorically considered a chariot and
its adjuncts, the various members is more or less difficult to control. In this
metaphor of the chariot the senses and other adjuncts of the body are described as
horses or other adjuncts of the chariot. The indriyebhyaù verses continue this
discussion. Of the things mentioned in the previous verses only the body itself is
not listed in the indriyebhyaù verses, and therefore the single ambiguous item
(avyakta) must refer to the çaréra (body) by default. The pradhäna interpretation
of this word is also disproved because the content of the indriyebhyaù verses
disagrees with the tenants of saìkhya philosophy.
Now the following objection may be raised. The body is clearly manifest. How
is it that it is here described as unmanifest? To answer this doubt the author says:

Sütra 2

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

sükñmaà tu tad-arhatvät

sükñmaà -subtle; tu -certainly; tad-arhatvät-because of appropriateness.

The word "çaréra" (body) here certainly means the sutble body (sükñma-çaréra)
because that is appropriate in this context.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word tu (certainly) is used here to dispel doubt. The word çaréra here
means sükñma-çaréra (the subtle body). Why? Because that meaning is
appropriate. Because it is appropriate to describe the sükñma-çaréra as avyakta
(unmanifest). The quote from Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (1.4.7) "tad dhedaà
tarhy avyäkåtam äsét (Then there was the unmanifested)" shows that before the
gross material universe was manifested the living force was present. This shows
that the word "unmanifested" is appropriate to describe the subtle body.
The objection may be raised: If the original cause is subtle, then why should that
subtle cause not be described as the pradhäna (unmanifested material nature) of
the saìkhya theory.
To answer this doubt he says:

Sütra 3

tad-adhénatväd arthavat

tad-on Him; adhénatväd -because of dependence; arthavat-possessing the

meaning.

This meaning should be accepted because the pradhäna (unmanifested material

nature) is ultimately dependent on Him (the Supreme Brahman).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The meaning here is that because pradhäna is ultimately dependent on the

Supreme Brahman, which is the original cause of all causes, the creative actions of

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

pradhäna are not the original cause, but are themselves caused by the Supreme
Brahman. Because pradhäna is naturally inactive, it only acts when inspired by the
glance of Brahman. This is described in the following statements of Vedic
literature.

mäyäà tu prakåtià vidyän

mäyinaà tu maheçvaram

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is a magician, and the material world is

His magical show."

Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (4.10)

asmän mäyé såjate viçvam etat

"The master of Mäyä creates this world."

Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (4.9).

ya eka varëo bahudhä çakti-yogäd

varëän anekän nihitärtho dadhäti

"He who has no rival creates the varieties of this world, using His own potencies
according to His own wish."

Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (4.1).

sa eva bhüyo nija-vérya-codità

sva-jéva-mäyäà prakåtià sisåkñatém
anäma-rüpätmani rüpa-nämané
vidhitsamäno 'nusasära çästra-kåt

"The Personality of Godhead, again desiring to give names and forms to His
parts and parcels, the living entities, placed them under the guidance of material
nature. By His own potency, material nature is empowered to re-create."

Çrémad-Bhägavatam 1.10.22

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

pradhänaà puruñaà cäpi
praviçyätmecchayä hariù
kñobhayäm äsa sampräpte
sarga-käle vyayävyayau

"At the time of creation Lord Hari enters the changing pradhäna and the
unchanging living souls, and agitates them according to His wish."

Viñëu Puräëa

mayädhyäkñeëa prakåtiù
süyate sa-caräcaram
hetunänena kaunteya
jagad viparivartate

"The material nature, which is one of my energies, is working under my

direction, O son of Kunté, producing all moving and non-moving beings. Under its
rule this manifestation is created and annihilated again and again."
Bhagavad-gétä 9.10

We do not accept the saìkhya theory because it considers pradhäna the

original, independent cause of all causes.

Sütra 4

jïeyatvävacanatväc ca

jïeyatva-the state of being the object of knowledge; avacanatvät-because of

non-description; ca-and.

The "avyakta" of this passage is not described as the object of knowledge. This
another reason for not interpreting this "avyakta" to be pradhäna.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Claiming that liberation is obtained by understanding the difference between
the the spiritual living entity, or soul and the modes of material nature, the
saìkhya theorists affirm that one should know the real nature of pradhäna in order
to obtain certain powers. Because this passage from the Kaöha Upaniñad in no way
describes any of this, the word avyakta here cannot refer to the pradhäna of the
Saìkhyites.

Sütra 5

vadatéti cen na präjïo hi prakaraëät

vadati-says; iti -thus; cet -if; na -no; präjïo -the omniscient Paramätmä; hi -
indeed; prakaraëät-because of reference.

If someone says "This passage does describe pradhäna in this way" then I say
"No. That statement refers to the omniscient Personality of Godhead."

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Someone may object: "Your contention that the word avyakta in this passage of
Kaöha Upaniñad cannot refer to pradhäna because the avyakta here is not
described as the object of knowledge has in no way been proved. Pradhäna is
described in this way in the very next verse (Kaöha Upaniñad 1.3.15):

açabdam asparçam arüpam avyayaà

tathä-rasaà nityam agandhavac ca yat
anädy anantaà mahataù paraà dhruvaà
nicäyya taà måtyu-mukhät pramucyate

"By meditating on the soundless, touchless, formless, unchanging, tasteless,

eternal, fragranceless, beginningless, endless, Supreme Great, one becomes free
from the mouth of death."

Someone may object: If these words do not describe pradhäna as the ultimate
object of knowledge, then what do they describe?

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 To this objection I reply: These words describe the omniscient Personality of
Godhead. These words are an appropriate description of the Supreme Personality
of Godhead, about whom the following words are said:

puruñän na paraà kiïcit

sä käñöhä sä parä gatiù

"Nothing is higher than the Supreme Person. The Supreme Person is the
highest."
Kaöha Upaniñad 1.3.11

eña sarveñu bhüteñu

güòhätmä na prakäçate

"Hiding in the hearts of all beings, the Supreme Personality of Godhead is not
openly manifest."
Kaöha Upaniñad 1.3.12

To further explain that the word in question does not refer to pradhäna he says:

Sütra 6

trayäëäm eva caivam upanyäsah praçnaç ca

trayäëäm -of the three;eva -indeed; ca-certainly; evam -in this way; upanyäsah -
mention; praçnaç -question; ca-and.

In this context three questions certainly are mentioned.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word ca (certainly) here is meant to remove doubt. In this passage of Kaöha
Upaniñad only three questions are asked. They are: 1. Naciketa's request that his
father be kind to him, 2. his request for celestial fire, and 3. his desire to know the
true nature of the self. Nothing else is asked. There is no mention of pradhäna.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 7

mahadvac ca

mahat-the mahat; vat -like; ca-also.

This usage is like the usage of the word "mahat".

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Because the word mahän in the phrase buddher ätmä mahän paraù (The Great
Self is higher than the intelligence.) is never taken to mean the mahat-tattva
(material nature) of the saìkhya theory, in the same way the avyakta
(unmanifested) mentioned here to be higher than this mahat should not be taken
to mean the pradhäna of saìkhya.

Adhikaraëa 2
The "Ajä" of Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad 4.5 Does Not Mean Pradhäna

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now another smärta theory is refuted. The following is quoted from the
Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (4.5):

ajäm ekäà lohita-çukla-kåñëäà

bahvéù prajäù såjamänäà sarüpäù
ajo hy eko juñamäno 'nuçete
jahaty enaà bhukta-bhogam ajo 'nyaù

"A certain unborn male serves the red, white, and black unborn female that

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

creates the many living entities and their forms, while another another unborn
male abandons her as she enjoys pleasures."

Saàçaya: Does the word ajä here mean the pradhäna of saìkhya, or does it
mean the potency of Brahman described in this Upaniñad?
Pürva-pakña: Without any external help the unborn material nature creates the
innumerable living entities.
Siddhänta: In regard to this, the saìkhyas' belief concerning the creation, he
says:

Sütra 8

camasavad aviçeñät

camasa-a cup; vat -like; aviçeñät-because of not being specific.

(The word "ajä" in Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad 4.5 does not mean the sa6nkhya
conception of material nature) because of the lack of a specific description. It is
like the word "camasa" (cup) in Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 2.2.3.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word na (not) should be read into this sütra from sütra 1.4.5. It cannot be
said that the female described here is the material nature as described in the
saìkhya-småti. Why? Because the material nature is not specifically described in
this passage. Because there is no specific description, but only the mention of being
unborn in the word ajä, which is derived from the phrase na jäyate (it is not born).
It is like the example of the cup. In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad
(2.2.3) it is said:

arväg-bilaç camasa ürdhva-budhna

"There is a cup with its mouth down and its bottom up."

It is not possible to take the word camasa, which is derived from the verb cam
(to drink), in this mantra as literally a cup, or vessal to consume what was offered
in a yajïa. It is also not possible to consider the meaning of a word without

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

reference to etymology. For this reason it is not possible to interpret the •word in
this mantra as the material nature described in the saìkhya-småti. It is also not
possible because the saìkhya-småti considers that material nature creates the
living entities independently.
The ajä here is the potency of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, which is
described in the Vedas. Giving a specific reason to accept this, he says:

Sütra 9

jyotir upakramä tu tathä hy adhéyate eke

jyotiù-light; upakramä-beginning with; tu-indeed; tathä-in that way; hi-indeed;

adhéyate-iread; eke-some.

Light is its origin. Also, other passages confirm it.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word tu (but) is used in the sense of certainty. The word light is used to
mean the Supreme Personality of Godhead. In this way He is celebrated in the
çruti-çästra (Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 10.4.16):

tad devä jyotiñäà jyotiù

"The demigods meditate on Him, the light of lights."

The word upakrama should be understood here in the sense of "cause".

Because this aja (unborn) has Brahman as its cause, its being unborn is
metaphorical only, just as the "cup" in Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 2.2.3.
In that passage it is said:

arväg-bilaç camasa ürdhva-budhna

"There is a cup with its mouth down and its bottom up."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 As the "cup" here is actually the skull, in the same way the ajä (unborn) here is
not actually unborn, but is the potency born from Brahman, as is described in the
first and fourth chapters of Çvetäsvatara Upaniñad.
The first quote is (Çvetäsvatara Upaniñad 1.3):

te dhyäna-yogänugata apaçyan
devätma-çaktià sva-guëair nigüòhäm

"The dhyäna-yogés saw the Supreme Lord's potency, which was hidden by its
own qualities."

The second quote is (Çvetäsvatara Upaniñad 4.1):

ya eka-varëo bahudhä çakti-yogät

"He (the Lord) who is one has become many by the touch of His potency."

Then the author gives another reason in the sütra's words tathä hi. Hi in this
context means "reason". The reason is the evidence given in other passages
(adhéyate eke). That the material nature is born from the Supreme Personality of
Godhead is also explained in the following passage (Muëòaka Upaniñad 1.1.9):

tasmäd etad brahma näma rüpam annaà ca jäyate

"From Him (the Lord), pradhäna, names, forms, and food, are all born."

The word brahma here means pradhäna, which is situated in the three modes of
nature, and which is also called brahma in Bhagavad-gita (14.3):

mama yonir mahad brahma

"The total material substance, called Brahman, is the source of birth."*

Now our opponent may ask: How, then, is the material nature unborn? Then, if
it is unborn, how can it be born from light?
Fearing that these questions may be raised, he says:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 10

kalpanopadeçäc ca madhv-ädi-vad avirodhaù

kalpana-creation; upadeçät-from the instruction; ca-certainly; madhv-honey;

ädi-beginning with; vad -like; avirodhaù-not a contradiction.

Because it is said to be created by the Supreme it is not a contradiction to say

that pradhäna is both created and uncreated. In this way its is like honey and some
other things that are both created and uncreated.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

This doubt is dispelled by the word ca (certainly). It is possible for pradhäna to

be both created and uncreated. How is that? That is explained by the word
kalpana. Kalpana here means “creation". It should be understood in that way
because it was used with that sense in the Rì Veda's statement, yathä-pürvam
akalpayat (In the beginning the Supreme Personality of Godhead created thew
world). The meaning of this is that the pradhäna is manifested from the Supreme
Brahman, who is the master of the potencies of darkness. That is the truth in this
matter. The Lord has an eternal and very subtle potency named tamas (darkness),
which is described in the following statement (Åg Veda 10.1.29.3):

tama äsét tamasä güòham agre praketaà yadä tamas tan na divä na rätriù

"In the beginning was darkness. Darkness covered everything. When the
darkness was manifested there was neither day nor night."

Tamas is also described in the Culika Upaniñad:

gaur anädavaté

"Matter has no power to speak."

At the time of cosmic annihilation pradhäna attains oneness with Brahman, but
does not merge into Brahman. In the passage from çruti-çästra beginning with the
words påthivy apsu praléyate it is said that the material elements, beginning from
earth and culminating in ether, all merge into tamas (darkness), but there is no
mention of tamas merging into another substance because tamas is already one

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

with the Supreme. Because tamas is very subtle there is no possibility of it being
separate from the Supreme, and therefore it is one with Him. It is not otherwise.
This does not mean that tamas is identical with the Supreme. If it meant identity
with the Supreme the use of the pratyaya cvi in eké-bhavati, would not be
appropriate.
When the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of the tamas potency,
desires to create, from Him arises the unmanifested (avyakta) three modes of
material nature. The çruti-çastra explains:

mahän avyakte léyate avyaktam akñare akñaraà tamasi

"The mahat merges into the avyakta, the avyakta merges into the akñara, and
the akñara merges into tamas."

The Mahäbhärata explains,

tasmäd avyaktam utpannaà tri-guëaà dvija-sattama

"O best of the brähmaëas, the unmanifested three modes of material nature was
born from the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

These passages from scripture clearly describe the creation of pradhäna and the
other elements. In this way the
the scriptures teach that pradhäna is created and that it is both cause and effect
simultaneously. The Viñëu Puräëa explains this in the following words:

pradhäna-puàsor ajayoù
käraëaà kärya-bhütayoù

"Lord Viñëu is the cause of the unborn Pradhäna and Puruña."

At the time of creation the three modes of material nature arise in pradhäna
and pradhäna manifests many different names, such as pradhäna-avyakta, and
many different forms in red and other colors. At this time it is said that the
pradhäna is manifested from the Supreme Light (jyotir-utpannä).
Next he (the author of the sutras) gives an example: "It is like honey and other
similar things (madhv-ädi-vat)." The sun, when it is a cause, remains one, and
when it is an effect it becomes other things, such as the honey enjoyed by the
Vasus. In this way the sun is both cause and effect simultaneously. There is no
contradiction in this.

Adhikaraëa 3
The Phrase "Païca-païca-janäù" in Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 4.4.17 Does Not

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Refer to the 25 Elements of Saìkhya

Viñaya: The Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 4.4.17 explains:

yasmin païca-païca-janä
äkäçäç ca pratiñöhitäù tam eva manya ätmänaà vidvän brahmämåto 'måtam

"I, who am immortal spirit, meditate on the Supreme Brahman, in whom the
ether element and the païca-païca-jana rest."

Saàçaya: Do the words païca-païca-jana refer to the 25 elements described in

the Kapila-tantra, or to some five other things?
Pürvapakña: Because païca-païca is a bahuvréhi-samäsa and païca-païca-janäù
is a karmadhäraya-samäsa, the word païca-païca-janäù refers to the 25 elements
described by Kapila. Somehow the two elements ätmä and äkäça are here added to
the list of elements. The word jana here means tattva (elements).
Siddhänta: He says:

Sütra 11

na saìkhyopasaìgrahäd api nänä-bhäväd atirekäc ca

na -not; saìkhya-of numbers; upasaìgrahät -because of enumeration; api -even;

nänä-various; bhävät-states; atirekät-because of going beyond; ca-and.

Even though they give the same numbers as the saìkhya theory, these words do
not refer to the saìkhya theory because the the numbers here actually exceed
saìkhya's numbers and because the elements of saìkhya are variegated (and not
grouped into five groups of five).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word api (even) here is used in the sense of "even if we consider for a
moment this view." By noting that the number here is the same number as the
saìkhya elements does not prove that païca-païca-jana refers to the saìkhya
elements. Why? The answer is given in the words beginning nänä-bhävät. Because
the variegated saìkhya elements are not divided into five groups of five, it is not
possible to accept the 5 X 5 here as referring to the 25 saìkhya elements. Also, the
addition of atmä and äkäça brings the number up to 27. Simply by hearing the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

word païca five) twice one should not be bewildered into thinking these two fives
refer to the 25 elements of the saìkhya theory. “What is your interpretation of
païca-païca-jana?" someone may ask. The word païca-jana is the name of a
group just as the word saptarñi (the seven sages) is the name of a group. This is
explained by Päëini (Añöädhyäyé 2.1.50) in the words dik-saìkhye saàjïäyäm
(Words indicating direction or number may be compounded with another word in
the same case). As each of the saptarñis may be called saptarñi, in the same way
there may be five païca-janas, each of whom may be called a païca-jana, and all
the païca-janas together may be called the five païca-janas. In this way the
meaning of the word païca-jana is very clear.
Who are these païca-janas? To answer this question he says:

Sütra 12

pränädayo väkya-çeñät

präna-breath; ädayaù -beginning with; väkya-of the statement; çeñät-from the

remainder.

The païca-janas here are five things beginning with präëa (breath), as is clear
from the words immediately following the mention of païca-jana.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The five things beginning with präëa are described in the following words
(Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 4.4.18):

pränasya präëam uta cakñuñaç cakñur uta çrotrasya çrotram annasyännaà manaso
ye mano viduù

"They know the breath of breath, the eye of the eye, the ear of the ear, the food
of food, the mind of the mind."

The objection may be raised: The word annam (food) here is included in the
Madhyandina recension of the Upaniñad but not in the Kaëva recension. In the
Kaëva recension, then, there are only four items and not five.
To answer this doubt he says:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 13

jyotiñaikeñäm asaty anne

jyotiñä-by light; ekeñäm -of some; asaty -in the absence; anne-of food.

In some versions (the Kaëva recension) the word "jyotiù" (light) replaces the
word "anna" (food).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the version of some (the Kaëvas), even though the word anna is missing, the
addition of the word jyotiù brings the number up to five. This word jyotiù is found
in Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 4.4.6 in the words tad devä jyotiñäà jyotiù (The
demigods worship Him, the light of lights). The word jyotiù appears here in both
recensions and it should be counted among the five or not as is appropriate.

Adhikaraëa 4
Brahman Is The Only Original Cause

The saìkhya theorist raises another doubt: "It cannot be said that the Vedänta
describes Brahman as the sole cause of the universe, for the Vedänta philosophy
does not describe a single original cause of creation. In Taittiréya Upaniñad 2.1.1
ätma (self) is revealed as the source of creation in the following words:

tasmäd vä etasmäd ätmana äkäçaù sambhütaù

"From ätmä the sky was born."

Another passage (Tatittiréya Upaniñad 2.7.1) describes asat (non-existence) as
the original cause in the following words:

asad vä idam agra äsét tato vä sad ajäyata tad ätmänaà svayam akuruta

"In the beginning was non-existence. From non-existence existence was born.
Existence created the self."

Another passage (Chändogya Upaniñad 1.9.1) affirms that äkäça (sky) is the
original cause:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

asya lokasya kä gatir ity äkäça iti hoväca

"What is the origin of this world? Sky is the origin, he said."

Another passage (Chändogya Upaniñad 1.11.5) affirms that breath is the

original cause in the following words:

sarväëi hä vä imäni bhütäni präëam eväbhisamviçanti

"Everything was born from breath and ultimately enters into breath again."

Another passage again proclaims asat (non-existence) as the original cause in

the following words:

asad evedam agra äsét tat samabhavat

"In the beginning was non-existence. From non-existence this world was
manifested."

Another passage (Chändogya Upanisäd 6.2.1) proclaims Brahman the original

cause in the following words:

sad eva saumyedam agra äsét

"O saintly one, in the beginning was Brahman."

Another passage (Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 1.4.7) proclaims avyäkåta (the
unmanifested) as the original cause in the following words:

tad vaidaà tarhy avyäkåtam äsét tan-näma-rüpäbhyäà vyäkriyata

" In the beginning was the unmanifested. From it all the names and forms have
come."

Many other passages could also be quoted to show the different theories of
creation. Because in these passages of the Vedas many different things have been
described as the sole original cause of creation, it cannot be said that Brahman is
the sole cause of the creation of the world. However, it is possible to say that
pradhäna is the sole cause of creation, as we find in the passage (beginning with
the word tarhi already quoted from the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad. If this view is
accepted, then the contradiction of seeing one thing sometimes as the original
cause and sometimes as a product of the original cause becomes at once resolved.
Because it is all-pervading the pradhäna can appropriately be called ätmä,
äkäça, and brahma, because it is the resting-place of all transformations and
because it is eternal it may appropriately be called asat, and because it is the origin

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

of all breathing it may metaphorically be called breath. When the scriptures state
that the original cause performed activities, such as thinking (Båhad-äraëyaka
Upaniñad 1.2.5 explains sa aikñata: The original cause thought.) these may also be
considered metaphors. All this evidence clearly demonstrates that pradhäna is the
original cause of creation of the world as described in the Vedänta literature. In
the context of this argument:

Sütra 14

käraëatvena cäkäçädiñu yathä vyapadiñöokteù

käraëatvena -as the cause; ca-certainly; äkäça-sky; ädiñu -beginning with; yathä -
as; vyapadiñöa-described; ukteù-from the statement.

The Upaniñads state that Brahman is the cause of sky and the other elements.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word ca (certainly) is used here to dispel doubt. It may be said that
Brahman is the only cause of the world. Why? Because "the Upaniñads state that
Brahman is the cause of sky and the other elements." The words yathä
vyapadiñöam (as described) mean “Brahman who in the lakñaëa-sütra ofVedänta
(1.1.2) and in other places in Vedic literature is described as all-knowing, all-
powerful, and full of all other powers and virtues." This is true because in all
Vedänta literatures Brahman is described as the original cause of sky and all the
elements. That Brahman is all-knowing and full of a host of transcendental
qualities: is described in the following words (Taittiréya Upaniñad 1.2.2):

satyaà jïänam anantam

"Brahman is eternal, limitless, and full of knowledge."

That Brahman is the original cause of all causes is described in these words
(Taittiréya Upaniñad 1.2.3):

tasmäd vä etasmät

"From Brahman sky is manifested."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The qualities of Brahman are described in the following words (Chändogya
Upaniñad 6.2.1):

sad eva saumyedam

"O gentle one, in the beginning was the eternal Brahman."

Also, in these words (Chändogya Upaniñad 6.2.3):

tad aikñata bah syäm

"He thought: I shall become many."

The truth of Brahman is also described in the following words (Taittiréya

Upaniñad 6.2.3):

tat tejo 'såjata

" Then He created light."

The relationship between cause and effect in regard to Brahman we will

describe later on. The words atmä, äkäça, präëa, sat, and Brahman mean “all-
pervading", "all-effulgent," "all-powerful," "the supreme existence," and "the
greatest," respectively. These words are very appropriate as names for Brahman.
In the same way the statement sa aikñata (He thought.) is very appropriate for
Brahman.
Now, describing the meaning of the words asat (non-existence) and avyäkåta
(unmanifested), he says:

Sütra 15

samäkarñät

samäkarñät-from appropriateness.

The words "asat" (non-existence) and “avyäkåta" (unmanifested) also refer to

Brahman, for that interpretation is appropriate in this context.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Because it is preceded by the words so 'kämayata (He desired.) the word asat in
the Taittiréya Upaniñad 2.7.1 passage asad vä idam agra äsét (In the beginning was
asat) must refer to the Supreme Brahman, and because it is preceded by the words
ädityo brahma (splendid Brahman) the word asat in the passage asad evedam (In
the beginning was asat) must also refer to the Supreme Brahman. Because before
the creation of the material world the Supreme Brahman's names and forms had
not existed in the material world, the Supreme Brahman is sometimes known as
asat (non-existence).
The idea that asat and not the Supreme Brahman is the original cause of
creation is refuted in the following statement of Chändogya Upaniñad (6.2.1-2):

sad eva saumyedam agra äséd ekam evädvitéyaà tad dhaika ähur asad evedam agra
äséd ekam evädvitéyaà tasmäd asataù saj jäyate. kutas tu khalu saumyaivaà syäd
iti hoväca katham asataù saj jäyeteti sat tv eva saumyedam agra äséd ekam
evädvitéyam.

"O gentle one, in the beginning was sat, who is one without a second. Some say
that in the beginning was asat, who is one without a second, and from that asat the
sat was born. O gentle one," he said, "how is it possible that the sat was born from
the asat? O gentle one, it is the sat, which is one without a second, that existed in
the beginning."

The idea that asat was the original cause of creation is also refuted by the
argument of time.

Note: The argument of time is that is not possible to use the verb "to be" with the
nound asat (non-existence). Because it is thus not possible to say "In the beginning
non-existence was," it is also not possible to say that asat (non-existence) was the
original cause of creation.

In this way the wise declare that it is not possible for non-existence to be the
cause of creation and for this reason when asat is described as the cause of creation
it must refer to the Supreme Brahman, who is asat because His transcendental
potencies are supremely subtle and fine. That is the proper understanding of the
word asat in this context.
The Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (1.4.7) explains:

tad vaidaà tarhy avyäkåtam äsét tan-näma-rüpäbhyäà vyäkriyata

"In the beginning was the avyäkåta. From it all the names and forms have
come."

The word avyäkåta should be understood to mean Brahman. In the words sa eña
iha praviñöaù (Then He entered within) that immediately follow it becomes clear
that the avyäkåta that becomes manifested by name and form is the powerful

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Supreme Brahman who appears by His own wish. Any conclusion other than this
would oppose the clear teachings of Vedänta-sütra and the general conclusions of
all the çruti-çästras. For these reasons it is therefore confirmed that the Supreme
Brahman is the actual cause of the material universes.

Adhikaraëa 5
The "Puruña" of the Kauñétaki Upaniñad Is Brahman

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the next passage the author of the sütras) again refutes the saìkhya theory.
In the Kauñétaké Upaniñad 4.18 Bäläké Vipra promises “I shall tell you about
Brahman," and proceeds to describe 16 puruñas, beginning with the sun-god, as
Brahman. King Ajätaçatru then rejects these instructions and says: “O Bäläké, the
person who is the creator of these 16 puruñas, the person engaged in this karma is
the actual Brahman."
Saàçaya: At this point the doubt may be raised: "Is the superintendent of
matter, the enjoyer described in the saìkhya texts, or is the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, Lord Viñëu, to be understood as the Brahman mentioned here?
Pürvapakña: Someone may object: Because the use of the word karma here
identifies this Brahman with the experiencing the results of good and bad work,
because it the next passage this Brahman is described as sometimes sleeping (tau
ha suptaà puruñam äjagmatuù, and because in the passage after that this Brahman
is described as an enjoyer (tad yathä çreñöhé svair bhuìkte), it should be
understood that the Brahman here is the jéva (individual spirit soul) described in
the tantras. The use of the word präëa (life-breath) here also confirms that the
Brahman described here is the living individual soul. This Brahman (the jéva),
which is different from matter, should thus be understood as the original cause of
the many enjoyerpuruñas and the original cause of their sinless activities as well. In
this way it has been proven that the Brahman described in this passage is the
individual spirit soul (jéva). The theory that there is a Supreme Personality of
Godhead is separate from the individual spirit soul (jéva) is thus completely
untenable. The text (sa aikñata) that explains that the creator thinks is thus very
appropriate if it is understood that the original cause, the controller of the material
energy that creates this world, is in fact the individual soul (jéva).
Siddhänta: In response to this:

Sütra 16

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

jagad-väcitvät

jagat-the world; väcitvät-because of the word.

(The word Brahman here means the Supreme Personality of Godhead, because
the word "karma" here should be understood) to mean "jagat" (creation).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word Brahman here does not mean the kñetrajïa (individual spiritual soul)
described in the tantras, but rather it means the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
who is known by study of Vedänta. Why? Because of the use of the word jagat.
Because it is accompanied by the word jagat, the word karma in this passage
means "the material world composed of a mixture of matter and spirit." Because
He is the original creator, this karma (material world) may be understood to be
His property (yasya karma). The truth is this: the word karma, which is derived
from the verb kå (to do, create) here means “creation". When this interpretation is
accepted the actual meaning of the word here is understood. This interpretation
refutes the mistaken idea that the individual spirit soul (jéva) is the original creator.
Even the Kapila-tantra does not accept the individual living entity as the original
creator. One also cannot say that by adhyäsa (association) the individual living
entity may be considered the creator of the material world, for all the scriptures
maintain that the spirit soul is always aloof from matter. For these reasons it is the
Supreme Personality of Godhead who is the original creator of the material world.
It cannot be that King Ajätaçatru speaks lies in this passage. Rejecting Bäläké's
teaching that the sixteen puruñas (persons) are Brahman, Ajätaçatru promises, "I
will tell you about Brahman." If Ajätaçatru then teaches that the jévas (individual
spirit souls) are Brahman then his teaching is no different than Bäläké's, and he is
dishonest to reject Bäläké's instruction as untrue, and then teach the same
instruction as the truth. In this way the meaning of this passage is understood.
"You have described these puruñas (persons) as Brahman, but I will tell you of
someone who is the creator of all of them," is the gist of Ajätaçatru's statement. In
this way it should be understood that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the
original cause and the entire material world is His creation.
Pürvapakña: If someone objects "Because it mentions mukhya-präëa (the chief
breath of life) the Brahman here must be the jéva and not anyone else," then he
replies:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 17

jéva-mukhya-präëa-liìgän neti cet tad-vyäkhyätam

jéva-the individual spiritual entity; mukhya-the chief; präëa-breath of life; liìgän

-because of the characteristics; na-not; iti -thus; cet -if; tad-that; vyäkhyätam-has
been explained.

If the objection is raised that the jéva or chief breath of life is described as
Brahman in this passage, then I say, "No. This has already been explained (in
1.1.31)."

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In sütra 1.1.31, which dealt with the conversation of Indra and Pratardana, this
question was conclusively decided. There it was explained that in a passage where
in both the beginning and the end Brahman was explicitly named, what in the
beginning may seem perhaps by its characteristics to refer to the jévas or something
else (without them being explicitly named) must be taken as referring to Brahman
also.
This passage from the Kauñétaké Upaniñad begins with the words brahma te
braväëi (Now I will tell you about Brahman), and ends with the words sarvän
päpmäno 'pahatya sarveñäà bhütäänäà çreñöham ädhipatyaà paryeti ya eva veda
(A person who understands this becomes free from all sins. He becomes the king
of all men). Because of these words understood according to the explanation given
in the conversation of Indra and Pratardana (1.1.31) and because of the other
arguments given here the words yasya caitat karma in this passage of Kauñétaké
Upaniñad should not be understood to refer to anything other than Brahman, the
Personality of Godhead.
Saàçaya: Certainly you may connect the words karma and präëa with the word
etat and then interpret them to refer to Brahman, but still there are direct
references to the jéva in this passage (of Kauñétaké Upaniñad). The evidence of the
questions and answers in this passage make it impossible to consider Brahman
different from the jéva. In the question about the sleeper the jéva is asked about,
and in the questions about the place of sleep, the naòés, and the senses, the jéva,
who is here called präëa, is also asked about. It is the jéva who awakens (at the
end). In this way the entire passage is about the jéva. In this way it may be
understood thgat the jéva is the Supreme.
To answer this doubt he says:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 18

anyärthaà tu jaiminiù praçna-vyäkhyänäbhyäm api caivam eke

anya-another; arthaà -meaning; tu -but; jaiminiù -Jaimini; praçna-with the

questions; vyäkhyänäbhyäm -and answers; api -also; ca-and; evam -in this way.
eke-some.

Jaimini thinks these questions and answers convey a different meaning and
some versions of the text also give a different meaning.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word tu (but) is used here to dispel doubt. The description of the jéva here
has a different meaning. Jaimini considers that this passage explains that Brahman
and the jéva are different. Why? Because of the questions and answers in this
passage. The questions ask about the living soul, sleeping and awake, who is
different from the life-breath. The text reads: kvaiña etad bäläke puruña çayiñöa kva
vä etad abhüt kuta etad agät (O Bäläké, where does this person rest while he
sleeps? From where does he come when he wakes?) In this question the difference
between Brahman and the jéva may be clearly seen. The answer is given yadä
suptaù svapnaà na kaïcana paçyati tathäsmin präëa evaikadhä bhavati (When he
sleeps without seeing a dream he becomes one with the life-breath). The passage
etasmäd ätmanaù präëä yathäyatanaà vipratiñöante präëebhyo devä devebhyo
lokäù (From that Supreme Self the breath of life comes. From the breath of life the
demigods come. From the demigods the planets come.) shows the difference
between Brahman and the jéva. The word präëa here means Lord Paramätmä
because Paramätmä is famous as the resting-place of dreamless sleep. Into Him the
jévas merge and from Him they become manifested again. The meaning of the
following passage is that the näòés are merely the gateways leading to the realm of
sleep. The Paramätmä should be understood to be the realm where the sleepy jéva
sleeps and from which the jéva emerges to enjoy (in wakefulness). In the
Väjasaneyé recension of this conversation between Bäläké and Ajätaçatru the jéva is
described as vijïänamaya full of knowledge and Brahman is clearly distinguished
from him. In that reading the question is: ya eña vijïänamayaù puruñaù kvaiña
tadäbhüt kuta etad ägät (O Bäläké, where does this person full of knowledge rest
while he sleeps? From where does he come when he wakes?) and the answer is
given: ya eño 'ntar hådaya äkäças tasmin çete (He rests in the sky within the heart).
In this way the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the object of knowledge taught
in this passage.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 6
The "Ätmä" of Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 4.5 is Brahman and Not Jéva

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 4.5.6 Yäjïavalkya teaches his wife, Maitreyé:

na vä are patyuù kämäya patiù priyo bhavati

"A husband is not dear because the wife loves the husband. A husband is dear
because she loves the Self."

He also says:

na vä are sarvasya kämäya sarvaà priyaà bhavati ätmanas tu kämäya sarvaà

priyaà bhavati

"Everything is not dear because one loves everything. Everything is dear

because one loves the Self."

Again, he says:

ätmä vä are drañöavyaù çrotavyo mantavyo nididhyäsitavyo maitreyy ätmano vä

are darçanena çravaëena matyä vijïänena idaà sarvaà viditam

"The Self should be seen, heard, worshiped, and always meditated on. O
Maitreyé, by seeing, hearing, worshiping, and understanding the Self, everything
becomes known."

Saàçaya: In this passage which self is to be understood: the jéva (individual

spirit soul) described in the Kapila-tantra, or the Paramätmä (the Supreme
Personality of Godhead)?
Pürvapakña: Because in this passage he describes the love of husband and wife
and because in the middle of the passage he says: etebhyo bhütebhyaù samutthäya
täny evänuvinaçyati na pretya-saàjïästi (He leaves the material elements, his body
is destroyed, he dies and is no longer conscious), words that clearly describe a
resident of the material world who is subject to birth and death, and because at the
end he says: vijïätäram are kena vijänéyät (How should we understand the person
who is the knower?) this passage should be interpreted to describe the jéva, who is
the knower described in the Kapila-tantra. One may object: "But it says that by

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

knowing the Self everything becomes known. Certainly this refers to the
Paramätmä and not the jéva." but this objection is not valid. The jéva takes birth in
this world with an aim to enjoy and one may figuratively say that by knowing the
jéva one knows everything for one then knows the world around him meant for his
enjoyment. One may again object, “This passage canot refer to the jéva because the
text says amåtatvasya tu näçästi vittena (By knowing Him one becomes immortal).
Because it is only by knowing the Paramätmä that one becomes immortal, how can
this passage refer to the jéva?" This objection is also not valid because by
understanding that the jéva is by nature different from matter one may also attain
immortality. In the same way all descriptions in this passage that seem to refer to
Brahman should be understood to refer to the jéva. In this way this entire passage
describes the jéva. In this way it should be understood that the material nature,
which is under the control of the jéva, is the original cause of the world.
Siddhänta: In this matter:

Sütra 19

väkyänvayät

väkya-statement; anvayät-because of the connection.

The context of this passage proves that Brahman is the object of discussion.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In this passage the Paramätmä, and not the jéva of the Kapila-tantra, is
described. Why? Because in the context of the whole passage, including what
precedes and follows this quote, that is the appropriate interpretation.
Three sages also confirm this interpretation:

Sütra 20

pratijïä-siddher liìgam äçmarathyaù

pratijïä-of the promise; siddher -of the fulfillment; liìgam -the mark;
äçmarathyaù-Açmarathya.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Äçmarthya (maintains that the Self here is Paramätmä because only in that
way) is the promise (that by knowledge of the Self everything is known) fulfilled.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Äçmarathya maintains that the promise ätmano vijïänena sarvaà viditam (By
knowledge of the Self everything is known) indicates that the Self referred to here
is the Paramätmä. It is not taught here that by knowledge of the jéva everything
becomes known. On the other hand by knowledge of the cause of all causes
everything becomes known. It is not possible to interpret these words in a
figurative way because after promising that by knowing the Self everything
becomes known, in the passage beginning brahma taà parädät (One who thinks
the brähmaëas rest in a place other than the Self is spurned by the brähmaëas. One
who thinks the kñatriyas rest in a place other than the Self is spurned by the
kñatriyas. One who thinks the worlds rest in a place other than the self is spurned
by the worlds) he affirms that the Paramätmä is the form of everything and the
resting place of the brähmaëas, kñatriyas, and world. For these reasons it is not
possible that the Self here can be any other than the Paramätmä. It is also not
possible for the individual living entity who remains under the control of karma to
be the original cause of all causes decsribed in the passage beginning tasya vä
etasya mahato bhütasya niùçvasitam (transcendental he Vedas were manifested
from the breathing of this Supreme Being). It is also not possible for (the sage
Yäjïavalkya) to have taught his wife, who had renounced all wealth and material
benefits to attain liberation, only about the jéva and not about the Supreme
Brahman. It is also not possible that the Self referred to here is the jéva because on
cannot attain liberation simply by knowing the jéva. That liberation is attained only
by understanding the Supreme Brahman is confirmed in the following statement of
Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad 3.8 and 6.15: tam eva viditväti måtyum eti (By
understanding the Supreme Brahman one is able to transcend death). For all these
reasons it should be understood that the Self described in this passage is the
Paramätmä.
Pürvapakña: The objection may be raised: Because the Self in this passage is
described as the object of love for the husband and other persons, this self must be
the jéva bound to the cycle of repeated birth and death and not the Paramätmä. It
cannot be said that the Self described here must be the Paramätmä because that
interpretation answers the promise (of Yäjïavalkya to speak certain words), nor
can it be said that the Self here must be the Paramätmä because this Self is the
shelter of the devotees, the creator of everything, all-powerful, and the origin of
transcendental bliss. The jéva may also be these things, as the Padma Puräëa
explains: yenärcito haris tena tarpitäni jaganty api rajyanti jantavas tatra sthävarä
jaìgamä api (One who worships Lord Hari pleases all the worlds. All moving and

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

non-moving creatures love the devotee). In this way the Self described here is not
the Paramätmä.
Siddhänta: Fearing that the opponent may speak these words, he says:

Sütra 21

utkramiñyata evaà bhäväd ity auòulomiù

utkramiñyataù -of a person about to depart; evam-in this way; bhävät-from this
condition; iti-thus; auòulomiù-Auòulomi.

Auòulomi maintains that one about to become liberated attains the

transcendental qualities of the Lord.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word utkramiñyataù here means a person who by following spiritual

practices attains the Paramätmä. Evaà bhävät means "because of being dear to
everyone." Ätmä means "Paramätmä." This is the opinion of Auòulomi. The
passage patyuù kämäya patiù priyo bhavati (A husband is not dear because the
wife loves the husband. A husband is dear because she loves the Self) means that if
a wife thinks "By my own power I shall become dear to my husband" her husband
will not love her. However, if the wife loves the Paramätmä, then Lord Paramätmä
will make everyone love this devotee-wife. The word käma here means "desire"
and kämäya means "to fulfill the desire." The use of the dative case here is
described in Päëini's sütras (Añöädhyäyé 2.3.1 or Siddhänta-kaumudé 581) in the
following words: kriyärthopapadasya ca karmaëi sthäninaù (The dative case is
used for the object of a verb understood but not expressed. In the dative two verbs
are used together and the action is in the future). In other words this passage
(patyuù kämäya) of the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad means "When He is worshiped
with devotion, the Supreme Personality of Godhead makes everything a source of
happiness for His devotees." This is corroborated by the following statement of
Çrémad-Bhägavatam (11.14.13):

akiïcanasya däntasya
çäntasya sama-cetasaù
mayä santuñöa-manasaù
sarväù sukhamayä diçaù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "For a person who is renounced, self-controlled, peaceful, equal to all, and who
finds his happiness in Me, every place in this world is full of joy."

The passage patyuù kämäya may also be interpreted to mean "Trying to please
the husband does not please him. Only when the wife tries to please the
Paramätmä does the husband become pleased." This interpretation is
corroborated by the following statement of Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.23.27):

präëa-buddhi-manaù-svätma-
däräpatya-dhanädayaù
yat-samparkät priyä äsaàs
tataù ko 'nyaù paraù priyaù

"Our life, property, home, wife, children, house, country, society, and all
paraphernalia which are very dear to us are expansions of the Supreme Personality
of Godhead. Who is more dear to us than the Supreme Person?"

In this interpretation the word käma means "happiness" and the dative case is
used in the same sense as the previous interpretation. This interpretation means
that by the will of the Paramätmä, by the nearness of the Paramätmä, or by the
touch of the Paramätmä, even what is ordinarily unpleasant becomes blissful.
Therefore when the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad says ätmä vä are drañöavyaù (The
Self should be seen), the word ätmä means the dear Lord Hari. It is not possible to
interpret the word ätmä here to mean the jéva because here the primary meaning
of ätmä is the supremely powerful Personality of Godhead. To interpret ätmä in
any other way would contradict the way the word had been used in the previous
passage (väkya-bheda). We do not see how it is possible to interpret ätmä in a way
different from the way it was clearly used in the immediately previous passage. In
this way the word ätmä in ätmä vä are drañöavyaù must be the Paramätmä. In both
passages (ätmanas tu kämäya and ätmä vä are drañöavyaù) the word ätmä cannot
mean the jéva, for in these contexts the word ätmä can only refer to Brahman.
Although Auòulomi is a nirguëa-ätmavädé (impersonalist) as will be explained
later on in the words (Vedanta-sütra 4.4.6) citi tan-mätreëa tad-ätmakatväd ity
auòulomiù (When he is liberated the jéva enters the Supreme Intelligence, for the
jéva is actually intelligence only. This the the opinion of Auòulomi.), still
Auòulomi maintains that in order to dispel ignorance and reveal the true nature of
the self Lord Hari should be worshiped, as will be explained in the following words
(Vedänta-sütra 3.4.45): ärtvijyam ity auòulomis tasmai hi parikréyate (Just as a
Vedic priest is purchased to perform a yajïa, the Supreme Personality of Godhead
is purchased by His devotees' love). In this way it is proved that pure devotion to
Lord Hari fulfills all desires.
Our opponent may say: So be it. However, in the same Båhad-äraëyaka
Upaniñad (2.4.12) we find the following words:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

sa yathä saindhava-khilya udake präptam udakam evänuléyate na
häsyodgrahaëäyaiva syäd yato yatas tv ädéta lavaëam evaivaà vä. are idaà mahad
bhütam anantam apäraà vijïäna-ghana evaitebhyo bhütebhyaù samutthäya täny
evänuvinaçyati

"As a little salt merges into water and cannot be again extracted from it,
although the water itself becomes salty, so does this great being, limitless, endless,
and full of knowledge, rise from these elements and then vanish into them."

How do you reconcile this statement with your interpretation of the word ätmä
in this Upaniñad? Clearly this passage refers to the jéva described in the Kapila-
tantra because that is the appropriate interpretation.
To answer this doubt he says:

Sütra 22

avasthiter iti käçakåtsnaù

avasthiter -because of residence; iti -thus; käçakåtsnaù-Käçakåtsna.

This passage refers to Paramätmä, for Paramätmä resides within the jéva. This is
the opinion of Käçakåtsna.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In this statement the word avasthiteù (residing) which refers to the Paramätmä,
the Great Being who is different from the jéva, and who is described as vijïäna-
ghana (full of knowledge), teaches that the Paramätmä is different from the jéva
and resides within him. Käçakåtsna considers that because the Paramätmä and the
jéva are different the words mahad-bhütam (Great being), anantam (limitless) and
vijïäna-ghana cannot refer to the jéva. A summary of the passage from Båhad-
äraëyaka Upaniñad under discussion follows.

Yenähaà nämåtaù syäà kim ahaà tena kuryäm

"Tell me what I must do to become free of death)."

Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 4.5.4)

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Asked this question about the means to attain liberation, the sage answered:

ätmä vä are drañöavyaù çrotavyo mantavyo nididhyäsitavyo maitreyy ätmano vä

are darçanena çravaëena matyä vijïänena idaà sarvaà viditam

"The Self should be seen, heard, worshiped, and always meditated on. O
Maitreyé, by seeing, hearing, worshiping, and understanding the Self, everything
becomes known."

In this way he explains that the worship of Paramätmä is the way to attain
liberation.

Then he says:

sa yathä dundubher hanyamänasya bähyäï chabdäï chakruyäd grahaëäya

dundubhes tu grahaëena dundubhy-äghätasya vä çabdo gåhétaù

"As the sounds of a drum when beaten cannot be seized externally, although
when the drum or the player of the drum are seized then the sounds are also
seized). Thus, in a very general way he explains the proper method of worshiping
the Paramätmä: sense-control.

He continues in the following words:

sa yathärdhraidho 'gner abhyähitasya påthag dhümä viniçcaranty evaà vä are

'sya mahato bhütasya niçväsitam etad yad åg vedo yajur vedaù säma-vedo
'tharväìgirasa itihäsaù puräëaà vidyä upaniñadaù çlokäù süträëy anuvyäkhyänäni
vyäkhyänänéñöaà hutam äçitaà päyitam ayaà ca lokaù paraç ca lokaù sarväëi ca
bhütäny asyaikaitäni sarväëi niçvasitäni. sa yathä sarväsäm apäà samudra
ekäyanam evaà sarveñäà sparçänäm tvacaikäyanam evaà sarveñäà rasänäà
jihvaikäyanam evaà sarveñäà gandhänäà näsikaikäyanam evaà sarveñäà
rüpäëäà cak.sur ekäyanam evaà sarveñäà çabdänäà çrotram ekäyanam evaà
sarveñäà saìkalpänäà mana ekäyanam evaà sarväsäà vidyänäà hådayam
ekäyanam evaà sarveñäm karmaëäà hastäv ekäyanam evaà sarveñäm änandänäà
upastha ekäyanam evaà sarveñäà visargäëäà päyur ekäyanam evaà sarveñäm
adhvanäà pädäv ekäyanam evaà sarveñäà vedänäà väg ekäyanam

"As smoke comes from a fire made with wet fuel, the Åg Veda, Säma Veda,
Yajur Veda, Atharva Veda, Puräëas, Itihäsas, Vidyäs, Upaniñads, çlokas, sütras,
vyäkhyäs, and anuvyäkhyäs, come from the breath of the Supreme Person. As the
ocean is the sole resting place of all waters, so the skin is the sole resting-place of
all tactile sensations, the nose is the sole resting-place of all fragrances, the tongue
is the sole resting-place of all tastes, the eyes are the sole resting-place of all forms,
the ears are the sole resting-place of all sounds, the mind is the sole resting-place

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

of all thoughts and desires, the heart is the sole resting place of all knowledge, the
hands are the sole resting-place of all work, the genitals are the sole resting-place
of all material bliss, the anus is the sole resting-place of all expulsions, the feet are
the sole resting-place of all pathways, and words are the sole resting-place of all
the Vedas)."

To encourage the desire for liberation he says:

sa yathä saindhava-khilya udake präptam udakam evänuléyate na

häsyodgrahaëäyaiva syäd yato yatas tv ädéta lavaëam evaivaà vä. are idaà mahad
bhütam anantam apäraà vijïäna-ghana evaitebhyo bhütebhyaù samutthäya täny
evänuvinaçyati

"As a little salt merges into water and cannot be again extracted from it,
although the water itself becomes salty, so does this great being, limitless, endless,
and full of knowledge, rise from these elements and then vanish into them."
In this way he explains that the supreme object of worship is immanent: always
near to the jéva.
In the words etebhyo bhütebhyaù samutthäya täny evänuvinaçyati (So does this
great being, limitless, endless, and full of knowledge, rise from these elements and
then vanish into them) he describes the non-devotees who do not worship the
Lord, who mistake the external material body for the self, who at the time of death
remain in the cycle of repeated birth and death, and for whom the Supreme Lord
remains invisible, hidden within the material elements.
The words na pretya saàjïästi (After death he becomes free of the world of
names) describe the devotee when he leaves the material body and attains
liberation. At that time the liberated devotee becomes aware of his real spiritual
identity. He then considers all material designations to be the same and he no
longer thinks of himself as a human being, demigod, or any other kind of material
being.
The words yatra hi dvaitam iva bhavati tad itara itaraà paçyati tad itara itaraà
jighrati tad itara itaraà rasayate tad itara itaram abhivadati tad itara itaraà çåëoti
tad itara itaraà manute tad itara itaraà spåçati tad itara itaraà vijänäti yatra tv
asya sarvam ätmaiväbhüt tat tena kaà paçyet tat tena kaà jighret tat kena kaà
rasayet tat kena kam abhivadet tat kena kaà çåëuyät tat kena kaà manvéta tata
tena kaà spåçet tat tena kaà vijänéyät (Where there is duality one sees another,
smells another, tastes another, offers respect to another, hears another, thinks of
another, touches another, and is aware of another. But for one for whom the
Supreme Self is everything how can he see another? How can he smell another?
Hopw can he taste another? How can he offer respect to another? How can he
hear another? How can he think of another? How can he touch another? How can
he be aware of another?) explain how the liberated jéva takes shelter of the the
Paramätmä.
The words yenedaà sarvaà vijänäti taà kena vijänéyät (How can a person,
even if he understands the entire world, understand Him?) teach that it is very

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

difficult to understand the Supreme Lord.
The words vijïöäram are kena vijänéyät (How can one understand the Supreme
Knower?) mean "How can one understand the all-knowing Supreme Personality
of Godhead without first worshiping Him and attaining His mercy? There is no
other way than this." In this way the worship of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead is described as the actual means of liberation. The speaker of the
Upaniñad concludes by declaring that actual liberation is the same as attaining the
Paramätmä.
From all this it may be understood that this passage of the Båhad-äraëyaka
Upaniñad describes the Paramätmä and not the puruña as described in the Kapila-
tantra, or the material nature controlled by the puruña.

Adhikaraëa 7
Brahman is Both Primary and Secondary Cause

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya: Now that he has refuted the atheistic pradhäna theory, he will refute
some theistic theories and prove that all scriptural descriptions of the cause of the
universe refer to the Supreme Brahman.
Let us consider the following scriptural passages.

tasmäd vä etasmäd ätmana äkäçaù sambhütaù

"From ätmä the sky was manifested."

Taittiréya Upaniñad 2.1.1

yato vä imäni bhütäni jäyante

"From the Supreme these creatures were born."

Taittiréya Upaniñad 2.1.1

sad eva saumyedam agra äséd ekam evädvitéyaà tad aikñata bahu syäm prajäyeya

"O gentle one, in the beginning was the Supreme, who was one without a
second. He thought: Let me become many. Let me become the father of many."

Chändogya Upaniñad 6.2.1

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

sa aikñata lokän nu såjä

"He thought: Now I shall create the worlds."

Aitareya Upaniñad 1.1.2

Saàçaya: Should Brahman be considering the Primary Cause or the ingredient

of the creation? Because the Upasniñads say sa aikñata (He thought: "Now I shall
create the worlds") the first proposal, that Brahman is the Primary cause and not
the ingredient of creation, should be considered true. Although the Upaniñad says
tasmäd vä etasmäd ätmana äkäçaù sambhütaù (From ätmä the sky was manifested)
still this should be interpreted to mean only that the Supreme is the Primary
Creator (and not the ingredient of creation) of the worlds. The quotes tad aikñata
bahu syäm prajäyeya (He thought: "Let me become many. Let me become the
father of many.") and sa aikñata lokän nu såjä
(He thought: "Now I shall create the worlds."), because of their clear explanation
that the Lord's thinking precedes the creation, show that the Lord is the Primary
Creator in the same way a potter is the creator of pots. Because the creation itself
and the ingredients of which it is made must have the same nature, the ingredient
of the material creation must be the material energy (prakåti). It is not possible to
say that the Primary Cause of creation is identical with the ingredients of the
creation. In the material world made of dull matter the ingredients are earth and
the other elements and the creator is consciousness, just as pots are made of the
elements and the creator of the pots is the conscious potter. Here the pots and the
potter are clearly different. Furthermore many diverse causes may create a single
effect. Therefore it cannot be said that a single thing is both the primary cause and
the ingredient of creation. The changing material energy (prakåti), which is
controlled by the unchanging Brahman is the ingredient of the changing material
universe and Brahman is only its Primary Cause. This statement is not based only
on logic, for it is also supported by the following passage of the Culika Upaniñad:

vikära-jananém ajïäà
añöa-rüpäm ajäà dhruvam
dhyäyate 'dhyäsitä tena
tanyate preritä punaù

süyate puruñärthaà ca
tenaivädhiñöhitä jagat
gaur anädy-antavaté sä

janitré bhüta-bhäviné

sitäsitä ca raktä ca
sarvakäm adhunä vibhoù
pibanty enäm aviñamäm
avijïätäù kumärakäù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

ekas tu pibate devaù
svacchando 'tra vaçänugäm
dhyäna-kriyäbhyäà bhagavän
bhuìkte 'sau prasabhaà vibhuù

sarva-sädhäraëéà dogdhréà
péyamänäà tu yajvabhiù
catur-viàçati-saìkhyäkaà
avyaktaà vyaktam ucyate

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead meditates on the unborn, eternal,

unintelligent material nature (prakåti), who has eight forms, and by His order the
material nature creates the material worlds and the various goals of life adopted by
the living entities. Material nature is a beginningless, endless cow, the mother of
the worlds. Without knowing, her children, the creatures in goodness, passion, and
ignorance all drink her nourishing milk. The one independent, all-powerful
Supreme Personality of Godhead strongly enjoys her with thought and deed, she
who is the milk-giving mother of all, who is drunk by the performers of sacrifice,
and who is said to be both the unmanifested and the manifested divided into 24
elements."

Furthermore, the Viñëu Puräëa says:

yathä sannidhi-mätreëa
gandhaù kñobhäya jäyate
manaso nopakartåtvät
tathäsau parameçvaraù

sannidhänäd yathäkäça-
kälädyäù käraëaà taroù
tathaiväparigämena
viçvasya bhagavän hariù

nimitta-mätram eväsau
såñöänäà sarga-karmaëi
pradhäna-käriëé bhütä
yato vai såjya-çaktayaù

"When there is a fragrant flower before someone, the fragrance is touched by

the smelling power of the person, yet the smelling and the flower are detached
from one another. There is a similar connection between the material world and
the Supreme Personality of Godhead: actually He has nothing to do with this

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

material world, but He creates by His glance and ordains. In summary, material
nature, without the superintendence of the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
cannot do anything. Yet the Supreme Personality is detached from all material
activities."

For these reasons whatever scriptural passages state that Brahman is the
ingredient of the creation should be interpreted to have a different meaning.
SiddhäntaTo this argument:

Sütra 23

prakåtiç ca pratijïä dåñöäntänuparodhät

prakåtiù -material nature; ca -and; pratijïä -the proposition to be proved;

dåñöänta-example; anuparodhät-because of not contradicting.

Brahman is also the material nature (prakåti) because this view is not
contradicted by the statements and examples (given in the scriptures).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Brahman is the material nature (prakåti), the ingredient of the world. How is
that? It is so because pratijïä-dåñöäntänuparodhät, which means “Because this
view is not contradicted by the statements and examples of the scriptures." An
example may be given from the Chändogya Upaniñad 6.1.3:

çvetaketo yan nu saumyedaà mahä-manä anücäna-mäné stabdho 'sy uta tam

ädeçam apräkñér yenäçrutaà çrutaà bhavaty amataà matam avijïätaà vijïätam
ity eka-vijïänena sarva-vijïäna-viñayä pratijïä

"Gentle Çvetaketu, you are now very proud and arrogant, thinking yourself a
great Vedic scholar. Did you ask for the teaching that makes the unheard heard,
the unthinkable thinkable, and the unknown known?"

Here the statement is the existence of a single teaching, the knowledge of which
makes everything known. This teaching must be about the ingredient of the world
for only that knowledge would not contradict the description in this passage. That
ingredient of the world is not different from the original creator of the world. They
are one, unlike the pot and the potter, which are different from each other.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The following example is given (Chändogya Upaniñad 6.1.10):

yathä saumyaikena måt-piëòena sarvaà måë-mayaà vijïätaà syät

"O gentle one, as by knowing the nature of clay, everything made of clay
becomes known, in the same way by understanding this one teaching everything
becomes known."

These words of the çruti must refer to the ingredient of the world. they cannot
refer to only the original creator of the world, for by understanding only the potter
one does not understand the pot. Therefore, to avoid contradicting these words of
the scripture, it must be concluded that Brahman is not only the original creator of
the world, but the ingredient of which the world is made as well.

Sütra 24

abhidhyopadeçäc ca

abhidhya-will; upadeçäc -because of the teaching; ca-and.

Because (the scriptures) teach (that in this age the world was created by His)
will and (in previous creations the world was also created by His will, it must be
concluded that Brahman is both the original cause of creation and the ingredient
of the creation as well).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In this sütra the word ca (and) means "and many other things that are not
explicitly mentioned here."

The Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.6.1) explains:

so 'kämayata bahu syäà prajäyeya sa tapo 'tapyata tapas taptvä idaà sarvam
asåjat. yad idaà kiïcana tat såñövä tad evänupräviçat. tad anupraviçya sac ca tyac
cäbhavat.

"He desired: I will become many. I will father many children. He performed
austerities and created everything. Then He entered within the world He had

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

created. After He entered He became all that is manifest and all that is
unmanifest."

Because it is here taught that by His own desire He resides as Paramätmä

within all conscious living entities and unconscious matter, and because it is also
taught here that he is the creator of everything, it must be concluded that He is
both the ingredient of the which the creation is made and the original creator and
as well.

Sütra 25

säkñäc cobhayämnänät

säkñät -directly; ca-certainly; ubhaya-both; ämnänät-because of direct

statement.

(Brahman is both creator and the ingredient of creation) because both (truths)
are directly stated (in the scriptures).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word ca here means "certainly." The Taittiréya Brähmaëa (2.8.9.6)

explains:

kiàsvid vanaà ka u sa våkña äsét

yato dyävä-påthivé niñöatakñuù
maëéñiëo manasä påcchataitat
yad adhyatiñöhad bhuvanäni dhärayan

brahma vanaà brahma sa våkña äsét

yato dyävä-påthivé niñöatakñuù
manéñiëo manasä prabravémi
vo brahmädhyatiñöhad buvanäni dhärayan

"What was the forest? What was the tree? From what tree in what forest did He
fashion heaven and earth? Ask these questions, O wise ones. Where did He stand
when He created the worlds? Brahman was the forest. Brahman was the tree.
From Brahman He created heaven and earth. O wise ones, I tell you, He stood on

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Brahman when He created the worlds."

These questions and answers clearly show that Brahman is both the creator and
the ingredient from which the creation is made. From the tree-ingredient the
creation, designated by the word "heaven and earth" comes. The word niñöatakñuù
means "the Supreme Personality of Godhead created." Although niñtatakñuù is
plural, the opposite, the singular, is intended here. This is a use of Vedic poetic
license. The questions "What is the tree? What is the forest where the tree rests?
Where does He stand when He created the worlds?" are asked in terms of the
things of this world and the answers describe something beyond this world. In this
way it may be understood that Brahman is both the creator and the ingredient of
which the world is made.

Sütra 26

ätma-kåteù pariëämät

ätma-self; kåteù -because of making; pariëämät-because of transformation.

(Brahman is both the creator and the ingredient of the creation) because He
transformed Himself (into the world).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.6.2) says:

so 'kämayata

"He desired: I shall become many."

It also says (2.7.1):

tad ätmänaà svayam akuruta

"He created the world from His own Self."

In this way the scriptures explain that Brahman is both the creator and the
ingredient from which the creation is made.
Someone may object: How can the eternally-perfect creator be also the
creation?

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 To answer this objection he says pariëàät (because He has transformed
Himself). This does not contradict the changelessness of Brahman for a certain
kind of transformation is not incompatible with changelessness. Here is the truth
of this. In the following passages the çruti explains that Brahman has three
potencies:

paräsya çaktir vividhaiva çruyate

"The Supreme has many potencies."

Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad 6.8

pradhäna-kñetrajïa-patir guëeçaù

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is the master of pradhäna (material

nature), kñetrajïa (the individual spirit souls), and guëa (the three material
modes)."

Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad 6.16

The småti (Viñëu Puräna) also explains:

viñëu-çaktiù parä proktä

kñetrajïäkhyä tathä parä
avidyä-karma-saàjïänyä
tåtéyä çaktir ucyate

"The potency of Lord Viñëu is summarized in three categories: namely the

spiritual potency, the living entities, and ignorance. The spiritual potency is full of
knowledge; the living entitles, although belonging to the spiritual potency, are
subject to bewilderment; and the third energy, which is full of ignorance, is always
visible in fruitive activities."

In this way the scriptures explain that Brahman is both the creator a nd the
ingredient of which the creation is made. He is the first (the creator) by the agency
of His spiritual potency and He is the second (the ingredient of which the creation
is made) by the agency of the other two potencies. This interpretation is confirmed
by the aphorism sa-viçeñeëa vidhi-niñedhau viçeñaëam upasaìkrämate (an
adjective describes both what a noun is and what it is not).

The scriptures also explain (Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad 4.1):

ya eko 'varëo bahudhä çakti-yogäd

varëän anekän nihitärtho dadhäti
vi caiti cänte viçvam ädau sa devaù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 sa no buddhyä çubhayä saàyunaktau

"May the one, unrivalled Supreme Personality of Godhead, who for His own
purpose created the many varieties of living entities by the agency of His
potencies, who created everything in the beginning and into whom everything
enters at the end, grant pure intelligence to us."

As the supreme unchangeable the Supreme Brahman is the original cause of

creation, and as the pariëämi (the transformable) Brahman is also the ingredient
of which the creation is made. In His subtle nature Brahman is the creator and in
His nature as gross matter He is the creation itself. In this way it is established that
the Supreme Brahman is both creator and creation. The creation is thus like a
lump of clay that may be shaped in different ways. The word pariëämät (because
of transformation) in this sütra clearly refutes the theory that declares the material
world a vivarta (illusion) that has no reality. The statement that the material world
is an illusion superimposed on Brahman just as the existence of silver is an illusion
superimposed on an oyster shell with a silvery sheen cannot be accepted because
the oyster shell is an object that can be placed before the viewer, but Brahman,
because it is all-pervading cannot be placed before the viewer and therefore an
illusion cannot be superimposed on it. One may object that although the sky is all-
pervading illusions may be superimposed on it. However, Brahman is not like the
sky in the sense that the sky may be approached by the material observer but
Brahman remains beyond the reach of the material senses and therefore an
illusion cannot be superimposed on it. Furthermore, the existence of an illusion
implies the existence of something different from the thing on which the illusion is
superimposed. Without the existence of something separate there is no possibility
of an illusion. In the end, therefore, the vivarta theory postulates the existence of
something different from Brahman. This is the fault in their theory. When the
scriptures state that the material world is an illusion it should be understood these
words are are a device intended to create renunciation. This is the opinion of they
who know the truth. The material world, however, displays a complicated structure
of different elements grouped in categories of higher and lower, and in this way it
is very much unlike an illusion, where nothing is very stable and one things is
continually changing into another. In this way it may be understood that the
vivarta theory (that the material world isd an illusion) is untrue and the pariëäma
theory (that the material world is a transformation of Brahman) is the truth taught
in the Vedic •scriptures.

Sütra 27

yoniç ca hi géyate

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 yoniù-the place of birth; ca -also; hi -indeed; géyate-is declared.

(The scriptures) declare that (Brahman is the) womb (from which the material
world was born).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The çruti-çästra explains:

yad bhüta-yonià paripaçyanti dhéräù

"The wise see that Brahman is the womb from which everything was born."
Muëòaka Upaniñad 1.1.6

kartäram éçaà puruñaà brahma-yonim

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is the original creator, the womb from
which everything was born."
Muëòaka Upaniñad 3.1.6

In these verses the word yonim (womb) describes Brahman as the ingredient of
creation and the words kartäraà puruñam (the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
the original creator) describe Brahman as the creator. In this way Brahman is
described as both the creator and the ingredient of which the creation is made. The
word yoni (womb) means "the ingredient of which the creation is made." This is
confirmed in the words:

påthivé yonir oñadhi-vanaspaténäm

"The earth is the womb from which the trees and plants are born."

In both common sense and Vedic revelation the creator and the ingredients
from which the creation is made are considered are always considered different
and it is not possible to say that the creator and the ingredient of which his
creation is made are identical. However, the previously quoted passages from the
çruti clearly explain that in this case Brahman is both the creator and the
ingredient of which His creation is made.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 8
All Names Are Names of Lord Viñëu

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Someone may object: Many passages in the scriptures do not support your
conclusion at all.
This adhikaraëa is written to dispel this doubt. The Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad
explains:

kñaraà pradhänam amåtäkñaraù haraù

"Material nature is in constant flux and the Supreme, Lord Hara is eternal and
unchanging." (1.10)

eko rudro na dvitéyäya tasthuù

"Lord Rudra is the Supreme. He has no rival." (3.2)

yo devänäà prabhavaç codbhavaç ca

viçvädhiko rudraù çivo maharñiù

"Lord Çiva, who is known as Rudra, is the omniscient ruler of the universe. He
is the father of all the demigods. He gives the demigods all their powers and
opulences." (3.4)

yadä tamas tan na divä na rätrir

na san na cäsac chiva eva kevalaù

"When the final darkness comes and there is no longer day or night, when there
is no longer being and non-being, then only Lord Çiva exists." (4.18)

The scriptures also explain:

pradhänäd idam utpannam

pradhänam adhigacchati
pradhäne layam abhyeti
na hy anyat käranaà matam

"From pradhäna this material world was born. This world knows only
pradhäna. This world merges into pradhäna at the time of annihilation. Nothing
else is the cause of this world."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

jéväd bhavanti bhütäni
jéve tiñöhanty acaïcaläù
jéve ca layam icchanti
na jévät käraëaà param

"From the jéva all the elements of this world have come. In the jéva they rest
without moving, and they finally merge into the jéva. Nothing else is the cause of
this world."

Saàçaya: Should Hara and the other names given •in these quotes be
understood in their ordinary senses, as names of Lord Çiva, pradhäna, and jéva, or
should they all be understood to be names of the Supreme Brahman?
Pürvapakña: The names should all be understood in their ordinary senses, as
names of Lord Çiva, pradhäna, and jéva.
Siddhänta: The conclusion follows.

Sütra 28

etena sarve vyäkhyätä vyäkhyätäù

etena -in this way; sarve -all; vyäkhyätäù -explained; vyäkhyätäù-explained.

All (words in the scriptures) should be interpreted to agree with the explanation
(that the Supreme Brahman is the original cause).

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In this sütra the word etena means "according to the explanations already
given," sarve means "Hara and the other names," and vyäkhyätäù means "should
be understood to be names of the Supreme Brahman because all names are
originally names of the Supreme Brahman."
The Bhälvaveya-çruti explains:

nämäni viçväni na santi loke

yad äviräsét puruñasya sarvam
nämäni sarväëi yam äviçanti
taà vai viñëuà paramam udäharanti

"The names of this world are not different from Him. All names in this world

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

are names of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. All names refer to Him, Lord
Viñëu, whom the wise declare is the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

Vaiçampäyana Muni explains that all these names are names of Lord Kåñëa.
The Skanda Puräëa also explains:

çré-näräyaëädéni nämäni vinänyäni rudrädibhyo harir dattavän

"Except for Näräyaëa and some other names, Lord Hari gave away His names
to Lord Çiva and the other demigods."

This is the rule that should be followed: When the ordinary sense of these
names does not contradict the essential teaching of the Vedas, the ordinary
meaning should be accepted. When the ordinary sense of these names does
contradict the teaching of the Vedas, these names should be understood to be
names of Lord Viñëu.

The repetition of the last word (vyäkyätäù) here indicates the end of the chapter.

sarve vedäù paryavasyanti yasmin

satyänantäcintya-çaktau pareçe
viçvotpatti-sthema-bhaìgädi-léle
nityaà tasmin nas tu kåñëe matir naù

On Lord Kåñëa, who is the final goal taught by all the Vedas, who is the master
of unlimited and inconcievable transcendental potencies, who is the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, and who in His own pastimes creates, maintains and
destroys the material universes, may we always fix our hearts.

Chapter 2

Pada 1

Mangalacarana By Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

duryuktika-droëaja-bäëa-vikñataà*
parékñitaà yaù sphuöam uttaräçrayam
sudarçanena çruti-maulim avyathaà
vyadhät sa kåñëaù prabhur astu me gatiù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

(Translation 1) With His sudarçana-cakra Lord Kåñëa protected (the great
devotee) Parékñit, who within Uttarä's womb was wounded by the arrows of the
wicked son of Droëa. Lord Kåñëa may him free from all suffering and enlightened
him with the crest jewel of Vedic knowledge. I pray that Lord Kåñëa may become
my shelter.

(Translation 2) With the perfect logic of His scriptural analysis, Kåñëa Dvaipäyana
Vyäsa
protected the Upaniñads, which contain the answers to all questions, and which
were wounded by the arrows of the black crows of false logicians. Lord Vyäsa
made the Upaniñads free from all suffering. I pray that Lord Vyäsa may become
my shelter.
Note: By carefully using certain ambiguous words Çåéla Baladeva Visyäbhüñaëa
has composed this verse so it has two distinct meanings.

Adhikaraëa 1
The Saìkhya Philosophy Refuted

Introduction By Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya---In the First Chapter was proved that the Supreme Personality of
Godhead is faultless, is the master of unlimited inconceivable potencies, has
unlimited transcendental virtues, is the Supersoul present everywhere, is different
from everything, is the creator of the material world and the ingredient of which
the creation is made, is the controller and master of everything, is the object of
Vedänta study, and is described by all the Vedas.
In the Second Chapter the arguments claiming that this Vedänta philosophy is
contradicted by the småti- çästra and by logic will be refuted, the saìkhya theory
that pradhäna is the original cause of creation will be refuted with clear logic, and
the Vedänta explanation of creation will be proved to be the only truth. These are
the topics that will be described. In the beginning the idea that the çruti-çästra
contradicts the Vedänta view will be refuted.

Saàçaya---Is the view that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the original
cause of everything refuted by the saìkhya-småti or not?
Pürvapakña---According to Vedanta philosophy the saìkhya-småti is untrue.
The saìkhya småti was written by the great sage Kapila as a commentary to
explain the jïäna-käëòa portion of the Vedas. He hoped in this way to teach the
path of liberation. Kapila firmly approved of the agnihotra-yajïas and other rituals

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

described in the karma-käëòa portion of the Vedas. The çvetäçvatara Upaniñad
(5.2) glorifies him in the words åñià prasütaà kapilam (the great sage Kapila). In
his Kapila-småti, which contains statements like atha tri-vidha-duùkhätyanta-
nivåttir atyanta-puruñärthaù (the complete cessation of the threefold miseries of
the material world is the ultimate goal of human life) and na dåñöärtha-siddhir
nivåtter apy anuvåtti-darçanät (The threefold miseries cannot be completely
stopped by any method seen in this world, for whenever they are stopped it is seen
that they always return) he explained in the words vimukta-mokñärtham svärthaà
vä pradhänasya (the pradhäna creates the material world either to fulfill the living
entities' material desires or grant them liberation), the words acetanatve 'pi
kñiravac ceñöitaà pradhänasya (although it is lifeless and unconscious, the
pradhäna creates this world just as milk spontaneously creates cheese), and other
statements of his writings, the truth that insentient pradhäna is the independent
creator of the material universes. If the idea that the Supreme Personality of
Godhead is the original cause of everything is accepted, then the statements of the
Kapila-småti must be held to be useless. This is especially so because the Kapila-
småti is a book of philosophy with the understanding of the ultimate truth as its
sole objective. For this reason the Vedänta texts must be interpreted in such a way
that they do not contradict the great Kapila-småti. This interpretation, even if it
contradicts the Manu-småti and other småti- çästras would not make these
scriptures useless. Because these scriptures explain the karma-käëòa portion of the
Vedas, and because they explain the path of dharma (and not theoretical
philosophy), they would not be made useless by contradicting their philosophical
basis.
Siddhänta---To this argument he replies---

Sütra 1

småty-anavakäça-doña-prasaìga iti cen nänya-småty- anavakäça-doña-prasaìgät

If someone objects that the Vedänta philosophy should not be accepted because it
contradicts the Kapila-småti, then I say: No. The Kapila-småti should not be
accepted because it contradicts the other småti-çästras.

Purport By Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word anavakäça in this sütra means "without any proper place." This
means "useless and irrelevant." the sütra says: If someone says "When interpreted
literally, the Vedänta texts seem to denounce the Saìkhya-småti as untrue. This is
a great mistake. For this reason the Vedänta texts should be interpreted
metaphorically (so not to contradict the saìkhya- småti)," then I say no. Why? The
sütra says: anya-småty- anavakäça-doña-prasaìgät (The Kapila-småti should not be
accepted because it contradicts the other småti-çästras). To reject the Manu-småti

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

and the other småtis that follow the Vedänta philosophy and declare the Supreme
Personality of Godhead to be the sole original cause of all causes is a great
mistake. In these scriptures the Supreme Personality of Godhead is proved to be
the original cause of the creation, maintenance, and destruction of the material
universes. These scriptures do not accept Kapila's conclusions.
In this question the Manu-småti (1.5-9) says:

äséd idaà tamo-bhütam*

aprajïätam alakñaëam
apratarkyam avijïeyaà
prasuptam iva sarvataù

"The material universe was dark, unconscious, amorphous, inconceivable, and

unknowable. It was as if completely asleep.

tataù svayambhür bhagavän*

avyakto vyaïjayann idam
mahä-bhütädi-våttaujäù
präduräsét tamonudaù

"The self-manifested Supreme Personality of Godhead, who had been

unmanifested, then manifested within this world. He manifested the material
elements and dispelled the darkness.

yo 'säv aténdriya-grähyaù*
sükñmo 'vyaktaù sanätanaù
sarva-bhütamayo 'cintyaù
sa eña svayam udbabhau

"He who is beyond the reach of the material senses, who is subtle, unmanifested,
eternal, inconceivable, and within whom everything rests, then personally
appeared i this world.

so 'bhidhyäya çarérät svät*

sisåkñur vividhäù prajäù
apa eva sasarjädau
täsu béjam aväsåjat

"Desiring to create the many living beings from His own body, He meditated and
then created the waters. In the waters He placed a seed.
tad aëòam abhavad dhaimaà*
sahasräàçu-sama-prabham
tasmin jajïe svayaà brahmä
sarva-loka-pitämahaù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

"That seed became a golden egg as splendid as the sun. In that egg was born the
demigod Brahmä, the grandfather of all living beings."

Paräçara Muni (Viñëu Puräëa 1.1.31-32) also says:

viñëoù sakäçäd udbhütaà*

jagat tatraiva ca sthitam
sthiti-samyama-kartäsau
jagato 'sya jagac ca saù

"From Lord Viñëu this material was manifested. In Him it rests. He controls it.
This material world is His property, and He is this material world.

yathorëanäbho hådayäd*
ürëäm santatya vaktrataù
tayä vihåtya bhüyas täà
grasaty evaà janärdanaù

"As a spider creates a web within its chest and then manifests it from its mouth, so
does Lord Viñëu manifest this world and then swallow it again."

The other småtis also present the same view. They are not merely explanations of
karma-käëòa duties. They teach karma-käëòa duites as a means to purify the heart
so knowledge of the Supreme Personality of Godhead may arise there. In this way
they may be understood as explanations of the jïäna-käëòa portion of the Vedas.
This effort to purify the heart is seen in the following statement of the Båhad-
äraëyaka Upaniñad (1.5.4.22): tam etaà vedänuvacanena (By studying the Vedas
and performing spiritual activities, the brähmaëas understand the Supreme
Personality of Godhead). Although in some places they grant results such as the
attainment of rain, sons, or residence in Svargaloka, these results are intended to
bring faith in the words of the Vedas. This is confirmed by the Kaöha Upaniñad
(1.3.15) in the words sarve vedäù yat-padam ämananti (All the Vedas aspire to
attain the feet of the Supreme Personality of Godhead) and the çrémad-
Bhägavatam (2.5.15) in the words näräyaëa-parä vedäù (The Vedic literatures are
made by and are meant for the Supreme Lord). Because it contradicts the
conclusions of the Vedas, the Saìkhya-småti cannot properly explain the meanings
of the Vedas. A text that agrees with the conclusions of the Vedas may properly
explain the Vedas. The Saìkhya-småti does not even agree with the conclusion of
the Vedas. The Saìkhya-småti invented by Kapila contradicts the Vedas. It is not a
genuine scripture. Because it is thus worthless we do not fear to reject it. Even if it
was written by a famous author, a book that contradicts the Vedas should not be
accepted. There are many småtis presenting many different philosophies that are
all worthless because they contradict the truths of the Vedas. Småti that contradicts
the Vedas should be rejected, and småti that follows the teachings of the Vedas
should be accepted.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Using evidence from the småtis that support the Vedas, we shall refute the
småtis that reject the Vedas. In this way we shall proclaim those småtis to be in
error because they contradict the other småtis.
The quotation from çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (5.2) rñéà prasütaà kapilaà yas tam
agre jïänair bibharti (The great sage Kapila is full of knowledge) does not give
authority to the Saìkhya-småti. Because the Upaniñads would not glorify a sage
who opposed the Vedic conclusion, the Kapila here must be a person different
from the author of the Saìkhya-småti. The Taittiréya Brähmaëa, however,
considers Manu (the author of Manu- småti) an exalted authority in these words:
yad vai kiïcana manur avadat tad bheñajam (Whatever Manu has said is certainly
the cure for the ills of this world). In the same way the småti says that by the mercy
of Pulastya Muni and Vasiñöha Muni, the sage Paräçara (the author of the Viñëu
Puräëa) attained transcendental knowledge of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. However, the Kapila who wrote a book contradicting the Vedas, and
who was born in the family of Agni, was an ordinary jéva bewildered by the illusory
potency mäyä. He was not the same Kapila who was born as the son of Kardama
Muni and who was an incarnation of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord
Väsudeva. This is so because the Padma Puräëa says:

kapilo väsudeväkhyaù*
säìkhyaà tattvaà jagäda ha
brahmädibhyaç ca devebhyo
bhågv-ädibhyas tathaiva ca

tathaiväsuraye sarvaà
vedärthair upabåàhitam
sarva-veda-viruddhaà ca
kapilo 'nyo jagäda ha
. . .säìkhyam äsuraye 'nyasmai

kutarka-paribåàhitam

"One Kapila Muni, who was named Väsudeva, spoke to Brahmä and the other
demigods, äsuri Muni, Bhågu Muni, and the other sages, a saìkhya philosophy in
perfect harmony with the Vedas. Another person, also named Kapila, spoke a
different saìkhya philosophy contradicting the teachings of all the Vedas. . .He
spoke his illogical theories to a different äsuri Muni."

Therefore, because it contradicts the Vedas, and because its author is not a
genuine spiritual authority, there is no fault in rejecting the saìkhya-småti.

Sütra 2

itareñäà cänupalabdheù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

(The Saìkhya-småti should be rejected also) because many of its other doctrines
are not seen (in the Vedas).

Purport By Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Because many of its other doctrines are not seen in the Vedas, the Saìkhya-
småti is not an authentic scripture. Thus it teaches that the living entities are all-
pervading spirit-souls and that the material energy creates the liberated and
conditioned states of these souls. It teaches that both bondage and liberation are
both different aspects of the material energy. It teaches that there is no one distinct
person who is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the Lord of all. It teaches that
time is not real. It teaches that the five präëas (life-airs) are identical with the five
senses. These and other similar doctrines may be seen in the Saìkhya-småti.

Adhikaraëa 2
Yoga Refuted

Introduction By Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

An opponent may say: "The Vedänta texts should not be interpreted in the
terms of the Saìkhya-småti because it is opposed to the conclusion of Vedänta.
Howver, the Vedänta may be explained by the Yoga-småti, for it is said that the
Yoga-småti is based on Vedänta. Indeed, yoga is part of the Vedas. This may be
seen from the following descriptions. The Kaöha Upaniñad (2.3.11) says täà yogam
iti manyante sthiräm indriya-dhäraëäm (The sages consider yoga to be firm
restraint of the senses). the Kaöha Upaniñad (2.3.18) again says vidyäm etäà yoga-
vidhià ca kåtsnam (He understood everything about the philosophy and practice
of yoga). This may also be seen from the following description of the yoga postures
in the çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (2.8): trir unnataà sthäpya samaà çaréram (One
should practice yoga, holding the body straight and the head, neck, and chest
erect). The great authority Lord Pataïjali composed the Yoga-småti (to teach)
men how to overcome the disadvantaged position of living in the material world.
In the first two sütras of the Yoga-småti he says atha yogänuçäsanam (Now yoga
will be taught) and yogaç citta-våtti- nirodhaù (Yoga stops the activities of the
mind). When the Vedas are interpreted literally the yoga- småti may not be always
in harmony with them because the yoga-småti teaches about yoga exclusively. The
Manu-småti and other dharma-çästras, however, because they only teach the
performance of religious duties, are always in harmony with the Vedas. Therefore
the Vedas should not be interpreted in a literal sense. They should be interpreted
in the light of the Yoga- småti.
Siddhänta---The conclusion follows.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 3

etena yoga-prayuktaù

By the preceding refutation of saìkhya, yoga is also refuted.

Purport By Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

By the preceding refutation of the Saìkhya-småti, the Yoga-småti is understood

to be also refuted. This is so because the Yoga-småti also contradicts the Vedänta
philosophy. When the Vedänta is interpreted according to the Yoga-småti, the the
Manu-småti and the other småtis that follow the Vedas, all become meaningless.
For this reason the Vedänta should not be interpreted according to the Yoga-
småti. It cannot be said that the Yoga-småti does not contradict Vedänta. In the
Yoga-småti the pradhäna is held to be the original independent cause of all causes.
Both the Supreme Personality of Godhead and all jévas are held to be all-
pervading consciousness only. Liberation, obtained only by yoga, is described as
merely the cessation of pain. Because it contradicts the Vedänta on these points,
the Yoga-småti should not be accepted. Also because its views on sensory
perception and other sources of knowledge, its views on mental activities, and
many other of its views, are outside of the Vedänta conclusions, the Yoga-småti
should not be accepted. These views are found only in the Yoga-småti. Because it
is opposed to Vedänta its conclusions are all worthless. For this reason we do not
fear to reject it. We reject it just as we rejected saìkhya previously. The truth
about the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the jévas, liberation, and the method
to attain liberation, which are all revealed in the Vedänta philosophy, will be
shown, one by one, in the later portions of this book. This being so, in the two
quotations from çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (2.8 and 6.13), trir unnataà sthäpya samaà
çaréram (One should practice yoga, holding the body straight and the head, neck,
and chest erect), which describes the yoga-äsanas, and tat-käraëaà saìkhya-
yogädhigamyam (The original cause of all causes, the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, may be known by either saìkhya or yoga), the word saìkhya is used
merely to mean "knowledge," and in the same way the word yoga is used merely
to mean "meditation." The two philosophies that go by the names yoga and
saìkhya should be understood to be philosophies different from the conclusions of
Vedänta.
Liberation is not attained by following the path of yoga, nor is it attained by the
knowledge of saìkhya, where the soul is distinguished from matter. The
çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (3.8) says tam eva viditväti måtyum eti (One can overcome
the path of birth and death only by understanding the Supreme Personality of
Godhead). The Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.21) says vijïäya prajïäà kurvéta
(One should meditate on the Supreme Personality of Godhead). The scriptures

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

also say etad yo dhyäyati rasati bhajati so 'måto bhavati (He who meditates on the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, finds his happiness in Him, and worships Him,
attains liberation).
We are not opposed to those portions of the saìkhya and yoga philosophies
that do not contradict the Vedas. However, we completely reject those portions
that contradict the Vedas.
Although the Yoga-småti teaches faith in the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
as in the passages éçvara- paridhänäd vä (Yoga may be attained by devotion to the
Supreme Personality of Godhead) and kleça-karma- vipäkäçayair aparäkåñöaù
puruña-viçeña éçvaraù (God is a single specific person who is untouched by
suffering or the fruits of action), still many people reject these sütras and say that
their author was bewildered when he spoke them. Actually it is Gautama Muni
and other atheists who are bewildered, for they propound theories that defy the
Vedas. (The author of Vedänta) will refute these theories (in future sütras). Even
though they were very learned and intelligent, still they were bewildered. In the
opinion of some they had become very proud, thinking themselves omniscient, and
in the opinion of others they were bewildered by the illusory potency of Lord Hari,
who had His own purpose in making them speak these theories.
Because the yoga philosophy accepts the existence of God, there may be some
reluctance to reject it. Therefore in order to refute the yoga philosophy the
argument from the previous Adhikaraëa is repeated here. Even though it was
authored by the demigod Brahmä himself, the yoga-småti is rejected here.

Adhikaraëa 3
The Vedas Are Eternal and Infalliable

Introduction By Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Some followers of saìkhya and yoga may argue: "You may reject the saìkhya-
småti and yoga- småti because they contradict the Vedas, but we reject the Vedas
because they contradict saìkhya and yoga." The following is a refutation of this
argument.
Saàçaya---Are the Vedas are reliable source of knowledge or not?
Pürvapakña---the Vedas say käréryä yajate våñöi-kämaù (He who desires rain
should perform a käréri-yajïa). If one thus performs a käréri-yajïa or other Vedic
ritual, he may not necessarily attain the promised result. For this reason the Vedas
are an unreliable source of knowledge.
Siddhänta---The conclusion follows.

Sütra 4

na vilakñaëatväd asya tathätvaà ca çabdät

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Because they have a fundamentally different nature, and because their own
words are evidence for them, the Vedas are not an unreliable source of knowledge.

Purport By Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Vedas are not an unreliable source of knowledge, as the saìkhya-småti and
yoga- småti are. Why? The sütra says vilakñaëät (Because they have a
fundamentally different nature). This means that because they were written by
jévas, the saìkhya-småti and yoga- småti are subject to the four defects of being
prone to mistakes, illusions, cheating, and defective perception. the Vedas,
however, because they are eternal, are free from these defects. The çruti says väcä
virüpa nityayä (O Virüpa, the Vedas are eternal) and the småti says:

anädi-nidhanä nityä*
väg utsåñöä svayambhuvä
ädau vedamayé divyä
yataù sarväù pravåttayaù

"In the beginning of creation the Supreme Personality of Godhead spoke and from
His words the eternal, beginningless, endless, transcendental Vedas were
manifested. From the Vedas all other scriptures have come."

The Manu-småti and the other småtis authoritative because they have emanated
from the Vedas. In a previous sütra (1.3.29) the eternity of the Vedas was proved
by logic, and in this sütra it is proved by the Vedas themsleves. That is the
difference between these two sütras.
An opponent may object: "In the Puruña-sükta (Rì Veda 10.90.9) are the
words:

tasmäd yajïät sarva-huta*

åcaù sämäni jajïire
chandäàsi jajïire tasmäd
yajus tasmäd ajäyata

'From that sacrifice all fire-sacrifices, the åg Veda and the Säma Veda were born.
From it the Vedic hymns were born. From it the Yajur Veda was born.' This
passage proves that the Vedas were born and, because they were born, must also
perish in the end. For this reason the Vedas are not eternal."
To this opponent I say: No. It is not so. The word "born" here means
"manifested" (not born in the ordinary sense). For this reason the scriptures say:

svayambhür eña bhagavän*

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

vedo gétas tvayä purä
çivädyä åñi-paryantäù
smartäro 'sya na kärakäù

"O Lord, You first recited the self-manifested, transcendental Vedas. Zéva, the
demigods, and the sages, are not the authors, but are only reciters of the Vedas."

The Vedas do not cease to be a source of genuine knowledge because

sometimes the results promised by it do not occur. This so because the promised
results always occur when the Vedic rituals are performed by properly qualified
persons. When sometimes the promised results do not occur, this means that the
performer of the rituals was not properly qualified. Therefore, because they
contradict the Vedas the saìkhya- småti and yoga-småti are not genuine sources of
knowledge.

Adhikaraëa 4
The Words "Fire" and "Earth" Refer to the Devas

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhuñana

Someone may say: "In the Chändogya Upaniñad is the following passage: tat
teja aikñata bahu syäm. tä äpa aikñanta bahvyaù syämaù (Fire thought: 'Let me
become many,' and the waters thought: 'Let us become many'), and in the Båhad-
äraëyaka Upaniñad is this passage: te heme präëä ahaà èreyase vivadamänä
brahma jagmuù ko no vièiñöaù (The breaths quarrelled over who was the best
among themselves. They went to the demigod Brahmä and asked: 'Who is the best
amongst us?') These impossible statements are as plausible as saying 'The barren
woman's son is very splendid.' For this reason the Vedas are not a genuine source
of knowledge. Because in this way one portion of the Vedas is found to be not
authoritative, the other portions of the Vedas are also not authoritative, and
therefore the Vedas' claim that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the
original creator of the material world is not true. If this objection is raised, then he
answers in the following words---

Sutra5

abhimäni-vyapadeèas tu vièeñänugatibhyäm

Because the elements are called demigods, and because there is a description of
the demigods entering the elements, the words here refer to the presiding deities
of the elements (and not the elements themselves).

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhuñana

The word tu (but) is used here to dispel doubt. The passage (Chändogya
Upaniñad 6.2.3) tat teja aikñata (the fire thought) refers to the conscious, thinking
fire-god, and not to the inanimate fire element. Why? The sütra says
vièeñänugatibhyäm (because the elements are called demigods, and because there
is a description of the demigods entering the elements). The previously quoted
passage of the Chändogya Upaniñad continues by affirming (6.3.2) that the fire,
water, and food previously mentioned in the passage are demigods: hantäham imäs
tisro devatä (I am these three demigods). The Kauñitaki Upaniñad (2.14) says sarvä
ha vai devatä ahaà èreyase vivädamänäù. . .te devä präëe niùèreyasaà viditvä (All
the demigods argued, each saying "I am the best.". . .The demigods finally
understood that among them breath is the best). The breath and each of the other
senses in this passages are described as "demigods." For this reason it may be
understood that the names of the senses and elements here refer to the demigods
that control them. The Aitareya äraëyaka (2.4) says agnir väg bhütvä mukhaà
prävièat. . . ädityaè cakñur bhütväkñiëé prävièat (The fire-god became speech and
entered the mouth. . .The sun-god became sight and entered the eyes). Because
this passage explains how the fire-god enters speech and the other demigods enter
the other senses, (it may again be understood that the names of the senses and
elements here refer to the demigods that control them). The Bhaviñya Puräëa says:

påthivyädy-abhimäninyo*
devatäù prathitaujasaù
acintyäù èaktayas täsäm
dåèyante munibhiè ca täù

"The sages know that the word 'earth' and the names of the other elements are
names of the powerful demigods, whose potencies are beyond conception."

The passage graväëaù plavante (the stones float) praises the demigods, who
were able, in a certain way, to enter even the stones. This happened when Lord
Räma began to build the bridge (of stones). In this way nothing in the Vedas is
incorrect, and the Vedic statement that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the
sole creator of the material universes is clearly proved.

Adhikaraëa 5
That The Supreme Personality of Godhead Is The Original Creator Is Proved By
Logic

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhuñana

Taking shelter this time of logic, the saìkhya philosopher again tries to refute

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

the idea that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the ingredient of which the
material universe is made. Although in the words (Saìkhya-småti 6.35) èruti-
virodhän na kutarkäpasadasyätma-läbhaù (Self-realization is not attained by mere
logic, for logic contradicts the Vedas) it rejects mere logic, the saìkhya philosophy
(hypocritically) does so only to defeat its opponents.
Saàçaya---Is or is not the Supreme Personality of Godhead the ingredient of
which the material universe is made?
Pürvapakña---Is the Supreme Personality of Godhead the ingredient of which
the material universe is made? No, because the Supreme Personality of Godhead
is completely different from this world of matter. It is generally accepted that the
Supreme Personality of Godhead is all-knowing, all- powerful, completely pure,
and full of all transcendental bliss. The material universe, on the other hand, is
directly seen to be full of ignorance, weakness, impurity, and misery. Therefore
there is no debate about whether the two of them have differing natures. That a
substance and the ingredient of which it is made must have the same nature is
clearly seen. For example clay, gold, and thread are the ingredients of which
poettery, crowns, and cloth are made. However, because the Supreme Personality
of Godhead is different in nature from the material universe, another ingredient
should be sought. That ingredient is pradhäna because pradhäna possesses the
same nature as this material universe filled with material happinesses, material
sufferings, and various illusions. In order to prove that the Supreme Personality of
Godhead has the same nature as the material universe, someone may say: "Within
the Supreme Personality of Godhead are two very subtle potencies: a conscious
spiritual potency, and an inert material potency. In this way the Supreme
Personality of Godhead is the ingredient of which the material universe is made."
Because it states that a very subtle potency is the ingredient of which the very
gross material world is made, even this argument does not resolve the great
difference between the Supreme Personality of Godhead and the material
universe. Other differences between the two may also be seen. In this way the
Supreme Personality of Godhead is not the ingredient of which the material
universe is made. Although logic must be subordinate to scripture, still, in order to
understand the truth scripture must sometimes be subordinate to logic. This is the
statement of the Pürvapakña.
Siddhänta---He now refutes this argument.

Sutra 6

dåñyate tu

But this is (not) seen by direct perception.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhuñana

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The word tu (but) is used here to dispel doubt. The word na (not), taken from
the previous sütra, should be understood in this sütra also. Someone may say:
"Because He is different in nature, the Supreme Personality of Godhead cannot be
the ingredient from which the material universe is made." The answer is given:
"Because it is many times seen that there is a difference between things and the
ingredients of which they are made, it cannot be said that the Supreme Personality
of Godhead cannot be the ingredient of which the material universe is made." The
material universe is made from the Supreme Personality of Godhead, just as many
things are manifested from sources very different in nature, just as worms come
from honey, as elephants, horses, and other animals come from the kalpa-
drumatree, and as gold and other things come from the cintämaëi jewel. The
ätharvaëikas give the following example (Muëòaka Upaniñad 1.1.7):

yathorëanäbhiù såjate gåëate ca*

yathä påthivyäm oñadhayaù sambhavanti
yathä sataù puruñät keèa-lomani
tathäkñarät sambhavatéha vièvam

"As a spider expands and withdraws its web, as innumerable plants sprout from
the soil, and as hairs grow on a person's body, so is the material universe
manifested from the imperishable Supreme Personality of Godhead."

Adhikaraëa 6
Nothingness Is Not The First Cause

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhuñana

Someone may object: "If the material world is different from its ingredient, the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, then before the world was manifested, it was not
already existent within the Supreme. Before it was manifested it did not exist.
Because the Supreme Personality of Godhead alone existed then, in the beginning
the material world did not exist. However this view cannot be held by they who
affirm that the the material world is real because it is created by the Supreme
Reality." If this objection is raised, he replies is the following words.

Sutra7

If someone maintains the material world to be unreal, then I say no. The world is
not unreal merely because it is in nature different from the Supreme Personality of
Godhead.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhuñana

There is no fault in this. Why? The sütra says pratiñedha-mätratvät (The world
is not unreal merely because it is in nature different from the Supreme Personality
of Godhead). The previous sütra denied that a substance and its ingredient must
have the same nature. It is not that a thing and its ingredient are different in
substance. This is so because the Supreme Personality of Godhead becomes
transformed, becoming the body of the material world, which is by nature different
from Him. This is the meaning: Is it because 1. His nature is different from the
nature of the world, or because 2. none of His qualities are present in the world
that you reject the idea that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the ingredient
of the material world? The first is not a good reason because (difference) is
naturally present in the relation between ingredient and product. For example a
clay pot or other piece of pottery is, because it is not an amorphous lump, unlike
the ball of clay that is its ingredient. In this way they are different. The second
argument is, because existence (sat) and many other qualities of the Supreme
Personality of Godhead are present in the material world, not a valid argument
either.
If the objection is raised: "The qualities of the ingredient that differentiate it
from other things should be transferred from the ingredient to the substance it
creates. The qualities that distinguish gold from thread are also seen to distinguish
golden bracelets and other ornaments from cloth made of thread," then the
following answer may be given: "Because insects come from honey, many other
things are also created from ingredients very unlike the final product, and even
articles of gold often present a nature very different from the original substance,
this argument is not valid. Just as gold is not different from the cintämaëi jewel
that created it and a bracelet is not different from the gold that created it, in the
same way the material world, because it is created from the Supreme Reality, is
not different from Him, and is therefore not unreal.

Sutra 8

apétau tadvat prasaìgäd asama/vjasam

(Someone may object: "If the Supreme Personality of Godhead were the
ingredient of which the material world is made, then) at the time when the
material world is destroyed, (the Supreme Personality of Godhead would be
destroyed). Because this view is untenable (the Supreme Personality of Godhead
cannot be the ingredient of the material world)."

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhuñana

If the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of all subtle spiritual

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

potencies, is the ingredient from which the material world, which consists of both
matter and spirit, and which thwarts the spiritual aspirations of the living entities,
then at the time of cosmic devastation, (when the material universes enter the
Lord's body), the Lord must become like the material world (infected with all its
faults). In the sütra's word tadvat the word tad is in the genitive case and the word
vat means "like."

( CHAPTER II Pada 1 - Sutras 9 onwards and the complete Pada 2

missing!)

Pada 3

Adhikaraëa 1
Ether Is Created

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

vyomädi-viñayaà gobhir
bibharti vijaghäna yaù
sa täà mad-viñayäà bhäsvän
kåñëaù praëihaniñyati

May the brilliant sun of Lord Kåñëa, who with rays of logic destroys a host of
misconceptions about ether and the other elements, destroy the misconceptions in
my heart.

In the Second Pada were revealed the fallacies present in the theories of they
who say pradhäna is the the first cause and they who claim something other than
the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the first cause. In the Third Pada will be
shown the truth that the various elements of the material world are manifested
from the Supreme Personality of Godhead, that they merge into Him at the end,
that the individual spirit souls always existed, there not being a point in time when
they were created, that the individual spirit souls have spiritual bodies full of
knowledge, that the individual spirit souls are atomic in size although by their

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

consciousness they are all-pervading within the material body, that the individual
spirit souls are part-and-parcel of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, that
Matsya-avatära and the other avatäras are directly the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, and that the variety of situations into which the conditioned souls are
placed is caused by the previous karma. These will all be proved by refuting the
ideas of they who claim that these statements are not true.
The various aspects of the material world are created in the following sequence:
1. pradhäna, 2. mahat-tattva, 3. false-ego, 4. the tan-mätras, 5. the senses, and 6. the
gross elements, beginning with ether. This sequence is given in the Subala-çruti
and other scriptures. The sequence found in the Taittiréya Upaniñad and other
scriptures will also be discussed in order to show that sequence does not contradict
what has already been said.
Chändogya Upaniñad (6.2.1) explains:

sad eva saumyedyam agra äsét

"O gentle one, in the beginning the Supreme Personality of Godhead alone
existed."

Chändogya Upaniñad (6.2.3-4) continues:

tad aikñata bahu syäà prajäyeyeti tat tejo 'såjata. tat teja aikñata bahu syäà
prajäyeyeti tad äpo 'såjata . . . tä äpa aikñanta bahvayaù syäma prajäyemahéti tä
annam asåjanta.

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead thought: `I shall become many. I shall

father children.' Then He created fire. Then fire thought: `I shall become many. I
shall father children.' Then fire created water. . . . Then water thought: `I shall
become many. I shall father children.' Then water created grains."

In this way it is clearly shown that fire, water, and grains were created. In this,
however, there is a doubt.

Saàçaya (doubt): Was ether ever created or not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because the Çruti-çästra does not mention
any creation of ether, therefore ether was never created, but was always existing.

This idea is expressed in the following sütra.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 1

na viyad açruteù

na—not; viyat—ether; açruteù—because of not being described in the Çruti-

çästra.

Not so for ether, because that is not described in the Çruti-çästra.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Ether is eternal and was never created. Why is that? The sütra explains:
"Because that is not described in the Çruti-çästra." The relevant passage of
Chändogya Upaniñad mentions the creation of the other elements, but it does not
mention the creation of ether. In the previously quoted passage of Chändogya
Upaniñad the creation of fire, water, and grains is mentioned. However there is no
mention of the creation of ether. For this reason ether must not have been created.
That is the meaning.
This idea is refuted in the following sütra:

Sütra 2

asti tu

asti—is; tu—indeed.

Indeed it is so.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (indeed) is used here to remove doubt. The word "asti" (it is so)
means, "It is so that ether was created." Although the creation of ether is not
described in the Chändogya Upaniñad, it is described in the Taittiréya Upaniñad in
the following words:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

tasmäd vä etasmäd ätmana äkäçaù sambhütaù äkäçäd väyur väyor agnir agner äpo
äbhyo mahaté påthivé

"From the Supreme Personality of Godhead, ether was manifested. From ether,
air was manifested. From air, fire was manifested. From fire, water was manifested.
From water, earth was manifested."

Another doubt is expressed in the next sütra.

Sütra 3

gauëy asambhaväc chabdäc ca

gauëé—figure of speech; asambhavät—because of being impossible; çabdät—

because of scripture; ca—also.

Because of scripture, and because it is impossible, it must be a mere figure of

speech.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

It is not possible that ether was created. This is confirmed by Kaëäda Muni and
other great philosophers. The Taittiréya Upaniñad's description of the creation of
ether is a mere figure of speech, as when, in ordinary speech one says, "Please
make some space" or "Some space has been made". For what other reasons is it
not possible that ether is created? Because it is impossible to create ether. It is not
possible to create ether because ether is formless and all-pervading, because it is
not included in the chain of causes, and because scripture proclaims that ether is
not created. Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (2.3.2-3) proclaims:

väyus cäntarékñaà caitad amåtam

"Air and ether are both eternal."

This proves that ether was never created.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 However, if the passage from the Taittiréya Upaniñad used the word
"sambhüta" (created) only once to refer to the list of elements beginning with fire,
how is it possible to claim that this word is used literally for all the elements and
figuratively for ether alone?
The opponent of Vedänta replies in the next sütra.

Sütra 4

syäc caikasya brahma-çabda-vat

syät—may be; ca—and; ekasya—of one; brahma—Brahma; çabda—the word;

vat—like.

It may be for one, as in the word "Brahman".

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Taittiréya Upaniñad (3.2) it is said:

tapasä brahma vijijïäsasva tapo brahma

"By performing austerities strive to understand Brahman, for austerities are

Brahman."

In this passage the word Brahman is used in two ways. Used to describe the
object of knowledge attained by performing austerities, Brahman is used in its
literal sense. Then, equated with austerities, it is used figuratively to mean, "the
way to know Brahman". In the same way the word "sambhüta" in the previously
discussed passage can be use literally and figuratively simultaneously. In this way
the fact that the passage of the Chändogya Upaniñad makes no mention of it
refutes the description in other Upaniñads that ether was created.
The author of the sütras refutes this idea in the following words.

Sütra 5

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 pratijïähänir avyatirekäc cabdebhyaù

pratijïä—statement of intent; ahäniù—non-abandonment; avyatirekät—

because of non-difference; çabdebhyaù—from the statements of scripture.

It is affirmed because it is not different and because of the statements of

scripture.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Chändogya Upaniñad (6.1.3) affirms:

yenäçrutaà çrutaà bhavati

"Now I will teach how to hear what cannot be heard."

In these words the intention to teach about Brahman is expressed. If this

intention is not broken, then all that follows must be about Brahman and it must
be affirmed that nothing is different from Brahman. The idea that something is
different from Brahman is to be rejected. If everything is not-different from
Brahman, then Brahman is clearly the ingredient of which everything is made.
Thus, simply by knowing Brahman one knows •everything. If this is accepted then
it is also accepted that ether was created.

The Chändogya Upaniñad (6.2.1) again affirms:

sad eva saumyedam agra äséd ekam evädvitéyam aitad-ätmyam idaà sarvam

"O gentle one, in the beginning the Supreme Personality of Godhead alone
existed. He was alone. There was no one else. Everything has Him as its
ingredient."

These words affirm that in the beginning everything was manifested from Him,
and after the creation was manifested everything had Him as its ingredient. This
should be accepted.

Here someone may object: There is no clear statement in that Upaniñad that
ether was created. How can you talk like that?

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 In the following words the author of the sütras replies to this objection.

Sütra 6

yävad vikäraà tu vibhägo loka-vat

yävat—to what extent; vikäram—creation; tu—indeed; vibhägaù—creator;

loka—the world; vat—like.

Indeed, if there is a creation there must be a creator, as we see in the world.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (indeed) is used here to remove doubt. The Chändogya
Upaniñad explains:

aitad-ätmyam idaà sarvam

"Everything has Him as its ingredient."

This statement shows that there is both a creator and a creation. When the
Subala Upaniñad and other scriptures explain that the pradhäna, mahat-tattva, and
other things are created, they imply that everything that exists was created. That is
the meaning.
The following example from the material world may be given. A person may
say, "All these are the sons of Caitra." In this way he affirms that they were all
born from a man named Caitra. In the same way, when the Upaniñad affirms that,
“Everything has the Supreme Personality of Godhead as its ingredient," it is clear
that pradhäna, mahat-tattva, and everything else has come from the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. Thus when the Upaniñad states that fire, water, and grains
come from the Supreme Personality of Godhead, it means to say that •everything
comes from Him. In this way it is understand that ether also was created.
The word "vibhägaù" in this sütra means “creation". Sütra 3 affirmed that it is
not possible for ether to have been created. However, the Çruti-çästra affirms that
the Supreme Personality of Godhead has inconceivable powers. Even though it
may be inconceivable, He can do anything without restriction. In some passages it

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

is said that ether is immortal, which means that it is neither created nor destroyed.
These statements may be taken as figures of speech because we can find other
passages describing the creation and destruction of ether.
Because ether is counted among the elements it must be created and also
destroyed. Because ether has temporary material qualities, as fire and the other
elements do, it must also be temporary, as the other elements are.
Whatever is not matter is spirit. Ether is not like spirit. It is different. In this
way the idea that ether was not created is disproved. Modern philosophers that
state the contrary are wrong. It must be accepted that ether was created.

Adhikaraëa 2
Air Is Created

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

To show that the same arguments may also show the creation of air, the author
of the sütras gives the following explanation.

Sütra 7

etena mätariçvä vyäkhyätaù

etena—by this; mätariçvä—air; vyäkhyätaù—is explained.

This also refers to air.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

This proof that ether was created clearly shows that air, which exists within
ether, must also have been created. That is the meaning. This is so because the
limbs of something must have the same qualities as the whole of which they are
parts.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Our opponent may object: Because it was never described in the Chändogya
Upaniñad, it is clear that air was never created.
To this I reply: The Taittiréya Upaniñad explains that air was created from
ether.
Then our opponent may say: That description of the creation of air must have
been a figure of speech, because the Çruti-çästra explains that air is eternal.
To this I reply: The Chändogya Upaniñad affirms in a pratijïä statement (aitad-
ätmyam idaà sarvam) that everything was created by the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. In this way the creation of air is proved. When it is said that air is eternal
the intention is that it is so only relative to some other things. Air was discussed in
a separate sütra and not discussed together with ether. This was done to facilitate
the argument of Sütra 9.

Adhikaraëa 3
The Eternal Supreme Personality of Godhead Is Not Created

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Chändogya Upaniñad (6.2.1) affirms:

sad eva saumyedam

"O gentle one, in the beginning the Supreme Personality of Godhead alone
existed."

A doubt may arise about this statement. Was the eternal Supreme Personality
of Godhead created or not? Pradhäna, mahat-tattva, and many other things that
are causes or creators of other things were created, so perhaps the Supreme
Personality of Godhead was also created at some point. This may be so because
the Supreme Personality of Godhead is not really different from these other
causes.
In the following words the author of the sütras addresses this doubt.

Sütra 8

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 asambhavas tu sato 'nupapatteù

asambhavaù—the state of not being created; tu—indeed; sataù—of the eternal

Supreme Personality of Godhead; anupapatteù—because of impossibility

Indeed, the eternal Supreme Personality of Godhead was never created, for
such a creation is impossible.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (indeed) is used here either to remove doubt or affirm the truth
of this statement. The eternal Supreme Personality of Godhead was never created.
Why not? The sütra explains: "anupapatteù" (because that is impossible). There is
no creator of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, because it is illogical and
inappropriate to assume the existence of such a creator. That is the meaning here.
Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (6.9) explains:

sa käraëaà käraëädhipädhipo
na cäsya kaçcij janitä na cädhipaù

"the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the cause of all causes. He is the king
of all other causes. No one is His creator. No one is His king."

It is not possible to say that because all other causes are created by something
else therefore the Supreme Personality of Godhead must have been created by
someone else, for such a statement contradicts these words of the Çruti-çästra. A
root cause of everything must be accepted, for if it is not then there is an unending
chain of causes. By definition the root cause of everything does not have another
cause, a root from which it has sprung. This is described in the Saìkhya-sütra
(1.67) in these words:

müle müläbhävät

"This is so because the root cause of everything is not caused by another root
cause."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 In this way the doubt that perhaps the Supreme Personality of Godhead is
created by someone else is clearly refuted. Because the Supreme Personality of
Godhead is the first cause of all causes, by definition He is not caused by someone
else. However, the secondary causes, such as the avyakta and the mahat-tattva are
all created by another cause. The sütras explaining that ether and the other
material elements were all created were given as examples of this general truth.

Adhikaraëa 4
Fire Is Manifested From Air

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

After concluding this discussion, we will consider what seems to be a

contradiction in the Çruti-çästra's description of fire. Chändogya Upaniñad (6.2.3)
explains:

tat tejo 'såjata

"Then the Supreme Personality of Godhead created fire."

In this way it is explained that the Supreme Personality of Godhead created

fire.

However, the Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.1.3) explains:

väyor agniù

"From air, fire is manifested."

These words explain that air created fire. Someone may say that in this second
quote the word "väyoù" is in the ablative case (meaning "after fire"), and in this
way there is no contradiction because both elements were created by the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, and fire was created after air was created.
Considering that someone may say this, the author of the sütras speaks the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

following words.

Sütra 9

tejo 'tas tathä hy äha

tejaù—fire; ataù—from that; tathä—so; hy—indeed; äha—said.

Fire comes from it. Indeed, it said that.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

From air comes fire. This is confirmed in the Çruti-çästra, which explains:

väyor agniù

"From air comes fire."

The word "sambhüta" is used here. The use of that •word shows that the
meaning is that from air fire is created. Also, the primary meaning of the ablative-
case is "from". If the primary meaning of a word makes sense, then the primary
meaning should be accepted. In that circumstance the secondary meaning should
not be accepted. As will be explained later, this statement does not contradict the
statement that everything is created by the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Adhikaraëa 5
Water Is Manifested From Fire

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Now the author describes the origin of water. In some places the scriptures
affirm that water is manifested from fire, and in other places the scriptures do not
agree with this idea. In this way a doubt arises. To remove this doubt, the author of
the sütras gives the following explanation.

Sütra 10

äpaù

äpaù—water.

Water.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

To this sütra should be added the previous sütra's phrase "atas tathä hy äha"
(Water comes from it. Indeed it said that.) This means that water is manifested
from fire. This is so because the Çruti-çästra declares it. Chändogya Upaniñad
(6.2.3) explains:

tad äpo 'såjata

"Fire created water."

Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.1) also explains:

agner äpaù

"From fire water was manifested."

These two quotes are clear and need no elaborate explanation. Why water
comes from fire is explained in the following words of Chändogya Upaniñad:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

tasmäd yatra kva ca çocati svedate vä puruñas tejasa eva tad adhy äpo jäyante

"Heat makes a person produce water. This is so when a person perspires or

weeps."

Adhikaraëa 6
Earth Is Manifested From Water, and the Word "Anna" in the Chändogya
Upaniñad Means "Earth"

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Chändogya Upaniñad it is said:

tä äpa aikñanta bahvayaù syäma prajäyemahéti tä annam asåjanta

"Water thought: `I shall become many. I shall father many children.' Then
water created anna."

What is the meaning of the word "anna" here? Does it mean "barley and other
food", or does it mean “earth"?

In the Chändogya Upaniñad it is said:

tasmäd yatra kvacana varñati tad eva bhüyiñöham annaà bhavaty adbhya eva tad
adhy annädyaà jäyate

"Therefore, whenever it rains there is abundant anna. In this way anna is

produced by water."

This passage seems, therefore, to support the idea that the word "anna" here
means barely and other food". To explain the proper meaning here, the author of
the sütras speaks the following words.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 11

påthivy-adhikära-rüpa-çabdäntarebhyaù

påthivi—earth; adhikära—context; rüpa—color; çabda—quotes from the Çruti-

çästra; antarebhyaù—because of other.

"Because its color, its context, and other quotes from the Çruti-çästra, all
confirm that earth is the proper meaning.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here the meaning "earth" should be accepted. Why? Because of the context
and other reasons. It should be accepted because the context (adhikära) of the
passage is a description of the creation of the five material elements. It is also so,
because the "anna" here is described as being black in color (rüpa), in the words:

yat kåñëaà tad annasya

"That anna is black in color."

It is also so because in other scriptures (çästräntarebhyaù) it is said (in the

Taittiréya Upaniñad):

adbhyaù påthivé

"From water, earth is manifested."

The passage: "Therefore, whenever it rains there is abundant anna. In this way
anna is produced by water," clearly uses the word "anna" to mean "food".
However, because this passage is in the context of a description of the five material
elements being manifested one from the other, the "food" here is a metaphor for
"earth". Thus the two meanings "food" and "earth" combine in the word "anna"
in this passage.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 7
The Elements Are Manifested From the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The description here, that the material elements are manifested in a particular
sequence, beginning with ether, is given to remove controversy in regard to the
sequence in which the elements are manifested. The fact that the pradhäna, mahat-
tattva, and all the elements are created by the Supreme Personality of Godhead
has already been proved in sütra 1.1.2 (janmädy asya yataù). Now the author of the
sütras begins a more detailed description of that creation. In the Subala Upaniñad
it is said:

tad ähuù kià tad äsét tasmai sa hoväca na san nasan na sad asad iti tasmät tamaù
saïjäyate tamaso bhütädir bhütäder äkäçam äkäçäd väyur väyor agnir agner äpo
'dbhyaù påthivé tad aëòam abhavat

"They said: What was in the beginning? He replied: In the beginning was
neither existence nor non-existence. Nothing existed and nothing did not exist. In
the beginning there was darkness. From the darkness the origin of the material
elements was born. From the origin of the material elements, ether was born.
From ether, air was born. From air, fire was born. From fire, water was born. From
water, earth was born. In this way the egg of the material universe was created."

Here it should be understood that akñara, avyakta, mahat-tattva, tan-mätras,

and material senses should also be placed, in this sequence, between darkness and
ether. This should be done to complement the following statement of Agnimalaya:

sandagdhvä sarväëi bhütäni påthivy apsu praléyate. äpas tejasi praléyante. tejo
väyau praléyate. väyur äkäçe praléyate. äkäçam indriyeñv indriyäëi tan-mätreñu tan-
mäträëi bhütädau viléyante. bhütädir mahati viléyate. mahän avyakte viléyate.
avyaktam akñare viléyate. akñaraà tamasi viléyate. tama eké-bhavati parasmin.
parasmän na san nasan na sad asat.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "When the all the elements are burned up, earth merges into water, water
merges into fire, fire merges into air, air merges into ether, ether merges into the
senses, the senses merge into the tan-mätras, the tan-mätras merge into the origin
of the material elements, the origin of the material elements merges into the
mahat-tattva, the mahat-tattva merges into the avyakta, the avyakta merges into
the akñara, and the akñara merges into the great darkness. Then the great darkness
becomes •one with the Supreme. In the Supreme is neither existence nor non-
existence. Nothing exists and nothing does not exist."

The word "origin of the material elements" here means "the false-ego". False-
ego is of three kinds. From false-ego in the mode of goodness, the mind and the
demigods are manifested. From false-ego in the mode of passion, the material
senses are manifested. From false-ego in the mode of ignorance are manifested the
tan-mätras, from which are manifested the ether and the other elements. In this
way these different explanations all corroborate each other.
In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad it is said:

pürvam hy ekam evädvitéyaà brahmäsét. tasmäd avkyataà vyaktam eväkñaraà

tasmäd akñarän mahän mahato vä ahaìkäras tasmäd ahaìkärät païca-tan-mäträëi
tebhyo bhütäni tair ävåtam akñaraà bhavati.

"Before the material world was manifest, only the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, who is one without a second, existed. From Him came the avyakta.
From the avyakta came the akñara. From the akñara came the mahat-tattva. From
the mahat-tattva came false-ego. From false-ego came the five tan-mätras. From
them came the material elements. The akñara is filled with all these."

Saàçaya (doubt): Do the pradhäna and other parts of this sequence arise one
from the other or do they all arise directly from the Supreme Personality of
Godhead?

Pürvapakña: They arise from each other, for that is the statement of the texts.

Siddhänta (the conclusion): The author of the sütras gives His conclusion in the
following words.

Sütra 12

tad abhidhyänäd eva tu tal liìgät saù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 tat—that; abhidhyänät—because of meditation; eva—indeed; tu—indeed; tat—
that; liìgät—because of the body; saù—He.

Because of meditation and because of the body, it is indeed He.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (indeed) is used to dispel doubt. The Supreme Personality of
Godhead is the master of all potencies, including the potency of great darkness,
the potency that begins the material creation. He is the direct cause, and the
pradhäna, earth, and other features of the material creation are effects created by
Him. Why is that? The sütra explains: "Because of meditation and because of the
body."
The Çruti-çästra explains:

so 'kämayata bahu syäà prajäyeya

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead desired: Let Me become many. Let me

create the material world."

Thus, it is by the desire of the all-powerful Supreme Personality of Godhead

that the pradhäna and other features of the material world are created. That is how
He is the cause of the material world. Also, the material world is the body of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. The Supreme Personality of Godhead enters the
great darkness of the material world and transforms it into pradhäna and the
others aspects of matter. In this sense the material world is His body. This is
confirmed by the Antaryämi-brähmaëa of the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad, and also
by the Subala Upaniñad, which explains:

yasya påthivé çaréram

"The world is the body of the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

Adhikaraëa 8

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

The Supreme Personality of Godhead Is the Cause of Matter's Transformations

Sütra 13

viparyayeëa tu kramo 'ta upapadyate ca

viparyayeëa—by the reverse; tu—indeed; kramaù—sequence; ataù—from this;

upapadyate—is manifested; ca—and.

Indeed, this sequence is also reversed.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (indeed) is used here for emphasis. In the Muëòaka Upaniñad
(2.1.3) it is said:

etasmäj jäyate präëo manaù sarvendriyäëi ca. khaà väyur jyotir äpaù påthivé
viçvasya dhäriëé

"From Him are born life, mind, all the senses, ether, air, fire, water, and earth,
the support of the world."

In the Subala Upaniñad, the sequence is reversed, with pradhäna and mahat-
tattva coming first. Everything actually comes from the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. He is present within everything, beginning with the life-air and ending
with earth, and when one feature of creation comes from another, the second
feature actually comes from the all-powerful Supreme Personality of Godhead
present within the first feature. If this were not so, then these two different
versions would contradict each other. The Supreme Personality of Godhead is the
origin of all and the creator of all. By knowing Him everything becomes known.
The pradhäna and other features of matter, being inert and unconscious, cannot by
themselves create changes in the material world. That is why the word "ca" (also)
is used here. Therefore the Supreme Personality of Godhead is in every case the
real cause of these transformations in the material world.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 9
The Supreme Personality of Godhead Is the Creator of Mind and Intelligence

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now the author of the sütras removes a specific doubt.

Sütra 14

antarä vijïäna-manasé-krameëa tal-liìgäd iti cen näviçeñät

antaräù—in the middle; vijïäna—knowledge; manasé—and mind; krameëa—

with the sequence; tat—of that; liìgät—because of the sign; iti—thus; cet—if; na—
not; aviçeñät—because of not being different.

If it is said that the sequence of mind and intelligence appears in this way, then I
reply: No. Because they are not different.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "vijïäna" here means "the material senses of the conditioned soul".
Here someone may object: It is not proper to assume that this quotation from
Muëòaka Upaniñad (text 2.1.3 quoted in the previous purport) supports the idea
that all the features of the material world are directly created by the Supreme
Personality of Godhead Himself. The list given in that verse merely gives the
sequence in which those material features were manifested. It says that first come
the material senses and then comes the mind. This does not mean that everything
comes directly from the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
If this objection is raised, then I reply: No. It is not so. Why not? The sütra
explains: "na viçeñät" (because they are not different). This means that the
material senses and the mind are not different from the life-force, the element
earth, or any of the other material features. They have all come directly from the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. In this passage the life-force and all the other
material features all come from the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

(etasmät=from Him). That is the meaning. The following scripture quotes also
declare that the elements are all created by the Supreme Personality of Godhead:

so 'kämayata bahu syäà prajäyeya

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead desired: Let Me become many. Let me

create the material world."

etasmäj jäyate präëaù

"The life-force and everything else was manifested from the Supreme
Personality of Godhead."

In the Bhagavad-gétä (10.8) the Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself

declares:

ahaà sarvasya prabhavo

mattaù sarvaà pravartate

"I am the source of all spiritual and material worlds. Everything emanates from
me."*

In the Vämana Puräëa it is said:

tatra tatra sthito viñëus

tat tac chaktià prabodhayet
eka eva mahä-çaktiù
kurute sarvam aïjasä

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Viñëu, enters everywhere and

awakens the power dormant in everything. He is the supremely powerful one. He
does everything perfectly."

In this way it is shown that pradhäna and all other material features all come
directly from the Supreme Personality of Godhead. That fact is not at all
contradicted by the sequence of events presented in the Subala Upaniñad and the
other scriptures. This is so because the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the
creator of the original material darkness, the pradhäna and the other features of
the material world. Thus when the scripture says tat tejo 'såjata (The Supreme

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Personality of Godhead created fire), it is understood that He also created
darkness, a host of other potencies, pradhäna, air, and other aspects of matter.
When the scriptures say tasmäd vai (From the Supreme Personality of Godhead
everything has come), it is understood that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is
the master of material darkness and a host of other potencies, the pradhäna and
other features of matter were born from Him, and the material element ether was
also manifested from Him.

Adhikaraëa 10
All Words Are Names of the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here someone may object: Is it not so that if Lord Hari is the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, the master of all, and the all-pervading Supersoul, then
the names of all that is moving and inert would also be names of Him? However,
this is not so, for words are primarily the names of the various moving and inert
things.
Thinking that someone may accept this idea that words are primarily names of
various things and only secondarily names of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, the author of the sütras gives the following explanation.

Sütra 15

caräcara-vyapäçrayas tu syät tad-vyapadeço 'bhäktas tad-bhäva-bhävitvät

cara—moving; acara—and unmoving; vyapäçrayaù—the abode; tu—indeed;

syät—may be; tat—of that; vyapadeçaù—name; abhäktaù—not figurative; tat—of
Him; bhäva—the nature; bhävitvät—because of being in the future.

Indeed, He resides in all that move and does not move. Therefore it will be
learned that every word is one of His names.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (indeed) is used here to dispel doubt. The word "caräcara-
vyapäçrayaù" means that the Supreme Personality of Godhead resides in all
moving and unmoving beings. The word "tad-vyapadeçaù" means "the names of
the moving and unmoving beings". The word “abhäktaù" means "these names are
primarily names of the Supreme Personality of Godhead". Why is that? The sütra
explains: "bhäva-bhävitvät" (the real meaning of names will be learned in the
future). This means that by studying the scriptures one will come to understand
that all words are names of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The Çruti-çästras
explain:

so 'kämayata bahu syäm

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead desired: Let Me become many. Let me

create the material world."

sa väsudevo na yato 'nyad asti

"He is the all-pervading Supreme Personality of •Godhead. Nothing is different

from Him."

In the Viñëu Puräëa (3.7.16) it is said:

kaöaka-mukuöa-karëikädi-bhedaiù
kanakam abhedam apéñyate yathaikam
sura-paçu-manujädi-kalpanäbhir
harir akhiläbhir udéryate tathaikaù

"As golden bracelets, crowns, earrings, and other golden ornaments are all one
because they are all made of gold, so all demigods, men, and animals are one with
Lord because they are all made of Lord Hari's potencies."

The meaning is this: Names of potencies are primarily the names of the master
of these potencies. This is so because the master is the very self of His potencies.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 11
The Individual Spirit Souls Are Eternal and Without Beginning

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Because He is the origin of everything, the Supreme Personality of Godhead

has no other origin from which He was created. This has already been described.
Now we will determine the nature of the individual spirit soul. First the idea that
the individual soul has an origin will be refuted.
In the Taittiréya Araëyaka, Mahä-Näräyaëa Upaniñad (1.4) it is said:

yataù prasütä jagataù prasüté

toyena jévän vyasasarja bhümyäm

"From the Supreme Personality of Godhead the universe was born. With water
He created the living entities on the earth."

In the Chändogya Upaniñad it is said:

san-müläù saumyemäù sarväù prajäù

"O gentle one, all living entities have their roots in the Supreme."

Saàçaya (doubt): Do the individual spirit souls have an origin or not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because He is the creator of the material

universe, which contains both sentient living entities and insentient matter, the
Supreme Personality of Godhead must be the creator of the individual spirit souls.
Any other idea would be illogical.

Siddhänta (conclusion): The author of the sütras gives the following conclusion.

Sütra 16

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

nätmä çruter nityatväc ca täbhyaù

na—not; ätmä—the individual spirit soul; çruteù—from the Çruti-çästra;

nityatvät—because of being eternal; ca—and; täbhyaù—from them.

Because the individual spirit soul is eternal, and because of the statements of
Çruti-çästra and other scriptures, this idea about the individual spirit soul is not
true.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The individual spirit soul was never created. Why not? The sütra explains:
"çruteù" (because of the statements of Çruti-çästra). In Kaöha Upaniñad (1.2.18) it
is said:

na jäyate mriyate vä vipaçcin

näyaà kutaçcin na babhüva kaçcit
ajo nityaù çäçvato 'yaà puräëo
na hanyate hanyamäne çarére

"O wise one, for the soul there is neither birth nor death at any time. He has not
come into being, does not come into being, and will not come into being. He is
unborn, eternal, ever-existing, and primeval. He is not slain when the body is
slain."*

That the individual spirit soul was never born is also declared in the
Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (1.9):

jïäjïau dväv ajäv éçänéçau

"Neither the Supreme Personality of Godhead nor the individual spirit souls
were ever born."

The word "täbhyaù" in the sütra means "the eternality of the individual spirit
soul is described in the Çruti and Småti -çästras". The word "ca" (and) in the sütra
means that the individual spirit soul is also conscious and full of knowledge.
In the Kaöha Upaniñad (2.5.13) it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

nityo nityänäà cetanaç cetanänäm

"Of all eternal living souls there is one who is the leader. Of all eternal souls
there is one who is the leader."

In the Bhagavad-gétä the Supreme Lord explains:

ajo nityaù çäçvato 'yaà puräëaù

"The soul is unborn, eternal, ever-existing, and primeval."

Therefore, when it is said, "Yajïadatta is born and again he dies," such words
refer only to the external material body. The jäta-karma ceremony and other
ceremonies like it also refer to the external material body. The individual spirit
soul is different from the external material body and resides in it like a passenger.
In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.3.8) it is said:

sa vä ayaà puruño jäyamänaù çaréram abhisampadyamänaù sa utkraman

mriyamäëaù

"At the moment of birth the spirit soul enters a material body and at the
moment of death the soul leaves the body."

In the Chändogya Upaniñad (6.11.3) it is said:

jévopetam väva kiledaà mriyate na jévo mriyate

"The soul resides in the material body. When the body dies the soul does not
die."

Here someone may object: How can this be? If this is so, then this fact disagrees
with the scriptural description of the individual souls' creation.
To this objection I reply: The individual spirit souls are said to be created
because they are effects of the Supreme. The Supreme Personality of Godhead has
two potencies, and these are said to be His effects. Here is what makes these two
potencies different. One potency is the pradhäna and other inert, unconscious, not
alive potencies that are meant to be objects of enjoyment and various experiences.
The other potency is the individual spirit souls, who are not inert, dull matter, but
are conscious, alive beings, and who are able to enjoy and perceive various

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

experiences. These two potencies share one common feature: that they are both
the effects of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. In this way the scriptural
description of the souls' creation is not contradicted. In this way the scriptures are
correct, and in this way, also, the individual spirit souls are never born.

Adhikaraëa 12
The Individual Spirit Souls Are Both Knowledge and Knowers

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now the author of the sütras considers the nature of the individual spirit soul.
In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (3.7.22) it is said:

yo vijïäne tiñöhan

"The individual spirit soul is situated in knowledge."

In another passage it is said:

sukham aham asvapsaà na kiïcid avediñi

"I slept happily. I did not know anything."

Saàçaya (doubt): Is the individual spirit soul unalloyed knowledge only, or is

the soul the knower that experiences knowledge?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The individual spirit soul consists of

knowledge only. This is confirmed by the statement of Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad
(3.7.22): "The individual spirit soul is situated in knowledge." The soul is not the
knower or the perceiver of knowledge. The intelligence is the knower. Therefore
statement, "I slept happily. I did not know anything." is spoken by the intelligence,
not by the soul.

Siddhänta (conclusion): The author of the sütras gives the following conclusion.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 17

jïo 'ta eva

jïaù—knower; ataù eva—therefore.

Therefore he is the knower.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The individual spirit soul is both knowledge and knower. In the Praçna
Upaniñad (4.9) it is said:

eña hi drañöä sprañöä çrotä rasayitä ghrätä mantä boddhä kartä vijïänätmä puruñaù

"The individual spirit soul is the seer, the toucher, the hearer, the taster, the
smeller, the thinker, the determiner, the doer, and the knower."

This truth is accepted because it is declared by scripture, not because it is

understood by logic. Our acceptance of the truth of scripture is described in sütra
2.1.27:

çrutes tu çabda-mülatvät

"The statements of Çruti-çästra are the root of real knowledge."

In the Småti-çästra it is said:

jïätä jïäna-svarüpo 'yam

"The individual spirit soul is both knower and knowledge."

Therefore the individual spirit soul is not knowledge alone without being

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

anything else, and this is not at all proved by the statement, "I slept happily. I did
not know anything," for such an idea would contradict these scripture statements
that affirm the soul to be the knower. Therefore it is concluded that the individual
spirit soul is both knowledge and knower.

Adhikaraëa 13
The Individual Spirit Souls Are Atomic

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now the author of the sütras considers the size of the individual spirit souls. In
the Muëòaka Upaniñad (3.1.9) it is said:

eño 'ëur ätmä cetasä veditavyo yasmin präëaù païcadhä samviveña

"When the life-breath withdraws the five activities, the mind can understand the
atomic soul."

Saàçaya (doubt): Is the individual spirit soul atomic or all-pervading?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The individual spirit soul is all-pervading.

Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.14) declares that the soul is "mahän" (great). The
statement that the soul is atomic is merely a poetic metaphor.

Siddhänta (conclusion): The author of the sütras gives the conclusion in the
following words.

Sütra 18

utkränti-gaty-ägaténäm

utkränti—departure; gati—travel; ägaténäm—and of return

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Because of departure, travel, and return.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In this sütra the word "aëuù" (the atomic soul) should be understood from the
previous sütra. In this sütra the genitive case is used in the sense of the ablative.
The individual spirit soul is atomic and not all-pervading. Why is that? The sütra
explains: "Because of departure, travel, and return."
In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.2) it is said:

tasya haitasya hådayasyägraà pradyotate. tena pradyotenaiña ätmä niñkrämati

cakñuño vä mürdhno vänyebhyo vä çaréra-deçebhyaù

"The soul shines in the heart. At the moment of death the effulgent soul leaves
through the opening of the eyes, the opening at the top of the the head, or another
opening in the •body."

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.11) it is said:

anandä näma te lokä

andhena tamasävåtäù
täàs te pretyäbhigacchanti
avidväàso 'budhä janäù

"Sinful fools enter into planets known as the worlds of torment, full of darkness
and ignorance."

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.6) it is said:

präpyäntaà karmaëas tasya

yat kiïcedam karoty ayam
tasmät lokät punar etya
yasmai lokäya karmaëe

"At the time of death the soul reaps the results of his works. He goes to the
world where he deserves to go. When the results of his past deeds are exhausted,

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

again he returns to the middle planets, the world of karma."

In this way the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad describes the soul's travel from one
place to another. If he were all-pervading, the soul would not be able to travel
from one place to another, for he would already be everywhere.

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.87.30) it is said:

aparimitä dhruväs tanu-bhåto yadi sarva-gatäs

tarhi na çäsyateti niyamo dhruva netarathä

"O Lord, although the living entities who have accepted material bodies are
spiritual and unlimited in number, if they were all-pervading there would be no
question of their being under Your control."*

However, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, although all-pervading, can

travel from place to place. This is possible because He possesses inconceivable
powers.
Here someone may object: The individual spirit soul can be all-pervading and
unmoving, and still, because he mistakenly identifies with the external material
body, imagine that he goes and comes. He is like the ruler of a village who never
really leaves his realm.
To this the reply is given: Because it is said that he both departs and returns it is
not possible that the soul is actually stationary and unmoving. The author of the
sütras confirms this in the following words.

Sütra 19

svätmanaç cottarayoù
sva—own; ätmanaù—of the soul; ca—and; uttarayoù—of the latter two.

Also because the last two refer to the soul.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "ca" (also) is used here for emphasis. Here the word "uttarayoù" (the
last two) means "of the coming and going". The coming and going here definitely

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

occurs to the individual spirit soul. This is so because the coming and going in the
pervious sütra clearly refer to an agent, to the performer of the action. The coming
and going here are understood to be coming and going from a material body. This
is clearly seen in the first Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.2) passage quoted in the
previous purport. It is also seen in the following words of Bhagavad-gétä (15.4):

çaréraà yad aväpnoti

yac cäpy utkrämatéçvaraù
gåhétvaitani samyäti
väyur gandhän iväçayät

"The living entity in the material world carries his different conceptions of life
from one body to another as the air carries aromas. Thus he takes one kind of
body and again quits it to take another."*

If someone says that the soul actually never goes anywhere, although it seems to
go places because of the misidentification of the external material body as the self,
then I say this is a foolish idea. In the following words the Kauçitaké Upaniñad
refutes this idea:

sa yadäsmät çarérät samutkrämati sahaivaitaiù sarvair utkrämati

"At the time of death the soul, accompanied by all his powers, leaves the
material body."

The word "saha" (accompanied by) is used when the more important is
accompanied by another of lesser importance. An example is the sentence:
"Accompanied by (saha) his son, the father took his meal." Another example is in
Bhagavad-gétä (15.4), which declares that the soul carries his different conceptions
of life from one body to another as the air carries aromas. In this way the foolish
example pushed forward by the impersonalists, the example of the air in the jar
and in the sky, is clearly refuted.

Sütra 20

näëur atac chruter iti cen netarädhikärät

na—not; aëuù—atom; atat—not that; çruteù—from the scriptures; iti—thus;

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

cet—is; na—not; itara—other; adhikärät—because of being appropriate.

If it is claimed that the Çruti-çästra denies the idea that the soul is atomic, then I
reply that it is not so, because those descriptions apply to someone else.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here someone may object: Is it not so that that the individual spirit soul is not
atomic? After all, the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.22) affirms:

sa vä eña mahä-jana ätmä

"The soul is very great."

After all, to be great in size is the very opposite of being atomic.

If someone claims this, then the sütra replies: "No. It is not so." Why not? The
sütra explains: "itara" (because these descriptions apply to someone else). These
words are descriptions of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the all-pervading
Supersoul. In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.3.7) it is said:

yo 'yam vijïänamayaù präëeñu

"He is full of knowledge. He stays among the life-airs."

Although this passage begins by describing the individual spirit soul, it proceeds
with a description of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, as is seen in a following
passage (Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 4.3.13):

yasyänuvittaù pratibuddha ätmä

"He is the self who knows everything."

These words clearly describe the Supreme Personality of Godhead and not the
individual spirit soul.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 21

sva-çabdonmänäbhyäà ca

sva—own; çabda—word; unmänäbhyäm—with measure; ca—and.

Because of its word and measurement.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "sva-çabda" (the word describing it) here •means that the word
atomic is used to describe the individual spirit soul. An example of this is in
Muëòaka Upaniñad (2.1.9):

eño 'ëur ätmä

"The soul is atomic in size."

The word "unmäna" here means "Its measurement is atomic in size". The
precise measurement of the individual spirit soul is given in the Çvetäçvatara
Upaniñad (4.9):

bälägra-çata-bhägasya
çatadhä kalpitasya ca
bhägo jévaù sa vijïeyaù
sa cäntantyäya kalpate

"When the upper point of a hair is divided into one hundred parts and again
each of these parts is further divided into one hundred parts, each such part is the
measurement of the dimension of the spirit soul."*

In these two ways the atomic size of the soul is proved. the word änantya" here
means "liberation". "Anta" means "death", and "an" means "without". Therefore
the word "änantya" means "the condition of being free from death".

Here someone may object: Is it not so that if it is atomic in size and situated in a
specific place in the material body, the soul could not perceive sensations in all

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

other parts of the body, where the soul is not actually present?
If this is said, then the author of the sütras replies in the following words.

Sütra 22

avirodhaç candana-vat

avirodhaù—not contradicting; candana—sandal; vat—like

It does not contradict. It is like sandal paste.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

As a drop of sandal paste placed on one part of the body brings a pleasant
sensation to the body as a whole, so the soul, although situated in one place,
perceives what happens in the entire body. Therefore, there is no contradiction. In
the Brahmäëòa Puräëa it is said:

aëu-mätro 'py ayaà jévaù

sva-dehaà vyäpya tiñöhati
yathä vyäpya çaréräëi
haricandana-vipruñaù

"As the sensation created by a drop of sandal paste pervades the entire body, so
the individual spirit soul, although atomic in size, is conscious of what happens in
the entire body."

Sütra 23

avasthiti-vaiçeñyäd iti cen näbhyupagamäd dhådi hi

avasthiti—abode; vaiçeñyät—because of being specific; iti—thus; cet—if; na—

not; abhyupagamät—because of acceptance; hådi—in the heart; hi—certainly.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 If it is denied because it has no specific abode, then I say no, because it resides
in the heart.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here someone may object: Is it not so that the drop of sandal paste has a single,
clearly visible, place where it resides on the body but the soul has no such single
residence in the body? There is no reason to make guesses about the location of
the soul in the body. The soul is clearly present everywhere in the body, just as the
element ether is present everywhere. Therefore the sandal-paste example is clumsy
and wrong.
If this objection is raised, then the author of the sütras replies: "No. It is not so."
Why not? The sütra explains: "Because it resides in the heart." This means that the
soul really does reside in a single place in the material body. The soul resides in the
heart. This is confirmed in the following words of Praçna Upaniñad (3.6):

hådi hy eña ätmä

"The soul resides in the heart."

In the final conclusion the spirit soul, although atomic in size is, in one sense,
all-pervading throughout the entire material body. This is explained in the
following sütra.

Sütra 24

guëäd välokavat

guëät—by quality; vä—or; äloka—light; vat—like.

By quality or like light.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Although the soul is atomic in size, it pervades the body by the quality of

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

consciousness. Like light it pervades the entire body. As the sun, although situated
in one place, fills the universe with light, so the soul fills the body with
consciousness. The Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself •declares this in
Bhagavad-gétä (13.34):

yathä prakäçayaty ekaù

kåtsnaà lokam imaà raviù
kñetraà kñetré tathä kåtsnaà
prakäçayati bhärata

"O son of Bharata, as the sun alone illuminates all this universe, so does the
living entity, one within the body, illuminate the entire body by consciousness."*

When the sun emanates sunlight it does not lose any atoms from its mass, nor
does it become diminished in any way. Rubies and other jewels also emanate light
without losing atoms from their mass or becoming diminished in any way. It is not
possible to say that when light is emanated from them these things become
diminished in size. The light they emanate is their quality, not their mass.
The quality can function in a plane apart from the substance that possesses it.
The author of the sütras explains this in the following example.

Sütra 25

vyatireko gandhavat tathä hi darçayati

vyatirekaù—difference; gandha—fragrance; vat—like; tathä—so; hi—indeed;

darçayati—shows.

As a fragrance is in a different place, so it is also in a different place. This the

scripture shows.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

As the fragrance of flowers or other objects may travel to a place far from its
source, so the consciousness that emanates from the soul may travel from the heart
and enter the head, feet, or other parts of the body. The Kauçitaki Upaniñad (3.6)
explains:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

prajïayä çaréraà samäruhya

"By consciousness the soul is all-pervading in the material body."

Even though the fragrance may travel very far it is never actually separated
from its source, just as the light of a jewel is also not separated from its source. In
the Småti-çästra it is said:

upalabhyäpsu ced gandhaà

kecid brüyur anaipuëäù
påthivyäm eva tam vidyäd
apo väyuà ca saàçritam

"They who do not understand may sometimes say that •fragrance is present in
water. Earth is the natural home of fragrance, although it may sometimes take
shelter of water or air."

In the Praçna Upaniñad (4.9) it is said:

eña hi dåñöä

"The soul is the person who sees."

Saàçaya (doubt): Is the consciousness that the soul possesses eternal or not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The soul is by nature unconscious. It is like

a stone. Consciousness only arises when the soul comes in contact with the mind.
This is seen in the scriptures' statement: "I slept happily. I was not conscious of
anything." This statement shows that consciousness is not an inherent quality of
the soul but rather is attained by contact with something else. It is like iron and
fire. When placed in fire, an iron rod gradually assumes the qualities of fire. If it
were an inherent quality of the soul, then consciousness would not be lost in deep
sleep.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives the
conclusion.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 26

påthag-upadeçät

påthak—separate; upadeçät—because of the teaching.

Because there is a specific teaching.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The soul is conscious eternally. How is that known? The sütra explains:
"Because there is a specific teaching." Some examples of that teaching follow.

In the Praçna Upaniñad (4.9) it is said:

eña hi dåñöä

"The soul sees eternally."

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.5.14) it is said:

avinäçé vä are ayam ätmänucitti-dharmä

"The soul's consciousness is never destroyed."

The soul does not become conscious merely by contact with the mind, for soul
and mind are both indivisible and cannot •interact. Turning away from the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, the soul obscures its natural spiritual
knowledge. Turning towards the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the soul
revives its natural spiritual consciousness. This is described in the Småti-çästra:

yathä na kriyate jyotsnä

mala-prakñälanän maëeù
doña-prahäëän na jïänam
ätmanah kriyate tathä

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "As by washing away the dirt that covered a jewel, the jewel's splendor is not
created but merely uncovered, so by removing the dirt of materialism that covered
the soul, the soul's splendor is not created, but merely uncovered.

yathodapäna-khananät
kriyate na jaläntaram
sad eva niyate vyaktim
asataù sambhavaù kutaù

"As by digging a well, water is brought forth but not created, so by spiritual
activities the nature of the soul is brought forth but not created. How would it be
possible to create the the soul's qualities from nothing?

tathä heya-guëa-dhvaàsäd
avarodhädayo guëäù
prakäçyante na jänyante
nitya evätmano hi te

"When material faults are destroyed, the soul's qualities become revealed. The
soul's qualities are eternal. they are never created."

Here someone may object: These quotes from scripture merely show that the
soul is synonymous with consciousness. They do not prove that the soul itself is
conscious.

To this objection the author of the sütras replies in the following words.

Sütra 27

tad-guëa-säratvät tad vyapadeçaù präjïa-vat

tat—of that; guëa—quality; säratvät—because of being the essence; tat—that;

vyapadeçaù—designation; präjïa—intelligent; vat—like.

It is called that because that is its essential nature, just as He who is intelligent.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Because the soul is consciousness itself, therefore it is conscious. Why is that?

The sütra explains: "It is called that because that is its essential nature."
In this sütra the word "guëa" (quality) refers to the soul's quality of
consciousness. The word "sära" means "the essential nature of the thing, the
absence of which makes the thing non-existent." The word "präjïa-vat" means
"Like Lord Viñëu, who is known as “präjïa" (all-knowing) because He is all
knowledge. Because He is all-knowledge personified, Lord Viñëu is said to know
everything. In the same way, because the soul is consciousness personified,
therefore the soul is conscious. That the statements "the soul is consciousness
personified" and "the soul is conscious" mean the same thing is also confirmed in
the next sütra.

Sütra 28

yävad ätma-bhävitväc ca na doñas tad-darçanät

yävat—as long as; ätma—of the soul; bhävitvät—because of existence; ca—and;

na—not; doñaù—fault; tat—of that; darçanät—because of the sight.

It exists as long as the soul exists. There is no fault in this, because it is clearly
seen.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

There is no fault in saying that the two sentences “the soul is consciousness"
and "the soul is conscious" mean the same thing. That is the meaning here. Why is
that? The sütra explains: "It exists as long as the soul exists. There is no fault in
this, because it is clearly seen." The soul's consciousness exists for as long as the
soul exists. As long as the soul exists, the soul's consciousness will not be
destroyed. The soul exists eternally, without a beginning or end in time, and the
soul's consciousness also exists eternally. The sun may be given here as an
example. The sun is both light and the bringer of light. As long as the sun exists it
will have these two features, which are actually not different. In the same way the
soul is both consciousness and conscious.

Here someone may object: Is it not true that consciousness is born from the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

modes of material nature? Is it not true that, because it does not exist in the state
of dreamless sleep, consciousness is not eternal? Is it not true that even when the
living entity is fully awake his consciousness is in fact created by a barrage of
various sense-objects?

If these objections are raised, the author of the sütras replies in the following
words.

Sütra 29

puàstvädi-vat tv asya sato 'bhivyakti-yogät

puàstva—virility; ädi—beginning with; vat—like; tu—but; asya—of him;

sataù—of the existing; abhivyakti-yogät—because of manifestation.

But like virility and other things it exists and then is manifest.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is used here to dispel doubt. The word "na" (It is not like
that) is understood in this sütra. It is not true than consciousness is non-existent in
dreamless sleep and only exists in the waking state. Why is that? the sütra explains:
"But like virility and other things it exists and then is manifest." In the state of
dreamless sleep the soul's consciousness exists in a dormant state, and in the state
of wakefulness that dormant consciousness becomes fully manifested. Here the
sütra gives the example of virility. In childhood virility and other qualities
associated with it exist in a dormant state. Then, at the beginning of adulthood,
they become manifested. In the same way consciousness is dormant in dreamless
sleep and fully manifested in the waking state. This is described in the following
words of Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.3.30):

yad vai tan na vijänäti vijänan vaitad vijïeyam na vijänäti na hi vijnätur vijïänät
viparilopo vidyate avinäçitvän na tu tad dvitéyam asti tato 'nyad vibhaktaà yad
vijänéyät

"In the state of dreamless sleep the soul is both conscious and unconscious. The
soul is always conscious, and consciousness can never be separated from it,

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

because the soul and its consciousness can never be destroyed. Still, in the state of
dreamless sleep no object is presented before the soul for it to be conscious of."

When there is no object for consciousness to perceive, then consciousness is

dormant. Therefore in dreamless sleep consciousness is dormant. When the senses
contact the sense-objects, then consciousness becomes manifested. Had it not
existed in a dormant state during dreamless sleep, consciousness could not have
manifested itself in the waking state, just as a person born a eunuch cannot
manifest virility at the beginning of adulthood. In this way it is proved that the
individual spirit soul is atomic, is consciousness, and is conscious eternally.

Now the author of the sütras refutes the theory of the saìkhya philosophers.

Saàçaya (doubt): Is the individual spirit soul consciousness and nothing else? Is
the individual spirit soul all-pervading?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The individual spirit soul is all-pervading.

This is so because the results of its actions are seen everywhere. Had it been
atomic, the soul would be unable to perceive the pains and pleasures present in
different parts of the body. Had it been of a medium size, the soul would not be
eternal. Therefore the individual spirit soul must be all-pervading.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives the
proper conclusion.

Sütra 30

nityopalabdhy-anupalabdhi-prasaìgo 'nyatara-niyamo vänyathä

nitya—eternal; upalabdhi—perceptionl; anupalabdhi—non-perception;

prasaìgaù—result; anyatara—otherwise; niyamaù—restriction; vä—or; anyathä—
otherwise.

Otherwise there would be eternal consciousness, eternal unconsciousness, or

the limited existence of one or the other.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

If the soul were only consciousness and nothing else, and if it were all-

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

pervading, then the soul would be either always conscious or always unconscious.
Either that or there would be a limited existence of one or the other. This is the
meaning: It is clear to the entire world that consciousness and unconsciousness
both exist. If the cause of this were a soul that is consciousness only and also all-
pervading, then consciousness and unconsciousness would both be perceived
simultaneously at every moment by the entire world. If this all-pervading soul were
the cause of consciousness only and not unconsciousness, then no one would ever
be unconscious, and if this all-pervading soul were the cause of unconsciousness
only and not consciousness, then no one would ever be conscious.
It cannot be said that consciousness is created by contact with the senses and
unconsciousness is created when there is no contact with the senses, because if the
soul is all-pervading then it would be always in contact with the senses.
Furthermore, if the individual spirit soul were all-pervading then everyone would
simultaneously experience the pains and pleasures of everyone else. If this were so
there would be no meaning to individual experience, individual desire, or
individual destiny. This effectively refutes the theory that the individual spirit soul
is all-pervading.
However, our theory, which affirms that the spirit soul is atomic in size and
different in each material body, is not refuted by these considerations. Although
atomic in size, the individual spirit soul can act in any place, although it cannot act
in every place simultaneously. By its quality of consciousness the individual spirit
soul can pervade its material body and perceive the happiness and other sensations
present in the various parts of the material body.

Adhikaraëa 14
The Individual Spirit Soul Performs Actions

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now the author of the sütras will consider another point. In the Taittiréya
Upaniñad (2.5.1) it is said:

vijïänaà yajïaà tanute. karmäëi tanute 'pi ca.

"Consciousness performs yajïas. Consciousness performs actions."

Saàçaya (doubt): Does the individual soul, indicated in this passage by the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

word "consciousness", perform actions or not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): In the Kaöha Upaniñad (2.18) it is said:

hantä cen manyate hantuà

hataç cen manyate hatam
ubhau tau na vijänétau
näyaà hanti na hanyate

"Neither he who thinks the living entity the slayer nor he who thinks it slain is
in knowledge, for the self slays not nor is slain."*

These words clearly declare that the individual spirit soul never performs
actions. In the Bhagavad-gétä (3.27) it is said:

prakåteù kriyamäëäni
guëaiù karmäëi sarvaçaù
ahaìkära-vimüòhätmä
kartäham iti manyate

"The spirit soul bewildered by the influence of false-ego thinks himself the doer
of activities that are in actuality carried out by the three modes of material
nature."*

In the Bhagavad-gétä (13.21) it is also said:

kärya-käraëa-kartåtve
hatuù prakåtir ucyate
puruñaù sukha-duùkhänäà
bhoktåtve hetur ucyate

"Nature is said to be the cause of all material causes and effects, whereas the
living entity is the cause of the various sufferings and enjoyments in this world."*
Therefore the individual spirit soul does not perform actions. When a person
understands the truth he understands that all actions are actually performed by the
material energy and the individual spirit soul is merely the person who experiences
the fruits of action.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

proper conclusion.

Sütra 31

kartä çästrärthavat-tvät

kartä—the doer; çästra—of the scriptures; ärtha—meaning; vat—possessing;

tvät—because of having the nature.

He performs actions. This is so because the scriptures are meaningful.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

It is the individual spirit soul who performs actions, not the modes of material
nature. Why is that? The sütra explains: "Because the scriptures are meaningful."
In the scriptures it is said:

svarga-kämo yajeta

"A person who desires Svargaloka should perform yajïas."

and

ätmänam eva lokam upäséta

"One should worship the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

These statements have meaning only if the individual spirit soul does actually
perform actions. If all actions are performed by the modes of nature and the
individual spirit soul never does anything, these statements of the scriptures are
meaningless. These statements of scripture are intended to motivate the individual
spirit soul to act in a certain way so he can enjoy the results of his actions. It is not
even possible in this way to try to motivate the inert material modes to act in any
way at all.
That the individual spirit soul does actually perform actions is also confirmed in

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

the next sütra.

Sütra 32

vihäropadeçät

vihära—of pastimes; upadeçät—because of the teaching.

Because of the teaching about pastimes.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Chändogya Upaniñad (8.12.3) describes the activities of the liberated souls:

sa tatra paryeti jakñan kréòan ramamäëaù

"In the spiritual world the individual spirit soul eats, plays, and enjoys."

Therefore action by itself does not brings pain and unhappiness to the soul,
rather it is the bondage of the three modes of nature that brings unhappiness. This
is so because the three modes of nature obscure the reality of the soul's spiritual
nature.

Sütra 33

upädänät

upädänät—because of taking.

Because of taking.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (2.1.18) it is said:

sa yathä mahä-räjaù . . . evam evaiña etän präëän gåhétvä sve çarére yathä-kämaà
parivartate

"In the dreaming state the individual spirit soul acts like a king. The soul grasps
the life-airs and does as it wishes."

In the Bhagavad-gétä (15.8) it is also said:

gåhétvaitäni samyäti
väyur gandhän iväçayät

"The living entity in the material world carries his different conceptions of life
from one body to another as the air carries aromas. Thus he takes one kind of
body and again quits it to take another."*

In these passages it is seen that the individual spirit soul does perform actions,
for the soul moves the life-airs as a magnet moves iron. The life-airs may move
many things, but it is the individual spirit soul who moves the life-airs. Nothing else
moves them.

In the following words the author of the sütras now gives another reason.

Sütra 34

vyapadeçäc ca kriyäyäà na cen nirdeça-viparyayaù

vyapadeçät—because of designation; ca—and; kriyäyäm—in action; na—mpt;

cet—if; nirdeça—grammatical construction; viparyayaù—different.

Also because of the name in the action. If this were not so the grammatical
structure would be different.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.5.1) it is said:

vijïänaà yajïaà tanute. karmäëi tanute 'pi ca.

"Consciousness performs yajïas. Consciousness performs actions."

These words clearly show that the individual spirit soul is the primary performer
of Vedic and ordinary actions. If the word "vijïänam" is interpreted to mean not
the individual spirit soul, but the intelligence, then the grammatical structure of the
sentence would be different. Then the word “vijïäna" would be in the
instrumental case, for the intelligence would be the instrument by which the action
is performed. However, the word is not in the instrumental case. If the intelligence
were the performer of the action here, then another word must be given in the
instrumental case to show with what instrument the intelligence performs the
action, for there must be an instrument in every action. However, if the individual
spirit soul is the performer of the action there is not need for another word in the
instrumental case to show the instrument used, for in that situation the individual
spirit soul is both the performer of the action and the instrument employed.
Here someone may object: Is it not so that the individual spirit soul, being
independent and able to act as he likes, will naturally act for his own welfare and
will not perform actions that bring him harm?
To this I reply: No. It is not like that. The individual spirit soul desires to benefit
himself, but because his past karma acts against him, he sometimes creates his own
misfortune.
For these reasons it is clear that the individual spirit soul certainly performs
actions. When the scriptures sometimes say that the individual spirit soul does not
perform actions, the meaning is that the soul is not independent and free to do
exactly everything he wishes.
Here someone may object: It is not possible that the individual spirit soul is the
performer of actions, for it is clearly seen that these actions often bring him
suffering.
To this I reply: No. It is not so. If the individual spirit •soul is not the performer
of actions, then the scriptural descriptions of the darça, paurëamassa, and other
yajïas would not make any sense.

In the following words the author of the sütras refutes the idea that material
nature is the real performer of actions.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 35

uplabdhi-vad aniyamaù

uplabdhi—consciousness; vat—like; aniyamaù—uncertainty.

As in the situation of consciousness, it would be indefinite.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In previous sütras it was shown that if the individual spirit soul were all-
pervading, then consciousness would be vague and indefinite. In the same way if
all-pervading material nature were the sole performer of all actions, then all
actions would bring the same result to all spirit souls simultaneously. Clearly this is
not so. Also, it could not be said that the individual spirit soul would need to be
near the place where a certain action was performed in order to experience the
result of that action. The saìkhya philosophers cannot say this, for in their theory
each individual spirit soul is all-pervading and is thus already near the places where
all actions are performed.

Sütra 36

çakti-viparyayät

çakti—of power; viparyayät—because of difference.

Because the power is changed.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

If the material nature is the performer of actions, then material nature must also
experience the good and bad results of those actions. However, the Çvetäçvatara
Upaniñad (1.8) affirms:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

bhoktå-bhävät

"The individual spirit soul enjoys the good and bad results of actions."

In this way the idea that the material nature is the performer of actions is
refuted. Because the individual spirit soul enjoys the good and bad results of
actions, the individual spirit soul must also be the performer of those actions.

Sütra 37

samädhy-abhäväc ca

samädhi—of liberation; abhävät—because of the non-existence; ca—also.

Also because there is no liberation.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Actions are meant to bring one to liberation from the material world. Because it
is not possible for the material nature to act in such a way and attain such a goal,
the idea that the material nature is the performer of actions cannot be entertained.
Liberation means understanding the truth "I am different from matter". Because it
is unconscious, and also because it really is matter, it is not possible for the
material nature to come to this understanding. In this way it is proved that the
individual spirit soul is the performer of actions.

Adhikaraëa 15
Activity Is the Soul's Nature

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the following words the author of the sütras gives an example to show that

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

the individual spirit soul performs actions, using other its own potency, or some
other instrument to perform them.

Sütra 38

yathä ca takñobhayathä

yathä—as; ca—and; takña—carpenter; ubhayathä—in both ways.

In both ways like a carpenter.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

As a carpenter performs actions, employing both his own power and a host of
tools, so does the individual spirit soul, employing both his own power and the
various life-airs. Thus the soul employs the material body and other instruments
also, to perform actions. It is the pure spirit soul who thus uses the modes of
material nature to perform actions. That is why the scriptures sometimes say that
the modes of material nature are the performer of actions.

That the individual spirit soul is indeed the performer of actions is confirmed in
Bhagavad-gétä (13.22), where it is said:

käraëaà guna-saìgo 'sya

sad-asad-yoëi-janmasu

"The living entity in material nature thus follows the ways of life, enjoying the
three modes of nature. Thus he meets with good and evil among the various
species."*

These words explain the scripture passages that declare the modes of nature to
be the performers of action. It is foolish for a person to think himself the sole
performer of action and ignore the five factors of action. Of course it is not that the
individual spirit soul never performs any action. The idea that the soul never does
anything is clearly refuted by the many scriptural statements urging the soul to act
such a way that he may attain liberation. When in the Bhagavad-gétä (2.19) the
Lord says:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

näyaà hanti na hanyate

"The self slays not nor is slain."

that does not mean that the individual spirit soul never performs any action, but
rather that the eternal spirit soul can never be cut or slain. The meaning of the
statement that the soul never acts has thus already been explained.
In both this life and the next the devotees perform various actions of devotional
service to the Lord. Because these actions are free from the touch of the modes of
nature, because they are under the jurisdiction of the Lord's spiritual potency and
because they lead to liberation, these actions are said not to be action, for they are
not material actions. This is explained by the Supreme Lord Himself in these
words:

sättvikaù kärako 'saìgé

rägändho räjasaù småtaù
tämasaù småti-vibhrañöo
nirguëo mad-apäçrayaù

"One who acts without attachment is in the mode of goodness. One who is
blinded with desire is in the mode of passion. One whose intelligence is broken is
in the mode of ignorance. One who takes shelter of Me is free from the grip of the
modes of nature."
That the pure spirit soul experiences the results of his actions is described in
Bhagavad-gétä (13.21):

puruñaù sukha-duùkhänäà
bhoktåtve hetur ucyate

"The living entity is the cause of the various sufferings and enjoyments in this
world."*

Because it is by nature conscious it is the soul that experiences the results of

actions, the modes of nature do not experience them. This refutes the idea that the
modes are active and the soul is not. In this way it is proved that it is the conscious
soul who experiences happiness and other sensations. In this way the individual
spirit soul brings knowledge to itself and others. Both kinds of action exist for the
soul. In the Praçna Upaniñad (4.9) it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

eña hi drañöä sprañöä çrotä

"It is the soul who sees, touches, and hears."

Thus, by this example of the carpenter, the idea that the individual spirit soul is
the only factor in action, and there are no others, is clearly refuted.

Adhikaraëa 16
The Individual Spirit Soul is Dependent on the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now another doubt is considered.

Saàçaya (doubt): Is the individual spirit soul independent in his actions, or does
he depend on another?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The scriptures say:

svarga-kämo yajeta

"One who desires Svargaloka should perform yajïas."

and

tasmäd brähmaëaù suräà na pibet päpmanotsaàsåja

"A brähmaëa should not drink liquor and should not commit sins."

That the scriptures give orders and prohibitions for the soul to follow is proof
that the soul is independent, for independence means to have the power to do one
thing and to refrain from doing another.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives his
conclusion.

Sütra 39

parät tu tac-chruteù

parät—from the Supreme; tu—but; tat—of that; çruteù—from the scriptures.

But from the Supreme, because of the scriptures.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is used to remove doubt. The Supreme Personality of
Godhead inspires the individual spirit soul to act. How is that known? The sütra
explains: "tac-chruteù" (It is known from the scriptures). The scriptures give the
following explanations:

antaù praviñöaù çästä janänäm

"Entering their hearts, the Supreme Personality of Godhead controls all living
entities."

ya ätmani tiñöhann ätmänam antaro yamayati

"Entering their hearts, the Supreme Personality of Godhead controls all living
entities."

eña eva sädhu karma kärayati

"The Lord engages the living entity in pious activities so he may be elevated."*

Here someone may object: So be it. However, if the Supreme Personality of

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Godhead is the actual performer of actions, then the orders and prohibitions of the
scriptures are all meaningless. The scriptures can give orders and prohibitions only
if the individual spirit soul is independent and thus has the power to make choices.

If this is said, then the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 40

kåta-prayatnäpekñas tu vihita-pratiñiddhävaiyarthyädibhyaù

kåta—done; prayatna—effort; äpekñaù—relation; tu—but; vihita—ordered;

pratiñiddha—forbidden; a—not; vaiyarthya—meaninglessness; ädibhyaù—
beginning.

But it is by effort because then orders and prohibitions are not without
meaning.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is used here to dispel doubt. The individual spirit soul
performs pious and impious deeds. Taking into consideration the individual soul's
efforts, the Supreme Personality of Godhead gives him facility to act in a certain
way. Therefore the previously stated objection is not valid.
The pious and impious deeds of the individual spirit soul are like different seeds
that sprout into different kinds of plants. The Supreme Personality of Godhead is
like the rain that falls on these seeds and makes them grow. Therefore in this
situation is the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the instrument by which these
seeds of karma bear fruit. The seeds of various trees, vines, and other plants are
the specific cause of these plants, and the rain that makes them grow is the general
cause. If no raincloud brings water there will not be any variety of sweet flowers or
other plants. If there is no seed there will not any flowers or plants either. In this
way the Supreme Personality of Godhead gives the results of the pious and
impious deeds performed by the individual spirit soul. Even though •dispatched by
another, a person is still the performer of the actions he does. Therefore it cannot
be said that the individual spirit soul does not perform actions.
Why is that? The sütra explains: "Because then orders and prohibitions are not
without meaning." The word “ädi" (beginning with) in this sütra means that the
Supreme Personality of Godhead gives mercy and punishment according to the
pious and impious actions of the individual spirit souls. If that interpretation is
accepted, then the orders and prohibitions of the scriptures are not without

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

meaning. If the Supreme Personality of Godhead actually forces the individual
spirit soul to act piously or impiously, and the soul is like a rock or a log and has no
independence, then the orders of the scripture to perform pious deeds and avoid
impious deeds are all worthless and should be rejected.
The scriptures say that when He is merciful the Supreme Personality of
Godhead engages the individual spirit soul in pious activities so he may be
elevated, and when He withdraws His mercy the Supreme Personality of Godhead
engages the individual spirit soul in impious activities so he may go to hell. If this
means that the individual living entity has no choice, and pious and impious deeds
are forced on him by the Supreme Personality of Godhead, then the Supreme
Personality of Godhead is cruel and unjust, a monster. Therefore it must be
concluded that the individual spirit soul does have free will, and is responsible for
his actions, although he does not have the power to transfer his desire and will into
concrete action unless the Supreme Personality of Godhead permits. In this way
everything is explained.

Adhikaraëa 17
The Individual Spirit Soul Is Part and Parcel of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Next, to corroborate the previous explanation the author of the sütras explains
that the individual spirit soul is part and parcel of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. In the muëòaka Upaniñad (3.1.1) it is said:

dvä suparëä

"The soul and the Supersoul within the body are compared to two friendly birds
sitting together."*

The first bird here is the Supreme Personality of Godhead and the second is the
individual spirit soul.

Saàçaya (doubt): Is the individual spirit soul in truth the Supreme Personality
of Godhead, only seeming to be different because of the illusion of mäyä, or is the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

the individual spirit soul part and parcel of the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
different from the Lord, but related to Him as a ray of sunlight is related to the
sun?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): What is the truth? The truth is the
individual spirit soul covered by the illusion of mäyä is in truth the same as the
Supreme Personality of Godhead? The Brahma-bindu Upaniñad (13) explains:

ghaöa-samvåtam äkäçaà
néyamäne ghaöe yathä
gato léyeta näkäçaà
tadvaj jévo nabhopamaù

"The space within a jar is not moved when the jar is moved, nor is it destroyed
when the jar is broken. The spirit soul is like that unbreakable space."

The Chändogya Upaniñad also (6.8.7) affirms:

tat tvam asi

"You are that."

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives his
conclusion.

Sütra 41

aàço nänä vyapadeçäd anyathä cäpi däsa-kitaväditvam adhéyate eke

aàçaù—part; nänä—many; vyapadeçät—because of the teaching; anyathä—

otherwise; ca—and; api—also; däsa—servant; kitava—gambler; ädi—beginning
with; tvam—the state of being; adhéyate—is read; eke—some.

He is a part because of the description of being many, and also because some
scriptures describe him as a servant, as a gambler, or as something else.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The individual spirit soul is a part and parcel of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead as a ray of sunlight is part and parcel of the sun. The individual spirit soul
is different from the Lord, dependent on the Lord, and related to the Lord. That is
the meaning. Why is that? The sütra explains: "Because of the description of being
many." The Subala Upaniñad explains:

udbhavaù sambhavo divyo deva eko näräyaëo mätä pitä bhrätä niväsaù çaraëaà
suhåd gatir näräyaëaù

"Näräyaëa is the transcendental Supreme Personality of Godhead. Näräyaëa is

the creator, destroyer, mother, father, brother, home, shelter, friend, and goal."

In Bhagavad-gétä (9.18) Lord Kåñëa declares:

gatir bhartä prabhuù säkñé

niväsaù çaraëaà suhåt

"I am the goal, the sustainer, the master, the witness, the abode, the refuge, and
the most dear friend. I am the creation and the annihilation, the basis of
everything, the resting place, and the eternal seed."*

The words "nänä vyapadeçäd" in this sütra describe the many relationships that
exist between the Supreme Personality of Godhead and the individual spirit soul,
relationships like that between the creator and created, controller and controlled,
shelter and person who takes shelter, master and servant, friend and friend, and
goal and seeker. Some passages in the Atharva Veda declare that because the
Supreme is all-pervading, the individual spirit souls and the Supreme are identical.
The Atharva Veda declares:

brahma däsä brahma däçä brahma kitaväù

"These servants are the Supreme. These fishermen are the Supreme. These
gamblers are the Supreme."

It is not possible that this passage intends to say that the individual spirit soul is
actually not different from the Supreme. It is not possible that the Supreme is

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

simultaneously •both the creator and created, the pervader and pervaded, nor is it
possible that supremely intelligent Lord becomes a servant or other lowly being. If
it were true that the individual spirit souls are identical with the Supreme, then the
scriptures' advice to renounce the world would become meaningless. Nor is it
possible that the Supreme has become covered by the influence of illusion, for
illusion has no power to bewilder the Lord. Nor is it possible that the individual
spirit souls are parts of the Supreme like fragments cut with a chisel from a great
stone, for that would contradict the scriptures' statements that the Supreme can
neither be broken nor changed. Therefore the individual spirit soul is different
from the Supreme, but related to Him as created to creator, and in other ways also.
The individual spirit soul is thus a part and parcel of the Supreme. The truth is that
the individual spirit soul is a potency of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This
is described in Viñëu Puräëa (6.7.61):

viñëu-çaktiù parä proktä

kñetrajïäkhyä tathä parä

"Originally, Kåñëa's energy is spiritual, and the energy known as the living
entity is also spiritual."*

When it is said that the individual spirit soul is a part of the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, the word "part" is used in the same way as in the
sentence, "The circle of Venus is a one-hundredth part of the moon's circle," or
the same way as in the definition, "A part, although situated in a smaller area than
the whole, is identical with the whole in substance." The use of the word "part"
here is not different from that definition. Thus the Supreme Personality of
Godhead is the master of all potencies, and the individual spirit soul is a part of the
Lord's spiritual potency. This, by being a localized manifestation of one of the
Lord's potencies, the individual spirit soul is a part of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. That is their relationship.
The example of the pot means that when the mistaken identification of the soul
for the body is broken, the individual soul meets the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. The Chändogya Upaniñad's statement "tat tvam asi" (You are that)
therefore means "You are dependent on the Supreme." The context of that
passage supports this view. It does not support any other interpretation. Therefore
the individual spirit soul and the Supreme Personality of Godhead are separate
and different. One is the controller, the other the controlled. One is all-pervading,
the other atomic in size. This is directly seen in the scriptures. It is not possible to
prove otherwise. In the next sütra the author continues his explanation.

Sütra 42

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

mantra-varëät

mantra—of the mantras; varëät—from the description.

Because of the description in the Vedic mantras.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Åg Veda (10.90.3) it is said:

pädo 'sya sarvä bhütäni

"All living entities are part and parcel of the Supreme."

In this way the Vedic mantras declare that the individual spirit souls are part
and parcel of the Supreme. The word “päda" here means "part". No other
meaning makes sense in this context. The word "sarvä bhütäni" (all living entities)
here is in the plural, whereas the word "aàçaù" (part) in sütra 41 is in the singular.
The singular here is used in a generic sense to denote all spirit souls. This kind of
usage is also seen in many other places.

Sütra 43

api smaryate

api—also; smaryate—in the Småti-çästra.

Also in the Småti-çästra.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Bhagavad-gétä (15.7) Lord Kåñëa explains:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

mamaiväàço jéva-loke
jéva-bhütaù sanätanaù

"The living entities in this conditioned world are My eternal fragmental parts."*

By using the word "sanätana" (eternal), the Lord refutes the idea that the living
entities referred to here are the temporary external bodies in which the eternal
souls reside. In this way it is seen that the individual spirit souls are part and parcel
of the Supreme and have an relationship with Him. the Supreme is the creator and
dominant in other ways also, and the individual spirit souls are dependent on Him.
The nature of the individual spirit souls is described in the following passage of
Padma Puräëa:

jïänäçrayo jïäna-guëaç
cetanaù prakåteù paraù
na jäto nirvikäraç ca
eka-rüpaù svarüpa-bhäk

"The individual spirit soul is the shelter of •knowledge, has knowledge as one if
his qualities, is consciousness, is beyond the world of matter, is never born, never
changes, and has one form, a spiritual form.

aëur nityo vyäpti-çélaç

cid-änandätmakas tathä
aham artho 'vyayaù säkñé
bhinna-rüpaù sanätanaù

"The soul is atomic, eternal, is present by consciousness everywhere in the

material body, is by nature full of spiritual bliss and knowledge, has a sense of
individual identity, is unchanging, is a witness within the body, is eternal, and is
different from the Supreme.

adähyo 'cchedyo 'kledyo

'çoñyo 'kñara eva ca
evam-ädi-guëair yuktaù
çeña-bhütaù parasya vai

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "The soul can never be burned, cut, moistened, withered, or killed. It has these
and many more qualities. It is part and parcel of the Supreme.

ma-kareëocyate jévaù
kñetra-jïaù paravän sadä
däsa-bhüto harer eva
nänyasyaiva kadäcana

"Thus the word `ma' refers to the individual spirit soul. The soul is the knower
of the field of activities. The soul is spiritual. The soul is an eternal servant of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. The soul is never the servant of anyone else.

The phrase "evam-ädi-guëaiù" (with these and many more qualities) refers to
the soul's other qualities, such as his ability to perform actions, to experience
sensations, to attain enlightenment, and to enlighten others. The word
“enlightenment" here has two features. In the first feature the soul itself attains
enlightenment. In the second feature the soul brings enlightenment to others. That
is the nature of the soul. A lamp sheds light on itself and on other objects also. A
jar or similar object has no power to bring light. Although a lamp may shine,
because it is inanimate matter it cannot benefit from its own light. The individual
soul, however, can benefit from the light it brings. Because the soul can thus
become illuminated, it is said that the soul is spiritual and full of knowledge.

Adhikaraëa 18
The Lord's Incarnations Are Not Part and Parcel of the Lord, For They Are the
Lord Himself

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Digressing, for the moment, from the main topic, the author of the sütras next
considers the nature of the Lord's incarnations. In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad it
is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

eko vaçé sarva-gaù kåñëa iòya
eko 'pi san bahudhä yo 'vabhäti

"Lord Kåñëa is the worshipable, all-pervading supreme controller, and although

He is one, He manifests in many forms."

In the Viñëu Puräëa (1.2.3) it is said:

ekäneka-svarüpäya

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is one, although He has many forms."

Here it is said that the Lord is one because He remains one person, even though
He appears in many forms, and He is also called many because of the great variety
of these forms. That is the meaning.

Saàçaya (doubt): Are the incarnations of the Lord, such as the incarnation
Matsya, part and parcel of the Lord in the same way the individual spirit souls are,
or are They different from the individual spirit souls?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): There is no difference between the

individual spirit souls and the incarnations of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 44

prakäçädi-van naivaà paraù

prakäça—light; ädi—beginning with; vat—like; na—not; evam—thus; paraù—

the Supreme.

The Supreme is not like light or other things.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Although the Lord's incarnations, such as Lord Matsya, are called "parts" of
the Supreme, They are not like the individual spirit souls. Here the author of the
sütras gives and example: "The Supreme is not like light or other things." As the
sun and a firefly may both be called "light", but are in truth very different, and as
nectar and wine may both be called "liquid", but in truth are very different, so the
individual spirit souls and the incarnations of the Lord do not have a similar
nature, but are very different.

Sütra 45

smaranti ca

smaranti—the Småti-çästras say; ca—and.

The Småti-çästras also say it.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Varäha Puräëa it is said:

sväàçaç cätha vibhinnäàça

iti dvedhäàça iñyate
aàçino yat tu sämarthyaà
yat-svarüpaà yathä sthitiù

"It is said that there are two kinds of parts and parcels of the Supreme: direct
parts and separated parts. Direct parts have exactly the same nature as the Lord.

tad eva näëumätro 'pi

bhedaù sväàçäàçino kvacit
vibhinnäàço 'lpa-çaktiù syät
kiïcit sämarthya-mätra-yuk

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "Separated parts are different from the Lord. They are atomic in size and have
very slight powers.

sarve sarva-guëaiù pürëäù

sarva-doña-vivarjitäù

"All direct parts of the Lord are filled with all virtues and glories and free of all
vices and defects."

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (1.3.28) it is said:

ete cäàça-kaläù puàsaù

kåñëas tu bhagavän svayam

"All the above mentioned incarnations are either plenary portions or portions
of the plenary portions of the Lord, •but Lord Çré Kåñëa is the original Personality
of Godhead."*

Thus Lord Kåñëa is the original Supreme Personality of Godhead and the
various incarnations, such as Lord Matsya, are parts of Him, but they are not
different from Lord Kåñëa, as the individual spirit souls are. Lord Kåñëa is like a
vaidürya stone, which manifests different colors from moment to moment. In this
way Lord Kåñëa appears in different forms.
In His various incarnations Lord Kåñëa may display all or only some of His
powers. That is the description of the scriptures. Lord Kåñëa, the source of all
incarnations, displays all of His six transcendental opulences in full. When the
Lord does not display all His opulences in full, He appears as an aàça incarnation,
and when He displays even fewer of His opulences, He appears as a kalä
incarnation. In this circumstance He is like a great teacher, learned in the six
sciences, who in certain circumstances teaches only a small portion of what he
actually knows.
In the Puruña-bodhiné Upaniñad it is said that Lord Kåñëa appears with all His
transcendental potencies, headed by Goddess Rädhä. In the Tenth Canto of
Çrémad-Bhägavatam it is said that various transcendental qualities, such as being
supreme over all, being filled with great love, being accompanied by loving
associates, filling with wonder Brahmä, Çiva, and all the demigods, sages, and wise
devotees, manifesting many pastimes, such as sweetly playing the flute, that fill
everyone with wonder, displaying a great sweetness of transcendental
handsomeness, and being very kind and merciful, are eternally manifested in
Yaçodä's infant Kåñëa. Lord Matsya and the other incarnations manifest some but
not all of these qualities. Still, the incarnations of the Lord are not like the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

individual spirit souls, for the incarnations actually are the Lord Himself.
Now the author of the sütras presents another argument.

Sütra 46

anujïä-parihärau deha-sambandhät jyotir-ädi-vat

anujïä—permission to act; parihärau—cessation from action; deha—of the

body; sambandhät—from the contact; jyotiù—eye; ädi—beginning with; vat—like.

Bondage and liberation come from contact with the material body, like the eye
and other things.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Even though they are parts and parcels of the Supreme, the individual spirit
souls, because beginningless ignorance, and also because of contact with material
bodies, are subject to material bondage and liberation. The incarnations of the
Lord, such as Lord Matsya, however, are not subject to such things. This is the
description of the Çruti-çästra. In the Çruti-çästra it is also said that the incarnations
of the Lord do not have material bodies, but are directly the Lord Himself. That is
the •great difference between the individual spirit souls and the incarnations of the
Lord.
The word "anujïä" here means "permission". It is by the Lord's permission that
the individual spirit souls can perform pious and impious deeds, as the Kauçétaki
Upaniñad (3.8) explains:

eña eva sädhu karma kärayati

"The Lord engages the living entity in pious activities so he may be elevated."*

The word "parihära" means "liberation". This is described in the Çruti-çästra:

tam eva viditväti måtyum eti

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 By understanding the Supreme Personality of Godhead one is able to cross
beyond this world of death."

Next, speaking the words "jyotir-ädi-vat" (like the eye), the author of the sütras
gives an example to explain this. The eyes of the living entities are like small
portions of the sun. However, the eyes depend on the sun for the power of sight,
and if the sun does not give permission, in the form of the sunlight, the eyes cannot
see. In this way the eyes are dependent on the sun. The sunlight on the sun-planet,
however, is identical with the sun itself, and thus it makes no sense to say they are
dependent on the sun. The difference between the individual spirit souls and the
incarnations of the Lord is like that, the incarnations being like the sunlight and
the souls being like the eyes.

Sütra 47

asantateç cävyatikaraù

asantateù—because of imperfection; ca—not; avyatikaraù—without

bewilderment.

Because it is imperfect there can be no mistake.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Because he is imperfect, the individual spirit soul cannot be mistaken for an

incarnation of the Lord. The individual spirit souls are therefore not the same as or
equal to the incarnations of the Lord, beginning with Lord Matsya, who are all
perfect. In the Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (5.9), the individual spirit soul is described in
the following words:

bälägra-çata-bägasya

"If we divide the tip of a hair into one hundred parts and then take one part and
divide this into another one •hundred parts, that ten-thousandth part is the
dimension of the living entity."*

Instead of being atomic and limited, as the individual spirit souls are, the Lord's

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

incarnations, beginning with Lord Matsya, are perfect and complete in every way,
as the Iça Upaniñad explains:

pürnam adaù pürëam idam

"The Personality of Godhead is perfect and complete."*

In the following words the author of the sütras shows the great fault in thinking
the individual soul identical with the Supreme.

Sütra 48

äbhäsa eva ca

äbhäsaù—fallacy; eva—indeed; ca—also.

It is also a fallacy.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In this sütra is refuted the idea that because they are both called "aàças", or
parts of the Lord, therefore the individual spirit souls and the incarnations of the
Lord are identical. This idea is based on the logical fallacy of sat-pratipakña
(undistributed middle). Because of its imperfect reasoning, this idea is wrong.
The word "ca" (also) here hints that some examples may be given to show this.
One example is that of earth and sky. Earth and sky are both substances, but that
does not mean that they are identical. Existence and non-existence are both
categories, but that does not mean they are equal. In the same way the individual
spirit souls and the incarnations of the Supreme Personality of Godhead may both
be parts of the Supreme, but that does not mean that they are equal.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 19
The Individual Spirit Souls Are Not All Alike

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Concluding this digression, the author of the sütras now returns to His original
topic. In the Kaöha Upaniñad (2.5.13) it is said:

nityo nityänäà cetanaç cetanänäm

eko bahünäà yo vidadhäti kämän

"The Supreme Lord is eternal and the living beings are eternal. The Supreme
Lord is cognizant and the living beings are cognizant. The difference is that the
Supreme Lord is supplying all the necessities of life for the many other living
entities."*

Saàçaya (doubt): In this way it is said that the individual spirit souls are eternal
and cognizant. Are the individual spirit souls all alike or are they not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The individual spirit souls are not different.
They are all exactly alike.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 49

adåñöäniyamät

adåñöa—of fate; aniyamät—because of difference.

Because of different fates.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 As a frog jumps a long distance, the word "na" (not) should be inserted from
sütra 44. In this way this sütra means "the individual spirit souls are not all alike.
Why is that? The sütra explains: "Even though the individual spirit souls have the
same nature, they have different fates." Their fates are beginningless.
Here someone may object: Are the different fates not created because the
individual spirit souls have different desires and different aversions?
The author of the sütras says, "No it is not so," and gives the following
explanation.

Sütra 50

abhisandhy-ädiñv api caivam

abhisandhy—inclinations; ädiñu—beginning with; api—also; ca—and; evam—

thus.

In this way there are different desires and other things.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The different natures of the individual spirit souls are to be explained in a

different way. These differences exist because of different fates. The word "ca"
(and) hints that these differences exist at every moment.

Here someone may object: Is it not so that these differences are created by
differing environments, such as the environment of Svargaloka, the earth, or other
places?

To this the author of the sütras replies, "No. It is not so." He gives the following
explanation.

Sütra 51

pradeçäd iti cen näntar-bhävät

pradeçät—from the environment; iti—thus; cet—if; na—not; antar-bhävät—

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

because of being understood.

If it is said that this is because of environment, then the answer is: No, because
there is another reason.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The other reason mentioned here is the differing fates of the individual spirit
souls. The differences here cannot be attributed to different environments, for
souls in the same environment often manifest great differences.

Pada 4

Invocation

tvaj-jätäù kalitotpätäù
mat-präëäù santy amitra-bhit
etän çädhi tathä deva
yathä sat-patha-gäminaù

O Supreme Personality of Godhead, O destroyer of enemies, my life-breaths,

which are born from You, have left the path of virtue. O Lord, please bring them
under control and push them on the path that is right.

Adhikaraëa 1
The Präëas Are Manifested From the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 In the Third Pada contradictory scriptural passages describing the elements
were harmonized. In the Fourth Pada contradictory passages describing the präëas
(life-force and senses) will be harmonized. The präëas are of two kinds: primary
and secondary. The secondary präëas are the eleven senses, beginning with the
eyes. The primary präëas are the five life-airs, beginning with apäna. First the
secondary präëas will be examined. In the Muëòaka Upaniñad (2.1.3) it is said:

etasmäj jäyate präëo manaù sarvendriyäëi ca

"From this are born präëa, mind, and all the senses."

Saàçaya (doubt): Is this description of the creation of the senses metaphor ical,
like the description of the creation of the individual souls, or literal, like the
description of the creation of ether and the other elements?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): This is explained in the following words of

the Çruti-çästra:

asad vä idam agra äsét tad ähuù kià tad äséd iti åñayo väva te asad äsét tad ähuù ke
te åñaya iti präëä väva åñayaù.

"He said: In the beginning was non-being. They said: What was that non-being?
He said: The non-being was many sages. They said: Who were those sages? He
said: Those sages were the präëas."

This passage from the Çruti-çästra clearly shows that the the senses, which are
here called präëas or sages, existed before the creation of the material world.
Therefore the senses are like the individual spirit souls (and the scriptures'
descriptions of the creation of the senses are only allegories.)

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 1

tathä präëäù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 tathä—so; präëäù—the präëäs.

The praëas are like that.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

As ether and the other elements were manifested from the Supreme Personality
of Godhead, so the präëas and the senses were also manifested from Him. That is
the meaning here. In the beginning of creation the ingredients of the material
world were merged together into one. Then the different ingredients were
manifested. This is described in Muëòaka Upaniñad (2.1.3):

etasmäj jäyate präëo manaù sarvendriyäëi ca

"From this are born präëa, mind, and all the senses."

The creation of the material senses is not like the creation of the conscious
individual spirit souls, because the souls are free from the six transformations that
are always present in matter. When they describe the creation of the individual
spirit souls, the words of the scriptures are all allegories, but when they describe
the creation of the senses, the words of the scriptures are literal descriptions. This
is so because the senses are by nature material. This being so, the words präëa and
åñi (sages) in this passage refer to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This is so
because both these words are names of the all-knowing Supreme Person.

Here someone may object: Is it not so that because the words "präëäù" and
"åñayaù" (sages) are both in the plural it is not possible that they can here be
names of the Supreme Personality of Godhead?

In the following words the author of the sütras answers this objection.

Sütra 2

gauëy asambhavät

gauëé—secondary meaning; asambhavät—because of impossibility.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 This must be a secondary use of the word, because the primary use is
impossible.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The use of the plural in this passage from the Çruti-çästra must be a secondary
usage of the plural. Why is that? Because there are not many Gods, there is only
one God, the plural cannot be used to describe Him. Still, the plural may be
applied to Him to refer to His many different manifestations. Although the
Supreme Lord is one, He appears in His many incarnations like an actor assuming
different roles or a vaidürya jewel displaying •different colors. In this secondary
sense the plural is appropriate in relation to Him. This is confirmed by the
following words of the Çruti-çästra:

ekaà santaà bahudhä dåçyamänam

"Although He is one, the Supreme Personality of Godhead is seen to be many."

The Småti-çästra also explains:

ekäneka-svarüpäya

"Although He is one, the Supreme Personality of Godhead appears in many

forms."

Sütra 3

tat präk çruteç ca

tat—that; präk—before; çruteù—from the Çruti-çästra; ca—and.

Because the Çruti-çästra declares that He existed before the creation.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Because in the beginning of creation the varieties of material nature were not
yet manifested, and thus the material world was all one, it is also not proper to
accept the use of the plural here in a literal sense. This is so because the Çruti-
çästras declare that in the beginning of material creation only the Supreme
Personality of Godhead existed. Therefore the plural here must be used in a
secondary sense.

In the following words the author of the sütras gives another reason why the
word "präëa" should be interpreted as a name of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead.

Sütra 4

tat-pürvakatväd väcaù

tat—that; pürvakatvät—because of being before; väcaù—speech.

Because speech existed before the material creation.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "väcaù" (speech) here means "the names of things other than the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of many spiritual potencies". This
speech existed before the pradhäna, the mahat-tattva, and the other features of the
material world were created. Because the names and forms of •the various
material features were not yet created, and because the material senses also were
not yet created at that time in the beginning of creation, the word "präëa" here
must be used as a name of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The Båhad-
äraëyaka Upaniñad (1.4.7) explains:

tad dhedaà tarhi

"In the beginning they were not manifested. Only later were the material forms
and names manifested."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 This explains that in the beginning of the material creation the material names
and forms were not yet manifested. Thus at that time the material senses as well as
the elements beginning with ether, were not yet manifested.

Adhikaraëa 2
The Senses Are Eleven

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

After refuting this false idea about the senses, an idea that contradicts the
descriptions in Çruti-çästra, the author of the sütras refutes a false idea about how
many senses there are. In the Muëòaka Upaniñad (2.1.8) it is said:

sapta präëäù prabhavanti tasmät

saptärciñaù samadhiù sapta-homäù
sapteme lokä yeñu saïcaranti
präëä guhäçayä nihitä sapta sapta

"From Him come the seven präëas, the seven arcis, the seven homas, and the
seven lokas. These seven are placed in every heart."

However, in the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (3.9.4) it is said:

daçeme puruñe präëä ätmaikadaça

"In the living entity there are ten präëas. The soul is the eleventh."

Saàçaya (doubt): Are the präëas seven or eleven?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The pürvapakña speaks the following sütra.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 5

sapta-gater viçeñitväc ca

sapta—of seven; gateù—because of going; viçeñitvät—because of the specific

description; ca—also.

Because of the departure of seven and also because of a specific description.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The präëas are seven. Why is that? Because that is the opinion of scripture. In
the Çruti-çästra it is said:

saptänäm eva jévena saha saïcära-rupäyä gateù

"Accompanied by the seven präëas, the soul leaves the body."

In the Kaöha Upaniñad (6.10) it is said:

yadä païcävatiñöhante
jïänäni manasä saha
buddhiç ca na viceñöeta
täm ähuù paramäà gatim

"The sages say that the supreme goal is attained when the five knowers are at
peace and the mind and intelligence are no longer active."

This passage describes the condition of the senses in the state of yogic trance.
This passage describes five senses, which begin with the ears. To them are added
the mind and intelligence. In this way the living entity has seven senses. The Çruti-
çästra also describes five working instruments, beginning with the voice and hands,
but these cannot be called senses in the primary meaning of the word because
these instruments do not accompany the soul when he leaves the material body
and also because these instruments are less useful to the soul than the seven
primary senses.

Siddhänta (conclusion): If this is said, the author of the sütras replies with the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

following conclusion.

Sütra 6

hastädayas tu sthite 'to naivam

hasta—the hands; ädayaù—beginning with; tu—but; sthite—situated; ataù—

therefore; na—not; evam—like that.

But when he is situated in that way, the hands and other instruments are also
present. Therefore it is not like that.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is used here to begin the refutation of the Pürvapakña's
objection. Although they are not included among the seven, the instruments
beginning with the hands are to be considered among the präëas. Why is that?
Because as long as the soul is situated in the material body these instruments help
in experiencing various things and in performing various tasks. In the Båhad-
äraëyaka Upaniñad it is said:

hastau vai grahaù sarva-karmaëäbhigraheëa gåhétäù hastäbhyäà karma karoti.

"The hands are a sense, for with the hands one grasps things and performs
actions."

In this way there are more than seven senses. There are five knowledge-
acquiring senses, five working senses, and the mind. In this way there are eleven
senses. In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (3.9.4) it is said:

ätmaikädaça

"The ätmä is the eleventh sense."

The word "ätmä" here means "the mind". In this way it should be understood.
There are five objects of perception: sound, touch, form, taste, and smell. To
perceive these objects there are five knowledge-acquiring senses: ears, skin, eyes,

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

tongue, and nose. There are five kinds of action: speech, grasping, moving,
excretion, and reproduction. To perform these actions there are five working
senses: voice, hands, feet, anus, and genital.
To co-ordinate the actions of all these and to take consideration of the three
phases of time (past, present, and future), there is the mind. Sometimes the mind is
considered to have four aspects. In this way the actions of the mind are: desiring,
coming to conclusions, understanding one's identity, and thinking. To perform
these actions the mind is divided into the heart (manaù), intelligence (buddhi),
false-ego (ahaìkära), and thinking (citta). In this way there are eleven senses.

Adhikaraëa 3
The Senses Are Atomic in Size

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Next the author of the sütras considers the question of the nature and size of
the senses.

Saàçaya (doubt): Are the senses all-pervading or are they atomic?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The senses must be all-pervading, for things
can be seen or heard from far away.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives his
conclusion.

Sütra 7

aëavaç ca

aëavaù—atoms; ca—and.

They are also atoms.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "ca" (also) is used here to indicate certainty. The eleven senses are
atomic in size. This is so because the Çruti-çästra declares that the senses leave the
material body. Things can be heard from far away and in other ways be perceived
from far away because the quality, or power, of the senses extend beyond the
senses themselves. As the individual spirit soul is all-pervading within the material
body, from the head to the feet, so the senses can also act at a distance. In this way
the theory of saìkhya philosophers, that the senses are all-pervading, is refuted.

Adhikaraëa 4
The Principal Präëa (the Life-Force) Has an Origin

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Muëòaka Upaniñad (2.1.3) it is said:

etasmäj jäyate präëaù

"From Him the präëa (life-force) is born."

Here the word "präëa" means "the principal präëa".

Saàçaya (doubt): Is the principal präëa (life-force) created in the same way the
individual spirit soul is "created" or is this präëa created in the same way ether and
the other elements are created?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The Çruti-çästra declares:

naiña präëa udeti nästam eti

"This präëa is never born and never dies."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The Småti-çästra also declares:

yat-präptir yat-parityäga
utpattir maraëaà tathä
tasyotpattir måtiç caiva
kathaà präëasya yujyate

"Birth and death come and go. How can birth and death affect the präëa?"

Therefore it is concluded that the principal präëa is “created" in the same way
the individual spirit soul is “created".

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 8

çreñöhaç ca

çreñöhaç—the principal one; ca—also.

The principal one also.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The principal präëa (life-force) is created in the same way ether and the other
elements are created. This is confirmed in the words of the Muëòaka Upaniñad
(2.1.3):

jäyate präëaù

"The präëa was created."

In its pratijïä statement the Muëòaka Upaniñad declares:

sa idaà sarvam asåjata

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "He created everything."

To avoid contradicting these words it must be accepted that the principal präëa
was also created. For this reason the scriptural passages stating that the präëa was
never created should be understood allegorically and not literally. One präëa is
called the principal präëa because it maintains the material body. So its meaning
can be carried into the next sütra, this sütra is given separately and not joined to
the previous sütra.

Adhikaraëa 5
The Principal Präëa (Life-Force) Is Not Air

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now the nature of the principal präëa (life-force) will be examined.

Saàçaya (doubt): is the principal präëa air alone, the vibration of air, the
activities of air, or a condition of air when it goes to another place? Which is it?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): It is the external element of air. This is

confirmed in the following statement of Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (3.1.5):

yo 'yaà präëaù sa väyuù

"The präëa is air."

Or, perhaps the principal präëa is the activities of air, the inhalation and
exhalation of breath. In this way it is proved that the principal präëa is air.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 9

na väyu-kriye påthag upadeçät

na—not; väyu—air; kriye—action; påthak—different; upadeçät—because of the

teaching.

It is neither air nor the activities of air, because the teaching is that it is
different.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The principal präëa (life-force) is neither air nor the movements of air. Why is
that? The sütra explains: "Because the teaching is that it is different". The
previously quoted passage of the Muëòaka Upaniñad (2.1.3) said that both air and
präëa are born from the Supreme. In this way it should be understood that air and
präëa are different, for they are mentioned separately. If air and präëa were
identical, then there would be no need to mention them separately in this passage.
If präëa were the movement of air then there would also be no need to mention
them both in this way. It is seen that the movements of fire and the other elements
are not separately mentioned in this passage. The statement of the Båhad-
äraëyaka Upaniñad, that "Präëa is •air" means that präëa is a specific kind of air,
and that präëa is not a separate element, like fire and the other elements. That is
the meaning here.
In the Kapila-sütra (2.31) it is said:

sämänya-karaëa-våttiù präëädyä väyavaù païca

"The five airs, beginning with präëa, perform that actions of the senses in
general."

Thus the saìkhya philosophers claim that präëa performs the actions of all the
senses. This cannot be, for it is not possible for the single präëa to perform all the
actions of all the senses.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 6
The Principal Präëa (Life-Force) Is An Instrument Used By the Soul

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad it is said:

supteñu väg-ädiñu präëa eko jägarti. präëa eko måtyunänäptaù. präëaù samvargo
väg-ädén samvåìkte. präëa itarän präëän rakñati mäteva puträn.

"When speech and the other senses sleep, präëa alone remains awake. Präëa
alone is untouched by death. Präëa controls speech and the other senses. As a
mother protects her children, so one präëa protects the other präëas."

Saàçaya (doubt): Is this principal präëa identical with the independent spirit
soul residing in the material body or is this principal präëa an instrument that
assists the spirit soul?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because the Çruti-çästra describes this

präëa as having many powers and glories, therefore this principal präëa is the
independent spirit soul.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 10

cakñur-ädi-vat tu tat saha çiñöhyädibhyaù

cakñuù—the eyes; ädi—beginning with; vat—like; tu—indeed; tat—that; saha—

with; çiñöhyä—teaching; ädibhyaù—because of beginning with.

Indeed, it is like the eyes and other senses, because it is taught along with the
senses.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here the word "tu" (indeed) is used to dispel doubt. The präëa (life-force) is an
instrument used by the individual spirit soul. It is like the eyes or the other senses.
Why is that? The sütra explains: "Because it is taught along with the senses." The
präëa is described along with the eyes and senses. Things of a like nature are
generally described together. as example of that is the Båhadratha meters, which
are described together. This is also confirmed by the use of the word “ädi"
(beginning with) in the sütra.
That the präëa is here grouped with the senses is seen in the following passage:

yatra väyaà mukhyaù präëaù sa eväyaà madhyamaù präëaù

"There is a principle präëa and there is a secondary präëa."

In this way the idea that the präëa is the independent spirit soul is refuted.

Adhikaraëa 7
The Principal Präëa (Life-Force) is the Primary Instrument of the Soul

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here someone may object: Is it not so that if it is to be counted among the

senses, the principal präëa must have a function to perform where it assists the
soul? The principal präëa has no such function. Also, if the principal präëa is one
of the senses, then the senses, beginning with the eyes, would be twelve in number.

In the following words the author of the sütras answers this objection.

Sütra 11

akaraëatväc ca na doñas tathä hi darçayati

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 akaraëatvät—because of not having a sepcific function; ca—and; na—no;
doñaù—fault; tathä—so; hi—indeed; darçayati—shows.

Also, there is no fault in not having a function, for the scriptures show it.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "ca" (also) is used to answer the previous objection. The word
"karaëa" here means “activity". It is not a defect on the part of the präëa that is
has no specific function to assist the soul, for it does have an important function in
that it is the support and the resting place of the physical senses. That is the
meaning here. In the following passage, the Chändogya Upaniñad (5.1.1) shows
this:

atha ha präëä aham çreyasi vyüdire. . . .

"The senses argued among themselves. Each one said: `I am the best.' They
then approached their father, Lord Brahmä, and asked him, `O lord, who among
us is the best?' Brahmä replied, `He whose departure causes the greatest calamity
for the body is the best.
"Then the voice departed from the body and stayed away for an entire year.
When he returned, he asked: `How is it that you were able to live without me?'
Although it could not speak, still the body could breathe with the präëa, see with
the eyes, hear with the ears, and think with the mind. Then the voice again entered
the body.
"Then the eyes departed from the body and stayed away for an entire year.
When they returned, they asked: `How is it that you were able to live without me?'
Although it could not •see, the body could breathe with the präëa, speak with the
voice, hear with the ears, and think with the mind. Then the voice again entered
the body.
"Then the ears departed from the body and stayed away for an entire year.
When they returned, they asked: `How is it that you were able to live without us?'
Although it could not hear, still the body could breathe with the präëa, see with
the eyes, speak with the voice, and think with the mind. Then the ears again
entered the body.
"Then the mind departed from the body and stayed away for an entire year.
When he returned, he asked: `How is it that you were able to live without me?'
Although it could not think, still the body could breathe with the präëa, see with
the eyes, speak with the voice, and hear with the ears. Then the mind again
entered the body.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "When the präëa was about to depart it began to uproot all the senses. It
became like a spirited horse uprooting the posts to which it is tethered. Then the
other senses appealed to the präëa, "Please do not go. Please stay with us. You are
the best of all of us."

In this way it is seen that the principal präëa has an important function to
perform in relation to the spirit soul. The soul is the enjoyer and the performer of
actions. The soul is like a king, the senses his royal attendants, and the principal
präëa his prime minister, who helps attain the king's objectives. In this way the
präëa is the most important of the soul's instruments. However, the präëa is still
not independent of the soul itself.

Adhikaraëa 8
The Principal Präëa Has Five Functions

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (1.5.3) it is said:

sa eña väyuù païca-vidhaù präëo 'päno vyäna udänaù samänaù

"The präëa is air. There are five präëas: präëa, apäna, vyäna, udäna, and
samäna."

Saàçaya (doubt): Are these five, beginning with apäna, different from präëa, or
are they merely different functions of präëa?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because they have different names and
functions, therefore they are different.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives his
conclusion.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 12

païca-våttir mano-vad vyapadiçyate

païca—five; våttiù—functions; manaù—the mind; vat—like; vyapadiçyate—is

said.

Like the mind, it is said to have five functions.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The präëa is one, although it assumes five different functions when present in
the different places, such as the heart, of the body. In this way the präëa is
described. In this way these are different functions of präëa and not different
präëas themselves. Because these functions are different, therefore different
names are employed. Still, there is no difference in their natures. In the Båhad-
äraëyaka Upaniñad (1.5.3) it is said:

präëo 'päno vyäna udänaù samäna iti. etat sarvaà präëa eva.

"There are five präëas: präëa, apäna, vyäna, udäna, and samäna. These five are
all one präëa."

In this way präëa is like the mind. In the Båhad-äraëyaka •Upaniñad (1.5.3) it is
said:

kämaù saìkalpo vikalpo vicikitsä çraddhä dhåtir adhåtir hrér dhér bhér ity etat
sarvaà mana eva.

"The mind's functions are: desire, determination, doubt, error, faith,

steadfastness, unsteadiness, shame, intelligence, and fear. All these are mind."

All these have different functions and different names, but they are not
different from mind itself. They are the various functions of the mind. In the yoga-
çästra, also, it is said that the mind has five functions. This is the meaning of the
scriptures, either hinted at or explicitly shown in the texts.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 9
The Principal Präëa Is Atomic

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Saàçaya (doubt) Is the principal Präëa atomic or all-pervading?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (1.3.22) it

is said:

sama ebhis tribhir lokaiù

"Präëa is equal to the three worlds."

This and other passages of Çruti-çästra declare that präëa is all-pervading.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives his
conclusion.

Sütra 13

aëuç ca

aëuù—atomic; ca—also.

It is also atomic.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The principal präëa is also atomic in size. This is so because the Çruti-çästras

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

declare that the principal präëa leaves (the material body at the time of death).
Scriptural passages describing the principal präëas as atomic should be understood
to mean that living entities everywhere are dependent on the principal präëa.

Adhikaraëa 10
The Supreme Personality of Godhead is the Moving Force Behind the Präëa

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad it is said:

supteñu väg-ädiñu präëa eko jägarti.

"When speech and the other senses sleep, präëa alone remains awake. Präëa
alone is untouched by death. Präëa controls speech and the other senses. As a
mother protects her children, so one präëa protects the other präëas."

In this way the function of the principal präëa is described.

The functions of the secondary präëas are described in the following passage:

sapteme lokä yeñu saïcaranti

"The päëas move in seven realms."

Thus the secondary präëas move among the senses.

Saàçaya (doubt): Do the secondary präëas move by their own power among
the senses, or does something else create the movement of the präëas? Are the
präëas moved by the demigods, the individual spirit soul, or the Supreme
Personality of Godhead?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Endowed with the power of action, the
präëas move themselves. Or perhaps the demigods move them. In the Aitareya

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Upaniñad (2.4) it is said:

agnir väg bhütvä mukhaà präviñad

"Becoming speech, Agnideva entered the mouth."

Or perhaps the individual spirit soul moves the präëas. This may be so because
the präëas are instruments the soul uses to attain enjoyment.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 14

jyotir-ädy-adhiñöhänaà tu tad ämananät

jyotiù—effulgence; ädy-adhiñöhänam—the supreme ruler; tu—indeed; tat—that;

ämananät—because of the description.

Indeed, light is the controller, because that is the description.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (indeed" is used here to dispel doubt. The word "jyotiù" (light)
here means "the Supreme Personality of Godhead". He is the mover
(adhiñöhänam) of the präëas. The affix lyuö in the word “adhiñöhänam" makes it
mean "the mover". Why is the Supreme Personality of Godhead the mover of the
präëas? The sütra explains: "Because that is the description". This means
"Because it is understood that the Supreme Personality of Godhead, as the all-
pervading Supersoul, moves the präëas and senses. In the Båhad-äraëyaka
Upaniñad (3.7.16) it is said:

yaù präëeñu tiñöhan

"The Supersoul stays in the midst of the präëas and moves them."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 That the demigods and the individual spirit soul may also move the präëas is
not disputed here, but the präëas cannot move themselves, for they are only inert
matter.

Hoping to enjoy, the individual spirit soul also moves the präëas. That is
described in the next sütra.

Sütra 15

präëavatä çabdät

präëavatä—by the person who possesses the präëas; çabdät—because of the

Çruti-çästra.

By the person who possesses the präëas, because of the Çruti-çästra.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "präëavatä" (the person who possesses the präëas) refers here to the
individual spirit soul. Hoping to enjoy, the spirit soul moves the präëas and senses.
Why is that? The sütra explains: "çabdät" (because of the Çruti-çästra). In the
Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (2.1.18) it is said:

sa yathä mahä-räjo jänapadän gåhétvä sve janapade yathä-kämaà parivartate evam

evaiña etat präëän gåhétvä sve çarére yathä-kämaà parivartate.

"As a great king rules the subjects in his kingdom, •so the individual spirit soul
rules the präëas in his body."

This is the gist of the matter: The Supreme Personality of Godhead is the
supreme ruler of the präëas and the demigods and the individual spirit soul also
rule the senses. The former (the demigods) rule the präëas and senses by enabling
them to act, and the latter (the individual spirit souls) rule the präëas and senses
with the hope of attaining enjoyment. By exerting their wills, the individual souls
thus move the präëas.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 There is no alternative to this description. This the author of the sütras explains
in the following words.

Sütra 16

tasya ca nityatvät

tasya—of this; ca—and; nityatvät—because of eternality.

Because this is eternal.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Because He has an eternal relationship with them, the all-powerful Supersoul is

the actual controller and mover of them. He should be considered the primary
mover and controller. This is confirmed in the words of the Antaryämi-brähmaëa
(Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 3.7).

Adhikaraëa 11
The Principal Präëa Is Not a Sense

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In this subject another doubt is raised.

Saàçaya (doubt): Are the principal präëa and the other präëas also senses?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because they assist the individual spirit
soul, all the präëas are considered to be senses.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 17

ta indriyäëi tad vyapadeçäd anyatra çreñöhät

te—they; indriyäëi—senses; tat—that; vyapadeçät—because of the description;

anyatra—otherwise; çreñöhät—from the best.

They are senses, for that is the description. Only the principal one is not.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

With the sole exception of the principal präëa, the präëas are all senses. Why is
that? The sütra explains: "For that is the description." In the Muëòaka Upaniñad
(2.1.3) it is said:

etasmäj jäyate präëaù

manaù sarvendriyäëi ca

"From the Supreme Personality of Godhead are born the principal präëa, the
mind, and the senses."

In this way, with the sole exception of the principal präëa, the präëas are the
senses, such as the ears and the others. In the Småti-çästra it is said:

indriyäëi daçaikaà ca

"There are eleven senses."

In another place in the Çruti-çästra it is said:

präëo mukhya sa tv anindiriyam

"The principal präëa is not a sense."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Here someone may object: Is it not so that in the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad
(1.5.21) it is said:

hantasyaiva sarve rüpam asämetyetasyaiva sarve rüpam abhavat.

"The senses then assumed the form of the principal präëa. They all assumed his
form."

Because the secondary präëas are senses and because the secondary präëas are
merely functions of the principal präëa, therefore the principal präëa is also a
sense. How can you claim, then, that the principal präëa is not a sense?

To the this objection the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 18

bheda-çruteù

bheda—difference; çruteù—from Çruti-çästra.

Because the Çruti-çästra says it is different.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Muëòaka Upaniñad (2.1.3) it is said:

präëo manaù sarvendriyäëi

"From the Supreme Personality of Godhead are born the principal präëa, the
mind, and all the senses."

In this way, because it is mentioned apart from the senses in this passage, the
principal präëa is clearly different from the senses. That is the meaning here.
Here someone may doubt: The mind is also mentioned apart from the senses in
this passage. It must be that the mind is not a sense.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 This doubt is answered by the following words of Bhagavad-gétä (15.7):

manaù ñañöhéndiyäni

"The mind is one of the six senses."

Lord Kåñëa also declares (Bhagavad-gétä 10.22):

indriyäëäà manaç cäsmi

"Of the senses I am the mind."

Sütra 19

vailakñaëyäc ca

vailakñaëyät—because of different qualities; ca—also.

Also because of different qualities.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

During sleep the principal präëa is active, but the ears and other senses are not.
The principal präëa supports the body and senses, but the senses are only
instruments for perception and work. In these ways the principal präëa and the
senses have different qualities. Thus it is said that as the individual spirit souls are
dependent on the Supreme Personality of Godhead, so the senses are dependent
on the principal präëa.

Adhikaraëa 12
The Forms of the Material World Are Created by the Supreme Personality of
Godhead

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The scriptures declare that the material elements, the senses, everything else in
the material world, and the individual spirit souls also, are all manifested from the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. Now we will consider the question: Who created
the individual forms (vyañöi) of this world?
After describing the creation of fire, water, and earth, the Chändogya Upaniñad
(6.3.2-4) explains:

seyam devataikñata hantäham imäs tisro devatä anena jévenätmanänupraviçya

näma-rüpe vyäkaraväëi täsäà tri-våtam ekaikaà karaväëéti. seyaà devatemäs
tisro devatä anena jévenätmanänupraviçya näma-rüpe vyäkarot täsäà tri-våtaà tri-
våtam ekaikäm akarot.

"After creating the splendid elements of fire, water, and earth, the Supreme
Personality of Godhead thought, `Now I shall enter these three splendid elements
with the individual souls and thus I shall create names and forms. One by one, I
shall make them three.' Then the Supreme Personality of Godhead entered those
three splendid elements with the individual souls, created names and forms, and,
one by one, made the splendid elements into three."

Saàçaya (doubt): Is this creation of names and forms the work of the Supreme
Personality of Godhead or an individual spirit soul?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): It is the work of an individual spirit soul. In

the Chändogya Upaniñad the Lord says, "With an individual soul I shall create."
The instrumental case here is not used in the sense of “with". When the meaning
of an agent is possible in this case it is not reasonable to accept a meaning that
carries the sense of a preposition. Neither is the meaning of "an instrument"
possible here, for the Supreme Personality of Godhead can do anything simply by
His will and therefore He has no need is employ an individual spirit soul to do
anything. Neither can it be said that in this situation the entrance into the creation
is done by an individual spirit soul and the creation of names and forms is done by
the Supreme Personality of Godhead, for the use of the indeclineable past
participle here indicates that the entrance and the act of creation were both
performed by the same agent. Neither is the use of the first-person in the verb
“vyäkaraväëi" (I shall create) inappropriate here, for it is like saying, "With a spy I
will enter the enemy army and •see it." Neither is all this merely my own idea, for
the Çruti-çästra declares:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

viriïco vä idaà virecayati vidadhäti brahmä väva viriïca etasmäd dhéme rüpa-
nämané

"the demigod Brahmä is called viriïca because he organizes (virec) the material
universe. From him have come the names and forms of the material universe."

The Småti-çästra also declares:

näma-rüpe ca bhütänäm

"The demigod Brahmä created the names and forms of the creatures in the
universe."

Therefore the creation of names and forms was done by an individual spirit
soul.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 20

saàjïä-mürti-klptiç ca tri-våt kurvata upadeçät

saàjnä—names; mürti—forms; klptiù—creation; ca—and; tu—but; tri-våt—in

three parts; kurvate—does; upadeçät—from the teaching.

But the creation of names and forms in groups of three is done by the creator,
for that is the teaching.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is used here is begin the refutation of the opponent's
argument. Here the word “saàjïä-mürti" means "names and forms" and the word
"klptiù" means "creation". The words "tri-våt kurvataù" (done by the creator)
indicate that this creation was done by the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Himself and not by an individual spirit soul. Why is that? The sütra explains:
“upadeçät" (because that is the teaching). Thus the scriptures affirm that this
creation was done by the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Thus the creation of
threes and the creation of names and forms were both done by the same creator.
That is the meaning.
The creation of threes was effected in the following way:

tréëy ekaikaà dvidhä kuryät

try-ardhäni vibhajed dvidhä
tat-tan-mukhyärdham utsåjya
yojayec ca tri-rüpatä

"The creator divides in half each of the three elements. Three of these halves
He then divides in half again. Then He joins the smaller halves to the larger halves.
In this way the compound elements, made of three parts, are created."

This is like the process called païcé-karaëa. It cannot be said that this creation
of threefold compound elements is within the power of the demigod Brahmä. That
is so because Brahmä was born after the universal egg had been created from these
threefold compound elements made of fire, water, and earth. This is corroborated
by Manu-saàhitä (1.9):

tasminn aëòe 'bhavad brahmä

sarva-loka-pitämahaù

"Brahmä, the grandfather of all the worlds, was born in the egg of the universe.

Therefore the creation of names and forms and the creation of threefold
compound elements were both done by the same creator. It should not be thought,
because of the sequence apparently described in the text, that the creation of
names and forms preceded the creation of threefold compound elements. The
creation of threefold compound elements came first, and only after that creation
the creation of name and forms was effected. The universal egg cannot be created
by the elements of fire, water and earth before those elements are compounded in
the three ways. That this is not possible is described in the following words of
Çrémad-Bhägavatam (2.5.32-33):

yadaite 'saìgatä bhävä

bhütendriya-mano-guëäù
yadäyatana-nirmäëe
ne çekur brahma-vittama

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "O Närada, best of the transcendentalists, the forms of the body cannot take
place as long as these created parts, namely the elements, senses, mind, and modes
of nature, are not assembled.*

tadä saàhatya canyonyaà

bhagavac-chakti-coditäù
sad-sattvam upädäya
cobhayaà sasåjur hy adaù

"Thus when all these became assembled by the force of the energy of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, this universe certainly came into being by
accepting both the primary and secondary causes of creation."*

The process of païcé-karaëa is also described here. In this way the creation
should be understood. In the process of païcé-karaëa each of the five elements is
divided in half, half of the halves are again divided in half, and the smaller halves
are then joined with the larger in compound elements.
In Chändogya Upaniñad (6.5.1) it is said:

annam açitaà tridhä vidhéyate

"When food is eaten it is transformed in three ways."

This transformation is completely different from the threefold combination of

earth and the other elements previously described. Therefore this passage cannot
be used to support the theory that the individual spirit soul is the creator of the
names and forms of this world. The scriptural passage uses the phrase "ätmanä
jévena". By thus placing these two words in apposition, it is clear that the word
"jéva" (individual soul) here means "by the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
whose potency is the individual spirit souls". In a similar way the passage
beginning with the words “virïco vä" is also explained.
Understood in this way the indeclineable past participle "praviçya" and the
third-person verb following it can be understood in their primary meanings
without any difficulty. In this way it is easily seen that the two actions described by
the words "praviçya and "vyäkaraväëi" are certainly performed by the same agent.
Therefore it is certainly the Supreme Personality of Godhead who performed the
act of creation described in the verb "vyäkaraväëi". This is corroborated by the
following words of Taittiréya Araëyaka (3.12.16):

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

sarväëi rüpäëi vicitya dhéro
nämäni kåtväbhivadan yad äste

"The all-knowing Supreme Personality of Godhead created all forms and

names."

Adhikaraëa 13
The Vehicles of the Soul Are Made of Earth

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now the nature of the material body, which is called by the name "mürti" will
be examined. In the Båhad-ärayaìka (3.2.13) it is said that the material body is
made of earth:

çaréraà påthivém apy eti

"The material body becomes earth."

However, in the Kauëòinya-çruti it is said that the material body is made of

water:

adbhyo hédam utpadyate äpo väva mäàsam asthi ca bhavanty äpaù çaréram äpa
evedaà sarvam.

"From water the material body is created. Water becomes transformed into
flesh and bones. The entire body is water."

Another text of the Çruti-çästra claims that the material body is made of fire:

saù agner deva-yonyäù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "The demigods' bodies are made of fire."

Saàçaya (doubt): What is the truth here?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): One text says the material body is made of
earth, another says it is made of water, and another that it is made of fire. Because
the scriptures give these three differing explanations, the truth cannot be
ascertained.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras give His
conclusion.

Sütra 21

mäàsädi bhaumaà yathä-çabdam itarayoç ca

mäàsa—flesh; ädi—beginning with; bhaumam—earth; yathä—as; çabdam—the

Çruti-çästra; itarayoù—of the other two; ca—also.

As the Çruti-çästra says, the flesh and other ingredients are made of earth. It
also so for the other two.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Flesh and other ingredients are made of earth. However, blood is made of
water, and bones are made of fire. This is described in the Çruti-çästra (yathä-
çabdam). In the Garbha Upaniñad it is said:

yat kaöhiëaà sä påthivé yad dravaà tad äpo yad uñëaà tat tejaù

"What is hard in the body is made of earth, what is liquid is made of water, and
what is hot is made of fire."

In this way it is proved that all material bodies are made of these three
elements.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Here someone may object: If the material elements are all compounded of
three elements, none of the elements pure, but all of them mixtures of elements,
then why do the scriptures say, "This part of the body is made of fire, this part is
made of water, and this part is made of earth."?

To this objection the author of the sütras gives the following reply:

Sütra 22

vaiçeñät tu tad-vädas tad-vädaù

vaiçeñät—because of the specific nature; tu—but; tat—of that; vädaù—

statement; tat—of that; vädaù—statement.

Because of its specific nature, thus it is so said. Thus it is so said.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is used to dispel doubt. Everywhere in the material world
the elements are arranged in threefold compounds with one element
predominating. The elements are therefore named according to the predominating
element. The word "tad-vädaù" is repeated to indicate the end of the chapter.

Epilogue

vardhasva kalpäga samaà samantät

kuruñva täpa-kñatim äçritänäm
tvad-aìga-saìkérëi-karäù paräs tä
hiàsrä lasad-yukti-kuöhärikäbhiù

O tree that fulfills all desires, please extend yourself in all directions. To they
who take shelter of you please give the shade that stops all troubles. The glistening
axes of logic have now cut away the underbrush that choked you.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Chapter 3

Pada 1

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

na vinä sädhanair devo

jïäna-vairägya-bhaktibhiù
dadäti sva-padaà çrémän
atas täni budhaù çrayet

The glorious Supreme Personality of Godhead does not give residence in His
abode to they who do not follow the path of devotion, knowledge, and
renunciation. Therefore the wise should take shelter of that path.

In the previous two chapters was explained the truth that the entire Vedänta
philosophy describes the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is the only creator
of the material world, completely faultless, a jewel mine of transcendental virtues,
eternal, full of knowledge and bliss, the supreme person, and meditated on by they
who seek liberation. In those chapters all opposing views were refuted, and the
real nature of the Supreme was described.
In this third chapter will be described the spiritual practices that should be
followed in
order to attain the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The most important of these
are thirst to attain the Supreme Lord and a disinterest in what has no relation to
the Lord. That is explained in the first two padas.
In the first pada, in order to show that one should renounce the world, the
various defects of
material existence are explained. In this connection the description of the soul's
travels from one kind of material body to another kind of material body are
quoted from the Païcägni-vidyä chapter of the Chändogya Upaniñad. In the
second pada, in order to show that one should love the Supreme Lord, the Lord's
many glories and virtues will be described. In the Païcägni-vidyä portion of the
Chändogya Upaniñad (Adhyäya 5, khaëòas 3-10) are described the individual souls
departure for another world and return to this world.

Saàçaya (doubt): When the individual soul goes to the next world does he take
his subtle body with him or not?

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The soul does not take the subtle body with
him.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 1

tad-antara-pratipattau raàhati sampariñvaktaù praçna-nirüpaëäbhyäm

tat - of that; antara - of another; pratipattau - in the attainment; raàhati - goes;

sampariñvaktaù - embraced; praçna - from the questions; nirüpaëäbhyäm - and
answers.

In going to another it is embraced. This is so from the questions and answers.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here the word "tad" means "the body". That meaning is taken from the word
"mürti" in sütra 2.4.20. When it leaves one gross material body and enters another,
the soul takes the subtle body with it. How is that known? It is known from the
questions beginning in Chändogya Upaniñad 5.3.3 and answers beginning in 5.4.1.
Here is the gist of that passage.
A king named Pravähaëa, who was the ruler of Païcäla-deça, asked five
questions of a brähmaëa bow named Çvetaketu who had come to his court. These
questions concerned: 1. the destination of they who perform pious deeds, 2. the
way these persons return to the earth, 3. they who do not attain that world, 4. how
the path to the devas and the path to the pitäs are different paths, and 5. the
question expressed in these words (Chändogya Upaniñad 5.3.3):

vettha yathä païcamyäà ähutäv äpaù puruña-vacaso bhavanti

"Do you know why the fifth libation is called

puruña?

Unhappy because he did not know the answer to these questions, the boy
approached his father, Gautama Muni, and expressed his sorrow. The father also
did not know the answers
and, wishing to learn them, approached Pravähaëa. Pravähaëa wished to give
wealth to his guest, but Gautama begged from him the alms of the answers to the
five questions.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Answering the last question first, Pravähaëa described (Chändogya Upaniñad
(5.4.1) the five fires: 1. heaven, 2. rain, 3. earth, 4. man, and 5. woman. Then he
described the five libations for these fires: 1. çräddha, 2.soma, 3. rain, 4. food, and
5. seed. The priests offering all these libations are the devas. The homa (yajïa)
here is the devas' throwing of the spirit soul, which is enveloped in its subtle body,
up to the celestial worlds (dyuloka) so it may enjoy celestial pleasures.
The devas here are the senses of the soul who has passed through death. These
devas offer çräddha in the fire of the celestial world. That çräddha becomes a
celestial body named
somaräja, a body suitable for enjoying celestial pleasures.
When the time of enjoyment is over the devas offer a yajïa where this body is
placed in the fire of parjanya and transformed into rain. The devas then offer a
yajïa where that rain is placed in the fire of earth and transformed into grains. The
devas then offer a yajïa where those grains are placed in the fire of a man's food
and transformed into semen. The devas then offer a yajïa where that semen is
placed in the fire of a woman's womb and transformed into an unborn child. In
that way the question was answered with the words (Chändogya Upaniñad 5.9.1):

iti tu païcamyäm ähutäv äpaù puruña-vacaso bhavanti.

"Thus the fifth libation is called puruña."

In this sequence it is seen that in the fifth libation semen is offered in the fire of
a woman's womb and the result is a material body, which is thus called puruña.
That is the meaning. In this description it is thus seen that, accompanied by the
subtle material body, the soul leaves one gross material body, goes to the celestial
world, falls from there, and, still accompanied by the same subtle material body,
again enters a woman's womb.

Here someone may object: Is it not so that the word äpaù" (water) is used here
with the word "puruña". How, then, can it be that the soul is accompanied by all
the elements of the subtle material body.

In the following words the author of the sütras answers this objection.

Sütra 2

try-ätmakatvät tu bhüyastvät

tri-ätmakatvät - because of being threefold; tu - but; bhüyastvät - because of

being prominent.

But because of being threefold and because of being prominent.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is used here to dispel doubt. The other elements go
because the water here is threefold, a compound of three elements. Because the
semen, which is the seed of the material body, is primarily water, therefore it is
porper to call it water. In the Småti-çästra it is said:

täpäpanodo bhüyastvam ambhaso våttayas tv imäù

"Because it has the power to remove heat, water is said to predominate."

In this way the water is prominent.

Sütra 3

präëa-gateç ca

präëa - of the pranas; gateù - of the departure; ca - and.

Also because of the präëas' departure.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

When the soul enters another material body the präëas also come. This is
described in Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.2):

tam utkrämantaà präëo 'nütkrämati präëam anütkrämantaà sarve präëä

anütkrämanti.

"When the soul departs, the principal präëa follows. When the principal präëa
departs, the other präëas follow."

The präëas cannot exist without taking shelter of a maintainer. They take
shelter of the elements of the subtle material body. Therefore it must be accepted
that the subtle material body accompanies the soul. That is the meaning.

Sütra 4

agny-ädi-gati-çruter iti cen na bhäktatvät

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 agni - fire; ädi - beginning; gati - going; çruteù - fromthe Çruti-çästra; iti - thus;
cet - if; na - not;bhäktatvät - because oif being a metaphor.

If it is said that the Çruti-çästras describe the departure of fire and other
elements, then I reply: It is not so, because it is a metaphor only.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here someone may object: Is it not so that in the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad it is

said:

yasyäsya puruñasya måtasyägnià väg apy eti vätaà präëaç cakñur ädityaà manaç
candraà diçaù
çrotraà påthivéà çaréram äkäçam ätmauñadhér lomäni vanaspatéë keçä apsu
lohitaà ca retaç ca
nidhéyate.

"When a person dies his speaking power enters the fire, his breath enters the
wind, his eyes enter the sun, his mind enters the moon, his ears enter the
directions, his body enters the earth, his soul enters the ether, the hairs of his body
enter the plants and herbs, the hairs of his head enter the trees, and his blood and
semen enter the waters."

Therefore the speech and other faculties enter the fire and other objects. They
cannot possible accompany the departing soul. That is the verdict of the Çruti-
çästra.

If this is said, then I reply: No. It is not so. Why not? The sütra explains:
"bhäktatvät" (because it is a metaphor only). It is not directly seen that "the hairs
of the body enter the plants and herbs, and the hairs of the head enter the trees,"
as this passage declares. Therefore this passage's description of the entrance into
fire and other elements is a metaphor only. Because all these are placed together
in a single passage it is not possible to say one part is metaphor and another part is
not metaphor. It is not seen that the bodily hairs jump from the body and enter the
plants and herbs. Therefore at the time of death the voice and other faculties
temporarily cease being useful to the soul, but they do not leave. They accompany
the soul. That is the conclusion of the Çruti-çästra.

Sütra 5

prathame 'çravaëäd iti cen na tä eva hy upapatteù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 prathame - in the first; açravaëät - because of not being described in the Çruti-
çästra; iti - thus; cet - if;na - not; täù - they; eva - indeed; hy - indeed; upapatteù -
because of being appropriate.

If it is said that in the beginning there is no description, then I reply. It is indeed

that, because that is appropriate.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here someone may object: If the five libations were all water, then it would be
possible to say that in the fifth libation the soul departs accompanied by water.
However, this is not so. It is not said that in the first libation water is offered into
fire. There it is said that "çraddhä" is offered. It says:

tasminn agnau deväù çraddhäà juhvati

"The devas offer a yajïa, placing çraddhä in the fire."

The word "çraddhä" refers to a particular state of mind. It never means

"water". The word "soma" and other words may be interpreted to mean "water",
but is it not possible to interpret the word "çraddhä" to mean water". Therefore
the departing soul is not accompanied by water.

If this is said, then I reply: No. It is not so. The çraddhä offered into fire in the
beginning here is indeed water. Why is that? The sutra explains: "upapatteù"
(because it is appropriate). It is appropriate in the context of this question and
answer. The question here is: "Do you know why the water in the fifth libation is
called puruña?" From this is is seen that all the offerings into the fire here are
water. Then, in the beginning of the reply it is said: Çraddhä is offered into the
fire". If the word çraddhä" here does not mean "water", then the answer does not
properly reply to the question. That is the meaning. Water is offered in these five
libations. Because water
is clearly offered in the last four, it is appropriate that it also be offered in the first.
It is seen that the offerings of soma, rain, and the others, are clearly all caused by
çraddhä. Because the cause must be like the effect, therefore, the offering of
çraddhä must also be water. Therefore the word çraddhä" here means "water".
The Çruti-çästra (Taittiréya-saàhitä 1.6.8.1) explains:

çraddhä vä äpaù

"The word çraddhä means water."

Therefore the word "çraddhä" here does not refer to a condition of the mind.
The meaning of a condition of the mind is not appropriate in this context of

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

offering yajïas. In this way it is shown that the departing soul is certainly
accompanied by water.

Here someone may object: In this part of the Çruti-çästra it said that the water
departs, but it is not said that the soul departs. The soul is not mentioned in this
passage.

To remove this doubt the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 6

açrutatväd iti cen na iñöädi-käriëäà pratéteù

açrutatvät - because of not being described in the Çruti-çästra; iti - thus; cet - if;
na - not; iñöädikäriëäm - by they who perfom pious deeds; pratéteù - because of the
understanding.

If it is said that this is not proved in the Çruti-çästra, then I reply: No, because
this is understood to be about they who perform pious deeds.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "açrutatva" here means "unproved". The passage in the Chändogya
Upaniñad describes the travel to the moon of they who perform pious deeds. The
passage states (Chändogya Upaniñad 5.10.3-4):

atha ya ime gräme iñöäpürte dattam ity upäsate te dhümam abhisamviçanti. . .

äkäçäc candramasam eña somo räjä.

"They who perform pious deeds in their village enter the smoke, . . . and then
they go from the sky to the moon planet, where the become the king of soma."

In this way they who perform pious deeds go to the moon and become known
as Somaräja (the king of soma).

About the fire and Devaloka it is said (Chändogya Upaniñad 5.4.2):

deväù çraddhäà juhvati. tasyäù ähuteù somo räjä sambhavati.

"The devas offer çraddhä in sacrifice. From that offering he becomes a king of
soma."

In this way çraddhä-çaréra (a body made of çraddhä) and somaräja (the king of

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

soma) both refer to the same thing. They both mean "body" and in this context the
word body" means the individual spirit soul, because the soul takes shelter of a
body. In this way it is understood that the departing soul is accompanied by water.

Here someone may object: Is it not so that in the Chändogya Upaniñad (5.10.4)
it is said:

eña somo räjä devänäm annaà taà devä bhakñayanti

"That king of soma is the devas' food. The devas eat it."

Because the Çruti-çästra thus says that this king of soma is eaten by the devas it
is not possible that the phrase king of soma" here refers to the individual spirit
soul, for no one can eat the soul.

If this is said, then the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 7

bhäktaà vänätma-vittvät tathä hi darçayati

bhäktam - metaphor; vä - or; an - not; ätma - the soul; vit - knowing; tvät -
because of the condition; tathä - so;hi - indeed; darçayati - shows.

Or it is a metaphor, because of ignorance of the Supersoul. This the Çruti-çästra

shows.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "vä" (or) is used here to dispel doubt. The word "somaräja" here
refers ot the individual spirit soul. The description that it is the devas' food is only
a metaphor. The soul is said to be the devas' food because the soul serves the
devas and thus pleases them. That is the meaning. The do this because they are
ignorant of the Supersoul. The Çruti-çästra shows that they who are ignorant of the
Supersoul become servants of the devas. In Brhad-aranyaka Upanisad (1.4.10) it is
said:

atha yo 'nyäà devatäm upäste anyo 'säv anyo 'ham asméti na sa

veda yathä paçur eva sa devänäm.

"A person who thinks, `I am different from the demigods' worships the
demigods. He becomes like an animal in the demigods' service.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Here is the meaning of this. It is not possible that the devas eat the individual
souls. the meaning here is that the souls please the demigods and in this way
become like food for
them. They please the demigods by serving them. It is said:

viço 'nnaà räjïäà paçavo 'nnaà viçäm

"The vaiñyas are the kñatriyas' food, and the cows are the vaiñyas' food."

In this passage it is clear that the word "food" is not used literally. It is used to
mean "servant".If the word [food" were used in the literal sense, then the rules of
the jyotistoma and other yajnas would all be meaningless. If the devas ate
whomever went to Candraloka, why would the souls beso eager to perform yajnas
and go there? In this way it is proved that the deprting soul is accompanied by
water.

Adhikaraëa 2
The Soul's Return to the Earth

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya (Statement of the Subject): Following Chändogya Upaniñad 5.10.3,

which describes how the soul that has performed pious deeds travels by the smoke
and other pathways, attains
Svargaloka, stays there for some time, and then again returns to the earth, is this
passage (Chändogya Upaniñad 5.10.5):

yävat sampätum uñitväthaitam evädhvänaà punar nivartate.

"After staying there for some time his karma is

exhausted and he again returns."
Saàçaya (doubt): When it leaves Svargaloka, does the soul bring its past karma
or not?
Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The soul stays in Svargaloka for as long as
he has the results of past karma. This is described in Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad
(4.4.6):

präpyäntam karmaëas tasya

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "He stays there until he reaches the end of his karma."

This shows that the soul only falls when his past karma is completely exhausted.
The word "sampäta" (karma) is derived from the verb "sampat" (to ascend), as in
the words "sampatanty anena svargam" (the instrument by which the souls ascend
to Svargaloka). The word "anuçaya" (which also means karma) is derived from the
verb çiñ" (to remain) and means "that which remains after one has enjoyed". It
means "that which remains and pushes the soul to experience certain results." In
Svargaloka one uses up all his past karma, and therefore no further karma
remains.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives his
conclusion.

Sütra 8

kåtätyaye 'nuçayavän dåñöa-småtibhyäm

kåta - of what is done; atyaye - at the end; anuçaya - karma; vän - possessing;
dåñöa - from the Çruti-çästra; småtibhyäm - from the Småti-çästra.

At the end there is still karma, because of the statements of Çruti and Småti
çästras.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

When the good karma of pious deeds performed to enjoy in Candraloka is

exhausted, the enjoyment ends and the soul attains a new body to enter flames of
suffering. In this way, when his good karma is exhausted, he falls down. How is
that known? The sütra explains: "dåñöa-småtibhyäm" (by the statements of Çruti
and Småti çästras). The Çruti-çästra (Chändogya Upaniñad 5.10.7) explains:

tad ayaà ramaëéya-caraëäbhyäso ha yat te ramaëéyäà yonim äpadyeran

brähmaëa-yonià vä kñatriya-yonià vaiñya-yonià vä. atha ya iha kapüya-
caraëäbhyäso ha yat te kapüyäm yonim äpadyeran çva-yonià vä çükara-yonià vä
cäëòäla-yonià vä.

"When one acts piously, he attains a good birth. He is born as a brähmaëa or a

kñatriya or a vaiçya. When one acts sinfully, he attains a sinful birth. He is born as
a dog, a pig, or an outcaste."

Here the words "ramaniya-caraëa" means pious deeds". This refers to pious
karma remaining after one has enjoyed pious karmas. The word "abhyäsa" means

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

"repeated practice". This word is formed from the verb "as", the preposition
"abhi" and the affix kvip". The meaning of the word "ha" (indeed) is obvious.
The word "yat" means "when". In this passage there are when-then clauses.

In the Småti-çästra it is said:

iha punar-bhave te ubhaya-çeñäbhyäà niviçanti.

"Accompanied by the remnants of their good and bad karma, they again enter
the world of repeated birth."

In this way it is clear that the soul falling from Svargaloka still has past karma.
This does not contradict the description in Chändogya Upaniñad 5.10.5 because
that passage described only the exhaustion of the specific karmas that brought the
soul to Svargaloka and not the exhaustion of other karmas.

Now the author of the sütras describes the method of the soul's descent.

Sütra 9

yathetaà anevaà ca

yathä - as; itam - departed; an - not; evam - thus;ca - and.

Also, not as he went.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The soul, who still has karma, does not descend from Candraloka in the same
way he rose to Candraloka. The words yathä itam" mean "as he arrived". The
word "an-evam" means "in a different way". The soul descends by the path of
smoke and the path of ether. These paths were also traveled in the ascent.
However, in the descent there is no mention of the night or other paths used in the
ascent. Also, in the descent there is mention of the cloud and other paths not used
in the ascent. Therefore the descent is not like (anevam) the ascent.

Sütra 10

caraëäd iti cen na tad-upalakñaëärtheti kärñëäjiniù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 caraëät - by conduct; iti - thus; cet - if; na - not;tad-upalakñaëa-arthä - that
meaning; iti - thus; kärñëäjiniù - Kärñëäjini.

If it is said to be by conduct, then Kärñëäjini replies: No. Here it has the same
meaning.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here someone may object: It is not so that the soul fallen from Svargaloka
attains a new birth according to his past karma. The passage quoted here from the
Çruti-çästra uses the word
ramaëéya-caraëa" (good conduct). The word "caraëa" means "conduct". It has not
the same meaning as anuçaya" (karma). The difference of the two words is seen in
the following statement of Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad:

yathäcäré yathäkäré tathä bhavati

"As one performed caraëa, and as one performed karma, so one attains an
appropriate birth."
To this I reply: There is no fault here to interpret the word "caraëa" as a
synonym of karma. Kärñëäjini Muni affirms that in this passage of Chändogya
Upaniñad (5.10.7) the word "caraëa" means karma. This is also true because the
Çruti-çästras affirm that karma is the origin of conduct. That is the meaning.

Sütra 11

änarthakyam iti cen na tad-apekñatvät

änarthakyam - meaninglessness; iti - thus; cet - of;na - not; tad-apekñatvät -

because of being in relation to that.

If it is said that it has no meaning, then I reply: No. Because it is in relation to

that.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here someone may object: If karma is indeed the source of all that is good, then
good conduct is useless and the rules of good conduct are also useless.

If this is said, then the author of the sütras replies: No. It is not so. Why not?
The sütra explains: "Because good karma itself is created by good conduct." One
cannot attain good

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

karma without performing good conduct. The Småti-çästra explains:

sandhyä-héno 'çucir nityam anarhaù sarva-karmasu

"A person who is impure and does not chant the Gäyatré prayer is not qualified
to perform any pious karmas."

Therefore, Kärñëajini Muni explains, because good conduct is the cause of good
karma, the word "caraëa" in this passage means "karma".

Sütra 12

sukåta-duñkåte eveti tu bädariù

sukåta—pious deeds; duñkåte—impious deeds; eva—indeed; iti—thus; tu—but;

bädariù—Bädari.

But Bädari Muni indeed thinks it means pious and impious deeds.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is used here to begin a refutation of the previous argument.
Bädari Muni thinks the word "caraëa" here means "pious and impious deeds". An
example of this is the sentence:

puëyaà karmäcarati

"He performs pious deeds"

In this sentence the verb "carati" is used to mean "performs karmas". If a

word's primary meaning is possible, then it is not appropriate to accept the
secondary meaning. Therefore the word "caraëa" here means “karma", and any

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

other interpretation of it is meaningless. "Caraëa" (good conduct) is merely a
specific kind of karma. Caraëa and karma are thus different in the same way the
Kurus and Päëavas are different. The word "eva" (indeed) hints that this is also
the opinion of the author of the sütras. Therefore, since "caraëa" is a specific kind
of karma, it is proved that the soul departing from Svargaloka is accompanied by
the remainder of its karma.

Adhikaraëa 3
Do the Impious Also Go to Candraloka?

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Thus it has been said that a person who performs pious deeds goes to
Candraloka and then again returns with the remainder of his karma. Now will be
discussed whether sinners who perform no pious deeds also go and return in the
same way. In Iça Upaniñad (3) it is said:

äsüryä näma te lokä

andhena tamasävrtäù
täàs te pretyäbhigacchanti
ye ke cätma-hano janäù

"The killer of the soul, whoever he may be, must enter into the planets known
as the worlds of the faithless, full of darkness and ignorance."*

Saàçaya (doubt): Do the sinners go to Candraloka or Yamaloka?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The opponent gives his opinion in the
following sütra.

Sütra 13

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

aniñöädi-käriëäm api ca çrutam

an—not; iñöa—pious deeds; ädi—beginning with; käriëäm—of the performers;

api—also; ca—and; çrutam—in the Çruti-çästra.

The Çruti-çästra declares that it is also so for they who do not perform iñöa or
other pious deeds.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Çruti-çästra declares that they who perform iñöa and other pious deeds, as
well as they who do not perform iñöa and other pious deeds, both go to
Candraloka. This is explained in the Kauçétaki Upaniñad (1.2):

ye vai ke casmäl lokät prayänti candramasam eva te sarve gacchanti

"All who leave this world go to Candraloka."

Since with these words the Çruti-çästra declares that all, •without distinction, go
to Candraloka, then sinners are also included in that all. This being so, the words
of Iça Upaniñad are only an empty threat to frighten the sinners from acting badly.
In truth the pious and the sinner both attain the same result.

To this I reply: No. It is not so. The sinner does not enjoy happiness.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 14

samyamane tv anubhüyetareñäm ärohävarohau tad-gati-darçanät

samyamane—in Samyamani Puri; tv—but; anubhüya—experiencing; itareñäm—

of others; äroha—ascent; avarohau—descent; tat—of them; gati—travel;
darçanät—by the Çruti-çästra.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 But the others go to and return from Samyamana-pura. the Çruti-çästra
describes this as their travels.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is used here to begin the refutation of the Pürvapakña. The
word "itareñäm" (of the others) here means "of they who did not perform iñöa and
other pious deeds". The word "samyamane" means “in the city of Yamaräja".
That is where they go. There they are punished by Yamaräja and then sent back to
the earth. Their departure and return is like that. Why do you say that? The sütra
explains: "tad-gati-darçanät" (Because Çruti-çästra describes this as their travels).
In the Kaöha Upaniñad (1.2.6) Yamaräja explains:

na samparäyaù pratibhäti bälaà

pramädyantaà vitta-mohena müòham
ayam loko nästi para iti mäné
punaù punar vaçam äpadyate me

"The path to liberation does not appear before a childish fool intoxicated by the
illusory wealth of this world. He who thinks, `This is the only world. There is no
world beyond this,' falls into my control again and again."

In this way the Çruti-çästra explains that the sinners are punished by Yamaräja.
That is the meaning.

Sütra 15

smaranti ca

smaranti—the Småti-çästra; ca—also.

The Småti-çästras also affirm it.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Çrémad-Bhägavatam (3.30.23) explains:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

tatra tatra patan chränto
mürchitaù punar utthitaù
pathä päpéyasä nétas
tarasä yama-sädanam

"While passing on that road to the abode of Yamaräja, he falls down in fatigue,
and sometimes he becomes unconscious, but he is forced to rise again. In this way
he is very quickly brought to the presence of Yamaräja."*

In the Småti-çästra it is also said:

sarve caite vaçaà yänti yamasya bhagavan.

"O Lord, all sinners come under Yamarja's dominion."

In this way the sages and Småti-çästras affirm that the sinners come under
Yamaräja's control.

Sütra 16

api sapta

api—also; sapta—seven.

There are seven and others also.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Mahäbhärata it is said:

rauravo 'tha mahäàç caiva

vahnir vaitaraëé tathä

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

kumbhépäka iti proktäny
anitya-narakäëi tu

tamisras cäëòa-tämisro
dvau nityau samprakértitau
iti sapta pradhänäni
baléyas tüttarottaram

"The temporary hells named 1. Raurava, 2. Mahän, 3. Vahni, 4. Vaitaraëé, and

5. Kumbhépäka, as well as the permanent hells named 6. Tamisra, and 7. Andha-
tamisra, are said to be the •seven most important hells, each one more horrible
than the last."

Thus the Småti-çästra explains that sinners are punished for their sins in these
hells. These hells are the places where sinners go. The word "api" (also) is used to
indicate that in the Fifth Canto of Çrémad-Bhägavatam other hells are also
described.

Here someone may object: Does this (the description of Yamaräja's punishment
of sinners) not contradict the scriptures' declaration that the Supreme Personality
of Godhead is the supreme controller of everything?

The author of the sütras now answers this objection:

Sütra 17

taträpi ca tad-vyäpäräd avirodhaù

tatra—there; api—even; ca—also; tat—of Him; vyäpärät—because of the

activities; a—without; virodhaù—contradiction.

There is no contradiction, for He also acts there.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "ca" (and) is here used for emphasis. Yamaräja and others punish
sinners by the command of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This does not
contradict the scriptures' description of the Lord's supremacy. That is the meaning.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

The Puräëas affirm that, on the Supreme Lord's order, Yamaräja and others
punish sinners.

Here someone may object: It must be that, after receiving punishment from
Yamaräja, sinners also ascend to Candraloka. This must be so, for the Kauçétaki
Upaniñad affirms that all who leave this world travel to Candraloka.

To refute this misconception the author of the sütras speaks the following
words.

Sütra 18

vidyä-karmaëos tv iti prakåtatvät

vidyä—of knowledge; karmaëoù—of action; tu—but; iti—thus; prakåtatvät—

because of being the topics.

But because pious deeds and knowledge are the topics.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is used to begin the answer to the •previous objection. The
word "na" (It is not so) is to be understood in this sütra. Sinners do not go to
Candraloka. Why not? The sütra explains that only they who perform pious deeds
or are situated in true knowledge (vidyä-karmaëoù) travel to the worlds of the
devas and pitäs. That is the description of the scriptures (prakåtatvät). In the
Chändogya Upaniñad (5.10.1) it is said that they who are situated in knowledge
travel on the path to the devas. In Chändogya Upaniñad (5.10.3) it is said that they
who perform pious deeds travel on the path to the pitäs. Thus when it is said that
all (sarve) go to Candraloka, the meaning is that all who have qualified themselves
in these ways go to Candraloka.

Here someone may object: Is it not so that without first going to Candraloka it
is not possible for sinners to attain a new material body? This is the reason:
Because (without first going to Candraloka) it is not possible to offer the fifth
libation (by which one attains a new body). Therefore, in order to attain a new
material body, all must first go to Candraloka.

If this objection is raised, then the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 19

na tåtéye tathopalabdheù

na—not; tåtéye—in the third; tathä—so; upalabdheù—because of the

perception.

Not so in the third, for it is so perceived.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the third place there is no need to offer the fifth libation to attain a new
material body. Why not? The sütra explains: "tathopalabdheù" (because it is so
perceived). This means: "Because the Çruti-çästra affirms that it is so." In the
Chändogya Upaniñad the following question is posed:

yathäsau loko na sampüryate

"Do you know why the world never becomes filled?"

The answer is given (Chändogya Upaniñad 5.10.8):

athaitayoù pathor na katareëa ca tänémäni kñudräëy asakåd avåtténi bhütäni jévanti

jäyasva mriyasvety etat tåtéyaà sthänam. tenäsau loko na sampüryate.

"There are these two paths and there is also another path, where many tiny
creatures live, and where they are ordered: `Now you must be born.' and `Now you
must die.' It is because of this third place that the world never becomes filled."

Aside from the worlds of the devas and the worlds of the •pitäs, there is
another, a third world, the home of tiny creatures like mosquitoes, insects, and
worms, creatures who do not go to the higher worlds, but are simply again and
again ordered: "Now you must be born." and "Now you must die." In this way
they are born again and again and they die again and again. That is the meaning.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Their abode is this third world. It is said that sinners take birth in the bodies of
these insects and other lower creatures. Their place is the third world because it is
different from the first and second worlds: Brahmaloka and Dyuloka.
Because they have not attained true knowledge and thus become able to travel
to the world of the devas, and because they have not performed pious deeds and
thus become able to travel to the world of the pitäs, they become tiny creatures
like mosquitoes and insects and they stay in a third world. That is why the other
worlds do not become filled to overflowing. These creatures neither rise to nor
descend from the celestial worlds of Dyuloka, and for that reason Dyuloka does
not become overfilled. They stay in a third world, where they do not offer the fifth
oblation in order to attain a new body.

Sütra 20

smaryate 'pi ca loke

smaryate—affirmed in the Çmåti-çästra; api—and; ca—also; loke—in the world.

The Småti-çästras affirm that it is also in this world.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In this world also some pious persons, Droëa and Dhåñöadyumna are two
examples, also attain new bodies without offering a fifth oblation. This is described
in the Småti-çästras. The words "api ca" (and also) hint that there are other
examples also.

Sütra 21

darçanäc ca

darçanät—from seeing; ca—also.

From seeing also.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Chändogya Upaniñad (6.3.1) it is said:

teñäà khalv eñäà bhütänäà tréëy eva béjäni bhavanti. aëòa-jaà jéva-jam udbhij-
jam.

"Living beings are born in one of three ways. Some are born from an egg, some
are born live, and some are plants •sprouting from a seed."

The Çruti-çästra affirms that plants sprouting from a seed and tiny creatures
born from perspiration take birth without the fifth oblation. They neither ascend
to nor descend from Candraloka. They are born from water without the fifth
oblation. This view is not contradicted by the scriptures.

Here someone may object: The passage you quoted from Chändogya Upaniñad
mentioned three kinds of birth but did not mention birth from perspiration.

The author of the sütras now gives his answer to this objection.

Sütra 22

tåtéya-çabdävarodhaù saàçoka-jasya

tåtéya—çabda—word; avarodhaù—description; saàçoka—from grief; jasya—

born.

The grief-born is included in the third word.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The perspiration born creatures, here called grief-born, are included in the
description of plants born from seeds. Because they are both born by bursting
forth, one bursting from earth and the other bursting from water, they are
considered in the same class. They differ in that one one (the perspiration-born
creatures) has the power to move about and the other (the plants) does not. In this

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

way it is proved that they who do not perform pious deeds do not go to
Candraloka.

Adhikaraëa 4
The Soul Does Not Become Ether

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

It has already been shown that the soul who performs pious deeds goes,
accompanied by his subtle material body, to Candraloka, and (after some time
again) descends, accompanied by the remnant of his karma, (to the earth). The
way this happens is described in Chändogya Upaniñad (5.10.5):

athaitam evädhvänam punar nivartante yathetam äkäçasm äkäçäd väyuù bhavati

väyur bhütvä dhümo bhavati dhümo bhütvä abhraà bhavaty abhraà bhütvä
megho bhavati megho bhütvä pravarñati

"He returns by this path. First he becomes ether. From ether he becomes air.
Having become air he becomes smoke. Having become smoke he becomes mist.
Having become mist he becomes a cloud. Having become a cloud, he becomes
rain."

Saàçaya (doubt): Is the descent literally like this, or is it not like this?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): This account of the descending soul

becoming ether and other things is to be accepted literally. During its descent does
the soul become completely identical with these various things, or does it become
only similar to them? If the soul becomes only similar, then a secondary
interpretation of the passage must be accepted. For this reason it should be
understood that the soul becomes completely identical with these different things.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 23

tat-sväbhävyäpattir upapatteù

tat—of them; sväbhävya—similarity; äpattiù—attainment; upapatteù—because

of being reasonable.

It is similar to them, for that is reasonable.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

This passage should be interpreted to mean that the soul becomes similar to
these things. Why is that? The sütra explains: "upapatteù" (for that is reasonable).
On Candraloka the soul attains a a body suitable for enjoyment. However, when
the •time for enjoyment comes to an end, that body perishes in the fire of grief,
just as mist perishes in the sunlight. Thus deprived of its external body, the soul
becomes like ether. Then the soul comes under the control of air. Then the soul
comes into contact with smoke and the other things. That is a reasonable
explanation of these events. This is so because it is not possible for one thing to
become another, and also because if it did indeed become ether or these other
things, it would not be possible for the soul to continue its descent.

Adhikaraëa 5
The Passage From Ether to Rain Is Quick

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Saàçaya (doubt): Is the soul's descent from ether to rain accomplished quickly
or slowly?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): No outside force pushes it, so the soul must
proceed very slowly.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

His conclusion.

Sütra 24

näti-cireëa viçeñät

na—not; ati—very; cireëa—for long; viçeñät—because of something specific.

Not for very long, because of something specific.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The soul's descent from ether and the other things does not take a long time.
Why is that? The sütra explains: “viçeñät" (because of something specific). The
specific thing here is a specific statement that the passage through rice and other
grains is very difficult. Because this part of the passage is singled out as especially
difficult it may be inferred that the other parts of the passage are quickly
accomplished.

Adhikaraëa 6
The Descending Soul Does Not Take Birth Among the Plants

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya (statement): The passage after entering rain is described in the following
statement of Çruti-çästra:

ta iha vréhi-yavä auñadhi-vanaspatayas tila-mäñä jäyante

"The descending souls then take birth as rice, barley, plants, trees, sesame, and

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

beans."

Saàçaya (doubt): Do the souls literally take birth as rice or these other species,
or is this description metaphorical?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The text says “jäyante" (they take birth).
This is should be taken literally.

Siddhänta: In the following words the author of the sütras gives His conclusion.

Sütra 25

anyädhiñöhite pürvavad abhiläpät

anya—by an other; adhiñöhite—occupied; pürva—before; vat—like; abhiläpät—

because of the statement.

In what is occupied by another because of a statement like the previous.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Because the bodies of the plants and other beings are already inhabited by
other spirit souls, the description here is metaphorical. The descending souls are
not born in those species to experience their karma. Why not? The sütra explains:
“pürvavad abhiläpät" (because of a statement like the previous). As it was
previously said that the descending soul does not become ether, or the other things
in its descent, but merely comes into contact with them, so the fallen soul merely
comes into contact with the rice and other species. That is the meaning. As when it
enters the ether the descending soul is not yet experiencing the specific results of
various pious and impious deeds, so when it falls down in the rain the soul is also
not yet experiencing the results of specific deeds. This the scriptures say. In
Chändogya Upaniñad (5.10.7) it is said: “They who act piously attain an auspicious
birth. They who do not act piously attain a birth that is not auspicious." Therefore
•the description here that the descending souls take birth in this way is
metaphorical. It is not literal.

Sütra 26

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

açuddham iti cen na çabdät

açuddham—impure; iti—thus; cet—if; na—not; çabdät—because of Çruti-çästra.

If it is said to be impure, then I reply: No, for that is the statement of the Çruti-
çästra.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here someone may object: It is not at all logical to say that the scriptures'
statement that the descending soul, accompanied by the remnant of his karma,
takes birth in the body of a rice plant or similar species, is only a metaphor, and the
soul does not really take birth in those species for the soul has no remaining karma
to push it into that birth. The so-called pious deeds performed to attain residence
in Svargaloka are actually impure. This is because the Agnisoméya-yajïa and other
yajïas like them involve violence to animals. The scriptures give the following
prohibition:

mä hiàsyät sarva-bhütäni

"Never commit violence to anyone."*

Therefore, by performing these yajïas there is a pious portion, which sends the
performer to Svargaloka, and also an impious portion, which forces him to take
birth as a rice plant or similar species. In the Manu-saàhitä (12.9) it is said:

çaréra-jair karma-doñair
yäti sthävaratäà naraù

"A person who sins with his body becomes an unmoving plant."

Therefore the statement that the descending soul takes birth as a rice plant or
similar being should be taken literally.

If this is said, then the sütra replies: "na" (No. It is not so). Why not? The sütra
explains: "çabdät" (Because that is the statement of the Çruti-çästra). The Vedas

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

order:

agnisoméyaà paçum älabheta

"One should sacrifice an animal in an agnisoméya-yajïa."

Because piety and impiety is known only from the Vedas' statements, the
Vedas' order to commit violence must be •understood to be actually kind and
pious. Therefore the orders of the Vedas are never impure. The prohibitions:
"Never commit violence to anyone" and "Violence is a sin" are the general rules
decreed by the Vedas, and the statement: "One should sacrifice an animal in an
agnisoméya-yajïa" is an exception to that general rule. A general rule and a
specific exception to that rule need not contradict each other. There is scope for
each. For these reasons, therefore, the scriptures' description that the fallen soul
takes birth as a rice plant or similar being is metaphorical and not literal.
What follows in this sequence is described in the next sütra.

Sütra 27

retaù-sig-yogo 'tha

retaù—semen; sik-sprinkling; yogaù—contact; atha—then.

Then there is contact with the male that sprinkles the semen.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

After entering the rice-plant or other plant, the fallen soul, accompanied by the
remainder of his karma, enters the semen of a male. In the Chändogya Upaniñad
(5.10.6) it is said:

yo yo 'nnam atti yo retaù siïcati tad bhüya eva bhavati

"A male eats that grain and then sprinkles semen. From that semen the fallen
soul takes birth. He becomes just like his father."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The statement that the soul becomes just like the father should not be taken
literally, for one thing cannot have exactly the same form as another. In truth, if
the offspring were completely identical with the father, and there were no
difference at all between them, then the soul would not actually attain a new
material body. Therefore this statement should be taken metaphorically. As the
soul merely comes into contact with the rice plant or other vegetation, so the soul
comes into contact with the father. The soul does not become identical with the
father in all respects.

Sütra 28

yoëeù çaréram

yoëeù—from the womb; çaréram—a body.

The body comes from the womb.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "yoëeù" here is in the ablative case. The soul departs from its father's
body and enters its mother's womb. In this way, so it may experience the fruits of
its karma, the soul attains a new material body. In the Chändogya Upaniñad
(5.10.7) it is said:

tad ya iha ramaëéya-caraëäù

"They who perform pious deeds attain an auspicious birth. They who sin attain
an inauspicious birth."

In this way the soul's entrance into the series of things beginning with ether and
the series of things beginning with a rice-plant or other vegetation is described.
The conclusion is that a person who is actually intelligent will renounce this
material world, a world filled with sorrows, and place all his thoughts on Lord
Hari, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is filled with transcendental bliss.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Pada 2

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

vittir viraktiç ca kåtäëjaliù puro

yasyäù paränanda-tanor vitiñïhate
siddhiç ca sevä-samayaà pratékñate
bhaktiù pareçasya punätu sä jagat

May devotion to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, devotion that is filled

with transcendental bliss, devotion before whom knowledge and renunciation
stand, their hands folded with respect, devotion that mystic power yearns to serve,
purify the entire world.

Devotional service, by performing which one falls in love with the Supreme
Personality of Godhead and attains His association, will be described in this pada.
In order to strengthen the soul's love and devotion for the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, the Lord's glorious creation of dreams and other states of being, the
Lord's identity with His many incarnations, His appearance as the all-pervading
Supersoul, His non-identity with His worshipers, who are still one with Him in
quality, His being attained only by devotional service, His appearence in both
spiritual and material worlds, His transcendental blissfulness, His coming before
His devotees according to the devotees' love for Him, His supremacy over all, His
supreme generosity, and a great host of the Lord's other virtues and glories will
also be described here. When a person desires to love, the beloved's glories must
be understood. Otherwise there can be no love. In the beginning of this pada
will be described the Lord's creation of the world in a dream. the idea that
someone other than the Supreme Lord had created the material world contradicts
the scriptures' statement that the Lord is the creator of everything. If the Lord is
the creator of only some parts of the world, then it is not possible for the devotee
to have full love for Him. For this reason now will be shown the glory of the Lord
as the creator of all.

Adhikaraëa 1
The Supreme Personality of Godhead Creates Dreams

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.3.10) it is said:

na tatra rathä na ratha-yogä na panthäno bhavanty atha rathän ratha-yogän pathaù

såjate. na tatränandä mudaù pramudo bhavanty athänandän mudaù pramudaù
såjate. na tatra veçantäù puñkariëyaù sravantyaù såjate sa hi kartä.

"In that place there are neither chariots nor animals yoked to chariots. He
creates the chariots and animals yoked to chariots. In that place there are neither
happiness, nor pleasures, nor bliss. He creates the pleasures there. In that place
there are neither streams nor ponds nor lotus flowers. He creates them. He is the
creator."

Saàçaya (doubt): Is the individual spirit soul or the Supersoul the creator of this
dream world with chariots asnd other things?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The individual spirit soul is the creator. In
Chändogya Upaniñad (8.7.1) Prajäpati declares that by willing the individual soul
has the power to create.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 1

sandhye såñïir äha hi

sandhye - in the junction; såñïir - creation; äha - says; hi - indeed.

Indeed, it says that in the junction there is creation.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The word "sandhya" (junction) here means dream". In the Çruti-çästra it is
said:

sandhyaà tåtéyaà svapna-sthänam

"The third state is sandhya, or dreaming."

Dreaming is called sandhya (junction) because it stands in the junction between

wakefulness and dreamless sleep. The Supersoul creates the chariots and other
things present in dreams. Why isthat? The Çruti-çästra explains:

sa hi kartä

"He is the creator."

Thus the Çruti-çästra affirms that the chariots and other things present in
dreams are created by Him. The meaning is this. To give the results of of very, very
insignificant karmas, the Lord creates the chariots and other things present in
dreams, things seen only by the dreaming person. The Lord, who has the
inconceivable power to do anything by merely willing it be done, thus creates the
things in dreams. In the Kaöha Upaniñad (4.4) it is said:
"A wise man, aware that whatever he sees in dreams or awake is all the
Supreme Personality of Godhead and His potencies, never laments."

In the liberated state the individual spirit souls also have the power to do
anything by merely willing it be done, but what they create with that power is not a
dream.

Sütra 2

nirmätäraà caike puträdayaç ca

nirmätäraà - the creator; ca - and; eke - some; putra - sons; ädayas - beginning
with; ca - also.

Others that He is the creator. Sons and others also.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Kaöha Upaniñad affirms that the Supersoul creates the objects of desire
seen in dreams and other situations. It says (Kaöha Upaniñad 5.8):

ya eñu supteñu jägarti kämaà kämaà puruño nirmimäëa

"Remaining awake, the Supreme Personality of Godhead creates the objects of

desire seen in dreams."

Here the word "käma" refers to good sons and other blessings that the
individual soul may desire. The word käma" is used in this way in Kaöha Upaniñad
(1.1.25):

sarvän kämän chandataù prärthayasva

"You may ask for whatever you wish."

In Kaöha Upaniñad (1.1.23) it is said:

çatäyuñaù putra-pauträn våëéñva

"You may choose many sons and grandsons that live for a hundred years."

In the Småti-çästra it is said:

etasmäd eva putro jäyate. etasmäd bhrätä. etasmäd bhäryä. yad enaà
svapnenäbhihanti.

"From the Supreme Personality of Godhead a good son is born. From Him a
brother appears. From Him a wife appears. From Him these things appear in a
dream."

In the next passage the author of the sütras describes the instrument the
Supreme Personality of Godhead employs to create dreams.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 3

mäyä-mätraà tu kärtsnyenänabhivyakta-svarüpatvät

mäyä - the mäyä potency; mätraà - only; tu - but; kärtsnyena - completely; an -

not; abhivyakta - manifested; svarüpatvät - because of the condition of having a
form.

But it is the mäyä potency only, because the forms are not completely
manifested.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Lord's inconceivable mäyä potency is the creator of what is seen in dreams.
What is seen in dreams is not made of the five gross material elements, neither is it
created by the demigod Brahmä. Why is that? The sütra explains:
kärtsnyenänabhivyakta-svarüpatvät" (because the forms are not completely
manifested). This means: "because they are not seen by everyone". In this way it is
proved that the Supersoul is the creator of what is seen in dreams.

Adhikaraëa 2
Not All Dreams Are Illusions

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Saàçaya (doubt): Are dreams reality or illusion?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): When a person wakes up he immediately

knows that what he dreamed was an illusion. Therefore dreams are all illusions.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 4

sücakaç ca hi çruter äcakñate ca tad-vidaù

sücakas - an indicator; ca - and; hi - indeed; çruter - of the Çruti-çästra; äcakñate

- declare; ca - and; tad - that; vidaù - they who know.

It gives omens. The Çruti-çästra and the experts affirm it.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Dreams show good and bad omens. They also reveal mantras and other things.
Therefore dreams are reality. Why is it that dreams reveal these things? The sütra
explains: "çruteù" (the Çruti-çästra affirms it). the Chändogya Upaniñad (5.2.9)
affirms:

yadä karmasu kämyeñu

striyaà svapne 'bhipaçyati
samåddhià tatra jänéyät
tasmin svapna-nidarçane

"If, when the auspicious rites are completed, one sees a woman in a dream, he
should know that the rites were successful."

In the Kauñétaké-brähmaëa it is said:

atha svapne puruñaà kåñëaà kåñëa-dantaà paçyati sa enaà hanti

"If in a dream one sees a black man with black teeth, that man will kill him."

The word "tad-vidaù" here means "they who know how to interpret dreams".
These persons affirm that dreams reveal omens of good and evil. For example a
dream of riding on an elephant is a good omen, and a dream of riding on a donkey
is an omen of misfortune. In dreams one may also receive prayers. the Småti-çästra
affirms:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

ädiñïavän yathä svapne
räma-rakñäm imäà haraù
tathä likhitavän prätaù
prabuddho buddha-kauçikaù

"Then Lord Çiva appeared in a dream and taught him the Räma-rakñä prayer.
Waking up in the morning, Buddha Kauçika at once wrote it down."

Therefore, because in dreams one sometimes receives omens, prayers,

medicines, and other things, and becauses sometimes a person will actually appear
in a dream, therefore sometimes dreams are as real as what is seen in the waking
state. That is the conclusion of Çruti-çästra.

Here someone may object: Is it not true that after waking up a person becomes
convinced that what he saw in a dream was false. This proves that all dreams are
unreal.

In the following words the author of the sütras answers this objection.

Sütra 5

paräbhidhyänät tu tirohitaà tato hy asya bandha-viparyayau

para - of ther Supreme Personality of Godhead; abhidhyänät - by the will; tu -

indeed; tirohitaà - withdrawn; tato - from Him; hi - indeed; asya - of him; bandha -
bondage; viparyayau - release.

By the will of the Supreme Personality of Godhead it is withdrawn. Indeed,

bondage and liberation also come from Him.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Because they are created by the will of the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
chariots and other things seen in a dream are not unreal. They are not like the
illusion of silver seen on a seashell. the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the
cause of bondage and liberation for the individual spirit soul. this is described in
Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (6.16):

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

saàsära-mokña-sthiti-bandha-hetuù

"the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the master of this cosmic manifestation

in regard to bondage to the conditional state of material existence and liberation
from that bondage."*

the Lord brings liberation from the bondage of repeated birth and
death.Therefore it is not surprising that He has the power to bring dreams to their
end. That is the meaning. Therefore it should be understood that dreams are
manifested by Him and withdrawn by Him also. In the Kürma Puräëa it is said:

svapnädi-buddhi-kartä ca
tiraskartä sa eva tu
tad-icchayä yato hy asya
bandha-mokñau pratiñïhitau

"The Supreme Lord creates and ends dreams and other states of being. By His
will both bondage and liberation are manifested."

Therefore, because they are created by the Supreme Personality of Godhead,

dreams are real.

Adhikaraëa 3
The Supreme Personality of Godhead Creates the Waking State

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be explained that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the creator
of the waking state also. In the Kaïha Upaniñad (2.1.4) it is said:

svapnäntaà jägaritäntaà
cobhau yenänupaçyati
mahäntam vibhum ätmänaà
matvä dhéro na çocati

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "Aware that the all-powerful Supreme Person creates all that is seen in both
waking and dreaming states, a wise man never laments."

Saàçaya (doubt): Does the Supreme Personality of Godhead create the waking
condition of the individual spirit souls, or not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The waking state is not created by the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, for it is seen that the waking state is under the
control of time and other factors.
Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 6

deha-yogäd vä so 'pi

deha - of the body; yogäd - from contact; vä - or; so - that; api - even.

That also from contact with the body.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

As explained in Kaïha Upaniñad 2.1.4, the waking state, qwhich occurs when
the soul is in contact with the body, is manifested from the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. This is so because time and the other factors are only inert matter. The
word "api" (also) in this sütra hints that the state of dreamless sleep and fainting
are also created by the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This is so because the
Çruti-çästra affirms that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is creator of
everything.

Adhikaraëa 4
The Supreme Personality of Godhead Is the Creator of Dreamless Sleep

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now the condition of dreamless sleep will be considered. The Çruti-çästra

describes the state of dreamless sleep in the following passages. In the Chändogya
Upaniñad (8.6.3) it is said:

äsu tadä näòéñu supto bhavati

"Entering the näòés, the soul sleeps."

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (2.1.19) it is said:

täbhiù praty avasåpya puré-tati çete

"Entering the membrane surrounding the heart, the soul sleeps."

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (2.1.17) it is said:

ya eño 'ntar hådaya äkäças tasmin çete

"Entering the sky of the heart, the soul sleeps."

Many other like verses may also be quoted. The "sky in the heart" here is the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. In this way the Çruti-çästra explains that
dreamless sleep is manifested when the soul enters the näòés, the membrane
surrounding the heart, and the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Saàçaya (doubt): Does the soul enter any one of these three places, or does the
soul enter all of them?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The soul may enter any one of these places.
This is so because these three places are equally able to be the place where the
soul sleeps. The Nyäya-
çästra explains:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

tulyärthas tu vikalperan

"A list of things equally suitable for a certain thing indicates the option of
choosing from them."

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 7

tad-abhävo näòéñu tac chruter ätmani ca

tad - of that; abhävo - the absence; näòéñu - in the nadis; tat - that; çruter - from
Çruti-çästra; ätmani - in the Supreme Personality of Godhead; ca - also.

Its absence occurs in the näòés and the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This is
so because of the Çruti-çästra.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "ca" (and) here hints the inclusion of the membrane surrounding the
heart. The word "tad-abhäva" (its absence) means "the absence of wakefulness
and dream". Thus it means "the state of dreamless sleep". Dreamless sleep occurs
in the näòés, the membrane surrounding the heart, and the Supreme Personality of
Godhead collectively. Why is that? The sütra explains: "tac chruteù" (This is so
because of the Çruti-çästra). Thus the Çruti-çästra declares that they are all, taken
collectively, the place of dreamless sleep. The idea that there is an option here, and
that to perform the activity of deep sleep the soul chooses one of these places, is an
idea that contradicts the statements of Çruti-çästra. In the scriptures' description of
dreamless sleep, it is seen that the näòés and präëas are described together. In the
Kauçétaki Upaniñad (4.19) it is said:

täsu tadä bhavati. yadä suptaù svapnaà na kaëcana paçyaty athäsmin präëa
evaikadhä bhavati.

"Then the soul enters the näòés. When sleeping, the soul does not see any
dream. Then the soul become one with the präëas."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The explanation that the soul has an option of one of these three places does
not apply here, for if that option were to apply, then these three places would have
to be equally suitable for the action of dreamless sleep, but the truth is they are
not. What occurs is the soul passes through the door of the näòés, enters the palace
of the membrane surrounding the heart, and sleeps on the bed of the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. In this way all three places are involved in the activity of
dreamless sleep, but the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the actual place where
dreamless sleep occurs. the word "purétat" here means "the membrane
surrounding the lotus of the heart".

Sütra 8

ataù prabodho 'smät

ataù - therefore; prabodho - waking; asmät - from Him.

Therefore the waking state is from Him.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Because the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the actual place where

dreamless sleep occurs and the näòés and other things mentioned here are merely
doors through which the soul passes in order to rest on the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, therefore the waking soul rises from the bed of the Supreme Personality
of Godhead. In the Chändogya Upaniñad it is said:

satas cägatya na viduù sata ägacchamahe

"We had departed from the Supreme Personality of Godhead, although we

could not understand that we had departed from the Supreme Personality of
Godhead."

In this way the idea that sometimes the soul sleeps in the naòés, sometimes in
the membrane surrounding the heart, and sometimes in the Supreme Personality
of Godhead, is disproved. It is not like that. Therefore the soul sleeps on the bed of
the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 5
The Same Person Returns to the Body

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Chandogya Upaniñad it is said:

satañ cägatya na viduù

"We had departed from the Supreme Personality of Godhead, but we did not
know we had departed from the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

Saàçaya (doubt): Is the person awakening from the bed of the Supreme
Personality of Godhead the same person who first went to sleep there, or is he a
different person?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): It is not possible that the soul, having
attained the Supreme Personality of Godhead, would again return to the same
material body. Therefore it must be a different soul that awakens.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 9

sa eva tu karmänusmåti-ñabda-vidhibhyaù

sas—he; eva — indeed; tu—but; karma—karma; änusmåti—memory; ñabda—of

the Çruti-çästra; vidhibhyaù—from the instructions.

It is he, because of the memory of karma and because of the teachings of Çruti-
çästra.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 10

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 11

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 12

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 13

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 14

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 15

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 16

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 17

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 18

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 19

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 20

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 21

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 22

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 23

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 24

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 25

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 26

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 27

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 28

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 29

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 30

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 31

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 32

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 33

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 34

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 35

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 36

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 37

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 38

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 39

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 40

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 41

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 42

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 43

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 44

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 45

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 46

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 47

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 48

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 49

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 50

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Sütra 51

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Adhikaraëa 11
The "Neti Neti" Text Explained

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here someone may object: It is not true that the individual spirit soul is a
separate conscious person in some ways like the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
The individual soul is only a reflection of the Supreme. In the Båhad-äraëyaka
Upaniñad (2.3.1) it is said:

dve väva brahmaëo rüpe mürtaà caivämürtaà ca

"The Supreme has two forms: the subtle and the gross."

After dividing the five elements into two categories, the Upaniñad declares that
all are forms of the Supreme. Then the Upaniñad (2.3.6) declares:

tasya haitasya puruñasya rüpaà yathä mahärajanaà väso yathä päëòv-ävikaà

yathendragopo yathägny-arcir yathä puëòarékaà yathä sakåd vidyutaà sakåd
vidyutaiva ha vä asya çrér bhavati ya evaà veda.

"That person's form is like gold, like white wool, like an indragopa, like a
burning flame, like a white lotus, like a lightning flash. He who understands this
becomes splendid like a lightning flash."

Then, having described this person splendid like gold, the Upaniñad (2.3.6)
declares:

athäta ädeço neti neti. na hy etasmäd iti. nety anyat param asti. atha nämadheyam
satyasya satyam iti. präëa vai satyaà teñäm eva satyam.

"This is the teaching: No. No. Not than Him. Nothing is greater than Him.
Nothing is greater than Him. His name is the truth of the true. He is life. He is
truth. He is truth."

The meaning of this passage is this: the Supreme is greater that all the subtle
and gross things in the material world. No person or thing is greater than Him.
That is the meaning of the words, "No. No." in this passage. The words “No. No."
therefore mean "Not than the Supreme Personality of Godhead". The word "no"
is repeated twice to mean, "the material elements and material desires are not
greater than Him" or to mean, "inanimate matter and the conscious living beings

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

are not greater than Him", or to mean "other groups of two are not greater than
Him". Thus he •speaks the teaching (ädeça): "No" (na). In this way he says, "No
person or thing is greater than the Supreme Personality of Godhead".

Here someone may object: Is it not so that this passage means, "As the material
world does not exist in reality, so the Supreme Personality of Godhead also does
not exist in reality? That is the meaning of the Upaniñad's assertion “no". The
form of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, which is eternal and spiritual, and
which ends all illusions, is not different from the visible material world. This also
means that the individual spirit soul is also not different from the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. The spirit soul is a reflection of the Supreme. The
individual spirit soul, who is atomic, and the Supreme, who is all-pervading, are not
different. They are like the air in a pot and the air in the great sky. Therefore it is
not correct to say that they are different.

If this objection is raised, then the author of the sütras gives the following reply:

Sütra 22

prakrtaitävattvaà hi pratiñedhati tato bravéti ca bhüyaù

prakrtä—the topic under discussion; etävattvam—being like that; hi—indeed;

pratiñedhati—denires; tataù—then; bravéti—says; ca—and; bhüyaù—more.

The previous statement denies that He is like them. It affirms that He is greater.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

This passage of Çruti-çästra does not teach that the one Supreme has no
qualities. It teaches only that the Supreme is not like other persons. It teaches that
the Supreme is superior to all others. In this way the Çruti-çästra affirms that the
Supreme is not like other persons or things. The Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad's
(2.3.1) statement that the subtle and gross elements of the world are forms of the
Supreme does not mean that the Supreme is like the things of this world. The
forms of the Supreme are not material. Therefore it is said that the Supreme is
superior to everything in the material world and therefore He has the name "the
truth of the true". That is the teaching here. He is more than the forms of this
world. Because His form has no limit, therefore the Upaniñad declares, "No. No."
that is the meaning here. The meaning is that the form of the Lord is not like the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

subtle and gross forms of the material world. He is not like them because His form
is eternal and true, and therefore He has the name "the truth of the true". This is
what the Çruti-çästra teaches. Then the scriptures affirm "No person or thing is
greater than Him". (na hy etasmät). Because nothing is greater than Him,
therefore He has the name "the truth of the true". That •is why the text here says,
"no". By this explanation of a small part of the Lord's nature, the Lord's nature as
a whole may be understood.
Now the word "nämadheyam" will be explained. The Lord's name here is
"satyasya satyam" (the truth of the true). This name describes the form of the
Supreme. Then the text declares that the Supreme is "präëa". Präëa" here means,
"the life of all that live". In this way the Lord's forms are superior to all others.
This proves that the Lord's form is better than all other forms, either spiritual or
material. No other form is better than His. In the material world the material
forms are of two kinds: subtle and gross. That the Supreme Lord's forms are not
material is explained in Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (2.3.6). Then the text declares
that the Supreme is the truth of life. Because both the Lord and the individual
spirit souls are not made of the material elements, which begin with ether,
therefore they are both called truth. However, unlike the individual spirit souls,
the Supreme is not subject to the different transformations of the material nature,
which grant and remove true knowledge in different circumstances. Thus the
individual spirit soul is certainly spiritual and conscious. However, the Supreme
Personality of Godhead is superior to the individual souls for the Supreme Lord
has limitless auspicious qualities. When they are understood, then devotion for the
Lord naturally develops. Thus the Çruti-çästra does not deny the existence of the
Lord's form, for in Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (2.3.6) the Lord's spiritual form was
described. Only a madman would state one thing and then immediately contradict
his own words. Therefore the author of the sütras says that "the Supreme is not
like that". The author does not say "the Lord has no form at all". Thus the proper
explanation is given.

Adhikaraëa 12
The Form of the Lord

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now it will be proved that the Supreme Lord's form is spiritual and not
perceivable by the material senses. This must be so, for if the Lord were not
spiritual, that is, if he were an ordinary, common, easily available material object,
like a pot or something of that nature, then it is not possible that there should be

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

love and devotion for Him. The Çruti-çästra also affirms this, for it says:

sac-cid-änanda-rüpäya

"I offer my respectful obeisances to the Supreme Personality of Godhead,

whose form is eternal and full of knowledge and bliss."

Saàçaya (doubt): Is the Supreme Lord's form spiritual, and thus beyond the
understanding of the material senses, or is it material, and thus easily seen by the
material senses?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The Lord's form must be material, for many
demigods, demons, and human beings have certainly seen it.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 23

tad avyaktam äha hi

tat—that; avyaktam—unmanifest; äha—said; hi—indeed.

Scripture says it is unmanifest.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Lord can be seen only by spiritual senses. This is described in Kaöha
Upaniñad (6.9):

na sadåçe tiñöhati rüpam asya na cakñuñä paçyati kaçcanainam

"The Supreme Lord's form is not like that. Material eyes have never seen His
form."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 In Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (3.9.26) it is said:

agåhyo na hi gåhyate

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is not perceived by material senses."

In the Bhagavad-géöa (8.21) it is said:

avyakto 'kñara ity uktas

tam ähuù paramäà gatim

"They say He is unmanifest and infallible. They say He is the supreme

destination."

Adhikaraëa 13
The Supreme Personality of Godhead Can Be Seen

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be revealed the truth that although the Supreme Lord is spiritual by
nature, still He can be seen by they who have love, devotion, and spiritual wisdom.
If the Supreme Personality of Godhead were always invisible and never to be seen,
then it would not be possible to have love and devotion for Him. In the Kaivalya
Upaniñad (2) it is said:

çraddhä-bhakti-dhyäna-yogäd avaiti

"One who has faith and devotion, and who meditates on Him, can see the
Supreme Personality of Godhead."

In this way it is explained that a faithful devotee who meditates on Lord Hari,
attains the direct sight of Lord Hari.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Saàçaya (doubt): Is the Supreme Lord seen by the mind or by the eyes and
other senses?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The Supreme Lord is seen by the mind.
This is described in Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.19):

manasaivänudrañöavyam

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is indeed seen by the mind."

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 24

api samrädhane pratyakñänumänäbhyäm

api—certainly; samrädhane—in worship; pratyakña—by the Çruti-çästra;

anumänäbhyäm—by the Småti-çästra.

Certainly it is in worship because of the Çruti-çästra and Småti-çästra.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "api" (certainly) is used here to mock the pürvapakña (opponent).
When one has sincere devotion (samrädhane) with one's eyes and other senses one
can directly see the Lord. Why is that? The sütra explains: "Because of the Çruti-
çästra and Småti-çästra." In the Kaöha Upaniñad •(2.4.1) it is said:

paräïci khäni vyatåëat svayambhüs

tasmät parän paçyati näntarätman
kaçcid dhéraù pratyag ätmänam aikñad
ävåta-cakñur amåtatvam icchan

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead made the conditioned souls gaze at

external things and not at what is within the heart. A rare saint who yearns for

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

liberation will look inside his heart and see the Supreme Lord staying there."

In the Muëòaka Upaniñad (3.1.8) it is said:

jïäna-prasädena viçuddha-sattvas
tatas tu taà paçyati niñkalam dhyäyamänaù

"In the course of his meditation a pure-hearted saint will become enlightened.
Then he sees the perfect Supreme Lord directly."

In the Bhagavad-gétä (11.53-54) The Lord Himself declares:

nähaà vedair na tapasä

na dänena na cejyayä
çakya evam-vidho drañöuà
dåñöavän asi mäà yathä

"The form you are seeing with your transcendental eyes cannot be understood
simply by studying the Vedas, nor by undergoing serious penances, nor by charity,
nor by worship. It is not by these means that one can see Me as I am.*

bhaktyä tv ananyayä çakya

aham evam-vidho 'rjuna
jïätuà drañöuà ca tattvena
praveñöuà ca parantapa

"My dear Arjuna, only by undivided devotional service can I be understood as I

am, standing before you, and can thus be seen directly. Only in this way can you
enter into the mysteries of My understanding."*

In this way it is proved that with the aid of devotional service one can see Lord
Hari directly. Thus with the aid of the eyes and other senses one can perceive the
Lord directly. Thus the Lord can be perceived by the senses. Thus the word “eva"
(indeed) in Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.19) does not hint that one cannot see
the Lord with the aid of senses.

Sütra 25

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

prakäçädi-vac cävaiçeñyät

prakäça—fire; ädi—beginning with; vat—like; ca—and; •a—not; vaiçeñyät—

with differences.

He is (not) like fire or other things, for He has no such different features.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "na" (not) should be taken from a previous sütra (3.2.19) and placed
here also.

Here someone may object: As fire has two forms: subtle and gross, the subtle
form invisible and unmanifest, and the gross form visible and manifest, so does the
Supreme Lord also have two forms in the same way.

If this objection is stated, then I reply: "No. It is not so." Why not? The sütra
explains: "Because He is not subtle and gross like fire". The Båhad-äraëyaka
Upaniñad (3.4.4) explains:

asthülam anaëv ahrasvam

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is neither subtle, nor gross, nor short,
nor tall."

In the Garuòa Puräëa it is said:

sthüla-sükñma-viçeño 'tra
na kaçcit parameçvare
sarvatraiva prakäço 'sau
sarva-rüpeñv ajo yataù

"Because He appears everywhere and in every form, the distinctions of subtle

and gross do not apply to the unborn Supreme Personality of Godhead."

Here someone may object: Is it not so that the Supreme Lord does not always

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

appear before the devotees when they worship Him with devotion. For this reason
it must be true that the Lord does not always appear when He is worshiped with
love.

Fearing that someone may doubt in this way, the author of the sütras gives the
following explanation.

Sütra 26

prakäçaç ca karmaëy abhyäsät

prakäçaù—appearance; ca—and; karmaëi—in activity; abhyäsät—by repetition.

And when the activity is repeated, then He appears.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "ca" (and) is used here to dispel doubt. When activities like
meditation and worship are repeated, then the Lord appears. In the Dhyäna-bindu
Upaniñad (18) it is said:

dhyäna-nirmathanäbhyäsäd
devaà paçyen nigüòhavat

"By repeated meditation one is able to see the Supersoul hidden in the heart."

By repeated meditation one develops love for the Lord, and at that time one is
able to see the Lord. However, in the Brahma-vaivarta Puräëa it is said:

na tam ärädhayitväpi
kaçcid vyakté-kariñyati
nityävyakto yato devaù
paramätmä sanätanaù

"No one, simply by engaging in worship, can force the Lord to become visible.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

To a person who tries to force Him in this way, the eternal Lord is always
invisible."

The worship described here is worship performed without sincere love for the
Supreme Lord.

Here someone may object: Is it not true that the Supreme Lord is present
within everything? If He is present within, then it is a contradiction to say that He
can come out. He remains within and He does not come out. Therefore the
statement that the Supreme Lord comes out and becomes directly visible is a
collection of meaningless words, words that contradict the truth that the Lord is
always present within everything.

If this objection is raised, then the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 27

ato 'nantena tathä hi liìgam

ataù—therefore; anantena—by the infinite; tathä—so; hi—indeed; liìgam—

evidence.

It is so by the infinite. There is evidence.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

There is evidence to support both ideas: that the Supreme Lord is present
within everything, and that the Supreme Lord becomes visible to they who
meditate on Him. The unlimited Supreme Lord, pleased by His devotees' worship
of Him, shows to them His own form. He does this by His inconceivable mercy.
That should be accepted. How is this known? The sütra explains: “There is
evidence." In the Atharva Veda it is said:

vijïäna-ghanänanda-ghana-sac-cid-änandaika-raso bhakti-yoge tiñöhati

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead, whose sweet form is eternal and full of
bliss and knowledge, becomes visible when He is worshiped with devotion."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 This means that by His mercy the Lord appears before they who worship Him
with devotion. In the Näräyaëädhyätma it is said:

nityävyakto 'pi bhagavän

ékñate nija-çaktitaù
täm åte paramätàanaà
kaù paçyetäm itaà prabhum

"Although He is always invisible, the Supreme Personality of Godhead

becomes visible by His own power. Without first obtaining His mercy, who can see
Him?"

This means that the Lord becomes visible by His own wish. The Supreme Lord
Himself declares (Bhagavad-gétä 7.24):

avyaktaà vyaktim äpannaà

manyante mäm abuddhayaù
paraà bhävam ajänanto
mamävyayam anuttamam

"Unintelligent men, who do not know Me perfectly, think that I, the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, was impersonal before and have now assumed this
personality. Due to their small knowledge, they do not know My higher nature,
which is imperishable and supreme."*

Because the Lord becomes visible in response to His devotees' love, that does
not mean that He is not also all-pervading, present within everything. He does
both these actions by the power of His own internal potency. However, to they
who do not love Him, He presents only a reflection or a shadow of Himself. The
Lord Himself affirms (Bhagavad-gétä 7.25):

nähaà prakäçaù sarvasya

yogamäyä-samävåtaù

"I am never manifest to the foolish and unintelligent. For them I am covered by
My internal potency."*

Therefore, even though He is full of transcendental bliss and other auspicious

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

qualities, He appears terrible and ferocious to they who have no love for Him.
Therefore to they who do not love Him He remains invisible.

Adhikaraëa 14
The Lord's Qualities Are Not Different From His Self

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be proved the truth that the Lord's qualities are not different from His
self. If the Lord's qualities were different from His self, then His qualities would be
secondary and unimportant, and thus love for the Lord, love inspired by those
qualities, would also become secondary and unimportant. However, love for the
Lord is not secondary and unimportant. It is clearly seen that love for the Lord is
of the greatest importance. The Lord's qualities are described in the Çruti-çästra:

vijïänam änandaà brahma

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is full of knowledge and bliss."

yaù sarva-jïaù sarva-vid

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is all-knowing."

änandam brahmaëo vidvän

"A wise man knows that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is full of bliss."

Saàçaya (doubt): Is the worshipable Supreme Truth the actual qualities of bliss
and knowledge themselves, and thus impersonal, or is the Supreme Truth a person
who possesses the qualities of bliss and knowledge?"

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because both ideas are described in the
scriptures it is not possible to come to a final conclusion.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 28

ubhaya-vyapadeçät tv ahi-kuëòala-vat

ubhaya—of both; vyapadeçät—because of the description; tu—indeed; ahi—the

snake; kuëòala—and the coils; vat—like.

Because indeed there is description of both, He is like a snake and its coils.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Supreme Personality of Godhead is the qualities of knowledge and bliss

themselves, and He is also a person who possesses the qualities of knowledge and
bliss. He is like a snake and its coils. As a snake both is and possesses its coils, so
the Supreme Personality of Godhead both is and possesses His qualities. How is
this known? The sütra explains: “Because there is description of both." The Çruti-
çästra describes both. That is the meaning. The word "tu" (indeed) here hints that
the passages of the Çruti-çästra have a single meaning. The meaning here is that
the Lord is inconceivable. The Lord is not divided. It is not that these two kinds of
explanations of the scriptures mean that one part of the Lord has one nature and
another part of Him has a different nature. He is not divided into parts in that way.

Sütra 29

prakäçäçrayavad vä tejastvät

prakäça—of light; äçraya—the shelter; vat—like; vä—or; tejastvät—because of

being splendid.

Or, because He is effulgent He is like an abode of light.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Because the Supreme Personality of Godhead is effulgent, that is to say because

He is full of consciousness, therefore He is the abode of light. That is the
conclusion. As the effulgent sun is the abode of light, so the all-knowing Supreme
Personality of Godhead is the abode of knowledge. That is the meaning. The word
"tejaù" is defined to mean either “the destroyer of ignorance" or "the destroyer of
darkness".

Sütra 30

pürvavad vä

pürva—past; vat—as; vä—or.

Or, as the past.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

As it is said that time both possesses the past and also is the past itself, so the
Supreme both possesses knowledge and bliss and also is knowledge and bliss. Thus
the Supreme is both the quality and the possessor of the quality. In the Brahma
Puräëa it is said:

änandena tv abhinnena
vyavahäraù prakäçavat
pürvavad vä yathä kälaù
svävecchedakatäà vrajet

"As the sun is not different from its light or time is not different from its quality
of the past, so the Supreme is not different from His bliss."

In this series of analogies (sütras 28-30) each analogy is more subtle than the
one before it.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 31

pratiñedhäc ca

pratiñedhät—because of denial; ca—also.

Also because it is denied.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "ca" (also) is used here for emphasis. In the Kaöha Upaniñad (2.4.11
and 14) it is said:

manasaivedam äptavyaà
neha nänästi kiïcana
måtyoù sa måtyum äpnoti
ya iha näneva paçyati

"A pure heart can understand that the Lord and His attributes are not different.
He who sees them as different travels from death to death."

yathodakaà durge våñöaà

parvateñu vidhävati
eväà dharmän påthak paçyaàs
tän evänuvidhävati

"One who thinks the Lord and His attributes are different falls into hell as
rainwater glides down a mountain peak."

In the Närada-païcarätra it is said:

nirdoña-pürëa-guëa-vigraha ätma-tantro
niçcetanätmaka-çaréra-guëaiç ca hénaù
änanda-mätra-kara-päda-mukhodarädiù
sarvatra ca svagata-bheda-vivarjitätmä

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "The Supreme Personality of Godhead is independent, faultless, filled with
virtues, not residing in a material body, untouched by the modes of nature or a
material body fashioned of inanimate matter, but still possessing a face, belly,
hands, feet and other features of a spiritual body filled with bliss. He is not
different from His various limbs, features, and qualities."

Because in this way the scriptures deny that the Lord is •different from His
attributes, therefore the Lord is not different from His attributes. Therefore the
word “bhagavän" (the all-opulent Supreme Lord) is defined in terms of the Lord's
knowledge and other attributes. In the Viñëu Puräëa it is said:

jïäna-çakti-balaiçvarya-
vérya-tejäàsy açeñataù
bhagavac-chabda-väcyäni
vinä heyair guëädibhiù

"The word `bhagavän' means `He who has all knowledge, strength, wealth,
power, heroism, and splendor, but no faults'."

Although the Lord and His attributes are actually one, they are spoken of as
being two in the same way that a body of water and its waves are spoken of as
being two. The Lord is blissful. He is also bliss itself. Therefore His form is full of
bliss. Because the Lord's activities are eternal, therefore the Lord's form is also
eternal. However, for the sake of ordinary dealings a pretended distinction is made
between the Lord and His attributes, even though there is in truth no distinction at
all. If this is not done then it would not be possible to speak sentences like,
"Existence exists," "Time is always," and "Space is everywhere," statements that
are useful in ordinary discourse. Nor are statements like “Existence exists" foolish
illusions. They are meaningful statements, as the sentence "The jar exists" is a
meaningful statement. These statements are not metaphors like the sentence
"Devadatta is a lion", for the statement “Existence does not exist" can never be
truthfully said. Nor do these statements hint that attributes do not exist, for in the
previously stated example of water flowing from a mountain peak there are
certainly attributes. However, the idea that the Supreme Lord is different from His
attributes is certainly denied here. In this way the Supreme Personality of
Godhead is not different from the attributes He possesses.

Adhikaraëa 15

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

The Supreme Personality of Godhead Experiences the Highest Bliss

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be described the truth that the bliss and other attributes of the Lord
are all of the highest nature. If the bliss and other attributes of the individual spirit
souls were equal to the bliss and attributes of the Lord, love and devotion for the
Lord would not be possible.

Viñaya (the subject to be discussed): Now will be discussed the texts that
describe these attributes of the Lord.

Saàçaya (doubt): Are the bliss and other attributes of the Supreme Lord
greater than the bliss and other attributes of the individual spirit souls, or are they
not greater than them?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because the bliss of the Supreme

Personality of Godhead is described in the same terms used to describe the
ordinary blisses of the material world, therefore the Lord's bliss is not greater.
After all, when one speaks the word "jar" one doesn't mean something greater
than a jar.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 32

param ataù setünmäna-sambandha-bheda-vyapadeçebhyaù

param—greater; ataù—than this; setu—of a bridge; unmäna—immeasurable;

sambandha—relationship; bheda—difference; vyapadeçebhyaù—from the
descriptions.

It is greater because of the statements about a bridge, immeasurability, a

relationship, and a difference.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The bliss and other attributes of the Supreme Personality of Godhead are
greater than the bliss and attributes of the individual spirit souls. Why is that? The
sütra declares: “because of the statements about a bridge, immeasurability, a
relationship, and a difference." The statement about a bridge is given in the
Chändogya Upaniñad (8.4.1), where the bliss of the Supreme Lord is described in
these words:

eña setur vidhåtiù

"It is the highest bridge."

The statement about immeasurability is given in the Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.4.1):

yato väco nivartante

"Unable to describe the immeasurable bliss of the Supreme Personality of

Godhead, words return and become silent."

The statement about a relationship is given in the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad

(4.3.32):

etasyaivänandasyänyäni bhütäni mätram upajévanti

"The bliss of the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the highest. All others
experience only a small portion of that bliss."

The statement about a difference is given in the following words:

anyaj jïänaà tu jévänäà

anyaj jïänaà parasya ca
nityänandävyayaà pürëaà
paraà jïänam védhiyate

"The knowledge possessed by the individual spirit souls is one thing and the
knowledge possessed by the Supreme Personality of Godhead is another. The
perfect, complete, blissful, and immutable knowledge possessed by the Supreme

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Personality of Godhead is higher."

The bliss and other attributes described in these statements are not at all like
the ordinary bliss and other attributes found in this world.

Here someone may object: Still, what is described with the word "jar" cannot
really be different from a jar.

To answer this objection the author of the sütras speaks the following words.

Sütra 33

sämänyät tu

sämänyät—because of resamblance; tu—but.

But because of a common quality.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is used here to dispel doubt. As the word "jar" is used to
describe many different kinds of jars, which all have a single quality of "jarness" in
•common, so the word "bliss" describes many different kinds of ordinary and
extraordinary blisses, which all have a single quality of "blissness" in common.
However the different kinds of bliss and other attributes are not alike in all
respects. Therefore it is said:

para-jïänamayo 'sadbhir
näma-jäty-ädibhir vibhuù
na yogavän na yukto 'bhün
naiva pärthiva yokñyati

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead has the highest transcendental

knowledge. He never is, was, or will be touched by the temporary names and forms
of the material world."

It this way it is demonstrated that the knowledge possessed by the Supreme

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Personality of Godhead is superior to the knowledge possessed by the individual
spirit souls.

Here someone may object: If the Supreme Personality of Godhead is actually

superior to the individual spirit souls and to the inanimate material world, then
why does the Chändogya Upaniñad (3.14.1) declare:

sarvaà khalv idaà brahma taj jalän iti çänta upäséta

"Everything is the Supreme. Everything is manifested from Him. A peaceful

sage should worship Him."

In the following words the author of the sütras answers this objection.

Sütra 34

buddhy-arthaù päda-vat

buddhi—of understanding; arthaù—for the purpose; päda—foot; vat—like.

It is for understanding, like the word "foot".

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

This teaching is meant to increase understanding. The understanding here is

that everything belongs to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This is like the
explanation of the word "foot" in the scriptures. In the Åg Veda (10.90.3) it is said:

pädo 'sya viçvä bhütäni

"The entire material universe is His one foot."

By understanding that the entire material universe is a single foot of the

Supreme, a person no longer hates anyone, •and then his heart becomes devoted
to the Lord. This does not mean, however, that one should become attracted to

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

everything, for that would bewilder the intelligence.

Adhikaraëa 16
The Supreme Is Not Devoid of Variety

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be explained the truth that because there is a great variety of kinds of
love and devotion for Him, worshipable Lord Hari assumes a great variety of
forms. If this were not so then many kinds of love for the Lord would be thwarted.
These many forms of the Lord are all beginningless and eternal. In the Çruti-çästra
it is said:

eko 'pi san bahudhä yo 'vabhäti

"Although He is one, He appears in many forms."

Thus the one Supreme Personality of Godhead appears eternally in many

different places.

Saàçaya (doubt): Are there varieties of greater and lesser in these forms, or
not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because these forms are all equally the
Supreme Lord, therefore they are all the same and they are not different.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 35

sthäna-viçeñät prakäçädi-vat

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 sthäna—of places; viçeñät—from the variety; prakäça—light; ädi—beginning
with; vat—like.

Like light and other things, so He also is different in different places.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Although the Supreme Personality of Godhead is one, nevertheless, in different

places and before different devotees He manifests different kinds of opulence,
power, and sweetness. In this way, in the presence of devotees in the various
mellows, such as the mellows of peacefulness, servitude, and friendship, the Lord
manifests many different kinds of forms. He does this in the same way as light or
other things also manifest many different kinds of forms. As the light of a lamp
appears clear or red when reflected from crystals or rubies set in a temple's walls,
and as sound, although originally one, appears different when sounded by •a
conchshell, måòaìga, flute, or other musical instrument, so the Supreme
Personality of Godhead manifest sweetness and other attributes according to the
different circumstances. That is the meaning. When the Lord manifests His great
opulence, He is worshiped by the rules and regulations of vidhi-bhakti. That
manifestation is compared to the light reflected from crystal. When the Lord
manifests His great sweetness, He is worshiped by the spontaneous love of ruci-
bhakti. That manifestation is compared to the light reflected from rubies. In this
way the Lord's many manifestations in different abodes and in relation to the
different kinds of devotion of different kinds of devotees, are basically of these two
kinds (opulence and sweetness).

Sütra 36

upapateç ca

upapateù—because of reasonableness; ca—also.

Also because it is reasonable.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 This is also described in Chändogya Upaniñad (3.14.1), which explains:

"As one has faith in the Lord, so one is rewarded."

It is not otherwise. As there are different kinds of love for the one Supreme
Lord, so the one Lord expands into many different forms.

Adhikaraëa 17
The Lord is the Highest

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be explained the truth that the Supreme Lord is the highest. If anyone
were superior to the Supreme Lord, then it would not be possible to develop love
and devotion to Him. Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (3.4) clearly states that the Lord is
the greatest. However, Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (3.10) describes something superior
to the Supreme Lord.

Saàçaya (doubt): Is there a person or thing greater than the worshipable

Supreme Lord, or is there not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): There is something greater than the

Supreme Lord. This is clearly described in Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (3.10).

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 37

tathänya-pratiñedhät

tathä—so; anya—of another; pratiñedhät—because of the denial.

It is so, for another is denied.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Nothing is greater than the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Why is that? The
sütra explains: "for another is denied." In the Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (3.9) it is
said:

yasmät paraà näparam asti kiïcid

yasmän näëéyo na jyäyo 'sti kiïcit

"There is no truth superior to that Supreme Person because He is the

supermost. He is smaller than the smallest, and He is greater than the greatest."*

In this way the scriptures deny the existence of anything greater than the
Supreme Lord. That is the meaning here. In Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (3.8) it is said:

vedäham etaà puruñam mahantam

äditya-varëaà tamasaù parastät
tam eva viditväti måtyum eti
nänyaù panthäù vidyate 'yanäya

"I know that Supreme Personality of Godhead who is transcendental to all

material conditions of darkness. Only he who knows Him can transcend the bonds
of birth and death. There is no way for liberation other than knowledge of that
Supreme Person."*

After thus teaching that no path but knowledge of the Supreme Person leads to
liberation, the Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (3.9) explains:

yasmät paraà näparam asti

"There is no truth superior to that Supreme Person."

In this way is proved that there is no truth superior to the Supreme Lord. In
Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (3.10) it is said:

tato yad uttarataraà

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 tad arüpam anämayam
ya etad vidur amåtäs te bhavanty
athetare duùkham eväpi yänti

"They who know that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is greater than the
greatest, and has no material body and no faults, become immortal. They who do
not know Him suffer."

In this way the scriptures declare that there is no truth superior to the Lord. In
this way the false idea of our opponent is disproved. In Bhagavad-gétä (7.7), the
Supreme Lord Himself declares:

mattaù parataraà nänyat

kiïcid asti dhanaïjaya

"O conqueror of wealth, there is no truth superior to Me."*

Adhikaraëa 18
The Lord is All-pervading

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now, to show that the object of worship is always nearby, the truth that the
Supreme Lord is all-pervading will be described. Otherwise, if the Supreme Lord
were not always nearby, then there would not be enthusiasm to love the Lord, and
love for the Lord would become slackened. In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad it is
said:

eko vaçé sarva-gaù kåñëa éòyaù

"Lord Kåñëa, the supreme controller and the supreme object of worship, is
present everywhere."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Saàçaya (doubt): Is Lord Hari, the supreme object of meditation, all-pervading,
or does He stay only in one place?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because the Lord is of moderate height,

and because He stays aloof from the material world, the Lord cannot be
everywhere and does not go to every place. Therefore the Lord is not all-
pervading.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 38

anena sarvagatatvam äyäma-çabdädibhyaù

anena—by Him; sarva—everywhere; gata—going; tvam—the state of being;

äyäma—all-pervasiveness; çabda—Çruti-çästra; ädibhyaù—beginning with.

He is everywhere, for the Çruti-çästra and other scriptures declare that He is all-
pervading.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Even though His form is of a moderate height, the Supreme Personality of

Godhead is all-pervading. Why is that? The sütra explains: "the Çruti-çästra and
other scriptures declare that He is all-pervading." Here the word "äyäma" means
"all-pervading". The word "ädi" (beginning with) here means "because He has
inconceivable potencies".
In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad it is said:

eko vaçé sarva-gaù kåñëa éòyaù

"Lord Kåñëa, the supreme controller and the supreme object of worship, is
present everywhere."

In the Taittiréya Araëyaka it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

yac ca kiïcij jagat sarvaà
dåçyate çrüyate 'pi vä
antar bahiç ca tat sarvaà
vyäpya näräyaëaù sthitaù

"Lord Näräyaëa is present everywhere. He is within and without everything. He

is within everything that has ever been seen or heard."

In this way it is declared that, even though He has a form of moderate height,
the Supreme Personality of Godhead is certainly all-pervading. Because of His
inconceivable potencies the Lord is greater than all and present everywhere, even
though His form is of a moderate height. In Bhagavad-gétä (9.4 and 5), the
Supreme Lord Himself declares:

mayä tatam idaà sarvaà

jagad avyakta-mürtinä
mat-sthäni sarva-bhütäni
na cähaà teñv avasthitaù

na ca mat-sthäni bhütäni
paçya me yogam aiçvaram

"By Me, in My unmanifested form, this entire universe is pervaded. All beings
are in Me, but I am not in them. And yet everything that is created does not rest in
Me. Behold My mystic opulence!"*

Because the Supreme Lord is different from matter does not mean that He
cannot be all-pervading within the material world, for the Çruti-çästra clearly
declares that He is certainly present within and without. The scriptures also affirm
that as oil is present in sesame seeds and as butter is present in yogurt, so the
Supreme Lord is present everywhere. In this way it is proved that worshipable
Lord Hari is present everywhere. This is clearly shown in His Dämodara pastime.
Even though He was a small child, still He displayed His power of being all-
pervading.

Adhikaraëa 19
The Supreme Lord Awards the Fruits of Action

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be described the truth that the Supreme Lord awards all the fruits of
action. Otherwise, if He did not award the fruits of action, or if He awarded only
some of the fruits of action, because of His miserliness it would be difficult to
develop love for Him. In the Praçna Upaniñad (3.7) it is said:

puëyena puëyaà lokaà nayati

"The Supreme Lord takes the pious to the world of the pious."

Saàçaya (doubt): Are the pious results that begin with entrance into Svargaloka
attained by performing yajïas and other pious deeds, or are they attained by the
sanction given by the Lord?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): These results are caused by performance of

yajïas and other pious deeds. The Supreme Lord has nothing to do with it.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 39

phalam ata upapatteù

phalam—fruit; ataù—from Him; upapatteù—because it is reasonable.

The result is from Him, for that is reasonable.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The attainment of Svargaloka and other pious benefits, benefits attained by

performing yajïas and other pious deeds, are actually awarded by the Supreme
Lord Himself. Why is that? The sütra explains: "for that is reasonable." In this way

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

it is shown that the eternal, all-knowing, all-powerful, and supremely generous
Lord, when He is worshiped by the performance of yajïas and other pious deeds,
after some time has elapsed grants the rewards of these pious deeds. The deeds
themselves, which are only inert matter and which perish in a moment as soon as
they are performed, do not grant these rewards. That is the meaning.
In the next sütra the author gives the proof of this.

Sütra 40

çrutatväc ca

çrutatvät—because of being described in the Çruti-çästra; ca—also.

Also because it is affirmed by the Çruti-çästra.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (3.9.28) it is said:

vijïänam änandaà brahma rätir dätuù paräyaëam

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is full of knowledge and bliss. It is He

who gives the fruits of actions to they who perform yajïas."

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.24) it is also said:

sa vä eña mahän aja ätmä annädo vasu-dänaù

"The unborn Supreme Personality of Godhead gives the fruits of work."

These two passages explain that the Supreme Lord gives the fruits of action.
The word "dätuù" means "of the performer of yajïa", and "rätiù" means “the
giver of the results".

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 41

dharmaà jaiminir ata eva

dharmam—piety; jaiminiù—Jaimini; ataù—from Him; eva—indeed.

Jaimini affirms that piety comes from Him.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Jaimini holds that piety comes from the Supreme Lord. The pious deed that
gives an auspicious result itself comes from the Supreme Lord. In the Kauñétaki
Upaniñad (3.8) it is said:

eña eva sädhu karma kärayati

"The Lord engages the living entity in pious activities."*

According to Jaimini, the Supreme Lord does not give the results of actions,
either directly or indirectly. The Lord creates only the actions themselves and the
results are given by the actions.
Here someone may object: Is it not so that actions are over in a moment,
whereas there is often a great lapse of time before actions bear their karmic result?
If the actions quickly cease to exist they cannot create the karmic results, for
something that has ceased to exist cannot create something new.

To this objection Jaimini may reply: No. It is not so. Even though the action
itself comes to an end, it leaves behind a potential result. Only when this result is
fulfilled is the action actually completed. Even if there is a considerable lapse of
time, the action itself gives the result to the person, a result appropriate to that
particular action. Thus actions are the givers of results.

In the following words Çréla Vyäsadeva, the author of the sütras, gives His
opinion.

Sütra 42

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

pürvaà tu bädaräyaëo hetu-vyapadeçät

pürvam—previous; tu—but; bädaräyaëaù—Vyäsadeva; hetu—of the cause;

vyapadeçät—from the description.

But Vyäsadeva holds the previous view, for the Lord is described as the cause.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here the word "tu" (but) is employed to dispel doubt. Vyäsadeva holds the
previous view, that the Supreme Personality of Godhead awards the fruits of
action. Why so? The sütra explains: "for the Lord is described as the cause". In the
Praçna Upaniñad (3.7) it is said:

puëyena puëyaà lokaà nayati päpena päpam

"The Supreme Lord takes the pious to the world of the pious and the sinful to
the world of the sinful."

In this way the scriptures teach that the Supreme Lord awards the results of
action. That is the meaning. Because they already have ceased to exist, the actions
themselves cannot be the cause of the karmic results. Also, it is the Supreme Lord
Himself who is the creator of karma, for the scriptures say:

dravyaà karma ca kälaç ca

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is creator of matter, karma, and time.

In this way it is proved that the Lord is the creator of karma. The idea that
actions leave behind a potential result is a lame and foolish idea. Actions are
inanimate and unconscious. They are like a block of wood or a stone, and
therefore they have no power to award the results of actions. Also, the Çruti-çästra
never describes them as awarding the results of actions.

Here someone may object: Is it not so that the demigods are worshiped in the
performance of yajïas and it is the demigods themselves who give the results of
these yajïas.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 If this is said, then I reply: It is by the sanction of the Supreme Lord that the
demigods are able to give these results. This is clearly described in the Antaryämi
Brähmaëa. Therefore the Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself awards the
results of actions. The lotus-eyed Supreme Lord Himself affirms this in the
following words (Bhagavad-gétä 7.21-22):

yo yo yaà yaà tanuà bhaktaà

çraddhayärcitum icchati
tasya tasyäcaläà çraddhäà
täm eva vidadhämy aham

"I am in everyone's heart as the Supersoul. As soon as one desires to worship

some demigod, I make his faith steady so he can devote himself to that particular
deity.*

sa tayä çraddhayä yuktas

tasyärädhanam ihate
labhate ca tataù kämän
mayaiva vihitän hi tän

"Endowed with such a faith, he endeavors to worship a particular demigod and

obtain his desires. But in actuality these benefits are bestowed by Me alone."*

In this way worshiped by the performance of yajïa, the Supreme Lord Himself
gives the auspicious results to the worshiper. When He is thus pleased by devotion,
the Supreme Lord will give everything, even Himself to His devotee. This will be
described later on with quotes from the Çruti-çästra.

Thus, in these two padas has been seen: 1. the fault of the material world, which
is an abode of many sufferings, beginning with repeated birth and death, 2. the
faultless glories of the Lord, 3. the Lord's being the controller of all, 4. the Lord's
form of pure spirit, and 5. the Lord's being not different from His attributes. By
hearing of these things one develops a great thirst to attain the Lord's association
and a great disgust for all that is far from the Lord. In this way one comes to attain
the Lord. That is what was revealed in these two padas.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Pada 3

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

parayä nirasya mäyäà guëa-

karmädéni yo bhajati nityam
devaç caitanya-tanur manasi
mamäsau parisphuratu kåñëaù

May Lord Kåñëa, who with the aid of His transcendental potency pushes aside
the influence of mäyä, who has a host of transcendental virtues eternally, who
enjoys eternal transcendental pastimes, and who has now appeared as Çré Caitanya
Mahäprabhu, appear in my heart.

In this pada will be revealed the way of worshiping the Lord's transcendental
attributes. As in a vaidürya jewel many splendid colors are always manifest, so in
the Supreme Personality of Godhead many different transcendental forms, all
perfect and without beginning, are also manifest eternally. Understanding that the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is supremely perfect, complete, and pure,
has many different forms, a devotee becomes attracted to one of the Lord's forms
and directs his worship to that form. If the various scriptures describe
transcendental virtues present in that form of the Lord, all those virtues may also
be ascribed to that single chosen form. Thus a person who worships the Supreme
Personality of Godhead as present in His powers and opulences, such as the mind
and the other powers of the world, should review the scriptures' descriptions of the
various qualities of these forms, but not of other forms of the Lord.
Others, however, speak in the following way: The one Supreme Personality of
Godhead assumes different forms as an actor assumes different roles on the stage.
In this way the Lord has many different names and abodes. For this reason all the
qualities and pastimes of the different forms of the Lord, as described in the
scriptures, may be ascribed to any one of the Lord's forms.

Here someone may object: Is it not so that many of the qualities of many of the
Lord's forms, qualities described in the scriptures, cannot be properly ascribed to
all of the Lord's forms? Is it not so that sweetness, opulence, peacefulness,
austerity, ferociousness, and other qualities may be mutually contradictory, and it
may also be contradictory to ascribe the features of having a horn, tail, mane, tusk,
or other features appropriate to the Lord's forms like Varäha and others to the
Lord's humanlike forms, which carry a flute, conchshell, bow, arrows, and other
paraphernalia? Therefore in the Mahäbhärata it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

yo 'nyathä santam ätmänam
anyathä pratipadyate
kià tena na kåtaà päpaà
caureëätmäpahäriëä

"A person who ascribes to the Supreme Lord qualities that the Lord does not
actually possess is a thief who robs himself. Does he not sin with his words?"

Therefore, because of both the injunction of Småti-çästra and the experience of

the wise sages, one should not ascribe the qualities of one of Lord's forms to
another of the Lord's forms.

If this is said, then the following reply may be given: The qualities of one of
Lord's forms may be ascribed to another of the Lord's forms only when the
qualities are appropriate to that particular form. Ascribing the qualities of one of
Lord's forms to another of the Lord's forms is of two kinds: 1. cintana, and 2. dhé-
mätra. They who perform this first kind of meditation are called sva-niñöha, and
they who perform the second kind of meditation are called ekänté. In the next pada
three kinds of wise devotees, headed by the sva-niñöha devotees, will be described.
The sva-niñöha devotees have equal love for all the Lord's forms. They see all the
qualities of all the Lord's forms present equally in each of the Lord's forms. They
do not see anything improper in ascribing many contradictory qualities to each of
the Lord's forms. They consider that the Lord by His great potency may possess
many mutually contradictory qualities, just as a vaidürya jewel may display many
different colors.
The ekänté devotees, who are divided into two groups: pariniñöhita and
nirapekña, do not have equal love for all the Lord's forms. They meditate only on
the qualities of one form the Lord, the form they have chosen. They see the
qualities of this form alone. Even though they are well aware of the Lord's other
forms, they do not meditate or gaze upon them. On His part, the Lord generally
does not reveal His other forms to these devotees. This will be reveled in another
adhikaraëa. As for the passage quoted from the Mahäbhärata, its true meaning is
that it is a rebuke hurled at the impersonalists, who claim that the Supreme is
consciousness and nothing else. The truth that the Supreme certainly does have
qualities, and therefore the Lord's qualities should be sought out by they who seek
liberation, is described in Chändogya Upaniñad (8.1.1-6). It is also said, in thw
Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.4.1):

änandaà brahmaëo vidvän

na bibheti kutaçcana

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "He who knows that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is full of bliss never
fears anything."

This means that they who understand the qualities of the Supreme become free
of fear. In this way the scriptures affirm that the Supreme certainly does have
qualities. The impersonalists claim that the Lord's qualities are either falsely
•ascribed to Him or else are accepted only because of the material traditions of
this world. However, because many of these qualities are present in the Lord alone
and no one else, it cannot be said that these qualities are falsely ascribed to the
Lord, and because the revelation of scripture does not describe them as such, it
also cannot be said that the qualities of the Lord are accepted only because of the
material traditions of this world. They who claim that the qualities of the Lord are
imagined to facilitate worship of the Lord, as in the statement, "Imagining the
goddess of speech to be a cow, one should worship her", are all fools. Their idea is
destroyed by the simple statement of the scriptures:

satyam etyopäséta

"Approaching the Supreme Reality, one should worship Him."

Even the impersonalists, in their commentaries on sütras 3.3.12 and 3.3.38,

affirm that the Supreme is bliss and there is no difference between the individual
souls and the Supreme. In this way they accept the idea that the qualities of the
worshipable Supreme are real and not metaphors. When the scriptures say that the
Supreme has no qualities (nirguëa), the intention is that He has no material
qualities. Because it is clearly stated that the Lord is not different from His
qualities, this objection of the impersonalists should not be taken seriously. For the
purpose of meditation the Lord's qualities should be understood to be of two
kinds: aìgi-niñöha (general qualities) and aìga-niñöha (features of the Lord's form).
It is said that one may collect from all the different parts of the Vedas descriptions
of the Lord's qualities.

Adhikaraëa 1
The Lord Should Be Sought

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Viñaya (the subject to be discussed): To understand the Lord's qualities one
should search all the texts of the Vedas.

Saàçaya (doubt): Should one learn about the Supreme by studying the branch
(çäkha) of Vedic texts in one's own community, or should one study all the
branches of the Vedas?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because all the branches of the Vedas are
different, one should study only one's own branch of the Vedas.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion:

Sütra 1

sarva-vedänta-pratyayaà codanädy-aviçeñät

sarva—all; veda—Vedas; anta—end; pratyayam—meaning; codana—

injunctions; ädi—beginning with; aviçeñät—because of not being different.

Because the Vedic injunctions and all other sources of real knowledge are not
genuinely different, therefore knowledge of Him is the conclusion of all the Vedas.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "anta" (end) here means “conclusion". The word "anta" is also used
in this way in Bhagavad-gétä (2.16):

ubhayor api dåñöo 'ntaù

"This they have concluded by studying the nature of both."*

Thus knowledge of the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the final conclusion

taught by all the Vedas. Why is that? The sütra explains: "because the Vedic
injunctions and all other sources of real knowledge are not genuinely different."
The “other sources of real knowledge" here refers to logic. In the Båhad-äraëyaka

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Upaniñad (1.4.7) it is said:

ätmety evopäséta

"One should worship the Supreme."

These words, as well as the promptings of logic, confirm the truth that these
statements and many others like them in passages of all the Vedas, all describe the
same Supreme Lord. The same Supreme Lord is described in the same way in the
Kaëva, Madhyandina, and other recensions of the Vedas.

Here someone may object: In one part of the Vedas (Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad
3.9.28) it is said:

vijïänam änandam brahma

"The Supreme is knowledge and bliss."

However, in another part of the Vedas (Muëòaka Upaniñad 1.1.9) it is said:

yaù sarva-jïaù sarva-vit

"The Supreme knows everything."

Because in this way each branch of the Vedas speaks differently of the
Supreme, they do not all describe the same object as the Supreme.

If this is said, the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 2

bhedäd iti cen naikasyäm api

bhedät—because of difference; iti—thus; cet—if; na—not; ekasyäm—in one;

api—also.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 If it is said, "because they are different," then I reply, "It is not so, for it is also
in one".

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

It is not so. That is so because these differences are seen even within the same
branch of the Vedas. An example of this is the Taittiréya Upaniñad, which gives the
following two statements.

satyaà jïanam anantaà brahma

"The limitless Supreme is both knowledge and truth."

änando brahma

"The Supreme is bliss."

In this way the many different branches of the Vedas •describe the same form
of the Supreme Lord. They do not contradict each other at all.

Sütra 3

svädhyäyasya tathätvena hi samäcäre 'dhikäräc ca

svädhyäyasya—of Vedic study; tathätvena—by being so; hi—indeed;

samäcäre—in Vedic rituals; adhikärät—because of being qualified; ca—also.

Because of being qualified to study the Vedas and to perform rituals.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Taittiréya Araëyaka (2.15) it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

svädhyäyo 'dhyetavyaù

"One should study the Vedas."

In this way one is ordered to study all the Vedas. In the Småti-çästra it is said:

vedaù kåtsno 'dhigantavyaù sa-rahasyo dvijanmanä

"A brähmaëa should study the entire Veda, including even its confidential
portions."

The word "samäcäre" in this sütra means “because all are qualified to perform
all pious rituals". The Småti-çästra confirms this in the following words:

sarva-vedokta-märgeëa
karma kurvéta nityaçaù
änando hi phalaà yasmäc
chäkhä-bhedo hy açakti-jaù

sarva-karma-kåtau yasmäd
açaktäù sarva-jantavaù
çäkhä-bhedaà karma-bhedaà
vyäsas tasmäd acéklpad

"Following the path of all the Vedas, one should regularly perform pious rituals.
Bliss is the result attained by this. The Veda was divided into different branches
because the people were not able to perform all the pious deeds described in the
Veda. That is why Vyäsa divided the Veda into many branches and the one
collection of pious rituals into many collections."

Therefore, if a person is able to do so, he may understand the Supreme by

performing all the spiritual practices described in all the branches of the Vedas. In
the next sütra the author gives an example of indirect reasoning leading to the
same •conclusion.

Sütra 4

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

sava-vac ca tan niyamaù

sava—yajïas; vat—like; ca—and; tat—that; niyamaù—rule.

That rule is like the yajïas.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The "savas" here are the seven yajïas beginning with the saurya-yajïa and
ending with the çataudana-yajïa which, because they are performed with only one
fire, may be performed only by the followers of the Atharva Veda. The worship of
the Supreme Lord, however, can performed by the followers of all the Vedas.
The word "salila-vat" (like water) is an alternate reading of the first word in this
sütra. If this reading is accepted, then the sütra means, "As all waters flow, without
restriction, into the sea, so all the statements of the Vedas describe, as much as
they have the power, the Supreme Personality of Godhead." In the Agni Puräëa it
is said:

yathä nadénäà salilaà

çaktyä sägaratäà vrajet
evaà sarväëi väkyäni
puà-çaktyä brahma-vittaye

"As the water of rivers, as far as it has the power, always enters the sea, so all
words, as far as their speaker has the power, should be employed to understand
the Supreme Lord."

Sütra 5

darçayati ca

darçayati—reveals; ca—also.

It also reveals it.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Kaöha Upaniñad (1.2.15) it is said:

sarve vedä yat-padam ämananti

"All the Vedas describe the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

This means that the Supreme Lord is known by all the Vedas, or, in other
words, the Vedas reveal the truth of Lord Hari. The word "ca" (and) in this sütra
hints, "as far as one has the power". They who have the power may worship the
•Supreme Lord by performing the pious rituals described in all the branches of the
Vedas. They who do not have the power must worship the Supreme Lord by
performing the pious rituals described in their own community's branch of the
Vedas. The conclusion is that the Supreme Lord is the final object of knowledge
sought by all the branches of the Vedas. This truth was also described in the very
beginning of Vedänta-sütra (1.1.4):

tat tu samanvayät

"But that (Lord Viñëu is the sole topic of discussion in the Vedas) is confirmed
by all scriptures."

This truth is thus repeated here in the discussion of the properness of studying
the different qualities of the Supreme Lord. Because this repetition strengthens
the argument here, there is no fault in it.

Adhikaraëa 2
The Lord's Qualities Are Described in Many Scriptures

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now the author of the sütras will show that the many qualities of the Lord may

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

be understood by studying all the Vedas. For example, in the Atharva Veda's
Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad (1.8), the Supreme Lord is described as a cowherd boy
dark like a tamäla tree, dressed in yellow garments, decorated with a Kaustubha
jewel, wearing a peacock-feather, playing graceful melodies on a flute, and
surrounded by gopas, gopés, and surabhi cows. There He is the Deity of Gokula. In
the Räma-täpané Upaniñad, however, He is described as the Lord whose left side is
decorated by Jänaké-devé, holding a bow, the killer of Rävaëa and a host of
demons, and the king of Ayodhyä. In the Räma-täpané Upaniñad it is said:

prakåtyä sahitaù çyämaù

péta-väsä jaöä-dharaù
dvi-bhujaù kuëòalé ratna-
mälé dhéro dhanur-dharaù

"Decorated with earrings and a jewel necklace, His complexion dark, His
garments yellow, and the hair on His head matted, saintly, two-armed Lord Räma
is accompanied by Goddess Sitä."

In the scriptures the Lord's form as Nåsiàha is described as having a frightening

face and filling His enemies with fear. The word "bhéñaëa" (frightening), which
occurs in Lord Nåsiàha's mantra, is explained in the following words of the
Nåsiàha-täpané Upaniñad:

atha kasmäd ucyate bhéñaëam iti. yasmäd yasya rüpaà dåñövä sarve lokäù sarve
deväù sarväëi bhütäni bhétyä paläyante svayaà yataù kutaçcin na bibheti.
bhéñäsmäd vätaù pavate bhéñodeti süryaù. bhéñäsmäd agniç cendraç ca måtyur
dhävati païcamaù.

"Why is the Lord called frightening? Because when all the demigods, all the
worlds, and all living entities see His form, they all flee in fear. He fears no one.
Out of fear of Him the wind blows and the sun rises. Out of fear of Him fire, the
moon, and death all flee."

The Lord's form as Trivikrama is described in the Åg Veda (1.154.1):

viñëor nu kaà véryäëi prävocaà

yaù pärthiväni vimame rajäàsi
yo askambhayad uttaraà sadhasthaà
vicakramäëas tredhorugäya

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "How can I describe all the glories and powers of Lord Viñëu, who created the
heaven and earth, established the worlds above and below, and with three steps
passed over all the worlds?"

Therefore, like the yajïas, which are different because they are offered to
different demigods, so the method of worship to be offered to the different forms
of the Supreme Lord are all different because the qualities of the Lord's different
forms are different.

Saàçaya (doubt): Should the Çruti-çästra's description of the Lord's qualities in

one kind of worship be added in another kind of worship, or not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The Çruti-çästra's description of the Lord's

qualities in one passage should be heard. One should not mix that description with
other descriptions of the Lord in other passages.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 6

upasaàhäro 'rthäbhedäd vidhi-çeña-vat samäne ca

upasaàhäraù—combination; artha—of meaning; abhedät—because of non-

difference; vidhi—of duties; çeña—remainder; vat-like; samäne—in being the same;
ca—also.

In what is common there may be combination, for the meaning is not different.
This is like what is appropriate for the rules and regulations.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "ca" (and) is used here for limitation. When the method of worship is
the same, when the pure Supreme Personality of Godhead is the object of worship,
and when the Lord's form is the same, then the qualities described in different
places may be combined together. Why is that? The sütra explains: "for the
meaning is not different." This means “because the worshipable qualities of the
Supreme Lord are in all respects not different, that is because they are one, or

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

harmonious. Here the sütra gives an example: "This is like what is appropriate for
the rules and regulations." Descriptions of the rules for performing a yajïa may be
collected from different passages because the ritual of a yajïa is everywhere the
same. In the Atharva Veda's Räma-täpanéa Upaniñad it is said:

yo vai çré-rämacandraù sa bhagavän ye matsya-kürmädy-avatärä bhür bhuvaù svas

tasmai namo namaù.

"Bhüù Bhuvaù Svaù. Obeisances to Çré Rämacandra, the Supreme Lord who
descends in a host of incarnations, such as Lord Matsya and Lord Kürma."

In this passage the forms of Lord Matsya and other incarnations are brought
into a meditation on Lord Rämacandra.

In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad it is said:

eko 'pi san bahudhä yo 'vabhäti

"Although He is one, He appears in many forms."

In this passage the forms of Lord Rämacandra and other incarnations are
brought into a meditation on Lord Kåñëa.

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam it is said of Lord Kåñëa:

namas te raghu-varyäya
rävaëäntakaräya ca

"Obeisances to You, the best of the Raghus and the killer of Rävaëa."

Many other passages may be quoted to show meditations where descriptions of

different forms of the Lord are brought together.

Here someone may object: In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (1.4.7) it is said:

atmety evopäséta

"One should worship the Supreme."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Therefore one should worship the Lord alone and not bring other forms into
one's method of worship.

If this is said, then the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 7

anyathätvaà çabdäd iti cen näviçeñät

anyathätvam—otherwise; çabdät—because of the Çruti-çästra; iti—thus; cet—if;

na—not; aviçeñät—because of the lack of something specific.

If someone says, "It is otherwise because of the Çruti-çästra", then I reply, "It is
not so, for there is nothing specific".

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

If someone claims that Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (1.4.7) refutes the idea of thus
bringing together the Lord's qualities, then I reply: No. It is not so. Why not? The
sütra explains: "for there is nothing specific". This means that no scriptural passage
declares, "the Lord's qualities should not be worshiped together." The word "eva"
(indeed) in Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (1.4.7) means that one should not worship
what is not the Supreme Lord. It does not mean that the Lord's qualities can not
be worshiped together. If it is said, "The king alone is seen", that does not mean
that the king's royal parasol and other royal paraphernalia were absent. It is said:

tasmäd yathä-çakti-guëäç cintyäù

"Therefore, as far as one is able, one should meditate on the Lord's various
transcendental qualities."

In this way it is proved that one may bring together the various qualities of the
Lord.

As a vaidürya jewel manifests many different colors, so the Supreme Lord

manifests many different forms. Each of these forms is the same perfect, complete,
and pure Supreme Lord. In some forms the Lord displays all His qualities, and
other forms the Lord does not display all His qualities. Therefore a wise devotee

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

may meditate on all the Lord qualities, as described in the scriptures, as being
present in the particular form of the Lord that is chosen for worship.

Adhikaraëa 3
The Ekänté Devotees Do Not Meditate On All the Lord's Qualities

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Although they are learned in the many branches of the Vedas, still the ekänté
devotees meditate only the Lord's qualities as revealed in their own Upaniñads,
which they have carefully studied. Even though they are aware of other qualities,
they do not meditate on them. In this way there is an exception to what was
previously described.

Viñaya (the subject matter): The subject matter here is a passage of Gopäla-
täpané Upaniñad.

Saàçaya (doubt): In the worship performed by the ekänté devotees, should all
the qualities of the Supreme Lord be brought together or not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because the Lord's qualities are to be

praised, the ekänté devotees should meditate in this way, if they are able.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 8

na vä prakaraëa-bhedät parovaréyastvädi-vat

na—not; vä—or; prakaraëa—of devotion; bhedät—because of differences;

parovaréyastva—greater than the greatest; ädi—beginning with; vat—like.

Certainly not. Because of the differences in devotion. Like the Parovaréya and

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

others.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "vä" (or) is used in the sense of “certainly". The ekänté devotees do
not bring the qualities of the Lord's other forms into the specific form they have
selected to worship. In this way the ekänté devotees who are exclusively devoted to
Lord Kåñëa do not think of Lord Nåsiàha's mane, teeth, fearsomeness, and other
qualities as present in Lord Kåñëa. In the same way the ekänté devotees who are
exclusively devoted to Lord Nåsiàha do not think of Lord Kåñëa's flute, stick,
peacock-feather, and other qualities as present in Lord Nåsiàha. Why is that? The
sütra explains: “prakaraëa-bhedät" (because of the differences in devotion). The
word "prakaraëa" here means "the most •exalted (pra) activity (karaëa)."
Therefore the word “prakaraëa" here refers to devotional service. The word
“bhedät" here means "because of the differences".
Because it is more intense and deep, the devotion of the ekaëté devotees is
more exalted than the devotion of the svaniñöha devotees. Here the author of the
sütras gives and example. He says: "Like the Parovaréya and others." This means
that the ekänté devotees who are exclusively devoted to the Lord's form as the
Hiraëya Puruña in the sun planet do not ascribe to their object of worship the
qualities of the Lord's form as Parovaréya, a form worshiped by the worshipers of
Udgétha. The word Parovaréya means "greater than the greatest". The example
here is of the worshipers of Ugétha in relation to Parovaréya.

Here someone may object: Is it not so that the ekäntés and svaniñöhas are both
called devotees of the Lord and therefore they must both meditate on all the
Lord's qualities just as they who call themselves brähmaëas must all meditate on
the Gäyatré-mantra?

If this is said, then the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 9

saàjïätaç cet tad uktam asti tu tad api

saàjïätaù—by the name; cet—if; tat—that; uktam—spoken; asti—is; tu—but;

tat—that; api—also.

If it is because of the name, then I reply, "But it was already said. That also."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is employed here to dispel doubt. If it is said that all who
worship the Supreme must meditate on all His qualities, then the answer was
already given in the previous sütra. The answer is, "Certainly not. Because of the
differences in devotion." Although they are certainly included in the general
category of the Lord's devotees, the ekäntés are the best of the devotees, and
therefore they do not meditate on all the qualities of the Lord. If it were otherwise
then they would not be the best of the devotees. Because the ekänté devotees are
passionately devoted to one particular form of the Lord, they are superior to the
svaniñöha devotees who are in a general way devoted to all the forms of the Lord.
Also, even the svaniñöha devotees are not able to meditate on every single one of
the Lord's qualities. In the Åg Veda (1.154.1) it is said:

viñëor nu kaà véryäëi prävocaà

"How can I describe all the glories and powers of •Lord Viñëu?"

In the Småti-çästra it is said:

näntaà guëänäm aguëasya jagmur

yogeçvarä ye bhava-pädma-mukhyäù

"Even Brahmä, Çiva, the demigods, and the masters of yoga could not find the
end of the transcendental qualities of the Lord, who is beyond the touch of the
modes of matter."

The sütra explains, "asti" (it is that), which here means, "the idea that all
devotees are exactly alike because they all bear the name `devotee' is the logical
fallacy called `hetor anvaya-vyabhicära'." As the worshipers of the Parovaréya
form of the Lord and the worshipers of the Hiraëmaya form of the Lord have
different conceptions of the Lord, even though both are considered worshipers of
the Udgétha, in the same way the svaniñöha and ekänté devotees also have different
conceptions of the Lord, the svaniñöha devotees meditating on all the Lord's
qualities and the ekänté devotees meditating only on the qualities of the particular
form of the Lord they have chosen to worship. That is the conclusion of these two
adhikaraëas.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 4
The Lord's Childhood and Youth

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now the author begins a discussion of bringing together in meditation the

Lord's qualities in His childhood and other ages. In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad it
is said:

kåñëäya devaké-nandanäya oà tat sat. bhür bhuvaù svas tasmai vai namo namaù.

"Oà Tat Sat. Bhür Bhuvah Svaù. Obeisances to Lord Kåñëa, the son of
Devaké."

The author of Näma-kaumudé defines the name Kåñëa in the following way:

kåñëa-çabdas tu tamäla-néla-tviñi yaçodä-stanandhaye rüòhiù

"The word Kåñëa means: Yaçoda's infant son, who is dark like a tamäla tree."

In the Räma-täpané Upaniñad it is said:

oà cin-maye 'smin mahä-viñëau

jäte däçarathe harau
raghoù kule 'khilaà räti
räjate yo mahé-sthitaù

"Oà. Born as Daçaratha's son in King Raghu's dynasty, the spiritual Supreme
Personality of Godhead, who is known as Maùa-Viñëu and Hari, was splendidly
manifested on the earth. He delighted everyone."

In this way the Çruti-çästra describes the qualities of the Supreme Lord in His

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

childhood and other ages. Many similar descriptions are also found in the Småti-
çästra.

Saàçaya (Doubt): Should one meditate on these descriptions of the Lord in His
childhood and other ages, or should one not meditate on them?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): One should not meditate on the form of the
Lord in His different ages, for then the Lord's form would be sometimes large and
sometimes small. This would contradict the Çruti-çästra's advice that in one's
meditation the features of the Lord should be harmonious.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author •of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 10

vyäpteç ca samaïjasam

vyäpteù—becasue of being all-pervading; ca—also; samaïjasam—proper.

It is proper because He is all-pervading and for other reasons also.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

It is proper to meditate on the Lord in His childhood and other ages because
the Lord is all-pervading and because the Lord is not limited to His features in His
different ages. In sütra 3.2.38 the Lord's all-pervasiveness was confirmed. The
Lord's so-called "birth" is not in reality a change of condition for Him. In the
Puruña-sükta prayer it is said:

ajäyamäno bahudhä vijäyate

"Although He is never born, the Lord takes birth again and again in many
different forms."

Therefore the word "birth" here means “the appearance of the Supreme Lord,
who never really takes birth." The word "ca" (also) in this sütra means, “also

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

because He is the reservoir of transcendental mellows." This is confirmed in the
Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.7.1):

raso vai saù

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is the reservoir of transcendental

mellows."*

By His inconceivable potency, the Supreme Lord appears in a particular form

appropriate to the mellows and pastimes His devotees desire. This is perfectly
proper. The Lord has numberless devotees, beginning with the liberated souls.
This is described in the Åg Veda (1.22.20):

tad viñëoù paramaà padaà

sadä paçyanti sürayaù

"The wise and learned devotees always see the supreme abode of Lord
Viñëu."*

The Supreme Lord, who is always one, simultaneously appears in His different
ages before His different devotees. Something similar is seen in Båhad-äraëyaka
Upaniñad (5.2.1-3), where the syllable "da" was interpreted in three ways by the
demigods, human beings, and demons. In this way, because the Supreme Lord is
all-pervading and because the Lord always remains •one, one should certainly
meditate on the Lord's pastimes of childhood and other ages.

Adhikaraëa 5
The Lord's Activities Are Eternal

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because the Supreme Lord is by nature

eternal, it may be said that His activities performed with His associates in His
childhood and other ages are also eternal. In this way His many different activities,

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

from beginning to end, may all be considered to be eternal. However, it is illogical
to say that there can be an eternal previous action that is followed by another
action. If the previous action is followed by a subsequent action, then the eternality
of the previous action is destroyed. If one action is eternal then any subsequent
action must be performed by a different person. To say that the subsequent action
is performed by the same person contradicts both scripture and direct experience.
Every action has a beginning and an end. Without beginning and end no action can
be brought to completion, and without such beginnings and ends there can be no
experience of the nectar of transcendental mellows (rasa). For these reasons, how
can it be possible that the Lord's activities are eternal? If the Lord's activities were
eternal they would be still and unchanging, like a painted picture. If it is said that
the same actions are repeated again and again and in that way they are eternal,
then I say that there are bound to be times when the beginning of the action is
different, and thus the subsequent actions will become changed, and the action
would then not be repeated in the same way as before. Therefore, how can it be
that the activities of the Lord are eternal? Therefore it should not be accepted that
the activities of the Lord are eternal.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His reply to this idea.

Sütra 11

sarväbhedäd anyatreme

sarva—all; abhedät—because of non-difference; anyatra—in another place;

ime—they.

Because of complete non-difference they are in another place.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Both Lord Hari and His associates are the same persons in both previous and
subsequent actions. Why is that? The sütra explains: "sarväbhedäd" (because of
complete non-difference). This means that because there is no difference in Their
personalities, the same Lord Hari and the same •associates present in the previous
actions are also present in the subsequent actions. That Lord Hari remains one
even though He expands into many forms is confirmed in the Gopäla-täpané
Upaniñad in these words:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

eko 'pi san bahudhä yo 'vabhäti

"Although He is one, the Supreme Lord appears in many forms."

Also, in the Småti-çästra it is said:

ekäneka-svarüpäya

"Although He is one, the Supreme Lord appears in many forms."

This is also true of the Lord's liberated associates, who remain one even though
they appear in many forms. In the Bhüma-vidyä (Chändogya Upaniñad 7.26.2) this
is said of the liberated souls. In the Småti-çästra this is also said in the description
of the Lord's marriage with many princesses and in other pastimes also. In this way
the Lord and the liberated souls can, retaining Their identities, expand themselves
to be present eternally in different places in time. The sentence "It was twice-
cooked" is understood by an intelligent person to mean that one thing was cooked
twice, not that two separate foods were separately cooked. In the same way the
sentence, "He called out the word `cow' twice," means that one cow was addressed
twice, not that two cows were addressed. In this way Lord Hari, His eternal
associates, and His transcendental abodes all retain their identities even though
they are manifested in many different places and perform activities that are all
eternal even though their activities have a beginning and an end. In this way it is
said that a wonderful variety of transcendental mellows are manifested by this
sequence of eternal events. It is not that these ideas do not have their root in the
descriptions of scripture. In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (3.8.3) it is said:

yad bhütaà bhavac ca bhaviñyac ca

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead exists in the past, present, and future."

In the Atharva Veda it is said:

eko devo nitya-lélänuraktaù

"The one Supreme Personality of Godhead is eternally engaged in many, many

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

transcendental forms in relationships with His unalloyed devotees."*

The Supreme Lord Himself affirms (Bhagavad-gétä 4.9):

janma karma ca me divyam

"One who knows the transcendental nature of My appearance and activities

does not, upon leaving the body, take his birth again in this material world, but
attains My eternal abode, O Arjuna."*

Only a person who has attained the Supreme Lord's mercy can understand and
accept all of this, as the Supreme Lord Himself declares (Çrémad-Bhägavatam
2.9.32):

yävän ahaà yathä-bhävo

yad-rüpa-guëa-karmakaù
tathaiva tattva-vijïänam
astu te mad-anugrahät

"All of Me, namely My actual eternal form and My transcendental existence,

color, qualities, and activities, let all be awakened within you by factual realization,
out of My causeless mercy."*

In this way it is proved that the Lord's activities are eternal. However, only the
actions that the Lord performs with the help of His spiritual potency are eternal,
and the actions that the Lord performs with the help of His material potencies and
material time are not eternal, for if the Lord's creation of the material universes
were eternal then the eventual dissolution of the universes could not occur.

Adhikaraëa 6
Meditation on the Lord's Qualities

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now the author of the sütras discuses the following point. In the Vedänta

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

scriptures the Lord's blissfulness and other transcendental qualities are all
described.

Saàçaya (doubt): Should all the qualities of the Lord be combined together in
the devotees' meditation, or should they not be combined in that way?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The qualities of the Lord should not be
combined in meditation, for there is not evidence to say that this should be done.
Because it is not said in scripture that all the qualities of the Lord should be
combined in meditation, therefore they should not be so combined.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 12

änandädayaù pradhänasya

änanda—bliss; ädayaù—beginning with; pradhänasya—of the Supreme.

Of the Supreme those qualities that begin with bliss.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The transcendental qualities of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, such as

His bliss and knowledge, and His paternal affection for they who take shelter of
Him, are all described in the Çruti-çästra. These qualities should all be combined in
the devotees' meditation, for all together they increase the devotees' thirst to
attain the Lord.

Adhikaraëa 7
The Supreme Lord Is Full of Bliss

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya (the subject to be discussed): In the Çruti-çästra it is said that the blissful
Supreme Personality of Godhead has a head and other limbs that are composed of
transcendental pleasure. In the Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.5.1) it is said:

tasya priyam eva çiraù

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is like a bird whose head is composed of

transcendental pleasure."

Saàçaya (doubt): Are the qualities of the Supreme Lord to be remembered in

every meditation, or are they not to be remembered in every meditation?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): It has already been explained that the
Lord's bliss and other qualities should be brought together when there is
meditation on the Lord. Because the Lord's pleasure, as described here in the
Taittiréya Upaniñad, is not really different from the Lord's bliss mentioned before,
therefore it should be included in all meditations on the Lord.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 13

priya-çirastvädy-apräptir upacayäpacayau hi bhede

priya—pleasure; çiraù—the head; tva—the state of being; ädi—beginning with;

apräptiù—non-attainment; upacaya—increase; apacayau—and decrease; hi—
indeed; bhede—in the difference.

There is not attainment of the qualities that begin with His head consisting of
pleasure. In the difference there is increase and decrease.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The truth that the Lord's head is composed of pleasure, as well as other
qualities of the Lord, are not to be employed in every meditation without
exception. Lord Viñëu, who is full of transcendental bliss, has the shape of a
human being, not the shape of a bird (as described in this passage of Taittiréya
Upaniñad).
Furthermore, the bird described in this passage of Taittiréya Upaniñad is
composed of happiness and joy that increase and decrease. Thus there is a
difference. The Lord is not like that. His happiness never increase or decreases.
Thus the qualities described in this passage of Taittiréya Upaniñad should not be
included in every meditation on the Lord.

Sütra 14

itare tv artha-sämänyät

itare—others; tu—but; artha—of result; sämänyät—because of equality.

But others because of the sameness of the result.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

However other passages of Taittiréya Upaniñad, such as 2.5.1 (tasmäd vä

etasmät. . . The Supersoul is full of bliss. From Him this world has come.), 2.6.2
(so 'kämayata. . . The Supreme Personality of Godhead desired: I shall become
many. I shall father many children.), and 2.8.1 (bhéñäsmät. . . Out of fear of the
Supreme Lord the wind blows and the sun rises.), which appear both before and
after Taittiréya Upaniñad 2.5.1, and which describe the Supreme Personality of
Godhead's all-pervasiveness, spiritual bliss, creation of the material universes,
supreme power and opulence, and many other of the blissful Supreme Lord's
transcendental qualities, may be included in the devotees' meditations. Why is
that? The sütra explains: "artha-sämänyät" (because of the sameness of the result).
Meditation on the Lord's qualities, such as His supreme power, His opulences,
His friendliness to all, His being the shelter of all, and His granting liberation,
qualities described in the Vedänta scriptures, brings liberation as its result.
Therefore one should meditate on these qualities of the Lord.

Here someone may ask: Why is the Supreme Personality of Godhead described
as a bird in Taittiréya Upaniñad 2.5.1? In the Kaöha Upaniñad it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

ätmänaà rathinam viddhi

"Know that the soul is the chariot driver."

In this way the soul is described as the chariot driver and the material body is
described as the chariot. The purpose of this little parable in the Kaöha Upaniñad is
to teach that the devotees should diligently control their senses. However, in this
parable of the bird in Taittiréya Upaniñad 2.5.1 no purpose is anywhere to be seen.
What is the purpose then? The Vedas do not speak parables without a purpose
behind them.

Fearing that someone may speak these words, the author of the sütras next
proceeds to explain the meaning of this parable of the bird.

Sütra 15

ädhyänäya prayojanäbhävät

ädhyänäya—for meditation; prayojana—other purpose; abhävät—because of

the absence.

Because of the absence of another purpose, it is for meditation.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

This sütra means, "This parable is meant for meditation. This is so because of
the absence of another purpose." The word "ädhyäna" here means “meditation".
This is the meaning. In Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.1.2) it is said:

brahma-vid äpnoti param

"One who knows the Supreme attains the Supreme."

The Supreme is manifested in two ways: 1. in His original form, and 2. in the
forms of His pastime incarnations. In His original form the Lord has the names

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Näräyaëa, Väsudeva, Saìkarñaëa, Pradyumna, and Aniruddha.
They whose intelligence is firmly anchored in the world of matter find it very
difficult to meditate on the Lord, who is spiritual, blissful, and all-pervading.
Therefore, in order that the conditioned souls may more easily understand the
Lord, the Taittiréya Upaniñad describes the blissful Lord in this parable of "a bird
whose head is pleasure". In this way the conditioned souls attain elevated spiritual
intelligence and are able to meditate on the Supreme directly.
Meditation on the annamaya-puruña feature of the Lord is given in Taittiréya
Upaniñad 2.1.2. Meditations on the präëamaya, manomaya, and vijïänamaya-
puruñas are given in Taittiréya Upaniñad 2.2.1, and meditation on the
Ananadamaya-puruña feature of the Lord is given in Taittiréya Upaniñad 2.5.1.
These five aspects of the Supreme need not always been included in every
meditation on the Supreme.

Here someone may object: The Supreme is one. There is no basis for your
statement that the Supreme is five.

To this objection the answer is given: In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad it is said:

eko 'pi san bahudhä vibhäti

"Although He is one, the Supreme Lord appears in many forms."

In the Çruti-çästra it is said:

ekaà santaà bahudhä dåçyamänam

"Although He is one, the Supreme Personality of Godhead is seen to be many."

In the Catur-veda-çikhä it is said:

sa çiraù sa dakñiëaù pakñaù sa uttara-pakñaù sa ätmä sa pucchaù

"He is the head. He is the right wing. He is the left wing. He is the Self. He is
the tail."

In the Båhat-saàhitä it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

çiro näräyaëaù pakño
dakñiëaù savya eva ca
pradyumnaç cäniruddhaç ca
san deho väsudevakaù

näräyaëo 'tha san deho

väsudevaù çiro 'pi vä
pucchaà saìkarñaëaù prokta
eka eva ca païcadhä

aìgäìgitvena bhagavän
kréòate puruñottamaù
aiçvaryän na virodhaç ca
cintyas tasmin janärdane
atarkye hi kutas tarkas
tv apramaye kutaù pramä

"Näräyaëa is the head. Pradyumna and Aniruddha are the right and left wings.
Väsudeva is the torso. Or, Näräyaëa is the torso, and Väsudeva is the head.
Saìkarñaëa is the tail. In this way the one Supreme Personality of Godhead is
manifested in five ways. In this way the Supreme Personality of Godhead enjoys
pastimes as both the limbs and the possessor of the limbs. The Lord's power and
opulence have no limit. He is inconceivable. How can mere logic grasp Him? He is
immeasurable. How can He be measured?"

Sütra 16

ätma-çabdäc ca

ätma—ätmä; çabdät—from the Çruti-çästra; ca—also.

Also because the Çruti-çästra employs the word “ätmä".

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In Taittiréya Upaniñad 2.5.1 the bird is described as “ätmä" (the Supreme). For
this reason the bird here cannot be an ordinary bird with wings, a tail, and other
like features. The bird here is a parable.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 17

ätma-gåhétir itara-vad uttarät

ätma—ätma; gåhétiù—understanding; itara—others; vat—like; uttarät—from

the following.

"Atmä" here means "consciousness". Because of the following it is like the

others.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here someone may object: In the Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.2.3) it is said:

anyo 'ntara ätmä vä präëamayaù

"The ätmä within is the präëamaya."

The word "ätmä" is used to mean dull matter and it is also used to mean the
individual spirit souls. In Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.5.1) it is said:

anyo 'ntara ätmänandamayaù

"The ätmä within is the Anandamaya."

Since the word "ätmä" is thus used for these different puruñas, how can it be
said that the word “ätmä" means the all-pervading, all-knowing Supreme
Personality of Godhead?

To this I reply: The word "ätmä" here means “the all-pervading, all-knowing
Supreme Personality of Godhead." This is so because this word is used in that way
in many other passages of scripture. For example, in the Çruti-çästra it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

ätmä vä idam eka evägra äsét

"In the beginning only the Supreme Personality of Godhead (ätmä) existed."

Why does the word "ätmä' here refer to the Supreme Personality of Godhead?
The sütra explains: "uttarät" (because of the following). This description of the
bird is followed by these words (Taittiréya Upaniñad 2.6.2):

so 'kämayata bahu syäm

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead desired: I shall become many."

Thus this passage, which follows the parable of the bird, proves that
änandamaya bird in that passage is certainly the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
In this way it cannot be that the bird in that parable is not the Supreme Personality
of Godhead. Therefore the purpose of that parable is to assist the meditation on
the Supreme Lord. This must be so, for that is the appropriate explanation.

Sütra 18

anvayäd iti cet syäd avadhäraëät

anvayät—because of the connotation; iti—thus; cet—if; syät—may be;

avadhäraëät—because of the understanding.

If it is said, "This inference cannot be made," then I reply, "It is right, for that is
the understanding here".

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here someone may object: It is not possible to conclude, merely on the strength
of the following passages, that the word "ätma" here refers to the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. After all, in the previous passages the word “ätmä"
referred to inanimate matter as well as the individual spirit souls.

If this is said, then the sütra replies: "syät" (It is right.) This means: It is right

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

that the word “ätmä" here refers to the all-pervading, all-knowing Supreme
Personality of Godhead. Why is that? The sütra explains: “avadhäranät" (for that
is the understanding here). In the previous passages the word "ätmä" clearly
referred to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. There it was said (Taittiréya
Upaniñad 2.5.1):

tasmäd vä etasmäd ätmanaù

"The Supersoul is full of bliss. From Him this world has come."

To interpret the word "ätmä" in any other way would do violence to the
meditation described in this passage about the Anandamaya-puruña. In this
passage, passing over the präëamaya-puruña and the other puruñas, one comes to
rest at the description of the Anandamaya-puruña, who is certainly the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. As one may point to the star Arundhaté by first pointing
to other stars as reference points, so the description of these other ätmäs is meant
to lead the reader to the Anandamaya-puruña, who is the Supreme. Thus the
passages that precede and follow the parable of the bird clearly show that the ätmä
here is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Thus it is proved without doubt.

Adhikaraëa 8
The Supreme Personality of Godhead Is the Father

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here the author of the sütras begins his description of other qualities of the the
Supreme Lord, such as the Lord's being the father of all.

Viñaya (the subject to be discussed): In the Çruti-çästra it is said:

mätä pitä bhrätä niväsaù çaraëaà suhåd gatir näräyaëaù

"Lord Näräyaëa is our mother, father, brother, home, shelter, friend, and goal."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 In the Jitänta-stotra, Chapter One, it is said:

pitä mätä suhåd bandhur

bhrätä putras tvam eva me
vidyä dhanaà ca kämaç ca
nänyat kiïcit tvaya vinä

"O Supreme Lord, You are my father, mother, friend, kinsman, brother, son,
knowledge, wealth, and desire. I have nothing else but You."

In the Jitänta-stotra, in the middle and end, it is said:

janma-prabhåti däso 'smi

çiñyo 'smi tanayo 'smi te
tvaà ca svämé gurur mätä
pitä ca mama mädhava

"O Lord Mädhava, from the time of my birth I have been Your servant,
disciple, and son. You are my master, guru, mother, and father."

Saàçaya (doubt): Should the devotees meditate on the Lord as their father, son,
friend, and master, or should they not meditate in that way?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The Çruti-çästra explains:

ätmety evopäséta

"One should worship the Supreme Lord."

That is how one should meditate on the Lord. One should not meditate on Him
as one's father or in these other ways.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 19

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

käryäkhyänäd apürvam

kärya—result; äkhyänät—because of the statement; a—like; pürvam—what was

before.

Because of the description of the result it is like the former.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here the word "pürva" means "the previous qualities, such as being full of
bliss". The word “apürva" means "the qualities, such as being the father, that are
like these previous qualities". The devotees should meditate on these qualities.
Why? The sütra explains: "käryäkhyänäd" (Because of the description of the
result). The result here is the result attained by worshiping the Lord with love.
This is explained in Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (5.14):

bhäva-grahyam anéòäkhyam

"The spiritual Supreme Personality of Godhead is attained only by love."

The Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself declares (Çrémad-Bhägavatam

3.25.38):

yeñäm ahaà priya ätmä sutaç ca

sakhä guruù suhådo daivam iñtam

"Because the devotees accept Me as their friend, their relative, their son,
preceptor, benefactor, and Supreme Deity, they cannot be deprived of their
possessions at any time."*

Therefore, as the devotees meditate on the Lord as full of transcendental bliss,

so they should also meditate on Him as their father or other relative. The idea that
the Çruti-çästra's declaration "ätmety evopäséta" (One should worship the
Supreme Lord) means that one should not think of the Lord as one's father has
already been refuted in this book.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 9
One Should Meditate on the Transcendental Form of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya (the subject to be discussed): Now begins a discussion of the truth that
one should meditate on the Supreme as having a form. In the Båhad-äraëyaka
Upaniñad (1.4.7) it is said:

ätmety evopäséta"

"One should worship the Supreme Lord."

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (1.4.15) it is also said:

ätmänam eva lokam upäséta

"Everyone should worship the Supreme Lord."

In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad (1.8-10) it is said:

tad u hoväca hairaëyo gopa-veçam abhräbhaà taruëaà kalpa-drumäçritam. tad

iha çlokä bhavanti. sat-puëòaréka. . .

"Brahmä said: The Supreme Personality of Godhead is a cowherd boy. His

complexion is like a monsoon cloud. He stays under a desire tree. The following
verses describe Him: His eyes are like lotus flowers. . . "

After thus describing the form of the Supreme Lord, the Gopäla-täpané
Upaniñad (1.10) concludes:

cintayaàç cetasä kåñëaà

mukto bhavati saàsåteù.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "Meditating on Lord Kåñëa in this way, a person becomes free from the cycle of
repeated birth and death."

Saàçaya (doubt): Does one attain liberation by worshiping the Lord in His
formless feature or by worshiping the Lord in His feature with a form?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): One should worship the Lord in His
formless feature. Only in that way will one attain liberation. Only by meditating on
the Lord with undivided attention does one attain liberation. Because in the form
of the Lord there are eyes and many other different limbs and features of the Lord
it is not possible to give undivided attention to any of them, and therefore it is not
possible to attain liberation by meditating on the form of the Lord.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 20

samäna evaà cäbhedät

samänaù—equal sentiment; evam—thus; ca—although; abhedät—because of

not being different.

Although it is not divided in that way, because of non-difference.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "ca" here means "although". Although the Lord's eyes and other
bodily features and limbs are all different, still they leave the same impression on
the mind. The features of the Lord are like golden statues, which although present
in a great variety of forms, still, because they are all made of gold, leave the same
impression on the mind. Why is that? the sütra explains: "abhedät" (because of
non-difference). This means, "because the Lord's eyes and other features and
limbs are not different from His soul or self". For this reason, by worshiping the
form of the Supreme Lord one attains liberation. If this were not so then the
description in Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad (1.10), “cintayaàç cetasä kåñëaà mukto
bhavati saàsåteù" (Meditating on the form of Lord Kåñëa in this way, a person
becomes free from the cycle of repeated birth and death.) would not be true. In the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Småti-çästra it is said:

satya-jïänänantänanda-mätraika-rasa-mürtayaù

"The forms of the Supreme Lord are undivided. They are all full of eternity,
knowledge, infinity, and bliss."

In this way it is said that although the Lord's forms present a very wonderful
variety, still They are all one in essence. Although this truth was also described in
sütra 3.2.14, the merciful teacher of Vedänta repeats the same teaching so this very
difficult topic may be clearly understood.

In this section the truth that one should meditate on all the qualities of the
different forms of the Lord has been explained. Now will be considered the nature
of the qualities the Lord manifests in His äveça incarnations, where He gives
special powers to certain individual souls. In the Chändogya Upaniñad (7.1.1 and
3) it is said:

adhéhi bhagavan iti hopasasäda sanat-kumäraà naradas taà hoväca. . . taà mäà
bhagavän çokasya päraà tärayatu.

"Närada approached Sanat-kumära and said, `O master, please teach me. . . O

master, please take me across this ocean of grief'."

Sanat-kumära and some other individual spirit souls are çakty-äveça-avatäras of

the Lord. This means that the Lord has empowered them with knowledge or
certain other virtues. That is why Sanat-kumära is here addressed as "bhagavän"
(master).

Saàçaya (doubt): Should one meditate on these great devotees as having all the
transcendental qualities of the Supreme Lord or should one not meditate on them
in that way?

The author of the sütras here considers this question. First He gives the positive
view.

Sütra 21

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

sambandhäd evam anyaträpi

sambandhät—because of the touch; evam—thus; anyatra—in others; api—also.

Because of His touch it is like this in others also.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

All the qualities of the Lord are present in the four Kumäras and the other
çakty-äveça-avatäras. Why is that? The sütra explains: "sambandhät" (because of
His touch). As fire transforms an iron rod, so the touch of the Supreme Lord
transforms these great devotees.

Now the author of the sütras gives the negative view.

Sütra 22

na väviçeñät

na—not; vä—or; aviçeñät—because of non-difference.

Or not, because of non-difference.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

One should not meditate on all the qualities of the Supreme Lord being present
in the çakty-äveça-avatäras. Why not? The sütra explains: "aviçeñät" (because of
non-difference). This means that even though the Lord has given them special
powers, they remain individual spirit souls. They are not fundamentally different
from other individual spirit souls. The word "vä" (or) here hints that because they
are very dear to the Lord, these souls should be treated with great respect.

Sütra 23

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

darçayati ca

darçayati—reveals; ca—and.

It also reveals it.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

This truth is revealed in the Chändogya Upaniñad (7.1.3), for Närada Muni, who
is here seeking the truth, is himself a çakty-äveça-avatära. In this way it is clear that
all the qualities of the Lord are not present in the çakty-äveça-avatäras.

Sütra 24

sambhåti-dyu-vyäpty api cätaù

sambhåti—maintenance; dyu—in the sky; vyäpti—spreading; api—also; ca—

and; ataù—thus.

Therefore maintenance and being present everywhere in the sky also.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In this sütra the words "sambhåti" and “dyu-vyäpti" are brought together in a
samähära-samäsa. These two qualities should not be attributed to the çakty-äveça-
avatäras. The reason has been given in the previous sütra. The reason is the çakty-
äveça-avatäras are individual spirit souls (jévas). In the Eëäyanéya recension of the
Vedas it is said (Taittiréya Brähmaëa 2.4.7.10):

brahma jyeñöhä véryä sambhåtäni brahmägre jyeñöhaà divam ätatäna. brahma

bhütänäà prathamaà tu jajïe. tenärhati brahmaëä spardhituà kaù.

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead possesses all powers. The Supreme

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Personality of Godhead is present everywhere in the great sky. The Supreme
Personality of Godhead is the first of persons. Who can rival the Supreme
Personality of Godhead?"

In these words the glories of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, beginning

with His maintenance of all and His being present everywhere in the great sky, are
described. These qualities cannot be ascribed to the individual spirit souls, for they
are qualities of the Supreme Personality of Godhead alone.

Now the author of the sütras gives another reason why these qualities cannot be
ascribed to the individual spirit souls.

Sütra 25

puruña-vidyäyäm iva cetareñäm anämnänät

puruña—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; vidyäyäm—in the knowledge

(the Puruña-sükta prayers); iva—like; ca—also; itareñäm—of others; anämnänät—
because of not being mentioned.

It is taught of the Supreme Personality of Godhead in the Puruña-sükta prayers,

and it is not mentioned of others.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the descriptions of the four Kumäras and other çakty-äveça-avatäras there is

no description of their being the creator and controller of all or of having other
qualities that belong to the Supreme Lord alone. For this reason all the qualities of
the Supreme Lord should not be ascribed to them. Giving an example of the
difference between the individual souls and the Supreme Lord, the sütra explains:
"puruña-vidyäyäm" (It is taught of the Supreme Personality of Godhead in the
Puruña-sükta prayers). The word "ca" (and) here hints, "and in the Gopäla-täpané
Upaniñad and other scriptures also". These qualities of the Lord are mentioned in
the descriptions of the Lord in these places but they are not mentioned in the
descriptions of Kumäras and other çakty-äveça-avatäras.
The çakty-äveça-avatäras may be compared to iron rods heated by a fire. As
iron rods heated by a fire have two natures, so the çakty-äveça-avatäras may have
two natures also. One nature is like the heat generated by the fire. That nature is
the specific qualities with which the Lord has empowered the çakty-äveça-avatära.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

They who meditate on these qualities in the çakty-äveça-avatära may thus meditate
on all the qualities of the Supreme Lord. The other nature is like the iron rod
itself. That is the nature of the individual spirit soul who is empowered to be a
çakty-äveça-avatära. They who meditate on his qualities may not ascribe to him all
the qualities of the Supreme. However, they may meditate on the çakty-äveça-
avatära's possessing the qualities of a great devotee, such as his being very dear to
the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Because He dearly loves them, the Lord accepts the çakty-äveça-avatära
devotees as His personal associates. That is why in the Çrémad-Bhägavatam and
other scriptures these great devotees are respectfully addressed as "bhagavän"
(lord). However, because they are individual spirit souls, the çakty-äveça-avatäras
are all humble and lowly in comparison to the Supreme Personality of Godhead
Himself. This is the proper understanding of their nature.

Adhikaraëa 10
The Ferocity of the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

It has been said that one should meditate on the Supreme, especially by
thinking of the Lord's qualities as described in one's own branch of the Vedas.
However, it is said that they who desire liberation should not meditate on certain
of the Lord's qualities. In the Atharva Veda (8.3.4 and 17) it is said:

agne tvaà yätudhänasya bhindi

"O fiery Lord, please cut Yätudhäna into pieces!"

and

taà pratyaïcam arciñä bidhya marma

"O Lord, with Your flames please break open Yätudhäna's heart!"

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Saàçaya (doubt): Should one meditate on the Lord as one who cuts others to
pieces, or should one not meditate on Him in this way?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because the Lord becomes violent only to
stop the demons, therefore it is proper to meditate on the Lord in this way.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 26

vedhädy artha-bhedät

vedha—cutting into pieces; ädi—beginning with; artha—of result; bhedät—

because of difference.

(Not) cutting into pieces and other violent acts because of a different result.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "na" (not) should be understood in this sütra. One should not
meditate on the Lord as the punisher who cuts others into pieces and performs
other violent acts. Why not? The sütra explains: "atha-bhedät" (because of a
different result). The word "artha" here means “result". The saintly devotees
renounce violence and other negative qualities. That is the meaning here. The
Lord Himself declares (Bhagavad-gétä 8.8):

amänitvam adambitvam
ahiàsä kñäntir arjavam

"Humility, pridelessness, nonviolence, tolerance, and simplicity, . . . all these I

declare to be knowledge."*

Also, in Çrémad-Bhägavatam the Lord says:

nivåttaà karma seveta

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 pravåttaà mat-paras tyajet

"My devotee should renounce materialism and cultivate renunciation."

Adhikaraëa 11
Meditation on the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya (the subject to be discussed): In the Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (1.11) it is

said:

jïätvä devaà sarva-päçäpahäniù

kñéëaù kleçair janma-måtyu-prahäniù
tasyäbhidhyänät tåtéyaà deha-bhede
viçvaiçvaryaà kevala äpta-kämaù

"By understanding the Supreme Personality of Godhead, a person becomes

free from all material bondage, his sufferings perish, and he escapes the cycle of
repeated birth and death. By meditating on the Supreme Lord, when one is finally
separated from the material body he enters the opulent spiritual world and attains
a spiritual body where all his desires are fulfilled."

This verse means that by understanding the Supreme Personality of Godhead a

person cuts the ropes of false possessiveness that make him think that his body,
house, and other things are all his property. Here the scripture glorifies knowledge
of the Lord, saying that knowledge destroys the sufferings of repeated birth and
death. By understanding the Lord and always meditating on Him, a person
becomes free of both gross and subtle material bodies, travels beyond Candraloka
and Brahmaloka, and enters the third realm, the realm of the Supreme Personality
of Godhead. What is that realm of the Lord like? The scripture explains: it is
"viçvaiçvarya" (full of spiritual opulences), it is "kevala" (untouched by matter),
and it is "äpta-käma" (all desires are fulfilled there). Here it is clearly said that this
abode is attained by understanding the truth of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, truth taught in the revealed scriptures.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Saàçaya (doubt): Is meditation mandatory or optional?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Meditation is mandatory, for it increases

faith and thus fixes the mind on the Lord.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 27

hänau tüpäyana-çabda-çeñatvät kuçäcchanda-stuty-upagänavat tad uktam

hänau—in destruction; tu—indeed; upäyana—approaching; çabda—statement;

çeñatvät—because of being a supplement; kuça—kuça grass; äcchanda—according
to desire; stuti—prayer; upagäna—song; vat—like; tat—that; uktam—said.

But in liberation because of approaching, because of the Çruti-çästra, and

because of the means to the end it is like voluntary kuça grass, prayers and hymns.
This is said.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is used here to begin the refutation of the opponent's
argument. When, by understanding the truth of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, a person becomes free from the ropes of matter, such a wise devotee
falls in love with the Supreme Personality of Godhead. In that condition he
spontaneously meditates on the qualities of the Lord as they are described in the
revealed scriptures. He does this as a person voluntarily takes kuça grass, recites
prayers, and sings hymns. As a student, when his daily studies are completed, may
of his own accord take kuça grass in his hand and then recite prayers and sing
hymns, so the liberated souls of their own accord meditate on the Supreme
Personality of Godhead.
This is hinted by the use of the word "abhidhyäna". The reason for this is given
in the word "upäyana" (he has approached the Supreme Lord). The word
"upäyana" means that he loves the Lord and he has approached the Lord. The
word "çabda" means "words of instruction". The word "çeñatvät" means "because
all these words are the means to attain a specific end". This is described in Båhad-
äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.21):

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

tam eva dhéraù. . . .

"A wise man, aware of the Lord's true nature, should engage his intelligence in
the Lord's service. He should not meditate on other things. He should not waste
many words speaking of other things."

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (3.9.41) the Lord Himself says:

pürtena tapasä yajïair

dänair yogaih samädhinä
brähmaà niùçreyasaà puàsäà
mat-prétis tattvavin-matam

"It is the opinion of expert transcendentalists that the ultimate goal of

performing all traditional good works, penances, sacrifices, charities, mystic
activities, trances, etc., is to invoke My satisfaction."*

For this reason the liberated souls of their own accord meditate on the Lord.
That is the meaning. It is very difficult to understand the truth by studying the
difficult Vedas and following the difficult path of logic, for there are many
branches of the Vedas and many complicated arguments in logic. One whose heart
is softened with love for the blissful Supreme Lord is not attracted to follow the
path of the Vedas or the path of logic, for these paths only make the heart harder
and harder. There are times, however, where these two paths can be employed to
increase one's love and devotion to the Lord.

In the following words the author of the sütras gives the reason and evidence
for all of this.

Sütra 28

sämparäye tartavyäbhävät tathä hy anye

sämparäye—in love for the Supreme Personality of Godhead; tartavya—of

bondage; abhävät—because of the non-existence; tathä—so; hi—indeed; anye—
others.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 When there is love for the Supreme Personality of Godhead, because of the
absence of bondage. So the others indeed.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "sämparäya" here means "the Supreme Personality of Godhead"

because all truths meet in Him. "Sämparäya" is therefore said to mean "love for
the Supreme Personality of Godhead". This word is formed by adding the affix
"aë" (Päëini's Añöädhyäyé 4.4.21). For one who loves the Lord meditation on the
Lord is spontaneous and not ordered by rules. Why is that? The sütra explains:
“tartavyäbhävät" (because of the absence of bondage). This means, "because there
is nothing to cross beyond" or “because there are no ropes of bondage that must
be severed". The Väjasaneyés (Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 4.4.21) explain:

tam eva dhéro vijïäya prajïäà kurvéta brähmaëaù. nänudhyäyed bahün çabdän
väco vigläpanaà hi tat.

"A wise man, aware of the Lord's true nature, should engage his intelligence in
the Lord's service. He should not meditate on other things. He should not waste
many words speaking of other things."

The Lord Himself explains (Çrémad-Bhägavatam 11.20.31):

tasmäd mad-bhakti-yuktasya
yogino vai mad-ätmanaù
na jïänaà na ca vairägyaà
präyaù çreyo bhaved iha

"For one who is fully engaged in My devotional service, whose mind is fixed on
me in bhakti-yoga, the path of speculative knowledge and dry renunciation is not
very beneficial."*

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 12
The Way to Attain Liberation

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Thus it has been explained that one should worship and meditate on the Lord as
a person who possesses qualities. Now will be described two different ways to
worship the Lord. In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad it is said:

tad u hoväca hairaëyo gopa-veçam abhräbham. . .

"Brahmä said: The Supreme Lord appears like a cowherd boy, and His
complexion is like a monsoon cloud."

In the Räma-täpané Upaniñad it is said:

prakåtyä sahitaù çyämaù. . .

"Decorated with earrings and a jewel necklace, His complexion dark, His
garments yellow, and the hair on His head matted, saintly, two-armed Lord Räma
is accompanied by Goddess Sitä."

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.22) it is said:

sa vä ayam ätmä sarvasya vaçé sarvasyeçänù.

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is the master and controller of all."

By meditating on the Lord's sweetness one attains the Lord. This method is
called ruci-bhakti (the path of spontaneous love). By meditating on the Lord's
glory and opulence one also attains the Lord. This method is called vidhi-bhakti
(the path of following rules and regulations).

Saàçaya (doubt): Of these two kinds of meditation which is the best?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because the result of both these kinds of

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

meditation is uncertain, one should not desire to perform either of them.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 29

chandata ubhayävirodhät

chandataù—by the will; ubhaya—of both; avirodhät—because there is no

contradiction.

By His will (it is not so), for in these two there is no contradiction.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

As a frog jumps from far away, so the word "na" (not) should be brought to this
sütra from sütra 22. The word "chandataù" here means, "by the Supreme Lord's
will the way of devotion is divided into two paths". How is that? The sütra
explains: "ubhayävirodhät" (for in these two there is no contradiction). This means
that the descriptions of these two paths do not exclude each other. This is the
meaning. The beginningless and eternally perfect way of devotion flows like a
heavenly Ganges river from the Lord's personal associates to the newest beginners
in devotional service. Lord Hari wishes that all the spirit souls in the material
universes associate with His devotees and voluntarily follow the path of devotion
to Him. By following that path they can attain Him. To attain this end one should
seek the mercy of a kind madhyama-adhikäré devotee. The madhyama-adhikäré
devotee is described in the following words:

éçvare tad-adhéneñu
bäliçeñu dviñatsu ca
prema-maitré-kåpäpekñä
yaù karoti sa madhyamaù

"A person who loves the Supreme Lord, befriends the devotees, is merciful to
the people in general, and ignores the demons, is a madhyama-adhikäré devotee of
the Lord."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 In this way it is clearly shown that Lord Hari is not cruel, unfair, or unkind.

Sütra 30

gater arthavattvam ubhayathänyathä hi virodhaù

gateù—of the goal; arthavattvam—attainment; ubhayathä—on both; anyathä—

otherwise; hi—indeed; virodhaù—contradiction.

In both ways the goal is attained, for otherwise there would certainly be a
contradiction.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Both paths lead to the goal. By the path of meditating on the Lord's sweetness
and also by the path of meditating on the Lord's glory and opulence, one may
attain the goal. The word “artha" here means "the goal of life". The attainment of
the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the highest goal of life. That is the
meaning. To say this is not so is to contradict the scriptural texts that describe
these two paths. The word “hi" (certainly) in this sütra is evidence that both paths
are equal. One cannot quote sütra 3.3.6 to say that the methods of these two paths
should be combined. These two paths are like the path of the ekänté devotees, who
do not wish to see in the Lord qualities other than those manifested by the Lord's
form they have chosen to worship. This will be described in sütra 3.3.56.

Adhikaraëa 13
The Path of Spontaneous Love

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya (the subject to be discussed): Here the author of the sütras proves that

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

ruci-bhakti (the path of spontaneous love) is the best.

Saàçaya (doubt): Who is best: one who follows the path of spontaneous love
(ruci-bhakti) or one who follows the path of following rules and regulations (vidhi-
bhakti)?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because he carefully follows all the rules,
one on the path of vidhi-bhakti is the best.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 31

upapannas tal-lakñaëärthopalabdher lokavat

upapannaù—best; tat—of that; lakñaëa—characteristic; artha—of the goal;

upalabdheù—because of attainment; loka—in the world; vat—like.

It is best, because of attainment of the goal that is He who has that nature, as in
the world.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

A person who worships Lord Hari by following the path of ruci-bhakti is the
best, or is the one who has attained the goal of life. Why is that? The sütra
explains: "tal-lakñaëärthopalabdheù" (for it brings the goal that is He who has that
nature). The phrase "He who has that nature" here means, "He who loves His
devotees". This refers to the Supreme Personality of Godhead when He manifests
His quality of sweetness. Here the word "upalabdheù" means “because of
independently attaining".
Then the author clarifies this by giving an example: “lokavat" (as in the world).
The Lord is like a great king who himself comes under the control of an expert and
devoted servant. This nature of the Lord does not in any way diminish His
supreme independence. This is so because the Lord's being controlled by the love
of His devotees is actually a great virtue on His part. This is the meaning.
The Supreme Personality of Godhead is attracted by the love of His devotees,
and He reveals His own sweetness to the devotees that love Him. Seeing His
sweetness, the devotees love Him all the more, and they respond by offering

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

themselves to the Lord. The Lord accepts this offering, and by doing that, He sells
Himself to His devotees in exchange for their love.
In this way the Lord makes His devotees very exalted and important so they can
directly associate with the Lord. Without this it would not be possible for the
devotees to see the Lord and associate with Him. Çrémän Çukadeva Gosvämé
explains (Çrémad-Bhägavatam 10.9.21):

näyaà sukhäpo bhagavän

dehinäà gopikä-sutaù
jïäninäà cätma-bhütänäà
yathä bhaktimatäm iha

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa, the son of mother Yaçodä, is

acessible to devotees engaged in spontaneous loving service, but He is not as easily
acessible to mental speculators, to those striving for self-realization by severe
austerities and penances, or to those who consider the body the same as the self."*

Although the Lord is controlled by all His devotees, He especially places

Himself under the control of the devotees filled with spontaneous love for Him.
Therefore the path of spontaneous love (ruci-bhakti) is the best of all paths and
the devotees who follow this path are the best of all devotees.

Adhikaraëa 14
The Methods of Devotional Service

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya (the subject to be discussed): Now the author of the sütras shows that
there are two kinds of devotional service, one kind having a single part, and
another kind having many parts. In the first chapter of the Atharva Veda's
Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad the eighteen-syllable mantra is described. There it is said
(1.6):

yo dhyäyati rasayati bhajati so 'måto bhavati

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "One who meditates on the Supreme Personality of Godhead, glorifies Him,
and worships Him, becomes liberated."

Saàçaya (doubt): Can one attain liberation by performing only one of these
three, or must one perform them all?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The Upaniñad names all three of them, and,
after naming them, says that then one becomes liberated. Therefore one must
perform all three in order to become liberated.

Siddhänta (conclusion): in the following words the author of the sütras gives His
conclusion.

Sütra 32

aniyamaù sarveñäm avirodhäc chabdänumänäbhyäm

aniyamaù—without a rule; sarveñäm—of all; avirodhät—because there is no

contradiction; çabda—Çruti-çästra; anumänäbhyäm—and Småti-çästra.

There is no rule for them all, for there is no contradiction with the Çruti-çästra
and Småti-çästra.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

No rule declares that meditation, glorification, and worship must all be

performed in order to attain liberation. Any one of them is sufficient for liberation.
Why is that? The sütra declares: "çabdänumänäbhyäm". This means “for there is
no contradiction with the Çruti-çästra and Småti-çästra". Later in the Gopäla-
täpané Upaniñad (1.10) it is said:

cintayaàç cetasä kåñëaà

mukto bhavati saàsåteù

"By meditating on Lord Kåñëa a person becomes liberated from the cycle of
repeated birth and death."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad (1.12) it is also said

païca-padaà païcäìgaà japan dyäväbhümé süryäcandramasau sägné

"By chanting these five names one attains the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
whose potencies are manifested as the heavenly planets, the earth, the sun, the
moon, and fire."

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (12.3.51) it is said:

kértanäd eva kåñëasya

mukta-saìgaù paraà vrajet

"Simply by chanting the Hare Kåñëa mahä-mantra one can become free from
material bondage and be promoted to the transcendental kingdom."*

It is also said:

eko 'pi kåñëäya kåtaù pramäëo

daçäçvamedhävabhåthair na tulyaù
daçäçvamedhé punar eti janma
kåñëa-pramäëé na punar-bhaväya

"Ten açvamedhävabhåthas are not equal to once bowing down before Lord
Kåñëa. One who performs ten açvamedhas again takes birth. One who bows before
Lord Kåñëa never takes birth again."

These passages do not in any way oppose the statement of Gopäla-täpané

Upaniñad 1.6. If this were so then each scriptural statement affirming that
liberation is attained by performing a certain kind of devotional service would
have to be rejected. Therefore the statement of Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad (1.6), "He
becomes liberated" must be considered to be connected individually to each of the
statements, "He who meditates on the Supreme Personality of Godhead," "He
who glorifies the Supreme Personality of Godhead", and “He who worships the
Supreme Personality of Godhead".
The meaning here is, "If even only one of the many kinds activities of
devotional service brings liberation, then how much more effectively will the
performance of many kinds of activities in devotional service bring one to

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

liberation?" This is a hint pointing to the nine activities of devotional service,
beginning with hearing and chanting about the Lord.

Here someone may object: Is it not so that the Çruti-çästras teach that liberation
is attained by meditation alone? In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.5.6 and 2.4.5)
it is said:

ätmä vä are drañöavyaù

"In a trance of meditation one should gaze on the Supreme Personality of

Godhead."

Therefore how can it be said that liberation is attained by other methods, such
as chanting the glories of the Lord?

To this I reply: Chanting the glories of the Lord and the other activities of
devotional service are woven together with meditation on the Lord. They are not
separate. Therefore when one chants the Lord's glories or performs other activities
of devotional service, meditation on the Lord is also present, and when one
meditates on the Lord, chanting the Lord's glories and the other activities of
devotional service are also present.

Here someone may object: It is not correct to say that one can attain liberation
simply by understanding the truth about the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
Although they are perfect in knowledge of the Lord, Brahmä, Çiva, Indra, and the
other demigods still remain in the material world. Indeed it is even seen that
sometimes they oppose the Lord's desires.

If this is said, then the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 33

yävad-adhikäram avasthitir ädhikärikäëäm

yävat—as long as; adhikäram—the post; avasthitiù—the situation;

ädhikärikäëäm—of they who hold the posts.

The office-holders stay for the duration of their terms in office.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

We do not say that everyone who has perfect knowledge of the Supreme
Personality of Godhead at once attains liberation. However, their accumulated
past karma is all destroyed by their knowledge of the Lord, and their present
actions also bear no karmic result. When the term of life in their present body is
exhausted, then they will attain liberation. Because they hold posts in the
management of the universe, Brahmä and the other demigods do not become
liberated until their terms of office expire. This is so even though their past and
present karmic reactions are already destroyed.
When their terms of office expire, then they become liberated and enter the
supreme abode of the Lord. This should be understood. The demigod Indra and
the others like him that have relatively short terms of office go, at the end of their
terms, to the demigod Brahmä, whose term of office is much longer. When
Brahmä attains liberation they all attain liberation with him. The author of the
sütras will describe this later in this book (4.3.10).
As for the demigods opposing the Lord's desires, they do this only in
conformance with His wish, and in order to assist the Lord's pastimes. These
demigods may appear to be materialists engaged in sense gratification, but that is
only a false show. In truth they are transcendentalists fixed in knowledge of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. Therefore, when their terms of office expire,
they all attain liberation. Of this there is no doubt.

Adhikaraëa 15
Meditation on the Qualities of the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya (the subject to be discussed): Now will be discussed the truth that
qualities such as being neither great nor small should be attributed to the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (3.8.8) it is said:

etad vai tad akñaram gärgi brähmaëä abhivadanty asthülam aëava-hrasvam

"O Gärgé, the brähmaëas say that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

neither great nor small, tall nor short."

It is also said:

atha parä yayä tad akñaram adhigamyate yat tad adreçyam agrahyam agotram
avarëam acakñuù-çrotram

"Please know that the Supreme never wanes nor does He ever die. The
Supreme is never seen nor is He ever grasped. He is never born in any family. He
cannot be described in words. The eyes and the ears cannot know Him."

Saàçaya (doubt): Should these qualities of the Lord, where He is considered

imperishable and neither great nor small be included in every meditation on Him,
or should they not be included in every meditation on Him?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): In sütra 3.3.20 it was said:

samäna evaà cäbhedät

"Although it is not divided in that way, because of non-difference."

These words are understood to mean that the Supreme certainly does have a
form. However the previous description (of the Lord as being imperishable and
neither great nor small) cannot be considered to be a description of a being with
form.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 34

akñara-dhiyäà tv avarodhaù sämänya-tad-bhäväbhyäm aupasada-vat tad uktam

akñara—imperishable; dhiyäm—in the idea; tu—but; avarodhaù—acceptance;

sämänya—equality; tat—of Him; bhäväbhyäm—with the qualities; aupasada—The
Aupasat mantra; vat—like; tat—that; uktam—spoken.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 But because He has the same qualities the idea of imperishability should be
accepted, as in the Aupasat mantra. This has been explained.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) here begins the refutation of the opponent's argument.
The idea that the imperishable Lord is neither great nor small should be included
in all meditations on Him. Why is that? The sütra explains: "Because He has the
same qualities." The Kaöha Upaniñad (1.2.15) explains:

sarve vedä yat-padam ämananti

"All the Vedas glorify the Supreme."

The worshipable Supreme is always the same. Therefore these features are
present even though He has a form. Therefore the qualities like being neither
great nor small are also present in the Lord's form. This is the meaning.
Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (1.11) affirms that by understanding the Supreme
Personality of Godhead one attains liberation. The knowledge here is knowledge
of the Supreme as an extraordinary being, not as an ordinary being. To posit
anything else is illogical and an insult to the Supreme. Therefore the qualities like
being neither great not small should be included with the qualities like being all-
pervading, all-knowing, and full of bliss. In this way there is the knowledge that the
Supreme is an extraordinary being. From this it may be inferred that the Supreme
is different from all other persons. In this way it is proved that the form of the
Supreme is free from anything that is bad or to be rejected. In Çrémad-Bhägavatam
(8.3.24) it is said:

sa vai na deväsura-martya-tiryaì
na stré na ñaëòo na pumän na jantuù
näyaà guëaù karma na san na cäsan
niñedha-çeño jayatäd açeñaù

"He neither demigod nor demon, neither human nor bird nor beast. He is not
woman, man, nor neuter, nor is He an animal. He is not a material quality, a
fruitive activity, a manifestation or nonmanifestation. He is the last word in the
discrimination of `not this, not this,' and He is unlimited. All glories to the
Supreme Personality of Godhead."*

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Prayed to with these words, which describe a being neither great nor small, the
Supreme Personality of Godhead personally appeared in His transcendental form,
a form that must be the same as the being described in these prayers. That
appearance is described in Çrémad-Bhägavatam (8.3.30):

harir äviräsét

"Then the Supreme Personality of Godhead personally appeared."

In this passage Gajendra prayed to the Lord, addressing Him in a certain way,
and the Lord reciprocated by appearing in the form that was described in the
prayers. If those prayers were not appropriate to the form of the Lord, then the
Lord would have appeared only as a vague impersonal knowledge in Gajendra's
heart. In this way the idea that the Supreme Lord is a material demigod or some
other kind of material being is clearly disproved. However, the Lord does appear
in a form like that of a demigod or a human being, but these are His own forms
and they are not material.
With the words "aupasada-vat" the sütra gives an example to show that
secondary features inevitably follow primary features. The word "upasat" here
refers to a specific mantra in a specific Vedic ritual. When in its chanted in the
Jamadagnya ceremony where purodasa cakes are offered with the mantra "agner
vai hotram", the upasat mantra is chanted in the Säma Veda style. However, when
it is chanted in a Yajur Veda ceremony, the upasat mantra is chanted in the Yajur
Veda style. In this way the secondary nature follows the primary nature. Thus the
secondary qualities of the Lord must be understood according to His primary
qualities. This is described in the Vidhi-khaëòa in the following words:

guëa-mukhya-vyatikrame tad-arthatvän mukhyena veda-saàyogaù

"When primary and secondary meanings are in conflict the primary meaning
should be accepted."

Here someone may object: The nature of the Lord's form is described in the
following words:

sarva-karmä sarva-gandhaù

"The Supreme does everything. The Supreme possesses all fragrances."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 For this reason all meditations on the Lord should include a meditation on His
doing everything and possessing all fragrances."

If this is said then the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 35

iyad ämananät

iyat—this; ämananät—by the description.

It follows the description.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "iyat" means "in that way". In that way one should always meditate
on the qualities of the Supreme Lord's transcendental form. In what way? The
sütra explains: "ämananät" (following the description). This means, "following the
description of the Lord's primary qualities". On the Lord's primary qualities are
compulsory in meditation on Him. Therefore it is not necessary that in every
meditation on the Lord one must meditate on His doing everything or possessing
all fragrances.

Adhikaraëa 16
The Lord's Transcendental Abode

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now it will be explained that one should meditate on the transcendental abode
of the Lord. In the Muëòaka Upaniñad (2.2.7) it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

yaù sarva-jïaù sarva-vid yasyaiña mahimä bhuvi sambabhüva divye pure hy eña
samvyomny ätmä pratiñöhitaù.

"The all-knowing Supreme Personality of Godhead, whose greatness is seen

everywhere in the world, resides in His own effulgent city in the spiritual sky."

However, it is also said (Muëòaka Upaniñad 2.2.10):

brahmaivedam viçvam idaà variñöham

"the Supreme Personality of Godhead is present everywhere in the material

world."

Saàçaya (doubt): Is the description of the Lord's city in the spiritual sky merely
an allegory to describe the Lord's glories, or is there in truth such a city with many
wonderful palaces, gateways, surrounding walls, and other like features?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): What is the answer? The answer is that
these words are an allegory to describe the Supreme Lord's glory. In the
Chändogya Upaniñad (7.24.1) it is said:

sa bhagavaù kasmin pratiñöhita iti. sva-mahimni.

"Where does the Supreme Personality of Godhead reside? He resides in His

own glory."
In this way the Çruti-çästra describes the Lord's glory. Therefore the spiritual
sky described before is in truth the Lord's glory. It is not any other thing.
Therefore it is not possible that the Supreme Lord has an abode in a specific place.
This is confirmed by the passage beginning with the words “brahmaiva".

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 36

antarä bhüta-gräma-vat svätmanaù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 antarä—within; bhüta—made of material elements; gräma—city; vat—like;
svätmanaù—of Hismelf.

Within it is like a material city to His own.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

To His own that place in the spiritual sky is like a great city. The phrase "to His
own" means "to His own devotee". In the Çruti-çästra (Muëòaka Upaniñad 3.2.3
and Kaöha Upaniñad 1.2.23) it is said:

yam evaiña vånute tena labhyaù

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is attained only by one whom He

Himself chooses."*

Although everything in that city is perfectly spiritual, still it appears like a city
made of earth and the other material elements. The word "vat" (like) used in the
sütra refutes the idea that this city is actually material in nature. The sütra says that
it is "svätmanaù" (manifested from Himself). In the Muëòaka Upaniñad (2.2.11) it
is said:

brahmaivedam amåtam purastät paçcäc ca. brahma dakñiëataç cottareëädhaç

cordhvaà prasåtam. brahmaivedaà viçvam idaà variñöham.

"The Supreme is eternal. He is in the east and the west. He is in the south and
the north. He is below and He is above. He is everywhere in the universe. He is the
greatest."

As the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is full of transcendental

knowledge and bliss, has a wonderful variety of features, such as His hands, feet,
nails, and hair, so the Lord's transcendental abode, which is manifested from His
own personal form, also has a wonderful variety of features, such as the different
forms in its land and water. Even though they are all spirit and nothing else, still
they manifest a great variety, like a peacock feather or other colorful object.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 37

anyathä bhedänupapattir iti cen nopadeçäntara-vat

anyathä—otherwise; bheda—difference; anupapattiù—non-attainment; iti—

thus; cet—if; na—not; upadeça—teaching; antara—another; vat—like.

If it is said, "It is otherwise, for there is no difference", then I reply: No. It is not
so. For it is like other teachings.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

If it is said, "It is otherwise, for if there is no difference between them, then

there must be no difference between the creator of the abode and the abode
itself," then the sütra replies. “No. This is not a fault". Why is that? The sütra
replies, “upadeçäntara-vat" (for it is like other teachings). In the Taittiréya
Upaniñad it is said:

änandaà brahmaëo vidvän

"A wise man knows the bliss of the Supreme".

In this and other teachings it is said that even though the Supreme is one with
His attributes, still He is also different from them. That is the meaning.

(Note: Here the opponent claims that because the Lord is not different from
His transcendental abode, therefore it is not possible for the Lord to dwell in that
abode, for He is not different from it. This is refuted by the scriptures' assertion
that the Lord is also different from His attributes, including His transcendental
abode.)

Sütra 38

vyatihäro viçiàñanti hétara-vat

vyatihäro-changeable; viçiàñanti—distinguish; hi—indeed; itara—others; vat—

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

like.

Like others, they say they are interchangeable.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (1.4.15) it is said:

ätmänam eva lokam upäséta

"One should worship the Supreme Personality of Godhead as identical with His
spiritual abode."

This passage of the Çruti-çästra clearly shows that the Supreme Personality of
Godhead is identical with His spiritual abode and the spiritual abode is identical
with the Supreme Personality of Godhead. In this way it is proved that they are
mutually identical. The Supreme Personality of Godhead is the same as His
spiritual abode, and the spiritual abode is the same as the Supreme Personality of
Godhead.
In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad, in the passage beginning “sat-puëòaréka-
nayanam", as well as in the passage beginning "säkñät prakåti-paro 'yam ätmä
gopälaù", the Çruti-çästra clearly explains that the form of the Supreme Personality
of Godhead is identical with the Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself, and
the Supreme Personality of Godhead is identical with His own form. Thus the
Supreme Personality of Godhead,l whose form is full of knowledge and bliss,
manifests Himself, by the agency of His inconceivable potency, as His own
spiritual world, which He reveals only to His devotee and to no one else. In this
way it is proved that as one meditates on the Supreme Personality of Godhead, so
one should also meditate on the Supreme Personality of Godhead's spiritual
abode.

Adhikaraëa 17
The Qualities of the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

To confirm what has already been said, the following explanation is now begun.
Many texts that describe the specific features and qualities of the Lord are the
subjects of discussion (viñaya) here.

Saàçaya (doubt): Are the features and qualities of the Lord spiritual realities or
are they material illusions?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): In Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.19) it is

said:

neha nänästi kiïcana

"Variety is not present in the Supreme."

In Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (2.3.6) it is said:

athäta ädeço neti neti

"This is the teaching: It is not this. It is not this."

In this way the Çruti-çästra teaches that the Supreme has neither features nor
qualities.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 39

saiva hi satyädayaù

sä—she; eva—indeed; hi—indeed; satya—truth; ädayaù—beginning with.

Indeed, she is those that begin with truth.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (6.8) it is said:

paräsya çaktiù

"The Supreme has a potency that is spiritual."

In the Viñëu Puräëa (6.7.61) it is said:

viñëu-çaktiù parä

"Lord Viñëu has a potency that is spiritual."

This potency is clearly different from the illusory material potency (mäyä). As
heat is to fire, so this personal, spiritual potency is to the Lord. This potency is
called parä çakti (spiritual potency) or svarüpa çakti (the Lord's personal potency).
Because this spiritual potency manifests itself as the truthfulness and other
qualities of the Lord, these qualities are not material or illusory. They are the
actual qualities of the Lord. Two arguments proving that the Lord's truthfulness
and other qualities are manifestations of this spiritual potency will be given later.
The "neti neti" passage quoted by the pürvapakña has already been refuted in
sütra 3.2.22.
The word "ädi" (beginning with) should be understood to imply the Lord's
other qualities, such as His purity, mercy, forgiveness, omniscience, omnipotence,
bliss, handsomeness, and many others. That is why Paräçara Muni defines the word
"bhagavän" as "The Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is supremely pure,
filled with spiritual good qualities, and the master of great potencies". Then
Paräçara Muni explains that the Lord has many transcendental qualities, such as
His being the maintainer of all, the master of all, the master of all opulences,
possessing all intelligence, and many other qualities also. In the Viñëu Puräëa
(6.5.72-75) Parääsra Muni says:

çuddhe mahä-vibhüty-äkhye
pare brahmaëi çabdyate
maitreya bhagavac-chabdaù
sarva-käraëa-käraëe

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "O Maitreya, the word `bhagavän' means `The Supreme Personality of
Godhead, who is supremely pure, who is the cause of all causes, and who is the
master of great potencies.'

sambharteti tathä bhartä

bha-käro 'rtha-dvayänvitaù
netä gamayitä srañöä
ga-kärärthas tathä mune

"The syllable `bha' means `the maintainer of all' or `the protector of all'. O sage,
the syllable `ga' means `the leader', `the savior', or `the creator'.

aiçvaryasya samagrasya
véryasya yaçasaù sriyaù
jïäna-vairägyayos cäpi
ñaëëäà bhaga itéìganaù

"Full wealth, strength, fame, beauty, knowledge, and renunciation: these are the
six opulences of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.*

vasanti yatra bhütäni

bhütätmany akhilätmani
sa ca bhüteñv açeñeçu
vakärärthas tato 'vyayaù

jïäna-sakti-balaiçvarya. . .

"The syllable `va' means `the Supreme Personality of Godhead, in whom

everything abode, and who Himself abides in all beings.' Therefore the word
`bhagavän' means `The Supreme Personality of Godhead, who has all knowledge,
power, and opulences'. "

Therefore the Supreme Personality of Godhead's truthfulness and other

qualities are not different from Him. In this way it is proved that one should
meditate on the Supreme Personality of Godhead as being not different from His
qualities.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 18
The Goddess of Fortune

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be explained the truth that the goddess of fortune is the best of the
Lord's qualities. In the Çukla Yajur-Veda (31.22) it is said:

çréç ca te lakñméç ca patnyau

"O Supreme Personality of Godhead, Çré and Lakñmé are Your wives."

Some say that Çré is Ramä-devé and Lakñmé is Bhägavaté Sampat. Others say
that Çré is Väg-devé and Lakñmé is Ramä-devé. In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad
(.141) it is said:

kamalä-pataye namaù

"Obeisances to Lord Kåñëa, the goddess of fortune's husband."

In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad (1.42) it is also said:

ramä-mänasa-haàsäya
govindäya namo namaù

"Obeisances to Lord Kåñëa, who is the pleasure of the cows, the land, and the
senses, and who is a swan swimming in the Mänasa lake of the goddess of fortune's
thoughts."

In the Räma-täpané Upaniñad it is said:

ramädhäräya rämäya

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "Obeisances to Lord Räma, on whom the goddess of fortune rests."

Saàçaya (doubt): Is the goddess of fortune material, and therefore not eternal,
or is she spiritual, and therefore eternal?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): In Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (2.3.6) it is

said:

athäta ädeço neti neti

"This is the teaching: It is not this. It is not this."

These words show that the Supreme has no qualities and therefore it is not
possible that, ultimately, the goddess of fortune can be His wife. The goddess of
fortune is a material illusion, a manifestation of the material mode of pure
goodness.. Therefore the goddess of fortune is material and not eternal.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 40

kämädétaratra tatra cäya-tanädibhyaù

käma—desires; ädi—beginning with; itaratra—in other places; tatra—there;

ca—also; äya—all-pervasiveness; tana—giving bliss and liberation; ädibhyaù—
beginning with

Because She is all-pervading, the giver of bliss, and the giver of liberation, and
because She has many other virtues, She is the source of what is to be desired, both
there and in other places also.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The words "sä eva" (she indeed) are understood from the previous sütra. The
"she" here is the transcendental goddess of fortune, who in both the spiritual sky
(tatra), which is untouched by matter, and also in the world of the five material

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

elements (itaratra), fulfills the desires of her master. She is the eternal goddess of
fortune. The word "käma" here means "the desire for amorous pastimes". The
word "ädi" (beginning with) here means "personal service and other activities
appropriate for these pastimes.
In this way the goddess of fortune is transcendental. Why is that? The sütra
explains: "äya-tanädibhyaù". The word "äya" means "all-pervading". The word
“tana" means "giving liberation an bliss to the devotees". In these two ways she is
like the Lord Himself, who possesses truthfulness and a host of other virtues.
The word "ädi" (beginning with) here hints that she is spiritual in nature. The
statement of Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (6.8) also affirms that she is spiritual. In this
way she is spiritual and all-pervading. She has knowledge, compassion, and a host
of other virtues, and she is also a giver of liberation. In these ways the goddess of
fortune is not different from the Supreme Personality of Godhead. In the Viñëu
Puräëa it is said:

nityaiva sä jagan-mätä
viñëoù çrér anapäyiné
yathä sarva-gato viñëus
tathaiveyaà dvijottama

"The goddess of fortune is the eternal companion of Lord Viñëu. She is the
mother of the universe. O best of the brähmaëas, as Lord Viñëu is all-pervading, so
is she also."

It is also said in the scriptures:

ätma-vidyä ca devi tvaà

vimukti-phala-däyiné

"O goddess of fortune, You are the Lord's spiritual knowledge. You are the
giver of liberation."

If the goddess of fortune were not spiritual it would be improper to ascribe

these two qualities (all-pervasiveness and giving liberation) to her. That the
goddess of fortune is spiritual is described in the following words of the Viñëu
Puräëa:

procyate parameço yo
yaù çuddho 'py upacärataù
prasédatu sa no viñëur

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 ätmä yaù sarva-dehinäm

"May supremely pure Lord Viñëu, who is the master of the spiritual goddess of
fortune and the Supersoul of all living entities, be merciful to us."

The word "para-mä" in this verse means "the spiritual (para) goddess of fortune
(mä)". Because the goddess of fortune has been described as being all-pervading
and having other spiritual attributes, it is not possible that she is material. In this
way it is proved that the goddess of fortune is not material. For these reasons the
goddess of fortune is spiritual and eternal.

Here someone may object: Is it not so that if the goddess of fortune is the
spiritual potency of the Lord, (which is not different from the Lord), then it is not
possible for her to have devotion for the Lord? After all, it is not possible for a
person to have devotion to himself.

If this objection is raised, then the author of the sütras replies in the following
words.

Sütra 41

ädaräd alopaù

ädarät—because of devotion; alopaù—non-ending.

Because of devotion it does not cease.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Although in truth the goddess of fortune is not different from the Lord, still,
because the Lord is a jewel mine of wonderful qualities, and also because He is the
root of the goddess of fortune's existence, the love and devotion that the goddess
bears for Him never ceases. The branch never ceases to love the tree, nor the
moonlight the moon. Her love and devotion for the Lord is described in many
places in the Çruti-çästra. In the Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.29.37) it is said:

çrér yat-padämbuja-rajaç cakame tulasyä

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 labdhväpi vakñasi padaà kila bhåtya-juñöam

"Dear Kåñëa, the lotus feet of the goddess of fortune are always worshiped by
the demigods, although she is always resting on Your chest in the Vaikuëöha
planets. She underwent great austerity and penance to have some shelter at Your
lotus feet, which are always covered by tulasé leaves."*

Here someone may object: Is it not true that amorous love is possible only when
there are two: the lover and the beloved? If there is no difference between the
lover and the beloved, then love is not possible between them.

If this is said, then the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 42

upasthite 'tas tad-vacanät

upasthite—being near; ataù—thus; tat—of that; vacanät—from the statement.

It is in His presence. It is so because of the statement.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "upasthite" means "nearness". even though the Lord's potency and
the Lord Himself, the shelter of that potency, are one, still, because the Lord is the
best of males and His potency is the jewel of young girls, when They are together
there is naturally the perfection of blissful amorous pastimes. How is that known?
The sütra explains: "tad-vacanät" (because of the statement). In the Gopäla-täpané
Upaniñad (2.25) it is said:

yo ha vai kämena kämän kämayate sa kämé bhavati. yo ha vai tv akämena kämän

kämayate so 'kämé bhavati.

"He who lusts after pleasures is lusty. He who enjoys without material lust is
not lusty."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 In these words the amorous pastimes of the Lord are described. The word "a-
kämena" here means "with something that bears certainly similarities to lust". This
thing with some similarities to material lust is the Lord's pure spiritual love. That is
the meaning. With spiritual love He enjoys the goddess of fortune, who is actually
Himself. In this way He finds pleasure and fulfillment. For this there is no fault on
His part. By touching the goddess of fortune, who is actually Himself, the Lord
enjoys transcendental bliss. It is like a person gazing at his own handsomeness (in a
mirror). That is what is said here.
Different from His spiritual potency (parä çakti) is the potency of the Lord's
form (svarüpa-çakti). The Çruti-çästras and other scriptures explain that through
the svarüpa-çakti the Supreme Lord manifests as the best of males, and through
the parä çakti the Lord manifests His various transcendental qualities. It is through
the parä çakti that the Lord manifests His knowledge, bliss, mercy, opulence,
power, sweetness, and other qualities.
It is also through the parä çakti that the Vedic scriptures are manifested. In the
same way is manifested the earth and other places. manifesting as the Lord's
pleasure potency (hlädiné çakti), the parä çakti appears as Çré Rädhä, the jewel of
teenage girls.
Although the Lord and His parä çakti are not different, still, for enjoying
different pastimes, They are manifested as different. In this way the Lord's desires
are perfectly and completely fulfilled.
These manifestations of the parä çakti, beginning with the manifestation of the
Lord's qualities, are not manifested only recently. They are beginningless and
eternal. They will never cease to exist. Therefore the devotees should meditate on
the Supreme Personality of Godhead as accompanied by the goddess of fortune.

Adhikaraëa 19
The Many Forms of the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad (1.54) it is said:

tasmät eva kåñëaù paro devas taà dhyäyet taà raset taà bhajet taà yajet. iti. oà
tat sat.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "Therefore, Lord Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead. One should
meditate on Him, glorify Him, serve Him, and worship Him. Oà Tat Sat."

Saàçaya (doubt): Must one always worship Lord Hari as Kåñëa or is it possible
to worship Him in another form also?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because this passage ends the Upaniñad the
proper interpretation is the worship of Lord Hari must always be directed to the
form of Lord Kåñëa alone.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 43

tan nirdharaëäniyamas tad dåñöaiù påthag hy apratibandhaù phalam

tat—of that; nirdharaëa—of determination; a—not; niyamaù—rule; tat—that;

dåñöaiù—by what is seen; påthak—distinct; hi—indeed; a—not; pratibandhaù—
obstruction; phalam—fruit.

There is no restriction in that regard. It is different because of what is seen.

Non-obstruction is the result.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

There is no rule that says one must worship Lord Hari in His form as Kåñëa
only and not in His form of Lord Balaräma or any of His other forms. Even when
He is a tiny infant as Yaçodä's breast, Lord Kåñëa is always all-pervading, all-
knowing, and full of bliss. How is that known? The sütra explains: "tad-dåñöaiù"
(Because of what is seen). In Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad (2.48) it is said:

yaträsau saàsthitaù kåñëas

tribhiù çaktyä samähitaù
rämäniruddha-pradyumnai
rukmiëyä sahito vibhuù

catuù-çabdo bhaved eko

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 hy oàkäras hy aàçakaiù kåtaù

"Lord Kåñëa, accompanied by His three potencies and by Balaräma,

Aniruddha, Pradyumna, and Rukminé, stays in delightful Mathurä Puré. These four
names are identical with the name Oà."

Lord Balaräma and the other incarnations are all forms of Lord Kåñëa and so
They also should be worshiped. That is the meaning.

Here someone may object: If that is so then the phrase “kåñëa eva" (Kåñëa
indeed), emphasizing Lord Kåñëa would become meaningless.

To this objection the sütra replies: "påthak" (it is different). This means, "the
result is different". What is that different result? the sütra explains:
“apratibandhaù" (non-obstruction is the result). This means, "the removal of the
obstructions to the worship of Lord Kåñëa, obstructions caused by thinking any
other form is the highest form of the Lord." Therefore, if one is able and if one is
so inclined, he may worship other forms of the Lord, which are all non-different
from Lord Kåñëa.

Adhikaraëa 20
The Spiritual Master

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be explained the truth that Lord Kåñëa is attained by one who
approaches a genuine spiritual master. In its description of transcendental
knowledge, the Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (6.23) explains:

yasya deve parä bhaktir

yathä deve tathä gurau
tasyaite kathitä hy arthäù
prakäçante mahätmanaù

"Only to those great souls who have implicit faith in both the Lord and the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

spiritual master are all the imports of Vedic knowledge automatically revealed."*

In the Chändogya Upaniñad (6.14.2) it is said:

äcäryavän puruño veda

"One who approaches a bona fide spiritual master can understand everything
about spiritual realization."*

In the Muëòaka Upaniñad (1.2.12) it is said:

tad-vijïänärthaà sa gurum eväbhigacchet

"To learn the transcendental subject matter, one must approach a spiritual
master."*

Saàçaya (doubt): is the result obtained merely by hearing the scriptures from
the spiritual master, or must that hearing be accompanied by the attainment of the
spiritual master's mercy?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The result is obtained merely by hearing the
scriptures. Why would one need to attain the spiritual master's mercy?

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 44

pradäna-vad eva tad uktam

pradäna—gift; vat—like; eva—indeed; tat—that; uktam—said.

It is like a gift. That is said.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 When the spiritual master is pleased with a person that person is able to hear
the scriptures and follow the path of spiritual advancement. In this way one attains
the Lord. By merely hearing the scriptures and following the spiritual path one will
not be able to attain the Lord. Therefore it is said that the spiritual master's mercy
is essential. The prefix “pra" in this sütra hints at the word "prasäda" (mercy). The
lotus-eyed Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself explains in the Bhagavad-gétä
(13.8);

äcäryopasanaà çaucam

"Knowledge means to approach a bona fide spiritual master and become pure."

In this way the scriptures explain that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is
attained by the mercy of the spiritual master.

Adhikaraëa 21
The Spiritual Master's Mercy

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Saàçaya (doubt): Which is more important: one's own efforts or the spiritual
master's mercy?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): If one does not endeavor on one's own part,
then the spiritual master's mercy will not be effective. Therefore one's own effort
is more important.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 45

liìga-bhüyastvät tad dhi baléyas tad api

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 liìga—of indications; bhüyastvät—because of an abundance; tat—that; hi—
indeed; baléyaù—more powerful; tat—that; api—also.

Because of many symptoms it is more powerful. That also.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Even though some demigods assuming the forms of a bull and other creatures
had already taught him the truth of the Supreme, the disciple Satyakäma
nevertheless requested his spiritual master (Chändogya Upaniñad 4.9.2):

bhagaväàs tv eva me kämaà brüyät

"O master, please teach me the truth."

In the same way Upakoçala (Chändogya Upaniñad 4.10.1-4.14.3), even though

he had already attained spiritual knowledge from the sacred fires, nevertheless
approached his spiritual master for instruction. In these two passages of the
Chändogya Upaniñad it is clearly seen that the mercy of the spiritual master is the
most important.

Here someone may say: If that is so, then what is the need of doing anything at
all? One should not think in that way. One should still study the scriptures and
follow the spiritual path. In the Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (6.23) it is said:

yasya deve parä bhaktiù

"One should engage in devotional service to the Supreme Personality of

Godhead."

In the Çruti-çästra it is said:

çrotavyaù mantavyaù

"One should meditate on the Supreme Personality of Godhead and hear His

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

glories."

In the Småti-çästra it is said:

guru-prasädo balavän
na tasmäd balavattaram
tathäpi çravaëädiç ca
kartavyo mokña-siddhaye

"The spiritual master's mercy is most important. Nothing is more important.

Still, in order to attain liberation one should certainly hear the glories of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead and serve Him in many ways."

Adhikaraëa 22
The Supreme Personality of Godhead and the Individual Spirit Soul Are Not
Identical

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In this way it is proved that by attaining the spiritual master's mercy and by
worshiping the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who has the most glorious
transcendental qualities, one attains the desired result. Now an apparent
contradiction will be resolved.
In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad the sages ask Brahmä questions beginning with,
"Who is the supreme object of worship?" Brahmä answers that Lord Kåñëa is the
supreme object of worship, and devotional service is the way to attain Him.
However, in the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad (2.49) it is also said:

tasmäd eva paro rajasa iti so 'ham ity avadhärya gopälo 'ham iti bhävayet. sa
mokñam açnute sa brahmatvam adhigacchati sa brahma-vid bhavati.

"One should think, `I am the Supreme Lord beyond the passions of the material
world'. One should think, `I am Lord Gopäla'. In this way one attains liberation. In
this way one attains the state of being the Supreme Lord. In this way one

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

understands the Supreme."

The words "so 'ham" (I am He) clearly show the idea that the Supreme
Personality of Godhead and the individual spirit souls are not different.

Saàçaya (doubt): Do the words "so 'ham" (I am He) here teach the doctrine
that the Supreme Personality of Godhead and the individual spirit souls are
identical, or do they teach some aspect of the doctrine of devotional service, a
doctrine already been described in this book?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The natural meaning of the words here is
that the doctrine of oneness is the way to liberation.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 46

pürva-vikalpaù prakaraëät syät kriyä-mänasa-vat

pürva—previous; vikalpaù—concept; prakaraëät—from the context; syät—may

be; kriyä—actions; mänasa—mind; vat—like.

Because of the context it is like what goes before. It is like the thoughts and
deeds.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The declaration "so 'ham" (I am He) in the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad should be

understood according to the passages that precede it. Why is that? The sütra
declares: “prakaraëaät" (because of the context). In the beginning of Gopäla-
täpané Upaniñad (1.14) it is said:

bhaktir asya bhajanaà tad ihämütropädhi-nairäçyenämusmin manaù kalpanam

etad eva naiñkarmyam.

"Without any desire for material benefit in this life or the next one should

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

engage in devotional service to Lord Kåñëa. That will bring freedom from the
bonds of karma."

Devotional service is also described at the end of the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad

in these words:

sac-cid-änandaika-rase bhakti-yoge tiñöhati.

"One should engage in devotional service, which is eternal and full of

knowledge and bliss."

The middle portion of the Upaniñad cannot deal with a topic different from
what is discussed in the beginning and end. Here the sütra gives an example:
"kriyä-mänasa-vat" (It is like the thoughts and deeds). The deeds here are the
activities of devotional service, which begin with worship of the Lord. The
thoughts here are meditation on the Lord.
Devotional service was described in the beginning and end of the Upaniñad.
Therefore the declaration "so 'ham" (I am He) should be understood as a
description of some feature of the same devotional service already described in the
preceding passages.
Pushed by intense love or fear, a person may sometimes call out, "I am he!" In
this way a person may sometimes call out, "I am Kåñëa!" or "I am that lion!"
In beginning of the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad (1.2) the question is asked:

kaù paramo devaù

"Who is the Supreme Personality of Godhead?"

In that passage the sages asked Brahmä about the identity of Supreme, who is
the supreme object of worship, the deliverer from the world of repeated birth and
death, the shelter of all, the first cause of all causes. Brahmä replied:

çré-kåñëo vai paramaà daivatam

"Lord Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

Then, to help enable meditation on the Lord, Brahmä described Lord Kåñëa's
various qualities. Then Brahmä says (Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad 1.6):

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

yo dhyäyati. . .

"One who meditates on Lord Kåñëa, glorifies Him, and worships Him, becomes
liberated. He becomes liberated."

Thus Brahmä shows that by meditating on Lord Kåñëa, chanting mantras

glorifying Lord Kåñëa, and engaging in other activities of devotional service, one
becomes liberated from the world of birth and death. The again it is said (Gopäla-
täpané Upaniñad 1.7):

te hocuù kià tad-rüpam

"The sages said: What is His form?"

This question is about devotional service and the Supreme Personality of

Godhead, who is worshiped in devotional service. Brahmä answered this question
in these words (1.8):

tad u hoväca hairaëyo gopa-veçam abhräbham

"Brahmä said: He is a cowherd boy. He is dark like a monsoon cloud."

Then, after describing Lord Kåñëa's form, Brahmä describes the mantra to be
chanted. He says (1.11):

ramyaà punä rasanam

"Lord Kåñëa's mantra should chanted repeatedly."

Then Brahmä describes devotional service in these words (1.14):

bhaktir asya bhajanam

"One should engage in devotional service to Lord Kåñëa."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Then Brahmä describes the mantra one should chant in order to see Lord
Kåñëa's form. Brahmä says (1.24):

oàkäreëäntaritaà yo japati. . .

"To one who chants this mantra beginning with Oà, Lord Kåñëa reveals His
own transcendental form."

Then, in Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad 1.38 (tam ekaà govindam), Brahmä describes

Lord Kåñëa's transcendental form, which is full of knowledge and bliss. Finally
Brahmä concludes (1.54):

tasmäc chré-kåñëa eva paro devaù

"Therefore Lord Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

In the second chapter of Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad it is said that the gopés, after
enjoying pastimes with Lord Kåñëa, and after asking Him questions, and after
attaining His permission, presented a great feast before the sage Durväsä. Pleased,
the sage blessed them. When they asked him about Lord Kåñëa, the sage described
to them (in the passage beginning with the word "Çré Kåñëaù") the extraordinary
nature of Lord Kåñëa's pastimes. He told them that Lord k is the first cause of all
causes, that He is conquered by the pure love of His devotees, that He is dear to
His devotees, and many other glories of Lord Kåñëa. Then (in the passage
beginning with the words “sä hoväca"), Durväsä is asked about Lord Kåñëa's birth,
activities, mantra, and abode. In the passage beginning with the words "sa hoväca
täm" the sage answered the question by recounting a conversation of Brahmä and
Lord Näräyaëa. In that account he explained that Lord Kåñëa is perfect and
complete and he also explained that Lord Kåñëa is the savior from the world of
birth and death. Then, in the passage beginning with the words "vanair anekair
ullasat", Brahmä described the Lord's spiritual abode named Mathurä, which is
protected by the Lord's cakra and which is splendid with many forests. At this
point the "so 'ham" passage occurs (Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad (2.49):

tasmäd eva paro rajasa iti so 'ham

"One should think, `I am the Supreme Lord beyond the passions of the material
world'."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 In this way it is said that the condition of thinking oneself non-different from
the Lord is the cause of liberation. Because devotional service was described
previously in this Upanisad as the cause of liberation, the oneness with the Lord
here must but a certain feature of that devotional service. It must be a symptom of
ecstatic love, like the shedding of many tears or other symptoms of ecstatic love.
The passages “aham asmi" (I am He), "brahmäham asmi" (I a m the Supreme),
and other similar passages in the Taittiréya Upaniñad and other scriptures, passages
declaring the oneness of the individual soul and the Supreme, should all be taken
in this way, as expressions of persons overwhelmed with ecstatic love, expressions
that are actually proof that the individual souls and the Supreme are indeed
different persons and are not at all identical. This truth has already been explained
in this book.
In the following sütra will be presented further proof that the words "so 'ham"
(I am He) are indeed a symptom of devotional love and do not at all mean that the
individual souls and the Supreme are identical.

Sütra 47

atideçäc ca

atideçäö—by comparison; ca—and.

Also by comparison.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad (2.63) Lord Näräyaëa tells Brahmä:

yathä tvaà saha putraiç ca

yathä rudro gänaiù saha
yathä çriyäbhiyukto 'ham
tathä bhakto mama priyaù

"Anyone who becomes My sincere devotee becomes very dear to Me. As dear
as you and your sons are, as dear as Lord Çiva and his associates, as dear as the
goddess of fortune."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 In this verse it is seen that as Brahmä is accompanied by his sons, so Lord Kåñëa
is always accompanied by His devotees. The word "ca" (and) is explained in the
following words of Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad (2.91), where the Supreme Personality
of Godhead declares:

dhyäyen mama priyo nityaà

sa mokñam adhigacchati
sa mukto bhavati tasmai
svätmänam ca dadämi vai

"One who meditates on Me is eternally dear to Me. He attains liberation. He

becomes liberated. I give Myself to him."

In these words the Lord declares that the devotees are eternally dear to Him
and He also declares that he gives Himself as a gift to His devotees. If the
individual souls and the Supreme Lord are ultimately one, these two statements
cannot be at all possible. Therefore the scriptures' statement "so 'ham" (I am He)
should be understood as the description of a specific symptom of ecstatic love. This
statement ("so 'ham"), when found in the Räma-täpané Upaniñad and other
Upaniñads should also be explained in this way.
In conclusion, it is said that one attains liberation by the mercy of the spiritual
master and by devotional service to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. There is
no fault with that statement.

Adhikaraëa 23
Spiritual Knowledge Brings Liberation

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

True knowledge is defined as the scriptures' description of devotional service.

That knowledge leads to liberation. Here begins an elaborate description of that
truth. In the Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (3.8) it is said:

tam eva viditväti måtyum eti

nänyaù panthä nvidyate 'yanäya

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "I know the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is transcendental to all
material conceptions of darkness. Only he who knows Him can transcend the
bonds of birth and death. There is no way for liberation other than this knowledge
of that Supreme Person."*

In the Puruña-sükta prayers of the Åg Veda it is said:

tam eva vidvän amåta iha bhavati

"A person who knows the Supreme attains liberation."

Saàçaya (doubt) Is liberation caused by the performance of Vedic rituals

(karma), by spiritual knowledge (vidyä), or by rituals and knowledge together?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): How is liberation attained? It is attained by

performing Vedic rituals. This is proved in sütras 3.4.2-7. Or, if there must be some
knowledge, then Vedic rituals and knowledge should be combined together to
bring liberation. In the Çruti-çästra it is said:

tad-dhetor na tu tayor ekataram taà vidyä-karmaëé

"Vedic rituals and spiritual knowledge must be combined together to bring

liberation. Either of them alone is not enough."

It is also said:

ubhäbhyäm eva pakñäbhyäà

yathä khe pakñiëo gatiù
tathaiva karma-jïänäbhyäà
mukto bhavati mänavaù

"As a bird needs two wings to fly in the sky, so a man needs both Vedic rituals
and spiritual knowledge to attain liberation."

Or, perhaps spiritual knowledge alone is in truth the cause of liberation. After
all, the Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (3.8) declares:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

tam eva viditväti måtyum eti

"Only one who knows the Supreme Personality of Godhead can transcend the
bonds of birth and death."

After all is said and done it is not possible to reach a final conclusion in this
matter.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 48

vidyaiva tu tan-nirdharaëät

vidyä—knowledge; eva—indeed; tu—certainly; tat—of that; nirdharaëät—

because of the conclusion.

It is knowledge indeed, for that is the conclusion.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (indeed) is used here to dispel doubt. Spiritual knowledge, and
not Vedic ritual, is the cause of liberation. Neither is it necessary that spiritual
knowledge be combined with the performance of Vedic rituals in order to bring
liberation. Why is that? The sütra explains: "tan-nirdharaëät" (for that is the
conclusion). The conclusion is given in Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad 3.8. The word
"vidyä" (knowledge) here means "the knowledge that leads to devotional service".
In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.21) it is said:

vijïäya prajïäà kurvéta

"One should understand the Supreme, and thus become wise."

The "wisdom" here is clearly devotional service. In the Småti-çästra the word
"vidyä" is used in both these senses. One example is in the following words:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

vidyä-kuöhäreëa çitena dhéraù

"With the sharpened ax of knowledge a wise person cuts asunder the darkness
of ignorance."

Another example is in Bhagavad-gétä (9.2):

räja-vidyä räja-guhyam

"This knowledge is the king of education, the most secret of all secrets."*

The word "vidyä" may be interpreted in two ways. It is like the words
"kaurava" and "mémäàsä". The former may mean either "the Päëòavas" or “the
sons of Dhåtaräñöra", and the latter may mean either "the knowers of Vedic
rituals" or "the knowers of the Supreme".
Liberation is thus attained by knowledge, knowledge here being the direct
perception of the Lord standing outside the heart. The author of the sütras
declares this in the following words.

Sütra 49

darçanäc ca

darçanät—by seeing; ca—also.

Also by seeing.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Muëòaka Upaniñad (2.2.8) it is said:

bidyate hådaya-granthiç
chidyante sarva-saàçayäù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

kñéyante cäsya karmäëi
tasmin dåñöe parävare

"Thus the knot in the heart is pierced, and all misgivings are cut to pieces. The
chain of fruitive actions is terminated when one sees the Supreme Personality of
Godhead."

The meaning here is that one becomes liberated by seeing the Supreme
Personality of Godhead.

Here someone may object: Do the scriptures not say, “One attains liberation by
performing Vedic rituals"? Do the scriptures not say, "One attains liberation by
performing Vedic rituals and attaining spiritual knowledge"? These words of yours
contradict the scriptures.

If this is said then the author of the sütras give the following reply.

Sütra 50

çruty-ädi-baléyastväc ca na bädhaù

çruti—the Çruti-çästras; ädi—beginning with; baléyastvät—because of being

stronger; ca—and; na—not; bädhaù—refutation.

Also, it is not refuted, for the authority of the Çruti-çästras and other scriptures
is greater.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Çruti-çästra's declaration, "liberation is attained by transcendental

knowledge" cannot be refuted by our opponent's two scripture quotes. Why is
that? The sütra declares: "çruty-ädi-baléyastvät" (for the authority of the Çruti-
çästras and other scriptures is greater). This means, "for the authority of
Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad 3.8 and other passages of the Çruti-çästras and other
scriptures is greater". The word "ädi" (beginning with) here means that there are
also passages where this truth is hinted or explained indirectly. In the scriptures it
is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

indro 'çvamedhäc chatam iñöväpi räjä
brahmäëam éòyaà samuväcopasannaù
na karmabhir na dhanair näpi cänyaiù
paçyet sukham tena tattvam bravéhi

"After performing a hundred açvamedha-yajïas, King Indra approached the

demigod Brahmä and said, `Neither Vedic rituals, nor giving charity, nor any other
thing has made me happy. Please tell me how I may see happiness.' "

In the scriptures it is also said:

nästy akrtaù kåtena

"He who was never born is not attained by Vedic rituals."

As for the six sütras (3.4.2-7) quoted by the opponent, the author of the sütras
Himself will refute them in sütras 3.4.8-14. The word "ädi" (beginning with) means
that many other scriptural passages may also be quoted. The word “ca" (also)
again means that many more statements of scripture may be quoted to prove that
spiritual knowledge uproots all past karmic reactions. The passage beginning with
the words “tam vidyä" and the other passages quoted by our opponent will all be
refuted in sütra 3.4.11 by the author of the sütras Himself. In this way it has been
proved that spiritual knowledge is the true cause of liberation.

Adhikaraëa 24
Worshiping the Saintly Devotees

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be discussed the truth that liberation is attained by worshiping the
saintly devotees. In the Taittiréya Upaniñad (1.11.2) it is said:

atithi-devo bhava

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "Treat a guest as if he were a visiting demigod."

Saàçaya (doubt): Is the worship of saintly devotees a cause of liberation or is it

not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Liberation is already available by the mercy

of the spiritual master and the worship of the Supreme Lord. What need is there to
worship the saintly devotees?

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 51

anubandhädibhyaù

anubandha—repeated instructions; ädibhyaù—beginning with.

Because of many instructions.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "anubandha" here means, "because of many instructions declaring

that one should worship the saintly devotees". The Taittiréya Upaniñad's phrase,
"treat him as if he were a visiting demigod" means "worship him". This is so
because by the mercy of great devotees one attains liberation. If this were not so
then the Taittiréya Upaniñad would not have spoken in this way. Many great sages
who know the truth have also taught this in the Småti-çästra. In Çrémad-
Bhägavatam (5.12.12), Jaòa Bharata explains:

rahügaëaitat tapasä na yäti

na cejyayä nirvapaëäd gåhäd vä
na cchandasä naiva jalägni-süryair
vinä mahat-päda-rajo-'bhiñekam

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "My dear King Rahügaëa, unless one has the opportunity to smear his entire
body with the dust of the lotus feet of great devotees, one cannot realize the
Absolute Truth. One cannot realize the Absolute Truth simply by observing
celibacy (brahmacarya), strictly following the rules and regulations of householder
life, leaving home as vanaprastha, accepting sannyäsa, or undergoing severe
penances in winter by keeping oneself submerged in water or surrounding oneself
in summer by fire and the scorching heat of the sun. There are many other
processes to understand the Absolute Truth, but the Absolute Truth is only
revealed to one who has attained the mercy of a great devotee."*

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (11.12.1-2), Lord Kåñëa Himself explains:

na rodhayati mäà yogo

na saìkhyaà dharma uddhava
na svädhyäyas tapas tyägo
neñöa-pürtaà na dakñiëä

vratäni yajïäs chandäàsi

térthäni niyamä yamäù
yathävarundhe sat-saìgaù
sarva-saìgäpaho hi mäm

"My dear Uddhava, neither through añöäìga-yoga (the mystic yoga to control
the senses), nor through impersonal monism or an analytical study of the Absolute
Truth, nor through study of the Vedas, nor through practice of austerities, nor
through charity, nor through acceptance of sannyäsa, nor through many pious
deeds, nor through giving dakñiëä, nor through following vows, nor through
performing many yajïas, nor through chanting Vedic hymns, nor through visiting
holy places, nor through controlling the senses can one bring Me under his control
as much as one can by associating with saintly devotees. Their association frees
one from the touch of matter."

Here Lord Kåñëa personally teaches the importance of associating with saintly
devotees. The Lord here teaches a great secret of how to engage in devotional
service. The word “ädi" in this sütra indicates that one should also visit holy places
of pilgrimage and one should avoid they who commit blasphemy. In Çrémad-
Bhägavatam (1.2.16) it is said:

çuçrüñoù çraddadhänasya
väsudeva-kathä-ruciù
syän mahat-sevayä vipräù
puëya-tértha-niñevaëät

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "O twice-born sages, by serving those devotees who are completely freed from
all vice, great service is done. By such service one gains affinity for hearing the
message of Väsudeva."*

In the Padma Puräëa it is said:

harir eva sadärädhyaù

sarva-deveçvareçvaraù
itare brahma-rudrädyä
nävajïeyä kadäcana

"Lord Kåñëa is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of all the
demigods, and He should always be worshiped. Still, one should never disrespect
Brahmä, Çiva, and the other demigods."

Here someone may object: The mercy of the spiritual master and the
association of saintly devotees are both attained by the mercy of the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. Therefore the real cause of liberation is His mercy. even
good fortune does not happen independently. That also is caused by the Lord's
mercy. Indeed, all actions are caused by the Lord's mercy, as was explained in
sütra 2.3.39. Therefore it is not right to say that liberation is caused by the mercy of
the spiritual master or by any cause other than the mercy of the Supreme
Personality of Godhead.

To this objection I reply: Even though they are themselves caused by the Lord
Himself, still the spiritual master's mercy and the other causes like it are also
causes of liberation in their own right. This was already explained in the passage
beginning with sütra 2.3.40. The truth is that the Supreme Personality of Godhead
becomes conquered by His devotees and He gives them the power to grant His
own mercy to others. In this way the devotees are independent agents who can
deliver the Lord's mercy to others. When the devotees give their mercy to
someone, then the Supreme Lord also gives His mercy to that person. In this way
all seeming contradictions and the different passages of the scriptures are all
resolved.

Adhikaraëa 25
The Liberated Souls Have Different Relationships with the Supreme Personality

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Chändogya Upaniñad (3.14.1) it is said:

atha khalu kratumayaù puruño yathä kratur asmil loke puruño bhavati tathetaù
pretya bhavati sa kratuà kurvéta.

"Man is meant to worship the Supreme Lord. As one worships the Lord in this
life, so one will attain Him after death. Therefore one should worship the Lord."

Saàçaya (doubt): The worship of the Supreme Lord is naturally accompanied

by the worship of the spiritual master and the saintly devotees. This worship is is of
many kinds, some higher and some lower. Does the higher or lower level of one's
worship lead to a higher or lower result, or does it not lead to a higher or lower
result?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): In the Muëòaka Upaniñad (3.1.3) it is said:

niraïjanaù paraà samyam upaiti

"Liberated souls are all equal."

In this way the Çruti-çästra affirms that different levels of worship do not lead to
different results. Travelers who enter a city by different paths do not enter
different cities. They enter the same city. In the same way, although they have
attained Him by different paths, the liberated souls see the same Supreme Lord.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 52

prajïäntara-påthaktva-vad dåñöiç ca tad uktam

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 prajïä—knowledge; antara—other; påthaktva—variety; vat—possessing;
dåñöiù—sight; ca—and; tat—that; uktam—said.

As there are differences of knowledge, so also there are differences in sight.

That is stated.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.21) it is said:

vijïäya prajïäà kurvéta

"One should understand the Supreme, and thus attain wisdom."

Here are the words "understanding" and “wisdom". The meaning of the first is
straightforward, but the second really means devotional service to the Lord. As
there are thus different kinds of knowledge so also the devotees see the Lord in
different ways.
The sütra explains: "tad uktam" (that is stated). These words mean, "it is stated
that according to the devotees' different kinds of worship different higher and
lower results are obtained". Thus according to the way the Lord was worshiped the
devotees see the Lord in different ways. This is reflected in their liberation. The
sameness described above means that the liberated souls see the same Supreme
Lord.

Here someone may object: That may be. However, you say that without
knowledge one cannot see the Lord and without first seeing the Lord one cannot
attain liberation. Both statement are illogical. When the Supreme Lord was
personally present on the earth many persons who had no knowledge nevertheless
saw Him and many who saw Him did not attain liberation.

To this objection the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 53

na sämänyäd apy upalabdher måtyu-van na hi lokäpattiù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 na—not; sämänyät—ordinary; apy—even; upalabdheù—of perception; måtyu—
death; vat—like; na—not; hi—indeed; loka—of the world; äpattiù—attainment.

Not by ordinary vision, as not by death. Indeed not. There is attainment of that
world.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "api" (also) is here used for emphasis. As merely dying does not
bring liberation, in the same way ordinary seeing of the Lord also does not bring
liberation. What then is the result obtained by ordinary seeing of the Lord? The
sütra explains: "lokäpattiù" (there is attainment of that world). This is like The
Vidyädhara Sudarçana and the king Någa, who both attained ordinary sight of the
Lord and from that attained the higher material worlds.
Here someone may object: Did they did not attain liberation? If this is said,
then the sütra replies, "na hi" (indeed not). They did not. They attained a higher
world. That is the meaning. In the Näräyaëa Tantra it is said:

sämänya-darçanäl lokä
muktir yogyätma-darçanät

"By seeing the Supreme Lord with ordinary vision one attains the higher
material worlds. By seeing the Lord with spiritual vision one attains liberation."

This is the meaning here. There are two ways of seeing. One is covered by
matter and the other is not covered by matter. The first way of seeing the Supreme
Personality of Godhead is attained by many pious deeds. It brings one to
Svargaloka and the other higher material planets.
The second way of seeing the Supreme Personality of Godhead is attained by
understanding the truth of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This way of
seeing destroys the subtle material body (of mind, intelligence and false ego), gives
one a spiritual body filled with bliss, and makes one a dear associate of the Lord.
In this way it brings liberation. In this way everything is explained.
The sages say that they who are killed by the Lord see the Lord at the moment
of their death and in this way they also become liberated. This occurs because the
splendor of the Lord's cakra or other weapon destroys their subtle material body
(of mind, intelligence, and false ego). It should be understood that by seeing the
Lord these persons attain love for Him. To say otherwise would contradict many
statements of the scriptures.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 26
How to Attain Liberation

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

This section is begun to give firm proof that by seeing the Lord with eyes of
spiritual knowledge, one attains liberation. In the Muëòaka Upaniñad (3.2.3) and
Kaöha Upaniñad (1.2.23) it is said:

näyam ätmä pravacanena labhyo

na medhayä na bahunä çrutena
yam evaiña våëute tena labhyas
tasyaiña ätmä vivåëute tanuà sväm

"The Supreme Lord is not attained by expert explanations, by vast intelligence,

or even by much hearing. He is attained only by one who He Himself chooses. To
such a person He manifests His own form."*

Saàçaya (doubt): Does the Lord appear before a person only because the Lord
chooses to appear or does He appear because of a specific person's devotion to
Him and renunciation of the material world?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): the Lord appears only because He chooses
to appear, for that is what the scripture says.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 54

pareëa ca çabdasya tädvidhyaà bhüyastvät tv anubandhaù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 pareëa—by what follows; ca—also; çabdasya—of the word; tädvidhyam—being
like that; bhüyastvät—because of being more important; tu—indeed;
anubandhaù—what corresponds.

According to what follows, it is the same. It is because of being more important.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The statement here that the Lord appears before one whom He chooses is
actually the same as the statement that the Lord is attained by devotional service.
This is clearly stated in the verse that immediately follows this statement.
Therefore the meaning is not that the Lord appears only because He chooses to
appear. Here is the verse that immediately follows (Muëòaka Upaniñad 3.2.4):

näyam ätmä bala-hénena labhyo

na ca pramädät tapaso väpy aliìgät
etair upäyair yatate yas tu vidvän
tasyaiña ätmä viçate brahma-dhäma

"The Supreme Lord is not attained by one who has no spiritual strength, who is
wild or careless, or whose austerities are not appropriate. The Lord appears before
a person who strives by right means to attain Him. Such a person enters the
spiritual world."

The "right means" are described in the beginning of this verse. They are
spiritual strength, sober carefulness, and appropriate austerities. The word
"spiritual strength" here means "devotional service". The Supreme Lord Himself
explains:

vaçe kurvanti mäà bhaktäù

sat-striyaù sat-patià yathä

"As faithful wives control their saintly husband, so My devotees bring Me under
their control."

In the Bhagavad-gétä (8.22), it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

puruñaù sa paraù pärtha
bhaktyä labhyas tv ananyayä

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead, who is greater than all, is attainable by

unalloyed devotion."*

Here is the verse immediately following the "näyam ätmä pravacanena" verse
when it appears in the Kaöha Upaniñad (1.2.24):

nävirato duçcarität
näçänto näsamähitaù
näçänta-mänaso väpi
prajïänenainam äpnuyät

"Neither a person who has not abandoned sins, nor a person who is not
peaceful, nor a person who does not strive to attain Him, nor a person who does
not control his mind can, even though he may be very intelligent and learned,
attain the Supreme Lord."

A person who controls his senses, acts in a saintly manner, and meditates on
Lord Hari becomes able to see Lord Hari directly. Therefore one should engage in
the activities of devotional service. In this way the first and second statement
together mean that the Supreme Lord chooses to reveal Himself to they who
engage in His devotional service.
The first statement is that the Lord chooses who will attain Him. The Lord
chooses they who please Him and are dear to Him. He does not choose they who
do not please Him. He is pleased by they who engage in His devotional service. He
is not pleased by they who do not engage in devotional service. He personally
explains (Bhagavad-gétä 7.17):

teñäà jïäné nitya-yukta

eka-bhaktir viçiñyate
priyo hi jïänino 'tyartham
ahaà sa ca mama priyaù

"Of these, the one who is in full knowledge and who is always engaged in pure
devotional service is the best. For I am very dear to him, and he is dear to Me."*

In the Kaivalya Upaniñad (2) it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

çraddhä-bhakti-dhyäna-yogäd avehi

"With devotion, meditation, and faith one should try to understand the
Supreme."

If it were not true (that the Lord reveals Himself to they who love and serve
Him, and if instead it were true that He reveals Himself only on a whim to people
chosen at random, and if He thus did not care for the love and devotion of they
who serve Him), then one might justly become angry with the Lord and claim that
He is unfair.

Here someone may object: If this is so then why does the scripture explain that
the Lord reveals Himself to they whom He chooses? To this objection the sütra
replies: "“bhüyastvät" (because of being more important). The word "tu" (indeed)
in the sütra is used for emphasis. The meaning here is that the Lord's choosing is
the most important aspect in His directly appearing before a person. Actually the
Lord's choosing is the last of a chain of causes.
Here is the sequence of events: First there is association with saintly devotees
and service to them. By that service one learns the truth of the Supreme Lord and
also about one's own self. Then one becomes disinterested in whatever has no
relation to the Lord. Then one develops devotion and love for the Lord. That love
pleases the Lord and makes one dear to the Lord. Then the Lord chooses to reveal
Himself to that person.

Adhikaraëa 27
The Supreme Lord Resides in the Bodies of the Conditioned Souls

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

They who with the mellows of servitude, friendship, or other mellows, from the
beginning worship the Supreme Personality of Godhead who always stays in the
spiritual sky, will attain that spiritual sky and there they will directly see their
Lord. It is seen that some others, who are situated in the mellows of neutrality
(çänta-rasa), worship the Supreme Lord as present in their bellies and in other
parts of their bodies.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Viñaya (the subject to be discussed) Many statements in the scriptures describe
this worship of the Supreme Personality of Godhead as present in the devotee's
stomach and other bodily organs.

Saàçaya (doubt): Should one worship Lord Hari as present in one's belly and
other bodily organs, or should one not worship Him in this way?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): One should not worship Lord Hari as
present in one's belly and other bodily organs, for these things are all material.
However one should worship the Lord as eternally present in the spiritual sky.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 55

eka ätmanah çarére bhävät

eke—some; ätmanah—of the Supreme Personality of Godhead; çarére—in the

body; bhävät—because of existence.

Some because of the Lord's existence in the body.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here the word "eke" (some) means "some followers of the Vedas". The word
"çarére" means, “in the body", that is, "in the belly, the heart, and the brahma-
randhra". The word "ätmanaù" means “of Lord Viñëu". The phrase "the worship
of Lord Viñëu should be performed" is understood here. Why is that? The sütra
explains, "bhävät", which means “because He exists there". In the Nyäya-çästra it
is said:

akke cen madhu vindeta

kim arthaà parvataà vrajet

"If one finds honey in a nearby tree, why should one search for honey in a
faraway mountain?"

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The meaning here is that when the Lord is pleased (when one worships Him as
present in the devotee's body) and He will give the devotee residence in His own
abode. In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.87.18) it is said:

udaram upäsate ya åñi-vartmasu kürpa-dåçaù

parisara-paddhatià hådayam äruëayo daharam
tata udagäd ananta tava dhäma çiraù paramaà
punar iha yat sametya na patanti kåtänta-mukhe

"Among the followers of the methods set forth by great sages, those with less
refined vision worship the Supreme as present in the region of the abdomen, while
the Aruëis worship" Him as present in the heart, in the subtle center from which
all the präëic channels emanate. From there, O unlimited Lord, these worshipers
raise their consciousness upward to the top of the head, where they can perceive
You directly. Then, passing through the top of the head toward the supreme
destination, they reach that place from which they will never again fall to this
world, into the mouth of death."***

Adhikaraëa 28
Different Mellows in the Spiritual World

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In Chändogya Upanisad 3.14.1 and in other places in the scriptures, the worship
of the Lord in sweetness (mädhurya) and the worship of the Lord in opulence
(aiçvarya) have been described. Also it has been shown that the living entities, by
engaging in devotional service and associating with saintly devotees, by the Lord's
will attain Him as he appears in a specific form with specific qualities, a form
chosen by the devotee. In this way it is shown that these two features of the Lord
(sweetness and opulence) are not incompatible with each other.

Saàçaya (doubt): When the devotee worships the Lord as having certain
qualities, does the devotee attain a form of the Lord having those qualities alone
or does he attain a form of the Lord having other qualities also.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Whether the devotee meditates on the Lord
in sweetness or opulence, the devotee will meet a form of the Lord who has all the
qualities of both sweetness and opulence. This is so because whether meditated on
in sweetness or opulence, the Lord remains one person.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 56

vyatirekas tad-bhäva-bhävitvän na tüpalabdhi-vat

vyatirekaù—difference; tat—of that; bhäva—of the nature; bhävitvät—because

of the being; na—not; tu—indeed; upalabdhi—of the understanding; vat—like.

Not different, because of the nature of the meditation. Indeed, it is like

knowledge.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (indeed) is used here to dispel doubt. The sütra declares that
other qualities are not manifested. Why is that? The sütra explains: "tad-bhäva-
bhävitvät", which means, "because of the nature of the qualities that were the
object of meditation". This means that when one attains the Lord, the Lord
appears in the same form as was the object of the devotee's meditation. The word
"upalabdhi-vat" means "like knowledge". This means, "One meets a form of the
Lord like the form one knew in his meditation on the Lord."
Even though the meditator is aware that the Lord has many other qualities, still
when the devotee meets the Lord the Lord will manifest only the qualities that
were included in the devotee's meditation and not the Lord's other qualities. In
this way the description in Chändogya Upaniñad 3.14.1 is not contradicted.
In the following sütra the author gives an example to show that the devotee
meets a form of the Lord corresponding to what had been the object of the
devotee's meditation.

Sütra 57

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

aìgävabaddhas tu na çäkhäsu hi prativedam

aìga—parts; avabaddhaù—connected; tu—indeed; na—not; çäkhäsu—in the

branches; hi—indeed; prativedam—according to the Vedas.

Indeed, each has his part according to the different branches of the Vedas.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The performer of a yajïa assigns different priests to perform the different parts
of the yajïa. The priests are thus named according to the function they fulfill in the
yajïa.
The performer of the yajïa thus tells the priests, “You become the adhvaryu
priest. You become the hotä priest. You become the udgätä priest." In this way a
certain priest, even though he is expert in performing all the different functions,
accepts the limited role in the yajïa. He does not perform all the functions in the
yajïa. It is not possible for him to perform all the functions in all the different
branches of the Vedas.
The duties are distributed among the different Vedas. The hotä priest chants
mantras of the Åg Veda, the adhvaryu priest chants mantras of the Yajur Veda,
the udgätä priest chants mantras of the Säma Veda, and the brahmä priest chants
mantras of the Atharva Veda.
In this way, according to the wish of the person performing the yajïa, the
different priests accept different roles in the yajïa and different priestly rewards
(dakñiëä) also. In the same way, according to the wish of the Supreme Lord, the
individual living entities accept different roles in their service to the Lord and they
also meet the Lord in different ways according to the roles they play.
Now, to explain the mellows of mixed emotions, which were displayed by
Uddhava and others, and which are less pleasing, the author of the sütras gives
another example.

Sütra 58

manträdi-vad vävirodhaù

mantra—mantras; ädi—beginning; vat—like; vä—or; avirodhaù—not a

contradiction.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Or, there is no conflict, as in the case of mantras and other things.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

the Lord's desire here is to increase devotion of various kinds. It is like mantras.
As one mantra may be used in many rituals, another mantra may be limited to two
rituals, and another mantra used in one ritual only, so the Lord engages (His
devotees to worship Him some in many ways and some in one way only).
The word "ädi" (beginning with) in this sütra means "time and action". As at
any given time some trees may be sprouting leaves and flowers and other trees
may be shedding their leaves, and as at any given time one person may be an
infant, and another a teenager, so (at any given time the different devotees may
serve the Lord in many different ways, each person acting differently according to
the Lord's wish).
The sütra explains, "vävirodhaù" (thus there is no conflict). Thus after
liberation a person will attain the same relationship with the Lord that the person
desired while worshiping Him before the person became liberated. In this way it is
proved that qualities the Lord manifests to the liberated soul are not different
from the qualities the soul meditated on before attaining liberation.

Adhikaraëa 29
The Different Features of the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Viñaya (the subject to be discussed) Now the following texts from the Gopäla-
täpané Upaniñad will be considered:

eko 'pi san bahudhä yo 'vabhäti

"Although He is one, Lord Kåñëa appears in many forms."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

ekaà santaà bahudhä dåçyamänam

"Although He is one, the Supreme Personality of Godhead appears to be

many."

atha kasmäd ucyate brahma

"Why is He called the Supreme?"

He Supreme Personality of Godhead has many very different forms. In this way
He is like a vaidürya jewel. Although He is one He has many different forms and
many different qualities.

Saàçaya (doubt): Should one meditate on the fact that the Supreme Personality
of Godhead has many different forms and many different qualities, or should one
not meditate on this fact?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The Lord's blissfulness and other like
qualities should always be the object of meditation (as was explained in sütra
3.3.12). However, the plurality of forms contradicts the Lord's oneness. Therefore
the Lord's plurality of forms should not be an object of meditation.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 59

bhümnaù kratu-vaj jäyastvaà tathä hi darçayati

bhümnaù—of the plurality; kratu—yajïa; vat—like; jäyastvam—pre-eminence;

tathä—si; hi—indeed; darçayati—shows.

Like a yajïa, plurality is most important. So, indeed, it reveals.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The Lord's plurality of forms is His most important feature. As yajïas should
always be performed, so the Lord's plurality of forms should always be an object of
meditation, for this plurality is an essential feature of the Lord.
As in an agniñöoma-yajïa, from its beginning until the avabhåta ceremony at its
end, it remains always a yajïa, in the same way among all the qualities of the Lord,
His plurality of forms is always present and of prime importance. The evidence for
this is given in this sütra in the words, "tathä hi darçayati" (So, indeed, the
scriptures reveal). In the Chändogya Upaniñad (7.23.1) it is said:

bhümaiva sukham nälpe sukham asti

"The bliss of the Supreme Personality of Godhead is in His abundant variety.

His bliss is not present in a lack of variety."

Thus the Lord's bliss and other qualities are present in great abundance and
great variety. They should be meditated on in this way. The scriptures reveal this
of them. The word “darçayati" in. this sütra means, "they teach this in every
circumstance". Without accepting the Lord's plurality of forms it is not possible to
accept that His actions are all eternal.

Adhikaraëa 30
Different Meditations on the Lord's Different Forms

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Saàçaya (doubt): Are4 these many forms of the Lord worshiped in one way
only or are there many ways to worship them?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because the object of worship certainly

remains one, there must be only way way to worship Him.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 60

nänä çabdädi-bhedät

nänä—variety; çabda—words; ädi—beginning; bhedät—because of the

difference.

They are different because of different words and other things.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

There are different kinds of worship for the different forms of the Lord. For
each form there is a different kind of worship. Why is that? The sütra explains:
"çabdädi-bhedät" (because of different words and other things). This means,
“because the names of Lord Nåsiàha and the Lord's other forms are different, the
mantras for worshiping these forms are different, the forms themselves are
different, and Their activities are also different". In the Småti-çästra it is said:

kåtaà tretä dväparaà ca

kalir ity eñu keçavaù
nänä-varëäbhidhäkäro
nänaiva vidhinejyate

"In the Satya, Tretä, Dväpara, and Kali yugas, Lord Kåñëa appears in different
forms with different colors and different names, forms that are worshiped in
different ways."

In this way it is proved that the Lord's different forms are worshiped in
different ways.

Adhikaraëa 31
The Steadfast Worship of the Lord

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

That the forms of the Supreme Personality of Godhead, beginning with the
form of Lord Nåsiàha, should be worshiped in ways that are different for each
form has thus been described.

Saàçaya (doubt): Must the worshipers of these various forms meditate on all
the Lord's forms together, or is such meditation only optional?

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 61

vikalpo 'viçiñöha-phalatvät

vikalpaù—option; aviçiñöha—not better; phalatvät—because of the result.

It is optional, for a better result is not obtained.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

They have an option. One should worship the Supreme Lord according to the
truths taught by a particular community of saintly devotees. One should remain
steadfast in that form of worship and not leave it. Why is that? The sütra explains:
“aviçiñöha-phalatvät" (for a better result is not obtained). This means that of all the
ways to worship the Lord no one way is better than the others. They are all equal.
They are all said to bring the same result, which is that liberation where one
directly associates with the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
If by following one such method of worship one attains perfection, what is the
need of accepting another method of worship? The lesson taught in the sütra that
begins with the words "tad viduñäm" should not be forgotten. Therefore, in order
to give more evidence to the truth that the ekänti devotees are the best, this
instruction is repeated. There is no fault in this.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 32
Worshiping the Lord To Attain a Specific Benediction

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The different kinds of worship of the Lord's different forms, such as the form of
Lord Nåsiàha and the other forms, all bring liberation as their result. Therefore
these activities of worship should be regularly performed by the ekänti devotees.
However, in the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad and other scriptures are also described
other kinds of worship of the Lord, kinds of worship meant for attaining fame,
followers, victory, wealth, and other like benedictions.

Saàçaya (doubt): May one choose any form of the Lord for such worship, or
must one direct this kind of worship to one's chosen deity alone?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because the worship of any form of the
Lord brings the same result as the worship of any other form of the Lord, one
should direct this worship to one's chosen Deity alone, as was previously
explained.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 62

kämyäs tu yathä-kämaà samuccéyeran na vä pürva-hetv-abhävät

kämyäù—for the objects of desire; tu—but; yathä—as; kämam—desire;

samuccéyeran—may collect; na—not; vä—or; pürva—previous; hetu—reason;
abhävät—because of the non-existence.

For attaining a desire one may accept another or not, as one wishes, for the
previous reason is now absent.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 To fulfill desires other than direct association with the Supreme Lord, desires
like the attainment of fame in this world, one may worship any for of the Lord, as
one wishes, or one need not (worship another form of the Lord, and may instead
to continue to worship one's own chosen Deity). Why is that? The sütra explains:
"pürva-hetv-abhävät" (for the previous reason is now absent). This is is so because
the result to be obtained is different. When there is a desire to attain these various
material benediction, then one may worship any form of the Lord. When one does
not desire these material benefits, one may not adopt the worship of forms of the
Lord other than one's chosen Deity.
The meaning here is that if one who desires liberation also desires some
material benediction, then he should worship Lord Hari alone in order to attain it.
He should not worship the demigods to attain his desire. This is explained by
Çrémad-Bhägavatam (2.3.10) in the following words:

akämaù sarva-kämo vä
mokña-käma udära-dhéù
tévreëa bhakti-yogena
yajeta puruñaà param

"A person who has broader intelligence, whether he be full of all material
desire, or desiring liberation, must by all means worship the supreme whole, the
Personality of Godhead."*

Thus have been explained the various kinds of worship of the Lord, kinds of
worship beginning with the chanting of the ten-syllable mantra. As explained
before, this worship should be directed to one's chosen Deity.

Adhikaraëa 33
Meditation on the Form of the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the previous passages meditation on the Lord's qualities and virtues has been
described. Now will be described meditation on the Lord's bodily limbs and
features. In Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad (1.38), the demigod Brahmä explains:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

tam ekaà govindaà sac-cid-änanda-vigrahaà païca-padaà våndävana-sura-
bhüruha-taläsénaà satataà sa-marud-gaëo 'ham paramayä stutyä toñayämi.

"With eloquent prayers I and the Maruts please Lord Govinda, whose form is
eternal and full of knowledge and bliss, who stays under a desire tree in
Våndävana, and who is this five-word mantra."

In the verse that follow Brahmä speaks prayers describing the gentle smile,
merciful glance, and other features on the Supreme Lord's face, eyes, and other
parts of the body.

Saàçaya (doubt): Are the gentle smile and other features on the Lord's face
and the other parts of His body to be meditated on or not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because by meditating on the Lord's

general qualities and virtues one attains the goal of life, and because that goal thus
attained is so great and exalted, there is no need to meditate on the features of the
Lord's body.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 63

aìgeñu yathäçraya-bhävaù

aìgeñu—on the limbs; yathä—as; äçraya—shelter; bhävaù—nature.

Appropriate meditation on the limbs.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

One should appropriately meditate on the Lord's mouth and the other parts of
His body. This means that one should meditate on the qualities that have taken
shelter of the parts of the Lord's body. Thus, on the Lord's mouth there are a
gentle smile and sweet words, on His eyes there is a merciful glance, and on the
other parts of His body there are other features.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 64

çiñöaiç ca

çiñöaiù—by the disciples; ca—and.

Also by the disciples.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad (1.51) it is said:

atha haivaà stutibhir ärädhayämi tathä yüyaà païca-padaà japantaù kåñëaà

dhyäyantaù samsåtià tariñyatha.

"Brahmä said: As I worship Him, so should you. Chanting this five word
mantra, and meditating on Lord Kåñëa, you will transcend the world of birth and
death."

In this way Brahmä teaches his disciples to meditate on the qualities present in
Lord Kåñëa's form. That is the meaning.

Here someone may object: In the Chändogya Upaniñad (1.6.7) it is said:

yathä kapyäsaà puëòarékam evam akñiëé

"The Supreme Lord's eyes are like lotus flowers."

Here there is no mention of the Lord's merciful glance or His other features.

If this is said, then the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 65

samähärät

samähärät—because of being collective.

Because of being together.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "na" (it is not so) should be added here from three sütras previous.
The word applies to both sütras. In this passage of Chändogya Upaniñad many
other features of the Lord's body are implied. This passage does not mean that the
Lord has only lotus eyes and no other bodily features.

Here someone may object: The idea that one should meditate on the parts of
the Lord's body as having only certain attributes and not others is wrong. I refute
it with the following words.

Sütra 66

guëa-sädhäraëya-çruteç ca

guëa—of qualities; sädhäraëya—commonness; çruteù—from the Çruti-çästra;

ca—also.

Also because the Çruti-çästra declares that the qualities are held in common.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In Bhagavad-gétä (13.14) it is said:

sarvataù päëi-pädam tat

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "Everywhere are His hands and legs."*

This passage shows that one should meditate on the parts of the Lord's body as
all having the same qualities in common. In Brahma-saàhitä (5.32) it is said:

aìgäni yasya sakalendriya-vrttimanti

paçyanti pänti kalayanti tathä jaganti

"Each of the limbs of the Lord's transcendental figure possesses in Himself the
full-fledged functions of all organs and eternally sees, maintains, and manifests the
infinite universes, both spiritual and mundane."**

In this way the scriptures declare that each part of the Lord's body has all the
qualities of all the other parts.

In the following words the author of the sütras refutes this idea.

Sütra 67

na vä tat-saha-bhäväçruteù

na—not; vä—or; tat—that; saha—together; bhäva—being; a—not; çruteù—from

the Çruti-çästra.

Or not, for the Çruti-çästra does not declare that they have the same nature.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "vä" (or) is used here for emphasis. One should not meditate on the
different parts of the Lord's body as all having the same features in common. Why
is that? The sütra explains: "tat-saha-bhäväçruteù" (for the Çruti-çästra does not
declare that they have the same nature). This means that the Çruti-çästra does not
declare that the qualities of one part of the body are present in the other parts.
Also, one should not meditate on the parts of the Lord's body as having the same
qualities as the other parts. The descriptions in Bhagavad-gétä 13.14 and other
passages in the scriptures should be understood to mean that the Supreme

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Personality of Godhead, being all-powerful, can do anything with any part of His
body. That is the meaning.

Sütra 68

darçanäc ca

darçanät—from seeing; ca—also.

By seeing also.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Therefore the Lord's gentle smile should be understood to be present in His

face and His other qualities to be present in the other parts of His body, each in its
appropriate place. In this way it is both seen and described.

Pada 4

Adhikaraëa 1
Transcendental Knowledge

Invocation by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

çraddhäveça-manyäståte sac-chamädyair
vairägyodvitti-siàhäsanäòhye
dharma-präkäräïcite sarva-dätré
preñöhä viñëor bhäti vidyeçvaréyam

In the temple of faith, which is surrounded by the great walls of religion, sitting
on the throne of renunciation and surrounded by courtiers of self-control and

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

other virtues, transcendental knowledge, which is very dear to Lord Viñëu, shines
with great splendor.

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the previous pada the various aspects of transcendental knowledge, which

were there called meditation, worship, and other names, were revealed. In this
pada will be revealed the truths that transcendental knowledge is independent of
Vedic rituals, that Vedic rituals are merely one subordinate aspect of
transcendental knowledge, that persons who have attained transcendental
knowledge are divided into three classes, and other truths that are like these.
According to their different kinds of faith there are three kinds of seekers of
transcendental knowledge. They are described as follows.
1. They who, desiring to see the wonders of the higher planets, faithfully
perform the duties of varëäçrama-dharma, are called saniñöha. 2. They who,
desiring to enjoy the things of this world, faithfully perform the duties of
varëäçrama-dharma, are called pariniñöhita. They who are in these two classes are
all followers of varëäçrama-dharma. 3. Others, purified by truthfulness, austerity,
japa, and other spiritual practices, have no material desire, are called nirapekña.
They are in this class are not followers of varëäçrama-dharma. In this way there
are three kinds of seekers of transcendental knowledge.

Viñaya (the subject to be discussed): First will be explained the truth that
transcendental knowledge is independent of other things. In the Chändogya
Upaniñad (7.1.3) it is said:

tarati çokam ätma-vit

"One who knows the Supreme crosses beyond grief."

In the Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.1.1) it is said:

brahma-vid äpnoti param

"One who knows the Supreme enters the spiritual abode."

In the Kaöha Upaniñad (1.2.16) it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

etad dhy eväkñaraà jïätvä yo yadécchati tasya tat

"By understanding the immortal one attains whatever he desires."

Saàçaya (doubt): Does transcendental bring only liberation, or can it also bring
elevation to the higher material planets?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): A person wise with transcendental

knowledge has no material desires. For this reason transcendental knowledge
brings only liberation.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives his
conclusion.

Sütra 1

puruñärtho 'taù çabdäd iti bädaräyaëaù

puruñärthaù—the four goals of life; ataù—from this; çabdät—from the Çruti-

çästra; iti—thus; bädaräyaëaù—Vyäsa.

The fulfillment of human aspirations comes from it, for this is said in the Çruti-
çästra. That is Vyäsa's opinion.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

All the goals of human life are attained by transcendental knowledge. That is
the opinion of Lord Vyäsa. Why is that? The sütra explains: "çabdaät" (for this is
said in the Çruti-çästra). These scriptural texts have been quoted in the previous
paragraphs. Pleased by His devotee's attainment of transcendental knowledge, the
Supreme Personality of Godhead gives Himself to His devotee. Pleased by His
devotee's attainment of transcendental knowledge, which is like a companion to
the rituals of the Vedas, the Supreme Personality of Godhead also fulfills the
material desires of they, like of Kardama Muni and others, who have such desires.

In the next sütra Jaimini Muni raises an objection.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 2
Knowledge alone cannot give liberation

Sütra 2

çeñatvät puruñärtha-vädo yathänyeñv iti jaiminiù

çeñatvät—because of being subordinate; puruña—of the people; artha-vädaù—

words; yathä—as; anyeñu—in others; iti—thus; jaiminiù—Jaimini.

Because it is subordinate, the words about human aspirations are only words of
praise, like praises of other things also. That is Jaimini's opinion.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Knowing the relationship between himself, the worshiper, and the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, the object of worship, the individual living entity
voluntarily engages in the activities of worship that have already been described
here. As a result of these activities the individual living entity becomes free of sin
and attains liberation by entering the spiritual world. Some examples of words of
exaggerated praise are given in the following words of the Jaimini-sütra:

yasya parëamayé juhur bhavati na sa päpaà çlokaà çåëoti yadäìkte cakñur eva
bhratåvyasya våìkte

"He whose sacrificial ladle is made of parëa never hears sinful words. He whose
eyes are anointed is protected from his enemies.

yat-prayäjänuyäjä ijyante varma vä etad yajïasya

"He who makes the prayäjä and anuyäjä offerings is protected by an armor of
yajïa."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Jaimini gives this description of these words of praise:

dravya-saàskära-karmasu parärthatvät phala-çrutir artha-vädaù syät

"Because they are actually meant to describe other things, the description of
benefits obtained from sacrificial paraphernalia and sacrificial actions are in truth
only empty praises."

The Çruti-çästra explains that a householder who throughout his entire life is
self-controlled and virtuous and who regularly performs yajïas and other spiritual
duties, at the end attains the Supreme Personality of Godhead. This is described in
the following words of Chändogya Upaniñad (8.15.1):

äcärya-kuläd vedam adhétya yatha-vidhänaà guroù karmätiçeñeëäbhisamävåtya

kuöumbe çucau deçe svädhyäyam adhiyäno dharmikän vidadhätmani sarvendriyäëi
sampratiñöhäpyähiàsän sarva-bhütäny anyatra térthebhyaù sa khalv evaà vartayan
yävad äyuñaà brahmalokam abhisampadyate na ca punar ävartate.

"From the äcäryas one should learn the Vedas. One should perform his duties
and also offer dakñiëä to his spiritual master. Then one should accept household
life, live in a pure way, study the Vedas, perform his religious duties, engage all his
senses in the Supreme Lord's service, not harm any living being, and go on
pilgrimage to holy places. A person who passes his life in this way goes to the
spiritual world. He does not return to this world of repeated birth and death."

In the Viñëu Puräëa (3.8.9) it is said:

varëäçramäcäravatä
puruñeëa paraù pumän
viñëur ärädhyate panthä
nänyat tat-toña-käraëam

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Viñëu, is worshiped by the proper

execution of prescribed duties in the system of varëa and äçrama. There is no other
way to satisfy the Supreme Personality of Godhead. One must be situated in the
institution of the four varëas and äçramas."*

Many other scriptural passages may also be quoted to prove this point.
Scriptural passages that encourage renunciation of Vedic rituals and pious deeds

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

are meant for they who are crippled and thus unable to perform these deeds.

In the next sütra Jaimini affirms that transcendental knowledge is a subordinate

aspect of Vedic rituals and pious deeds.

Sütra 3

äcära-darçanät

äcära—of deeds; darçanät—because of seeing.

Because such deeds are seen.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (3.1.1) it is said:

janako vaideho bahu-dakñiëena yajïeneje

"Janaka, the king of Videha, performed a great yajïa and gave very opulent
dakñiëä."

In the Chändogya Upaniñad (5.11.5) it is said:

yakñamäno ha vai bhagavanto 'ham asmi

"The saintly king said: Soon I shall perform a great yajïa."

In this way it is seen that even great saints learned in transcendental knowledge
still had to perform Vedic yajïas. Therefore transcendental knowledge alone is not
sufficient to bring the perfection of life. Here the adage, "If honey is found in a
tree in one's own courtyard, why should one travel over mountains searching for
it?" is appropriate.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 4

tac chruteù

tat—that; chruteù—because of the Çruti-çästra.

It is so because of the Çruti-çästra.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Chändogya Upaniñad (1.1.8) it is said:

yad eva vidyayä karoti çraddhayopaniñadä tad eva véryavattaraà bhavati

"When one worships the Lord with transcendental knowledge, with faith, and
with the teachings of the Upaniñads, his worship becomes very powerful and
effective."

Because it is here said "with transcendental knowledge", the subordinate nature

of that knowledge is clearly seen.

Sütra 5

samanvärambhaëät

samanvärambhaëät—because of being together.

Because of being together.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.2) it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

taà vidyä-karmaëé samanvärabhete pürva-prajïä ca

"At the time of death a person's knowledge, deeds, and concept of life combine
to determine his future."

This passage shows that knowledge and pious deeds both together determine
the soul's future.

Sütra 6

tadvato vidhänät

tadvataù—like that; vidhänät—because of the rule.

Because of a rule like that.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Taittiréya-saàhitä it is said:

brahmiñöho brahmä darça-paurëamäsayos taà våëéte

"To perform the darça and paurëamäsa rites, he chooses a priest learned in the
science of the Supreme."

Thus it is clearly seen that transcendental knowledge is only a subordinate part

of the Vedic rituals, for such knowledge only qualifies one to be a priest.

Sütra 7

niyamäc ca

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 niyamät—because of a rule; ca—also.

Also because of a rule.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Içopaniñad (mantra 2) it is said:

kurvann eveha karmäëi

jijéviñec chataà samäù
evaà tvayi nänyatheto 'sti
na karma lipyate nare

"One may aspire to live for hundreds of years if he continuously goes on

working in that way, for that sort of work will not bind him to the law of karma.
There is no alternative to this way for man."*

This verse gives the order that even a man wise with transcendental knowledge
should perform Vedic yajïas and pious deeds for as long as he lives. This verse
clearly refutes the statements that encourage the renunciation of Vedic rituals or
that claim that one has the option to perform or renounce Vedic rituals. This is so
because scriptural statements encouraging renunciation are meant for those who
are crippled or otherwise unable to perform Vedic rituals. In the Taittiréya
Brähmaëa it is said:

vérahä vä eña devänäà yo 'gnim udväsayate

"He who does not offer oblations in the sacred fire for the demigods becomes
sinful like a man who kills his own children."

In this way renunciation of Vedic rituals is forbidden.

In these words the idea that because it is a subordinate part of Vedic rituals,
transcendental knowledge is not independent is giving spiritual benefit is
advanced. The author of the sütras refutes this idea in the following words.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 3
The Superiority of Transcendental Knowledge

Sütra 8

adhikopadeçät tu bädaräyaëasyaivaà tad-darçanät

adhika—more; upadeçät—because of the teaching; tu—but; bädaräyaëasya—of

Vyäsa; evam—thus tat—of that; darçanät—because of the revelation of scripture.

But because Vyäsa teaches that it is more important and also because of the
scriptures' revelation.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is used here to begin the refutation of the pürvapakña. The
truth is that transcendental knowledge is more important than Vedic rituals. Why
is that? The sütra explains: "upadeçät tu bädaräyaëasyaivaà" (because Vyäsa
teaches that it is more important). Vyäsa's opinion here cannot be uprooted, for
the sütra explains: “tad-darçanät" (also because of the scriptures' revelation). In
the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.22) it is said:

tam etaà vedänuvacanena brähmaëä vividiçanti brahmacaryeëa tapasä çraddhayä

yajïenänäçakena caitam eva viditvä munir bhavaty evam eva pravräjino lokam
abhépsantaù pravrajanti.

"By Vedic study, celibacy, austerity, faith, yajïa, and fasting, the brähmaëas
strive to understand Him. One who understands Him becomes wise. Desiring to
travel to His transcendental world, the brähmaëas become wandering sannyäsés."

This passage shows that Vedic rituals bring the result of transcendental
knowledge, and when that knowledge is attained, the Vedic rituals are abandoned.
Because the method of attainment (Vedic rituals) here is abandoned at a certain
stage, therefore the result (transcendental knowledge) these methods bring is more
important than the methods themselves.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Here someone may object: It is seen than many saints who are most wise with
transcendental knowledge still perform Vedic rituals. Therefore transcendental
knowledge and Vedic rituals are both equally important.

In the following words the author of the sütras refutes this idea.

Sütra 9

tulyaà tu darçanam

tulyam—equal; tu—but; darçanam—scriptural; revelation.

But the same thing is seen in the scriptures.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) here is used to begin the refutation of the idea that
transcendental knowledge is an inferior by-product of the performance of Vedic
rituals. The sütra explains that there is equal scriptural evidence to show that
transcendental knowledge is not subordinate to Vedic rituals. In the Båhad-
äraëyaka Upaniñad it is said:

etad dha sma vai vidväàsa ähur åñayaù kärayeyäù kim arthä vayam adhyeñyämahe
kim arthä vayaà yakñämahe etad dha sma vai pürve vidväàso 'gni-hotraà
juhaväà cakrire etaà vai tam ätmänaà viditvä brähmaëaù putra-pauñäyäç ca
vitteñaëäyäç ca lokaiñaëäyäç ca vyutthäya bhikñä-caryaà caranti.

"The wise sages asked, `Why do we study the Vedas? Why do we perform
yajïas?' Then the sages stopped performing agnihotra-yajïas. Learning the truth
about the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the brähmaëas renounced all desire to
attain sons, grandsons, wealth, or anything else in this world. They became
sannyäsé beggars traveling here and there."

In many places the scriptures describe many great souls learned with
transcendental knowledge who renounced all Vedic rituals. These statements of
scripture do not contradict the descriptions of great souls performing Vedic rituals,

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

for many great souls performed Vedic rituals, either to purify themselves or to set
a good example for the world to follow.

In the next sütra Vyäsa refutes the argument given in sütra 4.

Sütra 10

asärvatriké

asärvatriké—not universal.

It is not universal.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The passage (Chändogya Upaniñad 1.1.8) referred to in sütra 4 does not have all
transcendental as its scope. It refers the udgétha-vidyä. Therefore all
transcendental knowledge is not a subordinate aspect of Vedic rituals.

(In the next sütra Vyäsa refutes the argument given in sütra 5.)

Sütra 11

vibhägaù çata-vat

vibhägaù—division; çata—a hundred; vat—like.

The distribution is like a hundred.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The results of Vedic yajïas and transcendental knowledge, as described in

Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 4.4.2 (quoted in sütra 5), are actually different.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Transcendental knowledge brings one result and Vedic yajïas bring a different
result. In this sütra the example of a hundred is given. A cow and a goat may be
purchased for a hundred coins. The cow cost ninety coins and the goat cost ten
coins. The cost was not equally divided with each costing fifty coins. In the same
way transcendental and Vedic yajïas (combine to determine the future of the
individual soul) but they do not have the same influence in determining it.

In the next sütra Vyäsa refutes the argument given in sütra 6.

Sütra 12

adhyayana-mätra-vataù

adhyayana—study; mätra—only; vataù—of one who possesses.

Of one who has merely studied.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The passage (from the Taittiréya-saàhitä, quoted in sütra 6) states that a person
who has studied the Vedas should be chosen as a priest. It does not mean that the
priest must be advanced in transcendental knowledge of the Supreme Personality
of Godhead and therefore transcendental knowledge is a subordinate part of the
Vedic rituals. The word “brahmiñöha" in that passage means, "one who is learned
in the Vedas". It does not mean "one who is wise with transcendental knowledge
of the Supreme Personality of Godhead", for the Çruti-çästras declare that a
person fixed in transcendental knowledge of the Supreme renounces Vedic rituals.
Therefore a person who properly studies the Vedas, does not misinterpret its
words, and does not desire to gain anything material as a result of his study, is said
to be “brahmiñöha" (learned in the Vedas). The affix “iñöha" has that meaning
here. Some claim that the word means that the priest must be a knower of the
Supreme and therefore this passage is meant to praise the glories of Vedic yajïas.

Here someone may object: One who has simply studied is not qualified to
perform Vedic yajïas. One must have knowledge also. Studying the Vedas does
not mean simply reading them. It means understanding them. Because the
Upaniñads are parts of the Vedas, it must be understood that one who understands
the Vedas understands the transcendental knowledge of the Supreme Personality
of Godhead also. In this way it is proved that transcendental knowledge of the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Supreme Personality of Godhead is only one subordinate aspect of the Vedic
yajïas.

If this objection is raised, then I reply: One is not situated in transcendental

knowledge merely by understanding the meanings of the words in the Vedas, but
only when one directly sees the Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself. Merely
by understanding the meaning of the sentence, "Honey is sweet" one does not
have direct perception of its sweetness. If this were so then merely by
understanding these words one would be able to taste honey. Of course one does
not taste honey in this way. Once, when asked, Närada Muni declared that, even
though he knew the Åg Veda and many other scriptures, still he did not
understand the Supreme. He said:

so 'haà mantra-vid eväsmi nätma-vit

"I know many mantras, but I do not know the Supreme Personality of
Godhead."

Therefore, worship of the Lord is something different from mere academic

knowledge of the Vedas. Therefore genuine transcendental knowledge means
direct perception of the Lord, a perception attained by engaging in devotional
service. This knowledge brings with it the attainment of the real goal of human life.
In the Taittiréya Araëyaka (Mahä-Näräyaëa Upaniñad 10.6, and Muëòaka
Upaniñad 3.2.6) it is said:

vedänta-vijïäna-suniçcitärthäù
sannyäsa-yogät yatayaù suddhatväù
te brahmaloke tu paränta-käle
parämåtät parimucyanti sarve

"Wise with the knowledge taught in the Vedas, renounced, and pure in heart,
the great souls go to Brahmaloka. When the time comes for the universe's end,
they all become liberated and go to the spiritual world."

Therefore renunciation of the world and academic knowledge of the Vedas are
both subordinate parts of transcendental knowledge of the Supreme. In Çrémad-
Bhägavatam (1.2.12) it is said:

tac-chraddadhänä manayo
jïäna-vairägya-yuktayä

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

paçyanty ätmani cätmanam
bhaktyä çruta-gåhétayä

"The seriously inquisitive student or sage, well equipped with knowledge and
detachment, realizes the Absolute Truth by rendering devotional service in terms
of what he has heard from the Vedänta-çruti."*

Here someone may object: The activities of devotional service employ the body,
words, and mind. In the trance of meditation it is possible to directly see the
Supreme Lord with the mind, but how is it possible to directly see the Lord when
the body and words are engaged in worship, japa, or other similar activities?

If this objection is raised, then I reply: Devotional service is naturally filled with
transcendental knowledge and bliss. In the Çruti-çästra it is said:

sac-cid-änandaika-rase bhakti-yoge tiñöhati

"Devotional service is eternal and full of transcendental knowledge and bliss."

If this were not so then devotees would not have the power to conquer the
Supreme Lord and bring Him under their control. The activities of devotional
service invoke the appearance of the Lord, who comes in His spiritual and blissful
form, with the graceful hair on His head and the other features of His body. In the
nyäya-çaçtra it is said:

çrutes tu çabda-mülatvät

In this way it is shown that the Supreme extraordinary, inconceivable, and

beyond the limits imposed by the material world. He cannot be understood by
material logic.

Sütra 13

näviçeñät

na—not; aviçeñät—because of being not specific.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 No. For it is not specific.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The Çruti-çästra does not order that a person wise with transcendental
knowledge of Supreme must perform Vedic rituals throughout his entire life. Why
is that? The sütra explains: "aviçeñät" (for it is not specifically stated). In the
Mahä-Näräyaëa Upaniñad of the Taittiréya Araëyaka 10.5 it is said:

na karmaëä na prajayä dhanena tyägenaike amåtatvam änaçuù

"By performing Vedic rituals, fathering good children, or giving wealth in

charity one does not attain liberation. It is by renunciation that one attains
liberation."

In this way there is no specific order that one must always perform Vedic
rituals. The Çruti-çästra gives different instructions about Vedic rituals (sometimes
encouraging and sometimes discouraging them) because these instructions are
intended for different äçramas.

After thus refuting these objections, the author of the sütras proceeds to explain
the real purpose of the Çruti-çästra's description of Vedic rituals.

Sütra 14

stutaye 'numatir vä

stutaye—for praise; anumatiù—permission; vä—or.

Or, the permission is for praise.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "vä" (or) is used here for emphasis. Içopaniñad's (mantra 2)

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

permission that one may perform Vedcic rituals throughout one's entire life is
given so that one may glorify transcendental knowledge. This passage praises
transcendental knowledge, for it is a person who has transcendental knowledge
who may thus perform Vedic rituals throughout his life and not be touched by
karmic reactions. Içopaniñad (mantra 2) explains:

evaà tvayi nänyatheto 'sti

"that sort of work will not bind him to the law of karma. There is no alternative
to this way for man."*

In this way is refuted the idea that transcendental knowledge is a subordinate

aspect of Vedic rituals.

Adhikaraëa 4
The Glories of Transcendental Knowledge

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now that the independence of transcendental knowledge has been explained,

the great glory of transcendental knowledge will be described. In the Väjasaneyé
çruti (Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 4.4.23) it is said:

eña nityo mahimä brähmaëasya na karmaëä vardhate no kanéyän

"Karma can neither lessen nor increase the eternal glory of one who
understands the Supreme."

Saàçaya (doubt): Do they who are situated in transcendental knowledge have

the right to act in any way they please or do they not have that right?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): By abandoning prescribed duties one

commits a sin. Therefore a person in transcendental knowledge does not have the
right to act as he pleases.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 15

käma-käreëa caike

käma—desire; käreëa—by doing; ca—and; eke—some.

Also, some say he may act as he pleases.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

To show mercy to the people of the world a person situated in transcendental

knowledge may sometimes voluntarily perform Vedic rituals even though he gains
no personal benefit by performing them and neither is he faulted if he does not
perform them. His glory is eternal, as is explained in Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad
4.4.23 (quoted in the previous purport). Therefore a person situated in
transcendental knowledge can act as he likes and he is never touched by sin.
Here the word "brähmaëa" means "he who has directly seen the Supreme
Personality of Godhead". Such a person does not become virtuous by performing
Vedic rituals, and neither does he do anything wrong by failing to perform them.
As a lotus leaf is untouched by water, so he is untouched by the good karma
generated by Vedic rituals. As a handful of straw is at once consumed by a blazing
fire, so all his sins are at once burned to ashes. All of this shows the great power of
transcendental knowledge. This is further explained in the following sütra.

Sütra 16

upamardaà ca

upamardam—destruction; ca—also.

Destruction also.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

in the Muëòaka Upaniñad it is said:

bhidyate hådaya-ganthiç
chidyante sarva-saàçayäù
kñéyante cäsya karmäëi
tasmin dåñöe parävare

"The knot in the heart is pierced, and all misgivings are cut to pieces. The chain
of fruitive actions is terminated when one sees* the Supreme Personality of
Godhead."
In Bhagavad-gétä (4.37) the Supreme Personality of Godhead explains:

yathaidhäàsi samiddho 'gnir

bhasmasät kurute 'rjuna
jïänägniù sarva-karmäëi
bhasmasät kurute 'rjuna

"As blazing fire turns firewood to ashes, O Arjuna, so does the fire of
knowledge burn to ashes all reactions to material activities."*

These verses show that transcendental knowledge destroys the reactions of past
fruitive deeds. Because transcendental knowledge thus destroys all karmic
reactions, whether partially experienced or waiting to be experienced in the future,
a person situated in transcendental knowledge is not at fault of he renounced the
fruitive actions of Vedic rituals. This is not very surprising.

Here someone may object: Is it not so that past karmic reactions are destroyed
only by experiencing them?

If this is said, then I reply: Although transcendental knowledge has the power to
burn away all past karmic reactions, by the Lord's desire, in order to preserve the
appearance of the ordinary workings of karma, transcendental knowledge does not
completely burn away all the karmic reactions created in the present body. In this
way the karma of a person situated in transcendental knowledge is like a cloth that
has been singed by fire. That is what is meant by the scriptures' statement that
karmic reactions are destroyed only by experiencing them,. This will be further

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

explained in sütra 4.1.15.

Sütra 17

ürdhva-retaùsu ca çabde hi

ürdhva—up; retaùsu—semen; ca—and; çabde—in the Çruti-çästra; hi—indeed.

In the Çruti-çästras indeed among the celibates.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The pariniñöhita devotees and especially the sannyäsés and other celibates
advanced in transcendental knowledge are especially free to act as they like. This
truth explained in the Çruti-çästra again confirms the truth that transcendental
knowledge is independent of the Vedic rituals. The scriptural passage referred to
in this sütra is from the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (3.5.1) and is given below:

tasmäd brähmaëaù päëòityaà nirvidya bälyena tiñöhäset. bälyaà ca päëòityaà ca

nirvidyätha munir amaunaà ca maunaà ca nirvidyätha brähmaëaù kena syäd yena
syät tenedåçaù.

"A brähmaëa should then renounce scholarship and become like a child. Then
he should renounce both scholarship and childlike simplicity and become a silent
sage. Then he should renounce the stance of either being or not being a silent sage.
Then he becomes a brähmaëa, a person who directly sees the Supreme Personality
of Godhead. When he attains this stage he may act in whatever way he likes."

In Bhagavad-gétä (3.25) the Supreme Personality of Godhead explains:

saktäù karmaëy avidvaàso

yathä kurvanti bhärata
kuryäd vidväàs tathäsaktaç
cikérñur loka-saìgraham

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "As the ignorant perform their duties with attachment to results, the learned
may similarly act, but without attachment, for the sake of leading people on the
right path."*

In the next sütra Jaimini Muni gives a different opinion.

Sütra 18

parämarçaà jaiminir acodanä cäpavadati hi

parämarçam—favorable idea; jaiminiù—Jaimini; acodanä—not ordering; ca—

and; apavadati—criticizes; hi—because.

Jaimini favors it. It is not ordered, and because indeed it is forbidden.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

A person situated in transcendental knowledge has the freedom to perform

prescribed Vedic rituals and duties in whatever way he likes. That is the meaning
of the Çruti-çästra's explanation that he may act as he likes.
The word "hi" here means "because". The word parämarçam" means that the
Çruti-çästra orders that even one situated in transcendental knowledge must
perform Vedic rituals, and the word "apavadati" means that the Çruti-çästra
forbids that he stop performing Vedic rituals. The word “acodanä" means that a
person situated in transcendental knowledge may renounce those activities not
prescribed by the scriptures. That is the meaning here.
Içopaniñad mantra 2 and the passage from Taittiréya Brähmaëa (quoted in the
purport of sütra 7) both forbid the renunciation of Vedic rituals. They do not say
that one should renounce Vedic rituals.
Therefore there is a contradiction, with some texts encouraging performance of
Vedic rituals and some encouraging renunciation of Vedic rituals. It is not that the
texts encouraging renunciation are wrong. These texts are intended for persons
who are crippled, mute, or in some other way unable to perform Vedic rituals.
Therefore even they who are situated in transcendental knowledge should
continue to perform Vedic rituals.
The words "kena syät" in the passage from the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad
(3.5.1, quoted in the previous purport) mean, "a person situated in transcendental
knowledge must perform Vedic rituals, but he has some freedom to perform them
in the way that pleases him". It does not mean that he has the right to renounce

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Vedic rituals altogether. This is the opinion of Jaimini.

Thus Jaimini believes that this passage orders the performance of Vedic rituals.
In the following words the author of the sütras gives His opinion, which is that the
person situated in transcendental knowledge really does have the right to act in
any way he likes.

Sütra 19

anuñöheyaà bädaräyaëaù sämya-çruteù

anuñöheyam—what should be practiced; bädaräyaëaù—Vyäsa; sämya—equality;

çruteù—from the Çruti-çästra.

Vyäsa says it may be done because the Çruti-çästra describes equality.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The words "anuñöheyaà bädaräyaëaù" here mean, "Vyäsa thinks that a person
situated in transcendental knowledge may perform Vedic rituals, or not, as he
chooses". Why is that? The sütra explains: "sämya-çruteù" (because the Çruti-
çästra declares that whether he performs these rituals or not it is the same).
The words "When he attains this stage he may act in whatever way he likes," of
Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 3.5.1 (quoted in the purport of sütra 17) mean that a
person situated in transcendental knowledge may act in any way, but the result he
obtains is always the same. Jaimini's opinion is that this description of the actions
of a person situated in transcendental knowledge are only words of empty praise,
for one must perform Vedic rituals completely in order to get a good result. If a
person renounces some part of the Vedic rituals he is not equal to a person who
performs all rituals perfectly.
Vedic rituals should be performed by a svaniñöha devotee. The statement that a
person who neglects Vedic rituals becomes sinful like a person who kills his own
children (Taittiréya Brähmaëa quoted in the purport of sütra 7) applies only to a
person who is not situated in transcendental knowledge. In this way the seeming
contradictions are reconciled. Jaimini's theory that all scriptural passages
encouraging renunciation are intended for they who are crippled or somehow
unable to perform Vedic rituals is refuted by the passage of Mahä-Näräyaëa
Upaniñad quoted in the purport of sütra 13.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 20

vidhir vä dhäraëa-vat

vidhiù—rules; vä—or; dhäraëa—studying; vat—like.

Or, the rule may be like studying..

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The words "vidhir vä" mean that the statement “He may act in whatever way he
likes," of Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 3.5.1 (quoted in the purport of sütra 17) refers
only to a person situated in transcendental knowledge. The sütra explains,
"dhäraëa-vat" (it is like studying). This means that as the three higher castes are
eligible to study the Vedas, and others are not eligible, in the same way only a self-
realized pariniñöhita devotee situated in transcendental knowledge is allowed to act
in whatever way he likes". Others are not allowed. In Çrémad-Bhägavatam the
Supreme Personality of Godhead explains:

çaucam äcamanaà snänaà

na tu codanayäcaret
anyäàç ca niyamän jïäné
yathähaà lélayeçvaraù

"As I, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, voluntarily enjoy transcendental

pastimes, so the person situated in transcendental knowledge performs snäna,
äcamana, çauca, and follows a host of other rules voluntarily, and not because he is
ordered to do so."

In the next sütra an objection is raised and then answered.

Sütra 21

stuti-mätram upädänäd iti cen näpürvatvät

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 stuti—praise; mätram—only; upädänät—because of reference; iti—thus; cet—if;
na—not; äpürvatvät—because of newness.

If it is said to be merely empty praise, then I say no, for it is something new.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here the objector says: These words are merely empty praise. They do not
speak what is really true. As a lover tells the beloved, "You are free to do anything
you like", but does not really mean that the beloved can do exactly anything, in the
same way it is said that the person situated in transcendental knowledge may do
whatever he likes.

If this is said, then the sütra replies, "na" (No. It is not so). Why not? The sütra
explains, “apürvatvät" (for it is something new). Because the statement that a
person who directly sees the Supreme Personality of Godhead may perform Vedic
rituals as he wishes is a new teaching it cannot be mere empty praise of something
already described. That is the meaning.

Sütra 22

bhäva-çabdäc ca

bhäva—love; çabdät—because of the Çruti-çästra; ca—also.

Also because the Çruti-çästra describes love.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Muëòaka Upaniñad (3.1.4) it is said:

präëo hy eña sarva-bhütair vibhäti

vijänan vidvän bhavate näti-vädé
ätma-kréòa ätma-ratiù kriyävän

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 eña brahma-vidäà variñöhaù

"The Supreme Personality of Godhead is the life of all. He is the Supersoul

splendidly manifest in all living beings. One who knows Him becomes wise. That
person turns from the logicians' debates. He meditates on the Lord's pastimes. He
loves the Lord. He serves the Lord. He is the best of transcendentalists."

This verse clearly describes the devotees' love for the Lord. The word "ratiù"
here means "love". The words "bhäva", "rati", "prema" all mean "love". A
pariniñöhita devotee who has fallen in love with the Supreme Lord has not the time
to perform Vedic rituals very completely, although for the sake of the people in
general he may sometimes perform them to a certain extent. In this way it is seen
that transcendental knowledge is independent of Vedic rituals.

Fearing that another objection may be raised, the author of the sütras gives the
following reply.

Sütra 23

päriplavärthä iti cen na viçeñitatvät

päriplava—restlessness; arthäù—meanings; iti—thus; cet—if; na—not;

viçeñitatvät—because of being specific.

If it is said that they are päriplava stories, then I reply no, for those are specific.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.5.1) it is said:

atha ha yäjïavalkyasya dve bhärye babhuvatur maitreyé ca kätyäyané ca

"Yäjïavalkya had two wives: Maitreyé and Kätyäyané."

In the Taittiréya Upaniñad (3.1) it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

bhågur vai väruëir varuëaà pitaram upasasära adhéhi bhagavo brahmeti

"Bhågu approached his father, Varuëa, and asked, O master, please teach me
about the Supreme."

In the Kauñétaké Upaniñad (3.1) it is said:

pratardano ha vai daivodäsir indrasya priyaà dhämopajagäma

"Divodäsa's son Pratardana approached King Indra's abode."

In the Chändogya Upaniñad (.4.1.1) it is said:

jänaçrutir ha pauträyaëaù çraddhodayo bahudäyé bahupäkya äsa

"Jänaçruti Pauträyaëa was very faithful and generous."

In these and other stories the Çruti-çästra teaches the science of transcendental
knowledge. Here someone may doubt: are these stories meant to teach
transcendental knowledge or are they merely päriplava stories recited at a
räjasüya-yajïa to appease the restless mind? Someone may claim that these are
merely päriplava stories to appease the mind. After all, the Çruti-çästra declares:

sarväëy äkhyänäni päriplave çaàsanti

"All are päriplava stories meant to appease the restless mind."

In päriplava stories the literary skill is most important and any philosophical
instructions are all secondary. Therefore the Vedic rituals are what is really
important and the transcendental knowledge contained in the stories of the
Upaniñads is not very important.

If this is said, then the sütra declares, "na" (No. It is not so). Why not? The
sütra explains, “viçeñitatvät" (for they are specific). Only certain specific stories are
päriplavas.
It is said that on the first day of the yajïa the story of Vivasvän's son King Manu
should be recited, on the second day the story of Vivasvän's son King Indra should

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

be recited, on the third day the story of Vivasvän's son King Yama should be
recited. In this way only certain specific stories are employed for päriplava. If all
stories were equally appropriate for päriplava, then it would make no sense to
assign specific stories to specific days.
When the scripture says "all" stories should be recited as päriplava, the meaning
is all stories in the chapter of päriplavas should be recited. Therefore the
conclusion is that the Upaniñad stories that teach transcendental knowledge are
not päriplava stories.

Sütra 24

tathä caika-väkyatopabandhät

tathä—so; ca—and; eka—one; väkyatä—statement; upabandhät—because of

the connection.

It is also so because of the unity of the statements.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Because they are not päriplava stories, it is should be understood that the
stories of the Upaniñads are meant to teach transcendental knowledge. Why is
that? The sütra explains, “eka-väkyatopabandhät" (because of the unity of the
statements). Thus in the story beginning with the description of Yäjïavalkya and
his wives it is said (Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 4.4.22):

ätmä vä are drañöavyaù çrotavyaù

"One should hear of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. One should gaze
upon Him."

It this way it is seen that because of their context these stories are meant to
teach transcendental knowledge. As the story beginning with the words "so 'rodét"
is a story meant to teach Vedic rituals and is not a päriplava story, so the stories of
the Upaniñads are meant to teach transcendental knowledge. That is the meaning.
Because it teaches the supreme goal of life, transcendental knowledge is
independent of Vedic rituals. Great saints therefore strive to attain transcendental

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

knowledge. The stories of the Upaniñads give concrete examples of the truths of
transcendental knowledge. For example, they will give concrete examples to show
the truth of the Çruti-çästras' statement (Chändogya Upaniñad 6.14.2):

äcäryavän puruño veda

"One who approaches a bona fide spiritual master can understand everything
about spiritual realization."*

In this way also it is seen that transcendental knowledge is independent of

Vedic rituals.

Sütra 25

ata eva cägnéndhanädy-anapekñä

ataù eva—therefore; ca—also; agni—fire; indhana—igniting; ädi—beginning

with; anapekñä—no need.

Therefore also there is no need to light the fire or perform other duties.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Because it is thus independent of Vedic rituals, transcendental knowledge does

not need the help of the lighting of the sacred fire or the other activities of those
rituals to give its result. Thus the idea that transcendental knowledge and the
performance of Vedic rituals must be combined in order to bring liberation is
refuted.

Adhikaraëa 5
The Person Qualified To Attain Transcendental Knowledge

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be described the characteristics of a person qualified to learn

transcendental knowledge. In Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.22) it is said:

tam etaà vedänuvacanena vividiñanti yajïena dänena tapasänaçakena

"By study of the Vedas, by yajïa. by charity, by austerity, and by fasting the
brähmaëas strive to understand the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

In Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.23) it is said:

tasmäd evam-vic chänto danta uparatas titikñuù çraddhä-vitto bhütvätmany

evätmänaà paçyet

"A person who is wise, peaceful, self-controlled, free from material desires,
tolerant, and forgiving, and whose wealth is faith, is able to see the Supreme
Personality of Godhead present as the Supersoul in his heart."

In this way it is seen that there are two lists of qualifications to understand the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. One list begins with Vedic yajïas ands the other
with peacefulness.

Saàçaya (doubt): Are both sets of qualifications necessary or not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): In the Chändogya Upaniñad (6.14.2) it is

said:

äcäryavän puruño veda

"One who approaches a bona fide spiritual master can understand everything
about spiritual realization."*

Therefore to attain transcendental knowledge one need only find a spiritual

master. Nothing else is required.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives his
conclusion.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 26

sarväpekñä ca yajïädi-çrutir açva-vat

sarva—of all; apekñä—need; ca—also; yajïa—yajnas; ädi—beginning; çrutiù—

the Çruti-çästra; açva—horse; vat—like.

Also, all are needed. The Çruti-çästra mentions yajïas and other things. They
are like a horse.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Although transcendental knowledge does not need anything else to bring its
results, still yajïas and all kinds of pious deeds are needed in order to attain
transcendental knowledge. That is the meaning. Why is that? The sütra explains,
“yajïädi-çrutiù" (The Çruti-çästra mentions yajïas and other things). The two
passages from Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.22 and 23) quoted at the beginning
of this adhikaraëa give two lists of qualifications for one who would seek
transcendental knowledge, one list beginning with performance of yajïas and the
other list with peacefulness.
The sütra then gives an example: "açva-vat" (they are like a horse). To travel
somewhere a horse is needed, but someone who has already attained his
destination no longer has need of a horse.

Here someone may object: If transcendental knowledge may be attained by one

who has the qualifications of the first list, which begins with yajïas, then what is
the need of attaining the qualifications of the second list, which begins with
peacefulness and self control?

If this question is raised, then the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 27

çama-damädy-upetas tu syät tathäpi tu tad-vidhes tad-aìgatayä teñäm

avaçyänuñöheyatvät

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 çama—peacefulness; dama—self-control; ädi—beginning with; upetaù—
possessing; tu—indeed; syät—should be; tathäpi—nevertheless; tu—but; tat—of
them; vidheù—becauyse of the rule; tat—of that; aìgatayä—beause of being parts;
teñäm—of them; avaçya—needed; anuñöheyatvät—because they should be
practiced.

But one must nevertheless certainly have peacefulness, self control, and other
virtues, for that is the rule. Because they are parts they must be attained.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The two appearances of the word "tu" have the meanings of giving certainty
(certainly) and dispelling doubt (but). Although the qualifications of the first list,
which begins with yajïas are sufficient for attaining transcendental knowledge,
nevertheless a person who seeks transcendental knowledge should also attain the
qualifications of the second list, which begins with peacefulness.
Why is that? The sütra explains, "tad-vidhes tad-aìgatayä" (for that is the rule.
Because they are parts they must be attained). This means that peacefulness and
the other virtues mentioned here are parts of transcendental knowledge and
therefore they must also be attained.
The qualities given in both lists must be attained. The qualities on the first list,
which begins with yajïas, are external qualities, and those on the second list, which
begins with peacefulness, are internal qualities. In this way they are distinguished.
The word "ädi" (beginning with) here means that truthfulness and many other
qualities are also to be added to these lists.

Adhikaraëa 6
A Person Situated in Transcendental Knowledge Is Not Free To Sin

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be explained the truth that a person situated in transcendental

knowledge should not commit forbidden acts. In the Çruti-çästra it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

yadi ha vä apy evam-vin nikhilaà bhakñayétaivam eva sa bhavati

"If a person situated in transcendental knowledge eats anything impure he

remains pure nevertheless."

Saàçaya (doubt): Do these words order a person situated in transcendental

knowledge that he must eat any and all foods, or do they merely give permission
that he may eat any food he wishes?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): No argument has the power to refute that
this is an order. The person situated in transcendental knowledge is therefore
ordered that must eat any and all foods.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 28

sarvännänumatiç ca präëätyaye tad-darçanät

sarva—all; anna—food; anumatiù—permission; ca—and; präëa—of life;

atyaye—at the end; tat—that; darçanät—because of revelation of Çruti-çästra.

Also, permission to eat all foods is given when life is in danger, for that is the
revelation of scripture.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "ca" (also) is used here for emphasis. When proper foods are not
available and there is danger that life may come to an end, then permission is given
to eat any and all foods. Why is that? The sütra explains, "tad darçanät" (for that is
the revelation of scripture). In the Chändogya Upaniñad (1.10.1-4) it is said:

maöacé-hateñu kuruñväöikyä saha jäyayoñastir ha cäkräyaëa ibhya-gräme

pradräëaka uväsa. sa hebhyam kulmäñän khadantaà vibhikñe taà hoväca. neto
'nye vidyante yac ca ye ma imä upanihitä iti. eteñäà me dehéti hoväca tän asmai

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

pradadau hantänupänam ity ucchiñöaà vai me pétaà syäd iti hoväca. na svidete 'py
ucchiñöa iti na va ajéviñyämémän akhadann iti hoväca kämo me uda-pänam iti.

"A poor man named Uñasti Cäkräyaëa lived with his wife Aöiki in the village of
Ibhya-gräma in the country of the Kurus. One year there was a famine and the
crops were destroyed by hailstones. Uñasti begged food from a rich man who was
eating beans. The rich man said, `All I have is these beans. I have nothing else.'
The poor man said, `Please give me that.' So the rich man give his remnants to him.
Then the rich man said, `Here is something to drink.' The poor man replied, `You
have already drunk some of that and therefore I should not drink it.' The rich man
said, `Is it not that I have also eaten some of these beans?' The poor man replied,
`Without eating these beans I would not be able to remain alive, but drinking
water I do not need. I can drink any time I wish."

The truth is thus seen in this story of Cäkräyaëa. In order to save his live the
saintly sage named Cäkräyaëa ate the remnants of beans eaten by a rich man, but,
fearing that he was accepting the remnants of another, he was not willing to drink
the water offered by the rich man, for he could easily obtain water whenever he
wished. On the following day the sage ate the leftovers of those beans, thus eating
his own remnants. This story is also recounted in other places in the scriptures.

Sütra 29

abädhäc ca

abädhät—because of being no impediment; ca—also.

Also because there is no impediment.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In times of emergency one has permission to eat any food, and such eating does
not contaminate the heart and the mind. The sütra explains that this eating does
not present an impediment to attaining transcendental knowledge.

Sütra 30

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

api smaryate

api—also; smaryate—in the Småti-çästra.

Also in the Småti-çästra.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In Manu-saàhitä (10.104) it is said:

jévitätyayam äpanno
yo 'nnam atti yatas tataù
lipyate na sa päpena
padma-patram ivämbhasä

"One who in an emergency, in order to save his life, eats whatever is available is
not touched by sin. He is like a lotus leaf untouched by water."

Only in an emergency, and not at other times, is one allowed to eat anything
that is available. Therefore the meaning here is that the person situated in
transcendental knowledge has permission to eat any food in certain circumstances,
not that he is ordered that he must eat any food. The scriptures clearly forbid the
eating of impure foods when there is no emergency.

Sütra 31

çabdaç cäto 'käma-cäre

çabdaù—Çruti-çästra; ca—and; ataù—therefore; a—not; käma—desire; cäre—

acting.

Scripture says it should not be done by one's own wish.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Thus when there is an emergency one has permission to eat any food, but
otherwise, during ordinary times, a person situated in transcendental knowledge
will not of his own wish disobey the orders of the scriptures. In Chändogya
Upaniñad (7.26.2) it is said:

ähära-çuddhau sattva-çuddhiù sattva-çuddhau dhruvä småtiù småti-lambhe sarva-

granthénäà vipramokñaù

"By performance of yajïa one's eatables become sanctified, and by eating

sanctified foodstuffs, one's very existence becomes purified. By the purification of
existence finer tissues in the memory become sanctified, and when memory is
sanctified one can think of the path of liberation."*

In this way the Chändogya Upaniñad forbids acting whimsically and doing
whatever one wishes. Thus, although in times of emergency one has permission to
eat any foods, in ordinary times one must follow the rules given in the scriptures.

Adhikaraëa 7
The Svaniñöha Devotee and Varëäçrama-dharma

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the beginning of this pada three kinds of devotees, beginning with the
svaniñöha devotee, were described. Now will be considered the following question:
Should they who have attained transcendental knowledge continue to perform the
duties of varëäçrama-dharma? First we will consider the situation of the svaniñöha
devotees. In the Kauñärava-çruti it is said:

paçyann apémam ätmänaà

kuryät karmävicärayan
yadätmanaù su-niyatam
änandotkarñam äpnuyät

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "Even when one directly sees the Supreme Personality of Godhead one should
continue to perform Vedic rituals, for in this way one attains great bliss."

Saàçaya (doubt): Should a svaniñöha devotee who has attained transcendental

knowledge still perform Vedic rituals or should he not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The purpose of Vedic rituals is to attain

transcendental knowledge. When the end is attained the means may be
abandoned. For this reason there is no reason that he must continue to perform
Vedic rituals.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His opinion.

Sütra 32

vihitatväd äçrama-karmäpi

vihitatvät—because of being ordered; äçrama—of the asramas; karma—the

duties; api—also.

The duties of the äçramas also, for they are ordered.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "api" (also) here means that the duties of the varëas are also
included. This means that the prescribed duties of varëäçrama-dharma should be
performed. Why is that? They should be performed in order to increase
transcendental knowledge. This is so because it is the order of the scriptures.

Here someone may object: Here it is said that Vedic rituals should continue to
be performed even after one has attained transcendental knowledge. How can this
not mean that transcendental knowledge and Vedic rituals must both be
performed together to bring the desired result?

If this is said, the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 33

sahakäritvena ca

sahakäritvena—as helpful; ca—also.

Also, as helpful.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Vedic rituals should be performed, not because they are in themselves the cause
of liberation, but because they are helpful in attaining transcendental knowledge.
Transcendental knowledge is the real cause of liberation, as is explained in
Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (3.8).
In the beginning the svaniñöha devotee performs his prescribed duties of Vedic
rituals in order to please the Supreme Personality of Godhead. In that way he
attains transcendental knowledge. Then, although in this way he has already
attained transcendental knowledge, in order to increase that transcendental
knowledge, he continues to perform these prescribed duties of Vedic rituals.
Transcendental knowledge does not cause the cessation of Vedic rituals, for the
two of them are not opposed to each other.
Generally a person performs Vedic rituals in order to attain a great wonder of
delights in Svargaloka and other heavenly places. In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad
(1.4.15) it is said:

na häsya karma kñéyate

"the pious deeds of a person situated in transcendental knowledge never

perish."

The svaniñöha devotee does not perform Vedic rituals to experience various
delights in Svargaloka. He has no such desire. The svaniñöha devotee situated in
transcendental knowledge goes to the Supreme Personality of Godhead, and in the
course of his going he may pass through Svargaloka and the other heavenly
planets. It is like a person who, while walking to a village, touches some grass on
the way.
With the help of her assistant, who is Vedic rituals, transcendental knowledge

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

presents the experience of Svargaloka before the svaniñöha devotee who yearns to
attain the Supreme Personality of Godhead. Then transcendental knowledge
personally carries the devotee to the abode of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. This is explained in Kaöha Upaniñad 2.3.17. The desire in the devotee's
heart is also explained in this way.
Also, transcendental knowledge may carry the devotee to Svargaloka only to
test whether the devotee has actually renounced all material desires. The Çruti-
çästra describes this in the passage beginning with the words, "sarvaà ha paçyaù
paçyati". This does not mean that they who are not svaniñöha devotees do not go to
Svargaloka.
For the svaniñöha devotee transcendental knowledge destroys all karmic
reactions, except for the past and present lives' karma that specifically brings
elevation to Svargaloka. For the pariniñöhita devotee transcendental knowledge
destroys all karmic reactions, except for the past lives' karma that specifically
brings elevation to Svargaloka. For the nirapekña devotee transcendental
knowledge destroys all karmic reactions from all past and present lives. In this way
it is proved that transcendental knowledge is independent of Vedic rituals. Vedic
rituals act as assistants to transcendental knowledge.

Adhikaraëa 8
The Pariniñöhita Devotee May Renounce Ordinary Duties

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now the situation of the pariniñöhita devotees will be examined. In the

Muëòaka Upaniñad (3.1.4) it is said:

ätma-kréòa ätma-ratiù kriyävän

"He meditates on the Lord's pastimes. He loves the Lord. He serves the Lord.
He performs his prescribed duties. He is the best of transcendentalists."

Thus for the sake of the people in general the pariniñöhita devotee should
perform the duties of varëäçrama and out of love for the Supreme Lord the
pariniñöhita devotee should engage in the various activities of devotional service,
which begin with hearing of the Lord's glories.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Saàçaya (doubt): Should the pariniñöhita devotee perform his varëäçrama and
devotional duties simultaneously, or should he perform one first and then the
other?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): the simultaneous performance being

impossible, and the abandonment of prescribed duties being sinful, there is no
certain and definite rule as to the performance of these duties.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 34

sarvathäpi tatra cobhaya-liìgät

sarvathä—in all circumastances; api—indeed; tatra—there; ca—and; ubhaya—

of both; liìgät—because of the signs.

Also, indeed, it is in all circumstances because of signs from both.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "api" (indeed) is used here for emphasis. The word "sarvathä"
means, "in all circumstances, even if one must abandon one's varëäçrama duties".
This means that the pariniñöhita devotee should always in engage in devotional
service to the Supreme Lord. In his spare time, perhaps, the devotee may perform
a little something of his varëäçrama duties. Why is that? The sütra explains,
“ubhaya-liìgät" (because of two signs). The sign from the Çruti-çästra is this
(Muëòaka Upaniñad 2.2.5):

tam evaikaà jänatha

"Place your thoughts on the Supreme Lord alone."

The sign from the Smrti-çästra comes from the Supreme Lord Himself
(Bhagavad-gétä 9.13-14):

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

mahätmänas tu mäà pärtha
daivéà prakåtim äçritäù
bhajanty ananya-manaso
jïätvä bhütädim avyayam

"O son of Påthä, those who are not deluded, the great souls, are under the
protection of the divine nature. They are fully engaged in devotional service
because they know Me as the Supreme Personality of Godhead, original and
inexhaustible.*

satataà kértayanto mäà

yatantaç ca dåòha-vratäù
namasyantaç ca mäà bhaktyä
nitya-yuktä upäsate

"Always chanting My glories, endeavoring with great determination, and

bowing down before Me, these great souls perpetually worship Me with
devotion."*

In the following words the author of the sütras confirms this with more
evidence.

Sütra 35

anabhibhavaà ca darçayati

anabhibhavam—not defeated; ca—and; darçayati—reveals.

It reveals that he is not defeated.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.23) it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

sarvaà päpmänaà tarati. naiva päpmä tarati. sarvaà päpmänaà tapati. naiva
päpmä tapati.

"He defeats all sins. Sins do not defeat him. He burns away all sins. Sins do not
burn him."

If, absorbed in chanting the glories of the Supreme Lord, a pariniñöhita devotee
neglects his varëäçrama duties, that neglect is not a sin on his part. That is why the
sütra declares, "It reveals that he is not defeated." The meaning here is that it is
right for a devotee to neglect the duties of varëäçrama-dharma in favor of the
duties of devotional service to the Supreme Lord.
In Viñëu Puräëa 3.8.9 (quoted at the end of the sütra 2 purport) it is the
devotee's worship, not his performance of varëäçrama duties, that satisfies the
Lord. In a preceding passage of Viñëu Puräëa (2.13.9-11) are these words of King
Bharata, who had faith in devotional service alone:

yajïeçäcyuta govinda
mädhavänanta keçava
kåñëa viñëo håñékeçety
äha räjä sa kevalam

"Again and again King Bharata would chant the Lord's holy names: O Yajïeça,
O Acyuta, O Govinda, O Mädhava, O Ananta. O Keçava, O Kåñëa, O Viñëu, O
Håñékeça!

nänyaj jagäda maitreya

kiïcit svapnäntareñv api
etat paraà tad-arthaà ca
vinä nänyad acintayat

"O Maitreya, awake or asleep the king would not say anything else. He would
not think of anything but the Lord and His service.

samit-puñpa-kuçädänaà
cakre deva-kriyä-kåte
nänyäni cakre karmäëi
niùsaìgo yoga-täpasaù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "Practicing austere yoga, he stayed alone. He gathered firewood, flowers, and
kuça grass for the worship of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. He did not
perform any other duties or rituals."

Adhikaraëa 9
The Nirapekña Devotee

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Thus 1. the way that transcendental knowledge is manifested among they who
are within the varëäçrama institution and 2. the results that knowledge brings to
such persons has been shown. Now will be shown the way these two are manifested
among the nirapekña devotees, who are above the varëäçarama institution. In the
Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (3.4.1) is the following passage about Gärgé, who was
enlightened with transcendental knowledge and above the varëäçrama institution:

atha väcaknavy uväca brähmaëä bhagavanto hantäham enaà yäjïavalkyaà dvau

praçnau prakñyämi

"Gärgé said: O exalted brähmaëas, now I will place two questions before
Yäjïavalkya."

Saàçaya (doubt): Is it possible that transcendental knowledge may be present

in they who do not take part in the varëäçrama institution, or is it not possible?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): transcendental knowledge is never

manifested to they who are outside of the Vedas and the varëäçrama institution.

Siddhäëta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 36

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

antarä cäpi tu tad dåñöaiù

antarä—outside; ca—and; api—indeed; tu—but; tat—that; dåñöaiù—by what is

seen.

But certainly outside also, because of what is seen.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is used here to begin the refutation of the idea that Vedic
rituals are mandatory. The word "ca" (also) is used here to present the final
conclusion. The word "antarä" here refers to those persons who, although in this
life not following varëäçrama-dharma, in their past lives practiced truthfulness,
austerity, japa, and other pious deeds, and therefore in this life were born both
pure and renounced. It is said that in such persons transcendental knowledge is
manifested. Why is that? The sütra explains, “tad dåñöaiù" (because of what is
seen). This means that the scriptures show Gärgé as an example of such a person.
The meaning is this: They who in their previous life properly performed their
duties but died before they could reap the result of their actions, in the next life are
born very pure in heart because of their previous pious deeds. The contact of
sincere devotees quickly turns them into great renounced saints.

In the next sütra the author explains that the association of devotees is very
powerful. By that association one becomes free from material desires and attains
transcendental knowledge.

Sütra 37

api smaryate

api—also; smaryate—in the Småti-çästra.

Also in the Småti-çästra.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (2.2.37) it is said:

pibanti ye bhagavata ätmanaù satäà

kathämåtaà çravaëa-puöeñu sambhåtam
punaëti te viñaya-vidüñitäçayaà
vrajanti tac-caraëa-saroruhäntikam

"Those who drink through aural reception, fully filled with the nectarean
message of Lord Kåñëa, the beloved of the devotees, purify the polluted aim of life
known as material enjoyment and thus go back to Godhead, to the lotus feet of
Him (the Personality of Godhead."*

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (5.12.12) it is said:

"My dear King Rahügaëa, unless one has the opportunity to smear his entire
body with the dust of the lotus feet of great devotees, one cannot realize the
Absolute Truth simply by observing celibacy (brahmacarya), strictly following the
rules and regulations of householder life, leaving home as vanaprastha, accepting
sannyasa, or undergoing severe penances in winter by keeping oneself submerged
in water or surrounding oneself in summer by fire and the scorching heat of the
sun. There are many other processes to understand the Absolute Truth, but the
Absolute Truth is only revealed to one who has attained the mercy of a great
devotee."*

In this sütra the word "api" (also) is used in the sense of joining things together.

Sütra 38

viçeñänugrahaç ca

viçeña—special; anugrahaù—mercy; ca—also.

Special mercy also.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 In Bhagavad-gétä (10.9-10), the Supreme Personality of Godhead personally
declares:

mac-cittä mad-gata-präëä
bodhayantaù parasparam
kathayantaç ca mäà nityaà
tuñyanti ca ramanti ca

"The thoughts of My pure devotees dwell in Me, their lives are fully devoted to
My service, and they derive great satisfaction and bliss from always enlightening
one another and conversing about Me.*

teñäà satata-yuktänäà
bhajatäà préti-purvakam
dadämi buddhi-yogaà taà
yena mäm upayänti te

"To those who are constantly devoted to serving Me with love, I give the
understanding by which they can come to Me."*

To such devotees it is seen that the Lord gives special mercy. By engaging in
devotional service in this way one attains renunciation of the world.

Adhikaraëa 10
Renunciation

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The situation of Yäjïavalkya and others who are within varëäçarama, as well as
the situation of Gärgé and others who are not within varëäçrama have been seen
here.

Saàçaya (doubt): Who are better: they who are within varëäçrama or they who

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

are not within it?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because they perform the duties of Vedas
and äçrama and also worship the Supreme Personality of Godhead, they who are
within varëäçrama are better.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 39

atas tv itarat jyäyo liìgäc ca

ataù—from that; tv—indeed; itarat—the other; jyäyaù—better; liìgät—by the

sign; ca—indeed.

But indeed the others are better, for there is a sign.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is used here to dispel doubt. The word "ca" (indeed) is
used here for emphasis. The word "itarat" (the others) here refers to they who are
other than the followers of varëäçrama, namely they who do not follow
varëäçrama. The word "jyäyaù" means “their method of attaining transcendental
knowledge is better". Why is that? The sütra explains, "liìgät" (for there is a sign).
The sign here is the Çruti-çästra's explanation that Gärgé was very wise with
transcendental knowledge.
This is the meaning: The scriptures prescribe the duties of the äçramas in order
to restrict the seemingly beginningless materialistic desires of the conditioned
souls. Therefore the purpose of varëäçrama is not to give facility for material
desires, but rather gradually to restrict them. At a certain stage, however, the
duties of varëäçrama become obstacles to attaining love for the Supreme
Personality of Godhead.
They who have become free of material desires and who place their love in the
Supreme Personality of Godhead alone gain no benefit from the duties of
varëäçrama. Therefore they who have risen above varëäçrama are better. In the
Jäbäla Upaniñad it is said that one may progress through the asramas one after
another, or, if like Sämvartaka Muni and others, one becomes completely devoted
to the Supreme Personality of Godhead alone one may renounce everything and

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

accept sannyäsa at once, at any time. The scriptural injunction, "a brähmaëa
should not pass even one day outside of the duties of varëäçrama," is meant only
for ordinary people.

Here someone may object: That may be. Still, the sannyäsés, who are outside of
the varëäçrama-dharma and who are solely devoted to the Supreme Personality of
Godhead, are not better, for they may fall down and again become materialistic.
When a sannyäsé falls down and again accepts the life of a householder, his action
is condemned by the scriptures. Also, one who accepts sannyäsa, but then again
faithfully accepts the glorious varëäçrama-dharma, must tend to so many
varëäçrama duties that the single-pointed service to the Lord that was the
advantage of sannyäsa life becomes lost for him. On the other hand, they who
accept the duties of varëäçrama gradually make more and more progress in
spiritual life.

If this is said, then the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 40

tad-bhütasya tu nätad-bhävo jaiminer api niyamätad-rüpäbhävebhyaù

tat—that; bhütasya—become; tu—but; na—not; a—not; tat—that; bhävaù—

being; jaimineù—if Jaimini Muni; api—even; niyama—rule; a—not; tat—that;
rüpa—form; a—not; bhävebhyaù—because of being.

But one who becomes that does not cease to be that, even according to Jaimini.
This is because of restraint, not being like that, and cessation.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is used here to dispel doubt. One who becomes that, that is
to say one who becomes a genuine nirapekña sannyäsé sincerely devoted to the
Supreme Lord, never ceases to be that, that is to say he never falls from his
devotion to the Lord. That is the opinion of Jaimini, and it is also the opinion of
Me, Vyäsa. Why is that? The sütra explains, "niyamätad-rüpäbhävebhyaù"
(because of restraint, not being like that, and cessation). The word "niyama" here
means "because they thirst to attain the Supreme Personality of Godhead, their
senses are naturally controlled." The word "rüpa" here means "desire". Because
they have no desire but to attain the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Gärgé and

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

other renunciants decline to accept the order of householder life or any of the
other orders of varëäçrama-dharma. That is the meaning here. In Çrémad-
Bhägavatam 7.15.35) it is said:

kämädibhir anäviddham
praçäntäkhila-våtti yat
cittaà brahma-sukha-spåñöaà
naivottiñöheta karhicit

"When one's consciousness is uncontaminated by material lusty desires, it

becomes calm and peaceful in all activities, for one is situated in eternal blissful
life. Once situated on that platform, one does not return to materialistic duties."*

Even Jaimini, who considers Vedic rituals most important, admits that the
Çruti-çästra declares this of the nirapekña devotees. The conclusion therefore is
that the sincere renunciant must have performed all other duties in his previous
births. That is why he is now pure in heart and free from the need to perform them
any longer.

In the next sütra will be shown the truth that the nirapekña devotee is better
than the svaniñtha devotee.

Here someone may object: Is it not so that the scriptural text beginning with the
words "sarvaà paçyaù paçyati" shows that transcendental knowledge brings even
the nirapekña devotee to Svargaloka and the other higher material realms, and that
when they enter the realms of Indra and the other demigods the devotees become
attached to the material enjoyments there, and thus their unalloyed devotion to
the Supreme Personality of Godhead becomes broken?

Fearing that someone might raise this objection, the author of the sütras gives
the following reply.

Sütra 41

na cädhikärikam api patanänumänät tad-ayogät

na—not; ca—also; adhikärikam—status; api—also; patana—falling; anumänät—

from the inference; tat—of that; a—not; yogät—from contact.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 And not that status even, for fear of falling and for lack or interest.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "ca" (and) is used here for emphasis. The word "api" (even) is used
here to include all the pleasures present in the material world". The word
“adhikäri" means "the posts of Indra and the other demigods". The nirapekña
devotee does not desire their posts. Why is that? The sütra explains,
"patanänumänät" (for fear of falling). This is explained in Bhagavad-gétä (8.16),
where Lord Kåñëa explains:

äbrahma-bhuvanäl loke
punar ävartino 'rjuna

"From the highest planet in the material world down to the lowest, all are
places of misery wherein repeated birth and death take place."*

Also, the nirapekña devotees have no desire to enjoy the material pleasures of
the higher planets. Descriptions of these truths can also be found in many places in
the Småti-çästra. Thus, even though the glory of transcendental knowledge may
carry him to the realms of Indra and the other demigods, because he has no desire
to enjoy the material pleasures available in those worlds, the nirapekña devotee
finds that his unalloyed love and devotion for the Supreme Lord remains
unbroken.

In the next sütra the author shows that the nirapekña devotees are superior to
the pariniñöhita devotees also.

Sütra 42

upa-pürvakam api tv eke bhävam açana-vat tad uktam

upa—with the prefix "upa"; pürvakam—beginning (upäsanä, or devotional

service); api—even; tu—but; eke—some; bhävam—devotion; açana—food; vat—
like; tat—that; uktam—spoken.

But some even that which begins with "upa". The perfect stage of devotion is

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

like food. This is said.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "api" (even) is used for emphasis. The word "tu" (but) is used to
begin the refutation of the opponent's idea. The word "eke" (some) means "the
followers of the Atharva Veda". The nirapekña devotees desire to engage in
devotional service. The word "upa-pürvam" (the word that begins with "upa")
here means “upäsana" (devotional service). The word "bhäva" here means "the
perfect stage of devotion". That perfect stage is like food (açana-vat) for the
nirapekña devotees. This the scriptures say. In Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad (1.14) it is
said:

bhaktir asya bhajanaà tad ihämutra

"Devotional service to Lord Kåñëa is performed when the heart no longer

desires any material benefit to be obtained in this life or the next."

In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad it is also said:

sac-cid-änandaika-rase bhakti-yoge tiñöhati

"Devotional service is eternal and full of knowledge and bliss."

Wherever they may gone, the devotees worship Lord Hari. This is evidence that
the devotees are always happy. The Çruti-çästra declares:

so 'çnute sarvän kämän

"The devotee enjoys. All his desires are fulfilled."

Thus, even though he may be residing in the material world, the devotee
experiences bliss equal to the bliss of the spiritual world. Many quotes to
corroborate this may be found by searching the Småti-çästra.

In the next sütra the author shows us another reason why the nirapekña
devotees, even without endeavoring to attain them, easily attain sälokya (residing

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

on the same planet with the Lord) and sämépya (staying near to the Lord)
liberation.

Sütra 43

bahis tübhayathä småter äcäräc ca

bahiù—outside; tu—indeed; ubhayathä—both ways; småteù—because of Smrti-

sastra; äcärät—because of conduct; ca—also.

Certainly outside in two ways because of Småti-çästra and conduct.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (certainly) is used here for emphasis. The word "bahiù"
(outside) here means that although the nirapekña devotees seem to reside within
the confines of the material world, in truth they are really outside that world. Why
is that? The sütra explains, "ubhayathä" (in two ways). In Çrémad-Bhägavatam it is
said:

visåjati hådayaà na yasya säkñäd

dharir avaçäbhihito 'py aghaugha-näçaù
praëaya-rasanayä dhåtäìghri-padmaù
sa bhavati bhägavata-pradhäna uktaù

"the Supreme Personality of Godhead is so kind to the conditioned souls that if

they call upon Him by speaking His holy name, even unintentionally or
unwillingly, the Lord is inclined to destroy innumerable sinful reactions in their
hearts. Therefore, when a devotee who has taken shelter of the Lord's lotus feet
chants the holy name of Kåñëa with genuine love, the Supreme Personality of
Godhead can never give up the heart of such a devotee. One who has thus
captured the Supreme Lord within his heart is to be known as bhägavata-
pradhäna, the most exalted devotee of the Lord."***

The word "äcärät" (because of conduct) here means that the relationship of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead and His devotees is like that of a master and
servant or like a jewel set in gold. This is explained in the Småti-çästras. In Çrémad-

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Bhägavatam (11.14.16) the Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself declares:

nirapekñaà munià çäntaà

nirvairaà sama-darçanam
anuvrajämy ahaà nityaà
püyeyety aìghri-reëubhiù

"With the dust of My devotees' lotus feet I desire to purify the material worlds,
which are situated within Me. Thus, I always follow the footsteps of My pure
devotees, who are free from all personal desire, rapt in thought of My pastimes,
peaceful, without any feelings of enmity, and of equal disposition everywhere."***

In these two ways it is shown that the Lord and His devotees are always
together, whether they are within the material world, or outside the boundaries of
the material world. Thus enmity to the Lord is the cause of repeated birth and
death in the material world, and destruction of those feelings of enmity to the Lord
is the cause of spiritual perfection.

Adhikaraëa 11
The Supreme Personality of Godhead Protects and Maintains the Nirapekña
Devotee

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the previous passages the nirapekña devotees disinterest in the pleasures

available in Brahmaloka and the other higher worlds was described. Now will be
described the nirapekña devotees' disinterest in the pleasures presently available in
this world. In the Taittiréya Araëyaka (3.14.1) it is said:

bhartä san bhriyamäëaà bibharti

"The Supreme Lord maintains His devotees."

Saàçaya (doubt): Does the Supreme Personality of Godhead personally

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

maintain the nirapekña devotees, or must the devotees struggle to maintain
themselves?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The Lord does not maintain His devotees.
The devotees must struggle to maintain themselves.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 44

sväminaù phala-çruter ity ätreyaù

sväminaù—from the Lord; phala—result; çruteù—from the Çruti-çästra; iti—

thus; ätreyaù—Dattätreya Muni.

From the Lord come results, for that is heard in the Çruti-çästra. That is
Dattätreya's opinion.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The bodily needs of the devotee are supplied by the Supreme Personality of
Godhead (sväminaù). Why is that? The sütra explains, "phala-çruteù" (for that is
heard in the Çruti-çästra). In Taittiréya Araëyaka (3.14.1) the Supreme Personality
of Godhead is described as the maintainer of the devotees. This is also the opinion
of Dattätreya Muni. In Bhagavad-gétä (9.22), Lord Kåñëa Himself declares:

ananyäç cintayanto mäà

ye janäù paryupäsate
teñäà nityäbhiyuktänäà
yoga-kñemaà vahämy aham

"But those who always worship Me with exclusive devotion, meditating on My

transcendental form, to them I carry what they lack, and I preserve what they
have."*
In the Padma Puräëa it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

darçana-dhyäna-samsparçair
matsya-kürma-vihaìgamäù
sväny apatyäni puñëanti
tathäham api padmaja

"By vision, by meditation, and by touch only do the fish, the tortoise, and the
birds maintain their offspring. So do I also, O Padmaja."*

The devotees do not wish to trouble the Lord for their maintenance. Still,
because the Lord's every desire is automatically fulfilled, He maintains His
devotees without any trouble on His part. Thus, when the devotees serve the Lord
they are automatically maintained by the Lord. This is explained in Taittiréya
Araëyaka (3.14.1).

In the next sütra the author gives an example to show that the Lord is
determined to maintain His devotees.

Sütra 45

ärtvijyam ity auòulomis tasmai hi parikréyate

ärtvijyam—the åtvk priest's work; ity—thus; auòulomiù—Auòulomi; tasmai—

for that; hi—indeed; parikréyate—is purchased.

Auòulomi says He is like a åtvik priest. He sells Himself for that.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "iti" is used in the sense of similarity. Thus the Supreme Personality
of Godhead acts like a åtvik priest, for the Lord maintains the nirapekña devotees.
Because He has been purchased by their devotional service, the Lord fulfills the
bodily needs of His devotees. In the Viñëu-dharma it is said:

tulasé-dala-mätreëa
jalasya culukena ca
vikréëéte svam ätmänaà
bhaktebhyo bhakta-vatsalaù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "The Supreme Personality of Godhead, who dearly loves His devotees, sells
Himself to them in exchange for a tulasé leaf and palmful of water."

The åtvik priests are purchased for a certain task by the yajamäna's payment of
dakñiëä. Being an impersonalist, Auòulomi equates devotional service with buying
and selling. For these reasons the nirapekñas are the best of the devotees.

Sütra 46

çruteç ca

çruteù—from the Çruti-çästra; ca—also.

From the Çruti-çästra also.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the performance of yajïa the åtvik priest gives his blessing to the performer
of the yajïa (yajamäna). In the Chändogya Upaniñad (1.7.8-9) it is also said:

tasmäd u haivam-vid udgätä brüyät kaà te kämam ägäyäni

"Then the learned udgätä priest says: Of what desire shall I sing?"

In this way the åtvik priest gives the result of the yajïa to the yajamäna. As the
åtvik priest thus maintains the yajamäna, so the Supreme Personality of Godhead
maintains His devotee.

Adhikaraëa 12
Meditation on the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now the author of the sütras will reveal the activities of the devotees after they
have attained transcendental knowledge of the Lord. In the Båhad-äraëyaka
Upaniñad (1.4.23) it is said:

tasmäd evam-vic chänto dantaù. . . ätmä vä are drañöavyaù

"One who knows the Supreme Personality of Godhead becomes peaceful and
self-controlled. . . Then he gazes on the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

Saàçaya (doubt): here it is said that one who desires to attain the Supreme
Personality of Godhead should also attain a long list of virtues, beginning with
being peaceful and culminating in being rapt in meditation on the Lord. Must the
nirapekña devotee develop all these virtues, or may be merely become rapt in
meditation on the Lord's form, qualities, and pastimes?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Although one may have attained

transcendental knowledge, that knowledge does not become stable without the
development of peacefulness and a host of other virtues. Therefore the devotee
should endeavor to attain all these virtues.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 47

sahakäry-antara-vidhiù pakñeëa tåtéyaà tadvato vidhy-ädi-vat

sahakäri—helping; antara—another; vidhiù—rule; pakñeëa—in one sense;

tåtéyam—the third; tadvataù—like that; vidhi—rule; ädi—beginning; vat—like.

Different from the helpful rules is the third. It is like the rules and other things.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The "sahakäry-antara" (helpful rules) here are the two sets of virtues: 1. those
beginning with peacefulness, and 2. those beginning with Vedic yajïas. These two
sets of virtues have already been discussed (in the purport of sütra 3.4.26). These
rules (vidhiù) are here considered in a new and different way. These rules must be
observed by the followers (pakñeëa) of varëäçrama-dharma, but they need not be
observed by they who are not followers of varëäçrama-dharma, for such persons
already possess these virtues naturally. Therefore these persons are ordered to
meditate on the Lord's form, qualities, and pastimes.
Then the sütra explains, "tåtéyaà tadvataù" (there is a third thing like that).
Desiring only to attain the Lord's mercy, the nirapekña devotee engages his mind
in thinking about the Lord. That is the "third rule" (tåtéyam). This is described in
the following statement of Çruti-çästra:

manasaivedam äptavyam

"Engaging his mind in thinking of Him, the devotee attains the Lord."

Hearing about the Lord is done with the body and chanting mantras glorifying
the Lord is done with the voice. Meditating on the Lord is done with the mind.
Thus meditation is the third of these three processes.
To show that meditation must be performed the sütra gives the example of rules
and other things (vidhy-ädi-vat). As the followers of varëäçrama must perform
sandhyä-upäsanä and other rituals, so the nirapekña devotees who have attained
transcendental knowledge should meditate on the Supreme Lord's form, qualities,
and pastimes.
This does not mean that the nirapekña devotees should not perform japa,
worship, and other spiritual activities, for by meditating on the Lord one also
engages in these other activities. However, for the nirapekña devotee, meditation
on the Lord is most important. In this way three kinds of devotees situated in
transcendental knowledge have been described.

Adhikaraëa 13
The Different Açramas

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 That transcendental knowledge is attained by three kinds of devotees,
beginning with the svaniñöha devotees, has already been explained. Now will be
explained the way to make that transcendental knowledge very steady and secure.
At the end of the Chändogya Upaniñad (8.15.1) it is said:

äcärya-kuläd vedam adhétya yatha-vidhänaà guroù karmätiçeñeëäbhisamävåtya

kuöumbe çucau deçe svädhyäyam adhiyäno dharmikän vidadhätmani sarvendriyäëi
sampratiñöhäpyähiàsän sarva-bhütäny anyatra térthebhyaù sa khalv evaà vartayan
yävad äyuñaà brahmalokam abhisampadyate na ca punar ävartate.

"From the äcäryas one should learn the Vedas. One should perform his duties
and also offer dakñiëä to his spiritual master. Then one should accept household
life, live in a pure way, study the Vedas, perform his religious duties, engage all his
senses in the Supreme Lord's service, not harm any living being, and go on
pilgrimage to holy places. A person who passes his life in this way goes to the
spiritual world. He does not return to this world of repeated birth and death."

Saàçaya (doubt): Are they who are not in the gåhastha-äçrama able attain
transcendental knowledge, or are they not able to attain it?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Here and there the scriptures may say that
the sannyäsés are able to attain transcendental knowledge, but this is only flattery,
only empty words of praise. These passages merely mean that one should renounce
everything for the sake of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. The conclusion is
that in order to attain the Supreme Personality of Godhead one must accept the
gåhastha-äçrama. That is the teaching of the scriptures.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 48

kåtsna-bhävät tu gåhiëopasaàhäraù

kåtsna—of all; bhävät—because of the existence; tu—but; gåhiëä—by the

gåhastha; upasaàhäraù—the goal.

But because of all the goal is by a gåhastha.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is used here to dispel doubt. This passage from the
scriptures declares that the goal is attained by a gåhastha not because only they can
attain liberation but because everything else (kåtsna-bhävät) is contained in
gåhastha life. This means that all the duties of all the äçramas are in some way
included in the duties of gåhastha life. Therefore the duties of other äçramas, such
as non-violence and sense-control, are duties for the gåhasthas also. In fact no duty
in any other äçrama is incompatible with gåhastha life. In the Viñëu Puräëa it is
said:

bhikñä-bhujaç ca ye kecit
pärivraò brahmacäriëaù
te 'py atraiva pratiñöhante
gärhasthyaà tena vai param

"Sannyäsés, brahmacärés, and all others who eat the food of begging depend on
the gåhasthas. Therefore the gåhastha-äçrama is the best of äçramas."

Because the Çruti-çästras declare that the followers of the other äçramas may
also attain liberation, if it is said that the followers of the gåhastha-äçrama attain
the goal of life it is because that äçrama contains the duties of all the other
äçramas. This is explained in the following sütra.

Sütra 49

mauna-vad itareñäm apy upadeçät

mauna—silence; vat—like; itareñäm—of others; api—also; upadeçät—from the

teaching.

Because there is teaching of others like a silent sage.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The words "mauna-vat" here refer to the spiritual perfection already described.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

In the Chändogya Upaniñad (2.23.1) it is said:

trayo dharma-skandhä yajïo 'dhyayanaà dänam iti prathamas tapa eva dvitéyo
brahmacaryäcärya-kula-väsé tåtéyo 'tyantam ätmänam äcärya-kule 'vasädayan
sarva ete punya-lokä bhavanti brahma-saàstho 'måtatvam eti

"Religious life has three branches. The first branch is yajïa, Vedic study, and
charity. The second branch is austerity. The third branch is living as a brahmacäré
in the home of the spiritual master. By staying as a brahmacäré in the home of the
spiritual master, everyone becomes saintly and pious. However, only he who takes
shelter of the Supreme Lord becomes immortal."

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.22) it is said:

etam eva viditvä munir bhavaty etam eva pravräjino lokam abhépsantaù
pravrajanti

"One who understands the Supreme Personality of Godhead becomes wise.

Desiring to travel to His transcendental world, the brähmaëas become wandering
sannyäsés."

In this way it is seen that the scriptures teach that the wandering sannyäsés, the
naiñöhika-brahmacärés, and the followers of the other äçramas, all can attain
liberation. This is described in this sütra by the words, "itareñäm apy upadeçät".
The word "itareñäm is in the plural because the duties of the different äçramas are
very many. The four äçramas are described in the following words of the Jäbäla
Upaniñad:

brahmacaryaà samäpya gåhé bhavet. gåhé bhütvä vané bhavet. vané bhutvä
pravrajet. yadi vetarathä brahmacaryäd eva pravrajed gåhäd vä vanäd vä. atha
punar avraté vä vraté snätako väsnatako votsannägnir anagniko vä yad ahar eva
virajyet tad ahar eva pravrajet.

"When one completes his studies as a brahmacäré, a man should become a

gåhastha. After he has been a gåhastha he may become a vänaprastha. After he has
been a vänaprastha he may become a wandering sannyäsé. Or, leaving brahmacäré
life he may at once become a wandering sannyäsé. Or, leaving gåhastha life he may
directly become a sannyäsé. Or, leaving vänaprastha life he may become a
sannyäsé. They who have followed vows or not followed vows, become a snätaka or

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

not become a snätaka, carefully kept the sacred fire, or not kept
In the Jäbäla Upaniñad passage beginning with the words “paramahaàsänäm",
the nirapekña devotees are specifically described. When the gåhasthas are singled
out it is because the duties of the other äçramas are all contained in the gåhastha-
äçrama. Still, the Upaniñad clearly says, "On the day one turns with distaste from
the world, on that day one should become a wandering sannyäsé." This means that
when one sincerely renounces the world one should at once accept sannyäsa. In
this way the idea that the gåhastha-äçrama is the only proper äçrama is refuted.
Whether one still has material desires or one has lost all taste for material things
determines whether one should accept the gåhastha-äçrama or the sannyäsa-
äçrama. Still, when a person has peacefulness, self-control, tolerance, and other
virtues, he may be within the varëäçrama-dharma, or he may be above
varëäçrama-dharma, he will certainly attain transcendental knowledge. This has
been clearly explained.

Adhikaraëa 14
The Secret of Transcendental Knowledge

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now it will be said that transcendental knowledge is a great secret. In

Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (6.22) it is said:

vedänte paramaà guhyaà

purä-kalpe pracoditam
näpraçäntäya dätavyaà
näputräyäçiñyäya vä

"This, the supreme secret of Vedic literature, should not be spoken to one who
is not peaceful or in control of his senses, nor to one who is not a dutiful son or an
obedient disciple."

Saàçaya (doubt): Should transcendental knowledge be taught to everyone or

should it not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Out of compassion the teacher does not

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

distinguish between who is fit and who is not fit to receive transcendental
knowledge. He reveals the truth to all.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 50

anäviñkurvann anvayät

anäviñkurvan—not manifesting; anvayät—because of tradition.

He does not reveal, because of the disciplic succession.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here the word "anäviñkurvan" means, "he does not teach the transcendental
knowledge". Why is that? The sütra explains: "anvayät" (because of the disciplic
succession). This is declared in the previous quote from the Çvetäçvatara
Upaniñad. The lotus-eyed Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself declares it in
these words (Bhagavad-gétä 18.67):

idaà te nätapaskäya
näbhaktäya kadäcana
na cäçuçrüñave väcyaà
na ca mäà yo 'bhyasüyati

"This confidential knowledge may never be explained to those who are not
austere, or devoted, or engaged in devotional service, nor to one who is envious of
Me."*

When it is given to they who are fit to receive it, transcendental knowledge
bears fruit, but when it is given to they who are not fit to receive it, it does not bear
fruit. This is explained in Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (6.23):

yasya deve parä bhaktiù. . .

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "Only unto those great souls who have implicit faith in both the Lord and the
spiritual master are all the imports of Vedic knowledge automatically revealed."*

In the Chändogya Upaniñad (8.7.1-8.15.1) the story of how Indra and Virocana
were both taught transcendental knowledge. However, because Virocana was not
a fit student, he could not understand it. Therefore transcendental knowledge
should be taught to they who are able to understand it. It should not be taught to
they who are not able. They who are faithful and accept the scriptures are able to
understand.

Adhikaraëa 15
Attaining Transcendental Knowledge in This Lifetime

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be considered the time when transcendental knowledge is manifested.

Viñaya (the subject to be discussed): The stories of Naciketa, Jäbäla, and

Vämadeva will be discussed here.

Saàçaya (doubt): Is transcendental knowledge manifested in this life or the

next?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): It is manifested in the very lifetime that one
strives to attain it. This is because a person striving for knowledge thinks, "Let me
attain it in this lifetime."

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 51

aihikam aprastuta-pratibandhe tad darçanät

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 aihikam—in the presrnt life; aprastuta—not manifested; pratibandhe—
impediment; tat—that; darçanät—from seeing.

In the absence of obstacles it is in this life. That is so because of scriptural

revelation.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

When there is no obstacle, transcendental knowledge is manifested in this

lifetime. When there is an obstacle it is manifested in another lifetime. Why is
that? The sütra explains, "tad darçanät" (That is so because of scriptural
revelation). In Kaöha Upaniñad (2.3.18) it is said:

måtyu-proktäà naciketo 'tha labdhvä

vidyäm etäà yoga-vidhià ca kåtsnam
brahma-präpto virajo 'bhüd vimåtyur
anyo 'py evaà yo vidadhyätmam eva

"Learning from Yamaräja the truth of transcendental knowledge and yoga

practice, Naciketa attained the Supreme Personality of Godhead. He became free
of the contamination of material life. He became free from death. Anyone else
who truly knows the Supreme Personality of Godhead also becomes like
Naciketa."

This text shows that transcendental knowledge can be manifested in one

lifetime. Sometimes, however, a person strives for transcendental knowledge but
attains it only in another lifetime. An example of this is seen in Båhad-äraëyaka
Upaniñad (1.4.10). When the obstacles are not great and the endeavor is very
powerful, one can attain transcendental knowledge in one lifetime. Naciketa and
the king of Sauvéra are examples of this. But when the obstacles are very powerful,
then transcendental knowledge may have to wait for another birth, even though
one may have performed great yajïas and austerities, given charity, and developed
peacefulness, self-control, and a host of other virtues. This is confirmed in the
following words of Bhagavad-gétä (6.37-45):

"Arjuna said: O Kåñëa, what is the destination of the unsuccessful

transcendentalist, who in the beginning takes to the process of self-realization with
faith but who later desists due to worldly-mindedness and thus does not attain

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

perfection in mysticism?*
"O mighty-armed Kåñëa, does not such a man, who is bewildered from the path
of transcendence, fall away from both spiritual and material success and perish like
a riven cloud, with no position in any sphere?*
"This is my doubt, O Kåñëa, and I ask You to dispel it completely. But for You,
no one is to be found who can destroy this doubt.*
"The Supreme Personality of Godhead said: Son of Påthä, a transcendentalist
engaged in auspicious activities does not meet with destruction either in this world
or in the spiritual world. One who does good, My friend, is never overcome by
evil.*
"The unsuccessful yogé, after many, many years of enjoyment on the planets of
the pious living entities, is born into a family of righteous people, or into a family
of rich aristocracy.*
"Or (if unsuccessful after long practice of yoga) he takes his birth in a family of
transcendentalists who are surely great in wisdom. Certainly, such a birth is rare in
this world.*
"On taking such a birth, he revives the divine consciousness of his previous life,
and he tries to make further progress in order to achieve complete success, O son
of Kuru.*
"By virtue of the divine consciousness of his previous life, he automatically
becomes attracted to the yogic principles, even without seeing them. Such an
inquisitive transcendentalist stands always above the ritualistic principles of the
scriptures.*
"And when the yogé engages himself with sincere endeavor in making further
progress, being washed of all contaminations, then ultimately, achieving perfection
after many, many births of practice, he attains the supreme goal."*

Therefore it is not an unfailing rule that one always attains transcendental

knowledge in one lifetime. A wise man agrees, "I may attain transcendental
knowledge in this lifetime or in another lifetime." That is the description in the
scriptures. Therefore one may attain transcendental knowledge in this lifetime or
in another lifetime. If there are obstacles, that knowledge may have to wait for
another lifetime.

Adhikaraëa 16
Transcendental Knowledge and Liberation

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Now will be shown the truth that liberation inevitably follows the attainment of
transcendental knowledge. In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.17) it is said:

tam eva vidvän amåta iha bhavati

"He who understands the Supreme Personality of Godhead becomes

immortal."

In the Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (3.8) it is said:

tam eva viditväti måtyum eti

"Only he who knows the Supreme Personality of Godhead can transcend the
bonds of birth and death."*

Saàçaya (doubt): Does a person situated in transcendental knowledge attain

liberation when he leaves his material body, or must he take another birth and
then become liberated?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because the effect must follow the cause,
such a person attains liberation the moment he leaves his material body.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 52

evaà mukti-phaläniyamas tad-avasthävadùrtes tad-avasthävadhåteù

evam—thus; mukti—of liberation; phala—the result; a—not; niyamaù—rule;

tat—of that; avasthä—state of being; avadùrteù—because of the determination.

In the same way there is no specific rule about liberation, for it depends on the
circumstances.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

As there is no rule about transcendental knowledge, so there is no rule that a

person situated in transcendental knowledge and striving for liberation must attain
liberation in the same lifetime. When there are no longer any obstacles, then a
person situated in transcendental knowledge attains liberation when he dies. This
means when there are no longer any past karmic reactions. When there are no
karmic reactions remaining, then one attains liberation at the moment of death.
When there are karmic reactions remaining one does not attain liberation at the
moment of death. Why is that? The sütra explains, "tad-avasthävadhåteù" (for it
depends on the circumstances). In the Chändogya Upaniñad (6.14.2) it is said:

äcäryavän puruño veda tasya tävad eva ciraà yävan na vimokñye atha sampatsye

"One who approaches a bona fide spiritual master can understand everything
about spiritual realization.* When his past karmic reactions are exhausted he at
once attains liberation."

In this way the Chändogya Upaniñad affirms that one attains liberation when
his past karmic reactions are exhausted. In the Näräyaëädhyätma it is said:

vidvän amåtam äpnoti

nätra käryä vicäraëä
avasannaà yadärabdhaà
karma tatraiva gacchati
na ced bahüni janmäni
präpyaivänte na saàçayaù

"A person situated in transcendental knowledge attains liberation. Of this there

is no doubt. But if his past karmic reactions are not destroyed, many births may
pass before he finally attains liberation at the end. Of this there is no doubt."

Although transcendental knowledge certainly destroys all past karmic reactions,

still, by the Supreme Lord's will a certain portion of past karmic reactions may
remain. This will be explained later in this book. The last word of the sütra is
repeated to indicate the end of the chapter.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Epilogue

janayitvä vairägyaà
gunair nibadhnäti modayan bhaktän
yais tair baddho 'pi guëair
anurajyati so 'stu me hariù preyän

May Lord Hari, who gives renunciation of the world to His devotees and
delights by binding them with the ropes of His glorious qualities and who is
Himself bound with the ropes of His devotees' glorious qualities, be the object of
my love and devotion.

Chapter 4

Pada 1

Invocation

dattvä vidyauñadhaà bhaktän

niravadyän karoti yaù
dåk-pathaà bhajatu çrémän
prétyätmä sa hariù svayam

May Lord Hari, who is glorious, handsome, blissful, and filled with love, and
who cures His devotees by giving them the medicine of transcendental knowledge,
enter the pathway of my eyes.

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

This chapter will consider the topic of the results obtained by one who has
transcendental knowledge. Although some of the sütras discuss the methods by
which transcendental knowledge is obtained, because most discuss the results

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

obtained by transcendental knowledge, this chapter bears the title, “The Results of
Transcendental Knowledge".

Adhikaraëa 1
One Should Always Engage in Devotional Service

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.5.6) it is said:

ätmä vä are drañöavyaù

"One should gaze on the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

Saàçaya (doubt): Must spiritual practices, such as hearing about the Lord's
glories, be performed repeatedly, or is it acceptable they not be performed
repeatedly (but only once)?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): As an agniñöoma-yajïa and other yajïas

need be performed only once in order to grant residence in Svargaloka, in the
same way spiritual practices like hearing about the Lord's glories need be
performed only once for the worshiper to directly see the Supreme Personality of
Godhead Himself.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 1

ävåttir asakåd upadeçät

ävåttiù—repetition; asakåt—many times; upadeçät—because of the teaching.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 It is repeated many times, for that is the teaching.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The various activities of devotional service, which begin with hearing the glories
of the Lord, should be repeated many times. Why is that? The sütra explains,
"asakåt" (many times, for that is the teaching). In the Chändogya Upaniñad (6.8.7)
it is said:

sa ya eño 'ëimä. etad ätmyam idaà sarvam. tat satyam. sa ätmä. tat tvam asi.

"He is the resting place. Everything comes from Him. He is the supreme reality.
He is the supreme person. You are like unto Him."
In these words Çvetaketu was instructed nine times. It is •illogical to say that if
the scripture mentions an activity once then there is no need to perform that
activity many times. This may apply to an activity where the result is not directly
seen, but for an activity that has the direct perception of the Supreme Personality
of Godhead as its result, a result that is clearly seen, the activity must be repeated
until the result is obtained. This is like threshing rice, where the activity must be
continued until the husk is removed. Therefore the devotional activities that begin
with hearing the Lord's glories should be performed again and again until the
result is obtained.

Sütra 2

liìgäc ca

liìgät—because of a sign; ca—also.

Also because of a sign.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In Taittiréya Upaniñad (3.2) Bhågu Muni repeated a spiritual activity many

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

times. By this sign (liìgät) the importance of repetition is proved. It is understood
that repetition is necessary for the conditioned souls, who have committed
offenses.

Adhikaraëa 2
Meditation on the Supersoul

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now another topic will be considered.

Saàçaya (doubt): Should one meditate on the Lord as the supreme controller
or as the all-pervading Supersoul?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): In the Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (4.7) it is said:

juñöaà yadä paçyaty anyam éçam

"He sees the Lord as the supreme controller."

Therefore one should meditate on the Lord as the supreme controller.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 3

ätmeti tüpagacchanti grähayanti ca

ätmä—the Supersoul; iti—thus; tu—indeed; upagacchanti—know; grähayanti—

teach; ca—also.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Indeed, they know and teach that He is the Supersoul.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (indeed) is used here for emphasis. The Supreme Personality of
Godhead, who is both the supreme controller and the all-pervading Supersoul,
should be worshiped. They who know the truth understand that the Supersoul is
the first cause of all causes. In the Çruti-çästra it is said:

yeñäà no 'yam ätmäyaà lokaù

"He is the Supersoul, present in everyone's heart."

They also teach this truth to their disciples. In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad
(1.4.7) it is said:

ätmety evopäséta

"One should worship the Supersoul."

The word "ätmä" here should be understood to mean, "the all-powerful

Supreme Personality of Godhead, whose humanlike form is full of knowledge and
bliss". Some claim that the word "ätmä" means, "He who gives Himself to create
the living beings and who therefore is the person from whom the living beings are
manifested". The word “ätmä" however does not mean that when he is freed from
illusion the individual spirit soul becomes the Supreme. That is a false idea, as we
have already explained.

Adhikaraëa 3
The Supreme Lord Is Not the Mind

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The worship of the Lord is described in the following words of Chändogya
Upaniñad (3.18.1):

mano brahmety upäséta

"One should worship the Supreme as the mind."

Saàçaya (doubt): Should one meditate on the mind as being identical with the
Supreme Personality of Godhead?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because the scriptures affirm that the mind
and the Supreme Personality of Godhead are not different, therefore this kind of
meditation should be done.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 4

na pratéke na hi saù

na—not; pratéke—in the part; na—not; hi—indeed; saù—He.

Not in the part. It is not He.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

One should not think that the mind or other things that are only parts are
identical with the Supreme Lord Himself. This is because the Supreme Lord is not
identical with His parts. Rather, the Supreme Lord is the support and the resting
place of the mind. In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (11.2.41) it is said:

khaà väyum agnià salilaà mahéà ca

jyotéàñi sattväni diço drumädén

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

sarit-samudräàç ca hareù çaréraà
yat kià ca bhütaà praëamed ananyaù

"A devotee should not see anything as being separate from the Supreme
Personality of Godhead, Kåñëa. Ether, fire, air, water, earth, the sun, and other
luminaries, all living beings, the directions, trees and other plants, the rivers and
oceans, and whatever a devotee experiences he should consider to be an expansion
of Kåñëa. Thus seeing everything that exists within creation as the body of the
Supreme Lord, Hari, the devotee should offer his sincere respects to the entire
expansion of the •Lord's body."***

In this situation the nominative case should be understood to have the force of
the locative. That is the conclusion here.

Adhikaraëa 4
The Impersonal Brahman

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

It has already been shown that one should think of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead as the all-pervading Supersoul.

Saàçaya (doubt): Should one think of the Supreme Personality of Godhead as

the impersonal Brahman, or should one not think of Him as the Brahman?

Viñaya (the subject to be discussed): The descriptions of the impersonal

Brahman are not like the descriptions of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The Supreme Personality of Godhead

should not be considered identical with the impersonal Brahman, for it has already
been confirmed that He is identical with the all-pervading Supersoul.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 5

brahma-dåñöir utkarñät

brahma—of Brahman; dåñöiù—sight; utkarñät—because of being exalted.

He is seen as impersonal Brahman, for He is most exalted.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

As He is considered identical with the all-pervading Supersoul, so the Supreme

Personality of Godhead should also be considered identical with the impersonal
Brahman. Why is that? The sütra explains, "utkarñät" (for He is most exalted).
This means "for He is the abode of limitless transcendental qualities". In the
Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (2.5.19) it is said:

ayam ätmä brahma sarvänubhütiù

"He is the all-knowing Supersoul and He is also the impersonal Brahman."

This is also confirmed by the text that begins "atha kasmäd ucyate brahma".

Adhikaraëa 5
The Creator of the Sun

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Puruña-sükta prayer (Åg Veda 10.90) it is said:

candramä manaso jätaç

cakñuñaù süryo 'jäyata

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

çroträd väyuç ca präëaç ca
mukhäd agnir ajäyata

"From His mind the moon was born. From His eye the sun was born. From His
ear the wind and the life breath were born. From His mouth fire was born."

Here the Supreme Lord's eyes and the other parts of His body are described as
the causes of the sun and other parts of the world.

Saàçaya (doubt): Should they be thought of caused in this way or not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The Lord's eyes and the other parts of His
body are said to be soft and delicate like lotus flowers and other soft things. That is
why they cannot be the cause of things that are harsh, rough, and very powerful
(like the sun).

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 6

ädityädi-matayaç cäìga upapatteù

äditya—the sun; ädi—beginning with; matayaù—conception; ca—and; aìge—in

the limb; upapatteù—because of being reasonable.

Also, the idea of the sun and other things is in the limb, for that is reasonable.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "ca" (also) is used here to begin the refutation of the opponent's
argument. This kind of meditation on Lord Viñëu's eyes and the other parts of His
body should be performed. Why is that? The sütra explains, "upapatteù" (for that
is reasonable). This meditation is proper for it shows the Lord's greatness. It is by
the Lord's greatness that His eyes •are the creator of the sun and the other parts
of His body are the creators of other great things. In this way it the scriptures
prove that the parts of the Lord's body are transcendental. They are not like
anything in the material world.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 6
Asanas and Meditation

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (2.8) it is said:

trir-unnataà sthäpya samaà çaréraà

hådéndriyäëi manasä sanniveçya
brahmoòupena pratareta vidvän
srotäàsi sarväëi bhayävahäni

"With the neck, head, and back straight, and with all powers of concentration,
one should meditate on the Supreme Personality of Godhead staying in the heart
as the Supersoul. Traveling in the boat of the Supreme Lord's mercy, the learned
devotee crosses the raging fearful waters of the cycle of repeated birth and death."

Saàçaya (doubt): When meditating on the Lord is it compulsory that one adopt
the äsana (yoga sitting-posture) described here, or is it not compulsory?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Meditation is performed in the mind.

Therefore the adoption of a particular posture of the body is not compulsory.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 7

äsénaù sambhavät

äsénaù—sitting; sambhavät—because of possibility.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Sitting, for then it is possible.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

One should adopt an äsana (yoga sitting-posture), and then meditate on the
Lord. Why is that? The sütra explains, “sambhavät" (for then it is possible). When
one is reclining, standing up, or walking, the mind is liable to be distracted and
then meditation is not possible. In Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (1.3) it is said:

te dhyäna-yogänugatä apaçyan

"Sitting in a yoga posture, and rapt in meditation, the sages gazed at the
Supreme Personality of Godhead."
In this way they who desire to meditate on the Lord are described. Therefore
one should adopt the äsana posture. Otherwise meditation is not possible.

Sütra 8

dhyänäc ca

dhyänät—because of meditation; ca—also.

Also because of meditation.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Meditation is defined as thinking of one thing only and not thinking of anything
else. This kind of thinking is not possible when one is reclining or in any posture
but the yoga äsana. Therefore one should sit in the yoga äsana.

Sütra 9

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

acalatvaà cäpekñya

acalatvam—stillness; ca—and; apekñya—in relation to.

Also because it is related to stillness.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "ca" (also) is used here for emphasis. In the Chändogya Upaniñad the
word "dhyäna" (meditation) is used as a synonym of "stillness". There it is said
(Chändogya Upaniñad 7.6.1):

dhyäyatéva påthivé

"The earth is still, as if it were rapt in meditation."

This also hints that meditation should be performed when one is sitting in a
yoga äsana. Even in the mundane affairs of the world the word "dhyäna" is used in
this way, as in the sentence, "dhyäyati käntaà proñita-ramaëé" (the girl is still, rapt
in meditation on her absent beloved).

Sütra 10

smaranti ca

smaranti—the Småti-çästra; ca—also.

The Småti-çästra also.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In Bhagavad-gétä (7.11-13), the Supreme Personality of Godhead explains:

çucau deçe pratiñöhäpya

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 sthiram äsanam ätmanaù
näty-ucchritaà näti-nécaà
cailäjina-kuçottaram

tatraikägraà manaù kåtvä

yata-cittendriya-kriyaù
upaviçyäsane yuïjyät
yogam ätma-viçuddhaye

samaà käya-çiro-grévaà
dhärayann acalaà sthiraù
samprekñya näsikägraà svaà
diçaç cänavalokayan

"To practice yoga, one should go to a secluded place and should lay kuça grass
on the ground and then cover it with a deerskin and a soft cloth. The seat should
be neither too high nor too low and should be situated in a sacred place. The yogé
should then sit on it very firmly and practice yoga to purify the heart by controlling
his mind, senses, and activities and fixing the mind on one point. One should hold
one's body, head, and neck erect in a straight line and stare steadily at the tip of
the nose."*

In this way the Småti-çästra explains that they who meditate should keep their
bodies, senses, and minds still. Without adopting the yoga äsana such stillness is
not possible. Therefore a person engaged in meditation should adopt the yoga
äsana.

Adhikaraëa 7
The True Nature of Meditation

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now another point will be considered in relation to Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad

4.5.6.

Saàçaya (doubt): In worshiping the Lord are there restrictions of direction,

place, and time to be observed, or are there no such restrictions?

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): In Vedic rituals there are such restrictions.
Because worship of the Lord is also described in the Vedas, these restrictions must
also apply to worship of the Lord.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 11

yatraikägratä taträviçeñät

yatra—where; ekägratä—single-pointed concentration; tatra—there; aviçeñät—

because of not being specific.

Where is single-pointed concentration, there because nothing is specific.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

This sütra means, "In whatever direction, place, or time (yatra) there is single-
pointed concentration (ekägratä) of the mind, in that (tatra) direction, place, or
time one should worship Lord Hari". The meaning here is that in the worship of
the Lord there is no restriction of direction, place, or time. Why is that? The sütra
explains, "aviçeñät" (because there is nothing specific). This means, "because the
scriptures give no specific instruction in this matter". In the Varäha Puräëa it is
said:

tam eva deçaà seveta

taà kälaà täm avasthitim
tän eva bhogän seveta
mano yatra prasédati

na hi deçädibhiù kaçcid
viçeñaù samudéritaù
manaù-prasädanärthaà hi
deça-kälädi-cintanam

"One should seek a place, time, situation, and sensory environment where the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

mind becomes peaceful and cheerful. Other than that there is no specific
instruction about place or environment. Place, time, situation, and sensory
environment should be chosen to facilitate a peaceful and cheerful mind."

Here someone may object: Is it not so that there are actually rules regarding the
place of worship? For example, in the Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (2.10) it is said:

same çucau çarkara-vahni-väluka-

vivarjite çabda-jaläçrayädibhiù
mano-'nuküle na tu cakñu-péòane
guhä-nivätäçrayaëe niyojayet

"One should practice yoga is a solitary place with level ground free from
pebbles and stones, free from winds, clean and pure, pleasing to the mind, not
unpleasing to the eyes, secluded, and far from noisy bathing places."

Also, one should meditate in a holy place, for holy places bring liberation.

If this is said, then I reply: Yes. It is true. Still, there may be an unfortunate
situation where one is not able to take shelter of a holy place, although of course, if
there is no such misfortune, one should stay in a holy place and worship the Lord
there. Still, the final conclusion is given here in the words "mano-'nuküle" (one
should find a place that is pleasing to the mind).

Adhikaraëa 8
Devotional Service Continues After Liberation

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Praçna Upaniñad (5.1) it is said:

sa yo haitad bhagavan manuñyeñu präyaëäntam oàkäram abhidhyäyéta

"O master, what world is attained by a person who up to the end of his life

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

continues to meditate on Oà?"

In the Nåsiàha-täpané Upaniñad (2.4) it is said:

yaà sarve devä namanti mumukñavo brahma-vädinaç ca

"All who are demigods, all who are philosophers, and all who yearn to attain
liberation worship the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

In the Taittiréya Upaniñad (3.10.5) it is said:

etat sama-gayann äste

"They sit down and chant the Säma Veda to glorify Him."

In the Åg Veda (1.22.20) it is said:

tad viñëoù paramaà padaà

sadä paçyanti sürayaù

"The wise and learned devotees always see the supreme abode of Lord
Viñëu."*

In these verses it is said that devotional service both leads to liberation and also
continues after liberation.

Saàçaya (doubt): Is devotional service performed only before liberation, or is it

not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because liberation is the goal to be attained

by performing devotional service, therefore devotional service is performed only
as long as one is not liberated.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 12

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

äpräyaëät taträpi hi dåñöam

ä—until; präyaëät—liberation; tatra—there; api—even; hi—indeed; dåñöam—

seen.

Until liberation. Even there it is seen.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Devotional service should be performed both before and after liberation. Why
is that? The sütra explains, "hi dåñöam". That means, "because it is seen in the
Çruti-çästra. In the Sauparëa-çruti it is said:

sarvadainam upäséta yävad vimuktiù. muktä api hy enam upäsate

"Before attaining liberation the great souls always worship the Lord. After
attaining liberation they continue to worship Him."

In this way it is said that the Lord is worshiped in both circumstances.

Here someone may object: The liberated souls do not worship the Lord. This is
so because they have no goal to attain by such worship and because the scriptures
do not order such worship.

To this I reply: That is true. Still, even though there is no scriptural order to
compel them, the liberated souls nevertheless worship the Lord because they are
attracted by His transcendental handsomeness. Also, a person who has jaundice
eats sugar candy as medicine, but when he is cured he also continues to eat sugar.
In the same way the liberated souls continue to worship the Lord. In this way it is
proved that the great souls worship the Lord both before and after they attain
liberation.

Adhikaraëa 9
Transcendental Knowledge Destroys Past Sins

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The way to attain transcendental knowledge having already been considered,

now will be considered the results of that knowledge. In the Chändogya Upaniñad
(4.14.3) it is said:

yathä puñkara-paläça äpo na çliñyante evam eva vidi päpaà karma na çliñyate

"As water does not touch a lotus leaf, so sin does not touch a person situated in
transcendental knowledge."

In the Chändogya Upaniñad (5.24.3) it is said:

tad yathaiñékä-tülam agnau protaà pradüyetaivaà häsya sarve päpmänaù

pradüyante

"As a blade if éñékä grass is at once consumed by a fire, so are consumed the sins
of a person situated in transcendental knowledge."

Saàçaya (doubt): Must one experience the results of past and present sinful
deeds to become free from the karmic results, or are such results destroyed and
non-existent for a person situated in transcendental knowledge?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): One cannot become free from karmic
reactions in any way other than experiencing their results. This is described in the
following words of the Småti-çästra:

näbhuktaà kñéyate karma

kalpa-koöi-çatair api
avaçyam eva bhoktavyaà
kåtaà karma çubhäçubham

"Even after millions of kalpas one does not cannot become free from karmic
reactions in any way other than experiencing their results. Therefore one must
experience the results of good and evil deeds."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 This being so, all scriptural passages declaring otherwise should be understood
to be merely empty flattery offered to they who are situated in transcendental
knowledge.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 13

tad-adhigama uttara-pürväghayor açleña-vinsäçau tad-vyapadeçät

tad-adhigame—in the knowldege of Him; uttara—after; pürva—and before;

aghayoù—of sins; açleña—not touching; vinsäçau—destruction; tat—of that;
vyapadeçät—because of the teaching.

When knowledge of Him is attained, then there is destruction and not touching
of past and present sins, for that is the teaching.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tad-adhigamaù" here means, "knowledge of the Supreme

Personality of Godhead". When such knowledge is present, then a person is no
longer touched by sinful reactions to present deeds, and all accumulated past
karma is destroyed. Why is that? The sütra explains, "tad-vyapadeçät" (for that is
the teaching). This teaching has already been shown in the two passages of
Chändogya Upaniñad quoted in the introduction to this adhikaraëa. No one has
the power to refute the clear meaning of these two passages of Çruti-çästra. The
passage declaring that one does not become free from karmic reactions in any way
other than experiencing their results is meant to refer only to persons not situated
in transcendental knowledge.

Adhikaraëa 10
Transcendental Knowledge Destroys Past Pious Karmic Reactions

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.22) it is said:

ubhe u haivaiña ete taraty amåtaù sädhv-asädhuné

"He crosses beyond all karmic reactions, both good and evil, and he becomes
immortal."

In this way it is said that he crosses beyond the karmic reactions to both sins and
pious deeds.

Saàçaya (doubt): Do the reactions of past pious deeds meet the same fate as
the reactions of past sins, that is, are the past pious deeds destroyed and the
present pious deeds unable to touch the person performing them, or is this not so?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): This is not the fate of past and present pious
deeds, for such deeds are not performed in disobedience to the teachings of the
Vedas. Therefore one does not become free from karmic reactions to such deeds
in any way other than by experiencing their results. Therefore it is not right to say
that a person situated in transcendental knowledge can attain liberation as long as
the obstacle of past good karma is still present.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 14

itarasyäpy evam açleñaù päte tu

itarasya—of another; api—also; evam—thus; açleñaù—not touching; päte—in

destruction; tu—indeed.

Indeed, when it is destroyed the other ceases to touch.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 This sütra means that when transcendental knowledge is present, then the other
(itarasya), which here means the past and present karmic reactions of pious deeds,
is destroyed and ceases to touch. Thus happens in the same way it happens to past
and present sinful reactions. It is not that because they are prescribed by the
Vedas, material pious deeds do not obstruct transcendental knowledge. The result
brought by material pious deeds is an obstacle impeding the result brought by
•transcendental knowledge. In truth, material pious deeds are not pure and
spiritual. In the Chändogya Upaniñad (8.4.1) it is said:

sarve päpmäno 'to nivartante

"All sins are then destroyed."

In this context the word "sins" is used to include material pious deeds also. In
Bhagavad-göä (4.37) the Supreme Personality of Godhead affirms:

yathaidhäàsi samiddho 'gniù. . .

"As a blazing fire turns firewood to ashes, O Arjuna, so does the fire of
knowledge burn to ashes all reactions to material activities."*

In this verse the destruction of karmic reactions is described. In these general

worlds all karmic reactions, past and present, sinful and pious, are included. The
author of the sütras describes this here in the words "päte tu" (indeed, when it is
destroyed). The word "tu" (indeed) is used for emphasis. In this way there is
nothing wrong with the statement that liberation is attained when one's karmic
reactions are destroyed.

Adhikaraëa 11
Arabdha-phala and Anarabdha-phala Karmic Reactions

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Here someone may object: If transcendental knowledge causes the destruction
of all past pious and sinful karmic reactions, then it would automatically bring with
it (the liberation of the soul, and with that) the sudden death of the material body.
This clearly does not happen, and therefore what has been said about
transcendental knowledge cannot be true.

The author of the sütras now begins this adhikaraëa to refute this objection.
Past pious and sinful karmic reactions are of two kinds: 1. anärabdha-phala (where
the reactions have not yet begun to manifest), and 2. ärabdha-phala (where the
reactions have begun to manifest).

Saàçaya (doubt): Does transcendental knowledge destroy both kinds of past

karmic reactions, or does it destroy only the anärabdha-phala karmic reactions?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): In the passage from Båhad-araëyaka

Upaniñad (4.4.22) quoted in the beginning of adhikaraëa 10, it is clearly said that
both kinds of karmic reactions are destroyed. In this way it is clear that
transcendental knowledge completely destroys both kinds of karmic reactions.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 15

anärabdha-kärye eva tu pürve tad avadheù

anärabdha—not begun; kärye—effect; eva—indeed; tu—but; pürve—previous;

tat—that; avadheù—of the duration of time.

But only anärabdha-phala karmic reactions, for that is the time limit.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is used here to dispel doubt. Only the anärabdha-phala
past pious and sinful karmic reactions, reactions that have not yet begun to bear
fruit, are destroyed by transcendental knowledge. The ärabdha-phala karmic
reactions, which have already begun to bear fruit, are not destroyed in that way.
Why is that? The sütra explains, "tad-avadheù" (for that is the time limit). In
Chändogya Upaniñad (6.14.2) it is •said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

tasya tävad eva ciraà yävan na vimokñye

"One cannot attain liberation as long as his past karmic reactions persist."

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (10.87.40) the personified Vedas pray to the Supreme

Personality of Godhead:

tvad-avagamé na vetti bhavad-uttha-çubhäçubhayoù

guëa-viguëänvayäàs tarhi deha-bhåtäà ca giraù

"When a person realizes You, he no longer cares about His good and bad
fortune arising from past pious and sinful acts, since it is You alone who control
this good and bad fortune. Such a realized devotee also disregards what ordinary
living beings say about him."***

In this way the scriptures explain that, by the Supreme Lord's will, the living
entity remains in his material body until his ärabdha-phala karmic reactions are
destroyed. Transcendental knowledge is very powerful. It can at once burn away
all past karmic reactions, leaving behind no remainder. In this it is like a blazing
fire that at once burns up any kind of fuel that may be supplied.
Although these statements of scripture should be accepted, still it is seen that
many great sages, wise with transcendental knowledge, still remain living within
material bodies. In that situation it should be accepted that, by the will of the Lord,
these sages stay in this world, their ärabdha-phala karmic reactions not yet
exhausted, for the purpose of teaching the truth of spiritual life to the others. As a
jewel or other impediment may stop the burning of a fire, so transcendental
knowledge's power to burn away all karmic reactions may be stopped in certain
circumstances like this.

Here someone may object: Without taking shelter of a series of past karmic
reactions, transcendental knowledge does not become manifested. Those karmic
reactions may be compared to a potter's wheel. As, once begun to spin, the
potter's wheel gradually stops of its own accord, so past karmic reactions gradually
come to a stop.

To this objection I reply: No. It is not so. Transcendental knowledge is very

powerful. It can at once uproot all karmic reactions. It is only the will of the
Supreme Lord that stops transcendental knowledge. When a heavier stone is
placed on a spinning potters wheel, the wheel comes to an abrupt halt.
(Transcendental knowledge stops all karmic reactions in a way like that.)

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Therefore what was said in the beginning about transcendental knowledge is right
and true.

Adhikaraëa 12
Regular Duties and Karmic Reactions

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here someone may say: It has been said that transcendental knowledge
destroys all past pious karmic reactions. Therefore transcendental knowledge
destroys all kämya-karma (reactions to pious deeds performed to attain specific
desires) as well as all nitya-karmas (karmic reactions to regular pious duties).

To refute this idea the present adhikaraëa is begun.

Saàçaya (doubt): Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.22) explains that

transcendental knowledge destroys all past pious and sinful karmic reactions. Does
this mean that, as kämya-karma reactions are destroyed by transcendental
knowledge, the reactions to nitya-karma activities, such as the performances of
agnihotra-yajïas, are also destroyed in the same way, or are they not also
destroyed?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): It is the nature of transcendental knowledge

to destroy all karmic reactions. Because it cannot abandon its own nature,
transcendental knowledge must destroy the reactions of nitya-karmas also.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 16

agnihoträdi tu tat käryäyaiva tad-darçanät

agnihotra—agnihotra-yajïas; ädi—beginning with; tu—but; tat—that;

käryäya—for an effect; eva—indeed; tat—that; darçanät—because of revelation.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 But agnihotra-yajïas and other rituals have that as their effect, for that is the
revelation.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "tu" (but) is used here to dispel doubt. Performed before
transcendental knowledge is manifested, the daily agnihotra-yajïa and other nitya-
karmas have the manifestation of transcendental as their karmic reaction. Why is
that? The sütra explains, "tad-darçanät" (for that is the revelation). In the Båhad-
äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.22) it is said:

tam etaà vedänuvacanena

"By studying the Vedas they come to understand the Supreme Personality of
Godhead."

This means that transcendental knowledge (is the karmic result of nitya-karmas,
such as study of the Vedas). Transcendental knowledge, then, destroys all past
pious karmic reactions except for those of nitya-karma duties, such as the
performance of daily agnihotra-yajïas. That is the meaning of the sütra.
Transcendental knowledge does not destroy the karmic reactions of nitya-
karma duties for the attainment of transcendental knowledge is itself the karmic
reaction these duties produce. When a house is set afire some seeds within it may
become heated but not destroyed. Such grains can never be sown, for they will
never sprout into plants. In the same way the reactions to nitya-karma activities
are not destroyed (although they will not sprout into future material bondage). In
the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad it is said:

karmaëä pitålokaù

"By performing nitya-karma duties one goes to Pitåloka."

This shows that sometimes nitya-karma duties bring the attainment of

Svargaloka as their karmic reaction. These reactions all become destroyed.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 13
Some Fine Points of Karmic Reactions

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

It has been shown that by the Lord's will the ärabdha-phala pious and sinful
karmic reactions of they who are enlightened with transcendental knowledge
remain and are not destroyed. The Lord does this so the enlightened souls may
stay in the material world for some time and teach the spiritual truth to the people
in general. Now it will be shown that for some nirapekña devotees the Lord at once
destroys their ärabhda-phala karmic reactions. Thus these devotees do not have
experience these karmic reactions. In the Kañétaké Upaniñad (1.4) it is said:

tat-sukåta-duñkåte vidhunute tasya priyä jïätayaù sukåtam upayänty apriyä

duskåtam

"His pious and sinful karmic reactions are removed. His pious reactions are
given to his friends and kinsmen. His sinful reactions are given to his enemies."

In the Çäöyäyani-çästra it is said:

tasya puträ däyam upayänti suhådaù sädhu-kåtyäà dviñantaù päpa-kåtyäm.

"His children claim their inheritance, and his friends claim the reactions of his
pious deeds. His enemies must take the reactions of his sins."

Saàçaya (doubt): Are the ärabdha-phala karmic reactions sometimes destroyed

without the person having to experience their results, or is this never so?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Without experiencing them, ärabdha-phala

karmic reactions are never destroyed.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 17

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

ato 'nyäpi hy ekeñäm ubhayoù

ataù—then; anyä—another; api—also; hi—indeed; ekeñäm—of some;

ubhayoù—of both.

Therefore there is another also. Of some there is both.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

For some nirapekña devotees who are very ardently devoted to the Lord, their
pious and sinful ärabdha-phala karmic reactions are removed without their having
to experience the results. The reason for this is given in the word "anyä" (there is
another also). This means, "there is another scriptural quote, a quote revealing
that by the Supreme Lord's will ärabdha-phala karmic reactions are sometimes
also destroyed". The other scriptural quote is the passage from Kauñétiké Upaniñad
previously quoted, and the passage from the Çäöyäyana-çästra also.
This is the meaning: In one place the scriptures say that ärabdha-phala karmic
reactions are destroyed only when the person experiences them, and in another
place the scriptures say that transcendental knowledge can destroy ärabdha-phala
karmic reactions. If these two statements are not to be thought of as contradicting
each other, they must be considered to apply to different circumstances. These
scriptural statements do not apply to kämya-karma activities, for sütras 13 and 14
stated that all pious and sinful karmic reactions are destroyed, and because sins are
by definition not kämya-karma activities.
Therefore, for some very dear devotees, who ardently yearn to see the Lord and
who are no longer able to bear separation from Him, the Supreme Lord takes
away their ärabdha-phala karmic reactions, and distributes them to those persons
who are close to those devotees. This will be further described in another
adhikaraëa. Thus the devotee's ärabdha-phala karmic reactions are experience by
these people. In this way the rule the Lord has decreed for ärabdha-phala karmic
reactions is maintained.

Here someone may object: Karmic reactions are formless, and therefore it is not
logical to say that they can be given to others as if they were tangible objects.

If this is said, then I reply: That is not true. Because He is all-powerful, the
Supreme Lord can do anything He wishes, even if what He does is different from
what you think is logical. Therefore the Supreme Personality of Godhead can
remove the ärabdha-phala karmic reactions of some great devotees who ardently
yearn to see Him.
In the next sütra the author refutes the claim that the karmic reactions of one

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

person cannot be given to another.

Sütra 18

yad eva vidyayeti hi

yad eva vidyayä iti—Chändogya Upaniñad 1.1.10; hi—because.

Because of Chändogya Upaniñad 1.1.10.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Chändogya Upaniñad 1.1.10 shows the power of transcendental knowledge,

even when it is only knowledge of the individual spirit soul. The word "hi" in this
sütra means "because". This means that because transcendental knowledge cannot
be stopped by any obstacle, and because the Supreme Personality of Godhead in
these circumstances gives His own mercy, sometimes the living entity does not
have to experience his ärabdha-phala karmic reactions. No one should be
surprised at this.

What happens then? The author of the sütras gives the following explanation.

Sütra 19

bhogena tv itare kñapayitvätha sampadyate

bhogena—by enjoyment; tu—indeed; itare—the other; kñapayitvä—leaving;

atha—then; sampadyate—obtains.

Renouncing the two others, he enjoys.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

This sütra means, "leaving behind the gross and subtle material bodies (the two

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

others), and attaining the body of a personal associate of the Lord, the liberated
devotee enjoys transcendental bliss". This is described in the following words of
Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.1.1):

so 'çnute sarvän kämän

"Then he enjoys the fulfillment of all his desires."

That is the meaning of the sütra's word “sampadyate" (he enjoys transcendental
bliss).

Pada 2

Invocation

manträd yasya parä bhütäù

parä bhütädayo grahäù
naçyanti sva-lasat-tåñëaù
sa kåñëaù çaraëaà mama

May Lord Kåñëa, who is radiant with the thirst to be re-united with His
devotees, and whose mantras exorcise the ghosts and demons of repeated birth in
the material world of five elements, be my shelter.

Adhikaraëa 1
The Time of Death

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the next pada will be described the way the soul travels to the world of the
demigods. In this pada will be described the way a person enlightened with

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

transcendental knowledge leaves his material body. In the Chändogya Upaniñad
(6.8.6) it is said:

asya saumya-puruñasya prayato väì-manasi sampadyate manaù präëe präëas tejasi

tejaù parasyäm devatäyäm

"When a good person leaves his material body, the voice enters the mind, the
mind enters the life-air, the life-air enters the element fire, and the element fire
enters the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

Saàçaya (doubt): Does the voice itself enter, or do only the activities of the
voice enter?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because the nature of the mind is not like
the nature of the voice, and because the voice and other parts of the body are
subordinate to the mind, therefore it is only the activities of the voice that enter.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 1

väì manasi darçanäc chabdäc ca

väk—voice; manasi—in the mind; darçanät—because of sight; çabdät—because

of sound; ca—also.

Because of what is seen and heard, voice enters mind.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Voice itself enters the mind. Why is that? The sütra explains, "darçanät"
(because of what is seen). This means that even when the external voice is silent, it
is seen that the voice is still active in the mind. The sütra also explains, "çabdät"
(because of what is heard). In the scriptures (Chändogya Upaniñad) it is heard:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

väì manasi sampadyate

"The voice enters the mind."

Any other interpretation would do violence to the clear meaning of this quote.
No evidence actually supports the idea that only the activity of the voice enters the
mind.

Here someone may object: Because mind does not possess the nature of the
voice, voice itself cannot have entered the mind. It is only the activities of one
thing that can enter another thing dissimilar in nature. An example of this is the
activities of fire, which can thus enter water. This is so, for it is clearly seen.

If this is said, then I reply: Voice and mind meet. They do not join together and
become one. The meaning is that even though their natures are different, the two
of them actually do meet.

Sütra 2

ata eva sarväëy anu

ataù eva—therefore; sarväëi—all; anu—following.

Therefore they all follow.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here someone may object: The voice may enter the mind, but the mind does
not enter the element fire.

If this objection is raised, the sütra gives the following reply, "sarväëi" (all).
This means, "the sense of hearing and all the other senses also enter". The word
“anu" here means, "they all enter, following behind the voice". In the Praçna
Upaniñad (3.9) it is said:

tasmäd upaçänta-tejäù punar-bhavam indriyair manasi sampadyamänair yac cittas

tenaiña präëa äyäti

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "When the fire of life is extinguished, the senses enter the mind, and the soul
again takes birth. Accompanied by that mind, the soul is born again."

In the Praçna Upaniñad (4.2) it is said:

yathä gärgya marécayo 'staà gacchato 'rkasya sarva etasmiàs tejo-maëòale eké-
bhavati täù punar udayataù pracaranty evaà ha vai tat sarvaà pare deve manasy
eké-bhavati

"O Gärgya, as the rays of sunlight enter the setting sun only again to emerge
from the rising sun, in the same way the senses enter their deity, the mind."

Adhikaraëa 2
The Mind Enters the Breath

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now the passage of Chändogya Upaniñad (6.8.6) quoted in the beginning of

adhikaraëa 1 will be again considered.

Saàçaya (doubt): Does this passage mean to say that the mind enters the life-
breath, or that it enters the realm of the moon?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (3.2.13) declares:

manaç candram

"The mind enters the moon."

Therefore the mind enters the moon.

Siddhänta (conclusion): in the following words the author of the sütras gives His

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

conclusion.

Sütra 3

tan manaù präëa uttarät

tat—that; manaù—mind; präëe—in the life-breath; uttarät—then.

Then the mind enters the life-breath, because of what follows.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The words "tan manaù präëe" mean, “accompanied by all the senses, the mind
enters the life-breath". Why is that? Because of the statement that follows
(uttarät).

Here someone may object: This cannot be, for Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 3.2.13
affirms that the mind enters the moon.

The author of the sütras replies to this objection in sütra 3.1.4.

Adhikaraëa 3
The Life-Breath Enters the Individual Soul

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be considered the following words of Chändogya Upaniñad (6.6.1):

präëas tejasi

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "The life-breath enters fire."

Saàçaya (doubt): Does the life-breath, which is by then accompanied by the

mind and the senses, enter the element fire, or does it enter the individual spirit
soul (jéva)?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Chändogya Upaniñad (6.6.1) says that the
life breath enters the element fire, therefore the life-breath enters the element fire.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 4

so 'dhyakñe tad-upagamädibhyaù

saù—it; adhyakñe—to the master; tat—that; upagama—approaching;

ädibhyaù—beginning with.

That in the master because of the scriptural statements that begin with the
descriptions of approaching it.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "saù" (that) here means "the life-breath", and the word adhyakñe"
(in the master) here means, "in the individual spirit soul, who is the master of the
body and senses". Thus the life breath enters the individual spirit soul. Why is
that? The sütra explains, "tad-upagamädibhyaù" (because of the scriptural
statements that begin with the descriptions of approaching it). In the Båhad-
äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.3.38) it is said:

tad yathä räjänaà prayiyäsantam ugräù praty enasaù sütä grämaëya upasaméyanty
evaà haivaà vidaà sarve präëä upasaméyanti. yatraitad ürdhvocchväsé bhavati.

"As bodyguards. warriors, charioteers, and generals gather around a king who is
about to depart on a great march, so do all the senses and life-breaths gather
around the soul who is •about to leave its material body."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 In this way the Çruti-çästra explains that the life-breath and the senses enters
the individual spirit soul. This statement does not contradict the other statement of
the Çruti-çästra that the life-breath enters the element fire, for it may be said that
after the life-breath enters the soul the two of them proceed to enter the element
fire. This is like saying that the Yamunä, joining with the Ganges, proceeds to
enter the ocean.

Adhikaraëa 4
The Individual Spirit Soul Enters the Combined Elements

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be considered the statement that the individual spirit soul enters the
element fire.

Saàçaya (doubt): Do the individual spirit soul and the life-breath enter the
element fire, or do they enter all the elements combined?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The Çruti-çästra says that the life-breath
enters the element fire, therefore the life-breath enters the element fire.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 5

bhüteñu tac chruteù

bhüteñu—in all the elements; tat—that; çruteù—because of the Çruti-çästra.

In all the elements, because of the Çruti-çästra.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The individual spirit soul enters all the five elements. It does not enter the fire
element only. Why is that? In Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.5) it is said:

jévasyäkäçamayo väyumayas tejomaya äpomayaù påthivémayaù

"The individual spirit soul enters the elements ether, air, fire, water, and earth."

In this way the Çruti-çästra affirms that the individual spirit soul enters all the
material elements. A further explanation is given in the next sütra.

Sütra 6

naikasmin darçayato hi

na—not; ekasmin—in one; darçayataù—they both reveal; hi—because.

Because they both say it is not in one.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

It should not be considered that the individual spirit soul enters into one
element, into fire. The word "hi" here means "because". This means, "because this
was described in the questions and answers in Chändogya Upaniñad Chapter 5,
Parts 3-10.

Adhikaraëa 5
The Departure of the Enlightened Soul

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be considered a doubt that may arise concerning Chändogya Upaniñad
6.8.6.

Saàçaya (doubt): Does this passage describe the departure from the material
body of the soul enlightened with transcendental knowledge, or the soul that is not
enlightened?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): In Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.7) it is

said:

yadä sarve pramucyante

kämä ye 'sya hådi sthitäù
atha martyo 'måto bhavaty
atra brahma samaçnute

"When his heart is free of all material desires, the mortal becomes immortal.
Then he enjoys spiritual life, even in this world."

There word "atra" (here in this world) means that the enlightened soul need
not leave the material world. Even in this world he enjoys the bliss of spiritual life.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 7

samänä cäsåty-upakramäd amåtatvaà cänupoñya

samänä—equal; ca—also; äsåti-upakramät—at the beginning; amåtatvam—

immortality; ca—and; anupoñya—not burning.

Indeed, in the beginning they are the same. Also, immortality is without
burning.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The first "ca" means "indeed". In the beginning, the enlightened soul and the
unenlightened soul depart from the material body in the4 sa,e way. However,
when they reach the näòés (subtle pathways emanating from the heart), their paths
diverge. The enlightened soul passes through one of the hundred näòés, but the
enlightened soul passes through a different näòé. This is described in Chändogya
Upaniñad (8.6.6):

çataà caikä ca hådayasya näòyas täsäà mürdhänam abhiniùsåtaikä. tayordhvam

äyann amåtatvam eti viçvag anyä utkramaëe bhavanti.

"101 näòés lead away from the heart. One passes through the head and leads to
immortality. They others lead to a variety of destinations."

This is also described in Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.2). The soul endowed

with transcendental knowledge departs from the material body through the
passage passing through the top of the head. The unenlightened souls depart
through the other passages. The scriptural statement (Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad
4.4.7) explaining that the enlightened soul enjoys spiritual life even in this world
means that such a soul no longer produces any karmic reactions even though his
connection with the material body is not yet burned away.

Sütra 8

tad äpéteù saàsära-vyapadeçät

tat—that; äpéteù—until; saàsära—of the world of birth and death;

vyapadeçät—because of the teaching.

That is so, for it is taught that until then there is the world of birth and death.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

This describes the immortality of an enlightened soul who is free from sin even
though his connection to a material body is not yet burned away. How is that? The
sütra explains, "äpéteù" (until then). Until he attains the direct association of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, the individual spirit soul still has a relationship

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

with a material body, and thus he remains in the world of repeated birth and death.
The direction association of the Supreme Personality of Godhead is attained when
the soul travels to the world of the Supreme Personality of Godhead. That is the
conclusion of the Vedas.

Sütra 9

sükñma-pramäëataç ca tathopalabdheù

sükñma—subtle; pramäëataù—from the source of knowledge; ca—also; tathä—

so; upalabdheù—because of being seen.

The subtle, because of authority and direct perception.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In this contact the relationship of the enlightened soul with the material body is
not yet burned away. This is because the subtle (sükñma) material body still
persists. How is that •known? The sütra explains, "pramäëataù" (because of
authority). Even when he travels to the worlds of the demigods, the enlightened
soul retains relationship with a subtle material body, as is seen in the words of the
moon-god in Kauñétaké Upaniñad (1.3). Therefore in the previous passage of
Båhad-äranyaka Upaniñad (4.4.7) the "immortality" described is one where the
relationship between the soul and the material body is not yet burned away.

Sütra 10

nopamardenätaù

na—not; upamardena—by destruction; ataù—therefore.

Therefore it is not by destruction.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 4.4.7 does not describe the kind of immortality
where the relationship of the individual spirit soul and the material body is
destroyed.

Sütra 11

tasyaiva copapatter üñmä

tasya—of that; eva—indeed; ca—also; upapatteù—because of being possible;

üñmä—heat.

It has warmth, for that is reasonable.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The warmth that touches the gross material body while it is alive is manifested
from the subtle material body, not the gross body. Why is that? The sütra explains,
"upapatteù" (for that is reasonable). When it is alive the gross body is warm, and
when it is dead, the gross body is not warm. From this it can be seen that the
warmth in the gross body comes from the subtle body.
The word "ca" (also) here shows another reason also. When he leaves the gross
body, the enlightened soul also takes the heat-producing subtle body with him.

Next, fearing that another doubt will be raised, the author of the sütras speaks
the following words:

Sütra 12

pratiñedhäd iti cen na çärérät

pratiñedhät—because of denial; iti—thus; cet—if; na—not; çärérät—from the

resident of the body.

If someone says that it is denied, then I reply: No. It is not so. Because of the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

resident of the body.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here someone may object: The enlightened soul does not leave the gross
material body. This is corroborated by the following words of Båhad-äraëyaka
Upaniñad (4.4.6):

athäkämayamäno yo 'kämo niñkäma äpta-kämo na tasya präëä utkramanti

brahmaiva san brahmätyeti

"One who does not desire, who has no material desires, and whose desires are
all fulfilled, his life-breaths do not leave. He is spirit. He goes to the spirit."

In this way the scriptures deny (pratiñedhät) that the enlightened soul leaves his
material body.

If (cet) this objection is raised, then the author of the sütras replies, "No" (na).
This means that the text of the Upaniñad does not specifically say that the life-
breath leaves the body. The meaning of this text is that the life-breath does not
leave the individual spirit soul. After all, it is clearly seen that even enlightened
souls leave their material bodies.

Sütra 13

spañöo hy ekeñäm

spañöaù—clear; hi—because; ekeñäm—of some.

Because it is clear in some.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In this passage of Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.4.6) there is no room for

controversy. This is so because (hi) in some (ekeñäm) recensions of the Vedas,

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

namely the Madhyandina recension, is seen a clear (spañöaù) denial of the idea that
the life-breath does not leave the material body. This same passage in the
Madhyandina recension reads:

na tasmät präëä utkramanti. atravaiva samavaléyante brahmaiva san brahmätyeti.

"The life-breaths do not leave him (the soul). They enter there. He is spirit. He
goes to the spirit."

The word "atra" (there) clearly shows that the life-breaths enter the spirit soul.

To this the objector may reply: In the Käëva recension, in •Yäjïavalkya's

answer to Artabhäga's question, it is clearly seen that the life-breaths of the soul
enlightened with transcendental knowledge do not leave the material body.

To this objection I reply: This passage describes a special case, where the
enlightened soul is very distressed in separation from the Supreme Lord.

The impersonalists claim that this passage describes a person who thinks he is
one with the impersonal Brahman. They say that for him the life-breaths do not
leave the material body.

To this I reply: This is fool's idea. No words in the text support this
interpretation. At any rate, the impersonalist idea has already been clearly refuted.

Sütra 14

smaryate ca

smaryate—in the Småti-çästras; ca—also.

In the Småti-çästras also.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Yäjïavalkya-småti (3.167) it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

ürdhvam ekaù sthitas teñäà
yo bhittvä sürya-maëòalam
brahmalokam atikramya
tena yäti paräà gatim

"Among all of them, one great soul travels upward. He breaks through the
circle of the sun. He passes beyond the planet of Brahmä. He enters the supreme
destination."

In the Çruti-çästra also it is said that the enlightened soul passes through the
näòé at the top of the head and thus leaves the material body. In this way it is
proved that the enlightened soul certainly does leave his material body.

Adhikaraëa 6
The Senses Enter the Supreme

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

That the individual spirit soul, accompanied by the life-breath and the senses,
enters the element fire and the other subtle elements at the time of death has
already been proved, and the fallacious idea that the soul enlightened with
transcendental knowledge does not also depart from his body in this same way has
been dispelled. Now the following will be considered.

Saàçaya (doubt): Do the enlightened soul's voice and other working senses,
life-breath, and elements of the gross and subtle material bodies enter into the
material features that are their direct causes, or do they enter into the Supreme
Personality of Godhead?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): They enter into their direct causes. This is
described in Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 3.2.13.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 15

täni pare tathä hy äha

täni—they; pare—in the Supreme; tathä—so; hi—because; äha—says.

They in the Supreme, for thus it says.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Chändogya Upaniñad (6.8.6) it is said:

tejaù parasyäm

"Fire enters the Supreme."

In this way it is established that the "tejaù", which here includes the voice and
other senses, the life-breath, and the bodily elements, enters the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. This is so because the Supreme is the cause and the
resting-place of all. Why is that? The sütra explains, “tathä hy äha", which means
"because the Çruti-çästra affirms that it is so". This is confirmed in the Chändogya
Upaniñad (6.8.6):

tejaù parasyäm devatäyäm

"Fire enters the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad 3.2.3 should be interpreted metaphorically. This has

already been explained (in sütra 3.1.4).

Adhikaraëa 7
The Nature of the Senses' Entrance in the Supreme

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now another consideration will be examined.

Saàçaya (doubt): When the enlightened soul's life-breath, voice, mind, and
other senses enter the Supreme Personality of Godhead do they merely enter or
do they become one with Supreme Personality of Godhead, as is explained in
Muëòaka Upaniñad 3.2.8)?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because of the previous statements and

because there is no specific statement otherwise, it should be held that they merely
enter.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 16

avibhägo vacanät

avibhägaù—not divided; vacanät—because of the statement.

There is no division, for that is said.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The life-breath and other features of the material body merge into and become
one with the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the master of inconceivable
potencies. Why is that? The sütra explains, "vacanät" (for that is said). In the
Praçna Upaniñad (6.5) it is said:

evam eväsya paridrañöur imäù ñoòaça-kaläù puruñäyaëäù puruñaà präpyäs taà

gacchanti

"As rivers merge into the ocean, so do the sixteen elements of the material
body merge into the Supreme Personality of Godhead."

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 After thus explaining that the life-breath and the other elements of the material
body merge into the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the Upaniñad continues:

bhidyete cäsäà näma-rüpe puruña ity evaà procyate sa eño 'måto bhavati

"The elements of the body then lose their names and •forms. They are said to
become one with the Supreme. When this happens to the elements of his material
body, the individual spirit soul becomes immortal."

Thus the elements of the material body lose their names and forms. This is the
meaning: When he leaves the gross material body, the soul enlightened with
transcendental knowledge is followed by the now greatly weakened subtle material
body. When the soul finally leaves the egg of the material universe behind, the
subtle body merges into the eighth covering of the universal shell. Now completely
pure and free from any touch of matter, the soul attains a spiritual body and then
gains the association of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.

Adhikaraëa 8
The Hundred-and-first Näòé

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will begin a discussion to show one specific aspect of the enlightened soul's
departure from the material body. In Chändogya Upaniñad (8.6.6) as well as in
Kaöha Upaniñad (7.6) it is said that the unenlightened souls depart from the
material body by the path of the hundred näòés and the enlightened soul departs
by another näòé.

Saàçaya (doubt): Is this description correct or is it not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because the näòés are both very numerous
and very fine it is not possible for the spirit soul to distinguish them one from
another. Therefore this description is not correct. The scriptures explain:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

tayordhvam äyann amåtatvam eti

"Going upwards, he attains immortality."

Therefore (going upwards is the important factor) and it is not important which
näòé the soul enters at the moment of leaving the material body.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 17

tad-oko-'gra-jvalanaà tat-prakäçita-dväro vidyä-sämarthyät tac-cheña-gaty-

anusmåti-yogäc ca härdänugåhétaù çatädhikayä

tat—of him; okaù—the home; agra—the point; jvalanam—illumination; tat—by

Him; prakäçita—revealed; dväraù—the door; vidyä—of transcendental knowledge;
sämarthyät—by the power; tat—that; çeña—remainder; gati—path; anusmåti—
memory; yogät—by the touch; ca—and; härda—He who resides in the heart;
anugåhétaù—being the object of mercy; çatädhikayä—by the hundred-and-first.

Then the top of his home is illumined and the door is revealed by Him. By the
power of transcendental knowledge, by the memory of the path it brings, he attains
the mercy of He who resides in the heart. By the hundred-and-first.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The enlightened soul departs by the path of the hundred-and-first näòé, which is
called Suñumnä. It is not that the enlightened soul cannot discern where is this
näòé. Because of the two causes that begin with the power of transcendental
knowledge, the soul attains the mercy of He who resides in the heart. This is
possible by the power of transcendental knowledge. The effect of transcendental
knowledge is that it enables the soul to remember the correct path to take in
departing from the body. This soul also obtains the mercy of Lord Hari, who
resides in a palace in the heart (härda). That is the meaning here.
When, accompanied by the voice and the other senses and elements of the
material body, the enlightened soul is about to depart, the top portion (agra) of the
heart, which is his home (okaù), becomes illuminated (jvalanam). The door
(dväraù) there is not illuminated by the individual spirit soul. It is Lord Hari, who

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

resides in the heart (härda) who illuminates and reveals (prakäçita) that door. In
this way the soul becomes aware of the entrance to the hundred-and-first näòé. In
this way the enlightened soul departs.

Adhikaraëa 9
The Path of the Sun's Rays

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Chändogya Upaniñad (8.6.5) it is said:

atha yatraitasmät çaréräd utkramaty etair eva raçmibhir ürdhvam äkramate. sa om

iti vä hodvä méyate sa yävat kñipyen manas tävad ädityaà gacchaty etad vai khalu
loka-dväraà viduñäà prapadanaà nirodho 'viduñäà tad eña çlokaù. çataà caika
ca. . .

"After he departs from the body, the soul travels on the sun's rays. Casting off
the material mind, and meditating on the sacred syllable Oà, the soul travels to
the sun, which is the doorway to the worlds. They who are enlightened with
transcendental knowledge may enter that doorway, but they who are not
enlightened are stopped from entering. The following verse describes this: There
are a hundred and one näòés. . . ."

This means that after he passes through the näòé on the top of the head, the
enlightened soul travels on the path of the sun's rays.

Saàçaya (doubt): Must the soul depart from the body during the daytime, or
may he also depart during the night (and still attain liberation)?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because during the night the rays of the sun
do not shine, the enlightened soul must depart from the material body only during
the daytime.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 18

raçmy-anusäré

raçmi—rays; anusäré—following.

He follows the rays.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Whenever he dies, the enlightened soul is able to follow the rays of the sun.
This is so because the Çruti-çästra gives no specific instruction in this regard.

Sütra 19

niçi neti cen na sambandhasya yävad deha-bhävitväd darçayati ca

niçi—during the night; na—not; iti—thus; cet—if; na—not; sambandhasya—of

the relationship; yävat—as long as; deha-bhävitvät—because of the existence of
the body; darçayati—reveals; ca—also.

If someone says that it is not during the night, then I reply: No. Because the
relationship exists as long as the body is present. It also reveals it.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here someone may object: is it not so that because at night the rays of the sun
are not present, the soul departing from his body cannot follow them at that time?

If (cet) this is said, then the sütra replies, "No" (na). Why is that? The sütra
explains, "sambandhasya" (because of the relationship). This means that as long as
the material body is present there is a relationship with the sun's rays. Therefore
the soul may depart at any time of the day or night and still travel by the path of
the sun's rays.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 It is clearly seen that the body remains warm in both the hottest of days and the
coldest of nights. If the body had not relationship with the sun this would not be
possible.
The scriptures also give further proof of the body's unchanging relationship
with the sun. In the Chändogya Upaniñad (7.6.2) it is said:

amuñmäd ädityät prayänte tathäsu näòéñu såptä äbhyo näòébhyaù prayänte te

amusminn äditye såptäù

"The path of the sun's rays begins at the sun and ends at the näòés. It also begins
at the näòés and ends at the sun."

In another place in the Çruti-çästra it is also said:

saàsåñöä vä ete raçmayaç ca näòyaç ca naiñäà vibhägo yävad idam çaréram ataù
etaiù paçyaty etair utkramate etaiù pravartate

"The sun's rays are connected to the näòés, and that connection is never broken
as long as the material body is alive. By the sun's rays the soul sees. By them he
departs. By them he performs actions."

In this way it is proved that the soul enlightened with transcendental knowledge
is always able to travel by the path of the sun's rays.

Adhikaraëa 10
The Soul's Departure During the Different Seasons

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now the following will be considered.

Saàçaya (doubt): If he dies during the six months when the sun travels in the
south, does the enlightened soul still attain the benefit of his knowledge, or does
he not?

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Both Çruti-çästra and Småti-säçtra affirm
that in order to attain the spiritual world one must die during the six months when
the sun travels in the north. Also, it is seen that Bhéñmadeva and other great souls
refused to die until that auspicious time had arrived.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 20

ataç cäyane 'pi dakñiëe

ataù—therefore; ca—also; äyane—in ther passing; api—also; dakñiëe—in the

south.

Therefore it is also during the passing in the south.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Because transcendental knowledge does not bring only a partial result, and also
because it removes all obstacles in its path, the enlightened soul attains the fruit of
his knowledge even if he dies during the six months when the sun passes in the
south. The argument of our opponent is very foolish and slow-witted. As will be
explained in the future, the word “uttaräyaëa" here does not mean "the six months
when the sun passes in the south", but rather it means "the ätivähika-devatäs, or
the demigods that carry the soul to the higher worlds".
Blessed by his father, Bhéñmadeva had the power to choose the time of his
death. It is either to demonstrate that power, or to show the example of a saintly
person that he acted in that way. Therefore there is no disadvantage in dying
during the six months when the sun passes in the south.

Here someone may object: The Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself

affirms in Bhagavad-gétä (8.23-26):

yatra käle tv anävåttim

ävåttià caiva yoginaù
prayätä yänti taà kälaà

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 vakñyämi bharatarñabha. . .

. . . çukla-kåñëe gaté hy ete

jagataù çäçvate mate
ekayä yäty anävåttim
anyayävartate punaù

"O best of the Bhäratas, I shall now explain to you the different times at which,
passing away from this world, the yogé does or does not come back.*
"Those who know the Supreme Brahman attain the Supreme by passing away
from the world during the influence of the fiery god, in the light, at an auspicious
moment of the day, during the fortnight of the waxing moon, or during the six
months when the sun travels in the north.*
"The mystic who passes away from this world during the smoke, the night, the
fortnight of the waning moon, or the six months when the sun passes to the south
reaches the moon planet but again comes back.*
"According to Vedic opinion, there are two ways of passing from this world,
one in light and one is darkness. When one passes in light, he does not come back.
But when one passes in darkness, he returns."*

In this passage word "day" and other words denoting time are prominent, and
therefore it is clearly shown that time is and important factor for the attainment of
liberation. It is also shown that one who dies during the night or during the six
months when the sun passes in the south does not attain liberation.

The author of the sütras speaks the following words to refute this objection.

Sütra 21

yoginaù prati smaryate smärte caite

yoginaù—the yogés; prati—to; smaryate—is remembered; smärte—the two that

are remembered; ca—and; ete—they.

It is remembered of the yogés. Also, two are remembered.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The yogés, that is they who are devoted to the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
do not take these descriptions of the passing of the moon, the light, and other
points in time very seriously. They merely make a mental note of them (smaryate).
The sütra explains, "ete smärte" (they are remembered). The Supreme Lord
explains in Bhagavad-gétä (8.27):

naite såté pärtha jänan

yogé muhyate kaçcana

"Although the devotees know these two paths, O Arjuna, they are never
bewildered."*

The conclusion is that a person situated in transcendental knowledge need not

be concerned about the specific time of his death. The mention of specific times is
not prominent in this passage from Bhagavad-gétä (8.23-26). The passage begins
with the mention of fire, which has nothing to do with time. In fact, the different
factors mentioned in this passage are all ätivähika-devatäs (demigods that carry
the soul from the body). The author of the sütras will explain this in sütra 4.3.2. It
is also said:

divä ca çukla-pakñaç ca
uttaräyaëam eva ca
mumürñatäà prasastäni
viparétaà tu garhitam

"The best times for they who are about to die are the daytime, the bright
fortnight, and the six months when the sun travels in the north. The other times are
not good."

This verse describes the condition of the souls not enlightened with
transcendental knowledge. They who are enlightened with transcendental
knowledge always attain Lord Hari. The time when they leave their material
bodies is not relevant.

Pada 3

Invocation

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

yaù sva-präpti-pathaà devaù
sevanäbhäsato 'diçat
präpyaà ca sva-padaà preyän
mamäsau çyämasundaraù

I love handsome and dark Lord Kåñëa, who shows, even to they who have only
the dim reflection of devotional service, the path that leads to Him.

Adhikaraëa 1
Many Paths or One?

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In this pada will be described the nature of the Supreme Personality of

Godhead and the path that leads to the realm of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. In the Chändogya Upaniñad (4.15.5-6) it is said:

atha yad u caiväsmin çavyaà kurvanti yadi ca närciñam eväbhisambhavaty arciño

'har aha äpüryamänam äpüryamäna-pakñäd yan sad-udaòòeti mäsän tän
samebhyaù samvatsaraà samvatsaräd ädtityam ädityäc candramasaà candramaso
vidyutaà tat puruño 'mänavaù. sa etän brahma gamayaty eña deva-patho brahma-
patha etena pratipadyamäna imaà mänavam ävartaà nävartante.

"Whether his final rites are performed or not, the yogé goes to the light. From
the light he goes to the day. From the day he goes to bright fortnight. From the
bright fortnight he goes to the six months when the sun travels in the north. From
the six months when the sun travels in the north he goes to year. From the year he
goes to the sun. From the sun he goes to the moon. From the moon he goes to
lightning. From there a divine person leads him to Brahman. This is the path to the
Lord, the path to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. They who travel this path
do not return to the world of human beings."

In this passage light is the first stage on this path. However, in the Kauñétaké
Upaniñad (1.3) it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

sa etaà deva-yänaà panthänam äpadyägnilokam ägacchati sa väyulokaà sa
varuëalokaà sa indralokaà sa prajäpatilokaà sa brahmalokam

"He travels on the path of the heavenly planets. He goes to Agniloka. He goes
to Väyuloka. He goes to Varuëaloka. •He goes to Indraloka. He goes to
Prajäpatiloka. He goes to Brahmaloka."

Here Agniloka is the first stage. In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (5.10) it is

said:

yadä ha vai puruño 'smät lokät praiti sa väyum ägacchati tasmai sa tatra vijihéte
yathä ratha-cakrasya khaà tena ürdhva äkramate sa ädityam ägacchati

"Leaving this world, the soul goes to Väyuloka. There he passes through the
opening of a chariot-wheel. Then the soul ascends to the sun."

Here Väyuloka is the first stage on the path. In the Muëòaka Upaniñad (2.11) it
is said:

sürya-dväreëa virajäù prayänti

"Passing through the doorway of the sun, the soul is cleansed of all impurities."

Here the sun is the first stage on the path. In other scriptures other accounts are
also seen.

Saàçaya (doubt): Is only one path to the world of the Supreme described here,
or are many different paths, beginning with the path that begins with light,
described here in these passages of the Upaniñads?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because these paths are all different there
must be many different paths.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 1

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

arcir-ädinä tat prathiteù

arciù—light; ädinä—beginning with; tat—that; prathiteù—because of being well

known.

It begins with light, for that is well known.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The enlightened souls travels to the world of the Supreme Personality of

Godhead on a path that begins with light. Why is that? The sütra explains, "tat
prathiteù" (for that is well known). In the Chändogya Upaniñad (5.10.1) it is said:

tad ya ittham vidur ye ceme 'raëye çraddhäà tapa ity upäsate te arciñam

"This they know: They who perform austerities and worship the Lord with faith
travel on the path that begins with light."

This passage is taken from the chapter describing the knowledge of the five fires
(païcägni-vidyä). Therefore the path that begins with light is traveled even by they
who study the fire and other vidyäs. In the Brahma-tarka it is said:

dväv eva märgau prathitäv

arcir-ädir vipaçcitäm
dhümädiù karmiëäà caiva
sarva-veda-vinirëayät

"Two paths are famous. The path beginning with light is traveled by they who
are enlightened with transcendental knowledge, and the path beginning with
smoke is traveled by they who perform Vedic rituals. That is the conclusion of all
the Vedas."

This being so, it is understood that the scriptures describe a single path for the
enlightened souls, and therefore the differences in the descriptions should be
reconciled in the same was they were in the case of the attributes of the Lord. This
is so because the knowledge to be described here is one, even though the scriptural
texts seem to give different explanations. The conclusion, then, is that the path

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

begins with light. Any other interpretation breaks the real meaning of the Vedic
texts.

Adhikaraëa 2
Väyuloka

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now is begun a new discussion to show that Väyuloka and other places should
be added to the sequence that begins with light. In the previously quoted passage
from Kauñétaké Upaniñad (1.3) it was said:

sa etaà deva-yänaà panthänam äpadyägnilokam ägacchati sa väyulokaà

"He travels on the path of the heavenly planets. First he goes to Agniloka and
then to Väyuloka."

Saàçaya (doubt): Should Väyuloka be added to the path that begins with light,
or should it not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): It should not, for the Çruti-çästra describes
these stages in a specific sequence, and because that sequence cannot be changed
by someone's whim.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 2

väyum abdäd aviçeña-viçeñäbhyäm

väyum—Väyu; abdät—from the year; aviçeña—because of not being specific;

viçeñäbhyäm—and because of being specific.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Väyu comes after the year, for it both specific and not specific.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the path beginning with light, the stage of Väyuloka should be placed after
the year and before the sun. Why is that? The sütra explains, "aviçeñät" (for it is
not specific). This means that in the passage from Kauñétaké Upaniñad (1.3) it was
not specifically stated where Väyuloka comes in the sequence. However, in the
passage from Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (5.10) there is a specific statement that
Väyuloka comes before the sun in this sequence. Also, in Båhad-äranyaka
Upaniñad (6.2.15) it is said that after the months, and after Devaloka, the soul
comes to the sun. The Devaloka here should be understood to be Väyuloka. In the
scriptures it is said:

yo 'yaà pavana eña eva devänäà gåhaù

"Väyuloka is the home of the devas."

Therefore, because it is the home of the devas, Väyuloka is also called

Devaloka. Some say that there is a specific planet, Devaloka, which is part of this
sequence. (If this interpretation is accepted, then Devaloka) should be placed after
the year and before Väyuloka. It should not be placed between the months and the
year, for that stage in the sequence is well known. Therefore Devaloka and
Väyuloka should both be placed between the year and the sun.

Adhikaraëa 3
Varuëaloka

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Kauñétaké Upaniñad (1.3) it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

sa varuëalokaà sa indralokaà sa prajäpatilokam

"He goes to Varuëaloka. He goes to Indraloka. He goes to Prajäpatiloka."

Saàçaya (doubt): Is Varuëaloka one of the stages in the path beginning with
light?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because there is no place for it in this path,
as there was a place for Väyuloka, Varuëaloka is not a stage in this path.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 3

taòito 'dhi varuëaù sambandhät

taòitaù—lightning; adhi—above; varuëaù—Varuëa; sambandhät—because of

the relationship.

Varuëaloka comes after lightning, for that is their relationship.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Chändogya Upaniñad (4.15.5) it is said:

candramaso vidyutam

"He leaves the moon and goes to lightning."

It is seen that the soul travels from lightning to Varuëaloka. Why is that? The
sütra explains, “sambandhät", which means "for that is the relationship between
lighting and Varuëaloka". First lightning is manifested, and then comes rain. In the
Çruti-çästra it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

yathä hi viçälä vidyutas tévra-stanita-nirghoñä jémütodare nåtyanty athäpaù
prapatanti vidyotate stanayati varñayati vai

"When brilliant lightning and heavy thunder play •among the clouds, water
will fall. Lightning, thunder, and rain follow in that sequence."

Because the rain has a close connection with Varuëa, there is also a close
relation between Varuëaloka and the realm of lightning. After Varuëaloka come
Indraloka and Prajäpatiloka. Varuëaloka should e placed there because there is
not other place for it and because it is reasonable to place it there. In this way the
path to the spiritual world, a path that begins with the realm of light and proceeds
to Prajäpatiloka, has either twelve or thirteen stages.

Adhikaraëa 4
The Ativähika-devatä Demigods

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now a certain aspect of the path that begins with light will be considered.

Saàçaya (doubt): Are the light and other things landmarks on the path, or are
they persons carrying the enlightened soul?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): They are landmarks, for the text describes
them in that way. They are like landmarks people may indicate, just as one may
say, "Go to the river. Then there will be a hill, and after that will be a village." Or
they may be persons, for the words could be interpreted in that way.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 4

ätivähikäs tal-liìgät

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 ätivähikäù—Ativahika demigods; tat—of that; liìgät—because of the
symptoms.

They are ätivähika demigods, because of their characteristics.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The things beginning with light are demigods appointed by the Supreme
Personality of Godhead to carry the soul. They are neither landmarks nor ordinary
persons. Why is that? The sütra explains, "tal-liìgät" (because of their
characteristics). This means that they have the characteristics of they who carry
others. In the Chändogya Upaniñad it is said:

tat-puruño 'mänavaù sa etän brahma gamayati

"He is a divine person. He brings them to the Supreme Personality of

Godhead."

The divine person described here brings the soul to the Supreme Personality of
Godhead. The light and other things are his assistants. That is the meaning.

That they are neither landmarks nor ordinary persons is corroborated in the
following sütra.

Sütra 5

ubhaya-vyämohät tat siddheù

ubhaya—both; vyämohät—because of bewilderment; tat—that; siddheù—

because of proof.

It is proved because the other two are untenable.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Because they who die during the night do not have contact with the daytime
and thus cannot have contact with the light and other things on the path, these
things cannot be landmarks. Because ordinary persons are not very powerful and
therefore cannot carry the soul in this way, they cannot be ordinary persons either.
In this way the Çruti-çästra shows that they can be neither landmarks nor ordinary
persons. Therefore they must be ätivähika demigods. That is the meaning.

Adhikaraëa 5
The Divine Person

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Saàçaya (doubt): Does the divine person sent by the Supreme Personality of
Godhead descend to the plane of light, or does he descend only to the plane of
lightning?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because the Supreme Personality of

Godhead sends His messengers even to the earth to carry back Ajämila and
others, therefore this divine person must descend to the plane of light.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 6

vaidyutenaiva tatas tac chruteù

vaidyutena—by the person situated in light; eva—indeed; tataù—then; tat—

that; çruteù—from the sruti-sastra.

Then by the person in light. This is because of the Çruti-çästra.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

When he comes to the plane of lightning, the enlightened soul by a messenger

sent by the Lord Himself. How is that known? the sütra explains, "tac chruteù"
(because of the Çruti-çästra). In Chändogya Upaniñad (4.15.5) it is said:

candramaso vidyutaà tat-puruño 'mänavaù sa etän brahma gamayati

"From the moon he goes to the lightning. There a divine person takes him to
the Supreme."

In this way it is shown the Varuëaloka and the others are the assistants of that
divine person. The case of Ajämila is extraordinary. It is not typical.

Adhikaraëa 6
Bädari Muni's Opinion

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Having thus described the path by which the goal is reached, now the author
describes the goal itself.

Viñaya (the topic to be discussed): The topic here is Chändogya Upaniñad

4.15.5), which says:

sa etän gamayati

"There a divine person takes him to the Brahman."

In the following section the opinion of Bädari Muni is given first.

Saàçaya (doubt): here it is said that a divine person brings the soul to
"brahma". Is this "brahma" the Supreme Personality of Godhead, or is it the

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

demigod Brahmä, who has four faces?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The word “brahma" here must refer to the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, for in this passages explains that the soul attains
immortality.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words Bädari Muni gives his opinion.

Sütra 7

käryaà bädarir asya gaty-upapatteù

käryam—the created being; bädariù—Bädari Muni; asya—of of him; gati—

attainment; upapatteù—because of being possible.

Bädari Muni says it is the created one, for that is the only possible goal.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Bädari Muni thinks that the divine person takes the soul to the demigod
Brahmä. Why is that? The sütra explains, “asya gaty-upapatteù" (for that is the
only possible goal). The demigod Brahmä is situated in a single place, and
therefore the soul can go from one place to another in order to meet Him. The
Supreme Personality of Godhead, however, is all-pervading, always present
everywhere. Therefore it is not possible for the soul to go from one place to
another in order to meet Him. That •is the meaning.

Sütra 8

viçeñitatväc ca

viçeñitatvät—because of being specified; ca—also.

Also because it is specifically stated.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In Chändogya Upaniñad (7.14.1) it is said:

prajäpateù sabhäà veçma prapadye

"He attains the home of Prajäpati."

In this way it is specifically stated that he attains the demigod Brahmä.

Sütra 9

sämépyät tu tad vyapadeçaù

sämépyät—because of nearness; tu—but; tat—that; vyapadeçaù—designation.

But that designation is because of nearness.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.2.15) it is said:

sa etya brahmalokän gamayati tu teñu brahmalokeñu paräù parävanto vasanti.

teñäm iha na punar ävåttir asti.

"Then he takes them to Brahmaloka. In Brahmaloka they stay for many ages.
They do not return."

Here the explanation (vyapadeçaù) is that they do not return. This means that
because they are near (sämépyät) to liberation, they will be liberated in the future.
This means that the enlightened souls attain the world of the demigod Brahmä.
They thus attain liberation along with the demigod Brahmä. In this way they do
not return.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 When does this occur? The next sütra explains.

Sütra 10

käryätyaye tad-adhyakñeëa sahätaù param abhidhänät

kärya—of the creation; atyaye—at the end; tat—of that; adhyakñeëa—the ruler;
saha—with; ataù—then; param—the Supreme; •abhidhänät—because of the
explanation.

With its ruler to the Supreme when the creation is annihilated because of the
explanation.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

When the material creation up to the world of four-faced Brahmä is destroyed,

they go with the ruler of the material world, the four-faced Brahmä, from that
created world to the Supreme Brahman, who is different from the four-faced
Brahmä. The reason for this is given by the sütra, "abhidhänät" (because of the
explanation). In the Taittiréya Upaniñad (3.1.1) it is said:

brahma-vid äpnoti param

"He who knows Brahman attains the Supreme."

It is also said there:

so 'çnute sarvän kämän saha brahmaëä

"There, in the company of Brahman, he enjoys the fulfillment of all his desires."

The phrase "with Brahman" here means, "with the demigod Brahmä, who has
four faces." That is the meaning.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 11

småteç ca

småteù—from the Småti-çästra; ca—also.

From the Småti-çästra also.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Småti-çästra it is said:

brahmaëä saha te sarve

sampräpte pratisaïcare
parasyänte kåtätmänaù
praviçanti paraà padam

"When the material universe is destroyed, they whose hearts are devoted to the
Supreme Lord, enter the supreme abode along with the demigod Brahmä."

In this way the saniñöha devotees travel on the path beginning with light, a path
that brings them to the demigod Brahmä. That is the opinion of Bädari Muni.

In the next sütra Jaimini Muni gives his opinion.

Adhikaraëa 7
Jaimini Muni's Opinion

Sütra 12

paraà jaiminir mukhyatvät

param—the Supreme; jaiminiù—Jaimini; mukhyatvät—because of being

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

primary.

Jaimini thinks it is the Supreme, for that is the primary meaning.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Jaimini Muni thinks the soul is taken to the Supreme. Why is that? The sütra
explains, "mukhyatvät", which means "for that is the primary meaning of the word
Brahman". Also, it is not correct to say that it is not possible to attain the Supreme
(for He is all-pervading). When the devotees become free from all material
designations then they can attain the Supreme Lord, which means then they can
perceive His presence.

Sütra 13

darçanäc ca

darçanät—because of the sight; ca—also.

Also because it is seen.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In the Dahara-vidyä chapter of Chändogya Upaniñad (8.12.3) the goal is clearly

described as the Supreme Brahman. This is so because the attributes of
immortality are ascribed to this Brahman and also because the soul who travels to
this Brahman manifests his own original spiritual form. All these explanations
would not be appropriate if the Brahman here were the demigod Brahmä. Indeed,
this chapter of the Upaniñad is not about the demigod Brahmä. It is clearly about
the Supreme Brahman, the Supreme Lord.
In the Kaöha Upaniñad, in the passage beginning “çataà ca", the Supreme
Brahman is clearly described as the goal of this path. In another place in the Çruti-
çästra, in the passage beginning with the word "dharmät", the goal also must be the
Supreme Brahman, for he is described there as immortal. It is also said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 14

na ca kärye pratipatty-abhisandhiù
na—not; ca—and; kärye—in the created; pratipatti—knowledge; abhisandhiù—
desire.

The desire is not to know the created.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here the word "pratipatti" means "knowledge", and the word "abhisandhi"
means "desire". The soul enlightened with transcendental knowledge does not
desire to learn the truth about the demigod Brahmä, for the attainment of that
knowledge is not the highest goal of life. However, he does desire to attain
knowledge of the Supreme Brahman, for that is the highest goal of life. One
attains the goal he strives for. This is explained in Chändogya Upaniñad (3.14).
Therefore the conclusion is that the divine person leads the devotees to the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. That is the opinion of Jaimini Muni.

Now the author of the sütras gives his opinion. He says:

Sütra 15

apratékälambanän nayatéti bädaräyaëa ubhayathä ca doñät tat-kratuç ca

a—not; pratéka—form; älambanän—resting; nayati-leads; iti—thus;

bädaräyaëaù—Vyäsadeva; ubhayathä—both; ca—and; doñät—because of fault;
tat-kratuù—by the maxim beginning with the words "tat-kratuù"; ca—also.

He leads they who take shelter of the Lord as He who has no material form.
That is Vyäadeva's opinion. Because both have faults and also because of the
maxim beginning with the words "tat-kratuù".

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The divine person leads to the Supreme the saniñöhas and all other devotees
who do not think that the Supreme is material. These devotees are different from
they who worship the Lord as the names and forms of this world. That is the
opinion of Vyäsadeva. He does not accept the view that the divine person leads the
worshipers of the demigod Brahmä, nor does he accept the view that the divine
person leads all the worshipers of the Supreme. Why not? The sütra explains,
"ubhayathä ca doñät", which means "because both views contradict the statements
of scripture".
The first view contradicts the following words of Chändogya Upaniñad (8.12.3):

paraà jyotir upapadya

"He meets the effulgent Supreme Person."

The second view contradicts the description in Chändogya Upaniñad (5.10) of
the goal attained by they who have knowledge of païcägni-vidyä and who travel
on the path beginning with light. Another reason is given in the maxim of
Chändogya Upaniñad (3.14.1) that declares a person attains a destination
appropriate to the nature of his faith. They who identify the Supreme with the
words and other things in the material world cannot travel by the path beginning
with light, for this would contradict the maxim of Chändogya Upaniñad. However,
in the scriptures it is affirmed that they who worship the Lord in the words of the
Vedic mantras attain their desires independently. In the Chändogya Upaniñad
(7.1.5) it is said:

sa yo näma brahmety upäste yävan nämno gataà taträsya kaàa-cäraù

"He who worships the Lord as the sounds of the Vedic mantras attains the goal
of the mantras. He attains his desire."

However, they who are followers of païcägni-vidyä travel by the path of light
until they reach Satyaloka. They do this because they worship the Supersoul.
When they attain perfect knowledge of the Supreme, the are able to rise above the
realm of Satyaloka. This is so, for the Çruti-çästra declares that they who travel on
that path never return to the material world.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 9
A Special Situation

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be explained the truth that the Lord Himself takes certain exalted
nirapekña devotees back to His own abode. In the Gopäla-täpané Upaniñad (1.22
and 24) it is said:

etad viñëoù paramaà padaà ye

nityodyuktäù samyajante na kämän
teñäm asau gopa-rüpaù prayatnät
prakäçayed ätma-padaà tadaiva

"To they who always diligently worship Lord Viñëu's transcendental form, the
Lord, in His original form as a cowherd boy, shows His lotus feet.

oàkäreëäntaritaà ye japanti
govindasya païca-padaà manuà tam
teñäm asau darçayed ätma-rüpaà
tasmän mumukñur abhyasen nityaà çantyai

"To they who chant the five-word mantra with Oà and Govinda, the Lord
reveals His own form. Therefore, to attain transcendental peace, they who desire
liberation should regularly chant this mantra."

Saàçaya (doubt): Are the nirapekña devotees carried to the spiritual world by
the ätivähika demigods, or by the Supreme Lord Himself?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The scriptures affirm:

dväv eva märgau

"There are two paths."

The conclusion is that they who are enlightened with transcendental knowledge

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

travel by the path beginning with light. In that way they enter the spiritual world.
That is affirmed by the Çruti-çästra. That is how the Supreme Lord becomes the
cause of their liberation.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 16

viçeñaà ca darçayati

viçeñam—special; ca—also; darçayati—shows.

It reveals a special situation also.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The general situation is that the souls enlightened with transcendental

knowledge are carried to the spiritual world by the ätivähika demigods. However,
those nirapekña devotees who are especially distressed in separation from the Lord
are carried there by the Supreme Lord Himself, for the Lord becomes impatient
and cannot tolerate any delay in bringing them back to Him. This is a special
situation. The Çruti-çästra reveals the truth of this situation in Gopäla-täpané
Upaniñad (1.22 and 24). The Supreme Lord Himself also explains (Bhagavad-gétä
7.6 and 7):

ye tu sarväëi karmäëi
mayi sannyasya mat-paräù
ananyenaiva yogena
mäà dhyäyanta upäsate

teñäm ahaà samuddhartä

måtyu-saàsära-sägarät
bhavämi na cirät pärtha
mayy äveçita-cetasäm

"But those who worship Me, giving up all their activities unto Me and being

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

devoted to Me without deviation, engaged in devotional service and always
meditating upon Me, having fixed their minds upon Me, O son of Påthä, for them I
am the swift deliverer from the ocean of birth and death."*

The word "ca" (also) in this sütra means that for the liberated souls there are
two paths, one where the material body is cast off, and the other where contact
with the material body is maintained. It is not possible to say that the nirapekña
devotees follow the path that begins in light. Also, in the Varäha Puräëa the
Supreme Personality of Godhead Himself says:

nayämi paramaà sthänam

arcir-ädi-gatià vinä
garuòa-skandham äropya
yatheccham aniväritaù

"My devotees need not follow the path beginning in light. Riding on Garuòa's
shoulders, I personally take them to My supreme abode."

In this way the truth has been explained.

Pada 4

Invocation

akaitave bhakti-save 'nurajyan

svam eva yaù sevakasät karoti
tato 'ti-modaà muditaù sa devaù
sadä cid-änanda-tanur dhinotu

May the Supreme Personality of Godhead, whose form is eternal and full of
knowledge and bliss, and who, pleased with His devotees sincere devotion, gives
Himself to them, fill us with transcendental happiness.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 1
The Original Forms of the Liberated Souls

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In this pada will be described first the original forms of the liberated souls, and
then their glory, opulence, bliss, and other features. In the Chändogya Upaniñad
(8.12.3) the demigod Brahmä explains:

evam evaiña samprasädo 'smät çarérät samutthäya paraà jyotir upasampadya svena
rüpeëäbhiniñpadyate sa uttamaù puruñaù

"By the Supreme Lord's mercy, the enlightened soul leaves his material body
and enters the effulgent spiritual world. There he attains his own spiritual body.
He becomes the most exalted of persons."

Saàçaya (doubt): Does the liberated soul attain a body, like the bodies of the
demigods, that is different from himself, or does the manifest his original identity,
which is not different from himself?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): he attains a body different from himself.

This must be so because the word “abhiniñpadyate" (is attained) is employed here.
Any other interpretation would make this word meaningless and would also make
meaningless the scriptures' statement that liberation is a benefit attained by the
soul. If this form is only the original nature of the soul and it had existed all along,
then attaining it would not be a benefit granted to the soul. Therefore this form is
newly attained by the soul and is different from the soul's original nature.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 1

sampadyävirbhävaù svena-çabdät

sampadya—of he who has attained; ävirbhävaù—manifestation; svena—svena;

çabdät—by the word.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Because of the word "svena" it is the manifestation of he who has gone.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The individual spirit soul who, by means of devotional service accompanied

with knowledge and renunciation, attains the effulgent Supreme, becomes free
from the bondage of karma and attains a body endowed with eight virtues. This
body is said to be the soul's original form. Why is that? The sütra explains, "svena-
çabdät" (because of the word "svena"). The word "svena" here means, "in his own
original form". For this reason it cannot be said that this passage means, "the soul
arrives there and then accepts that form, which is an external imposition". In that
way it is proved that the form here is the original form of the soul. This is not
contradicted by the use of the word "niñpadyate", for that word is also used to
mean, "is manifested". An example of that usage is seen in the following words of
the Çruti-çästra:

idam ekaà su-niñpannam

"He is manifested."

Also, it is not that the manifestation of the soul's original form cannot be,
because it already exists, a goal of human endeavor. This is so because even
though the soul's original form exists, it is not openly manifested. Therefore it is
not useless to say that the soul may endeavor to openly manifest the original form
of the soul. Therefore the manifestation of that form can be an object of human
endeavor.

Here someone may say: When the spirit soul is manifested in its original form
and it attains the effulgent Supreme, as described in the words "paraà jyotir
upasampadya", the the liberated state thus attained is characterized mainly by the
cessation of all material sufferings.

If this is said, then I reply: No. It is not so. The Çruti-çästra explains that in the
liberated state the soul is filled with intense spiritual bliss. This is described in
Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.7):

rasaà hy eväyaà labdhvänandé-bhavati

"When one understands the Personality of Godhead, the reservoir of pleasure,

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Kåñëa, he actually becomes •transcendentally blissful."*

Here someone may object: How do you know that approaching the effulgent
Supreme Lord is true liberation?

If this is said, the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 2

muktaù pratijïänät

muktaù—liberated; pratijïänät—because of the declaration.

He is liberated because of the statement.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The liberated soul manifests his original form. Why is that? The sütra explains,
"pratijïänät" (because of the statement). The original condition of the soul is
described in Chändogya Upaniñad (8.7.1). After that description, the following
promise is given (8.9.3):

etaà tv eva te bhüyo 'nuvyäkhyäsyämi

"Again I will explain it to you."

The the demigod Brahmä proceeded to explain that the liberated soul is free
from wakefulness, dreaming, and dreamless sleep, the three conditions of material
consciousness and also free from the material body, which is created by the karmic
reactions of pleasant and unpleasant deeds. The demigod Brahmä described this in
order to fulfill the promise he made in 8.9.3). Because this passage explains that
the soul becomes liberated when he is free from the external material body created
by karmic reactions, it should be understood that in the liberated state the soul is
manifested in its original form.

In this way it is proved that Chändogya Upaniñad (8.12.3) explains that in the
liberated state the soul manifests its original form. Now another point will be

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

considered.

Saàçaya (doubt): Does the word "jyotiù" in Chändogya Upaniñad (8.12.3) refer
to the sun-globe or to the Supreme Personality of Godhead?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): It refers to the sun-globe. This must be so

for the Muëòaka Upaniñad declares that after passing through the realm of the sun
one attains liberation. The sun-globe is also described in that way in the
Chändogya Upaniñad's description of the path beginning with light.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 3

ätmä prakaraëät

ätmä—the Supreme Personality of Godhead; prakaraëät—because of the

context.

It is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, because of the context.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "jyotiù" here refers to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. It does
not refer to the sun-globe. Why is that? The sütra explains, "prakaraëät" (because
of the context). Although the word "jyotiù" can refer to either, because of the
context it refers to the Supreme Personality of Godhead. It is like the word
"devaù", which in the sentence "devo jänäti me manaù" (your lordship knows my
heart) means "your lordship".
The word ätmä" in this sütra means "the Supreme Personality of Godhead, who
is all-powerful and full of knowledge and bliss". The word "ätmä" is derived from
the verbal root "at". In this way "ätmä" means, “He who is splendidly manifest",
"He who is attained by the liberated souls", and "He who is all-pervading". It also
means "Upaniñad", and it has many other meanings also. Further, the word
"ätmä" also shows that the Supreme is a person. This is also seen by the use of the
phrase "uttamaù puruñaù" in the Upaniñads and Bhagavad-gétä. In this way it is
seen that the "paraà jyotiù" in Chändogya Upaniñad (8.12.3) refers to the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord Hari.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 2
The Individual Soul Meets the Supreme Personality of Godhead

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now another topic will be considered.

Saàçaya (doubt): When the liberated soul attains the effulgent Supreme in the
spiritual world, is the liberation sälokya (residing on the same planet) or säyujya
(meeting with the Lord)?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): As a person entering a king's capitol resides

in the same city as the king but does not attain a private audience with the king, so
the liberated soul resides on the same planet with the Lord. Therefore the soul
attains sälohya liberation

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 4

avibhägena dåñöatvät

avibhägena—without separation; dåñöatvät—because of being seen.

There is no separation, for that is seen.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The liberated soul is not separated from the Lord. In this way the soul attains
säyujya liberation. Why is that? The sütra explains, "dåñöatvät" (for that is seen).

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

This means, "for this situation is seen in the Çruti-çästra". For example, in
Muëòaka Upaniñad (3.2.8) it is said:

yathä nadyah syandamänäù samudre

astaà gacchanti näma-rüpe vihäya
yathä vidvän näma-rüpäd vimuktaù
parät paraà puruñam upaiti divyam

"As flowing rivers abandon their names and forms and meet with the sea, so the
enlightened soul, free of what had been his name and form, meets with the
effulgent Supreme Person."

That the word "säyujya" means "meeting" is seen in the following passage of
the Mahä-Näräyaëa Upaniñad (25.1):

ya evaà vidvän udag-ayane praméyate devänäm eva mahimänaà gatvädityasya

säyujyaà gacchati

"The soul that dies during the six months when the sun travels in the north
attains the glory of the gods. He approaches the sun and attains säyujya with it."

Sälokya and the other kinds of liberation are different varieties of säyujya. It is
not that when they feel the sentiment of separation from the Lord the liberated
devotees are not also, at that same moment, meeting with the Lord. This is so
because the Lord is always manifested in their thoughts and continues to touch
them with His glories.
The example (of the rivers entering the ocean) given above should not be taken
to mean that the liberated souls become identical with the Lord. When water from
one place enters water of another place, the two waters do not actually merge and
become identical. They remain separate. This is seen in the fact the the volume of
water in the ocean increases as the rivers flow into it.

Adhikaraëa 3
The Qualities of the Liberated Soul

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Now the author will describe the pleasures experienced by the liberated soul. In
order to describe these pleasures the author will describe the liberated soul's
spiritual form and its host of advantages, which begin with the blessing at all its
desires are at once fulfilled. First the liberated soul's advantages and virtues will be
described.

Saàçaya (doubt): When he meets the effulgent Supreme Lord, does the
individual spirit soul manifest a form glorious with many virtues and advantages,
or does the soul manifest a form of spiritual consciousness, or does the soul
manifest a form with both virtues and consciousness, for these two can certainly
exist together in a single form?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Here Jaimini Muni gives his opinion.

Sütra 5

brähmeëa jaiminir upanyäsädibhyaù

brähmeëa—given by the Supreme Personality of Godhead; jaiminiù—jaimini;

upanyäsa—references; ädibhyaù—beginning with.

Jaimini Muni thinks it is with what is given by the Supreme Personality of

Godhead, for there are references and other proofs.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The liberated soul is glorious with a host of virtues and advantages, beginning
with sinlessness and the attainment of every desire, which are all gifts from the
Supreme Personality of Godhead. How is this known? The sütra explains,
“upanyäsädibhyaù" (for there are references and other proofs). The reference
here is to the demigod Brahmä's description (in Chändogya Upaniñad 8.7.1) of the
individual spirit soul's virtues. The word "ädi" (beginning with) refers to the
Chändogya Upaniñad's description of the liberated soul's activities, such as his
eating and enjoying pastimes. In this way the liberated soul is by nature filled with
glories and virtues. That is the opinion of Jaimini Muni. In the Småti-çäçtra this is
also described in the passage beginning with the words, "yathä na hréyate jyotsnä".

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 6

citi tan-mätreëa tad-ätmakatväd ity auòulomiù

citi—in consciousness; tan-mätreëa—of that only; tad-ätmakatvät—because of

the nature; iti—thus; auòulomiù—Auòulomi.

It is consciousness alone, for that is its nature. That is the opinion of Auòulomi
Muni.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

When its material ignorance is burned away by transcendental knowledge and it

attains its spiritual form and meets the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the
individual spirit soul is manifested as pure consciousness alone. Why is that? The
sütra explains, "tad-ätmakatväd" (for that is its nature). In the Båhad-äraëyaka
Upaniñad (4.5.13), in the second story of Maitreyé, it is said:

sa yathä saindhava-ghano 'nantaro 'bähyaù kåtsno rasa-ghana evaà vä are ayam

ätmänantaro 'bähyaù kåtsnaù prajïäna-ghana eva

"as salt has neither inside nor outside, but is a mass of taste and nothing else, so
the soul also has neither inside nor outside, but is a mass of knowledge and nothing
else."

In this way it is concluded that the soul is consciousness alone and nothing else.
The scriptural statements affirming that the soul is sinless and has other virtues are
merely meant to teach that the soul has not material qualities, such as material
happiness, qualities that are all temporary and subject to change. That is the
opinion of Auòulomi Muni.

Now the author of the sütras gives His opinion.

Sütra 7

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

evam apy upanyäsät pürva-bhäväd avirodhaà bädaräyaëaù

evam—thus; api—eveb; upanyäsät—from the reference; pürva—of the

previous; bhävät—from the nature; avirodham—not contradicting; bädaräyaëaù—
Vyäsa.

Even though there are these references, it does not contradict what was before.
That is the opinion of Vyäsadeva.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Even though it is true that the soul consists of pure consciousness, that truth
does not contradict the soul's possession of the eight virtues. That is the opinion of
Vyäsadeva. Why is that? The sütra explains, “upanyäsät pürva-bhäväd avirodhaà"
(even though there •are these references, it does not contradict what was before).
This means that Auòulomi's quote from scripture does not contradict Jaimini's
previous quotation of the words of the demigod Brahmä. The conclusion is that
both scriptural statements are clear and without reservations, and therefore both
are equally compelling evidence, and therefore both are equally true statements
about the liberated soul.
Vyäsadeva certainly accepts the statement of Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.5.13)
that the soul is consciousness alone, consciousness untouched by material qualities.
Indeed, this view does not at all contradict Jaimini's opinion.
The statement that the soul is pure consciousness is meant to show that it has
not the slightest trace of matter in its nature. That statement is not at all opposed
to the statement that that the soul has eight transcendental virtues, just as the
statement that a block of salt is taste only does not at all contradict the statement
that the block of salt has hardness, a certain shape, and other qualities visible to
the eyes and the other senses. In this way it is shown that the soul, which consists
of transcendental knowledge certainly possesses the eight virtues, which begin with
sinlessness.

Adhikaraëa 5
The Soul's Desires Are Fulfilled

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Now the author of the sütras will describe the truth that all the desires of the
liberated soul are at once fulfilled. In the Chändogya Upaniñad (8.12.3) it is said:

sa tatra paryeti jakñan kréòan ramamäëaù strébhir vä yänair vä jïätibhir vä

"Laughing and enjoying pastimes, he is happy in the company of wives,

relatives, and chariots."

Saàçaya (doubt): Does the liberated soul's meeting with his relatives and the
others happen because of an endeavor of his part or does it happen spontaneously
simply by his desire?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): In the material world even kings and other
powerful people, of whom it is said that their every desire is fulfilled, must still
exert some effort to attain that fulfillment. In the same way the liberated souls
attain their desires by willing accompanied with action.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 8

saìkalpäd eva tac chruteù

saìkalpät—by desire; eva—indeed; tat—that; chruteù—because of the Çruti-

çästra.

Indeed it is by desire, because of the Çruti-çästra.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Simply by willing the liberated souls attain what they wish. How is that known?
The sütra explains, "tac chruteù" (because of the Çruti-çästra). In the Chändogya
Upaniñad (8.2.1) it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

sa yadi pitåloka-kämo bhavati saìkalpäd eväsya pitaraù samuttiñöhanti. tena
pitålokena sampanno mahéyate.

"If desires to go to Pitåloka, simply by his will he finds the pitäs standing before
him. In this way he finds himself glorified by the residents of Pitåloka."

In this way the Çruti-çästra affirms that he attains his wishes by merely willing
that they be fulfilled. Any other view cannot be accepted here. In the previously
quoted passage of Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.5.13), the statement was qualified
by other evidence from the scriptures. In this passage, however, we see not other
statements of scripture that might qualify or change the clear statement of these
words. However, this kind of liberation, where the soul's own happiness and glory
and power are prominent, is not liked by they who are eager to taste the nectar of
service to the Supreme Lord. They reject it and they speak many words criticizing
it.

Adhikaraëa 6
The Supreme Lord is the Master of the Liberated Souls

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now the author the sütras will show that the liberated soul, whose every desire
is fulfilled, takes shelter of the Supreme Personality of Godhead alone.

Saàçaya (doubt): Is the liberated soul subject to the orders of anyone other
than the Supreme Personality of Godhead, or is the soul not subject to the orders
of anyone other than the Supreme Personality of Godhead?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): As a person who enters a king's palace must
obey the orders of many people there, so the liberated soul who has entered the
palace of the Supreme Personality of Godhead must also obey the orders of many
others.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Sütra 9

ata eva cänanyädhipatiù

ataù eva—therefore; ca—also; ananya—without another; adhipatiù—master.

Therefore there is no other master.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Because (ataù), by the grace of the Supreme Personality of Godhead all the
liberated soul's desires are at once fulfilled, the Supreme Personality of Godhead
is the liberated soul's only master (ananyädhipatiù). There is no other master for
him. Taking shelter of the Supreme Lord, the liberated soul shines with great
splendor. If this were not so then there would be no difference between the
liberated soul and the soul trapped in the world of repeated birth and death.
By worshiping the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the liberated soul attains
the condition where his every desire is at once fulfilled. Feeling merciful to him,
the Supreme Lord gives limitless transcendental bliss to the soul who thus takes
shelter of Him. In this way the Lord becomes very pleased. That the Lord thus fills
the liberated soul with bliss will be explained in sütra 4.4.20. It has already been
demonstrated that the individual spirit soul is part and parcel of the Supreme
Lord, and the Supreme Lord is the supreme controller and enjoyer.
Because the liberated soul is in a position where his every •desire is at once
fulfilled, his only master is the Supreme Lord. He has no other master. For this
reason ordinary prescribed duties and prohibitions no longer apply to him. If they
did apply to him he would no longer be in a position where his every desire is at
once fulfilled. This view is held by some philosophers.

Adhikaraëa 7
The Spiritual Body

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Now the author of the sütras will show that the liberated soul has a spiritual
body.

Saàçaya (doubt): Does the liberated soul who has attained the association of
the Supreme Personality of Godhead, as described in Chändogya Upaniñad
(8.12.3), have a spiritual body or does he not? Can he have any body he wishes, or
can he not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Here Bädari Muni gives his opinion.

Sütra 10

abhäve bädarir äha hy evam

abhäve—in non-existence; bädariù—Bädari Muni; äha—says; hi—because;

evam—thus.

Bädari Muni says there is none, for thus it is said.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Bädari Muni thinks that the liberated soul has no body. The body and its
paraphernalia are all created by past karma. Because he is free from all past
karma, the liberated soul does not have a body. Why is that? The sütra explains,
"äha hy evam" (thus it is said). The word "hi" here means “because". In
Chändogya Upaniñad (8.12.1) it is said:

na ha vai sa-çarérasya sataù priyäpriyayor apahatir asti. açaréraà väva santaà

priyäpriye na spåçataù

"He who has a body cannot become free of pleasure and pain. Only one who
has no body is untouched by pleasure and pain."

This means that as long as the body is present it is not possible to be free of
sufferings. That is why the Upaniñad explains:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

asmät çarérät samutthäya

"The soul then leaves the body."

Also, in Çrémad-Bhägavatam it is said:

dehendriyäsu-hénänäà
vaikuëöha-pura-väsinäm

"They who live in the spiritual world have neither bodies nor senses."

Sütra 11

äha hy evam jaiminir vikalpämananät

äha—says; hi—because; evam—thus; jaiminiù—Jaimini Muni; vikalpa—

opinion; ämananät—by thought.

Jaimini Muni has that opinion, because it is said thus and because that view is
accepted.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Jaimini Muni thinks the liberated soul has a body. Why is that? The sütra
explains, "vikalpämananät" (because that view is accepted). In the Bhüma-vidyä
passage of the Chändogya Upaniñad (7.26.2) it is said that the liberated soul can
manifest many different bodies simultaneously:

sa ekadhä bhavati dvidhä tridhä bhavati païcadhä saptadhä navadhä caiva punaç
caikädaça småtaù. çataà ca daça caikaç ca sahasräëi ca viàçatiù.

"He becomes one. Then he becomes two. Then three. Then five. Then seven.
Then nine. Then eleven. He becomes one hundred and ten. He becomes one

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

thousand and twenty."

Because the individual spirit soul is atomic in nature, it cannot expand itself to
become many different bodies, so these bodies must be possessions of the atomic
soul. Nor can it be said that this statement of the Upaniñad is not true, for this is in
a passage describing the process of liberation. The body described here must
actually exist, and also it must not have been created by past karmic reactions. This
will be explained later with a quote from the Småti-çästra.

In the next sütra Vyäsadeva gives His opinion.

Sütra 12

dvädaçäha-vad ubhaya-vidhaà bädaräyaëo 'taù

dvädaça—twelve; äha—days; vat—like; ubhaya—both; vidham—kinds;

bädaräyaëaù—Vyäsadeva; ataù—therefore.

Vyäsadeva says it is of both kinds, like the twelve days.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Lord Vyäsadeva thinks that because the liberated soul's •every desire is at
once fulfilled both conditions must be true. This is so because statements
describing both conditions are found in the scriptures. Therefore it should be
accepted that the liberated soul may have a body, and again he may not have a
body. This is like the twelve days. A twelve-day yajïa becomes, by the wish of the
yajamäna, either a satra, which has many yajamänas, or an ahéna, which has many
yajamänas. There is no contradiction in this. In the same way the liberated soul
may, by his own wish, either have a body or not have a body. That is the meaning.
The truth is that they who by the power of transcendental knowledge have broken
the bonds of material existence are in a situation where all their desires are at once
fulfilled. Those amongst them who desire to have a body can at once have any
body they wish. This is described in Chändogya Upaniñad (7.26.2). They who do
have no desire to have a body do not have a body. This is described in Chändogya
Upaniñad (8.12.1). They who desire always to employ a spiritual body in the
service of the Supreme Lord eternally manifest such a body by their spiritual
powers. That is how it should be understood. In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad
(2.4.14) it is said:

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

yatra tv asya sarvam ätmaiväbhüt tat kena kaà paçyet

"Everything there is spiritual. What is the nature of the seer? What is the nature
of the seen?"

In the Mädhyandina-çruti it is said:

sa vä eña brahma-niñöha idaà çaréraà martyam atisåjya brahmäbhisampadya

brahmaëä paçyati brahmaëä çåëoti brahmaëaivedaà sarvam anubhavati

"Devoted to the Supreme Lord, the individual soul leaves his mortal body and
meets the Lord. By the Lord's grace he sees. By the Lord's grace he hears. By the
Lord's grace he perceives everything."

In the Småti-çästra it is said:

vasanti yatra puruñäù

sarve vaikuëöha-mürtayaù

"Everyone there has a spiritual form like that of the Supreme Personality of
Godhead."

The spiritual desire of the soul is cultivated from the very beginning of his
devotional activities. This is described in the "yathä kratuù" maxim and also in the
following words of the Småti-çästra:

gacchämi viñëu-pädäbhyäà
viñëu-dåñöyänudarçanam

"I walk with Lord Viñëu's feet. I see with Lord Viñëu's eyes."
In the Småti-çästra it is again said:

muktasyaitad bhaviñyati

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "This is the nature of the liberated soul."

Adhikaraëa 8
The Bliss of the Liberated Souls

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be shown the truth that through his spiritual body the liberated soul
enjoys spiritual pleasures. That he enjoys spiritual pleasures is affirmed by the
following words of Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.1.1):

so 'çnute sarvän kämän

"He enjoys all pleasures."

Now the author of the sütras begins His explanation that this is so in both
situations (possessing or not possessing a body).

Saàçaya (doubt): Is it possible for the liberated soul to enjoy pleasures, or is it

not possible?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because he has neither body nor senses, the
liberated soul cannot enjoy any pleasures. If a yogé somehow has the power to
enjoy pleasures, still he will not do so because, being filled with spiritual bliss, he
has no thirst for them.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 13

tanv-abhäve sandhya-vad upapatteù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 tanu—of a body; abhäve—in the absence; sandhya—a dream; vat—like;
upapatteù—because of reasonableness.

In the absence of a body it is like a dream, for that is reasonable.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Even in the absence of a body pleasure is still possible. The sütra explains, "It is
like a dream, for that is reasonable." The word "sandhya" here means “dream".
As in a dream one can enjoy pleasures without a body, so the liberated soul can
also enjoy pleasures without a body. Thus it is said.

Of course, when a body is present the pleasure is much greater. The author of
the sütras explains this in the following words.

Sütra 14

bhäve jägrad-vat

bhäve—in existence; jägrat—waking; vat—like.

In the existence it is like being awake.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "bhäve" here means, "when there is a body". When there is a body
the pleasure is like that in the waking state. Our opponent claims that the
liberated soul does not desire to enjoy the delicious tastes and other pleasures
mercifully offered to him by the Supreme Lord. However, the truth is that the
liberated soul, desiring to render devotional service, certainly does desire to enjoy
the pleasures that the Lord in His kindness offers. He does this out of love for the
Lord. In this way it should be understood.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Adhikaraëa 9
The Liberated Soul Is Full of Transcendental Knowledge

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be shown the truth that the liberated soul has all transcendental
knowledge. In the Chändogya Upaniñad (7.26.2) it is said:

na paçyo måtyuà paçyati na rogaà nota-duùkhitaà sarvaà hi paçyaù paçyati

sarvam äpnoti sarvaçaù

"The liberated soul does not see death. He does not see disease. He does not
see suffering. Still, he sees everything. He attains everything everywhere."

In this way it is said that the liberated soul has knowledge of everything.

Saàçaya (doubt): Is this correct, or not?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): In the Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.3.21) it

is said:

präjïenätmanä. . .

"Embraced by the all-knowing Supreme Personality of Godhead, the individual

soul is oblivious to all that is within and all that is without."

Therefore it is certainly not correct (to say that the individual spirit soul is all-
knowing).

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 15

pradépa-vad äveças tathä hi darçayati

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 pradépa—a lamp; vat—like; äveçaù—entrance; tathä—so; hi—because;
darçayati—reveals.

Its entrance is like a lamp, furthermore it reveals.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

As with its rays of light a lamp enters many places, so the with his expansion of
knowledge the liberated soul enters many things to be known. Furthermore (tathä
hi), the words of Çvetäçvatara Upaniñad (4.18) give the following revelation
•(darçayati):

prajïä ca tasmät prasåtä puräëé

"By the Supreme Lord's mercy the soul's ancient knowledge is revived."

This verse should be interpreted, "By the Supreme Lord's mercy the soul's
ancient knowledge is revived."

Here someone may object: It is not correct to say that the liberated soul is all-
knowing. Båhad-äraëyaka Upanisad (4.3.21) explains that the liberated soul is
oblivious to everything and thus does not know anything at all.

If this is said, the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 16

sväpyaya-sampattyor anyataräpekñyäm äviñkåtaà hi

sväpyaya—deep sleep; sampattyoù—of the moment of death; anyatara—either;

apekñyäm—in relation to; äviñkåtam—manifested; hi—because.

It refers either to dreamless sleep or to the death-swoon, for thus is it revealed.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

These words of Båhad-äraëyaka Upaniñad (4.3.21) do not show that the

liberated soul is oblivious and has no knowledge at all. Rather, these words refer
either to dreamless sleep or to the death-swoon, (sväpyaya-sampattyor
anyataräpekñyäm). The word "sväpyaya" here means, "dreamless sleep", and the
word "sampatti" here means, "the moment of leaving the body". In the Chändogya
Upaniñad (6.8.1) sleep is defined in these words:

svam apéto bhavati tasmäd enaà svapététy äcakñate

"When one indeed (api) enters (ita) himself (sva), then it is said that he sleeps
(svapiti)."

In the Chändogya Upaniñad (6.8.6) the time of death is described in these

words:

väì manasi sampadyate

"At the time of death the voice enters the mind."

In this way the Çruti-çästra describes the state of consciousness during

dreamless sleep and the moment of death. However, the Çruti-çästra also explains
that in the liberated state the •soul is all-knowing.
The condition of dreamless sleep is described in these words of the Chändogya
Upaniñad (8.11.1):

nähaà khalv ayam evaà sampraty ätmänaà jänäty ayam aham asméti no evemäni
bhütäni vinäçam iväpéto bhavati. näham atra bhogyaà paçyämi.

"Sound asleep, he does not even know who he is. He cannot say: I am he. His
knowledge of everything perishes. I do not see this as a good or pleasant state of
being."

On the other hand, the liberated soul is described in these words of the
Chändogya Upaniñad (8.12.5):

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

sa vä eña etena divyena cakñuñä manasy etän kämän paçyan ramate ya ete
brahmaloke

"Seeing with divine eyes the pleasures in the spiritual world, he rejoices in his
heart."

The death-swoon, however, is described in these words:

etebhyo bhütebhyaù samutthäya täny evänuvinaçyati

"Rising, at the moment of death, from the elements of the material body, the
soul suddenly loses all consciousness.

Here the word "vinaçyati" means, "he cannot see anything". In this way it is
proved that the liberated soul is all-knowing.

Adhikaraëa 10
The Liberated Soul Has Not the Power to Create the World

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

In Chändogya Upaniñad (8.1.6 and 8.2.1) it is said:

atha ya iha ätmänam anuvidya vrajanty etäàç ca satyän kämäàs teñäà sarveñu
lokeñu käma-cäro bhavati. sa yadi pitåloka-kämo bhavati.

"He who knows the truth of the Supreme Personality of Godhead and places
his desires in eternal spiritual happinesses may go, when he leaves this body, to any
world he wishes. If he desires to create a Pitåloka planet, then that planet is at once
created."

Saàçaya (doubt): Does the liberated soul have the power to create a material
universe, or does he not?

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): Because he is equal to the Supreme Lord,
and also because all his desires are at once fulfilled, the liberated soul must also
have this power.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 17

jagad-vyäpära-varjyaà prakaraëäd asannihitatvät

jagat—of the material universe; vyäpära—creation; varjyam—except for;

prakaraëät—because of the context; asannihitatvät—because of the absence of
nearness.

Except for creating the universe, because of the context and because he is not
near to it.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The creative power of the liberated soul is described in Chändogya Upaniñad

(8.2.1). However, the liberated soul has not the power to create a material
universe. Only the Supreme Personality of Godhead has the power to create,
maintain, and destroy the material universes. This is described in Taittiréya
Upaniñad (3.1.1). How is this known? The sütra explains, “prakaraëäd
asannihitatvät" (because of the context and because he is not near to it). From the
context it is seen that the Supreme Personality of Godhead is the topic discussed in
this passage of Taittiréya Upaniñad (3.1.1). Neither by a great struggle nor by
chanting mantras can the individual spirit soul •obtain this kind of power. This is
corroborated by the explanation given in Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.6.1). Also, the
liberated soul is not the subject of discussion in any passage near to
(asannihitatvät) these words of Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.6.1). If it were otherwise
(and the liberated souls had the power to create the material universe), then the
author of the sütras would not have defined the the Supreme Personality of
Godhead in these words (Vedänta-sütra 1.1.2):

janmädy asya yataù

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "That Brahman (the Supreme Spirit) is He from whom the creation,
sustenance, and destruction of the manifested universe arises."*

Also, if the liberated souls had the power to create universes, there would be
many creators and from that there would arise a great chaos and calamity.
Therefore the liberated souls have not the power to create material universes.

Here someone may object: In Taittiréya Upaniñad 1.5.3) it is said:

sarve 'smai devä balim ävahanti

"All the demigods bring offerings to him."

Also, in Chändogya Upaniñad (7.25.2) it is said:

sa svaräò bhavati tasya sarveñu lokeñu käma-cäro bhavati

"He is independent. He can go to any world."

In this way it is seen that because he is worshiped by all the demigods, and
because he has all extraordinary powers, the liberated soul can certainly create
material universes.

If this is said, then the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 18

pratyakñopadeçän neti cen nädhikärika-maëòalasyokteù

pratyakña—direct; upadeçät—because of the teaching; na—not; iti—thus; cet—

if; na—not; adhikärika—of great leaders; maëòalasya—of the circle; ukteù—from
the statement.

Someone may say: "No. It is not so. Because there is a direct teaching," If this is
said, I reply: "No. What you say is not true. Because those texts describe great

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

leaders."

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Here someone may say, "It is not correct to say that •the liberated souls have
no power to create material universes, for many passages of the Çruti-çästra
directly describe that power." If this is said, then the author of the sütra replies,
"No. It is not so." Why not? The sütra explains, “adhikärika-maëòalasyokteù"
(Because those texts describe great leaders). These texts explain how, by the
mercy of the Supreme Lord, the liberated soul can travel to the planets of the great
demigods, such as that of the four-faced Brahmä, and enjoy many pleasures there.
In this way it is said that the great liberated souls, such as Närada Muni and the
four Kumäras can travel to the planets of the demigods, and when the do the
demigods there honor them with great respect.
These passages of the Upaniñad mean in truth that by the Supreme Lord's
mercy the liberated souls can travel to many different worlds and feel pleasure by
seeing the Lord's glories and opulences there. These passages should not be
wrongly interpreted to mean that the individual spirit soul has the power to create
material universes.

Here someone may object: If the liberated soul is thus an enjoyer of various
material pleasures, then he is not different from a conditioned soul, for all material
pleasures must come to an end.

If this is said, then the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 19

vikärävarti ca tathä hi sthitim äha

vikära—the changes of material existence; a—not; varti—existing; ca—and;

tathä—so; hi—because; sthitim—situation; äha—says.

Furthermore it is changeless, for it describes that condition.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 The word "vikära" here refers to the six kinds of transformation, beginning with
birth, that are present in the material world. These transformations do not effect
the liberated soul. Neither do these transformations affect the supremely pure
Personality of Godhead, his transcendental abode, or anything else that has
transcendental qualities like those of the Supreme Lord. Aware of what is the
truth about all these worlds, the liberated soul may observe them but he does not
really reside in them. The word "hi" in this sütra means, “because". The true
nature of the liberated soul is described (sthitim äha) in the following words of
Kaöha Upaniñad (2.2.1):

puram ekädaça-dväram
ajasyävakra-cetasaù
anuñöhäya na çocati
vimuktaç ca vimucyate

"Although he resides in the city of eleven gates, the city of the unborn and
pure-hearted Supreme, he does not lament. He is free. He is liberated."

Although his spiritual form seems to be covered, the soul enlightened with
transcendental knowledge is liberated in truth. Although he seems to reside in the
world of the three modes, he is liberated. That is the meaning of this verse. In
these two ways he is liberated. He has directly attained the goal of life. The
covering of material life is like a garland of clouds. It covers the eyes of the
conditioned souls, but it does not cover the Supreme Personality of Godhead. In
Çruti-çästra it is said:

vilajjamänayä yasya
sthätum ékñä-pathe 'muyä
vimohita vikantthante
mamäham iti durdhiyaù

"The illusory energy of the Lord cannot take precedence, being ashamed of her
position. But those who are bewildered by her always talk nonsense, being
absorbed in thoughts of `It is I' and `It is mine'."*

Therefore the clouds (of material illusion) can never really cover the sun (of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead).

Here someone may object: The goal of life is to make manifest the true nature
of the individual spirit soul, who is blissful, whose desires are all at once fulfilled,
and who has a host of transcendental virtues. That is enough. Why should one

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

labor to understand the Supreme Lord also?

If this is said, the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 20

darçayataç caivaà pratyakñänumäne

darçayataù—they show; ca—also; evam—thus; pratyakña—direct perception;

anumäne—and logic.

Direct perception and logic both reveal it.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Although he has the transcendental qualities already described, because he is

atomic in size the liberated soul does not, by himself, have bliss that is limitless. It
is when he associates with the Supreme Personality of Godhead that the liberated
soul attains limitless bliss. This is described in Taittiréya Upaniñad (2.7):

rasaà hy eväyaà labdhvänandé-bhavati

"When one understands the Personality of Godhead, the reservoir of pleasure,

Kåñëa, he actually becomes transcendentally blissful."*

Also, in the Bhagavad-gétä (14.27), Lord Kåñëa explains:

brahmaëo hi pratiñöhäham
amåtasyävyayasya ca
çäçvatasya ca dharmasya
sukhasyasikäntikasya ca

"And I am the basis of the impersonal Brahman, which is immortal,

imperishable, and eternal, and is the constitutional position of ultimate
happiness."*

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 This is like a poor man who takes shelter of a rich man and becomes wealthy.

Here someone may object: in the Muëòaka Upaniñad (3.1.3) it is said:

niraïjanaù paramaà sämyam upaiti

"Freed from matter, the liberated soul becomes equal to the Supreme."

The Çruti-çästra thus explains that the liberated soul is equal to the Supreme.
What is the use, then, of even using the word, "the Supreme Lord"? The so-called
atomic nature of the individual soul is only a figure of speech. The truth is that the
individual soul is all-pervading.

If this is said, then the author of the sütras gives the following reply.

Sütra 21

bhoga-mätra-sämya-liìgäc ca

bhoga—enjoyment; mätra—only; sämya—equality; liìgät—by the sign; ca—

also.

Also because of the indication that the equality is only in enjoyment.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

The word "ca" (also) is used here for emphasis. As a frog jumps, so the word
"na" (not) should jump into this sütra from sütra 18. In the Taittiréya Upaniçäd
(2.1.1) it is said:

so 'çnute sarvän kämän saha brahmaëä vipaçcitä

"The liberated soul enjoys all transcendental pleasures in the company of the
all-knowing Supreme Personality of Godhead."

The meaning here is that the Upaniñad's statement that the liberated soul is

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

equal to the Lord applies only to the soul's enjoyment of transcendental happiness.
The liberated soul is not equal in nature to the Supreme Lord. That is the
meaning. This objection was previously refuted in sütra 2.3.19. In this way it is
proved that the equality of the Supreme and the individual spirit soul is in the
matter of enjoyment only, that their natures are different, and that difference is
real.

Adhikaraëa 11
The Liberated Soul Never Returns

Introduction by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

Now will be explained the truth that the liberated soul has the association of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead eternally

Viñaya (the subject to be discussed): All scriptural statements describing the

soul's entrance into the spiritual realm of the Supreme Lord are here the subject of
discussion.

Saàçaya (doubt): Does the liberated soul stay in the spiritual world eternally, or
does he not stay there eternally?

Pürvapakña (the opponent speaks): The spiritual world is a place like

Svargaloka or any other place. As one may fall down from Svargaloka, so one may
also fall down from the spiritual world. Therefore the liberated soul does not
necessarily stay in the spiritual world eternally.

Siddhänta (conclusion): In the following words the author of the sütras gives
His conclusion.

Sütra 22

anävåttiù çabdäd anävåttiù çabdät

an—without; ävåttiù—return; çabdät—because of bthe scriptures.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 No return, because of the scriptures. No return, because of the scriptures.

Purport by Çréla Baladeva Vidyäbhüñaëa

A devotee who faithfully worships and serves the Supreme Lord and then goes
to the Lord's spiritual world, never returns. How is that known? The sütra
explains, "çabdät" (because of the scriptures). In the Chändogya Upaniñad (4.15.6)
it is said:

etena pratipadyamänä imaà mänavam ävartaà nävartante

"They who enter the spiritual world never return to the world of men."

In the Chändogya Upaniñad (4.15.1) it is said:

sa khalv eva vartayan yävad äyuñam brahmalokam abhisampadyate. na ca punar

avartate.

"Leaving this life, he enters the spiritual world. He never returns."

In the Bhagavad-gétä (8.15 and 16) Lord Kåñëa declares:

mäm upetya punar janma

duùkhälayam açäsvatam
näpnuvanti mahätmänaù
samsiddhià paramäà gatäù

"After attaining Me, the great souls, who are yogés in devotion, never return to
this temporary world, which is full of miseries, because they have attained the
highest perfection.*

ä-brahma-bhuvanäl lokäù
punar ävartino 'rjuna
mäm upetya tu kaunteya
punar janma na vidyate

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "From the highest planet in the material world down to the lowest, all are
places of misery wherein repeated birth and death take place. But one who attains
My abode, O son of Kunté, never takes birth again."*

In the Bhagavad-gétä (8.15 and 16) Lord Kåñëa also declares:

Here someone may express the following fear: Lord Hari is all-powerful, the
master of all, perhaps at some point in time He may throw the liberated soul out of
the spiritual world. Or perhaps the liberated soul may at some time voluntarily
leave the spiritual world.

There is no need to fear in this way, for Lord Kåñëa has explained in Bhagavad-
gétä (7.17):

priyo hi jïänino tv artham

ahaà sa ca mama priyaù

"of these, the wise one who is in full knowledge in union with Me through
devotional service is the best. For I am very dear to him, and he is very dear to
Me."*

Lord Kåñëa also declares in Çréma-Bhägavatam (9.4.68):

sädhavo hådayaà mahyaà

sädhünäà hådayaà tv aham

"The pure devotee is always in the core of My heart, and I am always in the
heart of the pure devotee. My devotees do not know anything else but Me, and I
do not know anyone else but them."*

In these words the mutual love of the Lord and His devotee is described.

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (9.4.65) Lord Kåñëa declares:

ye därägara-puträptän
präëän vittam imaà param
hitvä mäà çaraëaà yätäù
kathaà täàs tyaktum utsahe

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

 "Since pure devotees give up their homes, wives, children, relatives, riches, and
even their lives simply to serve Me, without any material improvement in this life
or in the next, how can I give up such devotees at any time?"*

In Çrémad-Bhägavatam (2.8.6) it is also said:

dhautätmä puruñaù kåñëa-

päda-mülaà na muïcati
mukta-sarva-parikleçaù
panthäù sva-çaraëaà yathä

"A pure devotee of the Lord whose heart has once been cleansed by the process
of devotional service never relinquishes the lotus feet of Lord Kåñëa, for they fully
satisfy him, as a traveler is satisfied at home after a troubled journey."*

In this way the scriptures explain that the Supreme Personality of Godhead will
never abandon His devotee and the devotee will always ardently love the Supreme
Personality of Godhead. The Supreme Personality of Godhead is always truthful
and His desires are always at once fulfilled. He is an ocean of love for they who
take shelter of Him. He washes away the ignorance that made His devotees turn
from Him. Once He brings back to Himself His dear devotees, who are His parts
and parcels, the Supreme Personality of Godhead will not again let them go.
In the same way the individual soul, who had been searching for happiness and
who finally has turned from the pathetic, wretched, pale reflection of happiness he
had for many births sought in the material world in many ways, and who now, by
the mercy of the bona-fide spiritual master has understood the truth of the
Supreme Personality of Godhead, of whom he is a part and parcel, who now has
no desire apart from the Supreme Lord, who is now purely engaged in devotional
service to the Supreme Lord, and who has now attained the Supreme Lord, whose
spiritual form is filled with limitless bliss, and who is the merciful friend and
master, will never desire to leave such a Lord. In this way the truth is understood
from the scriptures. This truth is understood only by taking shelter of the
scriptures. The words of the sütra are repeated to indicate the conclusion of the
book.

Epilogue

samuddhåtya yo duùkha-paìkät sva-bhaktän

nayaty acyutaç cit-sukhe dhämni nitye

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners

priyän gäòha-rägät tilärdhaà vimoktuà
na svecchaty asäv eva su-jïair niñevyaù

Let the wise worship and serve Lord Govinda, the infallible Supreme
Personality of Godhead, who lifts his devotees from the mud of material
sufferings, takes them to His eternal and blissful spiritual abode, and out of deep
love for them will not leave them for even half a moment.

çrémad-govinda-pädä-
ravinda-makaranda-lubdha-cetobhiù
govinda-bhäñyam etat
päöhyaà çapatho 'rpito 'nyebhyaù

Let they whose hearts are greedy to taste the honey of the lotus flower that is
glorious Lord Govinda's feet study this Govinda-bhäñya. Let a curse fall on the
non-devotees who try to study it.

vidyä-rüpaà bhüñaëaà me pradäya

khyätià ninye tena yo mäm udäraù
çré-govindaù svapna-nirdiñöa-bhäñyo
rädhä-bandhur bandhuräìgaà sa jéyät

All glories to graceful and handsome Lord Govinda, who is the dear friend of
Çré Rädhä, who kindly gave me the name Vidyäbhüñaëa, and who spoke this
commentary to me in a dream.

Copyright © 2002-2003 by the Respective Owners